Easergy Micom P638: Transformer Differential Protection Device For Ac Railway Applications

Easergy MiCOM P638
Transformer Differential Protection Device for AC Railway

Applications
P638/EN M/R-b5-C
Version P638 -304 -407/408/409 -661
Technical Manual
General Note on the PDF Version of this Technical Manual
All entries in the Table of Contents and all cross-references to other sections,
figures etc. in green letters are hyperlinks, i.e. by a single mouse click on the
reference one can navigate directly to the referenced part of the manual.
In the Adobe Reader (or the Acrobat Pro), one can return back to the previous
view by using the menu point View / Page Navigation / Previous View (keyboard
shortcut: ALT + Left cursor key). (It might be necessary to do this several times,
if the view at the target location has also been changed (e.g. by scrolling or
changing the zoom setting).
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
NOTICE: Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar
with the device before trying to install, operate, or maintain it. The following
special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment
to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or
simplifies a procedure.
The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates that an
electrical hazard exists, which will result in death or serious injury if the
instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to a potential personal injury
hazard. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or
death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
can result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
can result in minor or moderate injury with or without equipment damage.
NOTICE
NOTICE, used without safety alert symbol, indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, can result in equipment damage.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltage will be present in

certain parts of the equipment.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
⚫ Only qualified personnel, trained, authorized and familiar with the device
and all the safety instructions in the general Safety Guide (SFTY/5LM/L11
or later version) and appropriate Chapter 5, Chapter 10, Chapter 11,
Chapter 12 and Chapter 13 of this manual, shall work on installation,
connection, commissioning, maintenance or servicing of this device.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious
injury.
DANGER
⚫ Switch off the auxiliary power supply before any work in the terminal strip
area.
⚫ Switch off all the power supplies in connection to the equipment before
any work in the terminal strip area to isolate the device.
⚫ Do not touch the terminal strip area when equipment is in operation.
⚫ Do not remove or add wires in the terminal strip area when equipment is
in operation.
⚫ Short-circuit the system current transformers before disconnecting wires
to the transformer board (valid only for pin terminals, not required for ring
terminals which have a shortening block).
⚫ A protective conductor (ground/earth) of at least 1.5 mm2 must be
connected to the protective conductor terminal on the power supply board
and on the main relay case.
⚫ Do never remove the protective conductor connection to the device casing
as long as other wires are connected to it.
⚫ Where stranded conductors are used, insulated crimped wire end ferrules
must be employed.
injury.
Note: Regarding the appropriate wiring connections of the equipment refer to the
document Px3x_Grounding_Application_Guide_EN_h.pdf.
WARNING
HAZARD OF UNSAFE OPERATION
⚫ Proper and safe operation of this device depends on appropriate shipping
and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on
careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason only
qualified personnel shall work on or operate this device.
⚫ Any modifications to this device must be in accordance with the manual. If
any other modification is made without the express permission of
Schneider Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the
product unsafe.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in unintended
equipment operation.
The signals MAI N: Bl ocked/faulty and SFMON: War ning (LED) are
permanently assigned to the LEDs labeled OUT OF SERVICE and ALARM and can
be assigned to output relays to indicate the health of the device.
It is recommended that the signals MA IN: Blocke d/faulty and
SFMON : Wa rning ( LED) are communicated to the substation automation
system for alarm purposes, using hardwiring via output relays or the
communication interface.
Changes after going to press
P638
Table of Contents
1 Application and Scope ........................................................................................ 1-1

1.1 Overview .....................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 General Functions ....................................................................................................... 1-7
1.3 Control Functions ........................................................................................................ 1-8
1.4 Global Functions ......................................................................................................... 1-9
1.5 Design .......................................................................................................................1-10
1.6 Configurable Function Keys ...................................................................................... 1-11
1.7 Inputs and Outputs ................................................................................................... 1-12
1.8 Control and Display ...................................................................................................1-13
1.9 Information Interfaces ...............................................................................................1-14
2 Technical Data .................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Conformity .................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 General Data ...............................................................................................................2-2
2.2.1 General Device Data ..................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 Tests ........................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.1 Type Tests ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.4 Environmental Conditions ........................................................................................... 2-8
2.5 Inputs and Outputs ..................................................................................................... 2-9
2.5.1 Measuring Inputs ........................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.5.2 Binary Signal Inputs .....................................................................................................................................2-10
2.5.3 IRIG‑B Interface ........................................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.5.4 Direct Current Input .....................................................................................................................................2-11
2.5.5 Resistance Thermometer ............................................................................................................................ 2-11
2.5.6 Direct Current Output ..................................................................................................................................2-11
2.5.7 Output Relays ..............................................................................................................................................2-12
2.5.8 BCD Measured Data Output ........................................................................................................................ 2-12
2.6 Interfaces .................................................................................................................. 2-13
2.6.1 Local Control Panel ......................................................................................................................................2-13
2.6.2 PC Interface ................................................................................................................................................. 2-13
2.6.3 Serial Communication Interface .................................................................................................................. 2-13
2.6.4 Ethernet Communication Interface ..............................................................................................................2-14
2.6.5 Fiber Optic budget calculations ................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.6.6 IRIG‑B Interface ........................................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.7 Information Output ................................................................................................... 2-17
2.8 Settings – Typical Characteristic Data .......................................................................2-18
2.8.1 Main Function .............................................................................................................................................. 2-18
2.8.2 Differential Protection ..................................................................................................................................2-18
2.8.3 Transverse Differential Protection ............................................................................................................... 2-18
2.8.4 Distance Protection ..................................................................................................................................... 2-18
2.8.5 Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection ............................................................................. 2-18
2.8.6 Time-Voltage Protection .............................................................................................................................. 2-19
2.9 Deviations ................................................................................................................. 2-20
2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values ................................................................................................................ 2-20
2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages ................................................................................................................... 2-22
2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition .................................................................................................... 2-24
2.10 Resolution of the Fault Data Acquisition ................................................................... 2-25
2.10.1 Time Resolution ...........................................................................................................................................2-25
2.10.2 Phase Currents System ............................................................................................................................... 2-25
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 1

P638 Table of Contents
2.10.3 Voltage ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-25

2.11 Recording Functions ................................................................................................. 2-26
2.11.1 Organization of the Recording Memories .................................................................................................... 2-26
2.12 Power Supply ............................................................................................................ 2-28
2.13 Current Transformer Specifications .......................................................................... 2-29
2.13.1 Symbols .......................................................................................................................................................2-29
2.13.2 General Equations ....................................................................................................................................... 2-30
2.13.3 Distance Protection ..................................................................................................................................... 2-31
3 Operation ............................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Modular Structure ....................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication ............................................................................. 3-3
3.3 Cyber Security (Function Group CS) ............................................................................3-4
3.3.1 Users, Roles and Rights for Easergy MiCOM P30 ........................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.2 Cyber Security Types and Communication Protocols (Based on Order Number) ...........................................3-6
3.3.3 Cyber Security Password Policy Recommendation ........................................................................................ 3-8
3.4 Configuration of the Local Control Panel (Function Group LOC) ..................................3-9
3.4.1 Bay Panel .....................................................................................................................................................3-10
3.4.2 Signal Panel .................................................................................................................................................3-13
3.4.3 Operation Panel ...........................................................................................................................................3-14
3.4.4 Fault Panel ...................................................................................................................................................3-15
3.4.5 Overload Panel ............................................................................................................................................ 3-16
3.4.6 Selection of the Control Point ...................................................................................................................... 3-17
3.4.7 Configurable Clear Key ................................................................................................................................ 3-17
3.5 Communication Interfaces ........................................................................................ 3-18
3.5.1 PC Interface (Function Group PC) ................................................................................................................ 3-19
3.5.2 Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1) ................................................................................ 3-20
3.5.3 Communication Interface 2 (Function Group COMM2) ................................................................................ 3-29
3.5.4 Communication Interface Ethernet (Function Groups IEC and GOOSE) ....................................................... 3-32
3.6 IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB) ...............................................3-54
3.7 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY) ................................................ 3-55
3.8 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP) ......... 3-57
3.9 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI) .......................................................... 3-59
3.9.1 Direct Current Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y ...................................................................................... 3-60
3.9.2 Connecting a Resistance Thermometer to the “PT 100 Analog Input” on the Analog (I/O) Module Y .......... 3-63
3.10 Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays (Function Group
OUTP) ........................................................................................................................3-65
3.11 Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO) ......................................................3-68
3.11.1 General Settings ..........................................................................................................................................3-68
3.11.2 BCD Measured Data Output ........................................................................................................................ 3-70
3.11.3 Analog Measured Data Output .................................................................................................................... 3-72
3.11.4 Output of “External” Measured Data ........................................................................................................... 3-78
3.12 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators (Function Group LED) ...... 3-79
3.12.1 Configuring the LED Indicators .................................................................................................................... 3-79
3.12.2 Layout of the LED Indicators ........................................................................................................................3-79
3.12.3 Operating Mode of the LED Indicators ......................................................................................................... 3-81
3.13 Main Functions of the P638 (Function Group MAIN) .................................................. 3-84
3.13.1 Conditioning of the Measured Variables ...................................................................................................... 3-84
3.13.2 Operating Data Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 3-86
3.13.3 Configuring and Enabling the Device Functions .......................................................................................... 3-92
3.13.4 Measurement of Frequency ......................................................................................................................... 3-94
3.13.5 Function Blocks ........................................................................................................................................... 3-95
2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Table of Contents P638
3.13.6 Multiple Blocking ......................................................................................................................................... 3-96

3.13.7 Blocked/Faulty ............................................................................................................................................. 3-96
3.13.8 Coupling between Control and Protection for the CB Closed Signal ............................................................ 3-97
3.13.9 Close Command .......................................................................................................................................... 3-98
3.13.10 Multiple Signaling ........................................................................................................................................ 3-99
3.13.11 Fault Direction Signal .................................................................................................................................. 3-99
3.13.12 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic ........................................................................................................... 3-101
3.13.13 CB Trip Signal ............................................................................................................................................ 3-108
3.13.14 Communication Error .................................................................................................................................3-109
3.13.15 Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization .................................................................................................. 3-109
3.13.16 Resetting Actions .......................................................................................................................................3-112
3.13.17 Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical Communications Channels .......................................... 3-114
3.13.18 Test Mode ..................................................................................................................................................3-115
3.14 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS) ................................................. 3-116
3.15 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON) ................................................................3-118
3.15.1 Tests During Start-up ................................................................................................................................ 3-118
3.15.2 Cyclic Tests ................................................................................................................................................3-118
3.15.3 Signals .......................................................................................................................................................3-118
3.15.4 Device Response ....................................................................................................................................... 3-119
3.15.5 Monitoring Signal Memory .........................................................................................................................3-120
3.15.6 Monitoring Signal Memory Time Tag ......................................................................................................... 3-120
3.16 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC) ............................................... 3-121
3.17 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC) ............................................ 3-122
3.18 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA) ............................................... 3-123
3.18.1 Overload Duration ..................................................................................................................................... 3-123
3.18.2 Acquiring Measured Overload Data from the Thermal Overload Protection .............................................. 3-124
3.19 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC) ..........................................................3-125
3.19.1 Start of Overload Recording ...................................................................................................................... 3-125
3.19.2 Counting Overload Events ......................................................................................................................... 3-125
3.19.3 Time Tagging .............................................................................................................................................3-125
3.19.4 Overload Logging ...................................................................................................................................... 3-126
3.20 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA) ...................................................... 3-127
3.20.1 Running Time and Fault Duration .............................................................................................................. 3-127
3.20.2 Fault Data Acquisition Time .......................................................................................................................3-129
3.20.3 Acquisition of Fault Data (Short Circuit Data) ............................................................................................ 3-130
3.20.4 Fault Data Reset ........................................................................................................................................3-132
3.21 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC) ................................................................ 3-133
3.21.1 Start of Fault Recording .............................................................................................................................3-133
3.21.2 Fault Counting ........................................................................................................................................... 3-133
3.21.3 Time Tagging .............................................................................................................................................3-134
3.21.4 Fault Recordings ........................................................................................................................................3-135
3.21.5 Fault Value Recording ............................................................................................................................... 3-136
3.22 Differential Protection (Function Group DIFF) ......................................................... 3-137
3.22.1 Enabling or Disabling Differential Protection ............................................................................................. 3-137
3.22.2 Amplitude Matching ...................................................................................................................................3-138
3.22.3 Vector Group Matching ..............................................................................................................................3-140
3.22.4 Zero-sequence Current Filtering ................................................................................................................3-140
3.22.5 Tripping Characteristics .............................................................................................................................3-141
3.22.6 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint) .................................................................................................. 3-144
3.23 Transverse Differential Protection (Function Groups DIF_a and DIF_b) ................... 3-146
3.23.1 Enabling or Disabling Transverse Differential Protection ...........................................................................3-146
3.24 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group DTOC1 and DTOC2) ...........3-149
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3

3.24.1 Enabling or Disabling DTOC Protection ......................................................................................................3-149

3.24.2 Selecting the Measured Variables ............................................................................................................. 3-149
3.24.3 Inrush Restraint ......................................................................................................................................... 3-150
3.24.4 Definite-time Overcurrent Protection 1 (Including Short-circuit Direction Determination) ........................ 3-151
3.24.5 Load Flow Direction ................................................................................................................................... 3-154
3.24.6 Definite-time Overcurrent Protection 2 ..................................................................................................... 3-156
3.25 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Residual Current System (Function Group
DTOCN) ................................................................................................................... 3-158
3.25.1 Enabling or Disabling DTOCN Protection ................................................................................................... 3-158
3.25.2 Starting and Tripping .................................................................................................................................3-158
3.26 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group IDMT) ................................. 3-160
3.26.1 Disabling and Enabling IDMT Protection .................................................................................................... 3-160
3.26.2 Time-Dependent Characteristics ............................................................................................................... 3-161
3.26.4 Inrush Restraint ......................................................................................................................................... 3-165
3.26.5 Determining Trip Time ...............................................................................................................................3-166
3.26.6 Direction Measurement ............................................................................................................................. 3-167
3.26.7 Load Flow Direction ................................................................................................................................... 3-169
3.26.8 Holding Time ............................................................................................................................................. 3-172
3.27 Distance Protection Z<t (Function Group DIST) ...................................................... 3-173
3.27.1 Enable/Disable the Distance Protection .....................................................................................................3-173
3.27.2 Distance Protection Blocking ..................................................................................................................... 3-173
3.27.3 Base Point Release for Impedance and Direction Determination .............................................................. 3-174
3.27.4 Inrush Stabilization .................................................................................................................................... 3-175
3.27.5 Distance and Directional Measurement .....................................................................................................3-176
3.27.6 Impedance-Time Characteristics ............................................................................................................... 3-179
3.28 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Group MCMON) ......................................... 3-181
3.28.1 Voltage Monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 3-182
3.28.2 Multiple signaling of the monitoring functions ...........................................................................................3-182
3.29 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM) .......................................... 3-184
3.29.1 Readiness of Thermal Overload Protection ................................................................................................3-184
3.29.2 Operating Modes ....................................................................................................................................... 3-184
3.29.3 Coolant Temperature Effect ...................................................................................................................... 3-185
3.29.4 Minimum Coolant Temperature ................................................................................................................. 3-185
3.29.5 Thermal Overload Protection Operation without Coolant Temperature (Ambient) Acquisition ..................3-186
3.29.6 Relative Replica .........................................................................................................................................3-186
3.29.7 Absolute Replica ........................................................................................................................................3-187
3.29.9 Warning Signal .......................................................................................................................................... 3-188
3.29.10 Trip ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-189
3.29.11 Cooling ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-190
3.29.12 Resetting ................................................................................................................................................... 3-190
3.30 Under and Overvoltage Protection (Function Group V<>) ......................................3-191
3.30.1 Disabling and Enabling V<> Protection .....................................................................................................3-191
3.30.2 Voltage Monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 3-191
3.31 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>) ........................................ 3-194
3.31.1 Disabling or Enabling Over‑/Underfrequency Protection ............................................................................3-194
3.31.2 Operating Modes of Over-/Underfrequency Protection .............................................................................. 3-194
3.31.3 Frequency Monitoring ................................................................................................................................3-195
3.31.4 Frequency Monitoring Combined with Differential Frequency Gradient Monitoring (df/dt) ........................3-195
3.31.5 Frequency Monitoring Combined with Mean Frequency Gradient Monitoring (Δf/Δt) ................................ 3-195
3.31.6 fmin/fmax Measurement ...............................................................................................................................3-198
3.32 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Groups CBF_1 and CBF_2) ..................3-199
3.32.1 Disabling and Enabling Circuit Breaker Failure Protection .........................................................................3-199
4 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3.32.2 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection ..............................................................................................................3-199

3.33 Circuit Breaker Monitoring (Function Groups CBM_1 and CBM_2) ...........................3-203
3.33.1 Disabling and Enabling Circuit Breaker Monitoring ....................................................................................3-203
3.33.2 Variants ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-203
3.33.3 CB Wear Characteristic ..............................................................................................................................3-204
3.33.4 Calculating the CB Wear State .................................................................................................................. 3-205
3.33.6 Operating Modes ....................................................................................................................................... 3-206
3.33.7 Cycle for Circuit Breaker Monitoring ..........................................................................................................3-206
3.33.8 Pole-selective Measured Values and Counter Values ................................................................................ 3-208
3.33.9 Monitoring the Number of CB Operations ..................................................................................................3-210
3.33.10 Monitoring Ruptured Currents ................................................................................................................... 3-211
3.33.11 Blocking Circuit Breaker Monitoring .......................................................................................................... 3-212
3.33.12 Resetting Measured Values ....................................................................................................................... 3-212
3.33.13 Setting Measured Values ........................................................................................................................... 3-212
3.34 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT) ....................................................... 3-213
3.34.1 Enable/Disable the Limit Value Monitoring Function ................................................................................. 3-213
3.34.2 Monitoring Measured Values ..................................................................................................................... 3-213
3.34.3 Monitoring Transformer Ends a and b Currents ......................................................................................... 3-214
3.34.4 Monitoring Residual Current ...................................................................................................................... 3-215
3.34.5 Monitoring Voltage .................................................................................................................................... 3-216
3.34.6 Monitoring Frequency ................................................................................................................................3-217
3.34.7 Monitoring the Linearized Measured DC Values ........................................................................................ 3-218
3.34.8 Monitoring the Measured “PT 100” Temperature Value ............................................................................ 3-219
3.35 Programmable Logic (Function Groups LOGIC and LOG_2) ..................................... 3-220
3.36 TIMER (Function Group TIMER) ............................................................................... 3-228
3.37 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units (Function Groups DEV01 to DEV10) ... 3-229
3.37.1 Bay Type Selection .................................................................................................................................... 3-229
3.37.2 Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the Control Functions ................................................................. 3-231
3.37.3 Designation of External Devices ................................................................................................................3-233
3.37.4 Defining a Bay Panel Type .........................................................................................................................3-233
3.37.5 Processing Status Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear Units ....................................................... 3-235
3.37.6 Functional Sequence for Controllable Switchgear Units ............................................................................ 3-236
3.37.7 Direct Motor Control .................................................................................................................................. 3-248
3.38 Interlocking Logic (Function Group ILOCK) ..............................................................3-253
3.38.1 IEC 61850 Reporting ..................................................................................................................................3-254
3.39 Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1) ....................................................3-256
3.40 Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1) ............................................................ 3-257
3.40.1 Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control ....................................................................................................3-259
3.41 Binary Counts (Function Group COUNT) ..................................................................3-263
3.41.1 Enable/Disable the Counting Function .......................................................................................................3-263
3.41.2 Debouncing ............................................................................................................................................... 3-263
3.41.3 Counting Function ..................................................................................................................................... 3-263
3.41.4 Transmitting the Counter Values via Communications Interface ...............................................................3-263
3.41.5 Counter Values Reset ................................................................................................................................ 3-264
4 Design .................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Designs ....................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Dimensional Drawings ................................................................................................ 4-4
4.2.1 Dimensional Drawings for the 40 TE Case .....................................................................................................4-4
4.2.2 Dimensional Drawings for the 84 TE Case .....................................................................................................4-5
4.3 Hardware Modules ...................................................................................................... 4-7
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 5

5 Installation and Connection ................................................................................ 5-1

5.1 Unpacking and Packing ...............................................................................................5-4
5.2 Checking Nominal Data and Design Type ................................................................... 5-5
5.3 Location Requirements ............................................................................................... 5-6
5.3.1 Environmental Conditions ..............................................................................................................................5-6
5.3.2 Mechanical Conditions ...................................................................................................................................5-6
5.3.3 Electrical Conditions for Auxiliary Voltage of the Power Supply .................................................................... 5-6
5.3.4 Electromagnetic Conditions ...........................................................................................................................5-6
5.4 Installation .................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.5 Protective and Operational Grounding ......................................................................5-14
5.6 Connection ................................................................................................................5-16
5.6.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits .............................................................................................. 5-16
5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG‑B Interface .................................................................................................................. 5-22
5.6.3 Connecting the Communication Interfaces ..................................................................................................5-22
5.7 Location and Connection Diagrams .......................................................................... 5-27
5.7.1 Location Diagrams P638‑407/408/409 ........................................................................................................ 5-27
5.7.2 Terminal Connection Diagrams P638‑407/408/409 ..................................................................................... 5-28
6 Local Control (HMI) ............................................................................................. 6-1

6.1 Local Control Panel (HMI) ............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 Ordering options ............................................................................................................................................6-1
6.2 Display and Keypad .................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1 Text Display ...................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2.2 Graphic Display ............................................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.3 Display Illumination ....................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.4 Contrast of the Display .................................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.5 Short Description of Keys .............................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.3 Display Levels ............................................................................................................. 6-7
6.4 Availability of the Bay Panel ....................................................................................... 6-8
6.5 Display Panels on the Text Display ............................................................................. 6-9
6.6 Display Panels on the Graphic Display ......................................................................6-10
6.7 Menu Tree and Data Points ....................................................................................... 6-11
6.8 List Data Points ......................................................................................................... 6-12
6.9 Configurable Function Keys ...................................................................................... 6-13
6.9.1 Configuration of the Function Keys F1 to Fx ................................................................................................ 6-13
6.9.2 Function Keys F1 to Fx as Control Keys ....................................................................................................... 6-15
6.10 Changing between Display Levels ............................................................................ 6-16
6.10.1 Note Concerning the Step-by-Step Descriptions ..........................................................................................6-16
6.10.2 Changing Between Display Levels (HMI with Text Display) ......................................................................... 6-16
6.10.3 Changing Between Display Levels (HMI with Graphic Display) ....................................................................6-17
6.11 How to use Cyber Security Features ......................................................................... 6-18
6.11.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.12 Control at Panel Level ............................................................................................... 6-21
6.12.1 Control at Panel Level (HMI with Text Display) ............................................................................................ 6-21
6.12.2 Control at Panel Level (HMI with Graphic Display) .......................................................................................6-24
6.13 Control at the Menu Tree Level .................................................................................6-37
6.13.1 Navigation in the Menu Tree ....................................................................................................................... 6-37
6.13.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode .............................................................................. 6-38
6.13.3 Change-Enabling Function ...........................................................................................................................6-39
6.13.4 Changing Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 6-42
6 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.13.5 List Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 6-45

6.13.6 Memory Readout ......................................................................................................................................... 6-48
6.13.7 Resetting ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-51
6.13.8 Password-Protected Control Actions ............................................................................................................ 6-53
6.13.9 Changing the Password ............................................................................................................................... 6-54
7 Settings ...............................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Paramete rs .............................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1 D e v i c e I d e n t i f i c a t i o n ............................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.1.2 C o n f i g u r a t i o n P a r a m e t e r s .................................................................................................................. 7-13
7.1.3 F u n c t i o n P a r a m e t e r s .......................................................................................................................... 7-103
8 Information and Control Functions ......................................................................8-1

8.1 Operat ion ................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.1 C y c l i c V a l u e s ............................................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.2 C o n t r o l a n d T e s t i n g ............................................................................................................................8-158
8.1.3 O p e r a t i n g D a t a R e c o r d i n g ................................................................................................................8-169
8.2 Ev ent s ................................................................................................................... 8-171
8.2.1 E v e n t C o u n t e r s .................................................................................................................................... 8-171
8.2.2 M e a s u r e d E v e n t D a t a .........................................................................................................................8-177
8.2.3 E v e n t R e c o r d i n g .................................................................................................................................. 8-183
9 IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator .............................................................9-1

9.1 Manage IED .................................................................................................................9-2
9.2 IED Details .................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.3 Communications ......................................................................................................... 9-4
9.4 SNTP ........................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.4.1 General Config ...............................................................................................................................................9-7
9.4.2 External Server 1 ...........................................................................................................................................9-7
9.4.3 External Server 2 ...........................................................................................................................................9-7
9.5 Dataset Definitions ..................................................................................................... 9-8
9.6 GOOSE Publishing ....................................................................................................... 9-9
9.6.1 System/LLN0 ................................................................................................................................................. 9-9
9.7 GOOSE Subscribing ...................................................................................................9-11
9.7.1 Mapped Inputs .............................................................................................................................................9-11
9.8 Report Control Blocks ............................................................................................... 9-14
9.8.1 System/LLN0 ............................................................................................................................................... 9-14
9.9 Controls .....................................................................................................................9-15
9.9.1 Control Objects ............................................................................................................................................9-15
9.9.2 Uniqueness of Control ................................................................................................................................. 9-15
9.10 Measurements .......................................................................................................... 9-17
9.11 Configurable Data Attributes .................................................................................... 9-18
9.11.1 System/LLN0 ............................................................................................................................................... 9-18
10 Commissioning ................................................................................................. 10-1

10.1 Safety Instructions .................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Commissioning Tests ................................................................................................ 10-5
10.2.1 Preparation ..................................................................................................................................................10-5
10.2.2 Cyber Security Commission .........................................................................................................................10-7
10.2.3 Testing .........................................................................................................................................................10-9
10.2.4 Checking the Binary Signal Inputs ............................................................................................................... 10-9
10.2.5 Checking the Output Relays ...................................................................................................................... 10-10
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7

10.2.6 Checking the Communications Interfaces Signals ..................................................................................... 10-10

10.2.7 Checking the Transformer Connections .....................................................................................................10-10
10.2.8 Checking the Protection Function ..............................................................................................................10-10
10.2.9 Checking Control Functions ....................................................................................................................... 10-14
10.2.10 Completing Commissioning ....................................................................................................................... 10-16
11 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 11-1
12 Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 12-1

12.1 Maintenance Procedures in the Power Supply Area .................................................. 12-2
12.2 Routine Functional Testing ....................................................................................... 12-4
12.3 Analog Input Circuits .................................................................................................12-5
12.4 Binary Opto Inputs .................................................................................................... 12-6
12.5 Binary Outputs .......................................................................................................... 12-7
12.6 Communication Interfaces ........................................................................................ 12-8
13 Storage ............................................................................................................. 13-1
14 Accessories and Spare Parts ............................................................................. 14-1
15 Order Information ............................................................................................. 15-1
A1 Function Groups ............................................................................................... A1-1
A2 Internal Signals .................................................................................................A2-1
A3 Glossary ............................................................................................................A3-1
Modules ...................................................................................................................................... A3-1
Symbols ...................................................................................................................................... A3-1
Examples of Signal Names ......................................................................................................... A3-7
Symbols Used ............................................................................................................................. A3-8
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces ....................................................................................... A4-1

A4.1 Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard)
.................................................................................................................................. A4-1
A4.1.1 Interoperability ............................................................................................................................................A4-1
A4.2 Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103 ........................................................ A4-9
A4.2.1 Interoperability ............................................................................................................................................A4-9
A5 Version History ................................................................................................. A5-1

A5.1 Version History – MiCOM P30 .................................................................................... A5-1
A5.1.1 P638 ‑301 ‑40x ‑601 … ‑303 ‑40x ‑612 .................................................................................................. A5-1
A5.2 Version History – Easergy MiCOM 30 ...................................................................... A5-10
A5.2.1 P638 ‑304 ‑4xx ‑661 ff ...............................................................................................................................A5-10
8 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
1 Application and Scope
1.1 Overview
The P638 differential protection device is designed for fast and selective short
circuit protection, ground fault protection, and overload protection of
transformers in railway applications (two-winding arrangement) in railway
substations with nominal frequencies of 16.7, 25, 50 or 60 Hz (settable).
This protection device may be installed in standard-gauge railway substations
operating on any normal frequency and voltage level.
The selection of protection functions has been optimised for transformer
protection in a wide range of substations, and at the same time they offer back-
up protection for both incoming and outgoing feeders.
Fig. 1-1: P638 in a 40 TE sized case with text display.
Fig. 1-2: P638 in a 40 TE sized case with graphic display.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 1-1

P638 1 Application and Scope
Fig. 1-3: P638 in a 84 TE sized case with text display.
Fig. 1-4: P638 in a 84 TE sized case with graphic display.
The control functions are designed for the control of up to ten electrically
operated switchgear units equipped with plant status signaling and located in the
bay of a railway substation.
The number of external auxiliary devices required is largely minimized by the
integration of binary signal inputs operating from any auxiliary voltage, and
versatile relay output contacts, by the direct connection option for current and
voltage transformers, and by the comprehensive interlocking capabilities. This
simplifies the handling of switch protection and control technology from planning
to commission.
During operation, the user-friendly interface makes it easy to set the device
parameters and allows safe operation of the substation by preventing
nonpermissible switching operations.
All main functions are individually configurable. The user can adapt the device
flexibly to the scope of protection and control required in each particular
application.
1-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

1 Application and Scope P638
Protection functions P638
ANSI IEC 61850 Function

Function
group
87T PhsPDIFx DIFF Transformer differential protection ✓

● Vector group matching ✓
● Inrush restraint, through-stabilization ✓
● Zero current filter high and low voltage side ✓
87T TrvPDIFx DIF_a Transverse differential protection high and low voltage ✓
DIF_b side
21 DisPDISx DIST Minimum impedance protection ✓

● 3 zones, settable forward and backward parameters ✓
30 / 74 CALHx/ MCMON Measuring circuit supervision of voltage ✓
50 / 51 Dt1PhsPTOCx DTOC1 Definite-time overcurrent protection, with two stages ✓

67 ● Short circuit direction determination, per stage ✓
● Undervoltage clearance, per stage ✓
● Starting conditions for timer stages (with starting / ✓
direction), per stage
50 / 51 Dt2PhsPTOCx DTOC2 Definite-time overcurrent protection, with two stages ✓
50 / 51 DtpEftPTOCx DTOCN Dead tank protection, definite-time ground overcurrent ✓

protection ✓
● Instantaneous high-current stage
51 ItpPhsPTOC1 IDMT Inverse-time overcurrent protection, phase selective, with ✓

one stage ✓
● Short circuit detection determination ✓
● Undervoltage enable ✓
● Starting conditions for timer stages (starting /
direction)
49 ThmPTTR1 THERM Thermal overload protection ✓

● Coolant temperature measuring (using MEASI) (✓)
27 / 59 VtpPhsPTOVx/ V<> Over- /Undervoltage Protection ✓

VtpPhsPTUVx
81 FrqPTOFx/ f<> Over- /Underfrequency protection ✓

FrqPTUFx
50BF RBRFx CBF_1 Circuit breaker failure protection, two independent ✓

CBF_2 functions for high and low voltage side
XCBRx CBM_1 Circuit breaker supervision, two independent functions for ✓

CBM_2 high and low voltage side"
LIMIT Limit value monitoring ✓
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 1-3

Protection functions P638

Function
group
LGC PloGGIOx LOGIC Programmable logic 128

(Ed.1)
LOG_2 Programmable logic with extended timers 4
PloGAPCx
(Ed.2)
Communication functions P638

Function
group
16S COMM1, 2 communication interfaces serial, RS 422 / 485 or (✓)

COMM2 fiber optic
CLK IRIGB Time synchronization IRIG-B (✓)
16E IEC Communication interface Ethernet (✓)
16E GosGGIO1 GOOSE GOOSE communication IEC 61850 (✓)
Measuring inputs P638

Function
group
MdxPriMMXNx Phase currents 2*2

MdxSecMMXNx
MmuPriMMXN2 Residual current 1

MmuSecMMXN2
MmuPriMMXN1 Voltages 1
MmuSecMMXN1
Binary inputs and outputs P638

Function 40 TE 84 TE
group
INP Optical coupler inputs 4 … 50 4 … 56
OUTP Output relays (incl. Opt. high break 8 … 32 8 … 48

outputs (max 4))
1-4 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Measured value functions, analog inputs and outputs P638

Function
group
26 RtdGGIO1 MEASI RTD input (✓)

IdcGGIO1 Measuring data input 20 mA, one settable input (✓)
value
MEASO Measuring data output 20 mA, two settable output (✓)

values
Control functions P638

Function
group
52 XCBRx / DEVxx Switchgear control and monitoring (depend on (3)/(10)

XSWIx / config)
CSWIx
CtlGAPC2 CMD_1 Single-pole commands 26
CtlGAPC1 SIG_1 Single-pole signals 64
LGC CILOx ILOCK Interlocking logic 32
CntGGIO1 COUNT Binary counters 4
TIMER Timer 4
Miscellaneous functions P638

Function
group
CS Cyber Security (✓)
LLN0.SGCB PSS Parameter subset selection ✓

LLN0.CurSG
PTRCx / FT_RC Fault recording

RDRE1
RFLOx FT_DA Fault data acquisition for a particular, settable point ✓

in time during a fault
FKT_T Function keys (only for text display) (✓)
✓ = Standard; (✓) = Ordering option.

"IEC 61850" = IEC 61850 Edition 1 and Edition 2.
For a list of all available function groups see the Appendix.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 1-5

Communication 16S 16S 16E CLK Self

IEC IRIGB Monitoring Recording and
COMM1 COMM2
Data Overload rec.
Acquisition
to SCADA / substation control / RTU / modem ...
via RS485 or Fiber optics
using IEC 60870-5-101, -103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier LGC
LIMIT Metering Fault rec.
resp. via RJ45 or Fiber optics using IEC 61850 LOGIC
50BF
CBF_2 CBM_2
a
87T 87 87 21 50TD/50V/67 50TD 50HS 51/50V/67 49 50BF 30/74 27/59 81
DIFF DIF_a DIF_b DIST DTOC1 DTOC2 DTOCN IDMT THERM CBF_1 CBM_1 MCMON V<> f <>
b IA,a IC,a
IN
IA,b IC,b
Further Always
options available
Transformer protection device

MEASI MEASO P638
Fig. 1-5: Functional diagram for P638.
1-6 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

1.2 General Functions

Functions listed in the tables above are self-contained function groups (except
for ILOCK) and can be individually configured or de-configured according to the
specific application requirements. Unused or cancelled function groups are
hidden to the user, thus simplifying the menu.
This concept provides a large choice of functions and makes wide-ranging
application of the protection device possible, with just one model version. On the
other hand simple and clear parameter settings can be made.
In this way the protection and control functions (except for ILOCK) can be
included in or excluded from the configuration; they are arranged on the branch
"General Functions" of the menu tree.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 1-7

1.3 Control Functions

Switchgear contact positions are acquired by binary signal inputs, that can signal
and process a maximum of 10 two-pole contact positions. Output relays are
available to control a maximum of 6 two-pole switchgear units.
Up to 56 operation signals can be acquired though binary signal inputs and they
are processed according to their primary significance (e.g. CB readiness). Each
binary signal input for signals from switchgear and single-pole operations can
have the debouncing and chatter suppression from eight groups assigned, for
which the debouncing and chatter time can be individually set.
For the acquisition of binary counters, up to four binary inputs may be
configured. The contents of these counters are transmitted cyclically via the
serial link. The counter values are stored so that they are not lost if the supply
voltage should fail. Counting continues from the stored value as the initial value
when the P638 restarts.
The P638 sends control signals only after it has checked the readiness and
validity to carry out such commands, and it then monitors the operating time of
the switchgear units. If the protection device detects that a switchgear unit has
failed, it will signal this information (e.g. by configuration to a LED indicator).
Before a switching command is issued the interlocking logic on the P638 checks
if this new switchgear status corresponds with the bay and station topology. The
interlocking logic is stored in form of bay interlocking, with and without station
interlocking, for each Bay Panel in the default setting. The interlocking conditions
can be adapted to the actual bay and station topology. Interlocking display and
operation correspond to the programmable logic.
When the P638 is included in a station control system the local interlocking can
easily be integrated with the overall system interlocking.
When the P638 is not included in a station control system then bay interlocking is
applied without station interlocking.
If the bay and station topology are found to be valid the switching command is
issued. If a non-permissible status would result from the switching action then
the issuing of such a switching command is refused and an alarm is issued.
If not all binary outputs are required by the bay type then these vacant binary
outputs can be freely utilized for other purposes.
Besides issuing switching commands binary outputs may also be triggered by
persistent commands.
1-8 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

1.4 Global Functions

In addition to the listed features, and extensive self-monitoring, the P638 is
equipped with the following global functions:
● Parameter subset selection
● System measurements to support the user during commissioning, testing
and operation
● Operating data recording
(time-tagged event logging)
● Overload data acquisition
● Overload recording
(time-tagged event logging)
● Fault recording
(time-tagged event logging together with fault value recording of the three
phase currents, the residual current as well as the three phase-to-ground
voltages and the neutral-point displacement voltage).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 1-9

1.5 Design
The P638 is modular in design. The plug-in modules are housed in a robust
aluminum case and electrically interconnected via one analog p/c board and one
digital p/c board.
1-10 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

1.6 Configurable Function Keys
Configurable function keys are available on the HMI with text display only.
To the right of the text display, there are six freely configurable function keys
available. These may be used for easy control operation access.
See also Chapter 6, (p. 6-1).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 1-11

1.7 Inputs and Outputs

The following inputs and outputs are available with the device:
● 4 current measuring inputs
● 1 voltage measuring input
● Up to 56 binary signal inputs (optical couplers) with freely configurable
function assignment for individual control or protection signals
● Up to 48 output relays with freely configurable function assignment for
individual control or protection applications
● Up to 12 binary signal inputs and 12 signal outputs are prepared
specifically for the 2-pole monitoring and 2-pole control of up to 6 switching
devices
● Up to 4 high break output relays applicable for DC circuits with max. 2500
W inductive (L/R = 40 ms) or 10 A at 250 VDC
Depending on the order options (Chapter 15, (p. 15-1)) there are several more
modules available. The location diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-27)) give an
overview of the combinations of modules that are technically possible. The
module list (Section 4.3, (p. 4-7)) details the designations that appear in the
location diagrams.
The nominal currents and nominal voltages of the standard measuring inputs can
be set.
The nominal voltage range of the binary signal inputs (opto-coupler) is 24 to
250 V DC. As an option binary signal input modules with a higher operate
threshold are available.
The auxiliary voltage input for the power supply is also designed for an extended
range. The nominal voltage ranges are 60 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC. As
an option there is a variant available for the lower nominal voltage range 24 V to
60 V DC.
All output relays can be utilized for signaling and command purposes.
The optional PT 100 input (on the analog module Y(4I)) is lead-compensated and
balanced and linearized for PT 100 resistance thermometers as per IEC 751.
The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring,
zero suppression defined by a setting, plus the option of linearizing the input
variable via 20 adjustable interpolation points.
Two selectable measured variables (cyclically updated measured operating data
and stored measured fault data) can be output as a burden-independent direct
current via the two optional 0 to 20 mA outputs. The characteristics are defined
by 3 adjustable interpolation points allowing a minimum output current (4 mA,
for example) for slave-side open-circuit monitoring, knee-point definition for fine
scaling, and a limitation to lower nominal currents (10 mA, for example). Where
sufficient output relays are available, a selectable measured variable can be
output in BCD-coded form by contacts.
1-12 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

1.8 Control and Display

Local control panel, with two ordering options:
● Display:
o Text display: LC-display with 4 lines of 20 characters each
o Graphic display: LC-display with 16 lines of 21 characters each with a
resolution of 128 x 128 pixels
● LED indicators:
o Text display: 23 multi-colored LED indicators, with 18 freely configurable
function assignments for the colors red, green or yellow
o Graphic display: 17 multi-colored LED indicators, with 12 freely
configurable function assignments for the colors red, green or yellow
o Various operating modes and flashing functions available with the LED
indicators
● PC interface
● One or two communication interface(s) for connection to a substation
control system (optional)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 1-13

1.9 Information Interfaces

Information exchange is done via the local control panel, the PC interface and
optional Communication modules for serial and Ethernet based communication.
The serial communication module offers settable protocols conforming to IEC
60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-101, DNP 3.0, Modbus and Courier. The second
communication interface (COMM2) conforms to IEC 60870-5-103 and is intended
for remote setting access only.
The 4 available Ethernet modules variants provide IEC 61850 communication
with single Ethernet or alternatively redundancy PRP, HSR or RSTP protocols with
RJ45 wire or LC fiber optic connectors and RJ45 service interface.
External time synchronization can be done using a configured binary input, using
one of the communication protocols or by using the optional IRIG-B signal input.
1-14 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
2 Technical Data
2.1 Conformity
Notice
Applicable to P638, version ‑304 ‑407/408/409 ‑661.
Declaration of Conformity
The product designated “P638 Transformer Differential Protection Device” has
been designed and manufactured in conformance with the EMC and safety
standards IEC 60255‑26 and IEC 60255‑27 and with the “EMC Directive” and the
“Low Voltage Directive” issued by the Council of the European Community.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 2-1

P638 2 Technical Data
2.2 General Data
2.2.1 General Device Data
Design
● Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation, or
● Flush-mounted case for 19″ cabinets and for control panels.
Installation Position
● Vertical ± 30°.
Degree of Protection
Per DIN VDE 0470 and IEC 60529.
● IP 52 for the front panel.
● Flush-mounted case:
o IP 50 for the case (excluding the rear connection area)
o IP 20 for the rear connection area, pin-terminal connection
o IP 10 for the rear connection area, ring-terminal connection
● Surface-mounted case:
o IP 50 for the case
o IP 50 for the fully enclosed connection area with the supplied rubber
grommets fitted
Weight
● 40 TE case: Approx. 7 kg
● 84 TE case: Approx. 11 kg
Dimensions and Connections

See dimensional drawings (Section 4.2, (p. 4-4)), and the location and
terminal connection diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-27)).
Terminals
PC interface (X6)
● EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin
Communication interfaces COMM1 and COMM2

● Fiber (X7, X8 and X31, X32)
o F-SMA optical fiber connection per IEC 60874‑2 (for plastic fibers), or
o optical fiber connection BFOC-ST® connector 2.5 per IEC 60874‑10‑1 (for
glass fibers).
(ST® is a registered trademark of AT&T Lightguide Cable Connectors.)
● Wire leads (X9, X10 and X33)
o M2 threaded terminal ends for wire cross-sections up to 1.5 mm².
2-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

2 Technical Data P638
Communication interface IEC 61850

● Fiber (X13, X14)
o Industry Standard Small Form Pluggable (SFP) package, LC duplex
connector optical interface.
● Wire leads (X15)
o RJ45 connector.
● IRIG-B Interface (X11)
o 3 pin terminal block.
Current measuring inputs (conventional inputs)

● Threaded terminal ends, pin-type cable lugs: M5, self-centering with cage
clamp to protect conductor cross-sections ≤ 4 mm², or:
● Threaded terminal, ring-terminal connection: M4.
Other inputs and outputs

● Threaded terminal ends, pin-type cable lugs: M3, self-centering with cage
clamp to protect conductor cross-sections 0.2 to 2.5 mm², or:
● Threaded terminal ends, ring-type cable lugs: M4.
Creepage Distances and Clearances

● Per IEC 60255-27.
● Pollution degree 3, working voltage 250 V,
● overvoltage category III, impulse test voltage 5 kV.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 2-3

2.3 Tests
2.3.1 Type Tests
2.3.1.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

EMC tests on Ethernet are performed with cable of 8 meters (category 5E).
To comply with the standard, it is suggested to set the parameter (010 220)
I NP: Filter to 6 [steps].
Conducted Emission
Per IEC 60255-26 and CISPR 22 Class A.
● 0.15 - 0.5 MHz, 79 dBμV (quasi peak) 66 dBμV (average).
● 0.5 - 30 MHz, 73 dBμV (quasi peak) 60 dBμV (average).
Radiated Emission
Per IEC 60255-26 and CISPR 11 Class A.
● 30 - 230 MHz, 40 dBμV / m at 10 m measurement distance.
● 230 - 1 GHz, 47 dBμV / m at 10 m measurement distance.
100 kHz and 1 MHz Damped Oscillatory Test

Per IEC 60255-26 and IEC 61000-4-18. level 3.
● Frequency: 100 kHz and 1 MHz.
● Common mode test level: ±2.5 kV.
● Differential mode test level : ±1 kV.
Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge

Per IEC 60255-26 and IEC 61000-4-2, severity level 4.
● 15 kV discharge in air to user interface, display, to all communication ports
(outer earthed shell).
● 8 kV contact discharge to any metal part of the front of the product.
Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Field

● 10 V / m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz and 1.4 GHz to 2.7 GHz with 1 kHz 80 % AM.
● Spot tests at 80 MHz, 160 MHz, 380 MHz, 450 MHz, 900 MHz, 1850 MHz,
and 2150 MHz.
Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Test

Per IEC 60255-26, Zone A.
● ±4 kV, 5 kHz applied directly to auxiliary supply, CTs, VTs, opto inputs,
output relays.
● ±2 kV, 5 kHz applied to communication ports.
Per IEC 61000-4-4, Severity level 4.
● ±4.0 kV, 5 kHz applied to all power supply and earth port.
● ±2.0 kV, 5 kHz applied to all other ports.
EFT/Burst waveform parameter.
2-4 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

● Rise time of one pulse: 5 ns.

● Impulse duration (50 % value): 50 ns.
● Burst duration: 15 ms.
● Burst cycle: 300 ms.
● Source impedance: 50 Ω.
Power Frequency Immunity

Per IEC 60255-26, severity Zone A.
Phase-to-phase
● RMS value 150 V.
● Coupling resistance 100 Ω.
● Coupling capacitor 0.1 μF, for 10 s.
Phase-to-ground
● RMS value 300 V.
● Coupling resistance 220 Ω.
● Coupling capacitor 0.47 μF, for 10 s.
Surge Immunity Test

Per IEC 60255-26 and IEC 61000-4-5, severity Zone A or level 4.
● ±4 kV line to earth and ±2 kV line to line for power supply, CTs, VTs, opto
inputs and output contacts.
● ±4 kV cable shielded layer to ground for communication ports.
Surge waveform parameter.
● Open-circuit voltage front time / time to half-value: 1.2 / 50 μs.
● Short-circuit current front time / time to half-value: 8 / 20 μs.
CDN parameter.
● 12 Ω / 9 uF (line to earth) and 2 Ω / 18 uF (line to line) for power supply
port.
● 42 Ω / 0.5 uF (line to earth) and 42 Ω / 0.5 uF (line to line) for IO ports.
● 2 Ω cable shielding layer to ground for shielding communication ports.
Conducted Immunity Test

● Test level: 10 V.
● Test frequency range: 150 kHz - 80 MHz.
● Modulation: 1 kHz sine wave, 80 % AM modulated.
● Spot test frequency: 27 MHz, 68 MHz.
Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity

Per IEC 61000-4-8, severity level 4.
● Test frequency: 50 Hz
● Test level: 30 A / m applied continuously, 300 A / m applied for 3 s.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 2-5

Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC Auxiliary Energizing Quantity

Per IEC 60255-26 and IEC 61000-4-17.
● Test level: 15 % of rated DC value.
2.3.1.2 Insulation
Insulation Resistance
Per IEC 60255-27.
Insulation resistance > 100 MΩ at 500 Vdc.
Creepage Distances and Clearances

Per IEC 60255-27.
Pollution degree 3, Overvoltage category III.
High Voltage Withstand (Dielectric) Test

Per IEC 60255-27.
● 1 kV rms AC for 1 minute between RJ45 ports and the case earth (ground).
● 2 kV rms AC for 1 minute between all other terminals connected together
and the case earth. Between all terminals of independent circuits.
● 1 kV rms AC for 1 minute, across open watchdog contacts.
● 1 kV rms AC for 1 minute, across open contacts of output relays.
Impulse Voltage Withstand Test

Per IEC 60255-27.
● Front time: 1.2 μs, Time to half-value: 50 μs.
Peak value: 1.5 kV, 0.5 J.
Between RJ45 ports and the case earth (ground).
● Front time: 1.2 μs, Time to half-value: 50 μs,
Peak value: 5 kV, 0.5 J.
Between all other independent circuits and the case earth, also between all
terminals of independent circuits.
2.3.1.3 Environmental test
Ambient Temperature Range Test

Per IEC 60068-2-1 & IEC 60068-2-2.
● Operating temperature range: -25°C to +55°C (or -13°F to +131°F).
● Storage and transit: -25°C to +70°C (or -13°F to +158°F).
Ambient Humidity Range Test

Per IEC 60068-2-78.
● 21 days at 93 % relative humidity and +40°C.
Per IEC 60068-2-14.
● 5 cycles, -25°C to +55 °C, 1°C / min rate of change.
Per IEC 60068-2-30.
● Damp heat cyclic, six cycles(12 hours + 12 hours), 93 % RH, +25°C to
+55°C.
Corrosive Environment Test

Per IEC 60068-2-60: 1995, Part 2, Test Ke, Method (class) 3
2-6 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Industrial corrosive environment/ poor environmental control, mixed gas flow

test.
● 21 days at 75 % relative humidity and 30°C (86°F) with exposure to
elevated concentrations of H2S, NO2, Cl2 and SO2.
2.3.1.4 Mechanical Test

Applicable to the following case variants:
● Surface-mounted 40 TE or 84 TE case
● Flush-mounted 40 TE or 84 TE case
Vibration Test
Per IEC 60255‑21-1, test severity class 1.
Frequency range in operation

● 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm, and
● 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Frequency range during transport

● 10 to 150 Hz, 1 g
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test

Per IEC 60255-21-2.
Acceleration and pulse duration:
● Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during
operation), test severity class 1:
5 g for 11 ms.
● Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during
transport), test severity class 1:
15 g for 11 ms.
● Shock bump tests are carried out to verify permanent shock (during
transport), test severity class 1:
10 g for 16 ms.
Seismic Test
Per IEC 60255‑21‑3, test procedure A, class 1.
Frequency range
● Horizontal axes of vibration: 1 Hz to 8 Hz with 3.5 mm peak displacement, 8
to 35 Hz with 10 m / s² peak acceleration. 2 x 1 cycle.
● Vertical axis of vibration: 1 Hz to 8 Hz with 1.5 mm peak displacement, 8 to
35 Hz with 5 m / s² peak acceleration. 1 x 1 cycle.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 2-7

2.4 Environmental Conditions
Temperatures
Per IEC 60255-1 & IEC 60068-2-1
Recommended temperature range

● -5°C to +55°C [+23°F to +131°F].
Limit temperature range

● Operation: -25°C to +55°C [-13°F to +131°F].
● Storage and transport: -25°C to +70°C [-13°F to +158°F].
Ambient Humidity Range

● ≤ 75 % relative humidity (annual mean).
● 21 days at ≤ 95 % relative humidity and 40°C [104°F].
● Condensation not permitted.
Solar Radiation
Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided.
2-8 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

2.5 Inputs and Outputs
2.5.1 Measuring Inputs
Frequency
● Nominal frequency fnom: 16.7 Hz, 25 Hz, 50 Hz and 60 Hz (settable).
● Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fnom.
Current Measuring Inputs

● Nominal current Inom: 1 and 5 A AC (settable).
● Nominal consumption per phase:
o 1 A CT burden: < 0.1 VA
o 5 A CT burden: < 0.3 VA
● Load rating:
o continuous: 4·Inom,
o for 10 s: 30·Inom,
o for 1 s: 100·Inom.
● Nominal surge current: 250·Inom.
Voltage Measuring Inputs

● Nominal voltage Vnom: 50 to 130 V AC (settable).
● Nominal consumption per phase: < 0.3 VA at Vnom = 130 V AC.
● Load rating:
o continuous: 150 V AC
o for 10 s: 300 V AC
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 2-9

2.5.2 Binary Signal Inputs

Threshold pickup and drop-off points as per ordering option
● Standard variant with switching threshold at 65% of 24 V DC (VA,min)
Special variants with switching thresholds from 58% to 72% of the nominal input
voltage (i.e. definitively “low” for VA < 58% of the nominal supply voltage,
definitively “high” for VA > 72% of the nominal supply voltage).
● Special variant with switching threshold at 65% of 110 V DC (VA,nom).
Power consumption per input

● 18 V standard variant:
VA = 19 to 110 V DC : 0.5 W ± 30%,
VA > 110 V DC: VA ·5 mA ± 30%.
● Special variants:
VA > switching threshold: VA ·5 mA ± 30%.
The standard variant of binary signal inputs (opto couplers) is recommended in

most applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 19 V. Special
versions with higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds are provided for applications where
a higher switching threshold is expressly required.
The maximum voltage permitted for all binary signal inputs is 300 V DC.
2-10 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

2.5.3 IRIG‑B Interface

● Minimum / maximum input voltage level
Demodulated: 2 Vpp / 6 Vpp (peak-peak)
Modulated: a few hundred mVpp / 10 Vpp
● Electrical isolation: 2 kVrms
2.5.4 Direct Current Input

● Input current: 0 to 26 mA
● Value range: 0.00 to 1.20 IDC,nom (IDC,nom = 20 mA)
● Maximum continuous input current permitted: 50 mA
● Maximum input voltage permitted: 17 V DC
● Input load: 100 Ω
● Open-circuit monitoring: 0 to 10 mA (adjustable)
● Overload monitoring: > 24.8 mA
● Zero suppression: 0.000 to 0.200 IDC,nom (adjustable).
2.5.5 Resistance Thermometer

Only PT 100 permitted for analog (I/O) module, mapping curve per IEC 75.1.
● Value range: ‑40.0°C to +215.0°C (‑40°F to +419°F).
● 3-wire configuration: max. 20 Ω per conductor.
● Open and short-circuited input permitted.
● Open-circuit monitoring: Θ > +215°C and Θ < -40°C (Θ > +419°F and
Θ < -40°F).
2.5.6 Direct Current Output

● Output current: 0 to 20 mA
● Maximum permissible load: 500 Ω
● Maximum output voltage: 15 V
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 2-11

2.5.7 Output Relays
Binary I/O Module X(6I 6O) Binary I/O Modules X(4H) All other modules
for switchgear control. with high-break contacts,
applicable to DC circuits
only.
Rated 250 V DC 250 V DC 250 V DC, 250 V AC.

voltage: 250 V AC
Continuous 8A 10 A 5A
current:
Short- ● 30 A for 0.5 s ● 250 A for 0.03 s, 30 A for 0.5 s.

duration ● 30 A for 3 s
current:
Making 1000 W (VA) at 30 A 1000 W (VA) at

capacity: L/R = 40 ms. L/R = 40 ms.
Breaking ● 0.2 A at 220 V DC and ● 7500 W resistive or ● 0.2 A at 220 V DC and

capacity: L/R = 40 ms, 30 A at 250 V DC, L/R = 40 ms,
● 4 A at 230 V AC and Maximum values: 30 A ● 4 A at 230 V AC and
cos φ = 0.4. and 300 V DC. cos φ = 0.4.
● 2500 W inductive
(L/R = 40 ms) or 10 A
at 250 V DC,
Maximum values: 10 A
and 300 V DC.
Operating less than 5 ms less than 0.2 ms less than 5 ms

time:
Reset time: less than 5 ms less than 8 ms less than 5 ms
2.5.8 BCD Measured Data Output

Maximum numerical value that can be displayed: 399
2-12 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

2.6 Interfaces
2.6.1 Local Control Panel

Input or output
● Graphic display ordering option: With 12 keys and an LC-display consisting
of 16 lines and 21 columns (128 x 128 pixels)
● Text display ordering option: With 13 keys (6 freely configurable function
keys) and a 4 x 20 alphanumeric character liquid crystal display (LCD)
State and fault signals

● Graphic display ordering option: 17 LED indicators (with 12 freely
configurable function assignments for three colors (independent
configuration in red, green and yellow)
● Text display ordering option: 23 LED indicators (with 18 freely configurable
function assignments for three colors (independent configuration in red,
green and yellow)
2.6.2 PC Interface
● Transmission rate: 300 to 115,200 baud (adjustable)
2.6.3 Serial Communication Interface

The communication modules can be provided with up to three communication
channels, depending on the module variant. Channel 1 and 3 may either be
equipped to connect wire leads or optical fibers and channel 2 is only available to
connect wire leads.
For communication interface 1, communication protocols based on
IEC 870-5‑103, IEC 60870‑5‑101, MODBUS, DNP 3.0, or Courier can be set.
● Transmission rate: 300 to 64000 baud (adjustable).
Communication interface 2 can only be operated with the interface protocol
based on IEC 60870-5-103.
● Transmission rate: 300 or 57600 baud (adjustable).
Wire Leads
● Per RS 485 or RS 422, 2 kV isolation
● Distance to be bridged
o Point-to-point connection: max. 1200 m
o Multipoint connection: max. 100 m
Plastic Fiber Connection

● Optical wavelength: typically 660 nm
● Optical output: min. -7.5 dBm
● Optical sensitivity: min. -20 dBm
● Optical input: max. -5 dBm
● Distance to be bridged: max. 45 m
(Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at
both ends, a system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 2-13

Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125

● Optical output: min. -19.8 dBm
● Distance to be bridged: max. 400 m
Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125

● Optical output: min. -16 dBm
● Distance to be bridged: max. 1,400 m
2.6.4 Ethernet Communication Interface
100BaseTx Port
Connector Characteristics
Type Shielded RJ45 jack
Manufacturer / Reference
Twisted pair cable Cat 5
Max. cable length with Cat 5 100 m
2-14 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

100BaseFx Multi-Mode Port
Connector Characteristics
Fiber port type LC duplex connector optical Interface
Manufacturer / Reference AVAGO HFBR-57E5APZ
Center wavelength 1308 nm (Typ.)
Optimal fiber cable 62.5/125 μm 50/125 μm
Output Optical Power (TX) - 20.0 (Min.) - 17.0 dBm (Typ.) - 23.5 (Min.) - 20.0 dBm (Typ.)
Receiver Sensitivity (RX) - 31.0 (Min.) dBm - 31.0 (Min.) dBm
Max. Fiber distance See Fibber optical budget calculation Section 2.6.5, (p. 2-15)
2.6.5 Fiber Optic budget calculations

Optical power is expressed in Watts. However, the common unit of power
measurement is the dBm, defined by the following equation: Power (dBm) = 10
log Power (mW) / 1 mW.
The fiber optic budget is the difference between the power emitted into the fiber
and the sensitivity (minimum amount of power required) of the receiver
connected through the fiber optic cable.
Link Power Budget = Transmitter Power (dBm) - Receiver Sensitivity (dBm)
Optical Optical loss: Optical

transmitter Connectors, fibers receiver
Transmitted Power Received Power
Fig. 2-1: Fiber budget.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 2-15

Fiber type Multi-Mode
Technology 62.5/125 micron
Power coupled into fiber - 20 dBm (Min.)
Receiver Sensitivity - 31 dBm (Min.)
Link Power Budget 11 dB
Example 1: between devices
Topic Multi-Mode
Link Power budget 11 dB
Connector loss 1.6 dB
Protective Margin 4 dB
Allowed link attenuation 5.4 dB
Typical cable attenuation 1 dB/km
Maximum range 5.4 km
Example 2: between devices with patch panel
Topic Multi-Mode
Link Power budget 11 dB
Connector loss 1.6 dB
Patch loss 2 dB
Protective Margin 4 dB
Allowed link attenuation 3.4 dB
Typical cable attenuation 1 dB/km
Maximum range 3.4 km
2.6.6 IRIG‑B Interface

● Modulated signal (B122 format)
● Demodulated signal (B000 format)
● Carrier frequency: 1 kHz
● BCD- coded variable data (daily)
● 2kVrms Dielectric withstand
2-16 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

2.7 Information Output

Counters, measured data, and indications: see chapter “Information and Control
Functions”.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 2-17

2.8 Settings – Typical Characteristic Data
2.8.1 Main Function

● Minimum output pulse for trip command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
● Minimum output pulse for close command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
2.8.2 Differential Protection

● Minimum tripping time:
without inrush stabilization: approx. 0.5 periods
with inrush stabilization: approx. 1.3 periods
● Resetting ratio: 0.95
2.8.3 Transverse Differential Protection

● Minimum tripping time: Two sampling intervals (dependent on system
frequency set)
● Minimum command time: approx. 0.6 periods
● Resetting ratio: 0.95
2.8.4 Distance Protection

● Operating frequency 16.7, 25 Hz:
Maximum tripping time: ≤ 100 ms
● Operating frequency 50, 60 Hz:
Maximum tripping time: ≤ 50 ms
● Fault detection and measurement resetting ratio: 0.95
2.8.5 Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection

● Starting and measurement resetting ratio (hysteresis): 0.95
● Shortest tripping time:
o Timer stages:
non-directional operation: approx. 0.7 periods
directional operation: approx. 1.2 periods
o Residual current stage: ≤ 0.25 periods (with tIN> = 0 ms)
● Starting reset time: approx. 1.5 periods (with double operate value set to 0)
2-18 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

2.8.6 Time-Voltage Protection

● Operate time including output relay (measured variable from nominal value
to 1.2-fold operate value or measured variable from nominal value to 0.8-
fold operate value):
o Operating frequency 16.7 Hz:
Maximum tripping time: ≤ 120ms
o Operating frequency 25 Hz:
o Operating frequency 50, 60 Hz:
● Reset time (measured variable from 1.2-fold operate value to nominal
value or measured variable from 0.8-fold operate value to nominal value):
o Operating frequency 16.7 Hz:
o Operating frequency 25 Hz:
o Operating frequency 50, 60 Hz:
● Resetting ratio for V<>:
o 1% to 10% (adjustable)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 2-19

2.9 Deviations
2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values
2.9.1.1 Definitions
Reference Conditions
● Quasi-stationary sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom (frequency
protection excepted), total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %, ambient
temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
Deviation
● Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
2.9.1.2 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint)

Deviation: ± 5 %
2.9.1.3 Differential Protection, Transverse Differential Protection

● Differential measuring system
for Id = 0.2 Iref: ± 5 %
● Harmonic restraint: ± 10 %
2.9.1.4 Distance Protection

● Impedance measurement Z<:
Deviation: ± 5 % of the setting or ± 10 mΩ
● Direction determination: ± 5°
2-20 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

2.9.1.5 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring
Operate values Vmin<

● Deviation: ± 3 %
2.9.1.6 Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection
Operating frequency 16.7, 25 Hz:

● Operate values: ± 8 % of the setting or ± 1% of the nominal value
Direction determination: ± 10°
Operating frequency 50, 60 Hz:

● Operate values: ± 5 % of the setting or ± 1% of the nominal value
Direction determination: ± 5°
2.9.1.7 Thermal Overload Protection
Operate value Θ
● Deviation: ± 5% of the setting or ± 1% of the nominal value
2.9.1.8 Time-Voltage Protection
Operate values
● V<>: ± 1% (in the range 0.6 to 1.4 Vnom)
2.9.1.9 Frequency Protection
Operate values f<>

● ± 5 mHz
Operate values df/dt

● ± 100 mHz/s
2.9.1.10 Direct Current Input

2.9.1.11 Resistance Thermometer

● Deviation: ± 2°C (in the range −40°C ... 120°C)
2.9.1.12 Analog Measured Data Output

● Output residual ripple with max. load: ± 1 %
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 2-21

2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages
2.9.2.1 Definitions
Reference conditions
● Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion
≤ 2 %, ambient temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage
VA,nom.
Deviation
● Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
2.9.2.2 Definite-time stages

Deviation: ± 1% + 20 ms to 70 ms
Deviation: ± 1% + 20 ms to 40 ms
2-22 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

2.9.2.3 Inverse-time stages

Deviation when I ≥ 2 Iref: ± 5% + 10 to 60 ms
For “extremely inverse” IEC characteristics and for thermal overload
characteristics: ± 7.5% + 10 to 60 ms
Deviation when I ≥ 2 Iref: ± 5% + 10 to 25 ms
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 2-23

For “extremely inverse” IEC characteristics and for thermal overload

characteristics: ± 7.5% + 10 to 20 ms
2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition
2.9.3.1 Definitions
Reference conditions
● Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion ≤
2%, ambient temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage
VA,nom.
Deviation
● Deviation relative to the nominal values under reference conditions.
2.9.3.2 Operating Data Measurement
Measuring input currents

● Deviation: ± 1%
Measuring input voltages

● Deviation: ± 0.5%
Temperature
● Deviation: ± 2°C
Frequency
● Deviation: ± 10 mHz
Direct current of measured data input and output

● Deviation: ± 1°
2.9.3.3 Fault Data
Short-circuit current and voltage

Restraining and differential currents

2.9.3.4 Internal Clock
With free running internal clock

● Deviation: < 1 min/month
With external synchronization (with a synchronization interval ≤ 1 min)

● Deviation: < 10 ms
With synchronization via IRIG-B interface

● ± 1 ms
2-24 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

2.10 Resolution of the Fault Data Acquisition
2.10.1 Time Resolution

1 ms (all frequencies)
2.10.2 Phase Currents System

Dynamic range
● 25 Inom
Amplitude resolution
● at Inom = 1 A: 2.0 mA rms
● at Inom = 5 A: 10.1 mA rms
2.10.3 Voltage
Dynamic range
● 150 V
Amplitude resolution
● 9.2 mV rms
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 2-25

2.11 Recording Functions
2.11.1 Organization of the Recording Memories
Operating Data Memory
Scope for signals

● All signals relating to normal operation; from a total of up to 2048 different
logic state signals.
Depth for signals

● The 1000 most recent signals.
Monitoring Signal Memory
Scope for signals

● All self-monitoring logic state signals.
Depth for signals

● Up to 30 signals.
Overload Memory
Number
● The 8 most recent overload events
Scope for signals

● All signals relevant for an overload event from a total of up to
2048 different logic state signals.
Depth for signals

● 200 entries per overload event.
Ground Fault Memory
Number
● The 8 most recent ground fault events
Scope for signals

● All signals relevant for a ground fault event from a total of up to
2048 different logic state signals.
Depth for signals

● 200 entries per ground fault event.
Fault Memory
Number
● The 8 most recent faults.
Scope for signals and fault values

● All fault-relevant signals from a total of up to 2048 different logic state
signals.
● Sampled values for all measured currents and voltages
2-26 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Depth for signals and fault values

● 200 entries per fault event / max 60 seconds
● max. number of cycles per fault can be set by user;
16.7 Hz: 546 periods in total for all faults, that is 32.76 s
25 Hz: 819 periods in total for all faults, that is 32.76 s
The total accessible recording time for disturbance recordings is always reduced by
the configured pre-fault time. For example with 1 s pre-fault time the available total
recording time is 31.76 s at 50 Hz.
Resolution of the Recorded Data

● As per Section 2.10, (p. 2-25).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 2-27

2.12 Power Supply

Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom (ordering option)
● 24 to 60 V DC (lower range supply)
● 60 to 250 V DC or 100 to 230 V AC (upper range supply)
Operating range for direct voltage

● 0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 15 % VA,nom.
Operating range for alternating voltage

● 0.9 to 1.1 VA,nom.
Nominal burden
● … where VA = 220 V DC and with maximum module configuration
o 40 TE case, relays de-energized/energized: approx. 12.6 W / 34.1 W
o 84 TE case, relays de-energized/energized): approx. 14.5 W / 42.3 W
Start-up peak current

● < 3 A for duration of 0.25 ms
Stored energy time

● ≥ 20 ms for interruption of VA ≥ 24 V DC (lower and upper range supply)
● ≥ 50 ms for interruption of VA ≥ 36 V DC (lower range supply)
● ≥ 50 ms for interruption of VA ≥ 90 V DC (upper range supply)
2-28 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

2.13 Current Transformer Specifications
2.13.1 Symbols
The following symbols are used in accordance with IEC 61869 standards:
Ipn Rated primary current (nominal primary current) of the CT

Isn Rated secondary current (nominal secondary current) of the CT
Ipsc Rated primary (symmetrical) short-circuit current
KsscRated symmetrical short-circuit current factor:
I psc
K ssc = I pn
Iref Reference current of IDMT protection element

Rbn Rated resistive burden (secondary connected) of the CT
Pbn Equivalent power over the rated resistive burden of the CT for rated
secondary current:
2
Pbn = Rbn · I sn
Rb Actual resistive burden (secondary connected) of the CT

Pb Equivalent power over the actual resistive burden of the CT for rated
secondary current:
2
Pb = Rb · I sn
Rct Secondary winding resistance of the CT

Pct Equivalent power over the secondary winding resistance of the CT for
secondary rated current:
2
Pct = Rct · I sn
Vsal Secondary accuracy limiting voltage (e.m.f.) of the CT

Vk Rated knee point voltage (e.m.f.) of the CT
nn Rated accuracy limit factor of the CT
nb Actual accuracy limit factor of the CT:
Rct + Rbn Pct + Pbn
nb = nn · Rct + Rb = nn · Pct + Pb
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 2-29

Rl One-way lead resistance from CT to relay

Rrel Resistive burden of relay’s CT input
Tp Primary time constant (primary system time constant)
ω (System) angular frequency
Xp/Rp Primary impedance ratio (system impedance ratio):
Xp
Rp = ω · Tp
Kd Dimensioning factor for the CT

Kemp Relay specific, empirically determined dimensioning factor for the CT
2.13.2 General Equations

The current transformer can be dimensioned
● either for the minimum required secondary accuracy limiting voltage acc.
to IEC 61869, 3.4.209:
V sal ≥ K d · K ssc · I sn · (Rct + Rb)
● or for the minimum required rated accuracy limit factor acc. to IEC 61869,
3.4.208, as follows:
Rct + Rb Pct + Pb
nn ≥ K d · K ssc · Rct + Rbn = K d · K ssc · Pct + Pbn
The relation between both methods is given as follows:

Pbn
V sal = nn · ( I sn + I sn · Rct )
The actual secondary connected burden Rb is given as follows:

● For phase-to-ground faults: Rb = 2 · Rl + Rrel
● For phase-to-phase faults: Rb = Rl + Rrel
The wire lead burden is calculated as:
l
Rl = ρ ⋅ A
● ρ = specific conductor resistance

(e.g. for copper 0.021 Ω mm²/m = 2.1⋅10-8 Ω m, at 75°C)
● l = wire length
● A = wire cross section
For devices out of the platform Easergy MiCOM 30, the input CT burden Rrel is
less than 20 mΩ, independent of the set nominal current (1 A or 5 A). Usually this
relay burden can be neglected.
The rated knee point voltage Vk according to IEC 61869, 3.4.217 is lower than
the secondary accuracy limiting voltage Vsal according to IEC 61869, 3.4.209. It is
not possible to give a general relation between Vk and Vsal, but for standard core
material the following relations applies:
● VK≈0.85⋅Vsal for class 5P CTs, and
● VK≈0.75⋅Vsal for class 10P CTs, respectively.
Theoretically, the specifications of the current transformer could be calculated to
avoid saturation by inserting its maximum value, instead of the required over-
dimensioning factor Kd:
2-30 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Xp
K d = K max ≈ 1 + Rp = 1 + ω · Tp
However, this is not necessary. Instead, it is sufficient to consider an empirically

determined dimensioning factor Kd=Kemp such that the appropriate operation of
the protection function is ensured under the given conditions. This factor
depends on application and relay type, as outlined in the following.
2.13.3 Distance Protection

For the P638, the empirical dimensioning factor Kd = Kemp can be taken from the
following diagram, which shows three practical curves:
● Curve A (red): Choosing Kemp according to this line assures that transient
CT saturation practically does not affect distance protection: Distance
(instantaneous) zone trip is assured within −0/+40 ms for up to 95% of the
set zone reach.
● Curve B (blue): Choosing Kemp according to this line allows transient CT
saturation to slightly affect distance protection: Distance (instantaneous)
zone trip is assured within −0/+50 ms for up to 90% of the set zone reach.
● Curve C (green): Choosing Kemp according to this line allows transient CT
saturation to affect distance protection: Distance zone trip is assured for up
to 85% of the set zone reach.
30
A
25
20
15
K emp B
10
C
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160

Xp / R p
As per IEC 60255-121 (draft 2011), the following 4 fault conditions have to be
checked to determine the required CT dimensioning.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 2-31

A B
DIST
2 3 4
Fig. 2-2: Check conditions.
Case 1:
● Close-up backward short-circuit (security case)
Acceptance criteria: Stable backward direction decision, no trip
Select required Kemp per curve C
Case 2:
● Close-up forward short-circuit (dependability case)
Acceptance criterion: Instantaneous trip with less than 1 period add. delay
Required Kemp = 1.5
Case 3:
● Short-circuit at 80% of Zone 1 reach limit (dependability case)
Acceptance criterion: Trip with less than 3 periods add. delay
Select required Kemp per curve B
Case 4:
● Short-circuit at 110% of Zone 1 reach limit (security case)
Acceptance criterion: Correct time delayed zone 2 trip
Select required Kemp per curve C
Depending on the fault location, different maximum short-circuit currents and
primary system X/R ratios apply! Therefore the required CT dimensioning has to
be calculated separately for all 4 cases. The biggest sizing from all 4 cases then
has to be used.
It is recommended to use CTs of accuracy class 5P (or equivalent).
2-32 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
3 Operation
3.1 Modular Structure

The P638 is a numerical device out of Schneider Electric's family of devices
named “Easergy MiCOM 30”. The device types included in this family are built
from identical uniform hardware modules. The figure below shows the basic
hardware structure of the P638.
Communication
PC interface interface(s)
Local control module

L TRIP
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
A A
EDIT MODE
P μP
Processor module
Analog
Digital busbus module
module
B Analog bus module
T X Y V
Transformer module
Binary I/O module
Analog I/O module
Power supply module
Voltages Currents Signals Commands Signals Measured data Signals Commands Auxiliary voltage
Commands Signals Commands Commands Signals
Fig. 3-1: Basic hardware structure.
External analog quantities and binary quantities – electrically isolated – are

converted to the internal processing levels by the peripheral modules T, Y, and X.
The optional binary I/O modules X are equipped with optical couplers for binary
signal input as well as output relays for the output of signals and commands or
combinations of these.
The external auxiliary voltage is applied to the power supply module V, which
supplies the auxiliary voltages that are required internally.
Analog data is transferred from the transformer module T via the analog bus
module B to the processor module P. The processor module contains all the
elements necessary for the conversion of measured analog variables, including
multiplexers and analog/digital converters. The analog data conditioned by the
analog I/O module Y is transferred to the processor module P via the digital bus
module.
The processor handles the processing of digitized analog variables and of binary
signals, generates the protective trip and signals, and transfers them to the
binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. The processor module also
handles overall device communication.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-1

P638 3 Operation
The optional communication modules provide one or two serial communication

interfaces for the integration of the protection and control unit into a substation
control system and for remote access.
The local control module L is located behind the front panel and connected to the
processor module via a ribbon cable. It encompasses all control and display
elements as well as a PC interface for running the operating program Easergy
Studio.
3-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication

The following interfaces are available for the exchange of information between
the user and the P638:
● Integrated user interface (LOC: local control panel)
● PC interface
● Communication interface
All settings and signals as well as all measurements and control functions are
arranged within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is
uniform throughout the device family. The main branches are:
“Parameters” Branch
All settings are contained in this branch. This branch carries all settings,
including the identification data of the P638, the configuration parameters for
adapting the P638 interfaces to the system, and the function parameters for
adapting the device functions to the process. All values in this group are stored
in non-volatile memory, which means that the values will be preserved even if
the power supply fails.
“Operation” Branch
This branch includes all information relevant for operation such as measured
operating data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically
and consequently is not stored. In addition, various controls are grouped here,
for example those for resetting counters, memories and displays.
“Events” Branch
The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. All information in this
group is therefore stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the
measured fault data, and the sampled fault waveforms are stored here and can
be read out when required.
Display of Settings and Signals

Settings and signals are displayed either in plain text or as addresses, in
accordance with the user’s choice. All settings and signals of the P638 are
documented in a separate collection of documents, the so-called
“DataModelExplorer”. The “Addresses” document (being part of the
“DataModelExplorer”) is complete in the sense that it contains all settings,
signals and measured variables that are relevant for the user of the P638.
The configuration of the local control panel also permits the installation of
Measured Value “Panels” on the LCD display. Different Panels are automatically
displayed for specific system operating conditions. Priority increases from normal
operation to operation under overload conditions and finally to operation
following a short circuit in the system. Thus the P638 provides the measured
data relevant for the prevailing conditions.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-3

P638 3 Operation
3.3 Cyber Security (Function Group CS)

This product contains a Cyber Security function, which manages the encryption
of the data exchanged through some of the communication channels. The aim is
to protect the data (configuration and process data) from any corruption, malice,
attack. Subsequently, this product might be subject to control from customs
authorities, and it might be necessary to request special authorization from these
customs authorities before any export/import operation. For any technical
question relating to the characteristics of this encryption please contact your
Customer Care Centre - http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC.
For devices of the Easergy MiCOM 30 platform, Cyber Security is available as of

software version ‑661.
Please refer to separately available "Cyber Security" Technical Manual for all
details.
Cyber Security is based on the model of Role Based Access Control (RBAC) which
is a method to restrict resource access to authorized users. One role can have
one and more access rights, one user (subject) can have several roles. A user
(subject) is based on a session. This session controls for example the activity of
the user. If the user is inactive for 15 minutes (default setting) the user will be
locked out automatically.
Static separation
of duty
Subject Right
assignment assignment
Subject Role Operation Object

1..n 1..n 1 1..n
1 1..n Right
Dynamic
1..n 1 separation of duty
Session
Fig. 3-2: RBAC model.
3-4 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
NOTICE
CYBER SECURITY HAZARD
To improve Cyber Security:
⚫ Change all passwords from their default values when taking the protection
device into use.
⚫ Change all passwords regularly.
Failure to follow these instructions can increase the risk of
unauthorized access.
3.3.1 Users, Roles and Rights for Easergy MiCOM P30
User accounts
When the user tries to access an IED, they need to login using their own
username and their own password. The username/ password combination is then
checked against the records stored on the IED. It is the role that defines their
access to the relevant parts of the system.
The default user accounts for Easergy MiCOM P30 is as below:
Schneider Electric points out that changing default users and default passwords
constitutes an important security measure for the product. Therefore Schneider
Electric recommends to change the default passwords after the first usage of the
device. Not changing the default passwords can lead to the risk of undesirable
changes by third parties.
User Accounts Roles
ENGINEER OPERATOR VIEWER SECADM
DefaultEngineer x x x
DefaultOperator x x
DefaultViewer x
SecurityAdmin x
(for CAE only)
DefaultUser x
(for HMI only)
Tab. 3-1: Default user accounts for Easergy MiCOM P30.
Roles
Different named roles are associated with different access rights. Roles and
Rights are setup in a pre-defined arrangement, according to the IEC 62351
standard, but customized to the Easergy MiCOM P30 equipment.
The default roles for Easergy MiCOM P30 is as below:
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-5

P638 3 Operation
Role Description
VIEWER Can View what objects are present within a Logical-Device by presenting the
type ID of those objects.
OPERATOR An Operator can view what objects and values are present within a Logical-
Device by presenting the type ID of those objects as well as perform control
actions.
ENGINEER An Engineer can view what objects and values are present within a Logical-
Device by presenting the type ID of those objects. Moreover, an engineer has
full access to Datasets and Files and can configure the server locally or
remotely.
SECADM Security Administrator can change subject-to-role assignments (outside the

device) and role-to-right assignment (inside the device) and security policy
setting; change security setting such as certificates for subject authentication
and access token verification.
Tab. 3-2: Default roles summary for Easergy MiCOM P30.
Rights
In a similar way in which a set of pre-defined Roles have been created, a
predefined set of Rights have been created.
The reason why these are described as Default, is that it is possible to change the
definitions of Roles and Rights, by using the CAE software. Depending on the work
done by the system administrator, it is possible that your own situation may vary
from these initial recommendations.
3.3.2 Cyber Security Types and Communication Protocols (Based on

Order Number)
Considered some users may not want to use the Cyber Security, Schneider
Electric offers Easergy MiCOM 30 Series with or without CS as below: (See
Chapter 15, (p. 15-1) for the order information.)
● Default CS: Default RBAC configuration with simple password management,
no CAE (EcoStruxureTM Cybersecurity Admin Expert) required.
● Advanced CS: Advanced cyber security, CAE required.
Complete security configuration via CAE (e.g. user and passwords, type of
password complexity) and security services (e.g. Security logs).
3-6 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
Order Communication Security Security Supported Configuration

number types conf. protocols protocols
97 (1-4) Ethernet Default - IEC 61850 Ed1/ IEC 60870-5-103 TLS and
module security IEC 61850 Ed2/ SSH/SFTP and Webservices
IEC 60870-5-104 OR serial
IEC 60870-5-103 serial and
Firmware update and file
transfer
99 (1-4) Ethernet Advanced With IEC 61850 Ed1/ IEC 60870-5-103 TLS and
module security CAE IEC 61850 Ed2/ SSH/SFTP and Webservices
IEC 60870-5-104 OR serial
IEC 60870-5-103 serial and
Firmware update and file
transfer
92 x Serial module Default - IEC 60870-5-103/ Serial only:

security IEC 60870-5-101/ IEC 60870-5-103 serial and
Modbus/ Firmware update and file
transfer
DNP
0 Without Default - - Serial only:

communication security IEC 60870-5-103 serial and
module Firmware update and file
transfer
Tab. 3-3: CS types and supported protocols for Easergy MiCOM P30.
The configuration interface can be chosen by the user either serial or via
Ethernet. For security reasons it can be important to update for example the
Ethernet module via the serial interface, therefore all maintenance and
configuration services are available over serial. For convenience the important
update functions are also over Ethernet available.
Configuration Security types Ethernet Serial
Firmware update ethernet board (if SSH/SFTP or serial file transfer X X

available)
Firmware update main board Serial file transfer X
Configuration of the main device IEC 60870-5-103 via TLS or serial X X

function
User defined control pictures Serial file transfer X
User defined data model Serial file transfer X
Security configuration Webservices X X1

Tab. 3-4: Configuration of Easergy MiCOM P30.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-7

P638 3 Operation
(x1) In the case of without security or without the Ethernet module, the device
provides the default security. With the default security configuration, only
passwords can be changed.
NOTICE
⚫ Except for IEC 60870-5-103 via TLS and SFTP/SSH, the device does not
have the capability to transmit data encrypted using the following
protocols: IEC 61850 Ed1, IEC 61850 Ed2, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC
60870-5-103 serial, IEC 60870-5-101 serial, Modbus serial, and DNP3
serial.
⚫ If other users gained access to your network, transmitted information can
be disclosed or subject to tampering.
⚫ For transmitting data over an internal network, physically or logically
segment the network and restrict access using standard controls such as
firewalls and other relevant features supported by your device such as
IPTable whitelisting.
⚫ For transmitting data over an external network, encrypt protocol
transmissions over all external connections using an encrypted tunnel, TLS
wrapper or a similar solution.
3.3.3 Cyber Security Password Policy Recommendation

The Schneider Electric password policy is one of the key elements of the Cyber
Security Policy.
Good Practice to Improve Password Definition

● Use common Cyber Security Good Practice for password complexity
definition by using strong passwords.
● Change all passwords from default values when taking the protection
device into use. (User must change password after first login).
● Change passwords regularly. (User must update password after a certain
period of time).
● Use NERC compliant password as much as possible.
● Enforce the use of strong and complexes password as: Caps characters +
Lowercases characters + Numbers + Special characters in one password.
● Set the minimum password length to 10 characters.
● Switch off all communicaton ports that are not use on the device, if
possible.
● Do not reuse old passwords.
Best Practice Concerning Passwords

● Not sharing personal passwords.
● Not displaying passwords during password entry.
● Not transmitting passwords in email or by other means.
● Not saving the passwords on PC’s or other devices.
● Not writing password on any supports.
● Regularly reminding users about best practices concerning password.
3-8 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.4 Configuration of the Local Control Panel (Function Group

LOC)
The configuration of the Local Control Panel includes the configuration of the Bay
Panel and of the Measured Value Panels, and the selection of the control point.
When the graphic display has been fitted then the layout of a bay with its
switchgear units will be shown on the Bay Panel. A Bay Panel usually consists of
one Bay Panel image as a standard but after applying the bay editor from the PC
Access Software Easergy Studio and having loaded a customized Bay Panel it can
be sub-divided into up to eight pages. The graphic display also permits the
display of the Event Panel and the configurable Signal Panel.
To create customized bay types, the “Bay Type Configurator” (BTC), version 2.7
or higher, is needed. Older versions of the BTC can create not compatible hex files
and thus can lead to communication failures.
When the text display has been fitted the Bay Panel will display switching state
signals from external devices (closed, open, intermediate position) and the active
control site (local or remote).
In addition the P638 offers Measured Value Panels, which display the measured
values relevant at a given time.
During normal power system operation; the Bay Panel or – if activated – the
Operation Panel is displayed. If the Operation Panel is activated as an event
occurs, the display switches to the appropriate Event Panel – provided that
measured values have been selected for the Event Panels. In the event of
overload or ground fault events, the display will automatically switch to the
Operation Panel at the end of the event. In the event of a fault, the Fault Panel
remains active until the LED indicators or the fault memories are reset.
If the change enabling command has been issued (LOC: Param. change
enabl.) it will be cancelled after the time period, defined by setting L OC: Hold-
time for Panels has elapsed and the Bay Panel will be called up.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-9

P638 3 Operation
3.4.1 Bay Panel

The P638 supports bay types. User can contact the manufacturer of the P638 to
request the definition of a customized bay type to download into the P638. By
applying the bay editor from the PC Access Software Easergy Studio the user can
also define new bay types.
The activation of the Bay Panel display is described in Chapter 6, (p. 6-1).
Each external device represented in the Bay Panel is identified by an external
device designation (see Section 3.37.3, (p. 3-233)).
With the graphic display fitted the Bay Panel displays the up-to-date status of the
selected bay as a single (phase) diagram. The user can choose between
character sets to represent switch gear on the bay panel. The character sets are
described in Section 6.12.2.1.1, (p. 6-24). The user can also define the
designations for busbars and busbar sections (see descriptions of parameters
LOC : De sign ation b usbar 1 or LO C: D es ignat. bus se ct.1, respectively,
in the “Settings” chapter).
The display of external device designations can also be disabled. The display of
the control point (local or remote control) and interlocking can also be disabled.
The switchgear unit to be controlled needs to be selected first. The selection is
cancelled if the return time for illumination (LO C: Re turn time illumin.) or the
return time for selection (L OC: Re tu rn ti me s el ect.) has elapsed.
3-10 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
LOC:
DEV01: Character set
Designat. ext. dev. [ 221 038 ]
[ 210 000 ]
LOC: LOC:
Displ. ext.dev.desig Fct.asg. num. displ.
[ 221 032 ] [ 221 041 ]
LOC: LOC:
Display L/R Fct. asg. bar displ.
[ 221 070 ] [ 221 042 ]
LOC: LOC:
Displ. interl. stat. Bar display type
[ 221 071 ] [ 221 039 ]
LOC: LOC:
Designation busbar 1 Scal. bar display I
[ 221 033 ] [ 221 044 ]
LOC: LOC:
Designation busbar 2 Scal. bar display V
[ 221 034 ] [ 221 045 ]
LOC: LOC:
Designation busbar 3 Display bar scale
[ 221 043 ] [ 221 046 ]
LOC: LOC:
Designat. bus sect.1 Return time select.
[ 221 035 ] [ 221 030 ]
LOC: LOC:
Designat. bus sect.2 Return time illumin.
[ 221 036 ] [ 003 023 ]
BB1
Q0
LOC:
Return t.select. trg
305 551
19Z5003A
Fig. 3-3: Bay panel (graphic display).
LOC:
DEV01: Display L/R
Designat. ext. dev. [ 221 070 ]
[ 210 000 ]
LOC:
Displ. interl. stat.
[ 221 071 ]
LOC:
Return time select.
[ 221 030 ]
LOC:
Return time illumin.
[ 003 023 ]
Q0
Remote Locked
LOC:
305 551
45Z8003A
Fig. 3-4: Bay panel (text display).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-11

P638 3 Operation
3.4.1.1 Measured Values Display

The measured values that will be displayed on the Bay Panel can first be selected
separately for the numerical and the bar chart display by an “m out of n”
parameter. Measured values to be displayed in bar chart form must also be
selected for display as numerical measured values. However, not all measured
values that can be displayed in numerical form can also be displayed in bar chart
form. In such cases, a dummy or placeholder must be included in the selection
list for the bar chart display at the same point at which a measured value that
cannot be displayed in bar chart form appears in the selection list for numerical
measured values. For the bar chart display, the orientation of the bar and the
scaling can be selected (the latter separately for the current and voltage data).
Display of the scaling can be disabled.
3.4.1.2 Hold-Time Measured Values Display

With the Bay Panel display the next or the previous configured measured value
may be selected by pressing the keys “cursor down” or “cursor up”. Furthermore
the respective subsequent measured value is displayed when the hold-time
period set for L OC : Hold-t. me as. v.di spl has elapsed. The standard default
for LOC : Hold -t . me as .v.dis pl is Blocked; in this case the automatic change
over feature to the subsequent measured value is not available.
3-12 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.4.2 Signal Panel

The Signal Panel is displayed when it is selected and when at least one signal has
been configured. From all physical and logical binary states that the P638 has
available up to 28 signals can be selected for display on the Signal Panel by an
“m out of n” parameter. This occurs without influencing the Event Panel, which is
additionally available. When more signals are selected for display than the LC
display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of signals
at intervals defined by the setting for LOC: Hold-time f or Pan els or when the
appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed. If automatic switching to
the Signal Panel is configured at LOC: Au t. activ.Sign. Panel then the Signal
Panel is automatically selected when there is a change of state for a signal
configured in the panel.
With the parameterLOC: Stat.i nd. Si gn. Pan elit is possible to differentiate
between the states “signal active/available” and “signal inactive/not available”
shown on the Signal Panel. This is shown by the “clear to black” square alone
and the simultaneous change over from “normal” display to “highlighting” of text
in the lines. The type of signaling and the clearing, which may become necessary
is selected by setting LOC : In di cat.Si gn.P ane l.
LOC:
Fct. Signal Panel
[ 221 072 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
m out of n
Signal 3 LOC: LOC:
Autom. return time Autom. return time
[ 003 014 ]
Signal n
LOC: LOC:
Selected signals Hold-time for Panels Hold-time for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
LOC:
LOC: Aut.activ.Sign.Panel
Indicat.Sign.Panel [ 221 073 ]
[ 221 075 ]
LOC:
Stat.ind.Sign.Panel
[ 221 074 ]
0: Without signalling 0
1: Flashing box 1 ≥1 LOC:

Sign.caus.Sign.Panel
2: Flashing rows 2 [ 221 078 ]
&
c
Selection
1)
LOC:
Chg.Sig.Panel stat.
[ 221 076 ]
Sig. Panel
LOC:
1) Chg.Sig.Panel flash.
[ 221 077 ]
1) Keys, local control
44Z5209A
Fig. 3-5: Signal Panel.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-13

P638 3 Operation
3.4.3 Operation Panel

The Operation Panel is displayed after the set return time has elapsed, provided
that at least one measured value has been configured.
The user can select which of the measured operating values will be displayed on
the Operation Panel by means of an “m out of n” parameter. When more
measured operating values are selected for display than the LC display can
accommodate, then the display will either switch to the next set of measured
operating values at intervals defined by the setting for LOC: Hold-time for
Pa nels or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
LOC:
Fct. Operation Panel
[ 053 007 ]
Measured value 1 m out of n

Measured value 2
Measured value 3 LOC:

Autom. return time LOC:
[ 003 014 ] Autom. return time
Measured value N
LOC:
Selected meas. val. Hold-time for Panels LOC:
[ 031 075 ] Hold-time for Panels
FT_RC:
Record. in progress S1 1 ≥1 C
[ 035 000 ]
R1
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ] Operation Panel
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
47Z1301A
Fig. 3-6: Operation Panel.
3-14 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.4.4 Fault Panel

The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault,
provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault Panel
remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are cleared.
The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault
Panel by setting an “m out of n” parameter. When more measured fault values
are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display
will either switch to the next set of measured fault values at intervals defined by
the setting for L OC: H old-time for Pan els or when the appropriate key on the
local control panel is pressed.
LOC:
Fct. Fault Panel
[ 053 003 ]

Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value N
Selected meas. val.
LOC:
Hold-time for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1 Fault Panel
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z01EJA
Fig. 3-7: Fault panel.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-15

P638 3 Operation
3.4.5 Overload Panel

The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel
when there is an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been
configured. The Overload Panel remains on display until the overload ends,
unless a fault occurs. In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel.
The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload
Panel by setting a “m out of n” parameter. When more measured fault values are
selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will
either switch to the next set of measured fault values at intervals defined by the
setting for L OC : Hold -ti me f or P ane ls or when the appropriate key on the
local control panel is pressed.
LOC:
Fct. Overload Panel
[ 053 005 ]

Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Select. meas. values

LOC:
Hold-time for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1 Overload Panel
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z0140A
Fig. 3-8: Overload Panel.
3-16 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.4.6 Selection of the Control Point

Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. Switching
between local and remote control is achieved by using either the L/R key on the
local control panel or an external key switch. The position of this external key
switch is checked by an appropriately configured binary signal input
(configuration at MAI N: I np. asg. L /R key s w.).
If the binary signal input is configured to L/R key switch then the L/R key on the
local control panel is without function when the graphic display is fitted.
This setting for L OC: Fct. ass ign . L/R ke y determines whether the switching
using either the L/R key or the key switch is between local and remote control
(L↔R) or between local+remote and local control (R&L↔L).
If only remote control is enabled then there will be a local access blocking. If only
local control is enabled then there will be a remote access blocking.
LOC:
Fct. assign. L/R key
[ 225 208 ]
1: R <-> L
2: R & L <-> L
1)
& & 1
& & 2,3 LOC:

Rem.acc.block.active
& [ 221 004 ]
Local 1
& LOC:
Remote Loc.acc.block.active
2
[ 221 005 ]
&
Remote & Local 3 LOC:
Remote&local control
305 560
MAIN:
Inp.asg. L/R key sw.
[ 221 008 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal 3
Signal n
Without function
Selected signal

19Z5261C
Fig. 3-9: Selection of the control point.
3.4.7 Configurable Clear Key

The P638 has a Clear key – –, to which one or more reset functions can be
assigned by selecting the required functions at L OC : Fct. re set key. Details on
the functions' resetting features are given in Section 3.13.16, (p. 3-112).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-17

P638 3 Operation
3.5 Communication Interfaces

The P638 has a PC interface as a standard component. Communication module A
is optional and can be provided with one or two communication channels –
depending on the design version. Communication between the P638 and the
control station’s computer is through the communication module A. Setting and
interrogation is possible through all the P638's interfaces.
If the communication module A with two communication channels is installed,
settings for two communication interfaces will be available. The setting of
communication interface 1 (COMM1) may be assigned to the physical
communication channels 1 or 2 (see Section 3.13.17, (p. 3-114)). If the COMM1
settings have been assigned to communication channel 2, then the settings of
communication interface 2 (COMM2) will automatically be active for
communication channel 1.
COMM2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P638 if its PC interface
has been de-activated. As soon as the PC interface is used to transmit data,
COMM2 becomes “dead”. It will only be enabled again when the “time-out”
period for the PC interface has elapsed.
If tests are run on the P638, the user is advised to activate the test mode. In this
way the PC or the control system will recognize all incoming test signals
accordingly (see Section 3.13.18, (p. 3-115)).
Ethernet communication module is optional and can be provided with following
options:
● 1 RJ45
● 1 RJ45 + 1 Fiber
● 1 RJ45 + 2 Fiber
● 3 RJ45
If the Ethernet communication module is installed, IEC settings will be available
and can be configured via Easergy Studio. Communication between the P638 and
the control station can be through Ethernet protocols.
NOTICE
⚫ To improve Cyber Security, disable the Ethernet communication in
environments where effective anti malware solutions have not been taken
into use.
3-18 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.5.1 PC Interface (Function Group PC)

Communication between the P638 and a PC is through the PC interface. In order
for data transfer between the P638 and the PC to function, several settings must
be made in the P638.
There is support software available as an accessory for P638 control.
PC:
Bay address
[ 003 068 ]
PC:
Device address
[ 003 069 ]
PC:
Baud rate
[ 003 081 ]
PC:
Parity bit
[ 003 181 ]
PC:
Spontan. sig. enable
[ 003 187 ]
PC:
Select. spontan.sig.
[ 003 189 ]
PC:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 084 ]
PC:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 185 ]
PC:
Delta V
[ 003 055 ]
PC:
Delta I
[ 003 056 ]
PC:
Sig./meas.val.block. PC:
[ 003 086 ] Delta P
[ 003 059 ]
0 PC:
Delta f
1 [ 003 057 ]
0: No PC:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel
1: Yes [ 003 155 ]
PC:
Delta t
MAIN: [ 003 058 ]
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
PC:
Time-out
PC: [ 003 188 ]
Command blocking
[ 003 182 ]
0: No
1: Yes
PC interface
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
19Z80ECA
Fig. 3-10: PC interface settings.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-19

P638 3 Operation
3.5.2 Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1)

There are several different interface protocols available at the communication
interface 1. The following user-selected interface protocols are available for use
with the P638:
● IEC 60870‑5‑103, "Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the
informative interface of protection equipment, first edition, 1997-12
(corresponds to VDEW / ZVEI Recommendation, “Protection communication
companion standard 1, compatibility level 2”, February 1995 edition) with
additions covering control and monitoring
● IEC 870‑5‑101, "Telecontrol equipment and systems ‑ Part 5: Transmission
protocols ‑ Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks,"
first edition 1995‑11
● ILS‑C, proprietary protocol of Schneider Electric
● MODBUS
● DNP 3.0
● COURIER
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in
the P638.
Communication interface 1 can be blocked through a binary signal input. In
addition, a signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary
signal input.
3-20 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
COMM1:
Command block. USER
[ 003 172 ]
0: No COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command block. EXT
[ 003 173 ]
COMM1:
Basic IEC870-5 enabl
[ 003 215 ] COMM1:
Communicat. protocol
[ 003 167 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Addit. -101 enable
[ 003 216 ]
COMM1:
0 Selected protocol Selected protocol
304 415
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Addit. ILS enable
[ 003 217 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
MODBUS enable
[ 003 220 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
DNP3 enable
[ 003 231 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
COURIER enable
[ 103 040 ]
0: No
1: Yes
64Z51FEA
Fig. 3-11: Communication interface 1, selecting the interface protocol.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-21

P638 3 Operation
COMM1: COMM1:
-103 prot. variant Select. spontan.sig.
[ 003 178 ] [ 003 179 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Transm.enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 074 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 175 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Delta V
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 050 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Delta I
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 051 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Delta P
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 054 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Delta f
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 052 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Test monitor on Delta meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 150 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Name of manufacturer Delta t
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 053 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet address ASDU Delta t (energy)
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 151 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Spontan. sig. enable Contin. general scan
[ 003 177 ] [ 003 077 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
IEC 60870-5-103
[ 003 219 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN: COMM1:
Test mode Communic. interface Communication error
[ 037 071 ] 304 422
COMM1:
Sig./meas.block.USER
[ 003 076 ]
0: No COMM1:
Sig./meas.val.block.
1: Yes
[ 037 075 ]
COMM1:
Sig./meas. block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
12Z62FFA
Fig. 3-12: Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 60870‑5-103 interface protocol.
3-22 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Delta t
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 053 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Delta t (energy)
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 151 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Contin. general scan
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 077 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Comm. address length
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 201 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Octet 2 comm. addr.
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 200 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Cause transm. length
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 192 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Test monitor on Address length ASDU
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 193 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Name of manufacturer Octet 2 addr. ASDU
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 194 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet address ASDU Addr.length inf.obj.
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 196 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Spontan. sig. enable Oct.3 addr. inf.obj.
[ 003 177 ] [ 003 197 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Select. spontan.sig. Inf.No.<->funct.type
[ 003 179 ] [ 003 195 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat Time tag length
[ 003 074 ] [ 003 198 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Cycl. data ILS tel. ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv.
[ 003 175 ] [ 003 190 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Delta V ASDU2 conversion
[ 003 050 ] [ 003 191 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Delta I Initializ. signal
[ 003 051 ] [ 003 199 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Delta P Balanced operation
[ 003 054 ] [ 003 226 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415 COMM1: COMM1:
Delta f Direction bit
COMM1: [ 003 052 ] [ 003 227 ]
IEC 60870-5-101
[ 003 218 ] COMM1: COMM1:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel Time-out interval
[ 003 150 ] [ 003 228 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ] COMM1:
[ 003 076 ]
0 Comm. interface COMM1:

Communication error
1 304 422
0: No
COMM1:
1: Yes [ 037 075 ]
COMM1:
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ] 19Z51FGA
Fig. 3-13: Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-23

P638 3 Operation
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Transm.enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 074 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 175 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Delta V
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 050 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Delta I
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 051 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Delta P
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 054 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Delta f
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 052 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Test monitor on Delta meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 150 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Name of manufacturer Delta t
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 053 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet address ASDU Delta t (energy)
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 151 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Spontan. sig. enable Contin. general scan
[ 003 177 ] [ 003 077 ]
COMM1:
Select. spontan.sig.
[ 003 179 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
IEC 60870-5, ILS
[ 003 221 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ] COMM1:
Comm. interface Communication error
304 422
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 076 ]
0: No COMM1:
1: Yes [ 037 075 ]
COMM1:
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
19Z51FHA
Fig. 3-14: Communication interface 1, settings for the ILS-C interface protocol.
3-24 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
COMM1: COMM1:
MODBUS prot. variant Test monitor on
[ 003 214 ] [ 003 166 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Reg.asg. selec. cmds
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 210 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Reg.asg. selec. sig.
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 211 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Reg.asg. sel. m.val.
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 212 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Reg.asg. sel. param.
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 213 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Delta t (MODBUS)
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 152 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Autom.event confirm.
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 249 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
MODBUS
[ 003 223 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Commun. interface Communication error
304 422
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
19Z50FJB
Fig. 3-15: Communication interface 1, settings for the MODBUS protocol.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-25

P638 3 Operation
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Link Confirm.Timeout
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 244 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Link Max. Retries
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 245 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Appl.Confirm.Timeout
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 246 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Appl. Need Time Del.
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 247 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Ind./cl. bin. inputs
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 232 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Ind./cl. bin.outputs
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 233 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP3 Ind./cl. bin. count.
[ 003 240 ] [ 003 234 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Test monitor on Ind./cl. analog inp.
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 235 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Phys. Charact. Delay Ind./cl. analog outp
[ 003 241 ] [ 003 236 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
COMM1: Phys. Char. Timeout Delta meas.v. (DNP3)
Selected protocol [ 003 242 ] [ 003 250 ]
304 415
COMM1: COMM1: COMM1:

DNP3 Link Confirm. Mode Delta t (DNP3)
[ 003 230 ] [ 003 243 ] [ 003 248 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN: COMM1:
Test mode Commun. interface Communication error
[ 037 071 ] 304 422
19Z50AZA
Fig. 3-16: Communication interface 1, settings for the DNP 3.0 protocol.
3-26 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Test monitor on
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 166 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Command selection
[ 003 071 ] [ 103 042 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
COMM1: Parity bit Signal selection
Selected protocol [ 003 171 ] [ 103 043 ]
304 415
COMM1: COMM1: COMM1:

COURIER Dead time monitoring Meas. val. selection
[ 103 041 ]
[ 003 176 ] [ 103 044 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Parameter selection
[ 003 202 ] [ 103 045 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER COMM1: COMM1:
[ 003 170 ] Octet comm. address Delta t (COURIER)
[ 003 072 ] [ 103 046 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN: COMM1:
Test mode Commun. interface Communication error
[ 037 071 ] 304 422
19Z51BAA
Fig. 3-17: Communication interface 1, settings for the COURIER protocol.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-27

P638 3 Operation
3.5.2.1 COMM1 – Checking Spontaneous Signals

For interface protocols based on IEC 60870‑5‑103, IEC 870‑5‑101, or ILS-C it is
possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the
control station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered using setting
parameters.
COMM1:
Sel.spontan.sig.test
[ 003 180 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
COMM1:
Test spont.sig.start
[ 003 184 ]
COMM1:
Spontan. sig. start
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
COMM1:
Test spont.sig. end
[ 003 186 ]
COMM1:
Spontan. sig. end
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
48Z50FKA
Fig. 3-18: COMM1 – Checking spontaneous signals.
3.5.2.2 Checking Switchgear Contact Positions and Signals

When checking during test operations with the interface protocols based on
IEC 60870‑5‑103 it is possible to trigger signals (SIG) and contact positions (DEV)
from the control part.
The following parameters are available:
● (221 105) CO MM1: Sel. pos . de v.tes t
Selection possibilities:
o Not assigned
o DEV01 ... DEV10
● (221 106) C OMM1 : Te st pos iti on de v.
o don't execute
o execute open
o execute close
o execute intermed.
3-28 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.5.3 Communication Interface 2 (Function Group COMM2)

Communication interface 2 supports the IEC 60870‑5‑103 interface protocol.
It is provided only on the Serial communication module. It is intended for remote
setting access only.
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in
the P638.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-29

P638 3 Operation
COMM2:
Line idle state
[ 103 165 ]
COMM2:
Baud rate
[ 103 071 ]
COMM2:
Parity bit
[ 103 171 ]
COMM2:
Dead time monitoring
[ 103 176 ]
COMM2:
Mon. time polling
[ 103 202 ]
COMM2:
Octet comm. address
[ 103 072 ]
COMM2:
Name of manufacturer
[ 103 161]
COMM2:
Octet address ASDU
[ 103 073 ]
COMM2:
Spontan. sig. enable
[ 103 177 ]
COMM2: COMM2:
General enable USER Select. spontan.sig.
[ 103 170 ] [ 103 179 ]
COMM2:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
0
[ 103 074 ]
1
COMM2:
0: No Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 103 175 ]
1: Yes
COMM2:
Delta V
[ 103 050 ]
COMM2:
Delta I
[ 103 051 ]
COMM2:
Sig./meas.block.USER COMM2:
Delta P
[ 103 076 ]
[ 103 054 ]
0 COMM2:
Delta f
1 [ 103 052 ]
0: No COMM2:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel
1: Yes [ 103 150 ]
COMM2:
MAIN: Delta t
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 103 053 ]
[ 038 046 ]
COMM2:
Command block. USER
[ 103 172 ]
0: No
1: Yes
Commun. interface
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
40Z5070A
Fig. 3-19: Settings for communication interface 2.
3.5.3.1 COMM2 – Checking Spontaneous Signals

It is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to
the control station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered via the local
control panel.
3-30 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
COMM2:
[ 103 180 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
COMM2:
[ 103 184 ]
COMM2:
Spontan. sig. start
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
COMM2:
Test spont.sig. end
[ 103 186 ]
COMM2:
Spontan. sig. end
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
48Z50FLA
Fig. 3-20: COMM2 – Checking spontaneous signals.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-31

P638 3 Operation
3.5.4 Communication Interface Ethernet (Function Groups IEC and

GOOSE)
NOTICE
⚫ Substation communication via Ethernet interface is without encryption.
User is requested to secure the network communication according to
applicable standards.
3.5.4.1 Communication Module
From the software version -661, the Single Ethernet module and
RedundantEthernet module are available for the devices of the Easergy MiCOM 30
Series. To get information of the former Ethernet module, please refer to the
manuals before -661.
The P638 Transformer Differential Protection Device can be fitted with new
communication module, the Single Ethernet module or Redundant Ethernet
module. (See Chapter 15, (p. 15-1) for the exact order information and
Section 5.7, (p. 5-27) for the location and connection diagrams.)
The Ethernet modules are developed to support PRP/HSR/RSTP redundancy
protocol, conformance of IEC 61850 edition 1 and 2, Cyber Security (CS) and
Flexible Product Naming (fPN).
3.5.4.1.1 Hardware Modules

Four modules are available for Ethernet communication, two Single Ethernet
Boards (SEB) and two Redundant Ethernet Boards (REB). Easergy MiCOM 30
Series are constructed from standard hardware modules.
The Ethernet module is fitted into Slot 2 of the P638. For REB, each module has
three MAC addresses, one for the managed embedded switch and two for the
P638. The following table lists the item numbers of the Ethernet module variants:
Type Item number Description Width
A 9652161 SEB copper: 1 * RJ45 + 1 * IRIG-B 4 TE
A 9652162 SEB fiber: 1 * RJ45 + 1 * SFP-LC + 1 * IRIG-B 4 TE

Tab. 3-5: Single Ethernet Module variants.
Type Item number Description Width
A 9652159 REB copper: 3 * RJ45 + 1 * IRIG-B 4 TE
A 9652160 REB fiber: 1 * RJ45 + 2 * SFP-LC + 1 * IRIG-B 4 TE

Tab. 3-6: Redundant Ethernet Module variants.
3-32 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
Only Redundant Ethernet module can support PRP/HSR/RSTP protocol.
3.5.4.1.2 Redundancy Protocols

The following list shows Schneider Electric’s implementation of Ethernet
redundancy, which has three variants with embedded IEC 61850, plus PRP, HSR
and RSTP redundancy protocols.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-33

P638 3 Operation
Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP IEC 62439‑3 (2012))

● The PRP uses two independent Ethernet networks that operate in parallel.
The PRP is a “redundancy in the devices” method that provides bumpless
switchover in case of failure or reintegration. Furthermore, it provides the
shortest Ethernet network reconfiguration time as network reconfiguration
is seamless.
High-availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol

(HSR IEC 62439‑3 (2012))
● HSR method is independent of any industrial Ethernet protocol and typically
used in a ring topology. Nodes within the ring are restricted to be HSR-
capable bridging nodes, thus avoiding the use of dedicated bridges. A
simple HSR network consists of doubly attached bridging nodes, each
having two ring ports, interconnected by full-duplex links.
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP IEEE 802.1w)

● This protocol variant offers compatibility with any RSTP device. RSTP is a
standard used to quickly reconnect a network fault by finding an alternative
path, allowing loop-free network topology. Although RSTP can recover
network faults quickly, the fault recovery time depends on the number of
devices and the topology.
3.5.4.1.3 RSTP Configuration
Fig. 3-21: RSTP configuration.
3-34 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
Parameter Description
Priority The port priority in the spanning tree.
The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the
Max age
Root Bridge.
Forward delay The delay used by Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding.
Hello time The interval between periodic transmissions of BPDU message.

Tab. 3-7: RSTP configurable parameters.
From the software version -661, Easergy MiCOM P30 redundant brick configuration
tool is available to configure and read the RSTP configurations.
3.5.4.1.4 Generic Functions for All Redundant Ethernet Modules
Ethernet 100Base Fx/Tx

The fiber optic ports are full duplex 100 Mbps LC connectors or wire RJ45
supports 100 Mbps.
Forwarding
The devices from the families Easergy MiCOM 30, 40, the C264 and the MiCOM H
switches support store and forward mode. The MiCOM switch forwards messages
with known addresses to the appropriate port. The messages with unknown
addresses, the broadcast messages and the multicast messages are forwarded
out to all ports except the source port. MiCOM switches do not forward error
packets, 802.3x pause frames or local packets.
Forwarding is active when HSR or RSTP protocol is selected.
Priority Tagging
802.1p priority is enabled on all ports.
Simple Network Management Protocol – SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is the network protocol developed
to manage devices in an IP network. SNMP relies on a Management Information
Base (MIB) that contains information about parameters to supervise. The MIB
format is a tree structure, with each node in the tree identified by a numerical
Object IDentifier (OID). Each OID identifies a variable that can be read or set
using SNMP with the appropriate software. The information in the MIBs is
standardized.
Various SNMP client software tools can be used with the Series 30, 40, C264 and
Hx5x range. Schneider Electric recommends using an SNMP MIB browser which
can perform the basic SNMP operations such as GET, GETNEXT, RESPONSE. To
access the network using SNMP, use the IP address of the embedded switch in
the Redundant Ethernet module.
For further information, please contact Schneider Electric.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-35

P638 3 Operation
Network Time Protocol – NTP

Network Time Protocol is supported by both the P638 and the Redundant
Ethernet switch. NTP is used to synchronize the clocks of computer systems over
packet-switched, variable-latency data networks. A jitter buffer is used to reduce
the effects of variable latency introduced by queuing in packet switched
networks, ensuring a continuous data stream over the network.
The P638 receives the synchronization from the NTP server. This is done using
the IP address of the NTP server entered into the P638 from the IED Configurator
software.
3.5.4.2 Communication Protocols
3.5.4.2.1 IEC 61850

IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international
standard. The main target of IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This
includes the capability of two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED),
manufactured by the same company or different companies, to exchange data
for combined operation.
This communication standard IEC 61850 has now created an open and common
basis for communication from the process control level down to the network
control level, for the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands.
For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field
device, a data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data
model, specifically created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of
data between the devices and all process control installations interested in such
information. In order to facilitate engineering at the process control level a
standardized description file of the device, based on XML, is created with the
help of the data model. This file can be imported and processed further by the
relevant configuration program used by the process control device. This makes
possible an automated creation of process variables, substations and signal
images.
Available is the following documentation providing the description of the
IEC 61850 data model which is used with the P638:
● ICD file based on XML in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description
Language) with a description of data, properties and services, available
from the P638, that are to be imported into the configuration tool “IED
Configurator” or into a system configurator.
● PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents:
o PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an
overview of available services.
o MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview
of available object types.
o ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of
parameter addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used
by the P638 with the device data model as per IEC 61850.
3.5.4.2.1.1 Client Log-on

Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system,
as is common with other protocols. Instead, server or client functionalities, as
defined in the “Abstract Communication Service Interface” (ACSI, IEC 61850‑7‑2),
are assigned to the devices. A “server” is always that device which provides
information to other devices. A client may log on to this server in order to receive
3-36 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
information, for instance “reports”. In its function as server the P638 can supply
up to 16 clients, linked into the network, with spontaneous or cyclic information.
3.5.4.2.1.2 Clock Synchronization

With IEC 61850 clock synchronization is effected via the SNTP protocol, defined
as standard for Ethernet. Here the P638 functions as an SNTP client.
For clock synchronization one can choose between the operating modes Anycast
from SNTP Server or Request from Server. With the first operating mode
synchronization occurs by a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all
devices in the network, and in the second operating mode the P638 requests a
device-specific time signal during a settable cycle.
Two SNTP servers may be set. In this case, clock synchronization is preferably
performed by the first server. The second server is only reverted to if no signal is
received from the first server.
When looking at the source priority for clock synchronization, which is set at the
MAIN function then, by selecting COMM1/IEC, synchronization per IEC 61850 is
automatically active but only if this communication protocol is applied.
3.5.4.2.1.3 Generating Datasets, Reporting

The specific project related feature of the P638’s communications behavior is
determined by the configuration of datasets, reports and high priority
transmission methods. A piece of information must be included in a dataset so as
to be transmitted as a signal. A dataset is a list to transmit certain data objects.
The selection of data objects and the resulting length of the dataset is
determined by the application; merely the GOOSE capacity, i.e. the maximum
size of a dataset to be transmitted by GOOSE, is limited to 1500 bytes.
It is not possible to read the IEC configuration back from the P638 if the “Dataset”
sizes exceed the GOOSE size limit significantly. Therefore it is recommended to
limit the “Dataset” size(s) to 100% of the GOOSE capacity. Too large a dataset can
spoil IEC 61850 communication. Hence, the dataset size limit of 100% of the
GOOSE capacity should not be exceeded, neither for GOOSE nor for reports.
Data objects provided by the P638 are available for selection with a structure as
specified by IEC 61850. Within the quality descriptor for each piece of
information the invalid bit and the test bit are served according to the P638’s
state; the other attributes are not set. Any number of datasets may be created
with the IED Configurator. Saving datasets at System\LLN0 is compulsory. The
knowledge of dataset content is imperative for decoding and evaluating received
signals. Configuration files possess a listing of all datasets with a description of
all data objects included.
Next to their use with high priority transmission methods (see
Section 3.5.4.2.1.9, (p. 3-43)) datasets are used mainly for reporting. The P638
provides up to 16 unbuffered reports and 8 buffered reports independent of the
number of clients logged-on. Management is arranged into 16 Unbuffered Report
Control Blocks (urcbA to urcbP) and 8 Buffered Report Control Blocks (brcbA to
brcbH). Whereas with unbuffered reporting pieces of information may be lost
during a communications failure, the buffered report control blocks support a
buffered transmission which is required for the uninterrupted writing of events. A
pre-defined dataset may be assigned to each report which will then determine
which data object will be transmitted with the relevant report. Assigning datasets
is not limited; the same dataset may be referenced in various reports or even in
GOOSEs.
The P638 can serve up to 16 clients. Each client can log-on to any number of
available reports. One unbuffered report can be allocated to max. 8 clients, and
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-37

P638 3 Operation
one buffered report can be allocated to max. 4 clients. A client is then able to
activate the wanted report for himself and to set the transmission behavior to his
requirements. The system concept with intended clients must be taken into
account when datasets are assigned to the reports.
Reports are not received by the P638.
3.5.4.2.1.4 Transmitting Modeled Signals Not Provided by the IEC 61850 Data Model
In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional
number of up to 16 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the
P638 to be transmitted via reporting. A selection of state signals (shuttling to
communications) is made by setting IEC: SigGGIO1 selection. The data
object indexes defined for SigGGIO1 must follow the sequence given for the ‘m
out of n’ selection for the state signals. The indexes SigGGIO1.ST.ind1 to
SigGGIO1.ST.ind16 may then be included in the datasets just as the other data
objects.
3.5.4.2.1.5 Single Commands

Single commands (e.g. short command, long command, persistent command)
are configured with the operating program. Sending commands to the P638 can
be carried out from all clients that have previously logged-on to the P638. But
only one command at a time is carried out. The operating mode Direct control
with normal security is provided for single commands.
3.5.4.2.1.6 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units

Configuration of control of switchgear devices for the IEC 61850 is only possible
with a special configuration software, the IED Configurator.
Control of switchgear units can be carried out from all clients that have
previously logged on to the P638. Only one control command is executed at a
time, i.e. further control requests issued by other clients during the execution of
such a command are rejected. The following operating modes [IC ]: ctlMode l
are available to control external devices by clients and they can be individually
set for each switchgear device:
● Status only
● Direct control with enhanced security
● SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security
When set to the operating mode Select before operate the switchgear unit is
selected by the client before the control command is issued. Because of this
selection the switchgear unit is reserved for the client. Control requests issued by
other clients are rejected. If after a selection no control command is issued by
the client the P638 resets this selection after a settable timeout period [IC ]:
sb oT imeout (default: 2 minutes) has elapsed.
If with a system application it must be ensured that only one control command at
a time is being processed system wide ("uniqueness") then interlocking of
secondary devices among themselves is setup with GOOSE. For further details
see description of function group GOOSE.
The switchgear device’s contact positions are signaled to the clients with the
reports.
Setting parameters labeled with brackets – i. e. “[ I C ] :…” – instead of a normal

function group are set with the “IED Configurator”. They cannot be modified from
the local control panel (HMI), nor with the operating program.
There is a separate Chapter “IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator” with a
description of all such setting parameters.
3-38 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.5.4.2.1.7 Originator Category

The Originator is an information type defined by IEC 61850, which is sent with
switch commands and position signals of switchgear units. This kind of data
consists of two information items:
● Originator Identification: This is text describing the originator of the switch
command. (If unknown, then an empty text string is sent.)
● Originator Category: This is the originator of the command according to a
list of standardized categories.
The range of values of the Originator Category, as listed in the following table, is
supported.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-39

P638 3 Operation
Originator Originator Use Case / Comment

category Identification
1 remote-control See note [1] The control command is sent by an operator at station level.
(at the end of
this table).
2 automatic-remote See note [1]. The control command is sent by an automatic function at
station level.
3 station-control See note [1]. The control command is sent by an operator at network
level.
4 automatic-station See note [1]. The control command is sent by an automatic function at
network level.
5 bay-control Local HMI The control command is generated at the local HMI of the
Control P638.
6 bay-control Local EXT The control command is sent via binary input (see note [2])
Control by an operator at an external local control panel, using the
setting
● (221 061) MA IN: El ectri cal contr ol = Local
and any of the following input signals:
● DEV xx: Inp.asg.e l .ct rl .open
● DEVxx: In p.asg. el. ctr.cl ose .
7 remote-control Remote EXT The control command is sent via binary input (see note [2])
Control by an operator at an external local control panel, using the
setting
● (221 061) MA IN: El e ctrical con trol = Remote
and any of the following input signals:
● DEV xx: Inp.asg.e l .ctrl .open
● DEV xx: In p.asg. e l. ctr.cl ose .
8 process Spontaneous A trip or close command which is generated by a protection

Process Event function.
Usually this is a circuit breaker trip or a close command from
the ARC function, regardless whether originating from an
internal function of the P638, from external devices or a
manual command.
The internal commands are as follows:
● (035 071) MA IN : Ge n. trip comm an d
● (037 009) MA IN : C lose comman d
Examples of external signals that can be assigned to these
two commands:
● (037 019) MA IN: Parall e l trip 1 EXT
● (039 054) MA IN : Man. M-tri p cmd1 EXT
● (039 056) MA IN: Man . M-trip cmd2 EXT
● (041 022) MA IN: Man. cl ose cmd. EXT
(See also note [2].)
3-40 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
Originator Originator Use Case / Comment

category Identification
9 process Spontaneous There is a spontaneous position change of the switchgear

Process Event device.
Possible causes:
● A manual switch command
● The operation of another protection and control device
Further possible causes:
● Loss of supply voltage of electrical input signals
● Faulty wiring
● Faulty switchgear device
(However, this usually results in an intermediate position 00
or 11 of the switchgear device.)
10 process IED Restart Power-up or restart of the P638, intentionally or

spontaneously. Possible causes:
● Loss of the auxiliary supply voltage of the P638
● Commissioning activities
● Operation of self-monitoring of the P638
11 maintenance Test Mode The P638 is in test mode.

Operation The test mode can be activated either by setting parameter
● (003 012) MA IN: Test mode USER
or by the binary signal
● (037 070) MAIN: Test mode EXT
(See also note [2].)
[1]: The P638 copies the Originator Identification from the command request into
the information report.
[2]: External binary signals can be received via various interfaces:

● Opto-coupler inputs
● InterMiCOM protection communication
● GOOSE substation communication
● Assignment of LOGIC outputs
The P638 does never send the Originator Category “automatic-bay”. In all
protection devices from the Easergy MiCOM 30 family, Automatic Reclose is
implemented as part of the protection functionality, and therefore it is treated as
process, see table row No. 8 above.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-41

P638 3 Operation
UC 7
UC 1,2
Network
HMI
Trip/close by external
Gateway protection or control
UC 7
UC 3,4 UC 10 , 11
UC 9
Circuit
Station
breaker
HMI UC 6, 7 UC 5 UC 8
F1
F2
t
F3
F4
F5
F6 I
Binary signal
Communication link
Internal interface 12Z7312D
Fig. 3-22: Use cases in the network context. The “UC” numbers refer to Originator Categories in the table above.
3-42 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.5.4.2.1.8 Fault Transmission

Including fault transmission for the IEC 61850 in the configuration is only possible
with the IED Configurator.
Transmission of fault files is supported per “File Transfer”. COMTRADE fault files
in the P638 are transmitted uniformly either as ASCII or binary formatted files.
Fault transmission can be cancelled from the configuration.
3.5.4.2.1.9 High Priority Transmission of Information

Whereas normal server-client services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP
level the high priority transmission of information is carried out directly at
Ethernet level. Furthermore messages in such a particular form can be received
by all participants in the relevant sub-network, independent of their server or
client function. They are deployed in instances where high speed transmission of
information is wanted between two or more devices. Applications, for example,
are reverse interlocking, transfer trip or decentralized substation interlock.
The standard IEC 61850 provides the Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
(GOOSE) for high priority transmission of information. The GOOSE enables
transmission of all data formats available in the data model, such as binary
information, integer values, two-pole contact position signals or analog measured
values. The P638 supports receipt and evaluation of GOOSE including binary
information and two-pole contact position signals from external devices.
3.5.4.2.1.10 Setting Group Control Block

The setting-group-control-block (SGCB) model allows for an instance to have
several values that can be used one at a time. The SGCB provides mechanisms
to switch between several values of one or more data objects. Values that belong
together build the setting group.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-43

P638 3 Operation
3.5.4.2.2 Virtual Local Area Network
From the software version -661, VLAN is available for the devices of the Easergy
MiCOM 30 Series.
Configuration of VLAN features is done with IED Configurator.
A virtual LAN (VLAN) is any broadcast domain that is partitioned and isolated in a
computer network at the data link layer (OSI layer 2). VLANs work through tags
within network packets and tag handling in networking systems - recreating the
appearance and functionality of network traffic that is physically on a single
network but acts as if it is split between separate networks. It is possible to
assign traffic to different VLANs to allow the separation of the traffic while using
a single physical network.
In the table below shows the link between the Hardware modules/ ports and IED
configurator inclusive requested VLAN support capability. Only physical interface
1 is to support VLANs in fixed number (2 VLANs for physical interface 1).
Interface 1 & Interface 2 &

Module Type Interface 1 Interface 2
VLAN support VLAN support
REB fiber Port A/B Port C Yes No
REB copper Port A/B Port C Yes No
SEB fiber Port A Port C Yes No
SEB copper Port C - Yes -

Tab. 3-8: VLAN support capability.
3.5.4.2.3 Port Assignment

Port assignment is the capability to assign TCP/IP services to a dedicated
communication interface. The communication interface can be a physical
interface or a virtual interface of the communication module. The port
assignment can be configured for physical Ethernet interfaces as well as for
VLANs.
Port assignment allows to configure TCP/IP services of networks for the customer
needs.
Default configuration
In general the Ethernet communication module is designed that all TCP/IP
services are working on all physical / virtual interfaces. The factory delivers a
communication module without any specific port assignment. In this case –
without port assignment and without VLAN – the communication services are
available without restriction on the physical Ethernet Interfaces. Depending on
the physical module type all services are working on A/B and C for redundant
modules or A and C for the single fiber module or only C for the single copper
module.
There is one exception the Web services for the CAE tool are only available on
one interface at a time. Please find the details in Section 3.5.4.2.4, (p. 3-46).
Port assignment example

With the port assignment the user can choose which services shall work on which
physical/ virtual interface. This allows for example to configure two networks,
3-44 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
where one network is dedicated to the station bus and the related services and
the second network is dedicated for maintenance services. The user can
configure configuration / administration services (configuration bus) as available
on physical port C and the client application services (station bus) as available on
port A/B.
The port assignment feature is available to together with the VLAN feature since
the firmware version 661. The same scenario as above can be configured with
VLAN together. For example VLAN1 as station bus and VLAN2 as configuration
bus.
TCP/IP service
The following list of TCP/IP services can be assigned to interfaces.
Services Description
IEC 61850 (MMS)1) All MMS services including report
Network time protocol (NTP) NTP Service
IED configuration (TLS) Services via TLS to configure the device from Easergy Studio
Basic administration (SSH/SFTP)1) Update firmware, Read/Write MAC addresses
User management via RBAC

Web services for the CAE tool to configure security and the RBAC
(Webservice)2)
1) Minimum configuration: at least ONE "IEC 61850 (MMS)" and at least ONE "Basic administration
(SSH/SFTP)" should be enabled across all interfaces
2) "User management via RBAC (Webservice)" option can be fully disabled or only enabled on ONE of
the available interfaces
Tab. 3-9: TCP/IP service in port assignment.
Configured example
Fig. 3-23: VLANs and port assignment configured example for IEC 61850 Ed.2.
Note that the "VLAN Id" is configured in HEX.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-45

P638 3 Operation
3.5.4.2.4 CAE-Tool Connectivity (w/wo Port Assignment)

The CAE (EcoStruxureTM Cybersecurity Admin Expert) allows to configure security
rights for the IEDs, e.g. the user names and passwords, access rights and roles
for the user. The CAE tool is working with Web services.
The communication between CAE and IED is restricted to one interface at the
same time. The interface can be changed via port assignment configuration. The
default behaviour of the CAE tool – without port assignment is described in the
following table:
Port Toggle Mode

VLAN Behavior
Assignment (physical Ethernet
Active CAE Web services are available on:
Active port A/B or C)
Depending on the plugged cable to the physical

interfaces the services switch between the physical
No No Ethernet port A/B and C. Yes
● Preferred is physical Ethernet port C
Fixed port assignment

No Yes No
● Physical Ethernet port C or VLAN1 or VLAN2
One of the available physical interface is assigned via

Yes No configuration for the Web services No
● Physical Ethernet port A/B or C
One of the available physical and possible virtual

interfaces is assigned via configuration for the Web
Yes Yes services No
● Physical Ethernet C or VLAN1 or VLAN2

Tab. 3-10: CAE Web services behavior.
3.5.4.2.5 Secure Communication with the Easergy Studio via the Ethernet Interface
The secure communication is valid for IEC 61850 Ed.2.

The communication will be done using port 4422. Ensure this port is left unblocked
on the network.
When P638 and Easergy Studio are connected via the Ethernet interface, they
will communicate securely using SSH (Secure Shell). The benefits of secure
communication are:
● Help in the prevention of unwanted eavesdropping between Easergy Studio
and the IED.
● Help in the prevention of modification of data between Easergy Studio and
the IED.
● Ensure integrity of data.
● Help to prevent replay of data at a later data.
3.5.4.3 Configuration and Enabling

The IEC function group can be included in the configuration by setting the
parameter IE C: Function grou p I EC. This parameter is only visible if the
optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the P638. After activation of
3-46 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
IEC, all data points associated with this function group (setting parameters, IEC
prot.variant etc.) become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting IE C : Gen er al enable
USE R. IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850 Edition 1 or Edition 2 can be selected by
setting IEC : IE C p rot. var ian t. When Redundant Ethernet module is used, the
redundancy protocols PRP/HSR/RSTP can be switched via IEC : ETH COMM
Mode. Port A/B and service port C can be blocked with I EC: Block Port A/B
and I EC: Block Port C.
IEC:
IEC 61850 enable
[ 104 077 ]
IEC:
IEC prot. variant
[ 104 084 ]
IEC:
ETH COMM Mode
[ 104 080 ]
IEC:
Block Port A/B
[ 104 073 ]
IEC:
Block Port C
[ 104 074 ]
IEC:
Switch Config. Bank
[ 104 043 ]
IEC:
SigGGIO1 selection
[ 104 064 ]
IEC:
Diff. local time
[ 104 206]
IEC:
Diff. dayl.sav. time
[ 104 207 ]
IEC:
Switch.dayl.sav.time
[ 104 219 ]
IEC:
Dayl.sav.time start
[ 104 220 ]
IEC:
Dayl.sav.time st. d
[ 104 221 ]
IEC:
Dayl.sav.time st. m
[ 104 222 ]
IEC:
General enable USER IEC:
Dayl.sav.t.st.0:00 +
[ 104 000 ]
[ 104 223 ]
0 IEC:
Dayl.sav.time end
1 [ 104 225 ]
0: No IEC:
Dayl.sav.time end d
1: Yes [ 104 226 ]
IEC:
Dayl.sav.time end m
[ 104 227 ]
IEC:
Dayl.sav.t.end 0:00+
IEC: [ 104 228 ]
Ctrl blocked user
[ 221 125 ]
0: No
1: Yes
Commun. interface IEC:
Comm. link faulty
[ 105 180 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ] IEC:
Control blocked
[ 221 126 ]
48Z93A1A
Fig. 3-24: Settings for communication interface IEC 61850.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-47

P638 3 Operation
The setting parameters from the IEC function group as well as the related GOOSE
function group are not automatically active in the P638. The P638 features two
memory “banks” one of which includes the active setting parameters. The other
memory bank is used with the configuration procedure for parameters from the
IED Configurator and the operating system. Specific project-related extensions of
the IEC 61850 parameters from the IED Configurator are loaded into the P638 by
downloading a .MCL file (Ed1) or .CID file (Ed2). The inactive communication
parameters are activated by executing the command IEC: Switch Config.
Bank. This command may also be issued from the IED Configurator.
System configurator
PACiS SCE
.iid
.scd
.icd
IED Configurator IED Configurator
Operating program
.mcl (Ed1)
.cid (Ed2) .x3v
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
P638
12Z9002A
Fig. 3-25: Configuration according to IEC 61850-6.
3-48 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
IEC 61850 parameters separate from protection device parameters!
IED
Control PC
Processor module
Operating program
Device
parameters
Parameter
switch
Parameter download
IED Ethernet module
Configurator Parameter upload IEC 61850 IEC 61850

parameter parameter
Bank 1 Bank 2
Bank switching to enable the

device parameters
New approach to IED parameter management

19Z7002B
Fig. 3-26: Saving configuration parameters.
3.5.4.3.1 IEC – Checking Spontaneous Signals

It is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to
the control station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered via the local
control panel.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-49

P638 3 Operation
IEC:
[ 104 245 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
IEC:
[ 104 246 ]
IEC:
Spontan. sig. start
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
IEC:
Test spont.sig. end
[ 104 247 ]
IEC:
Spontan. sig. end
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
49Z9002A
Fig. 3-27: IEC – Checking spontaneous signals.
3.5.4.3.2 Checking Switchgear Contact Positions and Signals

When checking during test operations with the interface protocols based on
IEC 61850 it is possible to trigger signals (SIG) and contact positions (DEV) from
the control part.
The following parameters are available:
● (104 248) I EC: Sel . pos . de v.te s t
o Not assigned
o DEV01 ... DEVxx
● (104 249) IEC : Te st posi tion DEV
o don't execute
o execute open
o execute close
o execute intermed.
3-50 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.5.4.4 Communication Interface (Function Group GOOSE)

For high priority exchange of information between individual devices (IEDs) in a
local network, the P638 provides the function group GOOSE as defined in the
standard IEC 61850. GOOSE features high-speed and secure transmission of
information for reverse interlocking, decentralized substation interlock, trip
commands, blocking, enabling, contact position signals and other signals.
GOOSE Messages are only transmitted by switches but not by routers. GOOSE
messages therefore remain in the local network to which the P638 is connected.
This function group is only visible if IE C: IEC 6185 0 enable is set to Yes. After
having configured the GOO SE: Fun ction group GOOSE, all parameters
associated to this function group are then visible and ready to be configured.
Further setting parameters from function group GOOSE are set with the
IED Configurator, but they cannot be modified from the local control panel (MMI)
or with the operating program.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting GO OSE : General
enable US ER.
» Device A » Device B
IEC 61850
Mapping
Easerg Studio
GOOSE: Input 1 ... 128 (SPS)

Ext. Dev 1 ... 128 (DPS)
IED Configurator
System/LLN0/Dataset x
IED Configurator MCL (Ed1) IED Configurator System/GosGGIO1

or
System/LLN0/gcb01 ... 08 Ind1.stVal ... Ind128.stVal
CID (Ed2)
19Z8203C
Fig. 3-28: GOOSE configuration.
3.5.4.4.1 Sending GOOSE

The GOOSE can send up to 8 different GOOSE messages which are managed in 8
GOOSE Control Blocks (gcb01 to gcb08). Information content depends on the
respective dataset assigned to GOOSE. The maximum size of a dataset to be
sent by GOOSE is limited to 1500 bytes. A control display is shown by the IED
Configurator to check this limit.
It is not possible to read the IEC configuration back from the P638 if the “Dataset”
sizes exceed the GOOSE size limit significantly. Therefore it is recommended to
limit the “Dataset” size(s) to 100% of the GOOSE capacity. Too large a dataset can
spoil IEC 61850 communication. Hence, the dataset size limit of 100% of the
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-51

P638 3 Operation
When defining the datasets for GOOSE it is advised to select the individual data
attributes and not the overlapping data objects. By this the amount of data is
kept within a limit and decoding is guaranteed on the receiving end.
When a state change occurs with a selected state signal or a measured value
changes which is greater than the dead band set for the relevant data point then
the complete GOOSE is sent. There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending
time periods. The first send repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the
parameter [IC]: Minimum Cycle Time. The cycles for the following send
repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set with the
parameter [IC ] : I ncreme nt. Should no further state changes occur up to the
time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed [ IC]: Maximum Cycle Time,
then GOOSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the maximum cycle
time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a GOOSE sent, characteristics
such as [IC ]: Mult icast MAC Addres s, [ IC]: Application ID (hex),
[I C]: VLA N I dent ifie r (h ex), [IC] : V LA N P r iority and
[I C]: GOOSE I de nt if ie r must be entered in the IED Configurator settings.
Further characteristics are [ IC ]: Datase t R ef e rence and
[IC]: Config urat ion Revis ion.
Each GOOSE is given the state change index and the number of send repetitions.
3.5.4.4.2 Receiving GOOSE

With GOOSE up to 128 logic binary state signals as well as 128 two-pole contact
position signals from external devices (Ext.Devxx) can be received. For each
state signal or contact position signal to be received a specific GOOSE message
is to be selected, which will contain the information wanted, by setting
[IC ]: Mu lt icast MA C Addres s, [IC] : A ppl ication ID (hex),
[IC]: Source Pat h, [IC] : GOOSE Iden ti f ie r and [IC]: DataSet Refere nce.
With the further setting of [ IC]: Data Obj I nde x / Type, which corresponds to
the GOOSE position index and the information structure of the sending device,
the required information from the chosen GOOSE will be selected. The
identification features "VLAN identifier" and [IC] : Configuration Re vision
that are also included in the GOOSE received will not be evaluated.
These parameters characterizing the information may be taken either from
device or project planning documentation of the sending device or from a
configuration file which is conform to IEC 61850. The IED Configurator will
support the import of .IID, .SCD, .MCL (Ed1) and .CID (Ed2) files when the
"browse function" (virtual key) is applied. The selection and acceptance of
parameters from an existing project planning is distinguished by a simplified and
very reliable data input.
Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its
information. This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE
repetition. If the duration of validity has elapsed without having received this
GOOSE again (i.e. because of a fault in communications), the signals received
will automatically be set to their respective default value
[IC ]: De fault Input V alu e. Which of the possible state values will set the
wanted security grade is dependent on the relevant application.
The following configuration (shuttling to the device functions) of the logic state
signals received from the logic node GosGGIO1 (GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig.
(or Input 2, …, Input 128)) is made on the basis of the selection table of the
binary signal inputs (opto‑coupler inputs).
3-52 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.5.4.4.3 Uniqueness of Control within a System
» Device A » Device B
IED Configurator S1 Studio
Control/LLN0.ST.OrdRun.stVal
IED Configurator
System/LLN0/Dataset
x
IED Configurator MCL (Ed1) IED Configurator System/OrdRunGGIO1

or
System/LLN0/gcb01 ... 08 CID (Ed2) Ind1.stVal ... Ind32.stVal
19Z7004C
Fig. 3-29: Uniqueness of Control.
If with a system application it must be ensured that only one control command at
a time is being processed system wide (“uniqueness”) then interlocking of
secondary devices among themselves is setup with GOOSE. The P638 sets the
status information Control/LLN0.ST.OrdRun.stVal. when it has received a control
command. This information – stored in a dataset – is distributed in the system by
GOOSE and is therefore available to all other devices as an interlocking
condition. The state information is reset and accordingly signaled after
termination of the command sequence.
The P638 is capable to monitor the command status of up to 32 further devices.
With the IED Configurator OrdRunGGIO1.ind1.stVal to OrdRunGGIO1.ind32.stVal
are configured in a similar way to the other GOOSE inputs. A shuttling to the
interlocking equations is not necessary as their consideration within command
checking is automatically enabled when the first binary signal input is configured.
During a signaling receipt phase command effecting will be rejected.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-53

P638 3 Operation
3.6 IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB)

If, for example, a GPS receiver with IRIG-B connection is available, the internal
clock of the P638 can be synchronized to run on GPS time using the optional
IRIG-B interface. It should be noted that the IRIG-B signal holds information on
the day only (day of the current year). Using this information and the year set at
the P638, the P638 calculates the current date (DD.MM.YY).
Disabling and Enabling the IRIG-B Interface

The IRIG‑B interface can be disabled or enabled using a setting parameter.
Synchronization Readiness
If the IRIG-B interface is enabled and receiving a signal, the P638 checks the
received signal for plausibility. Implausible signals are rejected by the P638. If
the P638 does not receive a correct signal in the long run, synchronization will
not be ready any longer.
IRIGB:
General enable USER
[ 023 200 ]
IRIGB:
Enabled
[ 023 201 ]
IRIGB:
Synchron. ready
[ 023 202 ]
IRIGB:
EBR Synchron. ready
[ 023 203 ]
19Z9001A
Fig. 3-30: IRIG‑B interface.
3-54 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.7 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)
Configurable function keys are available on the HMI with text display only.
The P638 provides six freely configurable function keys. A password may be
configured for each function key (e.g. for F1 at F_KE Y: Pas sw ord fu nct .k ey
1), and if a password has been configured then the respective function key will
only be enabled when the configured password is entered.
As an example the operation of function key F1 is shown in Fig. 3-31, (p. 3-56).
After the password has been entered the function key will remain active for the
time period set at F_KEY: R etu rn ti me f ct.keys. Thereafter, the function key
is disabled until the password is entered again. The same is valid for function
keys F2 to F6. Exception: If a function key is configured as a control key a
password request is only issued when the function “Local/Remote switching” has
been assigned to this function key.
Configuration of function keys with a single function

One function may be assigned to each function key (e.g. for F1) at F_K EY: Fct.
assignm. F1 or by selecting a logic state signal (except LOC: Trig. menu
jmp 1 E XT and LOC: Tri g. me nu jmp 2 EX T). The assigned function is
triggered by pressing the respective function key on the P638.
Configuration of function keys with menu jump lists

Instead of a single function each function key may have one of the two menu
jump lists assigned (e.g. for F1) at F_K EY: Fct. as sign m. F1 by selecting the
listing at LOC: Trig. me nu j mp 1 EXT or LO C: Tr ig. men u jmp 2 EXT. The
functions of the selected menu jump list are triggered in sequence by repeated
pressing of the assigned function key.
Both menu jump lists are assembled at LOC: Fct. men u jmp lis t 1 or
LOC : F ct. me nu j mp li st 2. Up to 16 functions such as setting parameters,
event counters and/or event logs may be selected.
LED indicators including the six positioned directly next to the function keys are
configured independently and in this respect there is no relationship to the
respective function key configuration.
Configuration of the READ key

As with L OC : Fct. m e nu j mp lis t 1 or L OC: Fct. menu jmp list 2 up to 16
functions may also be selected from the same menu jump list at LOC : F ct .
read key. They are triggered in sequence by repeated pressing of the “READ”
key.
Configuring function keys as control keys

Each function key may be configured as a control key by selecting one of the
functions at (e.g. for F1) F_KEY: Fct. ass ign m. F1:
● MAI N: Local/Re mote ke y (060 004)
● MA IN : D e vice sel e ction key (060 001)
● MAI N: De vice O P EN ke y (060 002)
● MA IN : D ev ice C LOSE ke y (060 003)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-55

P638 3 Operation
These control functions may only be used sensibly if all four of the above
commands have been configured thus engaging four of the available six function
keys.
Operating mode of the function keys

For each function key the operating mode may be selected (e.g. for F1) at
F_KEY : O pe rat ing mode F1. Here it is possible to select whether the function
key operates as a key or as a switch. In the Key operating mode the selected
function is active while the function key is pressed. In the Switch operating mode
the selected function is switched on or off every time the function key is pressed.
The state of the function keys can be displayed.
Exception: For function keys configured as control keys the operating mode is
irrelevant and it is therefore ignored.
Handling keys
If backlighting for the LC display is switched off it will automatically light up when
a function key or the "READ" key is pressed. The assigned function will only be
triggered when the respective key is pressed a second time. This is also valid for
the other keys.
F_KEY:
Fct. assignm. F1
[ 080 112 ]
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
Selected function & Activate function
F_KEY:
Operating mode F1
[ 080 132 ]
1 & F_KEY:
State F1
2 [ 080 122 ]
1: Key
2: Switch
& & S1 1
& R1 0
1)

40Z5003A
Fig. 3-31: Configuration and operating mode of function keys. The assigned function is either a single function or a
menu jump list.
3-56 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.8 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs

(Function Group INP)
The P638 has opto coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the
substation. The functions that will be activated in the P638 by triggering these
binary signal inputs are defined by the configuration of the binary signal inputs.
In order to ensure that during normal operation the P638 will recognize an input
signal, the input signal must persist for at least 8 ms plus the set filter time
(provided that Active "high", filt. or Active "low", filt. has been selected for
IN P: Ope r. mode U xxx).
Configuring the Binary Inputs

One function can be assigned to each binary signal input by configuration. The
same function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be
activated from several control points having different signal voltages.
It should be noted that time-critical applications such as time synchronization
commands should not be mapped to the binary signal inputs of the analog I/O
module as these have an increased reaction time due to internal processing.
In this technical manual, it is assumed that the required functions (marked “EXT”
in the address description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by
configuration.
Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs

The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can
specify whether the presence (Active "high" mode) or absence (Active "low"
mode) of a voltage shall be interpreted as the logic ‘1’ signal. The display of the
state of a binary signal input – "low" or "high" – is independent of the setting for
the operating mode of the signal input.
Filter Function
An additional filter function may be enabled in order to suppress transient
interference peaks at the logic signal inputs (operating modes Active "high", filt.
or Active "low", filt.). With this function enabled a status change at the binary
logic input is only signaled when the input signal remains at a steady signal level
during a set number of sampling steps (sampling step size = period / 20). The
number of sampling steps is set at parameter I NP : Filt er.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-57

P638 3 Operation
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ XXX XXX ]
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
Selected function & Activate function
INP:
Oper. mode U xxx
[ YYY XXX ]
0: Active "low"
1: Active "high"
2: Active "low", filt.
3: Active "high", filt.
-Uxxx
&
Input signal
&
INP: &
Filter
[ 010 220 ]
&
INP:
State U xxx
&
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
&
12Z6213A
Fig. 3-32: Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs.
3-58 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.9 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI)

The P638 has a measured data input function involving two inputs. Direct current
is fed to the P638 through one of the inputs. The other input is designed for
connection of a resistance thermometer.
The input current IDC present at the analog (I/O) module Y is displayed as a
measured operating value. The current that is conditioned for monitoring
purposes (IDC,lin) is also displayed as a measured operating value. In addition, it is
monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function to detect whether it exceeds or
falls below set thresholds (see Section 3.34, (p. 3-213)).
The measured temperatures are also displayed as measured operating values
and monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function to determine whether they
exceed or fall below set thresholds (see Section 3.34, (p. 3-213)).
Disabling or Enabling the Measured Data Input Function

The Measured Data Input function can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters.
MEASI:
General enable USER
[ 011 100 ]
0
MEASI:
1 Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
0: No
1: Yes
S8Z52H1A
Fig. 3-33: Disabling or enabling the measured data input function.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-59

P638 3 Operation
3.9.1 Direct Current Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y

External measuring transducers normally supply an output current of 0 to 20 mA
that is directly proportional to the physical quantity being measured – the
temperature, for example.
If the output current of the measuring transducer is directly proportional to the
measured quantity only in certain ranges, linearization can be arranged,
provided that the measured data input is set accordingly. Furthermore, for
certain applications it may be necessary to limit the range being monitored or to
monitor certain parts of the range with a higher or lower sensitivity.
By setting the value pair MEA SI: IDC 1 and MEASI: IDC,lin 1, the user
specifies which input current IDC will correspond to the current that is monitored
by the Limit Value Monitoring function, i.e. IDC,lin. (These two setting parameters
refer to value pair number 1; setting parameters for value pairs 2 to 20 are
available, too.)
The resulting points, called “interpolation points”, are connected by straight lines
in an IDC‑IDC,lin diagram. In order to implement a simple characteristic, it is
sufficient to specify two interpolation points, which are also used as limiting
values (see Fig. 3-34, (p. 3-60)). Up to 20 interpolation points are available to
implement a complex characteristic.
When setting the characteristic the user must remember that only a rising/rising
or falling/falling curve sense is allowed (no peak or vee-shapes). If the setting
differs, the signal SFMON: In vali d scal in g IDC will be generated.
I DC,lin / I DC,nom
1.2
1.1
I DC,lin20 1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
I DC,lin1 0
0 0.1 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5 0.6 I DC / I DC,nom
I DC1 I DC20
19Z5266A_EN
Fig. 3-34: Example of the conversion of 4 to 10 mA input current to 0 to 20 mA monitored current, IDC,lin.
3-60 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
IDC,lin / IDC,nom
0.8
Interpolation points
IDC,lin20 0.7
0.6
IDC,lin4 0.5
0.4
IDC,lin3 0.3
IDC,lin2 0.2
IDC,lin1 0.1
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2
IDC1 IDC2 IDC3 IDC4 IDC20 IDC / IDC,nom
Enable IDC p.u.

D5Z52KEC_EN
Fig. 3-35: Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of
0.1 IDC,nom is shown as a broken line).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-61

P638 3 Operation
MEASI: MEASI: MEASI:

IDC 1 IDC 8 IDC 15
[ 037 150 ] [ 037 164 ] [ 037 178 ]

IDC,lin 1 IDC,lin 8 IDC,lin 15
[037 151 ] [037 165 ] [037 179 ]

IDC 2 IDC 9 IDC 16
[ 037 152 ] [ 037 166 ] [ 037 180 ]

[ 037 153 ] [ 037 167 ] [ 037 181 ]

IDC 3 IDC 10 IDC 17
[ 037 154 ] [ 037 168 ] [ 037 182 ]

[ 037 155 ] [ 037 169 ] [ 037 183 ]

IDC 4 IDC 11 IDC 18
[ 037 156 ] [ 037 170 ] [ 037 184 ]

[ 037 157 ] [ 037 171 ] [ 037 185 ]

IDC 5 IDC 12 IDC 19
[ 037 158 ] [ 037 172 ] [ 037 186 ]

[ 037 159 ] [ 037 173 ] [ 037 187 ]

IDC 6 IDC 13 IDC 20
[ 037 160 ] [ 037 174 ] [ 037 188 ]

[ 037 161 ] [ 037 175 ] [ 037 189 ]

IDC 7 IDC 14 Enable IDC p.u.
[ 037 162 ] [ 037 176 ] [ 037 190 ]

IDC,lin 7 IDC,lin 14 IDC< open circuit
[ 037 163 ] [ 037 177 ] [ 037 191 ]
MEASI:
Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
SFMON:
Invalid scaling IDC
[ 093 116 ]
MEASI:
Overload 20mA input
[ 040 191 ]
Input channel 1(I-1) SFMON:
Overload 20 mA input
[ 098 025 ]
MEASI:
Open circ. 20mA inp.
[ 040 192 ]
SFMON:
Open circ. 20mA inp.
[ 098 026 ]
MEASI:
Curr. IDC,lin. p.u.
[ 004 136 ]
MEASI:
Current IDC p.u.
[ 004 135 ]
MEASI:
Current IDC
[ 004 134 ]
S8Z52H2A
Fig. 3-36: Analog direct current input.
Beyond the linearization described above, the user has the option of scaling the
linearized values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well
and are available for further processing by protection functions.
3-62 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
MEASI:
Scaled val. IDC,lin1
[ 037 192 ]
MEASI:
Scaled val.IDC,lin20
[ 037 193 ]
MEASI: MEASI:
Curr. IDC,lin. p.u. Scaled value IDC,lin
[ 004 136 ] [ 004 180 ]
Q9Z5029A
Fig. 3-37: Scaling of the linearized measured value.
3.9.1.1 Zero Suppression

Zero suppression is defined by setting MEA SI: En able ID C p. u. If the direct
current does not exceed the set threshold, the per-unit input current IDC p.u. and
the current IDC,lin will be displayed as having a value of “0”.
3.9.1.2 Open-Circuit and Overload Monitoring

The P638 is equipped with an open-circuit monitoring function. If current IDC falls
below the set threshold MEA SI: ID C < open cir cuit, the signal MEA SI: Open
ci rc. 20mA inp. is issued.
The input current is monitored in order to protect the 20 mA analog input against
overloading. If it exceeds the set threshold of 24.8 mA, the signal
M EASI : O ve rload 20mA in put is issued.
3.9.2 Connecting a Resistance Thermometer to the “PT 100 Analog

Input” on the Analog (I/O) Module Y
This analog input on the analog (I/O) module Y is designed to connect a PT 100
resistance thermometer. The mapping curve R = f(T) of PT 100 resistance
thermometers is defined in standard IEC 751. If the PT 100 resistance
thermometer is connected using the 3-wire method, then no further calibration is
required.
The result of a temperature measurement can be read out as a direct measurand
(temperature T), a normalized value (temperature norm. T), and as the maximum
value since the last reset.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-63

P638 3 Operation
MEASI:
Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
MEASI:
Open circ. PT100
Measur. input PT100 [ 040 190 ]
SFMON:
PT100 open circuit
[ 098 024 ]
MEASI:
Temperature T
[ 004 133 ]
MEASI:
Temperature p.u. T
[ 004 221 ]
MEASI:
Temperature Tmax
[ 004 233 ]
19Z5262A
Fig. 3-38: Temperature measurement using a PT 100 resistance thermometer connected to the analog (I/O)
module.
3.9.2.1 Open-Circuit Monitoring

If there is an open measuring circuit due to a broken wire, the signal
MEASI : Open circ. P T10 0 is issued.
3-64 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.10 Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output

Relays (Function Group OUTP)
The P638 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The binary signal
assignment is freely configured by the user.
Configuration of the Output Relays

One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. The same binary signal
can be assigned to several output relays by configuration.
Operating Mode of the Output Relays

The user can set an operating mode for each output relay that determines
whether the output relay operates in a normally open arrangement (NO) or
normally closed arrangement (NC) and whether it operates in latching mode.
Depending on the selected operating mode, latching can be disabled, either
manually using a setting parameter or by an appropriately configured binary
signal input at the start of a new fault, signalized by the onset of a general
starting, or of a new system disturbance.
Blocking the Output Relays

The P638 offers the option of blocking all output relays via setting parameters or
by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input. The output relays are
likewise blocked if the P638 is disabled via appropriately configured binary inputs
or if self-monitoring detects a hardware fault. Any output relay configured for
MAIN : Bl ocke d/fa ulty will not be included in the blocking signals.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-65

P638 3 Operation
OUTP:
Outp.rel.block USER
[ 021 014 ]
0
OUTP:
1 Outp. relays blocked
≥1 [ 021 015 ]
0: No
OUTP: 1: Yes
Block outp.rel. EXT
[ 040 014 ] ≥1
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
SFMON:
Hardware fault
304 950
OUTP:
Oper. mode K xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
1 ≥1
2
3
-K xxx
4
≥1
5
6
≥1
1: ES updating
2: ES manual reset
≥1
3: ES reset (fault)
4: ES reset (syst.dist) OUTP:

& ≥1 State K 301
5: NE updating [ zzz zzz ]
&
6: NE manual reset &
& ≥1
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xxx & S1 1
[ yyy xxx ]
R1
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3 m out of n
Signal n
≥1 & ≥1
Selected signal
&
MAIN:
General starting OUTP:
1 Latching reset
[ 036 000 ] & [ 040 088 ]
FT_RC:
System disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OUTP:
Reset latch. USER
[ 021 009 ]
1 1
100 ms
0: don't execute
1: execute
OUTP:
Reset latch. EXT
[ 040 015 ]
45Z8001A
Fig. 3-39: Configuration, setting the operating mode, and blocking the output relays.
Testing the Output Relays

For testing purposes, the user can select an output relay and trigger it via setting
parameters. Therefore the P638 must be switched to “off-line”. Triggering
persists for the duration of the set hold time.
3-66 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
OUTP:
Relay assign. f.test
[ 003 042 ]
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xx1
[ AAA AAA ]
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xx2
[ BBB BBB ]
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xx3 -K xxx
[ CCC CCC ]
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xxx
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
MAIN: Selected relay

Protection enabled
[ 003 030 ]
0: No (= off)
OUTP:
Relay test
OUTP:
[ 003 043 ] Hold-time for test
[ 003 044 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
Q6Z0139B
Fig. 3-40: Testing the output relays.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-67

P638 3 Operation
3.11 Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO)

Measurands made available by the P638 can be provided in BCD (binary coded
decimal) form through output relays or in analog form as direct current output.
Output as direct current can only occur if the P638 is equipped with analog
module Y. BCD output is always possible, whether the P638 is equipped with
analog module Y or not.
3.11.1 General Settings
3.11.1.1 Disabling or Enabling the Measured Data Output Function

The Measured Data Output function can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters.
MEASI:
General enable USER
[ 011 100 ]
0
MEASI:
1 Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
0: No
1: Yes
S8Z52H1A
Fig. 3-41: Disabling or enabling the measured data output function.
3.11.1.2 Enabling Measured Data Output

The measured data output can be enabled through a binary signal input,
provided that the function MEASO: Outpu t en abled EXT has been
configured. If the function ME ASO: Output e n abled EXT has not been
configured to a binary signal input, then the measured data output is always
enabled.
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address 036 085 MEASO:

Enable
304 600
MEASO:
Output enabled EXT
[ 036 085 ]
S8Z52H5A
Fig. 3-42: Enabling measured data output.
3-68 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.11.1.3 Resetting the Measured Data Output Function

BCD or analog output of measurands is terminated for the duration of the hold
time if one of the following conditions is met:
● The measured data output function is reset from the integral local control
panel or through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
● There is a general reset.
● LED indicators reset
MEASO:
Reset output USER
[ 037 116 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MEASO:
MEASO: Output reset
Reset output EXT
[ 036 087 ] [ 037 117 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ] MEASO:
Reset meas.val.outp.
1: execute 304 601
MAIN:
Reset indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
47Z13H6A
Fig. 3-43: Resetting the measured data output function.
3.11.1.4 Scaling
Scaling is used to map the physical measuring range to the P638 inherent setting
range.
Scaling of analog output is also suited for directional-signed output of some fault
measurands, in particular fault location in percent.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-69

P638 3 Operation
3.11.2 BCD Measured Data Output

The user can select a measurand for output in BCD form by assigning output
relays.
The selected measurand is available in BCD-coded form for the duration of the
set hold time MEA SO: Hol d t ime ou tpu t BCD. If the selected variable was
not measured, then there is no output of a measurand value.
3.11.2.1 Output of Measured Event Values

If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measurand
output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an
immediate availability at the output of the updated value.
3.11.2.2 Output of Measured Operating Values

The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set
hold time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the
hold time is re-started. If the hold time has been set to blocked, the measured
operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data
output function is reset.
3.11.2.3 Scaling of BCD Output

In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range
(Mx,min ... Mx,max) in scaled form (as Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max) and the
associated BCD display range (BCD,min ... BCD,max) have to be set.
● MEA SO: Scale d min . val. BCD
● MEASO: Scal ed m ax. val. BCD
● ME ASO: BC D-Out m in . value
● MEA SO: BC D-Out max. val ue
The BCD display range should be set so that the value 399 is never exceeded. If
this should occur or if the measurand is outside the acceptable measuring range,
then the value for "Overflow" (all relays triggered) is transmitted.
Measurands Range
Measurands of the variable Mx Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Associated scaled measurands 0 ... 1
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating
program - Easergy Studio - under “minimum” and “maximum”.)
3-70 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
Measurands to be output Range
Measurands to be output Mx,min. ... Mx,max.
Scaled measurands to be output Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max

with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Designation of the set values in the data "Scaled min. val. BCD" ... "Scaled max. val. BCD"
model
Measurands BCD display values
Measurands in the range "Measurands to BCD-Out min. value ... BCD-Out max. value
be output" (Valid BCD value)
Measurands: BCD-Out min. value (BCD value not valid)

Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
Measurands Mx: BCD-Out max. value (BCD value not valid)

Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
Measurands Mx: BCD-Out max. value (Overflow)

Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-71

P638 3 Operation
3.11.3 Analog Measured Data Output

Analog output of measured data is two-channel.
The user can select two of the measurands available in the P638 for output in the
form of load-independent direct current. Three interpolation points per channel
can be defined for specific adjustments such as adjustment to the scaling of a
measuring instrument. The direct current that is output is displayed as a
measured operating value.
The selected measurand is output as direct current for the duration of the set
hold time MEA SO: Ho ld ti me ou tpu t A -1. If the selected variable was not
measured, then there is no output of a measurand value.
3.11.3.1 Output of Measured Event Values

If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measurand
output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an
immediate availability at the output of the updated value.
3.11.3.2 Output of Measured Operating Values

The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set
hold time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the
hold time is re-started. If the hold time has been set to blocked, the measured
operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data
output function is reset.
3.11.3.3 Configuration of Output Relays Assigned to the Output Channels

The user must keep in mind that direct current output only occurs when the
output relays assigned to the output channels are configured for MEA SO: Value
A-1 outp ut, since the output channels would otherwise remain short-circuited
(see the terminal connection diagrams, Section 5.7, (p. 5-27)).
3.11.3.4 Scaling the Analog Display

In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range
in scaled form and the associated display range have to be set. One additional
value for the knee point must also be defined. In this way the user can obtain an
analog output characteristic similar to the characteristic shown in Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-
76).
3.11.3.5 Measurand Range to be Output

The measurand range to be output is (Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max), with:
● Mx,min: minimum value to be output
● Mx,knee: Knee-point value for the measurand range to be output
● Mx,max: maximum value to be output
This measurand range to be output is defined by setting the following
parameters:
● MEA SO: S cale d min . val . A-1 or ME ASO: Scaled min. val. A- 2,
resp.
● MEASO : Scal ed k ne e val. A -1 or MEASO: Scaled knee val. A -2,
resp.
● MEASO: Scal ed max. val. A-1 or ME ASO: Scaled max. val. A- 2,
resp.
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end
3-72 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating
program – Easergy Studio – under “minimum” and “maximum”.)
Measurands Range
Measurands of the variable Mx Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Measurands with knee-point to be output Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max
Scaled measurands with a scaled knee-point to be Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,knee ... Mx,scal,max
output with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 -
Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 -
Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 -
Mx,RL1
Designation of the set values in the data model "Scal. min. value Ax" ...
... "Scal. knee-point Ax"
... "Scaled max. val. Ax"
3.11.3.6 Associated Display Range

The associated display range is defined by setting the following parameters:
● ME ASO: A nOu t min . val. A -1 or MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-2, resp.
● ME AS O: An Out kne e point A -1 or MEA SO : AnOut knee point A -2,
resp.
● MEA SO: A nOu t max. val . A-1 or ME ASO: AnOut max. val. A-2,
resp.
Measurands Analog display values
Measurands in the range "Measurands to be "AnOut min. val. A-x" ...

output" ... "AnOut knee point A-x" ...
... "AnOut max. val." (Value A-x valid)
Measurands: "AnOut min. val." (Value A-x not valid)

Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
Measurands Mx: "AnOut max. val." (Value A-x not valid)

Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
Measurands Mx: "AnOut max. val." (Overflow)

Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-73

P638 3 Operation
3.11.3.7 Example for Scaling of Analog Display Ranges

Voltage A-B is selected as the measurand to be transmitted by channel A-1.
The measuring range is from 0 to 1.5 Vnom with Vnom = 100 V.
The range to be transmitted is from 0.02 to 1 Vnom with the associated display
range from 4 mA to 18 mA.
The knee-point of the characteristic is 0.1 Vnom with an associated display of
16 mA.
Measurands Range
Measurands of the variable Mx 0 V ... 150 V
Measurands with knee-point to be output 2 V ...10 V... 100 V
Associated scaled measurands 0.013 ... 0.067 ... 0.67

with:
Mx,scal,min = (2 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.013
Mx,scal,knee = (10 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) =
0.067
Mx,scal,max = (100 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) =
0.67
Measurands Analog display values
Measurands in the range "Measurands to be 4 mA ... 16 mA ... 18 mA

output"
0.02 ... 0.1 Vnom ... 1 Vnom
In this example the following P638 settings are selected in the menu branch
Parameter/Config. parameters:
3-74 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
Address Description Current value
056 020 MEASO : F uncti on group MEA SO With
031 074 MEASO : Ge ne ral ena bl e USER Yes
053 000 MEASO : F ct. assignm. A -1 MAIN: Frequ en cy f
010 114 MEASO : Hold time outpu t A-1 1.00 s
037 104 MEASO : Sca le d m in . val. A-1 0.013 (corresponds with 0.02 Vnom)
037 105 MEASO : S cale d k ne e val. A -1 0.067 (corresponds with 0.10 Vnom)
037 106 ME ASO : S caled m ax . val. A -1 0.667 (corresponds with 1.00 Vnom)
037 107 ME ASO : A nOu t mi n. val. A -1 4 mA
037 108 ME ASO : AnOut knee poi nt A -1 16 mA
037 109 MEASO : AnOut max. val . A-1 18 mA
By setting MEASO: A nOut m in . val. A-1, the user can specify the output
current that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set
minimum measured value to be transmitted. The setting at MEASO: AnO ut
max . va l. A-1 defines the output current that is output for the maximum
measured value to be transmitted. By defining the knee-point, the user can
obtain two characteristic curve sections with different slopes. When entering this
setting the user must keep in mind that only a rising/rising or falling/falling curve
sense is permitted (peaky or vee shapes not allowed). If the setting was not
properly entered, the signal SFMON: In val i d s caling A -1 will be issued.
A check of the set characteristic and its acceptance by the P638, if the setting was
properly entered, will only occur after the P638 is switched on-line again (with the
setting M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n e n a b l e d).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-75

P638 3 Operation
Ia / mA
20
Max. 18
output value
Knee point 16
output value
14
12
10
Min. 4
output value
2
0
0 0.02 0.1 1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Vnom
0.013 0.067 0.667 1.0 Mx,scal
19Z5265A
Fig. 3-44: Example of a characteristic curve for analog measured data output . In this example the range starting
value is = 0; also possible is directional-signed output (see corresponding example in section BCD Measured Data
Output).
3-76 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
MEASO:
Value A-1 output
[ 037 118 ]
MEASO:
MEASO: Hold time output A-1
Enabled [ 010 114 ]
[ 037 102 ]
Setting(s) blocked c
MEASO:
Enable
304 600
An. outp. ch.1 (A-1)
[ --- --- ]
MEASO: R
Reset meas.val.outp.
304 601
Selected
meas. oper. value
OUTP: Selected
Fct.assignment K xxx Meas. event value
[ xxx xxx ] being updated
c
K x1
K x2 MEASO:
Scaled min. val. A-1
K x3 [ 037 104 ]
K xx MEASO:
Scaled knee val. A-1
[ 037 105 ]
c
MEASO:
Value A-1 output MEASO:
[ 037 118 ] Scaled max. val. A-1
[ 037 106 ]
MEASO:
AnOut min. val. A-1
[ 037 107 ]
MEASO:
Fct. assignm. A-1
MEASO:
[ 053 000 ] AnOut knee point A-1
[ 037 108 ]
Measured value 1
MEASO:
AnOut max. val. A-1
Measured value 2 [ 037 109 ]
Measured value 3
Measured value n
SFMON:
Selected meas. val. Invalid scaling A-1
[ 093 114 ]
Value in AnOut range MEASO:

Value A-1 valid
and in scaled range [ 069 014 ]
MEASO:
Output value x
[ * ] Value in AnOut range
but above scaled
range
c1
0 . . . 100 % Value < AnOut range c2
c3
MEASO: Address AnOut value 1

Output value x
2
X: 1 037 120
AnOut min. value 3
X: 2 037 121
1 . . . 3 MEASO:
X: 3 037 122 Current A-1
AnOut max. value [ 005 100 ]
Selected meas. val.

Value not measured
Selected meas. val.

Value measured
Selected meas. val.

Overflow
S8Z52H8B
Fig. 3-45: Analog measured data output.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-77

P638 3 Operation
3.11.4 Output of “External” Measured Data

Measured data from external devices, which must be scaled to 0 ... 100%, can be
written to the following parameters of the P638 via the communications
interface.
● MEASO : Out put valu e 1
● MEASO: Out put valu e 2
● ME AS O: Out put valu e 3
These “external” measured values are output by the P638 either in BCD data
form or as load-independent direct current, provided that the BCD measured
data output function or the channels of the analog measured data output
function are configured accordingly.
3-78 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.12 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators

(Function Group LED)
The P638 may be fitted with either a text or a graphic display HMI (ordering
option). The HMI with text display is fitted with 23 LED indicators for binary
signals and the HMI with graphic display has 17 LED indicators.
Four of the LED indicators are permanently assigned to fixed functions. The other
LED indicators are freely configurable. These freely configurable LEDs will emit
either red or green or amber light (amber is made up of red and green light and
may not be configured independently).
3.12.1 Configuring the LED Indicators

One binary signal can be assigned to each of the red and green LED color
indications. The same binary signal can be assigned to several LED indicators (or
colors), if required.
LED indicator Label Configuration
H 4 (red) TRIP With the P638 this LED indicator is customarily configured with
function MAI N: Ge n. tri p s ignal, but the configuration may
be modified.
H 4 (green) ― Function assignment to this green LED indicator is freely

configurable.
H 3 (amber) ALARM Permanently configured with function SFMON: Warning

(LED).
H 2 (amber) OUT OF SERVICE Permanently configured with function MA IN: B locked/fault y.
H 1 (green) HEALTHY Not configurable. H 1 indicates the operational readiness of the

P638 (supply voltage is present).
H 17 (red) EDIT MODE Not configurable. H 17 indicates the input (edit) mode. Only
when the P638 is in this mode, can parameter settings be
changed by pressing the “Up” and “Down” keys. (See
Section 6.2, (p. 6-2))
H 5 to H 16 ― For each of these LED indicators both colors (red & green) may
H 18 to H 23 be configured freely and independently.
3.12.2 Layout of the LED Indicators

The following figure illustrates the layout of LED indicators situated on the local
control panel with text display.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-79

P638 3 Operation
TRIP
H18
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
H19
EDIT MODE
H20
H21
H22
H23
Fig. 3-46: Layout of the LED indicators (local control panel with text display)
The following figure illustrates the layout of LED indicators situated on the local
control panel with graphic display.
H4 TRIP
H3 ALARM
H2 OUT OF SERVICE
H1 HEALTHY
H17 EDIT MODE
H5
H6
H7
H8
H9
H10
H11
H12
H13
H14
H15
H16
Fig. 3-47: Layout of the LED indicators (local control panel with graphic display)
3-80 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.12.3 Operating Mode of the LED Indicators

For each of the freely configurable LED indicators, the operating mode can be
selected separately. This setting will determine whether the LED indicator will
operate either in energize-on-signal (ES) or normally-energized (NE) mode,
whether it will be flashing and whether it will be in latching mode.
Latching is disabled, depending on the selected operating mode:
● either manually via setting parameters or by an appropriately configured
binary signal input (see Section 3.13.16, (p. 3-112))
● or at the onset of a new fault, signalized by the onset of a general starting
or of a new system disturbance.
Therefore there are eight operating modes available, which are built from
combinations of the following components:
updating latching with manual

reset
continuous (i.e. not energize-on-signal ES updating ES manual reset

flashing) (ES)
normally-energized NE updating NE manual reset

(NE)
flashing energize-on-signal ES updating bl ES manual reset bl

(ES)
normally-energized NE updating bl NE manual reset bl

(NE)
In addition to these there are the following 4 operating modes:
energize-on-signal (ES) with reset energize-on-signal (ES) with reset

after new fault after new system disturbance
continuous (i.e. not ES reset (fault) ES reset (syst.dist)

flashing)
flashing ES reset (fault) bl ES rst (syst.dst) bl
Finally, as the 13th operating mode, every LED (except the permanently
configured ones, see Section 3.12.1, (p. 3-79)) can be set to the mode ES
Alarmunit. This mode has the following flashing behavior:
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-81

P638 3 Operation
● The LED starts flashing with the first starting of the signal that has been
assigned to it.
The LED assumes the color that has been assigned via setting parameter. If
both colors (red and green) have been configured to different signals, and
these two signals both become active then the LED flashes in amber color.
● If an LED reset is executed and the configured signal is still active the LED
changes to continuous light.
Important: If the LED was flashing in amber color then this color is kept,
even if one of the two signals is no longer active.
● If all the configured signals are no longer active at the time of the LED
reset, or become inactive at a later time, the LED goes out.
● If later, after the LED has gone out, any of the configured signals becomes
active again then the LED starts flashing again (in the assigned color).
If both colors have been configured and the LED shines continuously in
amber color, then it is possible that one of these two signals becomes
inactive and active again whilst the other signal stays active all the time. In
this case the LED starts flashing again with the starting of that signal. But
since the LED permanently keeps the amber color it is no longer possible to
tell the two signals from each other. Therefore general caution is
recommended whenever two different signals are configured to an LED
with this operating mode.
3-82 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
LED:
Oper. mode H xx
[ xxx xxx ]
10
11
12
13 ≥1
1: ES updating
2: ES manual reset
3: ES reset (fault)
4: ES reset (syst.dist) !G!
5: NE updating
6: NE manual reset
7: ES updating bl
8: ES manual reset bl -Hxx (red)
9: ES reset (fault) bl
10: ES rst (syst.dst) bl
11: NE updating bl
12: NE manual reset bl
13: ES Alarmunit
& LED:
State Hxx red
[ zzz zzz ]
LED: &
Fct.assig. Hxx red
[ yyy yyy ]
&
Signal 1 &
Signal 2 &
Signal 3 m out of n
Signal n
& S1 1
& R1
Selected signals
&
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
&
FT_RC:
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
48Z93A5A
Fig. 3-48: Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-83

P638 3 Operation
3.13 Main Functions of the P638 (Function Group MAIN)
3.13.1 Conditioning of the Measured Variables

The secondary phase currents of the system transformers are fed into the P638
and are – electrically isolated – converted to normalized electronics levels. Air-
gap transformers are used in the phase current path to suppress low frequency
(DC decays and offsets) signal components. The analog quantities are digitized
and are thus available for further processing.
Settings that do not refer to nominal quantities are converted by the P638 to
nominal quantities. The user must therefore set the secondary nominal currents
and voltages of the system transformers.
The connection direction of the measuring circuits on the P638 must also be set.
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-85) shows the standard connection. By this setting the phase of
the digitized currents is rotated by 180°.
3-84 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
C
IA,a
MAIN: MAIN:
Conn. meas. circ. a Inom device, end a
[ 010 140 ] [ 010 024 ]
I̲A,a
IC,a
I̲C,a
1: Standard
2: Opposite
MAIN:
IN,nom device
[ 010 017 ]
IN
a I̲N
b
MAIN: MAIN:
Conn. meas. circ. b Inom device, end b
[ 010 150 ] [ 010 025 ]
I̲A,b
I̲C,b
IA,b
1: Standard
2: Opposite
IC,b
MAIN: MAIN:
Conn. meas. circ. V Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 158 ] [ 010 009 ]
V
V̲
1: Standard
2: Opposite
P638
Busbar(operation)
Busbar(return)
68Z9314A
Fig. 3-49: Connecting measuring circuits to P638.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-85

P638 3 Operation
3.13.2 Operating Data Measurement

The P638 has an operating data measurement function for the display of currents
and voltages measured as well as quantities derived from these measured
values. For the display of measured values, set lower thresholds need to be
exceeded, to avoid fluctuating small values from noise. If these lower thresholds
are not exceeded, the value Not measured is displayed. The following measured
variables are displayed:
● Phase currents from ends a and b
● Residual current
● Voltage
● Load impedance
● Load reactance
● Load resistance
● Load angle
● Frequency
The measured data are updated at approx. 10 ms intervals. Updating is
interrupted shortly during fault detection and continuously if the self-monitoring
function detects a hardware fault.
3-86 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.13.2.1 Measured Current Values

The measured current values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred
to the nominal quantities of the P638 and as primary quantities. To allow display
in primary values, the primary nominal currents of ends a and b of the
transformers should be set in the P638.
MAIN:
Meas. value rel. I
MAIN: [ 011 030 ]
General start. int.
306 539
MAIN: c
Hardware fault
306 540
I̲A,a c1
I̲C,a c2
I̲A,b c3
I̲C,b c4
1 MAIN:
Current IA,a p.u.
[ 005 031 ]
2 MAIN:
Current IC,a p.u.
[ 006 031 ]
3 MAIN:
Current IA,b p.u.
[ 005 032 ]
4 MAIN:
Current IC,b p.u.
[ 006 032 ]
MAIN:
Inom C.T.prim.,end a
[ 019 020 ]
MAIN:
Current IA,a prim.
[ 005 021 ]
MAIN:
Current IC,a prim.
[ 006 021 ]
MAIN:
Inom C.T.prim.,end b
[ 019 021 ]
MAIN:
Current IA,b prim.
[ 005 022 ]
MAIN:
Current IC,b prim.
[ 006 022 ]
68Z9315A
Fig. 3-50: Measured operating data for the phase currents, ends a and b.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-87

P638 3 Operation
MAIN:
Meas. value rel. IN
MAIN: [ 011 031 ]
General start. int.
306 539
MAIN: c
Hardware fault
306 540
I̲N c
MAIN:
IN p.u.
[ 004 201 ]
MAIN:
IN,nom C.T. prim.
[ 010 016 ]
MAIN:
IN prim.
[ 004 200 ]
68Z9318A
Fig. 3-51: Measured operating data for residual current
3.13.2.2 Measured Voltage Values
MAIN:
MCMON: Meas. value rel. V
Meas. circ. V faulty [ 011 032 ]
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN: c
Hardware fault
306 540
V̲ c
MAIN:
Voltage V p.u.
[ 004 113 ]
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. prim.
[ 010 002 ]
MAIN:
Voltage V prim.
[ 004 112 ]
68Z9317A
Fig. 3-52: Measured operating data - voltage.
The measured voltage values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred
to the nominal quantities of the P638 and as primary quantities. To allow a
display in primary values, the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer
needs to be set in the P638.
3.13.2.3 Load Angle

Load angles are only determined, if the associated current and voltage exceed a
minimum threshold.
3-88 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
MCMON:
Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 540
MAIN:
Select meas. current
[ 025 149 ]
2
C1
3
C2
4
1: Current IA,a C3
2: Current IC,a C4 C
&
3: Current IA,b
4: Current IC,b MAIN:
Load angle phi
I̲A,a [ 004 167 ]
MAIN:
I̲C,a Load angle phi p.u.
[ 004 078 ]
I̲A,b
I̲C,b
>0.1 Inom
>0.1 Inom
>0.1 Inom & C
V̲ >1V MAIN:
Load angle end a
[ 005 014 ]
MAIN:
Load angle p.u.end a
[ 005 015 ]
& C
MAIN:
Load angle end b
[ 005 016 ]
MAIN:
Load angle p.u.end b
[ 005 017 ]
68Z9319A
Fig. 3-53: Load angle.
3.13.2.4 Operating impedance, reactance and resistance

If there is a fault in the hardware or in the voltage-measuring circuit, the
measured values are not determined.
The fundamental components of current and voltage are used for determining
the measured values. The values are determined only if the current exceeds the
minimum threshold of 0.1 In and if the voltage exceeds the threshold of 1 V.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-89

P638 3 Operation
MCMON:
Meas. circ. V faulty &
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 540
MAIN:
[ 025 149 ]
2
I̲A,a C1
3
I̲C,a C2
4
&
1: Current IA,a C3
I̲A,b
2: Current IC,a C4
I̲C,b 3: Current IA,b
4: Current IC,b
>0.1 Inom
>1V
MAIN:
Load impedance Z p.u
V̲ [ 005 004 ]
c
MAIN:
Inom device, end a
[ 010 024 ]
MAIN:
Inom device, end b
[ 010 025 ]
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
MAIN:
Load impedance Z sec
[ 005 000 ]
MAIN:
Load reactance X sec
[ 005 195 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Inom C.T.prim.,end a Load resist. R sec
[ 019 020 ] [ 005 197 ]
MAIN:
[ 019 021 ]
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. prim.
[ 010 002 ]
MAIN:
Load imped. Z prim.
[ 005 005 ]
MAIN:
Load react. X prim.
[ 005 196 ]
MAIN:
Load resist. R prim.
[ 005 198 ]
68Z9820A
Fig. 3-54: Measured operating data – Operating impedance, reactance and resistance.
3-90 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.13.2.5 Frequency
< 10 V
MCMON:
Meas. circ. V faulty c
[ 038 023 ] &
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 540
V̲ c
f MAIN:
Frequency f
[ 004 040 ]
MAIN:
Frequency f p.u.
[ 004 070 ]
46Z9301A
Fig. 3-55: Frequency measurement.
The P638 determines the frequency from the voltage. The frequency is
determined only if the voltage exceeds a minimum threshold of 10 V and if there
is no fault in the voltagemeasuring circuit.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-91

P638 3 Operation
3.13.3 Configuring and Enabling the Device Functions

The P638 can be adapted to the requirements of a specific high-voltage system
by configuring the available function range. By including the desired P638
functions in the configuration and canceling all other, the user creates an
individually configured device appropriate to the specific application. Parameters,
signals and measured values of cancelled device functions are not displayed on
the local control panel. Functions of general applicability such as operating data
recording (OP_RC) or main functions (MAIN) cannot be cancelled.
3.13.3.1 Canceling a Device Function

The following conditions must be met before a P638 function can be cancelled or
removed:
● The P638 function must be disabled.
● None of the functions of the P638 function to be cancelled can be assigned
to a binary input.
● None of the signals of the P638 function can be assigned to a binary output
or an LED indicator.
● None of the functions of the P638 function to be cancelled may be selected
in a list parameter setting.
If the above conditions are met, proceed through the “Configuration” branch of
the menu tree to access the setting relevant for the P638 function to be
cancelled. If, for example, the “LIMIT” function group is to be cancelled, the
setting of LI MIT: Function gr ou p LIMIT is set to Without. To re-include the
“LIMIT” function in the P638 configuration, the same setting is accessed and its
value is changed to With.
The P638 function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is
defined by the function group designation (example: “LIMIT”). In the following
description of the P638 functions, it is presumed that the corresponding P638
function is included in the configuration.
3-92 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.13.3.2 Enabling or Disabling a Device Function
MAIN:
Protection enabled
[ 003 030 ]
0 0: No (= off)
1 MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
0: No (= off)
1: Yes (= on)
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address 003 027 MAIN:

Prot. ext. enabled
Address 003 026 [ 003 028 ]
MAIN:
Enable protect. EXT
[ 003 027 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
MAIN: [ 038 046 ]
Disable protect. EXT
[ 003 026 ]
D5Z5004A
Fig. 3-56: Enabling or disabling a device function.
Besides cancelling P638 functions from the configuration, it is also possible to

disable protection via a function parameter or binary signal inputs. Protection
can only be disabled or enabled through binary signal inputs if the
MAI N: Disabl e p ro te ct. EXT and MA IN: En able pr ot e ct. E XT functions are
both configured. When neither or only one of the two functions is configured, the
condition is interpreted as “Protection externally enabled”. If the triggering
signals of the binary signal inputs are implausible – i.e. both are at logic level =
“1” – then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.
If the protection is disabled via a binary signal input that is configured for
M A I N : D i s a b l e p r o t e c t . E X T, the signal M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y is not issued.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-93

P638 3 Operation
3.13.4 Measurement of Frequency
MAIN: &
Protection active
f<>:
Ready
[ 042 101 ]
& f<>:
V̲Meas
fnom
V̲
MAIN:
Undervolt. block. V<
[ 018 200 ]
f<>:
Blocked by V<
[ 042 102 ]
MAIN:
Evaluation time
[ 018 201 ]
f Φ
f<>:
No. periods reached
f<>:
fMeas
48Z9317A
Fig. 3-57: Measurement of frequency: evaluation time, undervoltage blocking.
The over-/underfrequency protection f<> uses some general settings for the
frequency measurement:
● the evaluation time
● the undervoltage blocking
The over-/underfrequency protection requires a measuring voltage of sufficient
magnitude. Therefore it is blocked instantaneously if the measuring voltage falls
below the set threshold of the undervoltage stage.
In order to avoid frequency stage starting caused by brief frequency fluctuations
or interference, the evaluation time can be set by the user. The operate
conditions must be satisfied for at least the duration of the set evaluation time in
order for a signal to be issued.
3-94 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.13.5 Function Blocks
MAIN:
Inp.asg. fct.block.1
[ 221 014 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 MAIN:
Op. delay fct. block
Signal 3 [ 221 029 ]
Signal n
t 0 MAIN:
Selected signal Fct. block. 1 active
[ 221 015 ]
t 0 MAIN:
MAIN: Fct. block. 2 active
Inp.asg. fct.block.2 [ 221 023 ]
[ 221 022 ]
Selected signal
F0Z5016B
Fig. 3-58: Function blocks.
By including function blocks in the bay interlock conditions, switching operations

can be prevented independent of the switching status at the time, for example,
by an external signal “CB drive not ready” or by the trip command from an
external protection device.
Binary input signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression or
output signals from the programmable logic function can be assigned to the
function blocks 1 and 2 by setting a “1 out of n” parameter. The input signal from
the function blocks starts a timer stage and after it has elapsed, the signal
MAIN : Fct . bl ock. 1 active is issued.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-95

P638 3 Operation
3.13.6 Multiple Blocking
MAIN:
Fct.assign. block. 1
[ 021 021 ]
Function 1
m out of n
Function 2
Function n
Selected functions MAIN:

Blck.1 sel.functions
306 022
MAIN:
Blocking 1 EXT
[ 040 060 ]
MAIN:
Fct.assign. block. 2
[ 021 022 ]
Function 1
m out of n
Function 2
Function n
Selected functions MAIN:

Blck.2 sel.functions
306 023
MAIN:
Blocking 2 EXT
[ 040 061 ]
D5Z50CLA
Fig. 3-59: Multiple blocking.
Two multiple blocking conditions can be defined via “m out of n” parameters.

The functions defined by selection may be blocked via an appropriately
configured binary signal input.
3.13.7 Blocked/Faulty
MAIN:
Protection enabled
[ 003 030 ]
0: No (= off) MAIN:
Protect. not ready
[ 004 060 ]
MAIN:
SFMON: Blocked/faulty
Blocking [ 004 065 ]
304 951
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Fct. assign. fault
[ 021 031 ]
Signal 1
m out of n
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
D5Z50EHA
Fig. 3-60: “Blocked/Faulty” signal.
If the protective functions are blocked, the condition is signaled by continuous

illumination of the amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a
signal from an output relay configured MAIN: Bl ocked/faulty. In addition
3-96 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
functions can be selected that will issue the MA IN: Block ed/fault y signal by
setting a “m out of n” parameter.
3.13.8 Coupling between Control and Protection for the CB Closed Signal
Bay type selection defines the external device (DEV01 or DEV02 or ...) that
represents the circuit breaker. Coupling between control and protection for the
“Closed” position signal is made by the setting MA IN: Sig. asg. C B1 closed.
As a result, the CB status signal needs to be assigned to one binary signal input
only if this coupling is implemented.
MAIN:
Sig. asg. CB1 closed
[ 021 020 ]
DEV01:
Closed signal EXT
[ 210 031 ]
DEV02:
Closed signal EXT
[ 210 081 ]
DEV10:
Closed signal EXT
[ 211 231 ] Selected signal
INP:Fct. assign. UXX
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx

CB closed 1 EXT
[ 036 051 ]

CB closed 2 EXT
[ 031 030 ]
19Z9301A
Fig. 3-61: Coupling between control and protection for the CB closed signal.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-97

P638 3 Operation
3.13.9 Close Command
MAIN:
M-trip signal 1
[ 039 101 ]
MAIN:
R-trip signal 1
[ 039 103 ]
MAIN:
CB closed 1 EXT
[ 036 051 ]
MAIN:
CB closed 2 EXT
[ 031 030 ]
MAIN:
ClCmd inhib.by CB cl
[ 015 042 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: MAIN:
En.man.clos.cmd.USER Rel.t. enab. man.cmd
[ 003 105 ] [ 003 088 ]
0
1 t MAIN:
1 Man. cl. cmd.enabl.
[ 039 113 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Man. close cmd. USER
[ 018 033 ]
MAIN:
tCB, Close
0 [ 000 032 ]
0: don't execute MAIN:

1 t
1: execute Man. close command
[ 037 068 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Man.cl.cmd.enabl.EXT Man. close cmd. EXT
[ 041 023 ] [ 041 022 ]
MAIN:
Man. close cmd. EXT
[ 041 022 ]
MAIN:
C Close cmd.pulse time
[ 015 067 ]
MAIN:
Close command
1 t [ 037 009 ]
MAIN:
Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]
0 + MAIN:
No. close commands
1 [ 009 055 ]
MAIN: 0: don't execute R

General reset USER
[ 003 002 ] 1: execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset c. cl/tr.c EXT
[ 005 210 ]
68Z9321A
Fig. 3-62: Close command.
The circuit breaker can be closed by parameters or via an appropriately

configured binary signal input. The close command by parameters or a binary
signal input is only executed if there is no trip command 1 present and no trip
has been issued by a protection device operating in parallel. Moreover, with the
setting of MAIN : ClC m d in h ib.by CB cl to Yes, the close command is not
executed if there is a “CB closed” position signal present. The duration of the
close command can be set.
Close Command Counter

The number of close commands are counted. This counter may be reset
individually or together with other counters (see Section 3.13.16, (p. 3-112)).
3-98 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.13.10 Multiple Signaling
MAIN:
Inp.asg. mult.sig. 1
[ 221 051 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signal MAIN:

Mult. sig. 1 active
[ 221 017 ]
MAIN:
Mult. sig. 1 stored
MAIN: S 11
[ 221 054 ]
Inp.asg. mult.sig. 2
[ 221 052 ] R1
Selected signal MAIN:

Mult. sig. 2 active
[ 221 053 ]
COMM1:
Reset mult. sig. 1 MAIN:
[ --- --- ] Mult. sig. 2 stored
S 11 [ 221 055 ]
COMM1:
Reset mult. sig. 2 R1
[ --- --- ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OUTP:
Reset latching
402 102
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
12Z62FMA
Fig. 3-63: Multiple signaling.
The multiple signals 1 and 2 are formed by the programmable logic function
using OR operators. The programmable logic output to be interpreted as multiple
signaling is defined by the configuration of the binary signal input assignment
with the corresponding multiple signaling. Both an updated and a stored signal
are generated. The stored signal is reset by the following actions:
● General reset
● Latching reset
● LED indicators reset
● A command received through the communication interface
If the multiple signaling is still present at the time of a reset, the stored signal
will follow the updated signal.
3.13.11 Fault Direction Signal

Direction decisions by the definite-time overcurrent protection function (DTOC1),
the inverse-time overcurrent protection function (IDMT) and distance protection
(DIST) will issue fault direction signals.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-99

P638 3 Operation
MAIN:
DTOC1: ≥1 Fault forward
Fault I> forward
[ 036 018 ]
[ 035 137 ]
DTOC1:
Fault I>> forward
[ 035 147 ]
IDMT:
Fault forward
[ 041 008 ]
DIST:
Forward fault
[ 036 138 ]
DTOC1: ≥1 MAIN:
Fault I> backward Fault backward
[ 035 140 ] [ 036 019 ]
DTOC1:
Fault I>> backward
[ 035 148 ]
IDMT:
Fault backward
[ 041 009 ]
DIST:
Backwards fault
[ 036 139 ]
68Z9322A
Fig. 3-64: Fault Direction Signal.
3-100 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.13.12 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic
3.13.12.1 Starting Signals
MAIN:
General reset USER MAIN:
[ 003 002 ] >+ No. general start.
↗ 1: execute ≥1 >R [ 004 000 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
DIFF: ≥1
Trip signal 1 MAIN:
General starting
[ 041 002 ]
[ 036 000 ]
DIFF:
Trip signal 2
[ 041 003 ]
DIF_a:
Trip signal
[ 041 211 ]
DIF_b:
Trip signal
[ 041 212 ]
DTOC1:
Starting I>
[ 035 108 ]
DTOC1:
Starting I>>
[ 035 109 ]
DTOC2:
Starting I>
[ 035 138 ]
DTOC2:
Starting I>>
[ 035 139 ]
DTOCN:
Starting IN>H
[ 035 195 ]
DTOCN:
Starting IN>
[ 040 077 ]
DTOCN:
Starting IN>>
[ 040 041 ]
IDMT:
Starting Iref>
[ 040 080 ]
DIST:
Starting
[ 036 135 ]
68Z9323A
Fig. 3-65: General start of the P638.
The starting signals from the differential and transverse differential protection,
the phase and earth fault definite-time overcurrent protection, the inverse-time
overcurrent protection and distance protection functions are linked to form
common starting signals. The number of general starts is counted.
3.13.12.2 Trip Command

The P638 provides the following trip commands:
● Main-Trip command
● Re-Trip command
● Back-Trip command
The functions required to trip can be selected by setting an 'm out of n'
parameter independently for each of the trip commands. The trip command
minimum trip time is settable. The trip signals are present only as long as the
conditions for the signal are satisfied.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-101

P638 3 Operation
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Block. M-trip USER
[ 022 090 ]
MAIN:
0 M-trip blocked
[ 039 050 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Block. M-trip EXT
[ 038 050 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Man. M-trip signal 1 M-trip signal 1
[ 039 081 ] [ 039 101 ]
MAIN:
Min.dur. M-trip cmd1
MAIN:
Fct.asg. M-trip cmd1 [ 021 034 ]
[ 021 007 ]
Signal 1 1 t MAIN:
M-trip command 1
Signal 2 [ 039 011 ]
m out of n
Signal 3
…
Signal n
Selected signals
MAIN:
Latching M-trip cmd1
[ 021 040 ]
>S1 1
0
>R1
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: MAIN:
Man. M-trip signal 2 M-trip signal 2
[ 039 084 ] [ 039 102 ]
MAIN:
MAIN:
Fct.asg. M-trip cmd2 [ 021 035 ]
[ 021 008 ]
Signal 1 1 t MAIN:
M-trip command 2
Signal 2 [ 039 058 ]
m out of n
Signal 3
…
Signal n
Selected signals
MAIN:
Latching M-trip cmd2
[ 021 041 ]
>S1 1
0
>R1
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Latch. trip c. reset
[ 040 139 ] 48Z9321A
Fig. 3-66: Main-trip command.
3-102 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Block. R-trip USER
[ 022 091 ]
MAIN:
0 R-trip blocked
[ 039 051 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Block. R-trip EXT
[ 038 051 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Man. R-trip signal 1 R-trip signal 1
[ 039 082 ] [ 039 103 ]
MAIN:
Min.dur. R-trip cmd1
MAIN:
Fct.asg. R-trip cmd1 [ 021 036 ]
[ 021 025 ]
Signal 1 1 t MAIN:
R-trip command 1
Signal 2 [ 039 012 ]
m out of n
Signal 3
…
Signal n
Selected signals
MAIN:
Latching R-trip cmd1
[ 021 042 ]
>S1 1
0
>R1
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: MAIN:
Man. R-trip signal 2 R-trip signal 2
[ 039 085 ] [ 039 104 ]
MAIN:
Min.dur. R-trip cmd2
MAIN:
Fct.asg. R-trip cmd2 [ 021 037 ]
[ 021 026 ]
Signal 1 1 t MAIN:
R-trip command 2
Signal 2 [ 039 059 ]
m out of n
Signal 3
…
Signal n
Selected signals
MAIN:
Latching R-trip cmd2
[ 021 043 ]
>S1 1
0
>R1
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
[ 040 139 ] 48Z9322A
Fig. 3-67: Re-trip command.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-103

P638 3 Operation
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Block. M-trip USER
[ 022 092 ]
MAIN:
0 B-trip blocked
[ 039 052 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Block. B-trip EXT
[ 038 052 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Man. B-trip signal 1 B-trip signal 1
[ 039 083 ] [ 039 105 ]
MAIN:
Min.dur. B-trip cmd1
MAIN:
Fct.asg. B-trip cmd1 [ 021 038 ]
[ 021 027 ]
Signal 1 1 t MAIN:
B-trip command 1
Signal 2 [ 039 013 ]
m out of n
Signal 3
…
Signal n
Selected signals
MAIN:
Latching B-trip cmd1
[ 021 0404 ]
>S1 1
0
>R1
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: MAIN:
Man. B-trip signal 2 B-trip signal 2
[ 039 098 ] [ 039 106 ]
MAIN:
Min.dur. B-trip cmd2
MAIN:
Fct.asg. B-trip cmd2 [ 021 039 ]
[ 021 028 ]
Signal 1 1 t MAIN:
B-trip command 2
Signal 2 [ 039 060 ]
m out of n
Signal 3
…
Signal n
Selected signals
MAIN:
Latching B-trip cmd2
[ 021 045 ]
>S1 1
0
>R1
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
[ 040 139 ] 48Z9323A
Fig. 3-68: Back-trip command.
3.13.12.2.1 Latching of the Trip Commands

Each of the trip commands can be individually set to operate in the latching
mode. The following parameters are available for this setting: (via or ,
respectively).
● (021 040) MA IN : Latch ing M-tri p cmd1
● (021 041) MA IN : Latch ing M-tri p cmd2
● (021 042) MA IN : Latchi ng R-tr ip cmd1
● (021 043) MAI N: Latchi ng R-tri p cmd2
● (021 044) MA IN : Latch ing B-tri p cmd1
● (021 045) MA IN : Latch ing B-tri p cmd2
3-104 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
The trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by parameter
(MAIN: Rset .lat ch.trip U SER) or reset through an appropriately configured
binary signal input (MAIN: Res et latch. trip EXT).
3.13.12.2.2 Blocking of the Trip Commands
MAIN:
Trip cmd.block. USER
[ 021 012 ]
1 MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
0: No [ 021 013 ]
1: Yes
MAIN:
Block. trip cmd. EXT
[ 036 045 ]
47Z01AWA
Fig. 3-69: Blocking of the trip commands.
The trip commands can be blocked via parameters or an appropriately

configured binary signal input. This blocking is then effective for all trip
commands. The trip signals are not affected by this blocking. If the trip
commands are blocked, it is indicated by the continuously illuminated amber LED
indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a signal from an output relay
configured to “Blocked/Faulty”.
3.13.12.2.3 General Trip Signal
MAIN: ≥1
M-trip signal 1 MAIN:
Gen. trip signal
[ 039 101 ]
[ 036 251 ]
MAIN:
R-trip signal 1
[ 039 103 ]
MAIN:
B-trip signal 1
[ 039 105 ]
MAIN:
M-trip signal 2
[ 039 102 ]
MAIN:
R-trip signal 2
[ 039 104 ]
MAIN:
B-trip signal 2
[ 039 106 ] 48Z9326A
Fig. 3-70: Blocking of the trip commands.
Trip signals from the Main-Trip command, the Re-Trip command and the Back-
Trip command are collectively issued as the "Gen Trip Signal" (general trip).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-105

P638 3 Operation
3.13.12.2.4 Counter of Trip Commands
MAIN: >+ MAIN:

M-trip command 1 No. M-trip cmds. 1
[ 039 011 ] >R
[ 009 005 ]
MAIN: >+ MAIN:
R-trip command 1 No. R-trip cmds. 1
>R
[ 039 012 ] [ 009 006 ]
>+ MAIN:
MAIN: No. B-trip cmds. 1
B-trip command 1 >R
[ 009 007 ]
[ 039 013 ]
>+ MAIN:
MAIN: No. M-trip cmds. 2
M-trip command 2 >R
[ 009 027 ]
[ 039 058 ] >+ MAIN:
No. R-trip cmds. 2
MAIN: >R
R-trip command 2 [ 009 028 ]
[ 039 059 ] >+ MAIN:
No. B-trip cmds. 2
MAIN: >R
B-trip command 2 [ 009 029 ]
[ 039 006 ] MAIN:
Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]
1 ≥1
MAIN: 0: don't execute

General reset USER 1: execute
[ 003 002 ]
↗ 1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset c. cl/tr.c EXT
[ 005 210 ]
68Z9324A
Fig. 3-71: Trip command counters.
The number of trip commands is counted (individually for each of the trip
commands).
The counters can be reset either individually or as a group.
3-106 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.13.12.3 Manual Trip Commands
MAIN:
En.man.trip cmd. EXT
[ 039 053 ]
MAIN:
En.man.trip cmd.USER MAIN:
[ 003 064 ] Rel.t. enab. man.cmd
[ 003 088 ]
MAIN:
0 Man. trip cmd enabl.
[ 039 080 ]
1 1 t
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Man.M-trip cmd USER
[ 003 065 ]
MAIN:
0 1 100ms Man. M-trip signal 1
[ 039 081 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man. M-trip cmd1 EXT
[ 039 054 ]
MAIN:
Man.M-trip cmd2 USER
[ 003 082 ]
MAIN:
0 1 100ms Man. M-trip signal 2
[ 039 084 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man. M-trip cmd2 EXT
[ 039 056 ]
MAIN:
Man.R-trip cmd USER
[ 003 066 ]
MAIN:
0 1 100ms Man. R-trip signal 1
[ 039 082 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man. R-trip cmd1 EXT
[ 039 055 ]
MAIN:
Man.R-trip cmd2 USER
[ 003 083 ]
MAIN:
0 1 100ms Man. R-trip signal 2
[ 039 085 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man. R-trip cmd2 EXT
[ 039 057 ]
MAIN:
Man.B-trip cmd USER
[ 003 067 ]
MAIN:
0 1 100ms Man. B-trip signal 1
[ 039 083 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man. B-trip cmd1 EXT
[ 039 107 ]
MAIN:
Man.B-trip cmd2 USER
[ 003 087 ]
MAIN:
0 1 100ms Man. B-trip signal 2
[ 039 098 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man. B-trip cmd2 EXT
[ 039 108 ] 48Z9324A
Fig. 3-72: Manual trip command.
The manual trip command may be issued using setting parameters or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input. It will be issued only if the manual
trip command was enabled. The manual trip command issued using a setting
parameter is enabled only for a set time period. The manual trip command
issued from an appropriately configured binary signal input is enabled only for as
long as the associated enabling input is set.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-107

P638 3 Operation
3.13.13 CB Trip Signal
MAIN:
Inp.assign. tripping
[ 221 010 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signal
MAIN:
M-trip command 1
[ 039 011 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
R-trip command 1 Prot.trip>CB tripped
[ 039 012 ] [ 221 012 ]
MAIN:
B-trip command 1 0
[ 039 013 ]
1
MAIN:
M-trip command 2 2
[ 039 058 ]
3
MAIN:
R-trip command 2
[ 039 059 ] 0 3
MAIN:
B-trip command 2 0: Without function
[ 039 060 ] 1: Gen. trip command 1
2: Gen. trip command 2
3: Gen.trip command 1/2
MAIN:
Oper. mode CB Trip
[ 221 080 ]
1 2
1: With command
2: W/o command
MAIN:
Inp. asg. CB trip
[ 221 013 ]
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV10:
Switch. device open
[ 211 236 ] MAIN:
CB trip internal
Selected signal [ 221 006 ]
MAIN:
Inp.asg.CB tr.en.ext
[ 221 050 ]
MAIN:
CB tripped
[ 221 016 ]
Selected signal
MAIN:
Inp.asg. CB trip ext
[ 221 024 ]
Selected signal
68Z9325A
Fig. 3-73: CB trip signal.
3-108 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
The signal “CB tripped” depends on the mode of operation and is based on
different events:
Mode of operation: “With command” (MA IN: Ope r. mode C B Tr ip, 221 080):
In this mode of operation, in addition the MA IN: C B trip int ernal (221 006)
signal is formed.
The signal MA IN : C B tr ip i ntern al is issued if the following conditions are met
simultaneously:
● The binary signal input configured for “tripping” is set to a logic value of
“1” or the selected trip command from the P638 is present.
● At the binary signal input configured as “CB trip” a logic value of “1” is
present.
Mode of operation: “W/o command” (MAI N: Oper. mode CB Trip, 221 080):
The MAI N: C B tri pped signal will only be issued, if the circuit breaker is
tripping without any command issued by the P638. Commands via
communication interfaces, local control panel or binary inputs are treated in the
same manner. This mode of operation disables the MAI N: CB trip int e rnal
signal.
The CB trip signal of an external device can also be signaled. For this task, one
input needs to be configured for “MA IN: In p.as g.C B t r.en .e xt“, a further
input for “MAI N: I np.asg. CB trip e xt“.
3.13.14 Communication Error
COMM1: MAIN:
Communication error ≥1 Communication error
[ 221 019 ]
304 422
DVICE:
Module A not fitted
307 140
19Z5070A
Fig. 3-74: Communication Error.
If a link to the control station cannot be established or if the link is interrupted,

the signal “Communication error” will be issued. This signal will also be issued if
communication module A is not fitted.
3.13.15 Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization
MAIN:
Date
[ 003 090 ]
MAIN:
Time of day
[ 003 091 ]
MAIN:
Time switching
[ 003 095 ]
MAIN:
Min-pulse clock EXT
[ 060 060 ]
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021
MAIN:
Time switching
Setting 0: Standard time

1: Daylight saving time
Q6Z0152B
Fig. 3-75: Date/time setting and clock synchronization with minute pulses presented at a binary signal input.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-109

P638 3 Operation
Switching from standard to daylight saving time or back requires correct time
setting frames from the time synchronization master (according the applied
communication protocol).
The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory
and the event memories are date- and time-tagged. For correct tagging, the date
and time need to be set in the P638.
The time of different devices may be synchronized by a pulse given to an
appropriately configured binary signal input. The P638 evaluates the rising edge.
This will set the clock to the nearest full minute, rounding either up or down. If
several start/end signals occur (bouncing of a relay contact), only the last edge is
evaluated.
3-110 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.13.15.1 Synchronization Source

The P638 provides numerous options to synchronize the internal clock:
● Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM1/IEC
(full time)
● Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM2/PC
(full time)
● IRIG-B Signal (IRIGB; time of day only)
● Minute pulse presented at a binary signal input (MAIN), see Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-
109) and previous paragraph
With older P638 versions these interfaces had equal ranking i.e. clock
synchronization was carried out regardless of which sub-function initiated
triggering. No conflicts have to be taken into account as long as synchronization
sources (communication master, IRIG‑B and minute pulse source) operate at the
same time of day. Should the synchronization sources operate with a different
time basis unwanted step changes in the internal clock may occur. On the other
hand a redundant time of day synchronization is often used so as to sustain time
synchronization via IRIG‑B interface even if and while the SCADA communication
is out of service.
With the current P638 versions a primary and a backup source for time of day
synchronization may now be set, where both provide the four options listed in
the above.
MAI N: Prim.Source Ti me Sync
MAI N: Backu pS ourceTi meSyn c
With this feature synchronization occurs continuously from the primary source as
long as time synchronization telegrams are received within a time-out period set
at MAIN : Time sy n c. time -out The backup source is required if after the set
time-out there is no synchronization through the primary source.
When selecting the time telegram via IEC as the primary source the P638 will
expect time synchronization telegrams from server SNTP2 after server SNTP 1
has become defective, before it will switch over to the backup source.
Time synchronization occurs solely from the primary source when the time-out
stage is blocked.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-111

P638 3 Operation
3.13.16 Resetting Actions

Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in
several ways. The following types of resetting actions are possible:
● Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given
that the LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display
of measured event data on the local control panel LCD whenever a new
event occurs. In this case only the displays on the local control panel LCD
are cleared but not the internal memories such as the fault memory.
● Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the local
control panel LCD by pressing the “Clear” key located on the local
control panel. By selecting the required function at L OC: Fct. reset k ey
further memories may be assigned which will then also be cleared when
the “Clear” key is pressed.
● Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory)
via setting parameters. (For this example: Navigate to menu point
FT_R C: R ese t re cord. USER and set to execute, see also the exact step-
by-step description in Section 6.13.7, (p. 6-51).)
● Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory)
through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (For this example:
Assign parameter FT_RC: Re se t re cord. EXT to the relevant binary
signal input e.g. INP: Fct. assi gn m. U 301 .)
● Group resetting by setting parameters, by navigating to menu point
MAIN : Group re se t 1 USER (or MAI N: Group rese t 2 USER) and
setting it to execute. For this the relevant memories (i.e. those to be reset)
must be assigned to parameter MAI N: Fct. assign. reset 1 (or
MAI N: Fct .assign . res et 2, resp.)
● Group resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
(That is assign parameter MAI N: Grou p r es et 1 EXT (or MA IN: Gr oup
rese t 2 EXT) to the relevant binary signal input, e.g. INP : Fct. assig nm.
U 301 after memories to be reset have been assigned to parameter
MAI N: Fct .assi gn . res et 1 (or MA IN: Fct.assign. reset 2).
● General resetting by setting parameters (menu point MAIN: Genera l
rese t USER). All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any
special configuration options.
● General resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
(MAI N: General res et EXT is assigned to the relevant binary signal
input.) All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special
configuration options.
Should several resetting actions have been configured for one particular memory
then they all have equal priority.
In the event of a cold restart or simultaneous failure of both internal battery and
substation auxiliary supply, all stored counter values will be lost.
3-112 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1 1: execute
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute MAIN:
≥1 Reset LED
306 020
MAIN:
Reset indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
12Z6115A
Fig. 3-76: General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control panel.
LOC: OP_RC:
Reset key active & ≥1 Reset record. EXT
310 024 [ 005 213 ]
LOC:
Fct. reset key
[ 005 251 ]
m out of n
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[005 213]
MAIN: MAIN:
Group reset 1 USER Group reset 2 USER
[ * ] [ * ]
0 0
1 ≥1 & 1 ≥1 &
0: don't execute 0: don't execute
MAIN: 1: execute 1: execute

Group reset 1 EXT
[ * ]
MAIN:
Group reset 2 EXT
MAIN: MAIN:
[ * ] Fct.assign. reset 1 Fct.assign. reset 2
[ * ] [ * ]
m out of n m out of n
OP_RC: OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT Reset record. EXT
[005 213] [005 213]
12Z61RMB
Fig. 3-77: “CLEAR” key on the local control panel and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data
recording (e.g. as an example for the reset signal O P _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T.
A complete list of all resetting parameters that can be used in the way shown in
Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-113) can be obtained from the separately available
DataModelExplorer: Look up the setting parameter MAI N: F ct .as sign. re set 1
in the file P638‑661_en_Addresses.pdf, and there follow the link to the referenced
config. table.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-113

P638 3 Operation
3.13.16.1 Resetting Actions through Keys on the Local Control Panel

Further resetting possibilities are basically not distinct resetting actions but make
access especially easy to one of the resetting actions described above i.e. by
configuring them to a configurable key.
● One can include the relevant resetting action in the configuration of the
“READ” ( ) key (through LOC: Fct. re ad k ey).
3.13.17 Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical

Communications Channels
MAIN:
Chann.assign.COMM1/2
[ 003 169 ]
1: COMM1->chann.1,(2-2)
2: COMM1->chann.2,(2-1)
"Logical"
Communic. interface
COMM1
Comm. interface
Channel 1
"Logical"
Communic. interface
COMM2
Comm. interface
Channel 2
45Z5171A
Fig. 3-78: Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication channels.
Depending on the design version of the communications module A there are up

to two communications channels available (see “Technical Data”, Chapter 2,
(p. 2-1)). These physical communications channels may be assigned to
communications interfaces COMM1 and COMM2.
If communications interface COMM1 is assigned to communications channel 2,
then the settings of communications interface COMM2 are automatically
assigned to communications channel 1.
COMM2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P638 if its PC interface
has been de-activated. As soon as the PC interface is used to transmit data,
COMM2 becomes “dead”. It will only be enabled again when the “time-out”
period for the PC interface has elapsed.
3-114 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.13.18 Test Mode
MAIN:
Test mode USER
[ 003 012 ]
0
MAIN:
1 ≥1 Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Test mode EXT
[ 037 070 ]
D5Z50EBB
Fig. 3-79: Setting the test mode.
If tests are run on the P638, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that
all incoming signals via the serial interfaces will be identified accordingly.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-115

P638 3 Operation
3.14 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS)

With the P638, four independent parameter subsets may be pre-set. The user
may switch between parameter subsets during operation without interrupting the
protection function.
Selecting the Parameter Subset

The control path determining the active parameter subset (function setting or
binary signal input) may be selected via the function setting PSS: C ontrol via
USER or via the external signal PSS: Control via user EXT. Correspondingly,
the parameter subset is selected either in accordance with the pre-set function
setting PSS: Par am.su bs. se l. USE R or in accordance with external signals.
Which parameter subset is actually active at a particular time may be
determined by scanning the logic state signals PSS: Actual param . subset or
PSS : PS 1 act iv e.
Selecting the Parameter Subset via Binary Inputs

If the binary signal inputs are to be used for parameter subset selection, then the
P638 first checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured
for parameter subset selection. If this is not the case, then the parameter subset
selected via the function setting will be active. The P638 also checks whether the
signals present at the binary signal inputs allow an unambiguous parameter
subset selection. This is only true when only one binary signal input is set to a
logic level of “1”. If more than one signal input is set to a logic level of “1”, then
the parameter subset previously selected remains active. Should a dead interval
occur while switching between parameter subsets (this is the case if all binary
signal inputs have a logic level of “0”), then the stored hold time is started. While
this timer stage is running, the previously selected parameter subset remains
active. As soon as a signal input has a logic level of “1”, the associated
parameter subset becomes active. If, after the stored time has elapsed, there is
still no signal input with a logic level of “1”, the parameter subset selected via
the function parameter becomes active.
If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic level of “1” is present at any of
the binary signal inputs selected for the parameter subset selection, then the
parameter subset selected via the function parameter will become active once
the stored time has elapsed. The previous parameter subset remains active while
the stored hold timer stage is running.
Parameter subset selection may also occur during a starting condition. When
subset selection is handled via binary signal inputs, a maximum inherent delay of
approximately 100 ms must be taken into account.
Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally
effective for all four parameter subsets.
3-116 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
PSS:
Control via USER
[ 003 100 ]
0: No
1: Yes PSS:
Control via user
PSS: [ 036 102 ]
Control via user EXT
[ 036 101 ] PSS:
Param.subs.sel. USER
INP: [ 003 060 ]
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
1
2
U x1
3
U x2
4
U x3
1: Parameter subset 1
U xx
2: Parameter subset 2
Address 065 002
Address 065 003 3: Parameter subset 3

1
Address 065 004 4: Parameter subset 4 2
Address 065 005 3
PSS:
1 4 Actual param. subset
[ 003 062 ]
PSS:
PS 1 active
[ 036 090 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 1 EXT PSS:
[ 065 002 ] PS 2 active
[ 036 091 ]
PSS: PSS:
Activate PS 2 EXT PS 3 active
[ 065 003 ] [ 036 092 ]
PSS: PSS:
Activate PS 3 EXT PS 4 active
[ 065 004 ] [ 036 093 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 4 EXT
[ 065 005 ]
1 4
PSS:
Keep time
[ 003 063 ]
1
PSS:
0 4 Ext.sel.param.subset
[ 003 061 ]
PSS:
PS 1 activated ext.
[ 036 094 ]
PSS:
PS 2 activated ext.
[ 036 095 ]
PSS:
PS 3 activated ext.
[ 036 096 ]
PSS:
PS 4 activated ext.
[ 036 097 ]
D5Z5002A
Fig. 3-80: Activating the parameter subsets.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-117

P638 3 Operation
3.15 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON)

Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P638 ensure that internal faults are
detected and do not lead to malfunctions. The selection of function assignments
to the alarm signal includes, among others, self-monitoring signals from the
communications monitor, measuring-circuit monitoring, open-circuit monitoring
and the logic outputs.
3.15.1 Tests During Start-up

After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to
verify full operability of the P638. If the P638 detects a fault in one of the tests,
then start-up is terminated. The display shows which test was running when
termination occurred. No control actions may be carried out. A new attempt to
start up the P638 can only be initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then
on again.
3.15.2 Cyclic Tests

After start-up has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will
be run during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified
monitoring signal will be issued and stored in a non-volatile(NV) memory – the
monitoring signal memory – along with the assigned date and time (see
Section 3.17, (p. 3-122)).
The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the
minimum acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is
displayed, then the power supply module should be replaced within a month,
since otherwise there is the danger of data loss if the supply voltage should fail.
Section 12.1, (p. 12-2) gives further information on maintenance procedures.
3.15.3 Signals
SFMON:
Fct. assign. warning
[ 021 030 ]
Signal 1
m out of n
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
SFMON:
Selected monit. sig. ≥1 Warning (LED)
[ 036 070 ]
SFMON:
SFMON: Warning (relay)
Hardware fault [ 036 100 ]
304 950
Q6Z0154B
Fig. 3-81: Monitoring signals.
The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay configured
SF MO N: Warning (re lay). The output relay operates as long as an internal
fault is detected.
Note: It is strongly recommended to use an output relay of the power supply

module for signaling “blocked/faulty” state (so-called watchdog relay).
3-118 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.15.4 Device Response

The response of the P638 is dependent on the type of monitoring signal. The
following responses are possible:
● Signaling Only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a
signal is issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation
exists, for example, when internal data acquisition memories overflow.
● Selective Blocking
If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective
functions, then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for
example, to the detection of a fault on the communication module or in the
area of the PC interface.
● Warm Restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a
system restart – such as a fault caused by excessive electro-magnetic
interference –, then a procedure called a warm restart is automatically
initiated. During this procedure, as with any start-up, the computer system
is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is characterized by the fact that
no stored data and, in particular, no setting parameters are affected by the
procedure. A warm restart can also be triggered manually by control action.
During a warm restart sequence the protective functions and the
communication through serial interfaces will be blocked.
If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been triggered by the
self-monitoring system within the set SF MO N: Mon . sig. ret e nt ion, then
the protective functions remain blocked but communication through the
serial interfaces will usually be possible again.
If a corrupted setting is diagnosed during the checksum test, which is part
of the self-monitoring procedure, settings are restored from an internal
back-up memory. Nevertheless, in order to get the device back to well
defined operation conditions a warm restart is executed.
For any warm restart initiated by self-monitoring, the root cause (alarm
event) is logged in the monitoring buffer.
● Cold Restart
In case the recovery of corrupted settings failed (e.g. because of an
electrical defect of the memory chip), then a cold restart is carried out. This
is necessary because the P638 cannot identify which parameter in the
subset is corrupted. A cold restart causes all internal memories to be reset
to a defined state. This means that all the protection device settings are
also erased after a cold restart. In order to establish a safe initial state, the
default values have been selected so that the protective functions are
blocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered the cold restart and the
value indicating parameter loss are entered in the monitoring signal
memory.
A cold restart can also be triggered manually by control action (to
intentionally erase all memories and reset the device to default settings).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-119

P638 3 Operation
3.15.5 Monitoring Signal Memory

Depending on the type of internal fault detected the P638 will respond by trying
to eliminate the problem with a warm restart. (See above; for further details read
also about P638 behavior with problems in Chapter 11, (p. 11-1).) Whether or
not this measure will suffice can only be determined if the monitoring signal has
not already been stored in the monitoring signal memory because of a previous
fault. If it was already stored and a second fault is detected then, depending on
the type of fault detected, the P638 will be blocked after the second warm
restart.
In order to better monitor this behavior the parameter at SFMON: Mon. sig.
re t ent ion is applied. This parameter may either be set to ‘Blocked’ or to a time
duration (in hours). (It is, however, discouraged to set it to 0, because in this
case, there would be no blocking at all, so that there would be the danger of
maloperation in case of a permanent failure.)
The default for this timer stage is Blocked, i.e. blocking of the protection device
with two identical faults occurs independently of the time elapsed since the first
fault monitoring signal was issued.
The behavior caused by sporadic faults could lead to an unwanted blocking of the
P638 if the monitoring signal memory had not been reset in the interim, for
example, because the substation is difficult to reach in wintertime or reading-out
and clearing of the monitoring signal memory via the communication interfaces
was not enabled. To defuse this problem it is suggested to set the function
parameter to a specific time period so that blocking will only occur if the same
fault occurs again within this time period. Otherwise, the P638 will continue to
operate normally after a warm restart.
3.15.6 Monitoring Signal Memory Time Tag

The time when the device fault occurred last is recorded.
3-120 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.16 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC)

For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of
events, a battery backed memory is provided (cyclic buffer). The “operationally
relevant” signals, each fully tagged with date and time at signal start and signal
end, are entered in chronological order. The signals relevant for operation
include control actions such as function disabling and enabling and triggers for
testing and resetting. The start and end of system loggings and recordings that
represent a deviation from normal operation such as overloads, ground faults or
short-circuits are also recorded. The overload or fault events itself are stored in
the relevant event recordings only. The operating data memory can be cleared/
reset.
Counter for Signals Relevant to System Operation

The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.
OP_RC:
Operat. data record.
[ 003 024 ]
Operating memory
MAIN:
Oper.-relev. signal
306 024
MAIN: OP_RC:
General reset USER No. oper. data sig.
[ 003 002 ] +
[ 100 002 ]
1: execute R
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 213 ]
OP_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 001 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
12Z61CMA
Fig. 3-82: Operating data recording and counter for signals relevant to system operation.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-121

P638 3 Operation
3.17 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC)

The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in
the monitoring signal memory. The memory buffer allows for a maximum of
30 entries. If more than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory
clearance, the SFMON: O ve rf low MT_RC signal is entered as the last entry.
Monitoring signals prompted by a hardware fault in the unit are always entered
in the monitoring signal memory. Monitoring signals prompted by a peripheral
fault can be entered into the monitoring signal memory, if desired. The user can
select this option by setting an “m out of n” parameter (see Section 3.15, (p. 3-
118)).
If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is
signaled by the red LED indicator H 3 on the local control panel. Each new entry
causes the LED to flash (on/off/on....).
The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action.
Entries in the monitoring signal memory are not cleared automatically, even if
the corresponding test in a new test cycle now shows the P638 to be healthy.
The contents of the monitoring signal memory can be read from the local control
panel or through the PC or communication interface. The time and date
information assigned to the individual entries can be read out through the PC or
communication interface or from the local control panel.
Monitoring Signal Counter

The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on
the monitoring signal counter (MT_RC : N o. mon it. signals).
MT_RC:
Mon. signal record.
[ 003 001 ]
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021
SFMON:
Hardware fault
304 950
Selected monit. sig.
MT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 008 ]
CT30 SFMON:
≥1 Overflow MT_RC
[ 090 012 ]
0
MT_RC:
1 ≥1 No. monit. signals
[ 004 019 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 240 ]
12Z6155A
Fig. 3-83: Monitoring signal recording and the monitoring signal counter.
3-122 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.18 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA)
3.18.1 Overload Duration

In the event of an overload, the P638 determines the overload duration. The
overload duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the
OL_R C: R ecord. in progr e ss signal.
OL_RC: OL_DA:
Record. in progress + Overload duration
[ 035 003 ] [ 004 102 ]
R
MAIN: ≥1
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
50Z0137A
Fig. 3-84: Overload duration.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-123

P638 3 Operation
3.18.2 Acquiring Measured Overload Data from the Thermal Overload

Protection
Measured overload values are derived from the thermal overload protection’s
measured operating data. They are stored at the end of an overload event.
OL_RC:
Record. in progress C
[ 035 003 ]
THERM: OL_DA:
Status therm.replica Status THERM replica
[ 004 016 ] [ 004 147 ]
R
THERM: OL_DA:
I Load current THERM
305 202 [ 004 058 ]
R
THERM: OL_DA:
Object temperature Object temp. THERM
[ 004 137 ] [ 004 035 ]
R
THERM: OL_DA:
Coolant temperature Coolant temp. THERM
[ 004 149 ] [ 004 036 ]
R
THERM: OL_DA:
Pre-trip time left Pre-trip t.leftTHERM
[ 004 139 ] [ 004 148 ]
R
THERM: OL_DA:
Temp. offset replica Offset THERM replica
[ 004 109 ] [ 004 154 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
12Z6238A
Fig. 3-85: Measured overload values from the thermal overload protection.
3-124 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.19 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC)
3.19.1 Start of Overload Recording

An overload exists – and consequently overload recording begins – if at least the
signal THER M: St art ing k*Ire f > is issued.
3.19.2 Counting Overload Events

Overload events are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
THERM:
Starting k*Iref>
[ 041 108 ] +
R OL_RC:
No. overload
[ 004 101 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
52Z01C3A
Fig. 3-86: Counting overload events.
3.19.3 Time Tagging

The date of each overload event is stored. The overload start or end signals are
likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time assigned to an
overload event when the event begins can be read out from the overload
memory on the local control panel or through the PC and communication
interfaces. The time information (relative to the onset of the overload) can be
retrieved from the overload memory or through the PC or one of the
communication interfaces.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-125

P638 3 Operation
3.19.4 Overload Logging

Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order
with reference to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each
involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-
volatile overload memories. After eight overload events have been logged, the
oldest overload log will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in
the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single
overload event, then OL_RC: Ove rl. mem. ove rflow will be entered as the
last signal.
In addition to the signals, the measured overload data will also be entered in the
overload memory.
The overload logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
OL_RC: C
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
Signal 1 + CT200 OL_RC:

1 ≥1 Overl. mem. overflow
Signal 2 1 R [ 035 007 ]
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1 OL_RC:
Overload recording 1
[ * ]
OL_RC:
n Overload recording 1
Measured value 1
1 033 020
Measured value 2
2 033 021
Measured value 3
3 033 022
Measured value N
4 033 023
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021 5 033 024
FT_RC: & 6 033 025

Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ] 7 033 026
R
8 033 027
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
MAIN:
1 ≥1
General reset USER 0: don't execute
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
12Z6117A
Fig. 3-87: Overload memory.
3-126 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.20 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA)

When there is a primary system fault, the P638 collects the following measured
fault data:
Running time:
(004 021) FT_DA: Ru nni ng time
Fault duration:
(008 010) FT_ DA: Faul t duration
Fault determination and run time to measurement:

(004 198) FT_DA : Faul t deter m.
(004 199) FT_DA: Ru n ti me to me as.
Phase voltage and fault current (short-circuit current), as p.u. value:

(004 116) FT_DA : Faul t cu rr.IA ,a p.u .
(004 117) FT _DA : Fault cu rr.I C,a p.u .
(004 118) FT_DA : Fault curr.IA, b p.u
(004 119) FT _D A: Faul t curr. IC, b p.u .
(004 177) FT_DA: IN . p.u .
(004 026) FT_DA: Faul t vol tage p.u .
Differential currents of the two measuring systems:

(005 082) FT_DA: Diff. cu rre nt 1
(006 082) FT_DA : D iff . curren t 2
Second harmonic of the differential current:

(005 084) FT_ DA: Diff. cu rre nt 1( 2 f0)
(006 084) FT_DA: Diff. cu rre nt 2(2 f 0)
Restraining currents of the two measuring systems:

(005 083) FT_DA : Re strain. cu rren t 1
(006 083) FT_ DA: Re strain. cu rren t 2
3.20.1 Running Time and Fault Duration

The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general
starting signal, and the fault duration is defined as the time between the start
and end of the FT_RC: Re cor d. i n progre ss signal.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-127

P638 3 Operation
! G ! FT_DA:
MAIN: Running time
General starting +
[ 004 021 ]
[ 036 000 ]
R
≥1
FT_RC: ! G ! FT_DA:

Record. in progress + Fault duration
[ 035 000 ] [ 008 010 ]
R
MAIN: ≥1
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
49Z64DMA
Fig. 3-88: Running time and fault duration.
3-128 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.20.2 Fault Data Acquisition Time

The P638 determines the measured fault data for a particular point in time
during a fault. Depending on which protection function detects the fault, the
criterion for the determination of the recording start time is selected by the P638.
If, for example, the differential protection function detects a fault then the P638
determines the measured fault data at the time during the fault when the
maximum differential current was measured. The measured fault data are
displayed at the end of the fault. If several protection functions detect a fault,
then the protection function with the highest priority is displayed. The priorities
are given in the table below.
Priority Function Recognizing the Fault Acquisition Time Criterion
Definite-time overcurrent protection, residual

1 Maximum residual current
current system
2 Differential protection Maximum differential current
3 Transverse differential protection, end a Maximum current IAC end a
4 Transverse differential protection, end b Maximum current IAC end b
5 Definite-time overcurrent protection, end a Maximum phase current end a
6 Definite-time overcurrent protection, end b Maximum phase current end b
7 Distance protection Maximum current
8 Trigger of the fault recording Maximum current
9 Manual trigger End of fault
The time difference between the begining of the fault and the fault data
acquisition time is also displayed.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-129

P638 3 Operation
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
DTOCN:
Starting IN>H
[ 035 195 ]
DTOCN:
Starting IN>
[ 040 077 ]
DTOCN:
Starting IN>>
[ 040 041 ]
DIFF:
Trip signal
[ 041 075 ]
DIFF:
Trip signal 1
[ 041 002 ]
DIFF:
Trip signal 2
[ 041 003 ]
DIF_a:
Trip signal
[ 041 211 ]
DIF_b:
Trip signal
[ 041 212 ]
DTOC1:
Starting I>
[ 035 108 ]
DTOC1:
Starting I>>
[ 035 109 ]
DTOC2:
Starting I>
[ 035 138 ]
DTOC2:
Starting I>>
[ 035 139 ]
DTOC2:
Phase C triggered
[ 035 135 ]
DIST:
Z1 starting
[ 039 003 ]
DIST:
Z2 starting
[ 039 005 ]
DIST:
Z3 starting
[ 039 140 ] FT_DA:
Fault determ.
FT_RC:
I> triggered, end a [ 004 198 ]
[ 035 014 ]
FT_RC:
I> triggered, end b C1
[ 035 015 ] C2
FT_RC:
Id> triggered C3
[ 035 018 ]
FT_RC: C4
IN> triggered
[ 035 017 ] C5
C6
C7
C8
FT_RC: C9
Trigger
[ 037 076 ]
|I̲max|
I̲ 1 9
1 9 FT_DA:
Save measured values
305 052
FT_DA:
MAIN: Run time to meas.
General reset USER [ 004 199 ]
[ 003 002 ]
↗ 1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED 68Z9326A
Fig. 3-89: Determination of the fault data acquisition time.
3.20.3 Acquisition of Fault Data (Short Circuit Data)

The P638 stores the fault's current and voltage data determined at the time of
acquisition. The following fault currents are stored:
3-130 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
● The phase currents for each end of the transformer

● The residual current
Fault current and voltage are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to Inom and
Vnom. If the measured or calculated values are outside the acceptable measuring
range, the Overflow indication will be displayed.
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_DA: C
Save measured values C
035 052
I̲N FT_DA:
IN. p.u.
[ 004 177 ]
R
I̲A,a
FT_DA:
Fault curr.IA,a p.u.
[ 004 116 ]
R
I̲C,a FT_DA:
Fault curr.IC,a p.u.
[ 004 117 ]
R
I̲A,b
FT_DA:
Fault curr.IA,b p.u
[ 004 118 ]
R
I̲C,b FT_DA:
Fault curr.IC,b p.u.
[ 004 119 ]
R
V̲
FT_DA:
Fault voltage p.u.
[ 004 026 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
↗1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
68Z6035A
Fig. 3-90: Acquisition of the fault currents and voltage.
The P638 stores the differential and restraining current data determined at the
acquisition time by the differential protection. Moreover, the component values
for the second harmonic of the differential current are stored.
Differential and restraining currents are stored as per-unit quantities referred to
Iref.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-131

P638 3 Operation
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_DA: C
Save measured values C
035 052
DIFF: FT_DA:
Id,1 Diff. current 1
[ 005 082 ]
R
DIFF:
I(2⋅f0),1 FT_DA:
Diff. current 1(2f0)
[ 005 084 ]
R
DIFF: FT_DA:
IR,1 Restrain. current 1
[ 005 083 ]
R
DIFF:
Id,2 FT_DA:
Diff. current 2
[ 006 082 ]
R
DIFF: FT_DA:
I(2⋅f0),2 Diff. current 2(2f0)
[ 006 084 ]
R
DIFF:
IR,2 FT_DA:
Restrain. current 2
[ 006 083 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
↗1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
68Z6036A
Fig. 3-91: Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of differential protection.
3.20.4 Fault Data Reset

After pressing the clear key on the local control panel, the fault data value is
displayed as Not measured. However, the values are not erased and can still be
read out through the PC and communication interfaces.
3-132 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.21 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC)
3.21.1 Start of Fault Recording

A fault exists and fault recording begins if at least one of the following signals is
present:
● FT_RC : I> t rigge red, e nd a
● FT_RC : I> t ri ggere d, en d b
● FT_RC : IN > tri gge red
● FT_RC : Id > tri gge red
● FT_RC : Tri gge r
In addition, the user can set a logical “OR” combination of logic signals (m out of
n parameter) whose appearance will trigger fault recording.
The maximum duration of each recording is limited to 1 minute, even if a
permanent trigger condition is present, to avoid 'endless' recordings.
3.21.2 Fault Counting

Faults are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-133

P638 3 Operation
FT_RC: FT_RC:
Trigger EXT ≥1 Trigger
[ 036 089 ] [ 037 076 ]
FT_RC:
Trigger USER
[ 003 041 ]
1
0: don't execute FT_RC:
≥1 Record. in progress
1: execute [ 035 000 ]
FT_RC:
Fct. assig. trigger
[ 003 085 ]
FT_RC:
Signal 1 [ 035 004 ]
Signal 2
m out of n
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
FT_RC:
I>, end a
[ 016 014 ]
I̲A,a FT_RC:
≥1 I> triggered, end a
I̲C,a [ 035 014 ]
FT_RC:
I>, end b
[ 016 015 ]
I̲A,b FT_RC:
≥1 I> triggered, end b
[ 035 015 ]
I̲C,b
FT_RC:
IN>
[ 016 017 ]
I̲N FT_RC:
IN> triggered
[ 035 017 ]
FT_RC:
Id>
[ 016 018 ]
DIFF: FT_RC:
Id,1 ≥1 Id> triggered
[ 035 018 ]
DIFF:
Id,2
FT_RC:
+ No. of faults
MAIN: [ 004 020 ]
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ] ≥1 R
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT FT_RC:
+ No. system disturb.
[ 005 255 ]
[ 004 010 ]
FT_RC: R
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
68Z6031A
Fig. 3-92: Start of fault recording and fault counter.
3.21.3 Time Tagging

The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A fault’s
individual start or end signals are likewise time-tagged. The date and time
assigned to a fault when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory
on the local control panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The
time information (relative to the onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals
can be retrieved from the fault memory or through the PC or communication
interfaces.
3-134 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.21.4 Fault Recordings
FT_RC: C
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC:
Signal 1 + CT200 Fault mem. overflow
1 ≥1 [ 035 001 ]
Signal 2 1 R
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1 FT_RC:
Fault recording n
[ * ]
1
FT_RC:
Pre-fault time
[ 003 078 ]
FT_RC:
Post-fault time
[ 003 079 ]
FT_RC:
n Fault recording n
Fault memory n
1 003 000
2 033 001
3 033 002
Measured value 1 4 033 003
Measured value N 7 033 006
MAIN: 8 033 007

Time tag
306 021
MAIN:
General reset USER &
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute R
≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1 1: execute
0: don't execute
1: execute
12Z6161B
Fig. 3-93: Fault memory.
Protection signals, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and post-
fault times, are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault.
A total of eight faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can
be stored in the non-volatile fault memories. After eight faults have been
recorded, the oldest fault recording will be overwritten, unless memories have
been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred
during a single fault, then FT_RC: Fault m e m. over flow will be entered as the
last signal. If the time and date are changed during the pre-fault time, the signal
FT_R C: Fa ult y ti me tag is generated.
In addition to the fault signals, the measured fault data will also be entered in the
fault memory.
The fault recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-135

P638 3 Operation
3.21.5 Fault Value Recording

The following analog signals are recorded:
● The phase currents of the two ends of the transformer
● The residual current
● The voltage
The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The window length for
oscillography recording before and after the fault can be set. A maximum time of
300 periods is available for recording. This period can be divided among a
maximum of eight faults. The maximum recording time per fault can be set. If a
fault, including the set pre-fault and post-fault times, lasts longer than the set
maximum recording time, then recording will terminate when the set maximum
recording time is reached.
The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the set maximum
recording time. Otherwise the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording
time minus a sampling increment, and the post-fault time is set to zero.
If the maximum recording time is exceeded, the analog values for the oldest fault
are overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults have
occurred since the last reset, then all data for the oldest fault are overwritten.
The analog oscillography data of the fault record can only be read out through
the PC or communication interfaces.
When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all
faults remain stored.
FT_RC:
Record. in progress C
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC:
Max. recording time
[ 003 075 ]
FT_RC:
Pre-fault time
[ 003 078 ]
FT_RC:
Post-fault time
[ 003 079 ]
I̲A,a Analog channel 1

R
I̲C,a Analog channel 2

R
I̲A,b Analog channel 3

R
I̲C,b Analog channel 4

R
I̲N Analog channel 6

R
V̲ Analog channel 7
R
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ] 68Z6030A
Fig. 3-94: Fault value recording.
3-136 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.22 Differential Protection (Function Group DIFF)

The differential protection functionality provided by the P638 is designed to
protect transformers in a two-phase system.
For application of the device as transformer differential protection, amplitude
matching is required. This is achieved simply by setting of the reference power ‑
generally the nominal power of the transformer ‑ and the primary and secondary
nominal voltages of the transformer.
Vector group matching is not generally necessary with transformers situated in
railway substations. Should this be required, however, the P638 can be
configured in such a way that the phase of one side of the transformer is rotated
by 180°.
For transformers with grounded mid-point tapping, the P638 provides optional
zerosequence current filtering for both voltage levels.
In the descriptions in the following sections, it is assumed that the current
transformers are connected to the P638 in the standard configuration (see
Section 3.13.1, (p. 3-84)). In particular, the application as transformer differential
protection device presupposes that winding ‘a’ corresponds to the high voltage
side of the transformer.
3.22.1 Enabling or Disabling Differential Protection

Differential protection can be enabled or disabled from the local control panel.
Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each parameter subset.
For differential protection to operate, the matching factors must be within their
permissible ranges.
DIFF:
General enable USER
[ 019 080 ]
0
DIFF:
1 Enabled
[ 041 210 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DIFF:
Ready
DIFF: [ 041 216 ]
Enable PSx
[ * ]
DIFF:
Not ready
[ 041 217 ]
0
0: No
1: Yes
DIFF: >1
Matching fail. end a -
[ 041 213 ]
DIFF:
Matching fail. end b
[ 041 214 ]
Parameter DIFF:
Enable PSx
set 1 072 152
set 2 073 152
set 3 074 152
set 4 075 152
68Z6032A
Fig. 3-95: Enabling or disabling differential protection.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-137

P638 3 Operation
3.22.2 Amplitude Matching

In order to set the amplitude matching for the protected object, a reference
power needs to be defined. Normally this is the rated power of the transformer.
The reference current is then calculated by the P638 using the set reference
power and the set transformer primary and secondary nominal voltages.
Calculation of the reference current I ref :
Sref
I ref ,a =
V nom,a
Sref
I ref ,b =
V nom,b
Sref : reference power

I ref ,a, I ref ,b: reference currents of end a or b
V nom,a, V nom,b: nominal voltages of end a or b
The P638 calculates the matching factors on the basis of the reference currents
and the set primary nominal currents of the system transformers.
Calculation of the matching factors:
I nom,a
kam,a =
I ref ,a
I nom,b
kam,b =
I ref ,b
with
kam,a, kam,b: amplitude matching factors of end a or b
I nom,a, I nom,b: primary nominal currents of the system transformers
Reference currents and matching factors are displayed at the P638.
The P638 checks that the matching factors are within the permissible range of
0.5 ≤kam,x ≤ 16. Should the P638 calculate matching factors which do not satisfy
the above conditions, SFMON: Match ing fai l . e nd a or SFMON: Matching
fail. end b will be issued and differential protection will be automatically
blocked.
The measured values of the phase currents of the protected object are multiplied
by the relevant matching factors. These are then available for further processing.
Consequently, all threshold values and measured values are always in relation to
the relevant reference currents rather than to the transformer nominal currents
or the nominal currents of the device.
3-138 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
DIFF:
Vnom prim., end a
[ 019 017 ]
DIFF:
Vnom prim., end b
[ 019 018 ]
DIFF:
Reference power Sref
[ 019 016 ]
DIFF: C
Enabled
[ 041 210 ]
Iref,a=Sref/Vnom,a DIFF:
Ref. curr. Iref,a
[ 019 023 ]
Iref,b=Sref/Vnom,b DIFF:
Ref. curr. Iref,b
[ 019 024 ]
MAIN:
[ 019 020 ]
MAIN:
[ 019 021 ]
kam,a = Inom,a/Iref,a DIFF:

Matching fact. kam,a
[ 004 105 ]
kam,b = Inom,b/Iref,b DIFF:

Matching fact. kam,b
[ 004 106 ]
MAIN: C
Protection active
306 001
0.5 ≤ kam,a ≤ 16.0 DIFF:

Matching fail. end a
[ 041 213 ]
0.5 ≤ kam,b ≤ 16.0 DIFF:
Matching fail. end b
[ 041 214 ]
SFMON:
Matching fail. end a
[ 098 031 ]
DIFF: C
Ready & SFMON:
[ 041 216 ] Matching fail. end b
[ 098 032 ]
MAIN:
Protect. not ready
[ 004 060 ] kam,a * I̲A,a I̲am,A,a
I̲A,a
kam,a * I̲C,a I̲am,C,a

I̲C,a
kam,b * I̲A,b I̲am,A,b

I̲A,b
kam,b * I̲C,b I̲am,C,b

I̲C,b
68Z6033B
Fig. 3-96: Amplitude matching.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-139

P638 3 Operation
3.22.3 Vector Group Matching

Vector group matching is a procedure whereby the currents of the high voltage
side are rotated in such a way that their phasors coincide with those of the low
voltage side. This is achieved by setting MAI N: C onn. meas. circ. a or
MAI N: C onn. meas. circ. b (see Section 3.13.1, (p. 3-84)).
3.22.4 Zero-sequence Current Filtering

On transformers with grounded mid-point tapping on one winding and an
asymmetrical load, a zero-sequence current flows through this grounded mid-
point tapping. This zerosequence current is superimposed on both phase
currents and will corrupt differential and restraining currents. In order to prevent
this problem the P638 provides both measuring circuits (end ‘a’ and end ‘b’) with
zero-sequence current filtering, which may be enabled or disabled.
The P638 calculates the zero-sequence currents using the following formula:
1
I̲am,0,y = . I̲ − I̲am,C, y
2 am,A,y
y: end 'a' or 'b'
I̲am: amplitude-matched current
The determined zero-sequence current is subtracted from the phase currents.
These corrected phase currents are then used to determine the differential and
restraining currents.
3-140 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
DIFF:
0-seq. filt.a en.PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes C C2, 4
C1, 3
I̲am,A,a
I̲am,0,a
I̲am,C,a
I̲am,A,a - I̲am,0,a 1
I̲am,C,a - I̲am,0,a 3
1...2 I̲s,1,a
DIFF:
0-seq. filt.b en.PSx 3...4 I̲s,2,a
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes C C2, 4
C1, 3
I̲am,A,b
I̲am,0,b
I̲am,C,b
I̲am,A,b - I̲am,0,b 1
I̲am,C,b - I̲am,0,b 3
1...2 I̲s,1,b
3...4 I̲s,2,b
Parameter DIFF: DIFF:

0-seq. filt.a en.PSx 0-seq. filt.b en.PSx
set 1 072 155 071 060
set 2 073 155 071 061
set 3 074 155 071 062
set 4 075 155 071 063
68Z6034A
Fig. 3-97: Zero-sequence current filtering.
3.22.5 Tripping Characteristics

The differential and restraining current values for each measurement system are
derived from the amplitude matched and zero-sequence compensated currents.
The following equations are valid for uniformly orientated current phasors
relative to the protected object. That means, the current phasors in each end,
must point either towards the protected object or away from it.
Calculation of differential and restraining currents:
I d ,y = | I̲s,y,a + I̲s, y,b |
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-141

P638 3 Operation
I R,y = 0.5 ⋅ | I̲s, y,a − I̲s, y,b |

s: vector group matched, zero-sequence current filtered
y: measuring system 1 or 2
The differential and restraining currents are displayed as measured operating
data, provided that the set thresholds are exceeded.
The tripping characteristic of the P638 line differential protection device has two
knee points. The first knee-point depends on the setting at DIFF: Idiff> PSx
and is on the intersection with the tripping characteristic for single-side feed. The
second knee of the tripping characteristic is defined by the setting DIF F: IR,m2
PSx.
The characteristic equations for the three different ranges are given below.
Fig. 3-98, (p. 3-143) shows the tripping characteristic.
Characteristics equation for the range 0 ≤ I R ≤ 0.5I diff >:
Id I diff >
=
I ref I ref
Characteristics equation for the range 0.5I diff > < I R ≤ I R,m :
2
Id IR I diff >
= m1 ⋅ + ⋅ (1 − 0.5 ⋅ m1)
I ref I ref I ref
Characteristics equation for the range I R,m < I R :

2
Id IR I diff > I R,m

2
= m2 ⋅ + ⋅ (1 − 0.5 ⋅ m1) + ⋅ (m1 − m2)
I ref I ref I ref I ref
Iref: reference current

m1: gradient of the characteristic in range 0.5I diff > < I R ≤ I R,m
2
m2: gradient of characteristic in range I R,m < I R
2
3-142 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
Id 25
Iref
Tripping area
20
tic
ris
ee cte
e f ra
d
sid ha
le- nt c
ing rre
u
fo ult c
15
rs
Fa
1
=
2
m
=
1
m
10
.4
=0
m2
Idiff >= 2.5 m1 = 0.2
Blocking area
Idiff >= 0.1
0 5 10 15
IR
IRm2 = 1.5 IRm2 = 10 Iref Q9Z5005A
Fig. 3-98: Tripping characteristic of differential protection.
If the differential current is above the configured threshold D IF F: Idiff>> PSx,

the P638 will trip without taking the inrush stabilization into account.
Furthermore, if the differential current exceeds the adjustable threshold
DI FF : Idiff>>> P Sx, the restraining current is also no longer taken into
account.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-143

P638 3 Operation
DIFF:
Sat.discr. 1 trigg.
[ 041 115 ]
DIFF:
Sat.discr. 2 trigg.
[ 041 116 ]
DIFF:
Int. rush stab. trig
303 300
DIFF:
Idiff> PSx
[ * ]
DIFF:
m1 PSx
[ * ]
DIFF:
m2 PSx
[ * ]
DIFF:
IR,m2 PSx
[ * ]
DIFF:
Trip signal
[ 041 075 ]
I̲s,1,a DIFF:
Trip signal 1
I̲s,1,b Id,1 = f(I̲s,1,z)
[ 041 002 ]
I̲s,2,a DIFF:
Id,2 = f(I̲s,2,z) Trip signal 2
I̲s,2,b [ 041 003 ]
IR,1 = f(I̲s,1,z)
IR,2 = f(I̲s,2,z) DIFF:

Idiff>> PSx
z: End a, b [ * ]
DIFF:
Idiff>>> PSx
[ * ]
DIFF:
Id,1
303 303
DIFF:
Id,2
303 304
DIFF:
IR,1
303 305
DIFF:
IR,2
DIFF: 303 306
Meas. value rel. Id
[*]
C1
C2
1 DIFF:
Diff. current 1
2 [ 005 080 ]
DIFF:
Diff. current 2
DIFF: [ 006 080 ]
Meas. value rel. IR
[*]
C1
C2
1 DIFF:
Restrain. current 1
2
[ 005 081 ]
DIFF:
Restrain. current 2
[ 006 081 ]
Parameter DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF:

Idiff> PSx m1 PSx m2 PSx IR,m2 PSx Idiff>> PSx Idiff>>> PSx
set 1 072 142 072 145 072 146 072 147 072 143 072 144
set 2 073 142 073 145 073 146 073 147 073 143 073 144
set 3 074 142 074 145 074 146 074 147 074 143 074 144
set 4 075 142 075 145 075 146 075 147 075 143 075 144
Q9Z5006A
Fig. 3-99: Measuring system of P638.
3.22.6 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint)

When an unloaded transformer is energized, the inrush current could reach
values that exceed the transformer nominal current several times over. It takes
some time for the current to assume its steady state value. Since the high inrush
3-144 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
current flows on the connected side only, the tripping characteristic of the P638
may give rise to a trip unless stabilizing action is taken. The inrush current has a
high proportion of harmonics of twice the system frequency. This provides a
mechanism to provide stabilization against tripping due to the inrush current.
The P638 filters the differential current. The fundamental wave I ( f 0) and second
harmonic components I (2 ⋅ f 0) of the differential current are thus determined.
I (2 ⋅ f 0)
Tripping is blocked if the ratio exceeds a specific adjustable value in at
I ( f 0)
least one measuring system. There will be no blocking if the differential current
exceeds the set threshold D IF F: Idif f >> P Sx.
Inrush stabilization is disabled when DIFF: RushI (2f0 )/I(f0) PSx is set to
'Blocked'.
DIFF: c
Trip signal
[ 041 075 ]
f0 I(f0)
DIFF: DIFF:
Id,1 >1 Int. rush stab. trig
303 303 DIFF: 303 300
RushI(2f0)/I(f0) PSx
2⋅f0 [ * ]
I(2⋅f0)
0 100ms
I(2⋅f0)/I(f0) DIFF:
f0 I(f0) Harm.block. 1 trigg.
DIFF: [ 041 118 ]
Id,2
303 304
0 100ms
I(2⋅f0) I(2⋅f0)/I(f0) DIFF:
2⋅f0 Harm.block. 2 trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
Parameter DIFF: DIFF:

RushI(2f0)/I(f0) PSx I(2⋅f0),1
303 301
set 1 072 159
DIFF:
set 2 073 159 I(2⋅f0),2
set 3 074 159 303 302
set 4 075 159

Q9Z5007A
Fig. 3-100: Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-145

P638 3 Operation
3.23 Transverse Differential Protection (Function Groups DIF_a

and DIF_b)
As an additional protection feature against winding and ground faults the P638
provides transverse differential protection for transformer ends a and b.
All transverse differential protection threshold values are based on nominal
currents of the protection device.
3.23.1 Enabling or Disabling Transverse Differential Protection

Tansverse differential protection can be enabled or disabled using setting
parameters. Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each parameter
subset.
DIF_z:
Enabled USER
[ * ]
0
DIF_z:
1 Enabled
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
DIF_z:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
Z: End a Z: End a
DIF_z: 019 081 019 082

Enabled USER
DIF_z: 041 130 041 131
Enable PSx
Z: End a Z: End b
Parameter DIF_a: Parameter DIF_b:

Enable PSx Enable PSx
set 1 072 130 set 1 072 134
set 2 073 130 set 2 073 134
set 3 074 130 set 3 074 134
set 4 075 130 set 4 075 134
Q9Z5009A
Fig. 3-101: Enabling or disabling transverse differential protection.

Transverse and restraining currents are calculated by the transverse differential
protection by using the two-phase current values.
Calculation of differential and restraining currents:
I trans,z = | | I̲ A,z | − | I̲C ,z | |
I R,z = 0.5 ⋅ ( | I̲ A,z | + | I̲C ,z | )
z: end 'a' or 'b'
The ripping characteristic has two slopes. The first knee is dependent on the
setting DIF_z: Itrans> PSx and is on the intersection with the line m1.IRz . The
characteristic equations for the different ranges are given below. Figure below
shows the tripping characteristic.
3-146 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
I trans>
Characteristics equation for the range 0 < I R,z ≤ :
m1
I trans,z I trans>
=
I nom I nom
I trans>
Characteristics equation for the range < I R,z :
m1
I trans,z I R,z
= m1 ⋅
I nom I nom
Itrans 25
Inom
Tripping area
20
5
1.
=
1
15
m
10
Itrans 1 0.2
= =5 m1 =
m1 0.2
Itrans 0.1 Blocking area

= = 0.066
m1 1.5
0 5 10 15
IR
Inom Q9Z5010A
Fig. 3-102: Tripping characteristic of transverse differential protection.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-147

P638 3 Operation
DIF_z:
Itrans> PSx
[ * ]
DIF_z: DIF_z:
Enabled m1 PSx
[ * ]
[ * ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001 c
I̲A,z DIF_z:
Iq,z
Trip signal
I̲C,z [ * ]
IR,z
Z: End a Z: End a
DIF_z: 041 130 041 131

Enabled
DIF_z: 041 211 041 212
Trip signal
Z: End a Z: End b
Parameter DIF_a: DIF_a: Parameter DIF_b: DIF_b:

Itrans> PSx m1 PSx Itrans> PSx m1 PSx
set 1 072 131 072 132 set 1 072 135 072 136
set 2 073 131 073 132 set 2 073 135 073 136
set 3 074 131 074 132 set 3 074 135 074 136
set 4 075 131 075 132 set 4 075 135 075 136
Q9Z5011A
Fig. 3-103: Measuring system of of transverse differential protection.
3-148 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.24 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group

DTOC1 and DTOC2)
Two two-stage definite-time overcurrent protection functions (DTOC) are
implemented in the P638. The definite-time overcurrent protection function
group DTOC1 may be operated with or without the short-circuit direction
determination function.
3.24.1 Enabling or Disabling DTOC Protection

DTOC protection can be disabled or enabled via parameter settings. Moreover,
enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
DTOC1:
General enable USER
[ 031 135 ]
0
DTOC1:
1 Enabled
[ 035 102 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DTOC1:
Enable PSx
[*]
0: No
1: Yes
DTOC2:
General enable USER
[ 031 136 ]
0
DTOC2:
1 Enabled
[ 035 132 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DTOC2:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0
Parameter DTOC1: DTOC2:
1 Enable PSx Enable PSx
0: No set 1 076 050 076 070

set 2 077 050 077 070
1: Yes
set 3 078 050 078 070
set 4 079 050 079 070
68Z6010A
Fig. 3-104: Disabling or enabling DTOC protection.
3.24.2 Selecting the Measured Variables

The measured variables to be monitored by the respective DTOC function are
selected by way of setting parameters.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-149

P638 3 Operation
DTOC1:
Select meas. input
[ 031 130 ]
2 C1,3
1: End a
C2,4
2: End b
I̲A,a 1
I̲C,a 3
I̲A,b 2
I̲C,b
4
1...2 DTOC1:
I̲A
460 790
3...4 DTOC1:
DTOC2: I̲C
Select meas. input 460 791
[ 031 140 ]
2 C1,3
1: End a
C2,4
2: End b
1...2 DTOC2:
I̲A
460 802
3...4 DTOC2:
I̲C
460 803
68Z50A8A
Fig. 3-105: Selecting the measured variables.
3.24.3 Inrush Restraint

Triggering of the overcurrent protection functions can optionally be blocked,
together with the differential protection function, during inrush occurrences. In
this case the signal from the inrush stabilization function of the differential
protection is used as a blocking criterion. Therefore when the differential
protection of the P638 is disabled, then the overcurrent stages will always
operate without inrush stabilization. Blocking of the inrush stabilization is
released when at least one phase current exceeds the set threshold
DT OC1 : I >li ft rush re strP Sx.
3-150 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
DTOC1:
Inrush stab. en. PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
DTOC1:
I>lift rush restrPSx
[ * ]
>1 & DTOC1:

DTOC1: Harm.Block. 1 trigg.
I̲A 310 039
460 790
& DTOC1:
I̲C
460 791 310 031
DIFF: >1 DTOC1:

Harm.block. 1 trigg. Inrush stabil.trigg.
[ 041 118 ] [ 035 127 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block. 2 trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
DTOC2:
[*]
0: No
1: Yes
DTOC2: >1 DTOC2:

I>lift rush restrPSx Inrush stabil.trigg.
[ * ] [ 035 157 ]
>1 & DTOC2:

I̲A 310 032
460 802
& DTOC2:
I̲C
460 803 310 033
Parameter DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC2: DTOC2:

Inrush stab. en. PSx I>lift rush restrPSx Inrush stab. en. PSx I>lift rush restrPSx
set 1 076 063 076 064 076 083 076 084
set 2 077 063 077 064 077 083 077 084
set 3 078 063 078 064 078 083 078 084
set 4 079 063 079 064 079 083 079 084
68Z6011A
Fig. 3-106: Inrush restraint of the definitive-time overcurrent protection functions DTOC1 and DTOC2.
3.24.4 Definite-time Overcurrent Protection 1 (Including Short-circuit

Direction Determination)
Depending on the setting the phase currents on the high and low voltage sides
are monitored by the definite-time overcurrent protection function to detect
when they exceed the set thresholds. The timer stages connected in series to the
triggers can be blocked by way of appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
The short-circuit direction determination function is enabled at
DTOC1 : Dire ct ion me as ure m.. All settings relevant to short-circuit direction
determination can be set separately for stages I> and I>>.
When a starting signal is issued by I> or I>> and if the measured voltage level is
within the limits set by Vmin and V< then the fault angle ϕ is calculated and the
short-circuit (fault) direction is determined. The short-circuit characteristic is
defined by the angles β and γ. The algorithm decides that the fault direction is
forward when the calculated angle ϕ lies within the range given by γ ≤ ϕ ≤ β.
The starting direction may be freely set.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-151

P638 3 Operation
Using the D TOC 1 : Ti me r Start tI> PSx and DTO C1: Timer Start tI>>
PS x settings, it is possible to select separately for each stage whether the timer
stage is started with the triggering of current thresholds I> or I>> or,
additionally, with a directional signal. The starting signal for each stage is formed
according to the starting conditions selected for the timer stages.
The direction determination of the respective measuring system is enabled if the
measures voltage value exceeds a settable enabling threshold Vmin. It can be
determined by setting that a short-circuit voltage below Vmin will either lead to
the DTOC protection operating non-directionally or to it becoming blocked.
Another setting is used to determine whether a failure of the voltage measuring
circuit will either lead to the overcurrent protection operating non-directionally or
to it becoming blocked.
The direction determination and the starting of the respective stage are only
enabled if the measured voltage value is below a settable undervoltage
threshold V<. Setting the undervoltage threshold V< to Blocked will disable this
voltage scan and direction determination and starting are permanently enabled.
3-152 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
DTOC1:
Timer Start tI> PSx
[ * ]
1: With starting
2: With direction
DTOC1:
Blocking tI> EXT
[ 035 120 ]
DTOC1:
DTOC1: I> PSx
Enabled & [ * ]
[ 035 102 ]
MAIN: C1,2
Protection active
306 001
DTOC1: C1 DTOC1:
Harm.Block. 1 trigg. C tI> PSx
310 039
[ * ]
DTOC1: C2
Harm.Block. 2 trigg.
310 031
DTOC1:
& tI> elapsed
[ 035 098 ]
DTOC1:
I̲A
460 790
& DTOC1:
DTOC1: Starting I>
I̲C [ 035 108 ]
460 791
DTOC1:
Direction I> forw.
460 792
DTOC1: DTOC1:
Direction I> backw. I> triggered
460 793
310 034
DTOC1: DTOC1:
Trip I> Non-direct. & Trip signal tI>
460 794
[ 035 114 ]
DTOC1:
Direction measurem.
[ 031 131 ]
0: Without &
DTOC1:
Timer Start tI>> PSx
[ * ]
1: With starting
2: With direction
DTOC1:
Blocking tI>> EXT DTOC1:
[ 035 121 ] Phase A triggered
[ 035 104 ]
DTOC1:
I>> PSx
[*] DTOC1:
Phase C triggered
[ 035 105 ]
C1,2
C1 DTOC1:
C tI>> PSx
[ * ]
C2
DTOC1:
& tI>> elapsed
[ 035 099 ]
& DTOC1:
Starting I>>
[ 035 109 ]
DTOC1:
Direction I>> forw.
460 795
DTOC1: DTOC1:
Direction I>> backw. I>> triggered
460 796 310 035
DTOC1: DTOC1:
Trip I>> Non-direct. & Trip signal tI>>
460 797 [ 035 115 ]
&
Parameter DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1:

Timer Start tI> PSx I> PSx tI> PSx I>> PSx tI>> PSx
set 1 071 146 076 051 076 057 076 052 076 058
set 2 071 147 077 051 077 057 077 052 077 058
set 3 071 148 078 051 078 057 078 052 078 058
set 4 071 149 079 051 079 057 079 052 079 058 68Z6012A
Fig. 3-107: Definite-time overcurrent protection 1 (Including short-circuit direction determination).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-153

P638 3 Operation
3.24.5 Load Flow Direction

Determining the load flow direction is activated when no short-circuit direction
determination has been enabled.
When a permanent current enable value is exceeded and if the measured
voltage level is greater or equal to the enable voltage threshold value Vmin then
the load angle ϕ is calculated and the load flow direction is determined according
to the selected shortcircuit characteristic.
The load flow direction is displayed as long as no short circuit condition is
present, which is identified by triggering of DTOC stages and the undervoltage
enable.
Forward direction
Backward direction V̲
I̲
68Z50ABB
Fig. 3-108: Example of a fault direction determination characteristic.
3-154 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
DTOC1:
Direction measurem. &
[ 031 131 ]
1: With
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
DTOC1:
Beta (I>) PSx
DTOC1:
V ≥ Vmin (I>) [ * ]
460 798
DTOC1:
Gamma (I>) PSx
[ * ]
>= 0.05 Inom
C
DTOC1: C DTOC1:
I̲A
460 790
& Power flow I> for.
[ 035 223 ]
DTOC1:
Power flow I> back.
& [ 035 224 ]
V̲
DTOC1:
30 ms 0 & Fault I> forward
Forward direction
[ 035 137 ]
Backward direction 30 ms 0
DTOC1:
& Fault I> backward
[ 035 140 ]
DTOC1:
I> triggered
310 034
&
DTOC1:
V< V< (I>) DTOC1:
460 800 Beta (I>>) PSx
[ * ]
& DTOC1:
Gamma (I>>) PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
V ≥ Vmin (I>>) C DTOC1:
460 799
& Power flow I>> for.
[ 035 227 ]
DTOC1:
Power flow I>> back.
& [ 035 228 ]
DTOC1:
30 ms 0 & Fault I>> forward
Forward direction [ 035 147 ]
30 ms 0
Backward direction DTOC1:
& Fault I>> backward
[ 035 148 ]
DTOC1:
I>> triggered &
310 035
DTOC1:
V< V< (I>>)
460 801

Beta (I>) PSx Gamma (I>) PSx Beta (I>>) PSx Gamma (I>>) PSx
set 1 076 068 076 073 076 069 076 074
set 2 077 068 077 073 077 069 077 074
set 3 078 068 078 073 078 069 078 074
set 4 079 068 079 073 079 069 079 074
68Z6013A
Fig. 3-109: Determining load flow and fault directions.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-155

P638 3 Operation
DTOC1:
Vmin (I>) PSx
[ * ]
V̲ DTOC1:
V ≥ Vmin (I>)
460 798
DTOC1:
Mode V<Vmin (I>) PSx
[ * ]
1: Non-directional
2: Blocked
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
MCMON:
[ 038 023 ]
DTOC1:
Mode w/o V (I>) PSx DTOC1:
[ * ] Meas. I> non-direct.
[ 035 077 ]
1 DTOC1:
Dir.meas. I> blocked
[ 035 080 ]
2
1: Non-directional
2: Blocked
DTOC1: DTOC1:
V< (I>) PSx Direction (I>) PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
1
V̲
2
3
Setting blocked
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
DTOC1:
Direction I> forw.
460 792
DTOC1:
Fault I> forward
[ 035 137 ]
DTOC1:
Direction I> backw.
DTOC1: 460 793
Fault I> backward
[ 035 140 ]
DTOC1:
Trip I> Non-direct.
460 794
DTOC1:
V< V< (I>)
460 800
Parameter DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1:

Vmin (I>) PSx Mode V<Vmin (I>) PSx Mode w/o V (I>) PSx V< (I>) PSx Direction (I>) PSx
set 1 076 157 076 113 076 128 076 131 076 080
set 2 077 157 077 113 077 128 077 131 077 080
set 3 078 157 078 113 078 128 078 131 078 080
set 4 079 157 079 113 079 128 079 131 079 080
68Z9304
Fig. 3-110: Determining the starting direction for stage I> (also valid for stage I>>).
3.24.6 Definite-time Overcurrent Protection 2

Depending on the setting the phase currents on the high and low voltage sides
are monitored by the definite-time overcurrent protection function to detect
when they exceed the set thresholds. Their starting can optionally be blocked
together with the inrush stabilization function of the differential protection. In this
case the signal from the inrush stabilization function of the differential protection
is used as a blocking criterion. Therefore when the differential protection of the
P638 is disabled, then the overcurrent stages will always operate without inrush
stabilization. Blocking of the inrush stabilization is released when at least one
3-156 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
phase current exceeds the set threshold DTOC2: I>lift r ush res tr PSx. The
timer stages connected in series to the triggers can be blocked by way of
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
DTOC2:
Blocking tI> EXT
[ 035 150 ]
DTOC2:
DTOC2: I> PSx
Enabled & [ * ]
[ 035 132 ]
MAIN: C1,2
Protection active
306 001
DTOC2: C1
310 032
DTOC2:
DTOC2: C2 C tI> PSx
Harm.Block. 2 trigg. [ * ]
310 033
DTOC2:
DTOC2: Trip signal tI>
I̲A
460 802 [ 035 144 ]
DTOC2:
I̲C DTOC2:
460 803
Starting I>
[ 035 138 ]
DTOC2:
Phase A triggered
[ 035 134 ]
DTOC2:
Phase C triggered
[ 035 135 ]
DTOC2:
Blocking tI>> EXT
[ 035 151 ]
DTOC2:
I>> PSx
[ * ]
C1,2
C1
DTOC2:
C2 C tI>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC2:
Trip signal tI>>
[ 035 145 ]
DTOC2:
Starting I>>
[ 035 139 ]

I> PSx I>> PSx tI> PSx tI>> PSx
set 1 076 071 076 072 076 077 076 078
set 2 077 071 077 072 077 077 077 078
set 3 078 071 078 072 078 077 078 078
set 4 079 071 079 072 079 077 079 078 68Z6014A
Fig. 3-111: Definite-time overcurrent protection 2.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-157

P638 3 Operation
3.25 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Residual Current

System (Function Group DTOCN)
The P638 provides a definite-time overcurrent protection function to monitor
residual currents.
3.25.1 Enabling or Disabling DTOCN Protection

DTOCN protection can be disabled or enabled via parameter settings. Moreover,
DTOCN:
General enable USER
[ 031 138 ]
0
DTOCN:
1 Enabled
[ 035 192 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DTOCN:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
Parameter DTOCN:
Enable PSx
0
set 1 076 110
1 set 2 077 110
set 3 078 110
0: No set 4 079 110
1: Yes
18Z9301A
Fig. 3-112: Disabling or enabling DTOCN protection.
3.25.2 Starting and Tripping

The residual current is monitored to detect when the set thresholds are
exceeded. Parallel to that the arithmetical mean and the instantaneous value of
the residual current are monitored.
After the set operate delay period has elapsed, a trip signal is issued. The
elapsing of the operate delay may be blocked using an appropriately configured
binary signal input.
3-158 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
DTOCN:
Block. tIN>H EXT
[ 035 201 ]
DTOCN:
Enabled
[ 035 192 ] DTOCN:
DTOCN: tIN>H PSx
MAIN: IN>H PSx
Protection active [ * ]
[ * ]
306 001
I̲N Instantaneous value DTOCN:

Trip signal tIN>H
[ 035 198 ]
FT_DA
DTOCN:
Starting IN>H
[ 035 195 ]
DTOCN:
Blocking tIN> EXT
[ 041 063 ] DTOCN: DTOCN:
IN> PSx tIN> PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
DTOCN:
Trip signal tIN>
[ 041 021 ]
DTOCN:
Starting IN>
[ 040 077 ]
DTOCN:
Blocking tIN>> EXT
[ 041 064 ]
DTOCN: DTOCN:
IN>> PSx tIN>> PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
DTOCN:
Trip signal tIN>>
[ 040 028 ]
DTOCN:
Starting IN>>
[ 040 041 ]
Parameter DTOCN: DTOCN: DTOCN: DTOCN: DTOCN: DTOCN:

IN>H PSx tIN>H PSx IN> PSx tIN> PSx IN>> PSx tIN>> PSx
set 1 076 111 076 114 017 003 017 008 017 009 017 010
set 2 077 111 077 114 073 015 073 027 073 016 073 028
set 3 078 111 078 114 074 015 074 027 074 016 074 028
set 4 079 111 079 114 075 015 075 027 075 016 075 028
68Z9303A
Fig. 3-113: Monitoring of residual current.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-159

P638 3 Operation
3.26 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group IDMT)

The P638 provides a single-stage inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
This IDMT function can be activated concurrently with the other protection
functions.
Inverse time overcurrent protection may optionally be operated with short-circuit
direction determination.
3.26.1 Disabling and Enabling IDMT Protection

IDMT protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover,
IDMT:
General enable USER
[ 017 096 ]
1 IDMT:
Enabled
0: No [ 040 100 ]
1: Yes
IDMT:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
Parameter IDMT:
Enable PSx
set 1 072 000
set 2 073 000
set 3 074 000
set 4 075 000
48Z6377A
Fig. 3-114: Disabling or enabling IDMT protection.
3-160 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.26.2 Time-Dependent Characteristics

The user can select from a large number of characteristics (see table below). The
measured variable is the current I. The tripping characteristics available for
selection are shown in the following figures (Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-162) to Fig. 3-118,
(p. 3-164)).
No. Tripping Formula for the Constants Formula for the

Characteristic Tripping Reset
Characteristic Characteristic
Characteristic a b c R
settable factor:
k = 0.05 ... 10.00
0 Definite Time t =k
a
Per IEC 255–3 t =k · I b
(I ) -1
ref
1 Standard Inverse 0.14 0.02
2 Very Inverse 13.50 1.00
3 Extremely Inverse 80.00 2.00
4 Long Time Inverse 120.00 1.00
a k ·R
Per IEEE C37.112 t = k ·( I + c) tr = I 2
(I )b - 1 -
1 (I )
ref ref
5 Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.0200 0.1140 4.85
6 Very Inverse 19.6100 2.0000 0.4910 21.60
7 Extremely Inverse 28.2000 2.0000 0.1217 29.10
a k ·R
Per ANSI t = k ·( I + c) tr = I 2
b
(I ) -1 1- ( I )
ref ref
8 Normally Inverse 8.9341 2.0938 0.17966 9.00
9 Short Time Inverse 0.2663 1.2969 0.03393 0.50
10 Long Time Inverse 5.6143 1.0000 2.18592 15.75
1
11 RI-Type Inverse t =k · 0.236
0.339 - I
(I )
ref
I
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse t = k · (5.8 - 1.35 · ln I )
ref
Once a ratio I/Iref greater than 20 is reached, the tripping time is bounded on the
lower end.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-161

P638 3 Operation
IDMT Tripping Characteristics per IEC 255–3
Characteristic 1: IEC 255–3, Standard Inverse Characteristic 2: IEC 255–3, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10
k=10
t/s k=1
t/s
1 1
k=1
k=0.1
0.1 k=0.05 0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
Characteristic 3: IEC 255–3, Extremely Inverse Characteristic 4: IEC 255–3, Long Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10
k=1
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=0.1
k=0.05
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
Fig. 3-115: Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3.
3-162 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
IDMT Tripping Characteristics per IEEE C37.112
Characteristic 5: IEEE C37.112, Moderately Inverse Characteristic 6: IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 k=10 10
k=10
t/s t/s
1 k=1 1
k=1
0.1 k=0.1 0.1

k=0.05 k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
Characteristic 7: IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse
1000
100
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
Fig. 3-116: Tripping characteristics as per IEEE C37.112.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-163

P638 3 Operation
IDMT Tripping Characteristics per ANSI
Characteristic 8: ANSI, Normally Inverse Characteristic 9: ANSI, Short Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 10
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=10
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 k=0.1
k=0.05
I/Iref I/Iref
Characteristic 10: ANSI, Long Time Inverse
1000
100
k=10
10
t/s k=1
1
k=0.1
0.1 k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
Fig. 3-117: Tripping characteristics as per ANSI.
IDMT Tripping Characteristics, RI-Type Inverse and RXIDG-Type Inverse
Characteristic 11: RI-Type Inverse Characteristic 12: RXIDG-Type Inverse

1000 1000
100 100
k=10
k=10
10 10
t/s k=1 t/s

k=1
1 1
k=0.1
k=0.05 k=0.1
0.1 0.1 k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
Fig. 3-118: RI-type inverse and RXIDG‑type inverse tripping characteristics.

The selection whether the currents in end a or end b of the transformer are to be
monitored is made by setting a parameter.
3-164 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
IDMT:
Select meas. input
[ 017 108 ]
2 C1,3
1: End a
C2,4
2: End b
I̲A,a 1
I̲C,a 3
I̲A,b 2
I̲C,b
4
1...2 IDMT:
I̲A
460 815
3...4 IDMT:
I̲C
460 816
68Z50AFA
Fig. 3-119: Selecting the measured variables.
3.26.4 Inrush Restraint

Triggering of the inverse-time overcurrent protection functions can optionally be
blocked, together with the differential protection function, during inrush
occurrences. In this case the signal from the inrush stabilization function of the
differential protection is used as a blocking criterion. Therefore when the
differential protection of the P638 is disabled, then the overcurrent stages will
always operate without inrush stabilization. Blocking of the inrush stabilization is
released when at least one phase current exceeds the set threshold
IDMT: I >lift rush re strP Sx.
IDMT:
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
IDMT:
I>lift rush restrPSx
[ * ]
>1 & IDMT:

IDMT: Harm.Block. 1 trigg.
I̲A 310 036
460 815
& IDMT:
IDMT: Harm.Block. 2 trigg.
I̲C
460 816 310 037
DIFF: >1 IDMT:

Harm.block. 1 trigg. Inrush stabil.trigg.
[ 041 118 ] [ 040 118 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block. 2 trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
Parameter IDMT: IDMT:

Inrush stab. en. PSx I>lift rush restrPSx
set 1 072 129 072 101
set 2 073 129 073 101
set 3 074 129 074 101
set 4 075 129 075 101
68Z6016A
Fig. 3-120: Inrush restraint of the inverse-time overcurrent protection.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-165

P638 3 Operation
3.26.5 Determining Trip Time

The P638 checks whether the current value exceeds an adjustable threshold. The
IDMT protection function is triggered if 1.05 times the set current reference is
exceeded. The P638 will determine the trip time according to the set
characteristic and the current level value. Additionally, a minimum trip time can
be set, independently of the current level, which will in no case be under-run.
The inverse time-delayed stage may be blocked using an appropriately
3-166 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.26.6 Direction Measurement

The short-circuit direction determination function is enabled at I DMT: Direct ion
mea surem.. When the inverse-time overcurrent protection is triggered and if
the measured voltage level is within the limits set by Vmin and V< then the fault
angle ϕ is calculated and the short-circuit (e.g. fault) direction is determined. The
short-circuit characteristic is defined by the angles β and γ. The algorithm
decides that the fault direction is ”forward“ when the calculated angle ϕ lies
within the range given by γ ≤ ϕ ≤ β.
The starting direction may be freely set.
By setting the parameter IDMT: Ti me r s t. tIre f > PSx the user can select
whether processing of the selected characteristic is started when the inverse-
time overcurrent protection is triggered or, additionally, with direction signalling.
The starting signal depends on the starting conditions selected for the timer
stages.
Direction determination of the respective measuring system is enabled if the
measured voltage value exceeds a settable enabling threshold Vmin. It can be
determined by setting that a short-circuit voltage below Vmin will either lead to
the IDMT protection function operating non-directionally or to it becoming
blocked. Another setting is used to determine whether a failure of the voltage
measuring circuit will either lead to the overcurrent protection function operating
non-directionally or to it becoming blocked.
Direction determination and starting of the respective stage are only enabled if
the measured voltage value is below a settable undervoltage threshold V<.
Setting the undervoltage threshold V< to 'Blocked' will disable this voltage scan,
and direction determination and starting are permanently enabled.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-167

P638 3 Operation
IDMT: IDMT:
C Iref PSx Timer st. tIref> PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
1
1.05 Iref
2
1: With starting
2: With direction
IDMT:
Enabled
[ 040 100 ]
MAIN: C1, 2 IDMT:
Protection active Starting Iref>
306 001 [ 040 080 ]
IDMT: C1
310 036
IDMT: C2
310 037
IDMT: IDMT:
I̲LA Iref> triggered
310 038
IDMT: IDMT:
I̲LC Phase A triggered
[ 038 117 ]
IDMT: IDMT:
Forwards trip Phase C triggered
307 104 [ 038 118 ]
IDMT:
Backwards trip
307 105
IDMT:
Non-directional trip
307 106
IDMT:
IDMT: Characteristic PSx
Direction measurem.
[ 017 109 ] [ * ]
0: Without IDMT:
Char. factor kt PSx
[ * ]
IDMT:
IDMT: Min. trip time PSx
Block. tIref> EXT [ * ]
[ 040 101 ]
IDMT:
Setting Hold time PSx
IDMT: [ * ]
Characteristic PSx C
IDMT:
Release PSx
0: Definite Time [ * ]
1: IEC Standard Inverse
2: IEC Very Inverse C
3: IEC Extr. Inverse
4: IEC Long Time Inv.
5: IEEE Moderately Inv. IDMT:
6: IEEE Very Inverse Memory clear
I̲P,max/Iref,P
7: IEEE Extremely Inv. [ 040 110 ]
8: ANSI Normally Inv. IDMT:
9: ANSI Short Time Inv. Hold time running
10: ANSI Long Time Inv. [ 040 053 ]
11: RI-Type Inverse IDMT:
12: RXIDG-Type Inverse tIref> elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
Setting IDMT:
Trip signal tIref>
IDMT: [ 040 084 ]
Release PSx
1: Without delay
2: Delayed as per char.

Iref PSx Timer st. tIref> PSx
set 1 072 050 006 061
set 2 073 050 006 062
set 3 074 050 006 063
set 4 075 050 006 064
Parameter IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: IDMT:

Characteristic PSx Char. factor kt PSx Min. trip time PSx Hold time PSx Release PSx
set 1 072 056 072 053 072 077 072 071 072 059
set 2 073 056 073 053 073 077 073 071 073 059
set 3 074 056 074 053 074 077 074 071 074 059
set 4 075 056 075 053 075 077 075 071 075 059
68Z6017A
Fig. 3-121: Inverse-time overcurrent protection.
3-168 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.26.7 Load Flow Direction

Load flow direction determination is active when no short-circuit direction
When a permanent current enable value is exceeded and if the measured
voltage level is greater or equal to the enable voltage threshold value Vmin then
the load angle ϕ is calculated and the load flow direction is determined according
to the selected shortcircuit characteristic.
The load flow direction is displayed for as long as there is no fault (short-circuit)
condition apparent, which would be characterized by the starting of the current
stages and the enabling of the undervoltage stage.
Forward direction
Backward direction V̲
I̲
68Z50ABB
Fig. 3-122: Example of a fault direction determination characteristic.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-169

P638 3 Operation
IDMT:
Direction measurem.
[ 017 109]
1: With
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
IDMT: IDMT:
V ≥ Vmin Beta PSx
307 107
[ * ]
IDMT:
Gamma PSx
>= 0.05 Inom [ * ]
IDMT: C
I̲LA
307 101
IDMT:
Fault forward
Φ [ 041 008 ]
V̲ IDMT:
Fault backward
[ 041 009 ]
Forward direction 30 ms 0 IDMT:
Power flow forward
[ 041 017 ]
Backward direction
30 ms 0 IDMT:
Power flow backward
[ 041 018 ]
IDMT:
Iref> triggered
310 038
IDMT:
V < V<
307 108
*
Beta PSx Gamma PSx
set 1 072 046 072 047
set 2 073 046 073 047
set 3 074 046 074 047
set 4 075 046 075 047
68Z6018A
Fig. 3-123: Fault direction determination.
3-170 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
IDMT:
Vmin PSx
[ * ]
V̲ IDMT:
V ≥ Vmin
307 107
IDMT:
Op. mode V<Vmin PSx
[ * ]
1
2
1: Non-directional
2: Blocked
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ] IDMT:
Mode w/o voltage PSx
[ * ]
IDMT:
Meas.non-directional
1 [ 041 007 ]
2 IDMT:
Dir. meas. blocked
1: Non-directional
[ 041 006 ]
2: Blocked
IDMT: IDMT:
V< PSx Direction (I>) PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
1
2
3
Setting blocked
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
IDMT:
Forwards trip
IDMT: 307 104
Fault forward
[ 041 008 ]
IDMT:
Backwards trip
IDMT: 307 105
Fault backward
[ 041 009 ]
IDMT:
Non-directional trip
307 106
IDMT:
V < V<
307 108
*
Parameter IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: IDMT:
Vmin PSx Op. mode V<Vmin PSx Mode w/o voltage PSx V< PSx Direction (I>) PSx
set 1 072 133 072 138 072 119 072 081 072 048
set 2 073 133 073 138 073 119 073 081 073 048
set 3 074 133 074 138 074 119 074 081 074 048
set 4 075 133 075 138 075 119 075 081 075 048
68Z50AJB
Fig. 3-124: Determining starting direction.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-171

P638 3 Operation
3.26.8 Holding Time
Case A
IDMT:
Starting Iref>
[ 040 080 ]
IDMT:
Hold time running
[ 040 053 ]
Determ. trip time
Per characteristic
Non-delayed
IDMT:
tIref> elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
Case B
IDMT:
Starting Iref>
[ 040 080 ]
IDMT:
Hold time running
[ 040 053 ]
Determ. trip time
Non-delayed
Per characteristic
IDMT:
tIref> elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
Parameter IDMT:
Hold time PSx
set 1 072 071
set 2 073 071
set 3 074 071
set 4 075 071 19Z5025B
Fig. 3-125: Effect of hold time shown with a phase current stage as an example. Example A: Hold time determined
is not reached. Example B: Hold time determined is reached.
Depending on the current flow the P638 will determine the tripping time and a
timer stage is started. The setting of the hold time defines the time period during
which the IDMT protection starting time is stored after the starting has dropped
out. Should starting recur during the hold time period then the time of the
renewed starting will be added to the time period stored. When the starting
times sum reach the tripping time value determined by the P638 then the
corresponding signal will be issued. Should starting not recur during the hold
time period then, depending on the setting, the memory storing the accumulated
starting times value will either be cleared without delay or according to the
characteristic set. In Fig. 3-125, (p. 3-172), the effect of hold time is shown by
the example of a phase current stage.
3-172 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.27 Distance Protection Z<t (Function Group DIST)

A simple distance protection function with three impedance zones are provided
by the minimum impedance protection Z<t. Each distance zone can be enabled
independently in forward and backward direction. The minimum impedance
protection function provides only polygonal tripping characteristic.
3.27.1 Enable/Disable the Distance Protection
DIST:
General enable USER
[ 031 073 ]
& DIST:
1 Enabled
[ 036 104 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DIST:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Parameter Enable PSx
0 set 1 072 200

set 2 073 200
1
set 3 074 200
0: No set 4 075 200
1: Yes 48Z9350A
Fig. 3-126: Enable/disable the distance protection and fault detection blocking.
The distance protection can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters.

Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3.27.2 Distance Protection Blocking
DIST: DIST:
Enabled Blocking
[ 036 104 ] 303 667
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
MCMON:
[ 038 023 ]
DIST:
Wrong setting DIST
[ 041 085 ]
48Z5028A
Fig. 3-127: Distance protection blocking.
The distance protection is blocked if one of the following conditions occurs:

● Distance protection has not been enabled.
● The voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped.
● Monitoring (VT supervision) has detected a fault in the voltage-measuring
circuit.
● Distance protection is not set correctly.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-173

P638 3 Operation
DIST: DIST:
Enabled Zone 1 not ready
[ 036 104 ] [ 038 034 ]
DIST:
Blocking
303 667
DIST:
X1, forward PSx
[ * ]
blocked
DIST:
X1, backward PSx
[ * ]
blocked
DIST:
t1 PSx
[ * ]
blocked
DIST:
Blocking t1 EXT
[ 039 163 ]
Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:
X1, forward PSx X1, backward PSx t1 PSx
set 1 021 239 021 242 012 028
set 2 021 245 021 248 012 078
set 3 021 246 021 249 013 028
set 4 021 247 021 250 013 078
68Z9305A
Fig. 3-128: Blocking of impedance zone 1.
An impedance zone is blocked if the impedances of that zone in forward and

backward directions have been set to Blocked, or if the associated time stage
has been set to Blocked. The blocking of impedance zones 2 and 3 is similar to
zone 1 as shown as example in Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-174).
DIST: DIST:
Zone 1 not ready Not ready
[ 038 034 ] [ 041 086 ]
DIST:
Zone 2 not ready
[ 038 035 ]
DIST:
Zone 3 not ready
[ 038 036 ]
68Z9306A
Fig. 3-129: Distance protection not ready.
The distance protection function issues the D IST: Not r eady signal if all
impedance zones are blocked.
3.27.3 Base Point Release for Impedance and Direction Determination

The base point trigger compares the r.m.s. value of the current to the set value
I>. The pickup of the base point trigger is determined by a half-cycle r.m.s.
calculation of the current in order to ensure a short response time.
After operation, the full-cycle r.m.s. value of the current is monitored. This
ensures the required stability and accuracy of the measuring system.
3-174 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
DIST:
Enabled
[ 036 104 ]
MAIN:
[ 025 149 ]
2
C1
3
C2
4
1: Current IA,a C3 DIST:

I> PSx
2: Current IC,a C4 [ * ]
3: Current IA,b
4: Current IC,b
I̲A,a DIST:
I> starting
I̲C,a [ 039 001 ]
I̲A,b
I̲C,b
DIST:
I̲
460 804
Parameter DIST:
I> PSx
set 1 072 195

set 2 073 195
set 3 074 195
set 4 075 195
68Z9307A
Fig. 3-130: Base point release for impedance and direction determination.
3.27.4 Inrush Stabilization
MAIN:
Protection active &
306 001
DIST:
MAIN: I>lift rush restrPSx
Block.rush restr.EXT C
[ * ]
[ 039 169 ]
DIFF:
[*]
blocked
DIST:
Inrush stabil.trigg.
DIST:
&
I̲ [ 025 160 ]
DIST:
[ * ]
DIFF:
[ * ]
fnom
I(2⋅fn)/I(fn)
2* fnom
Parameter DIST: DIST: DIFF:

Inrush stab. en. PSx I>lift rush restrPSx RushI(2f0)/I(f0) PSx
set 1 025 123 025 128 072 159
set 2 025 125 025 129 073 159
set 3 025 126 025 130 074 159
set 4 025 127 025 148 075 159

68Z9329A
Fig. 3-131: Inrush stabilization.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-175

P638 3 Operation
The inrush stabilization function detects such inrush currents and can selectively
prevent starting of selected protection functions.
Inrush stabilization is blocked if DIFF : Rus h I( 2f 0)/I(f0 ) PSx is set to 'Blocked'
or if an external blocking signal has been triggered.
The inrush stabilization function detects an inrush current by evaluating the ratio
of the second harmonic current component to the fundamental. If this ratio
exceeds the threshold that can be set with the parameter DIFF: RushI(2 f0)/
I(f0) PSx, then the inrush stabilization operates.
The current trigger D IST: Inr us h s tab. e n. PSx and a threshold DIST: I> lift
rush restrPSx define the range in which the inrush stabilization operates. If the
current is outside of this range then the inrush stabilization is blocked.
3.27.5 Distance and Directional Measurement

The P638 determines the fault impedance and the fault direction on the basis of
the measured voltage and current.
3.27.5.1 Direction Determination

A decision is made for the forward direction if the angle φ for direction
determination is in this range:
● Forward direction: −45° < φ < +135°
● Backward direction: −45° > φ > +135°
The fault detection works until 0.02 Vnom of the fault voltage. If the fault voltage
is lower than 0.02 Vnom, an accurate direction determination is no longer
possible. In this case, a fault forward decision is issued according to impedance -
independent of the actual fault direction.
● VF >= 0.02 Vnom
The direction decision is issued on the basis of the fault current and the
measured fault voltage.
● VF < 0.02 Vnom
The fault forward decision is issued on the absolute value of impedance:
V/I < DIST: Xn, forward PSx
DIST:
I> starting
[ 039 001 ]
< 0.02 Vnom
C |V/I| < Xn, forward
>= 0.02 Vnom DIST:

Direction forward
303 669
V̲A
DIST:
-45° < φN < 135° Forward fault
C
[ 036 138 ]
φF
DIST:
135° < φN < 315° Backwards fault
C
[ 036 139 ]
DIST:
I̲
460 804
DIST:
Direction backward
303 670
DIST:
Starting
[ 036 135 ]
68Z9308A
Fig. 3-132: Direction determination.
3-176 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.27.5.2 Polygon (Quadrilateral) Characteristic

The minimum impedance protection function provides only polygonal tripping
characteristic.
The characteristic is determined by the settings listed below. It can be set
separately for all three zones (n: 1 to 3).
● Impedance Xn in forward direction.
● Impedance Xn in backward direction.
● Line impedance angle αLn.
● Resistance Rn in forward direction.
● Resistance Rn in backward direction.
● Resistance limit Rgn in forward direction.
● Resistance limit Rgn in backward direction.
Therefore the tripping zone is limited to the resistances within the load
blinder – i.e. lower than Rgn.
For this setting, the condition: Rgn ≤ Rn must be met for all enabled zones
(all 4 setting groups, all unblocked Z zones). If the condition is not satisfied,
a warning indication and the device blocking alarm are issued by error
messages S FMON: Wrong se t. DIST Rg1, SFMON: Wrong set . DIST
Rg2 and SFMON: W rong se t. DIST R g3.
● Load blinding angle αn
At fault impedance angles outside of the blinder zone region, the polygonal
characteristic operates unaffectedly (non-blinded).
● Angle βn
● Angle γn
These angles limit the tripping area in quadrants 2 and 4.
The P638 checks whether the impedance locus is within the defined tripping area
or not. Since the reach for forward and backward direction can be selected
separately, the direction decision determines the quadrilateral segment where
the measured impedance locus must be located so that a distance decision is
issued. If the short-circuit voltages are lower than 0.02 Vnom, angles αn, βn and
γn are not taken into account.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-177

P638 3 Operation
Forward direction
Xn,fwd Zn,fwd
Tripping zone
Backward direction
ßn
αn
Rgn,bwd αLn
Rn,fwd
R
Rn,bwd
Rgn,fwd
γn
Zn,bwd Xn,bwd
68Z9309A
Fig. 3-133: P638 impedance and direction characteristic.
Using these settings in the R-X diagram we obtain the characteristic shown in the
following figure (Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-179)).
3-178 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638

DIST: X1, forward PSx R1, forward PSx Rg1, forward PSx
& c
Enabled set 1 021 239 076 115 076 138
[ 036 104 ] set 2 021 245 077 115 077 138
DIST:
DIST:
I> starting c X1, forward PSx set 3 021 246 078 115 078 138
[ * ] set 4 021 247 079 115 079 138
[ 039 001 ]
MCMON: DIST: Parameter DIST:
Meas. circ. V faulty DIST: DIST:
c R1, forward PSx X1, backward PSx R1, backward PSx Rg1, backward PSx
[ 038 023 ] [ * ]
set 1 021 242 076 121 076 144
DIST: set 2 021 248 077 121 077 144
c Rg1, forward PSx
set 3 021 249 078 121 078 144
[ * ] set 4 079 144
021 250 079 121
DIST:
c X1, backward PSx Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:
[ * ] Alpha 1 PSx Beta 1 PSx Gamma 1 PSx
set 1 076 090 072 208 076 247
DIST:
c R1, backward PSx set 2 077 090 073 208 077 247
[ * ] set 3 078 090 074 208 078 247
set 4 079 090 075 208 079 247
DIST:
c Rg1, backward PSx
[ * ] Parameter DIST:
Alpha_L 1 PSx
DIST: set 1 012 013
c Alpha_L 1 PSx
012 063
set 2
[ * ]
set 3 013 034
DIST: set 4 013 063
c Alpha 1 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
c Beta 1 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
c Gamma 1 PSx
[ * ]
V̲A & DIST:

Z1 starting
460 644
[ 039 003 ]
DIST:
I̲ DIST:
460 804 Starting
DIST: [ 036 135 ]
Direction forward
303 669
SFMON:
DIST: Wrong set. DIST Rg1
Direction backward
303 670 [ 098 046 ]
DIST:
DIST: Wrong setting DIST
Inrush stabil.trigg.
[ 041 085 ]
[ 025 160 ]
68Z9311A
Fig. 3-134: Setting impedance zones 1 to 3 (showing the example of zone 1) and distance measurement.
3.27.5.3 Distance Measurement

If the base point current is exceeded, the inductive and resistive components (X
and R) of the loop impedance (Z) are calculated continuously even during normal
operation.
3.27.6 Impedance-Time Characteristics

Each impedance zone has a timer stage assigned. These timer stages are
triggered by a distance decision of the associated impedance zone. Each timer
stage can be blocked through a binary input signal.
The starting and trip signals generated by the distance protection function are
grouped together to form multiple (composite) signals.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-179

P638 3 Operation
DIST:
Trip signal
DIST: [ 036 009 ]
DIST: t1 PSx
Blocking t1 EXT
[ * ]
[ 039 163 ]
DIST: t 0 DIST:
Z1 starting Trip signal Z1/t1
[ 039 003 ] [ 039 016 ]
DIST:
DIST: t2 PSx
Blocking t2 EXT
[ * ]
[ 039 164 ]
DIST: t 0 DIST:
Z2 starting Trip signal Z2/t2
[ 039 005 ] [ 039 017 ]
DIST:
DIST: t3 PSx
Blocking t3 EXT
[ * ]
[ 039 166 ]
DIST:
DIST: t 0 Trip signal Z3/t3
Z3 starting
[ 039 145 ]
[ 039 140 ]
DIST:
Starting
[ 036 135 ]

t1 PSx t2 PSx t3 PSx
set 1 012 028 012 029 012 030

set 2 012 078 012 079 012 080
set 3 013 028 013 029 013 030
set 4 013 078 013 079 013 080 68Z9310A
Fig. 3-135: Setting the time-delay period for distance protection, zone 1, 2 and 3.
3-180 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.28 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Group MCMON)

The P638 monitors the voltages continuously. When the supervision detects an
a.c. input problem, appropriate measures are taken to prevent malfunction of the
device and the faulty condition is alarmed.
Measuring-circuit monitoring can be disabled by the appropriate setting. In the
event of a fault, measuring-circuit monitoring is blocked.
MCMON:
General enable USER
[ 014 001 ]
0
MCMON:
1 Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MCMON:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
Parameter MCMON:
Enable PSx
0
set 1 014 200
1 set 2 014 201
set 3 014 202
0: No set 4 014 203
1: Yes
48Z5053A
Fig. 3-136: Enabling or disabling MCMON.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-181

P638 3 Operation
3.28.1 Voltage Monitoring

In addition to the monitoring of m.c.b. trip operating independently in function
group MAIN, the P638 also offers monitoring of the voltage-measuring circuits
based on measured values.
If triggered both sub-functions automatically block all functions using the
measured voltage.
If undervoltage monitoring is not blocked by a binary signal input and there is no
general starting, the P638 monitors the voltage for it to fall below the threshold
set at MC MON: V<, V -monit . PSx. In this case the current must exceed the
threshold set at MCMON: I> e na.V -monit. PSx. Once the set time delay has
elapsed, the MCMON : Unde rvoltage signal is issued.
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MCMON:
Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
MCMON:
& c
Blocking V< EXT
[ 038 033 ] MCMON: MCMON:
V<, V-monit. PSx tV<, V-monit. PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
& S1 1 MCMON:
Undervoltage
t 0 R1 [ 038 038 ]
V̲
MCMON:
V< triggered
MCMON:
I> ena.V-monit. PSx 304 652
[ * ]
I̲
Parameter MCMON: MCMON: MCMON:

V<, V-monit. PSx tV<, V-monit. PSx I> ena.V-monit. PSx
set 1 014 229 014 233 014 188
set 2 014 230 014 234 014 237
set 3 014 231 014 235 014 238
set 4 014 232 014 236 014 239 68Z9327A
Fig. 3-137: Undervoltage monitoring.
3.28.2 Multiple signaling of the monitoring functions

The MC MO N : Meas. volt age o.k. signal is issued if the following conditions
are met:
● No general starting signal is present.
● The binary signal input configured to MA IN: M.c.b. t rip V EXT is not
energized.
● Undervoltage monitoring has not operated.
3-182 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
MAIN: & MCMON:

General starting Meas. voltage o.k.
[ 036 000 ] [ 038 048 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
MCMON:
V< triggered
304 652
68Z9328A
Fig. 3-138: M C M O N : M e a s . v o l t a g e o . k .signal.
MAIN: MCMON:
M.c.b. trip V EXT Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 004 061 ] [ 038 023 ]
MCMON:
Undervoltage
[ 038 038 ]
68Z9329A
Fig. 3-139: Multiple signaling of the monitoring functions.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-183

P638 3 Operation
3.29 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM)

Using this function, thermal overload protection can be implemented.
Disabling and Enabling Thermal Overload Protection

Thermal overload protection may be disabled or enabled by setting parameters.
THERM:
General enable USER
[ 022 050 ]
0
THERM:
1 & Enabled
[ 040 068 ]
0: No
1: Yes
THERM:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes y PSU: Parameter THERM:
PS y active Enable PSx
PSU: 1 036 090 set 1 072 175

PS y active 2 036 091 set 2 073 175
[ * ] 3 036 092 set 3 074 175
4 036 093 set 4 075 175
19Z6112B
Fig. 3-140: Disabling or enabling thermal overload protection.
3.29.1 Readiness of Thermal Overload Protection

Thermal overload protection is not ready (TH ER M: Not re ady) if one of the
following conditions applies:
● Thermal overload protection is disabled.
● Thermal overload protection is blocked because of a fault in the coolant
temperature (ambient) acquisition.
● Thermal overload protection is blocked because of an incorrect setting.
● The thermal replica is blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal
input.
3.29.2 Operating Modes

Two operating modes can be selected for thermal overload protection.
● Relative replica
● Absolute replica
Either operating mode can be enabled or disabled individually. Only one of the
operating modes may be enabled for thermal overload protection. However, if
both operating modes are enabled at the same time, the thermal overload
protection is blocked and the error message TH ERM: Setting e rror,blo ck. is
generated by the P638.
3-184 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.29.3 Coolant Temperature Effect

To permit coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition, the analog (I/O) module Y
with a 20 mA current input and the “PT100” input or the temperature p/c board
(the RTD module) with the temperature sensor inputs T1 to T9 must be fitted.
Thus, up to 11 measuring inputs are available.
One of these measuring inputs is selected for the primary measurement of
coolant temperature by setting the parameter THE RM: Se lect CTA PSx.
If the parameters THER M: Se l ect CTA P Sx have been set incorrectly the
thermal overload protection is blocked and the error message THE RM: Se tt ing
err or ,block. is generated.
An open measuring circuit, due to a broken wire, is determined by the measured
value inputs (function group MEASI). This will result in the issuance of these
signals:
● MEA SI: Open circ. 20mA i np.
● MEA SI: Open circ. P T100
● MEASI: Ov er load 20mA i nput
The thermal model uses these signals as a criterion to determine a fault in the
coolant temperature measurement. A fault at both measured value inputs
selected will lead to the issuance of the signal THERM: CTA error.
The setting for THERM: Fun ct. f.C TA f ail. PSx determines how the thermal
overload protection is to continue functioning when the coolant temperature
measurement has failed. The following functions can be selected to guarantee
continued and stable performance of the thermal overload protection when the
coolant temperature measurement has failed.
● Default temperature value:
The coolant temperature set at TH ERM: De fault C TA P Sx is applied.
The thermal overload protection function is not blocked.
As a rule there is an erratic change of the measured value when a fault has
occurred in the coolant temperature measurement. The temperature
measured before such an erratic change is stored and applied. The thermal
overload protection function is not blocked.
● Last measured temperature:
The coolant temperature set at THERM: Default C TA PSx is applied if no
last measured values are available because a device warm restart or a
parameter subset selection was carried out.
● Blocking:
The signals THE RM: Warn in g and TH ERM: Tr ip signal are reset and
blocked. The thermal model will then be continued and displayed on the
basis of the measured current alone. All further measured values are issued
as Not measured.
All parameters relevant to coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition are hidden
if the analog module Y has not been fitted in the P638. The tripping time is
calculated by including the setting for THERM: Defau lt CTA PSx.
3.29.4 Minimum Coolant Temperature

A setting for a minimum coolant temperature is provided for catenary sections
where coolant temperatures may differ strongly from measured values. For
instance in winter months the temperature measured in a tunnel will be higher
than the ambient temperature measured at the feeder point. In such cases the
measured coolant temperature is limited to a low value set at
THER M: Minimu m te mpe rat.P Sx.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-185

P638 3 Operation
3.29.5 Thermal Overload Protection Operation without Coolant

Temperature (Ambient) Acquisition
In order to ensure thermal overload protection, without taking into account an
offset due to a variable coolant temperature, it is recommended to set the
THER M: D efau lt C TA PSx parameter to the maximum permitted coolant
temperature.
THERM:
Select CTA PSx
[ * ]
2
& THERM:
With CTA
0: Default temp. value 305 201
1: From PT100
2: From 20 mA input
MEASI: &
Open circ. PT100
[ 040 190 ]
&
MEASI:
Overload 20mA input
[ 040 191 ]
MEASI: THERM:
Open circ. 20mA inp. CTA error
[ 040 192 ] [ 039 111 ]
THERM:
CTA error EXT
[ 038 062 ]
SFMON:
THERM: CTA error
Funct.f.CTA fail.PSx
[ 098 034 ]
[ * ]
2
& THERM:
Block. by CTA error
3 305 200
1: Default temp. value

2: Last meas.temperat.
3: Blocking
THERM: THERM:
Parameter Select CTA PSx Funct.f.CTA fail.PSx
set 1 072 177 076 177

set 2 073 177 077 177
set 3 074 177 078 177
set 4 075 177 079 177 45Z8010A
Fig. 3-141: Coolant temperature monitoring.
3.29.6 Relative Replica

The rated operating current of the protected object and its overload tolerance for
maximum coolant (ambient) temperature are the basis of the relative thermal
replica.
In the Relative replica operating mode, the following settings have to be made
for thermal overload protection:
● The rated operating current of the protected object: THERM: Iref PSx
● The tripping threshold Δϑtrip is set at TH ER M: Rel. O/T trip PSx.
If coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition is used, the following parameters
must be set:
● The maximum permissible temperature of the protected object Θmax,
THE RM : Max.p erm.obj.tmp.P Sx
● The maximum coolant temperature (maximum ambient) Θc,max,
THER M: Max .perm. cool.tm pP Sx
3-186 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.29.7 Absolute Replica

The thermal limit current of the protected object is the reference current of the
absolute thermal replica. For this limit current, an overtemperature results at the
maximum coolant temperature.
In the Absolute replica operating mode, the following parameters have to be set
for thermal overload protection:
● The thermal limit current of the protected object: THE RM: Iref PSx
● The limit temperature for tripping Θmax,
THERM: Max. pe rm.obj.tmp.PSx
● The overtemperature as a result of a persistent limit current (Θmax -
Θc,max ), THERM: O/T f .Ire f pe rs. P Sx
The maximum permitted coolant temperature Θc,max is derived from the difference
between the T H E R M : M a x . p e r m . o b j . t m p . P S x and T H E R M : O / T f . I r e f p e r s .
P S x settings.
Θ/%
10000
1000
τ / min
100
200
10 110 1000
50
t / min
1
200
110
30
50
0.1
200
110
0.01
50 1
0.001
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
I / I ref
D5Z50BEB_EN
Fig. 3-142: Tripping characteristics of thermal overload protection (tripping characteristics apply to ΔϑP = 0 % and
identical settings for the maximum permissible coolant temperature and coolant temperature).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-187

P638 3 Operation
The selected current (THERM: I) is used to track a first-order thermal replica as

specified in IEC 255-8. Other than the operating mode dependent settings the
following parameters will govern the tripping time:
● The set thermal time constant τ of the protected object,
THER M: Tim.con s t.1,>Ibl PSx
● The accumulated thermal load Δϑ0
● The current measured coolant temperature Θc
● If the value of the selected current (THERM: I) is greater than 10·Iref then
only the fixed maximum value 10·Iref is used for calculating the tripping
time.
The tripping threshold in the two operating modes is calculated as follows:
I
(I )2 - Δϑ0
ref
t = τ · ln Θa - Θa,max
I
(I )2 - Δϑtrip · (1 - Θ )
ref max - Θa,max
The Δϑtrip tripping threshold is set to a fixed value of 100% if the operating mode
is Absolute replica.
3.29.9 Warning Signal

Depending on the selected operating mode, a warning signal can be set at one of
the following parameters:
● Relative replica: THERM: Re l. O/T warn in g PSx
● Absolute replica: TH ERM: A bs. O/T warni ng PSx
Additionally, a time-to-tripping threshold (pre-trip time) can be set. When the
time left until tripping falls below this setting, a warning signal will be issued.
3-188 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.29.10 Trip
THERM:
I
305 202
MAIN:
Protection active & c
306 001
THERM:
Enabled
[ 040 068 ]
THERM:
Starting k*Iref>
THERM: [ 041 108 ]
Block Replica EXT
[ 041 074 ]
THERM:
Block. by CTA error &
305 200
THERM:
Iref PSx c
[ * ] <0.1 Iref
THERM:
THERM: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx
Start.fact.OL_RC PSx c [ * ]
[ * ]
THERM:
c Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx
k·Iref [ * ]
THERM:
c Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx
THERM: [ * ]
Absolute replica
[ 022 065 ] THERM:
c Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx
[ * ]
0 THERM: THERM:
c Rel. O/T warning PSx Within pre-trip time
[ * ]
1 [ 041 109 ]
THERM:
0: No Rel. O/T trip PSx SFMON:
c [ * ] Setting error THERM
1: Yes [ 098 035 ]
THERM:
c Default CTA PSx THERM:
[ * ] Setting error,block.
THERM: THERM: [ 039 110 ]
Relative replica Hysteresis trip PSx THERM:
[ 022 064 ] [ * ] Warning
THERM: [ 039 025 ]
0 Warning pre-trip PSx THERM:
[ * ] Trip signal
1 [ 039 020 ]
THERM:
0: No Buffer empty
1: Yes [ 039 112 ]
THERM:
THERM: Status therm.replica
With CTA c [ 004 016 ]
305 201
R THERM:
Coolant temperature I/Iref Object temperature
[ 004 137 ]
THERM: THERM:
Reset replica Coolant temperature
[ 039 061 ] [ 004 149 ]
c THERM:
Pre-trip time left
[ 004 139 ]
THERM:
Temp. offset replica
[ 004 109 ]
THERM:
Coolant temp. p.u.
Parameter THERM: THERM: THERM:
Iref PSx Start.fact.OL_RC PSx Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx [ 004 178 ]
THERM:
set 1 072 179 072 180 072 187 Object temp. p.u.
set 2 073 179 073 180 073 187 [ 004 179 ]
set 3 074 179 074 180 074 187 THERM:
set 4 075 179 075 180 075 187 Therm. replica p.u.
[ 004 017 ]
Parameter THERM: THERM: THERM:
Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx Current I,therm prim
set 1 072 188 072 182 [ 007 220 ]
set 2 073 188 073 182 THERM:
Current I,therm p.u
set 3 074 188 074 182
[ 007 221 ]
set 4 075 188 075 182
Parameter THERM: THERM: THERM: THERM: THERM: THERM:

Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx Rel. O/T warning PSx Rel. O/T trip PSx Default CTA PSx Hysteresis trip PSx Warning pre-trip PSx
set 1 072 185 072 184 072 181 072 186 072 183 072 191
set 2 073 185 073 184 073 181 073 186 073 183 073 191
set 3 074 185 074 184 074 181 074 186 074 183 074 191
set 4 075 185 075 184 075 181 075 186 075 183 075 191 48Z9340A
Fig. 3-143: Thermal overload protection.
The trip threshold is set according to the selected operating mode with the
following parameters:
● Relative replica: THER M: R e l. O/T trip P Sx
● Absolute replica: THERM: Max. pe rm.obj. tmp.PSx
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-189

P638 3 Operation
If a trip command is issued, the trip signal is maintained until the status of the
thermal replica has decreased by the value set at THERM: Hystere sis t rip
PSx, at least for a fixed time of 5 s.
3.29.11 Cooling
If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the thermal replica is
applied with the time constant set at TH ER M: Tim .const.2,<Ibl PSx. This
element in the thermal model takes account of the cooling characteristics of
stopped motors.
The two time constants T H E R M : T i m . c o n s t . 1 , > I b l P S x and

T H E R M : T i m . c o n s t . 2 , < I b l P S x should be set to identical values for
transformers and power lines.
3.29.12 Resetting
The thermal replica may be reset either via a setting parameter or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input. Resetting is possible even when
thermal overload protection is disabled. Thermal overload protection can be
blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
THERM:
Reset replica USER
[ 022 061 ]
0
THERM:
1 Reset replica
[ 039 061 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
THERM:
Enabled
[ 040 068 ]
THERM:
Reset replica EXT
[ 038 061 ]
Q9Z5020A
Fig. 3-144: Resetting the thermal replica.
3-190 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.30 Under and Overvoltage Protection (Function Group V<>)

The P638 provides a two-stage time-delayed voltage protection function for over-
and undervoltage monitoring.
3.30.1 Disabling and Enabling V<> Protection

V<> protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover,
V<> protection is ready if it is enabled and no fault has been detected in the
voltage measuring circuit.
V<>:
General enable USER
[ 023 030 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
V<>:
Enable PSx
[ * ] V<>:
&
Enabled
0 [ 040 066 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes & V<>:
Ready
MCMON: [ 042 003 ]
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN: V<>:
M.c.b. trip V EXT Not ready
[ 004 061 ] [ 042 004 ]
Parameter V<>:
Enable PSx
set 1 076 000

set 2 077 000
set 3 078 000
set 4 079 000 48Z5073A
Fig. 3-145: Enabling, disabling and readiness of V<> protection.
3.30.2 Voltage Monitoring

The P638 checks the voltages to determine whether they exceed or fall below set
thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked using
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If the decisions of undervoltage monitoring are to be included in the trip
commands, then it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the
trip command would always be present when the system voltage were
disconnected, and thus it would not be possible to reclose the circuit breaker.
Furthermore, the undervoltage protection function provides a window function.
The windows are defined by the settings for V<>: V min PSx and by the set
thresholds V < or V < < , respectively. The setting for V <>: V min PSx defines
the lower threshold for both windows. With an appropriate setting of the
successive timer stages, this provision can be used to bridge short periods of
voltage failure as encountered in switching operations.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-191

P638 3 Operation
V<>:
Blocking tV> EXT
[ 041 068 ]
V<>:
Ready
[ 042 003 ] V<>:
MAIN: Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
Protection active [ * ]
306 001
V<>: V<>:
V> PSx tV> PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
V<>:
V̲ tV> elapsed
[ 041 034 ]
V<>:
Starting V>
[ 041 030 ]
V<>: V<>:
Blocking tV>> EXT V> PSx
[ 041 069 ] [ * ]
V<>: V<>:
V>> PSx tV>> PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
V<>:
tV>> elapsed
[ 041 035 ]
V<>:
Starting V>>
Parameter V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: [ 041 096 ]
V> PSx tV> PSx V>> PSx tV>> PSx Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
set 1 076 003 076 005 076 004 076 006 076 048
set 2 077 003 077 005 077 004 077 006 077 048
set 3 078 003 078 005 078 004 078 006 078 048
set 4 079 003 079 005 079 004 079 006 079 048 48Z9338A
Fig. 3-146: Overvoltage monitoring.
3-192 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
V<>:
Blocking tV< EXT
[ 041 070 ]
V<>:
Ready
[ 042 003 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
V<>: V<>:
V< PSx tV< PSx
V<>:
V> PSx [ * ] [ * ]
[ * ]
V<>:
tV< elapsed
V̲
[ 041 041 ]
V<>:
tV< elapsed & Vmin
[ 041 026 ]
V<>: Setting(s) blocked V<>:

Blocking tV<< EXT Starting V<
[ 041 071 ] [ 041 037 ]
1 V<>:
V<>: Fault V<
tV<< PSx
[ 041 110 ]
[ * ]
V<>:
V<< PSx
IDMT:
[ * ] Dir. meas. blocked
[ 041 006 ]
V<>:
tV<< elapsed
[ 041 042 ]
Setting(s) blocked
IDMT:
Fault backward
[ 041 009 ]
V<>: 1 V<>:
Vmin PSx Fault V<<
[ * ] [ 041 112 ]
V<>:
tTransient PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV< elaps. transient
1 [ 042 023 ]
V<>:
tV<< elapsed trans.
1 [ 042 025]
1 V<>:
tV</<< elaps. trans.
[ 042 007]
Parameter V<>: V<>: V<>:
V< PSx tV< PSx Vmin PSx
set 1 076 007 076 009 076 046
set 2 077 007 077 009 077 046
set 3 078 007 078 009 078 046
set 4 079 007 079 009 079 046
Parameter V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>:

V<< PSx tV<< PSx tTransient PSx Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
set 1 076 008 076 010 076 029 076 048
set 2 077 008 077 010 077 029 077 048
set 3 078 008 078 010 078 029 078 048
set 4 079 008 079 010 079 029 079 048 48Z9339A
Fig. 3-147: Undervoltage monitoring.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-193

P638 3 Operation
3.31 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>)

The P638 monitors the voltage to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set
frequencies.
The frequency is determined from the difference in time between the zero
crossings of the voltage (voltage zeroes). The evaluation time is settable. The
evaluation is blocked if the voltage falls below a settable threshold, see
Section 3.13.4, (p. 3-94).
The over-/underfrequency protection function has five stages. The operation of
over-/underfrequency protection will be explained below using the first stage as
an example.
3.31.1 Disabling or Enabling Over‑/Underfrequency Protection
f<>:
General enable USER
[ 023 031 ]
1 f<>:
& Enabled
[ 042 100 ]
0: No
1: Yes
f<>:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
1 Not ready
0
[ 042 140 ]
1
f<>:
0: No & Ready
1: Yes [ 042 101 ]
f<>:
Blocked by V<
[ 042 102 ]
f<>:
Parameter Enable PSx
set 1 018 196

set 2 018 197
set 3 018 198
set 4 018 199 12Z8804A
Fig. 3-148: Enabling, disabling and readiness of f<> protection.
The frequency protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.

3.31.2 Operating Modes of Over-/Underfrequency Protection

For each stage of the over-/underfrequency protection function, the user can
choose between the following operating modes:
● Frequency monitoring
● Frequency monitoring combined with differential frequency gradient
monitoring (df/dt)
● Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring
(Δf/Δt)
3-194 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.31.3 Frequency Monitoring

Depending on the setting, the P638 monitors the frequency to determine
whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If an operate threshold in excess
of the set nominal frequency is set, the P638 checks to determine whether the
frequency exceeds the operate threshold. If an operate threshold below the set
nominal frequency is set, the P638 checks to determine whether the frequency
falls below the operate threshold. If it exceeds or falls below the set threshold, a
set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an
appropriately configured binary signal input.
3.31.4 Frequency Monitoring Combined with Differential Frequency

Gradient Monitoring (df/dt)
In this operating mode of the over-/ underfrequency protection function, the
frequency is also checked to determine whether the set frequency gradient is
reached (in addition to being monitored for exceeding or falling below the set
threshold). Monitoring for overfrequency is combined with monitoring for a
frequency increase; monitoring for underfrequency is combined with monitoring
for a frequency decrease. If both operate conditions are satisfied, a set timer
stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately
3.31.5 Frequency Monitoring Combined with Mean Frequency Gradient

Monitoring (Δf/Δt)
f<
Δf
Δt Δt
t
Start Δt Start Δt
Function blocked
Trip Δf/Δt
F5Z0128C
Fig. 3-149: Operation of frequency monitoring combined with Δf/Δt monitoring.
The frequency gradient can differ for system disturbances in individual

substations and may vary over time due to power swings. Therefore it makes
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-195

P638 3 Operation
sense to take the mean value of the frequency gradient into account for load-
shedding systems.
In this operating mode of over-/underfrequency protection, frequency monitoring
must be set for “underfrequency monitoring”.
Monitoring the mean value of the frequency gradient is started with the starting
of frequency monitoring. If the frequency decreases by the set value Δf within
the set time Δt, then the Δf/Δt monitoring function operates instantaneously and
generates a trip signal. If a frequency change does not lead to an operate
decision of the monitoring function, then the Δf/Δt monitoring function will be
blocked until the underfrequency monitoring function drops out. The trip signal
can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-196 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
f<>:
Blocking f1 EXT
[ 042 103 ]
f<>:
Oper. mode f1 PSx
[ * ]
1: f
2: f with df/dt
f<>:
f1 PSx
3: f w. Delta f/Delta t [ * ]
MAIN:
Nominal frequ. fnom
[ 010 030 ]
f<>:
f<>: tf1 PSx
Ready [ * ]
[ 042 101 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
f<>:
f<>: Trip signal f1
Blocked by V< [ 042 111 ]
[ 042 102 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
f<>:
Starting f1
[ 042 107 ]
f<>:
df1/dt PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
No. periods reached
305 701
f<>:
fMeas df/dt
305 726
f<>:
Start. cond. met Starting f1/df1
[ 042 108 ]
SFMON:
f> Setting error f<>
f<>: [ 098 028 ]
Delta f1 PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
Delta t1 PSx
[ * ]
df/dt
f<>:
Delta f1 triggered
[ 042 109 ]
Start. cond. met
f<>:
Delta t1 elapsed
[ 042 110 ]
Parameter f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>:

Oper. mode f1 PSx f1 PSx df1/dt PSx Delta f1 PSx Delta t1 PSx tf1 PSx
set 1 018 120 018 100 018 108 018 112 018 116 018 104
set 2 018 121 018 101 018 109 018 113 018 117 018 105
set 3 018 122 018 102 018 110 018 114 018 118 018 106
set 4 018 123 018 103 018 111 018 115 018 119 018 107
47Z0152A
Fig. 3-150: First stage of the over-/ underfrequency protection function.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-197

P638 3 Operation
3.31.6 fmin/fmax Measurement

For the acquisition of the minimum frequency during an underfrequency
condition and for the acquisition of the maximum frequency during an
overfrequency condition, the two following measured event values are available:
● f<>: Max . frequ. f or f >
● f<>: M in . fr eq u. f or f <
Both measured event values are reset automatically at the onset of a new
overfrequency or underfrequency situation. A manual reset is also possible:
● f<>: R e set meas .val . USER
3-198 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.32 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Groups CBF_1

and CBF_2)
The P638 provides two main-trip circuits. Each of these main-trip circuits is
provided with its own circuit breaker protection function.
3.32.1 Disabling and Enabling Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

Circuit breaker failure protection may be disabled or enabled using setting
parameters. Enabling can be carried out separately for each setting group.
CBF_y:
General enable USER
[ * ]
0
CBF_y:
1 & Enabled
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
CBF_y:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
System 1 System 2
1 y PSS:
PS y active
0: No 1 036 090 CBF_y: 022 100 022 101
General enable USER
1: Yes 2 036 091
3 036 092 CBF_y: 040 055 040 048
Failure M-trip
PSS: 4 036 093
PS y active
[ * ]
y:System 1 y:System 2
Parameter CBF_1: Parameter CBF_2:

Enable PSx Enable PSx
set 1 072 110 set 1 072 120
set 2 073 110 set 2 073 120
set 3 074 110 set 3 074 120
set 4 075 110 set 4 075 120
18Z9330A
Fig. 3-151: Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection.
3.32.2 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

Circuit breaker failure protection is started by the main-trip command. This
command then starts timer stages. Once they have elapsed, and unless the
current monitored by the circuit breaker failure protection function has fallen
below the set threshold, re-trips will result or a superior level protection unit is
triggered. Only the fundamental of the current is monitored. Current values to be
monitored (phase or residual current) can be set.
Additionally, the circuit breaker auxiliary contact can be monitored. This is only
possible if a binary signal input has been set to MAI N: CB close d 1 EXT
(MAIN : CB closed 2 EXT). The pickup of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact
starts a timer stage. If, after this timer stage has elapsed, the current value
monitored exceeds the set threshold, then the signal CBF_1: CB Superv .
S ignal (C BF_2 : CB super v. si gn al) is issued. Auxiliary contact supervision is
active only for the set operative time.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-199

P638 3 Operation
CBF_1:
Imin< triggered
460 726
CBF_1: >1 c
Enabled
[ 040 055 ]
CBF_1: CBF_1:
Mon. time M-trip PSx R-trip signal
MAIN:
Protection active [ * ] [ 039 022 ]
306 001
& CBF_1:
Failure M-trip
MAIN: >1 t 0
M-trip command 1 [ 039 021 ]
[ 039 011 ] & CBF_1:
Mon. t. M-trip runn.
MAIN: [ 036 066 ]
Parallel trip 1 EXT
[ 037 019 ]
c
CBF_1:
CBF_1: B-trip signal
Mon. time R-trip PSx [ 039 023 ]
[ * ]
& CBF_1:
Failure R-trip
t 0 [ 036 056 ]
& CBF_1:
Mon. t. R-trip runn.
[ 036 110 ]
>1 CBF_1:
CB failure
[ 006 051 ]
CBF_1:
tImin< PSx
[ * ]
& CBF_1:
CB Superv. Signal
[ 039 000 ]
MAIN: t 0
CB closed 1 EXT
[ 036 051 ]
CBF_1:
Operative time PSx
[ * ]
Parameter CBF_1: CBF_1: CBF_1: CBF_1:

Mon. time M-trip PSx Mon. time R-trip PSx tImin< PSx Operative time PSx
set 1 072 115 072 116 072 113 072 114
set 2 073 115 073 116 073 113 073 114
set 3 074 115 074 116 074 113 074 114
set 4 075 115 075 116 075 113 075 114
18Z9331A
Fig. 3-152: Circuit breaker failure 1 protection.
3-200 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
CBF_2:
Imin< triggered
460 727
CBF_2: >1 c
Enabled
[ 040 048 ]
CBF_2: CBF_2:
Mon. time M-trip PSx R-trip signal
MAIN:
Protection active [ * ] [ 040 089 ]
306 001
& CBF_2:
Failure M-trip
MAIN: >1 t 0
M-trip command 2 [ 036 059 ]
[ 039 058 ] & CBF_2:
Mon. t. M-trip runn.
MAIN: [ 036 111 ]
Parallel trip 2 EXT
[ 037 022 ]
c
CBF_2:
CBF_2: B-trip signal
Mon. time R-trip PSx [ 040 104 ]
[ * ]
& CBF_2:
Failure R-trip
t 0 [ 036 106 ]
& CBF_2:
Mon. t. R-trip runn.
[ 036 112 ]
>1 CBF_2:
CB failure
[ 006 052 ]
CBF_2:
tImin< PSx
[ * ]
& CBF_2:
CB superv. signal
[ 039 039 ]
MAIN: t 0
CB closed 2 EXT
[ 031 030 ]
CBF_2:
tOp PSx
[ * ]
Parameter CBF_2: CBF_2: CBF_2: CBF_2:

Mon. time M-trip PSx Mon. time R-trip PSx tImin< PSx tOp PSx
set 1 072 125 072 126 072 123 072 124
set 2 073 125 073 126 073 123 073 124
set 3 074 125 074 126 074 123 074 124
set 4 075 125 075 126 075 123 075 124
68Z9312A
Fig. 3-153: Circuit breaker failure 2 protection.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-201

P638 3 Operation
CBF_1:
Select meas. input
[ 022 102 ]
I̲A,a
1
I̲C,a
I̲A,b CBF_1:
Imin< PSx
2 [ * ]
I̲C,b
f0 >1 CBF_1:
Imin< triggered
1...2 460 726
f0
1: End a
2: End b
CBF_2:
Select meas. input
[ 022 103 ]
CBF_2:
Imin< PSx
2 [*]
f0 >1 CBF_2:
Imin< triggered
1...2 460 727
f0
1: End a
2: End b
Parameter CBF_1: CBF_2:

Imin< PSx Imin< PSx
set 1 072 112 072 122
set 2 073 112 073 122
set 3 074 112 074 122
set 4 075 112 075 122 68Z9301A
Fig. 3-154: Current monitored by the circuit breaker failure protection function.
As of version -612 there are now group signals available for function group CBF_1
and CBF_2. A group signal for both CBF function groups is also generated and
issued as a standardized signal within the communication frame of IEC
60870-5-103.
CBF_1: CBF_1:
Failure M-trip CB failure
[ 039 021 ] [ 006 051 ]
CBF_1:
Failure R-trip
[ 036 056 ]
CBF_2: CBF_2:
Failure M-trip CB failure
[ 036 059 ] [ 006 052 ]
CBF_2:
Failure R-trip
[ 036 106 ]
MAIN:
CB failure
[ 036 017 ]
18Z9333A
Fig. 3-155: Group signals for the circuit breaker failure function.
3-202 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.33 Circuit Breaker Monitoring (Function Groups CBM_1 and

CBM_2)
The P638 provides two independent trip circuits. Each of these trip circuits is
equipped with its own circuit breaker monitoring function. This function supports
state-controlled maintenance of circuit breakers.
3.33.1 Disabling and Enabling Circuit Breaker Monitoring

Circuit breaker monitoring may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
CBM_1:
General enable USER
[ 022 010 ]
0
CBM_1:
1 Enabled
[ 044 130 ]
0: No
1: Yes
CBM_2:
General enable USER
[ 007 170 ]
0
CBM_2:
1 Enabled
[ 007 113 ]
0: No
1: Yes
68Z6040A
Fig. 3-156: Enabling or disabling circuit breaker monitoring.
3.33.2 Variants
The wear condition of a circuit breaker may be determined using a variety of
methods:
● Monitoring the mechanical switching operations
● Accumulating ruptured current values
● Accumulating the squared ruptured current values
● Calculating the current-time integral of ruptured and accumulated current
values
● Calculating the remaining switching operations with reference to the CB
wear characteristic.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-203

P638 3 Operation
3.33.3 CB Wear Characteristic

Manufacturers of circuit breakers usually provide wear characteristics displaying
the maximum number of permissible CB operations in relation to the ruptured
current.
Fig. 3-157, (p. 3-204) displays the wear characteristics for a circuit breaker with
a nominal current of 2000 A and a maximum ruptured current of 63 kA. The
mean ruptured current is 48 kA.
100000
Number of permissible CB operations
10000
1000
100
10
0.1 1 10 100
Disconnection current in kA 19Z6123A_EN
Fig. 3-157: Circuit breaker wear characteristic.
The knee points in Fig. 3-157, (p. 3-204) are necessary to set the wear
characteristic for the circuit breaker:
● The circuit breaker's nominal current (CBM_1: Inom,CB or
C BM_2: I nom,C B) and the permitted number of CB operations at nominal
current (C BM_1: Perm. CB op. Inom,CB or CBM_2: Per m. C B op .
I nom,C B)
● The circuit breaker's mean ruptured current (CBM_1: Med. cur r.
I trip,C B or C BM_2 : Me d. cu rr. Itrip,CB) and the permitted number of
CB operations at mean ruptured current (CBM_1: Pe rm. CB op.
Imed ,CB or C BM_2: P e rm. CB op. Im e d,C B)
● The circuit breaker's maximum ruptured current (CB M_1 : Max. curr .
It rip,CB or CBM_2: Max. curr. Itri p, CB) and the permitted number of
CB operations at maximum ruptured current (CB M_1 : Pe rm. CB op.
Imax ,CB or CBM_2: P erm. CB op. Im ax,CB)
The mean ruptured current is not available for all types of circuit breakers.
In such a case the parameters for this knee point are to be set to Blocked. A knee
point is not considered in the characteristic when at least one of the parameters
for the knee point is set to Blocked.
For proper performance of circuit breaker monitoring it should be observed that
the knee points must be applied in a logically correct sequence (continuously
3-204 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
descending). When set currents and numbers of CB operations are not plausible
according to the characteristic the P638 will issue an error message
(CBM_1: Set ting error CBM or CBM_2: Settin g e rror CBM_2) and block
circuit breaker monitoring.
3.33.4 Calculating the CB Wear State

The current wear state of the circuit breaker is given as the number of remaining
CB operations at nominal current conditions. The number of remaining CB
operations nrem(Inom,CB) is calculated and displayed phase selectively after each
disconnection by the P638.
Calculation is per this equation:
n(I nom,CB)
nrem(I nom,CB) = nrem,0(I nom,CB) - n(I d,CB)
Where:
● Inom,CB: Nominal current for the CB
● n(Inom,CB): Max permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB
● Id,CB: Ruptured current
● n(Id,CB): Permitted number of CB operations at Id,CB according to wear
characteristics
● nrem,0(Inom,CB): Remaining permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB
before disconnection
● nrem,(Inom,CB): Remaining permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB after
disconnection

The measured variables to be evaluated by the circuit breaker monitoring
functions are selected by a setting parameter.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-205

P638 3 Operation
CBM_1:
Select meas. input
[ 022 178 ]
2 C1,3
1: End a
C2,4
2: End b
I̲A,a 1
I̲C,a 3
I̲A,b 2
I̲C,b
4
1...2 CBM_1:
I̲A
460 734
3...4 CBM_1:
CBM_2: I̲C
Select meas. input 460 735
[ 007 216 ]
2 C1,3
1: End a
C2,4
2: End b
1...2 CBM_2:
I̲A
460 736
3...4 CBM_2:
I̲C
460 737
68Z6042A
Fig. 3-158: Selecting the measured variables for the circuit breaker monitoring functions.
3.33.6 Operating Modes

Setting the parameters CBM_1: Operati ng mode or CBM_2: Operating
mode will select the condition under which the function will be triggered:
● With trip cmd. only: Function triggered only by the general trip command
● With CB sig.EXT only: Function triggered by the CB open signal generated
by an auxiliary contact
● CB sig. EXT or trip: Function triggered by the general trip command or CB
open signal generated by an auxiliary contact
The following correction values can be set to determine the exact trip time:
● CBM_1: Corr. A cqu. t. tri p or C BM_2 : C o rr. Acqu.t. trip
A positive correction time value can be set for the delay period between
the trip command and the opening of the CB contacts.
● CBM_1: Corr. A cqu. t.CB si g. or CBM_2: Corr. Acqu.t.CB sig .
A positive or negative correction time value can be set for leading or
lagging auxiliary contacts.
3.33.7 Cycle for Circuit Breaker Monitoring

The circuit breaker monitoring cycle is defined selectively. During an active cycle
the signals CBM_1: Cycle running x or CBM_2: Cycle running x are issued (x = A
or C).
3-206 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
The cycle is started by a trigger criterion. Definition for the end of a cycle: The
remaining time of a power cycle duration has elapsed after the last detected
current zero crossing. The signals CBM_1: Curr. flow ended x or CBM_2: Curr. flow
ended x are generated (x = A or C).
The maximum cycle time duration is defined with 220 milliseconds. The start of
the cycle time is corrected by the settable correction times. A fault on a CB pole
is considered to be apparent if further current zero crossings are detected after
the maximum cycle time has elapsed. Measured values from the respective CB
tripping are canceled and the signals CBM_1: tMax> x or CBM_2: tMax> x) are
issued (x = A or C).
MAIN: & c
Protection active
306 001
CBM_1:
Enabled CBM_1:
[ 044 130 ] Operating mode
[ 022 007 ]
1: With trip cmd. only

2: With CB sig.EXT only
3: CB sig. EXT or trip
CBM_1: c 1,2
Blocked
[ 044 199 ]
CBM_1:
>1 c1 Corr. Acqu.t. trip
[ 022 153 ]
>1 c2 CBM_1:
Corr. Acqu.t.CB sig.
[ 022 018 ]
MAIN:
M-trip signal 1 >1 1
[ 039 101 ]
MAIN:
R-trip signal 1
[ 039 103 ]
MAIN: 2 c CBM_1:
CB open 1 EXT tMax> x
[ 044 131 ] [ * ]
220 ms 0
1...2 & CBM_1:
Cycle running x
[ * ]
>1
< 0.05 Inom
CBM_1: CBM_1:
I̲x Curr. flow ended x
A: 460 734
C: 460 735 [ * ]
Phase x CBM_1: CBM_1: CBM_1:

/ Current Ix Cycle running x Curr. flow ended x tMax> x
A / IA 044 205 044 201 044 177
C / IC 044 207 044 203 044 179
68Z6043A
Fig. 3-159: Pole-selective Measuring Cycle for Circuit Breaker Monitoring. (The evaluation of the circuit breaker
monitoring function for system 1 is shown in the figure. The evaluation for system 2 is similar, for parameters see
Chapters 7 and 8.)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-207

P638 3 Operation
3.33.8 Pole-selective Measured Values and Counter Values

Depending on the set operating mode, the P638 evaluates the conductor
currents separately and establishes a wear state for each circuit breaker or CB
pole.
The following measured values are presented pole-selectively, and per-unit
values refer to the CB nominal current:
● Primary ruptured current
This value is used to evaluate wear with reference to the CB wear
characteristic.
● Per-unit ruptured current
● Square of the per-unit ruptured current
● Sum of the per-unit ruptured currents
● Sum of the squares of the per-unit ruptured currents
● Current-time integral of the per-unit ruptured current
● Sum of the current-time integrals of the per-unit ruptured currents
The ruptured current is derived from the r.m.s. current value during the function
cycle.
The integral of the current-time area is calculated during the function cycle. An
example of a current-time integral calculation is shown in the below figure.
The following counter values are presented pole selectively:
● The number of mechanical switching operations
● The number of remaining CB operations at CB nominal current
This value is derived by evaluating wear with reference to the CB wear
characteristic.
Current-time integral
1 Cycle
MAIN:
M-trip command x
[039 011]
[039 058]
CBM_1:
Corr. Acqu.t. trip
CBM_1:
Cycle running x
[044 205]
[044 207]
CBM_1:
Curr. flow ended x
[044 201]
[044 203]
68Z9302A
Fig. 3-160: Calculation of the pole-selective current-time integrals when CBM is triggered by the respective main-
trip command. (The calculation for system 2 is similar.)
3-208 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
CBM_1: c
Cycle running x
[ * ]
CBM_1:
Inom,CB
[ 022 012 ]
fnom MAIN:
CBM_1: [ 019 020 ]
I̲x A: 460 734
C: 460 735 MAIN:
[ 019 021 ]
CBM_1:
Perm. CB op. Inom,CB
[ 022 013 ]
CBM_1:
Med. curr. Itrip,CB
[ 022 014 ]
CBM_1:
Perm. CB op. Imed,CB
[ 022 015 ]
c CBM_1:
Max. curr. Itrip,CB
[ 022 016 ]
CBM_1:
Set No. CB oper. x CBM_1:
[ * ] Perm. CB op. Imax,CB
[ 022 017 ]
CBM_1:
Set remain. CB oper. x
[ * ]
CBM_1:
CBM_1: >R Itrip x
Set ΣItrip x [ * ]
[ * ]
CBM_1:
CBM_1: >R I*t x
Set ΣItrip**2 x [ * ]
[ * ]
CBM_1:
CBM_1: >R Itrip,prim x
Set ΣI*t x [ * ]
[ * ]
CBM_1:
>R Itrip**2 x
[ * ]
CBM_1:
>S ΣItrip x
[ * ]
CBM_1:
>S ΣItrip**2 x
[ * ]
CBM_1:
>S ΣI*t x
[ * ]
CBM_1:
>S No. of CB oper. x
[ * ]
CBM_1:
>S Remain. No. CB op. x
[ * ]
CBM_1:
Initialize values
[ 003 011 ]
CBM_1:
Reset meas.val. USER
[ 003 013 ]
Phase x CBM_1: CBM_1: CBM_1: CBM_1: CBM_1: CBM_1:
/ Current Ix Cycle running x Set No. CB oper. x Set remain. CB oper. x Set ΣItrip x Set ΣItrip**2 x Set ΣI*t x
A / IA 044 205 022 131 022 134 022 137 022 140 022 143
C / IC 044 207 022 133 022 136 022 139 022 142 022 145
Phase x CBM_1: CBM_1: CBM_1: CBM_1: CBM_1: CBM_1:

/ Current Ix Itrip x I*t x Itrip,prim x Itrip**2 x ΣItrip x ΣItrip**2 x
A / IA 009 047 009 061 009 212 009 051 009 071 009 077
C / IC 009 049 009 063 009 214 009 053 009 073 009 079
Phase x CBM_1: CBM_1: CBM_1:

/ Current Ix ΣI*t x No. of CB oper. x Remain. No. CB op. x
A / IA 009 087 008 011 008 014
C / IC 009 089 008 013 008 016

68Z6045A
Fig. 3-161: Calculation by the circuit breaker monitoring function (pole-selective representation). (The evaluation of
the circuit breaker monitoring function for system 1 is shown in the figure. The evaluation for system 2 is similar.
For parameters see Chapters 7 and 8.)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-209

P638 3 Operation
3.33.9 Monitoring the Number of CB Operations

Depending on the selected operating mode the P638 will calculate the current
wear state of the circuit breaker after each disconnection. The number of
remaining CB operations at CB nominal current are calculated and displayed. A
threshold value can be set with the parameters CBM_1: Remain No. CB op.
< or CBM_2: Re main No. CB op. <. An alarm is issued should the number of
remaining CB operations drop below this threshold.
CBM_1:
c Remain No. CB op. <
[ 022 020 ]
CBM_1: >1 CBM_1:

Remain. No. CB op. A Sig. Rem. No.CB op.<
[ 008 014 ] [ 044 136 ]
CBM_1:
Remain. No. CB op. C
[ 008 016 ]
CBM_2:
c Remain No. CB op. <
[ 007 180 ]
CBM_2: >1 CBM_2:

Remain. No. CB op. A Sig. Rem. No.CB op.<
[ 007 144 ] [ 007 118 ]
CBM_2:
Remain. No. CB op. C
[ 007 145 ]
68Z6046A
Fig. 3-162: Monitoring the remaining number of CB operations at nominal current.
At the same time each switching operation will increment the P638's counter for
the number of CB operations. The number of CB operations performed is
displayed. A threshold value can be set with the parameters CBM_1: No. CB
operat ion s > of C BM_2: No. C B ope ration s >. An alarm is issued should
the number of CB operations performed exceed this threshold.
CBM_1:
c No. CB operations >
[ 022 019 ]
CBM_1: >1 CBM_1:

No. of CB oper. A Sig. No. CB op. >
[ 008 011 ] [ 044 135 ]
CBM_1:
No. of CB oper. C
[ 008 013 ]
CBM_2:
c No. CB operations >
[ 007 179 ]
CBM_2: >1 CBM_2:

No. of CB oper. A Sig. No. CB op. >
[ 007 142 ] [ 007 117 ]
CBM_2:
No. of CB oper. C
[ 007 143 ]
68Z6047A
Fig. 3-163: Monitoring the number of CB operations performed.
3-210 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.33.10 Monitoring Ruptured Currents

In addition to the evaluation of the CB wear state and monitoring of the number
of CB operations performed, the P638 features the means to accumulate and
display the ruptured current values and the square of these values.
Threshold values can be set with the parameters CBM_1: Σ I trip> or
CBM_2: ΣIt rip>, CBM_1: Σ I trip**2> or CBM_2: ΣI t rip**2> and
CBM_1: ΣI*t > or C BM_2 : Σ I*t>. An alarm is issued should the accumulated
current values exceed any of these thresholds.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-211

P638 3 Operation
3.33.11 Blocking Circuit Breaker Monitoring

When protection injection testing is carried out the circuit breaker monitoring
function should be blocked, so that such testing does not corrupt monitoring
results. CBM protection is blocked if one of the following conditions is met:
● Circuit breaker monitoring is blocked by parameters.
● Circuit breaker monitoring is blocked by an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
CBM_1: CBM_1:
Enabled Blocked
[ 044 199 ]
[ 044 130 ]
&
CBM_1:
Blocking EXT
[ 044 128 ]
CBM_1:
Blocking USER
[ 022 150 ]
0: No
1: Yes
CBM_2: CBM_2:
Enabled Blocked
[ 007 116 ]
[ 007 113 ]
&
CBM_2:
Blocking EXT
[ 007 112 ]
CBM_2:
Blocking USER
[ 007 171 ]
0: No
1: Yes
68Z6048A
Fig. 3-164: Blocking circuit breaker monitoring.
3.33.12 Resetting Measured Values

Measured values from the respective last CB trip may be reset via the interfaces
on the P638. Accumulated measured values are not affected by such a reset
operation.
3.33.13 Setting Measured Values

Setting measured values in the circuit breaker monitoring function is necessary
when the respective CB has already been exposed to operating conditions or has
been replaced. The available interfaces on the P638 may be used to set
measured values in the circuit breaker monitoring function.
Only such measured values and counter values in the P638 may be set to new
values that do not have their default values set to Blocked.
The stored value will remain unchanged if the default value is set to Blocked.
Executing the set command results in initializing all default values in the P638 to
Blocked.
3-212 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.34 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT)

Limit Value Monitoring is not designed to be a high-speed protection function; it
is only applied for monitoring and signaling purposes as well as to monitor
temperature limits.
3.34.1 Enable/Disable the Limit Value Monitoring Function

The Limit Value Monitoring function can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters.
LIMIT:
General enable USER
[ 014 010 ]
0: No
1: Yes
LIMIT:
Enable PSx
[*]
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
0: No
1: Yes
Parameter LIMIT:
Enable PSx
set 1 072 240
set 2 073 240
set 3 074 240
set 4 075 240
48Z5405A
Fig. 3-165: Disabling and Enabling LIMIT.
3.34.2 Monitoring Measured Values

With the P638 monitoring of the following measured values is possible in order to
determine if they exceed set upper limit values or fall below set lower limit
values:
● Maximum currents in transformer ends a and b: Ia>, Ia>>, Ib>, Ib>>
● Residual current: IN>, IN>>
● Voltage: V<, V<<, V>, V>>
● Frequency: f<, f<<, f>, f>>
● Linearized 20mA current: IDC,lin<, IDC,lin<<, IDC,lin>, IDC,lin>>
● Measured temperature: T<, T<<. T>, T>>
If any of the measured values exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or
lower limit values, then a signal is issued after the associated time period has
elapsed.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-213

P638 3 Operation
3.34.3 Monitoring Transformer Ends a and b Currents
LIMIT: LIMIT:
LIMIT: Ia> PSx tIa> PSx
Enabled [*] [*]
[ 040 074 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001 LIMIT:
tIa> elapsed
I̲A,a [ 040 147 ]
I̲max
I̲C,a
LIMIT: LIMIT:
Ia>> PSx tIa>> PSx
[*] [*]
LIMIT:
tIa>> elapsed
[ 040 148 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
Ib> PSx tIb> PSx
[*] [*]
I̲A,b LIMIT:
tIb> elapsed
I̲max
I̲C,b [ 040 122 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
Ib>> PSx tIb>> PSx
[*] [*]
LIMIT:
tIb>> elapsed
[ 040 151 ]
Parameter LIMIT: LIMIT: LIMIT: LIMIT:

Ia> PSx Ia>> PSx tIa> PSx tIa>> PSx
set 1 072 221 072 223 072 224 072 225
set 2 073 221 073 223 073 224 073 225
set 3 074 221 074 223 074 224 074 225
set 4 075 221 075 223 075 224 075 225

Ib> PSx Ib>> PSx tIb> PSx tIb>> PSx
set 1 072 229 072 230 072 231 072 232
set 2 073 229 073 230 073 231 073 232
set 3 074 229 074 230 074 231 074 232
set 4 075 229 075 230 075 231 075 232
68Z6055A
Fig. 3-166: Monitoring transformer ends a and b currents.
The device features limit value monitoring functions to monitor current flow in
transformer ends a and b.
The maximum currents are monitored by two stages to determine whether they
exceed set thresholds. If any of the thresholds are exceeded a signal is issued
after a set time-delay has elapsed.
3-214 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.34.4 Monitoring Residual Current
LIMIT:
Enabled LIMIT: LIMIT:
[ 040 074 ] IN> PSx tIN> PSx
[*] [*]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
I̲N LIMIT:
tIN> elapsed
[ 040 153 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
IN>> PSx tIN>> PSx
[*] [*]
LIMIT:
tIN>> elapsed
[ 040 154 ]

IN> PSx IN>> PSx tIN> PSx tIN>> PSx
set 1 072 234 072 235 072 236 072 237
set 2 073 234 073 235 073 236 073 237
set 3 074 234 074 235 074 236 074 237
set 4 075 234 075 235 075 236 075 237
68Z6056A
Fig. 3-167: Monitoring residual current.
The residual current is monitored by two stages to determine whether they

exceed set thresholds. If any of the thresholds are exceeded a signal is issued
after a set time-delay has elapsed.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-215

P638 3 Operation
3.34.5 Monitoring Voltage
LIMIT: LIMIT: LIMIT:

Enabled V> PSx tV> PSx
[ 040 074 ] [*] [*]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
V̲ LIMIT:
tV> elapsed
[ 040 140 ]
LIMIT:
tV> & tV< elapsed
LIMIT: LIMIT: [ 040 144 ]
V>> PSx tV>> PSx
[*] [*]
LIMIT:
tV>> elapsed
[ 040 141 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
V< PSx tV< PSx
[*] [*]
LIMIT:
tV< elapsed
[ 040 142 ]
LIMIT:
tV>> & tV<< elapsed
LIMIT: LIMIT: [ 040 145 ]
V<< PSx tV<< PSx
[*] [*]
LIMIT:
tV<< elapsed
[ 040 143 ]

V> PSx V>> PSx tV> PSx tV>> PSx
set 1 072 247 072 248 072 249 072 250
set 2 073 247 073 248 073 249 073 250
set 3 074 247 074 248 074 249 074 250
set 4 075 247 075 248 075 249 075 250

V< PSx V<< PSx tV< PSx tV<< PSx
set 1 072 251 072 252 072 253 072 254
set 2 073 251 073 252 073 253 073 254
set 3 074 251 074 252 074 253 074 254
set 4 075 251 075 252 075 253 075 254
48Z5407A
Fig. 3-168: Monitoring voltage.
The voltage is monitored by two stages to determine whether it exceeds or falls

below set thresholds. If it exceeds or falls below the thresholds a signal is issued
once a set time-delay has elapsed. In addition a multiple signal is issued if any of
the tV> or tV>> (tV< or tV<<) time-delays have elapsed.
3-216 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.34.6 Monitoring Frequency
LIMIT: LIMIT: LIMIT:

Enabled f> PSx tf> PSx
[ 040 074 ] [*] [*]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
f LIMIT:
tf> elapsed
[ 040 196 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
f>> PSx tf>> PSx
[*] [*]
LIMIT:
tf>> elapsed
[ 040 197 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
f< PSx tf< PSx
[*] [*]
LIMIT:
tf< elapsed
[ 040 198 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
f<< PSx tf<< PSx
[*] [*]
LIMIT:
tf<< elapsed
[ 040 199 ]

f> PSx f>> PSx tf> PSx tf>> PSx
set 1 072 211 072 212 072 213 072 214
set 2 073 211 073 212 073 213 073 214
set 3 074 211 074 212 074 213 074 214
set 4 075 211 075 212 075 213 075 214

f< PSx f<< PSx tf< PSx tf<< PSx
set 1 072 215 072 216 072 217 072 218
set 2 073 215 073 216 073 217 073 218
set 3 074 215 074 216 074 217 074 218
set 4 075 215 075 216 075 217 075 218
48Z5418A
Fig. 3-169: Monitoring frequency.
The frequency is monitored by two stages to determine whether it exceeds or

falls below set thresholds. If it exceeds or falls below the thresholds a signal is
issued once a set time-delay has elapsed.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-217

P638 3 Operation
3.34.7 Monitoring the Linearized Measured DC Values
LIMIT:
Starting ID,Clin>
[ 040 180 ]
LIMIT:
Enabled LIMIT: LIMIT:
[ 040 074 ] IDC,lin> tIDC,lin>
[ 014 110 ] [ 014 112 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
MEASI: LIMIT:
Curr. IDC,lin. p.u. tIDC,lin> elapsed
[ 004 136 ] [ 040 182 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin>>
[ 040 181 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
IDC,lin>> tIDC,lin>>
[ 014 111 ] [ 014 113 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin>> elapsed
[ 040 183 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin<
[ 040 184 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
IDC,lin< tIDC,lin<
[ 014 114 ] [ 014 116 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin< elapsed
[ 040 186 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin<<
[ 040 185 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
IDC,lin<< tIDC,lin<<
[ 014 115 ] [ 014 117 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin<< elapsed
[ 040 187 ]
S8Z52G6A
Fig. 3-170: Monitoring the linearized measured DC values.
The direct current, linearized by the analog measured data input, is monitored by
two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If any of the
measured values exceed or fall below the corresponding upper or lower limit
values then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.
3-218 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.34.8 Monitoring the Measured “PT 100” Temperature Value
LIMIT:
Starting T>
[ 040 170 ]
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ] LIMIT: LIMIT:
T> tT>
[ 014 100 ] [ 014 103 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
MEASI: LIMIT:
Temperature T tT> elapsed
[ 004 133 ] [ 040 172 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T>>
[ 040 171 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
T>> tT>>
[ 014 101 ] [ 014 104 ]
LIMIT:
tT>> elapsed
[ 040 173 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T<
[ 040 174 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
T< tT<
[ 014 105 ] [ 014 107 ]
LIMIT:
tT< elapsed
[ 040 176 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T<<
[ 040 175 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
T<< tT<<
[ 014 106 ] [ 014 108 ]
LIMIT:
tT<< elapsed
[ 040 177 ]
19Z5212A
Fig. 3-171: Monitoring the measured “PT 100” temperature value.
The temperature value that is measured by the P638 with a resistance

thermometer (PT 100) connected to the analog (I/O) module Y, is monitored by
two stages to determine whether it exceeds or falls below the corresponding
upper or lower limit values. If any of the measured values exceed or fall below
the corresponding upper or lower limit values then a signal is issued after the
associated time period has elapsed.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-219

P638 3 Operation
3.35 Programmable Logic (Function Groups LOGIC and LOG_2)

Programmable (or user-configurable) logic enables the user to link binary signals
within a framework of Boolean equations.
Two function groups for programmable logic are available, that can be used
independently of each other. There are only two differences between these two
function groups:
● LOGIC offers 128 logical equations.
LOG_2 offers only 4 logical equations.
● On the other hand, LOG_2 features long-term timers.
For example for output 1:
o LOGI C: Ti me t1 ou tpu t 1 and LOGIC: Time t2 output 1: settable
from 0 to 600 s.
o L OG_2: Ti me t 1 ou tput 1 and LOG_2 : Time t2 output 1: settable
from 0 to 60,000 s.
The following description concentrates on the function group LOGIC. Where

applicable, any differences to LOG_2 are mentioned.
Binary signals in the P638 may be linked by logical “OR” or “AND” operations
with the option of additional NOT operations by setting L OGIC: Fct.assignm.
outp. 1 (or LOGIC : F ct.as s ignm . outp. 2 to L OGIC : Fct.assignm.outp.
128, or LOG_2 : F ct .as si gnm. ou tp. 1 to L OG_2: Fct.assignm. out p. 4).
The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of brackets. The
following rule applies to the operators: “NOT” before “AND” before “OR”.
A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In
addition to the signals generated by the P638, initial conditions for governing the
equations can be set using setting parameters, through binary signal inputs, or
through the serial interfaces.
Logical operations of the function group LOGIC can be controlled through the
binary signal inputs in different ways.
The binary input signals LOGI C: Inpu t 01 EXT (or LOGIC: Input 0 2 EXT, …,
LOGIC : I np ut 4 0 EXT) have an updating function, whereas the input signals
LOGIC : Set 1 EXT (or LOGI C: Set 2 E XT, …, LOGIC: Set 8 EXT) are
latched. The logic can only be controlled from the binary signal inputs configured
for LOGIC : Se t 1 E XT if the corresponding reset input LOGIC: Reset 1 EX T)
has been configured for a binary signal input. If only one or neither of the two
functions is configured, then this is interpreted as “Logic externally set”. If the
input signals of the two binary signal inputs are implausible (such as when they
both have a logic value of “1”), then the last plausible state remains stored in
memory. (For LOG_2, there are no such parameters for assigning binary input
signals.)
3-220 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
WARNING
HAZARD OF UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
⚫ When using the programmable logic, it is necessary to carry out a
functional type test to conform with the requirements of the relevant
protection/control application. In particular, it is necessary to verify that
the requirements for the implementation of logic linking (by setting) as
well as the time performance during startup of the P638, during operation
and when there is a fault (blocking of the P638) are fulfilled.
LOGIC:
Set 1 USER
[ 034 030 ]
0
LOGIC:
1 1 has been set
[ 034 067 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
LOGIC:
Address 034 051 1 set externally
[ 034 075 ]
Address 034 059
LOGIC:
Set 1 EXT
[ 034 051 ]
LOGIC:
Reset 1 EXT
[ 034 059 ]
49Z9107A
Fig. 3-172: Control of logic operations via setting parameters or stored input signals. (The logic does not apply to
LOG_2.)
The LOGIC : Trig ge r 1 signal is a “triggering function” that causes a 100 ms

pulse to be issued.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-221

P638 3 Operation
LOGIC:
General enable USER
LOGIC:
[ 031 099 ] Enabled
[ 034 046 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: LOGIC:
Protection active Fct.assignm. outp. 1
306 001
[ 030 000 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
LOGIC: LOGIC:
Input 01 EXT Op. mode t output 1
[ 034 000 ] [ 030 001 ]
0
LOGIC:
Input 16 EXT
[ 034 015 ] 1
2
3
LOGIC:
1 has been set 4
[ 034 067 ]
5
0 5
LOGIC:
8 has been set
[ 034 074 ] 0: Without timer stage
LOGIC:
Time t1 output 1
1: Oper./releas.delay
[ 030 002 ]
2: Oper.del./puls.dur.
LOGIC: LOGIC:
1 set externally Time t2 output 1
[ 034 075 ] 3: Op./rel.delay,retrig
[ 030 003 ]
4: Op.del./puls.dur.,rt
5: Minimum time
LOGIC:
8 set externally LOGIC:
[ 034 082 ] Output 01 (t)
[ 042 033 ]
LOGIC:
Set 1 USER
[ 034 030 ]
LOGIC:
Set 8 USER
[ 034 037 ]
LOGIC:
Trigger 1
[ 034 038 ]
0
LOGIC:
1 Output 01
[ 042 032 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
LOGIC:
Trigger 8
[ 034 045 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
D5Z52CDA
Fig. 3-173: Setting options for programmable logic, function group LOGIC (shown here for output 1).
3-222 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
LOG_2:
General enable USER
LOG_2:
[ 011 137 ] Enabled
[ 011 138 ]
0: No
1: Yes LOG_2:
Op. mode t output 1
[ 050 001 ]
MAIN: LOG_2:
Protection active Fct.assignm. outp. 1
306 001 [ 050 000 ] 0
1
Signal 1 2
3
Signal 2
4
Signal 3 5
0 5
Signal n
0: Without timer stage
LOG_2:
1: Oper./releas.delay Time t1 output 1
2: Oper.del./puls.dur. [ 050 002 ]
3: Op./rel.delay,retrig
LOG_2:
4: Op.del./puls.dur.,rt Time t2 output 1
5: Minimum time [ 050 003 ]
LOG_2:
Output 1 (t)
[ 052 033 ]
LOG_2:
Output 1
[ 052 032 ]
19Z80CDA
Fig. 3-174: Setting options for programmable logic, function group LOG_2 (shown here for output 1).
The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher order, equation
as an input signal thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean equations. The
equations are processed in the sequence defined by the order of each equation.
It should be noted that in the case of overlapping equations, the result is
provided by the equation with the highest order.
The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two
timer elements and a choice of operating modes. This offers the possibility of
assigning a freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each
Boolean equation. In the Minimum time operating mode, the setting of timer
stage t2 has no effect. The following diagrams (Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-224) to
Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-226)) show the time characteristics for the various timer stage
operating modes.
If the P638 is switched to offline the equations are not processed and all outputs
are set to the “0” logic level.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-223

P638 3 Operation
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t) t2 t2
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t2 t1 t2
D5Z50BYA
Fig. 3-175: Operating mode 1: Pickup/reset delay (Oper./releas.delay). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the
signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t) t2 t2
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t2 t1 t2
D5Z50BZA
Fig. 3-176: Operating mode 2: Pulse, delayed pickup (Oper.del./puls.dur.). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if
the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
3-224 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
Retrigger pulse
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2 t2
t2
Retrigger pulse
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t2 t1 t2
t2
t2
D5Z50CAA
Fig. 3-177: Operating mode 3: Pickup/reset delay, retriggerable (Op./rel.delay,retrig). (This diagram is also valid for
LOG_2, if the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2 t2
Retrigger pulse
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t2 t1 t2
t1 t1
D5Z50CBA
Fig. 3-178: Operating mode 4: Pulse, delayed pickup, retriggerable (Op.del./puls.dur.,rt). (This diagram is also valid
for LOG_2, if the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-225

P638 3 Operation
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
D5Z50CCA
Fig. 3-179: Operating mode 5: Minimum time (Minimum time). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the signal
parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
Through appropriate configuration, it is possible to assign the function of a binary

input signal to each output of a logic operation. The output of the logic operation
then has the same effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has
been assigned were triggered.
3-226 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
LOGIC:
Sig.assig. outp. 1
[ 044 000 ]
Signal 1 EXT
[ AAA AAA ]
Signal 2 EXT
[ BBB BBB ]
Signal 3 EXT
[ CCC CCC ]
Signal n EXT
[ NNN NNN ]
Signal 1 EXT
Address AAA AAA
LOGIC: [ AAA AAA ]
Output 01
[ 042 032 ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
Address AAA AAA
-Uxxx
LOGIC:
Sig.assig.outp. 1(t)
[ 044 001 ]
Signal 2 EXT
Address BBB BBB
[ BBB BBB ]
LOGIC:
Output 01 (t)
[ 042 033 ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
Address BBB BBB
-Uxxx
D5Z52FBA
Fig. 3-180: Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations. (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the
parameters from LOGIC are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-227

P638 3 Operation
3.36 TIMER (Function Group TIMER)

Four groups of timer are available in the P638. The timer can set time for starting
and ending automatically with start time (TIMER: Start hour 1, TIMER: St art
minute 1 ) and end time (TIMER: End hour 1, TIMER: End minute 1). Each
of the timer can set one or more repeat days in a week TIMER: Calendar 1
(from Monday to Sunday).
For example, it is able to set time for automatic's activation (e.g. keeping the
output relay closed) between 12 PM and 18 PM from Monday to Friday for timer
stage1 and between 16 PM and 19 PM on Saturday and Sunday for timer stage 2.
From version -655 the timer settings allow more flexibility.
If the end time is before (smaller than) start time, the "active" window will end on
the next day. For example, timer stage 1 is set for Saturday with start time 18
p.m. and end time 12 p.m., then it will be active from Saturday 18 p.m. until
Sunday 12 p.m.
If start and end timers are set to the same value, the timer stage gets active for
24h. For example, timer stage 1 is set for Saturday with start time 12 p.m. and
end time 12 p.m., then it will be active from Saturday 12 p.m. until Sunday 12
p.m.
The internal clock is the source of the Timer function. It is also possible to use the
time synchronised clock signal (GPS, DCF77, SNTP).
TIMER:
Calendar 1
TIMER: c
General enable USER [ 014 178 ]
[ 014 199 ]
TIMER: m out of n
Monday
[ 014 139 ]
.
.
.
TIMER:
Sunday
[ 014 169 ]
Φ
Hardware clock
Selected day of week c
TIMER:
Start hour 1
[ 014 089 ]
TIMER:
Start minute 1
[ 014 102 ]
TIMER:
End hour 1
[ 014 109 ]
TIMER:
End minute 1
[ 014 118 ]
Φ
TIMER:
Timer stage 1
[ 015 006 ]
19Z8854A
Fig. 3-181: TIMER logic (Calendar 1 shown as an example for 4 calendar timers).
3-228 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.37 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units (Function

Groups DEV01 to DEV10)
The P638 is designed to control up to 10 switchgear units. The two-pole forcibly
guided termination contacts on the binary module X(6I 6O) are available for up to
6 of these.
For the remaining 4 switchgear units binary inputs and outputs on the power
supply module can be used in combination with external high-break relays, or
further binary modules with high-break contacts (ordering option).
See the table in Section 4.3, (p. 4-7) for the slots that have to be used for a
particular set of ordered modules.
The P638 provides a bay panel concept to simplify the configuration of the
switchgear control functions. The bay panel type defines the layout of a bay with
its switchgear units on the HMI, an automated I/O assignment and the
system/bay interlocking equations for all required switchgear units. The selection
of a bay type can be done with the parameter (220 000) MA IN: Type of bay. It
is also possible to create a customized bay type and upload it to the P638. (See
Section 3.37.1, (p. 3-229) for some more information.)
3.37.1 Bay Type Selection

The bay type defines the layout of a bay with its switchgear units on the HMI, an
automated I/O assignment and the system/bay interlocking equations for all
required switchgear units.
It is possible – using a special Bay Configuration Tool (BTC) being part of Easergy
Studio – to create a customized bay type and upload it to the P638.
To create customized bay types, the “Bay Type Configurator” (BTC), version 2.7
or higher, is needed. Older versions of the BTC can create not compatible hex files
and thus can lead to communication failures.
The parameter – MAI N: Type of bay – can then be used to select (i. e. activate)
this user-defined bay type. Note that there is no restriction to only one user-
defined bay type: In fact, multiple customized bay types can be created with
different IDs and be loaded into the P638. When using the BTC to create a bay
type, it is recommended to always use an ID number in the range of 5000 …
9999 for any customized bay type, because the pre-defined standard bay types
use IDs in the reserved range of 0001 … 4999. If the user tries to select a non-
existing ID via (220 000) MAIN: Type of bay (i. e. an ID for which neither a
standard nor a customized bay type is defined), then the selection will be
rejected and an error message “Signal from device: Bay type not assigned
(0x8073)” will be reported in the “kommprot.txt” log file.
Once the user has selected a bay type, the P638 can automatically configure the
binary inputs and output relays with function assignments for the control of
switchgear units. This automatic assignment is defined via the parameter
MAIN : Auto-assi gn men t I/O.
Should the required bay type be missing from the standard selection then the
user can contact the manufacturer of the P638 to request the definition of a
customized bay type to load into the P638.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-229

P638 3 Operation
In general, the selection of a bay type (via M A I N : T y p e o f b a y) is accepted by

the P638 only if all of the following requirements are fulfilled:
● The selected ID number is known by the P638, i. e. is either available
as a pre-defined standard bay type, or matches a bay type definition
that has been loaded as a customized bay type into the P638
memory in file transfer mode.
● Minimum one binary I/O module X(6I 6O) has been fitted to slot 6 (40
TE case) or 12 (84 TE case).
● The hardware (in particular the set of all binary I/O modules and
power supply) has got a sufficient number of inputs and outputs as
required by the selected bay type.
● None of the inputs/outputs required by the selected bay type has
been previously assigned to a non-control function.
In case of the setting M A I N : A u t o - a s s i g n m e n t I / O = Yes, the following two
constraints must be noted:
● The activation of a new bay type overwrites all DEVxx / SIG_1 /
CMD_1 assignments to I/O elements that have been previously made
(for the previous bay type definition).
● If the automatic I/O assignment fails because some required inputs
and outputs have been assigned to a non-control function, or because
the number of I/O elements available is not sufficient, then the
previously selected bay type remains active and an error message
“Signal from device: Hardware module not fitted (0x8063)” is
reported in the “kommprot.txt” log file.
3-230 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.37.2 Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the Control Functions
MAIN:
Inp.asg. ctrl.enabl.
[ 221 057 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
...
Signal n
Without function ≥1 MAIN:

Enable control
[ 221 058 ]
Selected signal
MAIN:
Inp.asg.interl.deact
[ 221 007 ]
Without function &
Selected signal
MAIN:
SI active USER
[ 221 002 ]
≥1 MAIN:
Subst. interl. act.
0 [ 221 000 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
BI active USER
[ 221 003 ]
≥1 MAIN:
Bay interlock. act.
0 [ 221 001 ]
0: No
1: Yes
49Z88ABC
Fig. 3-182: General enable for switch commands issued by the control functions; activating or canceling the
interlocks.
Before a switching unit within the bay is closed or opened by the control
functions of the P638, the P638 first checks whether the switch command may be
executed. A switch command will be executed if the optional control enable has
been issued and the interlock conditions are met. The interlock conditions are
defined in the interlocking logic for each switching unit within the bay that is
subject to control actions and for each control direction (Open/Close). Different
conditions are defined for the bay interlock equations to operate with or without
station interlock. The check of bay or station interlock equations can be cancelled
for all electrically controllable switchgear units within a bay. If the station
interlock is active, it may be cancelled selectively for each switching unit and
each control direction.
The bay and station interlocks may be cancelled through an appropriately
configured binary signal input. This cancellation is effective for all of the
operating modes “Local”, “Remote” and “Remote & Local” (setting LOC: Fct.
a ssign. L/R k ey = R & L <-> L). In other words, the functionality of the binary
input for cancelling the bay and station interlocks is independent of the operating
mode of the control point for switching between local and remote control.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-231

P638 3 Operation
All station interlock functionality (e.g. the parameter M A I N : S I a c t i v e U S E R) is

active and available only if a communication module (i. e. a module of type “A”)
with 2 serial interfaces is fitted and either the IEC 60870‑5‑101 or ‑103
communication protocol is configured.
ILOCK:
Rset ILOCK violation
[ 221 123 ]
0 t
DEV01: ≥1 ≥1 MAIN:
Open cmd. rejection Interlock equ. viol.
⋮ [ 221 018 ]
DEVxx:
Open cmd. rejection
DEV01: ≥1
Close cmd. rejection
⋮
DEVxx:
19Z83ADA
Fig. 3-183: Rejection of the switching commands.
During a switch command is being executed, any further switch command is

rejected (“Double Command Lockout”). This includes interlocking of parallel
switching operations and further switch commands to the currently selected
switching unit.
3-232 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
Control command Control command Control command

open / close open / close received open / close received
received from COMM1. from local HMI. from binary input.
Int. flag Int. flag Int. flag

OR (221 101) yes OR (221 101) yes OR (221 101) yes
OR (221 102) OR (221 102) OR (221 102)
OR (221 103) OR (221 103) OR (221 103)
set? set? set?
Command Command Command
rejected. rejected. rejected.
no no no
Internal flag set, Internal flag set, Internal flag set,

(221 101) set. (221 102) set. (221 103) set.
Cmd start:
Internal no
Command
parameter rejected.
check OK?
yes
no
Interlocking Command
check OK? rejected.
yes
Command Command received:

execution.
from COMM1: from local HMI: from binary input:
MAIN: MAIN: MAIN:

Command Cmd. fr. comm.interf Command from HMI Cmd. fr. electr.ctrl
termination.
221 101 221 102 221 103
Internal flag reset,

(221 101) reset,
(221 102) reset,
(221 103) reset.
19Z8123A
Fig. 3-184: “Double Command Lockout”.
3.37.3 Designation of External Devices

Each external device represented in the Bay Panel is identified by an external
device designation. The user can either select this designation from a list of over
70 pre-defined names (via the parameter D EV 0 1: D esign at. ex t. dev . in case
of DEV01, for example), or this parameter is set to Device Name User. With this
selection, a user-defined text for the name of the external device will be used as
the designation. This user-defined text has to be entered at DE V01: DEV-
Na me User (in case of DEV01, for example).
(The maximum length is 4 characters, as with the fixed identifiers. Longer text
entries are truncated to 4 characters internally.)
3.37.4 Defining a Bay Panel Type

With the selection of a Bay Panel type, the following definitions are made:
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-233

P638 3 Operation
● Manually operated switchgear units with status signals to be processed.

● Switchgear units to be controlled and signaled by the P638.
● The bay interlock conditions for the “Open” / “Close” command control of
the switchgear units, for operation with or without the station interlock
function.
● Binary inputs required for switchgear units with direct motor control.
● Binary outputs required for switchgear units with direct motor control.
When a Bay Panel type is selected, the binary inputs for switchgear status
signals and the output relays for control commands are configured automatically
if M AI N: Auto-assign me nt I/O is set to Yes. If set to No, the user will need to
carry out this configuration. The list of Bay Panel types in the Appendix shows
which binary inputs and output relays have been assigned signals or commands
for control of switchgear units in the case of automatic configuration.
Setting options for the P638 and the different possibilities to integrate a
switchgear unit into the functional sequence of the P638 (processing of status
signals only or controlling and signaling) will be explained below, using one
switchgear unit as an example. Function group DEV01 will be used throughout in
this example. If a signal is identified in the function diagrams by function group
“COMM1:” with a blank address [ --- ---], it will indicate that it is a signal to or
from the communication interface and that it has not been assigned an address.
3-234 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.37.5 Processing Status Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear

Units
DEV01:
Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug
[ 210 014 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
⋮
Signal n
Without function ≥1
Selected signal
DEV01:
≥1 Switch. device open
DEV01:
Gr. assign. debounc. [ 210 036 ]
[ 210 011 ] & DEV01:
Switch.device closed
≥1 [ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
=1 1 Dev. interm./flt.pos
>S [ 210 038 ]
11 &
1
>R
Selected group >S &
11
◄ >R
1
c
◄
DEV01:
Open signal EXT Φ & >S
11
[ 210 030 ] Debouncing 1
>R
&
DEV01:
Closed signal EXT Chatter suppression DEV01:
[ 210 031 ] Op.time switch. dev.
[ 210 004 ]
t 0
&
DEV01:
Stat.ind.interm.pos.
[ 210 027 ]
& ≥1
0 5s 0 &
&
1
0: No ◄
1: Yes
0
0⋯3 DEV01:
Control state
0: Intermediate pos. [ 210 018 ]
1: Open
2: Closed
3: Faulty position 19Z50AJB
Fig. 3-185: Processing Status Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear Units.
3.37.5.1 Status Signals

The status signals “Open” and “Closed” are assigned to binary signal inputs. The
signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression (see
Section 3.40.1.1, (p. 3-260)) are used for further processing. If no logic value of
“1” is present at any of the two binary signal inputs, the running time monitoring
function is started. For the duration of the set time period for running time
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-235

P638 3 Operation
monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear unit are back to a defined
position – either “Open” or “Closed” – the signal “Intermediate position” is
issued.
If DEV01: Int erm. pos . suppr. is set to Yes, the previous switchgear unit
status will continue to be signaled to the communication interfaces while the
switchgear unit is operating. Once the contacts on the switchgear unit have
reached their new position, the updated status is signaled accordingly to the
communication interfaces. This parameter has no impact to internal signals, such
as DEV01: Swit ch. device ope n, D EV 01: Switch.device closed or
D EV01: D ev. inte rm./f lt. pos.
The signal “Faulty position” is issued if the contacts on the switchgear unit have
not reached either their “Open” or “Closed” position after the set time period for
running time monitoring and the delay time set in MAIN: Delay
Man.Op .Supe rv. have elapsed. If DEV 01: Stat.ind.interm.pos. is set to
Yes, a delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time period has elapsed and there is
no status signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary inputs
will be signaled.
3.37.5.2 Switch Truck

For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is
possible to configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. If
such a configuration has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the
associated switchgear unit is set to “Open” while the input has a logic value of
“1”.
3.37.6 Functional Sequence for Controllable Switchgear Units
3.37.6.1 Local or Remote Control of External Devices

Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. The
selection of the control point is described in Section 3.4.6, (p. 3-17). Usually,
remote control is carried out via the communication interface, local control via
the keys on the local control panel. Moreover, switchgear units can be controlled
via binary inputs configured appropriately (configuration via
D EV01: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.ope n or DEV01: In p.a sg.el.ct r.close). The setting
MAIN : Electrical control determines whether the inputs function as remote or
local control points.
Dependent on the respective position of control the P638 will issue the following
logic state signals:
● MA IN : C md. fr. comm.i nt e rf, or
● MA IN : C omm and f rom H MI, or
● MA IN : Cmd. fr. ele ctr.ctrl
Additionally the following state signals are issued and entered into the operating
data memory:
● D EV01: Open cm d. recei ved
● D EV01: C lose cmd. recei ved
The operating mode of the control point is signaled as follows:
“Remote” “Local” “Remote & Local”

L OC: Rem.acc.block.active No Yes No
L OC: Loc.acc.bl ock. active Yes No No
3-236 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.37.6.2 Selection of the Switchgear Unit to be Controlled and Generating a

Switching Request
LOC:
Loc.acc.block.active
[ 221 005 ]
LOC:
Return t. illum. trg
305 550
LOC:
305 551
MAIN:
Interlock equ. viol.
[ 221 018 ]
DEV01
DEV01:
Open request
307 000
DEV01:
Close request
307 001
MAIN:
Electrical control
[ 221 061 ]
2: Local
1: Remote
LOC:
[ 221 004 ]
DEV01:
Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open
[ 210 019 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signal
DEV01:
Inp.asg.el.ctr.close
[ 210 020 ]
Selected signal
COMM1:
Open command DEV01
[ --- --- ]
COMM1:
Close command DEV01
[ --- --- ]
DEV01:
Latching time
[ 210 005 ]
DEV01:
End open command
307 002
DEV01:
End close command
307 003
MAIN:
Direct motor control
306 029
DEV01:
Latching time elaps.
MAIN:
307 012
End command
306 028
DEV01:
Latching time runn.
COMM1:
Motor rel. mon. trg. 307 011
[ --- --- ]
19Z50AAA
Fig. 3-186: Generating a switching request.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-237

P638 3 Operation
The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected and the switching command is

sent to this selected switchgear unit. This can be carried out via the local control
panel using the selection key and pressing the “Open” or “Close” key to
generate the switching request. For control via binary inputs, the appropriate
control inputs need to be configured for switchgear units selected to be
controlled. For control via the communication interface, the control commands
“Open” or “Close” will also address the switchgear unit to be controlled.
3.37.6.3 Enabling Switching Commands
DEV01:
Open request
DEV01:
Close request
DEV01:
Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op
[ 210 041 ]
ILOCK:
Output 01
[ 250 032 ]
⋮
ILOCK:
Output 32
[ 250 063 ] & DEV01:
ILOCK: Enable BI open
Output 01 & ≥1
MAIN:
Bay interlock. act. &
DEV01:
[ 221 001 ] Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl
[ 210 042 ] & ≥1 DEV01:
Open cmd. rejection
MAIN:
Subst. interl. act. ≥1
[ 221 000 ]
MAIN:
Communication error
[ 221 019 ] & DEV01:
ILOCK: Enable BI close
Output 02 & ≥1
DEV01:
Open w/o stat.interl ≥1
[ 210 025 ]
&
↗ 1: Yes & ≥1 DEV01:
DEV01:
Close w/o stat. int. ≥1
[ 210 026 ]
&
↗ 1: Yes DEV01:
Fct.assig.BIwSI open
[ 210 039 ]
ILOCK:
Output 03 &
DEV01:
Fct.assig.BIwSI clos
[ 210 040 ]
ILOCK:
Output 04 &
&
&
DEV01:
Enable SI Open
DEV01:
Enable SI Close 19Z50AEB
Fig. 3-187: Assignment of the equations of the interlocking logic to the switching commands; enabling of switching
commands by the bay interlock function.
3-238 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
Before a switching command is executed, the P638 checks the interlocking

conditions defined in the interlocking logic to determine whether a switching
command is permitted or not. Bay interlock conditions for operation with or
without the station interlock function can be defined. The assignment of an
output relay from the interlocking logic to a switching command determines the
interlocking conditions that define, for example, the conditions for the “Open”
command for operation without the station interlock function.
3.37.6.4 Bay Interlock for Operation with the Station Interlock Function
MAIN:
Communication error
[ 221 019 ]
DEV01:
Close request
307 001
DEV01:
Open request
307 000
MAIN:
Bay interlock. act.
[ 221 001 ]
DEV01:
Enable BI open
307 004
DEV01:
Enable BI close
307 005 COMM1:
Open request DEV01
MAIN:
[ --- --- ]
Subst. interl. act.
[ 221 000 ]
DEV01:
Open w/o stat.interl
[ 210 025 ] DEV01:
Enable SI Open
307 019
0
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1: COMM1:
Enable SI open DEV01 Close request DEV01
[ --- --- ] [ --- --- ]
DEV01:
Close w/o stat. int.
[ 210 026 ]
DEV01:
Enable SI Close
307 020
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Enabl.SI close DEV01
[ --- --- ]
19Z50AFA
Fig. 3-188: Enabling of the switching commands by the station interlock.
For the station interlock function conditions to be interrogated, there needs to be

a communication link with the substation control level. If the P638 detects a
communication error or if there is no communication interface available, there
will be an automatic switch to bay interlock without the station interlock function.
If there is to be a check on the bay interlock and the station interlock function,
the bay interlock will be checked first. If bay interlocking issues a switching
enable, a switching request will be sent to the substation control level. At
substation control level, there will then be a check – taking into account the
station interlock functions – as to whether switching is permitted or not. If the
substation control level also issues an enabling command, the switching
operation is carried out provided that the enable from the bay interlock is still
present. Optionally, the “Open” or “Close” switching operation can be carried out
without checking the station interlock function conditions. In this case, the bay
interlock conditions defined for operation without station interlock functions will
be considered.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-239

P638 3 Operation
3.37.6.5 Linking Protection Commands to Switching Commands

For circuit breakers, the “Open” command can be linked to the protection trip
signals. The “Close” command can also be linked to the close command of the
protection functions. The Bay Panel type defines which of the switchgear units
are circuit breakers. The trip (open) or close commands of the protection
functions are executed directly without a check of the interlocking conditions.
DEV01:
With gen. trip cmd.1
[ 210 021 ]
MAIN:
DEVxx is a C.B.
306 044
0
DEV01:
1 Protection trip cmd.
307 013
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
M-trip command 1
[ 039 011 ]
DEV01:
With gen. trip cmd.2
[ 210 022 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
M-trip command 2
[ 039 058 ]
DEV01:
With close cmd./prot
[ 210 023 ]
1 DEV01:
Protect. close cmd.
307 014
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
48Z9357A
Fig. 3-189: Linking to the protection commands.
3-240 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.37.6.6 Issue of Switching Commands
DEV01:
Protection trip cmd.
DEV01:
Protect. close cmd.
↗ MAIN:
Cmd. dur.long cmd.
[ 221 230 ]
↗ MAIN:
Cmd. dur. short cmd.
[ 221 231 ]
DEV01:
Oper. mode cmd.
[ 210 024 ]
1 & 1
t
2
& 1
t
3
1: Long command
2: Short command
3: Time control
& 1
t
& 1
t DEV01:
MAIN: ≥1 Open command
Protection enabled [ 210 028 ]
&
[ 003 030 ]
DEV01:
↗ 0: No (= off) & ≥1 Close command
& [ 210 029 ]
MAIN:
Mon. mot. drives tr.
[ 221 056 ]
MAIN:
Enable control
[ 221 058 ]
MAIN:
Bay interlock. act. ≥1
[ 221 001 ]
&
DEV01:
Enable BI open
DEV01:
Enable SI Open
DEV01:
Open cmd blocked
DEV01:
Open request
&
≥1
&
DEV01:
Enable BI close
DEV01:
Enable SI Close
DEV01:
Close cmd blocked
DEV01:
Close request
63Z70AGB
Fig. 3-190: Issue of switching commands.
Dependent on the operating mode (set at D EV 0 1: Ope r. mode cmd.) set for
commands, switching commands are issued for the set timer durations or
according to time control.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-241

P638 3 Operation
3.37.6.6.1 Blocking of Switchgear Device Operation
DEV01: c
Function group DEV01
[ 210 047 ]
DEV01:
Block cmd open
[ 218 120 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
DEV01:
Open cmd blocked
Signal n 460 513
Selected signal
DEV01:
Block cmd close
[ 218 160 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
DEV01:
Close cmd blocked
Signal n 460 514
Selected signal
19Z8103A
Fig. 3-191: Blocking of switchgear device operation.
It is possible to generally block open and / or close commands to a switchgear

device. Setting parameters DEV 01: Bl ock cmd ope n and DEV0 1: Block
cm d close (and correspondent parameters for the other DEVxx) are available
for this purpose. Due to safety reasons the blocking inputs are effective only if no
command is active. During a switching operation the blocking is disabled to
secure that the switch will move always into a safe position.
To each of these setting parameters can be signals assigned; each of these
signals then activate the blocking of the switching command appropriate to this
setting parameter. In this case the signal MA IN: Inte rlock e qu. viol. is issued,
just like with a breach of the interlocking conditions.
3.37.6.6.2 External Termination Control

If the operating mode Time control was selected it is possible to intervene in the
control process of external switchgear units by using external termination
contacts. It will then be necessary to set the P638 at MAIN: W. e xt . cmd.
t ermin. to Yes and binary signal inputs must be configured so they can be
connected to the external termination contacts. The input configuration has to be
done for each device separately. Be aware that an external command
termination does not make sense for a fast switch as a circuit breaker, as its
operation is edge-controlled and involves no motor being directly time-controlled
(contrast to a disconnector drive).
3-242 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.37.6.7 Switch Truck

For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is
possible to configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. If
such a configuration has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the
associated switchgear unit is set to ‘Open’ while the input has a logic value of
“1”.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-243

P638 3 Operation
3.37.6.8 Time Control of Switching Commands
DEV01:
Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug
[ 210 014 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
⋮
Signal n
Without function ≥1
Selected signal
DEV01:
≥1 Switch. device open
DEV01:
Gr. assign. debounc. [ 210 036 ]
[ 210 011 ] & DEV01:
≥1 [ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
=1 1 Dev. interm./flt.pos
>S [ 210 038 ]
11 &
1
>R
Selected group >S &
11
◄ >R
1
≥1 DEV01:
End open command
c
≥1 DEV01:
◄ End close command
DEV01:
Open signal EXT Φ & >S
11
[ 210 030 ] Debouncing 1
>R
&
DEV01:
Closed signal EXT Chatter suppression DEV01:
[ 210 031 ] Op.time switch. dev.
[ 210 004 ]
◄ ◄
MAIN: t 0
Direct motor control & ≥1 ≥1
DEV01: &
Open command &
DEV01:
[ 210 028 ] Switch. device runn.
DEV01: &
Close command DEV01:
Stat.ind.interm.pos.
[ 210 029 ]
& [ 210 027 ]
DEV01:
Start runn.time mon.
& & ≥1
0 5s 0 &
&
1
0: No ◄
1: Yes
0
0⋯3 DEV01:
DEV01: Control state
StartCmdTime superv. [ 210 018 ]
0: Intermediate pos.
[ 210 007 ]
1: Open
2: Closed
19Z80AKB
t 0 3: Faulty position MAIN:

& Startcmdtime exceed.
& [ 221 112 ]
≥1
Fig. 3-192: Monitoring of switching commands.
After sending an Open / Close command, running time monitoring for the
switchgear unit is started.
The P638 expects that the switchgear unit has reached its intermediate position
within a period of time that can be configured via DEV01: StartCmdTime
superv . (for DEV01, respective setting parameters exist for the other DEVxx). If
3-244 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
the switchgear unit has not reached its intermediate position after this time has
elapsed then the command is deactivated and an exceeded timer is flagged by
the signal MA IN : Startcmdti me e xcee d.. In case of a switchgear unit for
which it is (almost) impossible to detect the intermediate position (for example a
Circuit Breaker) it is recommended to switch off this monitoring by setting the
parameter to Blocked.
Moreover, the P638 expects a status signal – “Open” or “Closed” to be issued by
the switchgear unit within the duration of running time monitoring. The status
signal for the position of the contacts on the switchgear unit is present at
appropriately configured binary inputs on the P638, which can be set to
debouncing and chatter suppression mode (see Section 3.40.1.1, (p. 3-260)). For
the duration of running time monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear
unit are back to a defined position – either “Open” or “Closed” – the signal
“Intermediate position” is issued.
If DEV01: Int erm. pos. s u ppr. is set to Yes, the previous switchgear unit
status will continue to be signaled to the communication interfaces while the
switchgear unit is operating. Once the contacts on the switchgear unit have
reached their new position, the updated status is signaled accordingly to the
communication interfaces. This parameter has no impact to internal signals, such
as DEV01: Swi tch. de vice ope n, DEV 01: Swit ch. device closed or
D EV01: Dev. int erm./flt.pos.
If the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached either their “Open” or
“Closed” position after the set time period for running time monitoring has
elapsed the signal Faulty position is issued. If DE V0 1: Stat .in d.in ter m. pos. is
set to Yes, a delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time period has elapsed and
there is no status signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary
inputs will be signaled.
If the operating mode without external termination contacts was selected
(MAIN : W. e xt. cmd. termi n.. is set to No) the switching command is
terminated after the set latching time has elapsed, when either the ‘Open’ or
‘Closed’ position status signal is received or the set time period for running time
monitoring has elapsed (see Fig. 3-186, (p. 3-237)).
If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected
(MAIN : W. e xt. cmd. termi n.. is set to Yes) the switching command is
terminated, after the set latching time has elapsed, when a termination
command is issued while the set time period for running time monitoring is
active.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-245

P638 3 Operation
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
3
1
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 037 ]
1 3 4
10 ms DEV01: DEV01:
Latching time Op.time switch. dev.
[ 210 005 ] [ 210 004 ]
19Z5201B
Fig. 3-193: Sequence for time control of switching commands without external termination control, example for
switching operation “close”.
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
DEV01:
3
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
Inp. asg. end Close
[ 210 016 ]
1 3
10 ms DEV01:
Latching time
[ 210 005 ]
19Z5202B
Fig. 3-194: Sequence for time control of switching commands with external termination control, example for
switching operation “close”.
3-246 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.37.6.9 Monitoring the Number of CB Operations Permitted

The maximum number of CB operations within an ARC cycle (or within a specific
time period) may be set with parameter MAIN: CB1 max . oper. cap.
Associated with this parameter is the counter at MA IN: CB1 act . ope r. cap. to
which the maximum number of CB operations permitted is assigned as soon as
the positive edge of an event is present that has been selected by a “1 out of n”
parameter at MAI N: CB1 ready f ct.ass ign.
The number of CB operations permitted, set with the counter at MA IN: CB1
act. oper. cap. are then decremented by 1 with each CB operation. Operation
of the CB is recognized from the contact position signals DE V0 1: Swit ch.
device open and DE V01 : Switch.de vice clos e d.
The counter at MAIN: CB1 act. oper. cap. may only be decremented to a
value of 1. Reaching a value of 1 will in no way effect the protection or control
functionality, in particular there will be no blocking of CB operation! When a CB
fault has occurred (i.e. MAI N: CB f aul ty 1 EXT is set to Yes) the counter
M AIN: CB1 act. oper. cap. is immediately set to 1.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-247

P638 3 Operation
3.37.7 Direct Motor Control
3.37.7.1 Monitoring the Motor Drives in Case of Direct Motor Control
DEV01: + MAIN:
Start runn.time mon. No. motor drive op.
307 008
R [ 221 025 ]
MAIN:
Perm.No.mot.drive op
MAIN: [ 221 027 ]
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute COMP
MAIN: n
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED MAIN:
306 020 n>No. permiss. oper. Mon. mot. drives tr.
[ 221 056 ]
n=1
MAIN:
Mon.time mot.drives
[ 221 026 ]
MAIN:
Cool.time mot.drives t
[ 221 028 ]
19Z6417A
Fig. 3-195: Monitoring the Motor Drives in Case of Direct Motor Control.
For bays with direct motor drive control of load disconnecting switches, isolating
links or grounding switches, a monitoring function is provided to protect motors
from overheating.
The number of switching operations within a set monitoring period is counted. If
the number of switching operations within the monitoring period exceeds the set
limit, the signal MAI N: Mon. mot. drive s tr . is issued. For the duration of the
set cooling time, no control commands to motor-driven switchgear units will be
executed. Once the set cooling time has elapsed, the control commands are
enabled again.
3.37.7.2 Counter for the Open / Close Commands
DEV01:
Operation counter
[ 210 043 ]
DEV01:
m CT=m Operation counter
[ 210 043 ]
DEV01:
Open command
[ 210 028 ] ≥1 +
DEV01:
Oper.count.limit
R
DEV01: [ 218 211 ]
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
COMP
[ 003 002 ] 1 ≥1 DEV01:
1: execute Warning op.count.
[ 219 081 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
19Z8104A
Fig. 3-196: Counter for the Open / Close Commands.
3-248 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
The diagram above shows the example of function group DEV01. The logic,
however, is valid for all DEVxx with the appropriate parameters.
All Open and Close commands to the switchgear unit are counted. One counter
per DEVxx function group is available for this purpose.
Moreover, a limit value can optionally be set for the counter value. If the counter
value reaches the set limit a warning signal is issued. Due to safety reasons the
switchgear control will not be blocked when the set limit has been reached.
3.37.7.3 Time Control for Direct Motor Control

The control sequence described above applies to all switchgear units operated
via an “Open” contact or a “Close” contact. For bays with direct motor control of
load disconnecting switches, isolating links or grounding switches, the following
modified control sequence described below applies to motor-operated switchgear
units. The list of Bay Panel types shows which bay types are defined for direct
motor control. An example for the connection of a bay with direct motor control
is illustrated in Chapter “Installation and Connection”.
If a Bay Panel type with direct motor control is selected, a binary input for the
status signal of the motor relay and one output relay each to trigger the motor
relay and the shunt windings will have to be configured. In the example
illustrated in Fig. 3-197, (p. 3-250), the single-pole command
CMD _1: C omman d C012 is defined for control of the motor relay, the single-
pole command C MD_1: Command C0 11 is defined for control of the shunt
windings and the single-pole signal SIG_1: Si gnal S0 12 E XT (debounced and
conditioned by chatter suppression) is defined for the status signal to the motor
relay.
After triggering the motor relay, a set monitoring time period is started during
which the status signal must be issued by the motor relay. If the status signal is
not received during this time period a signal is transferred to the substation
control level.
The P638 issues the following signals (depending on the type of fault) when the
monitoring time delay has expired:
● (221 110) MAIN: DE V op.ti me e xce e de d – This fault signal is issued (as
a group signal) when no positive position signal (status signal) has been
received from the external device after a command has been issued and
the set running time-delay has elapsed.
For further processing each of these fault signals may be configured to selection
parameters from the function groups LED (assignment to LED indicators), OUTP
(assignment to output relays), LOGIC (processing by the programmable logic
function), COMMx / IEC / GOOSE (signaling via the control system) or they may be
mapped to the signal panel as an alarm signal. Acknowledging from the local
control panel HMI is done by pressing the CLEAR (C) key.
If the status signal from the motor relay is issued during the monitoring time
period, the running time monitoring of the motor relay is started simultaneously
with this status signal. Monitoring of the switching command is then the same as
with electromechanically operated switchgear units.
If the operating mode without external termination contacts was selected the
“Close” command to the motor relay is terminated after the set latching time has
elapsed, when either the “Open” or “Closed” position status signal is received or
the set time period for running time monitoring has elapsed (see Fig. 3-186,
(p. 3-237)). The monitoring time period is again started with the termination of
the “Close” command to the motor relay and after it has elapsed the control
commands “Open” or “Close” are also terminated. The same is valid for the
shunt windings.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-249

P638 3 Operation
If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected

(MAIN : W. e xt. cmd. termi n. is set to Yes) the switching command to the
motor relay is terminated after the set latching time has elapsed, when a
termination command is issued while the set time period for running time
monitoring is active. The switching command to the motor relay is always
terminated after the set latching time has elapsed. The monitoring time period is
again started with the termination of the “Close” command to the motor relay
and after it has elapsed the control commands “Open” or “Close” are also
terminated.
MAIN:
Protection enabled
[ 003 030 ]
0: No (= off)
MAIN:
W. ext. cmd. termin.
[ 221 063 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DEV01:
Switch. device runn.
307 010
DEV01:
Latching time runn.
307 011
DEV01:
Inp. asg. end Open
[ 210 015 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
&
Signal n
Selected signal
DEV01:
Inp. asg. end Close
[ 210 016 ]
Selected signal
MAIN:
Direct motor control
306 029
DEV01: & CMD_1:

Open command Command C012
[ 210 028 ] [ 200 056 ]
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
& & CMD_1:
Command C011
[ 200 051 ]
DEV01:
Latching time elaps.
307 012
MAIN:
Mon.time Dir.Contr.
[ 221 060 ]
COMM1:
& Motor rel. mon. trg.
SIG_1: Debouncing [ --- --- ]
Signal S012 EXT
[ 226 092 ] &
MAIN:
Chatter suppression & End command
306 028
DEV01:
& Start runn.time mon.
307 008
SIG_1:
Logic signal S012
[ 226 093 ]
48Z9358A
Fig. 3-197: Control and monitoring of the motor relay.
3-250 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
CMD_1:
Command C011
[ 200 051 ]
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
CMD_1:
Command C012
[ 200 056 ]
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 037 ]
10 ms MAIN: DEV01: DEV01:

Mon.time Dir.Contr. Latching time Op.time switch. dev.
[ 221 060 ] [ 210 005 ] [ 210 004 ]
19Z5203C
Fig. 3-198: Sequence of time monitoring for direct motor control without external termination.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-251

P638 3 Operation
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
CMD_1:
Command C012
[ 200 056 ]
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
Inp. asg. end Close
[ 210 016 ]
10 ms MAIN: DEV01:
Mon.time Dir.Contr. Latching time
[ 221 060 ] [ 210 005 ]
19Z5204C
Fig. 3-199: Sequence of time monitoring for direct motor control with external termination.
3-252 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.38 Interlocking Logic (Function Group ILOCK)

The switching commands to the controllable switchgear units in the bay are
enabled only after interlock conditions have been checked. The interlock
conditions are defined in the form of Boolean equations in the interlocking logic
function.
The choice of the bay type automatically defines the bay interlock conditions (or
equations) for the ‘Open’ and ‘Close’ operations of the individual switchgear units
in the bay. The bay interlock equations for operation with station interlock differ
from the bay interlock equations for operation without station interlock. These
automatically defined interlock conditions – determined by the choice of bay type
– can be modified by the user at any time to fit particular station requirements.
The following signals acquired by the P638 are linked by logic operations for the
bay interlock:
● Function blocks 1 and 2
● Programmable logic outputs
● Switchgear position signals, after debouncing and chatter suppression
● Single-pole signals, after debouncing and chatter suppression
A maximum of 32 equations with 32 equation elements each are available to
define interlock conditions. The Boolean equations need to be defined without
the use of brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: “NOT” before
“AND” before “OR”. The output signal of one equation can be fed into a higher-
order equation as an input thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean
equations.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-253

P638 3 Operation
ILOCK:
Fct.assignm. outp. 1
[ 250 000 ]
MAIN:
Fct. block. 1 active
[ 221 015 ]
MAIN:
Fct. block. 2 active
[ 221 023 ]
MAIN:
DEV op.time exceeded
[ 221 110 ]
LOGIC:
Output 01
[ 042 032 ]
LOGIC:
Output 01 (t)
[ 042 033 ]
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
Dev. interm./flt.pos
[ 210 038 ]
SIG_1:
Logic signal S001
[ 226 005 ]
GOOSE:
Ext.Dev01 closed
[ 109 002 ]
GOOSE:
Ext.Dev01 interm.pos
[ 109 003 ]
ILOCK:
Output 01
[ 250 032 ]
& ≥1
ILOCK:
Output 01
[ 250 032 ]
48Z9359A
Fig. 3-200: Interlocking logic as illustrated for equation 1.
3.38.1 IEC 61850 Reporting

As the interlock conditions are also transmitted together with reporting in the
IEC 61850 communication protocol it is a requirement that these interlock
conditions are cyclically checked and not only with the request for a switching
operation.
Therefore the parameter (221 104) I LOCK: Cycle t inter l.check allows for
setting the cycle time (range from 100 ms to 10 s), after which a check of the
interlock conditions is carried out. If this parameter is set to blocked (default
value), the ILOCK signals over IEC 61850 will be updated only if a control
command gets executed. If the DEV state changes without a control command
these signals remain unchanged. As additional processor capacity must be
provided for each of these checks it must be ensured that a favorable
compromise is found for the cycle time setting value. On the one hand it is
desirable to select a cycle time value which is as short as possible so that
changes in the interlock conditions are updated without any notable delays, but
on the other hand this cycle time value should not be so short that the P638
system will be under too much strain. As the P638 CPU load is dependent on the
3-254 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
total number of function groups having been configured it is not possible to

suggest a generally acceptable cycle time value.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-255

P638 3 Operation
3.39 Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1)

Commands may be transmitted to the P638 via the communications interface.
When the P638 receives such a command, and if the remote control mode is
enabled, an appropriately configured output relay will be triggered and a signal
issued.
The user can select the operating mode for each 1-pole command. The following
settings are possible:
● Long command
● Short command
● Persistent command
If the operating mode Long command or Short command has been selected the
output relay will be triggered for the time period set at MAIN: Cmd. dur. long
cmd. or MA IN : Cmd . dur. s h ort cmd..
The setting options and the functional sequence are shown in the example for
Command C001. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole commands.
MAIN:
Cmd. dur.long cmd. OUTP:
[ 221 230 ] Fct.assignment K xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
MAIN:
Cmd. dur. short cmd.
[ 221 231 ]
K x1
CMD_1: CMD_1:
Command C001 config. Oper. mode cmd. C001 K x2 -K xxx
[ 200 004 ] [ 200 002 ]
K x3
K xx
0 1
1 2 Address 200 001 &
0: No 3
1: Yes
1: Long command
2: Short command
3: Persistent command
CMD_1:
& 1 ≥1 Command C001
& t [ 200 001 ]
COMM1:
Command C001
[ - - - - - - ]
LOC:
[ 221 004 ]
& 1
t
&
19Z50ALB
Fig. 3-201: Functional sequence for single-pole commands, as illustrated for Command C001.
3-256 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.40 Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1)

Binary, single-pole signals issued by the system may be transmitted by the P638
via its appropriately configured binary signal inputs to the control station.
Such single-pole input signals are conditioned by debouncing and chatter
suppression (see Section 3.40.1.1, (p. 3-260)). This conditioned signal is then
presented as SI G_1: L ogi c s ign al S00 1 (to SIG_1: L ogic s ignal S012).
Signaling behavior via the communications interface is determined by selecting
the operating mode. The following settings are possible:
● Without function
● Start/end signal
● Transient signal
If setting Without function has been selected then no message is transmitted
when the signal state at the binary signal input changes. If setting Start/end
signal has been selected then a message is transmitted every time the signal
state at the binary signal input changes. A requirement for transmission of the
“Start signal” message is that the logic “1” signal is present for the set minimum
time period. If setting Transient signal has been selected then a message is
transmitted every time the signal state at the binary signal input changes form
logic “0” to logic “1”.
The following figure displays setting modes and the functional sequence with the
example for logic signal S001. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole
signals.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-257

P638 3 Operation
SIG_1: SIG_1:
Signal S001 config. Gr.asg. debounc.S001
[ 226 007 ] [ 226 003 ]
0: No Selected group
1: Yes
Debouncing SIG_1:
Logic signal S001
SIG_1: [ 226 005 ]
Signal S001 EXT
[ 226 004 ]
Chatter suppression
SIG_1:
Min. sig. dur. S001
[ 226 002 ]
COMM1:
Signal S001,log
[ --- ---]
SIG_1:
Oper. mode sig. S001
[ 226 001 ]
0: Without function
1: Start/end signal
2: Transient signal
19Z50AMA
Fig. 3-202: Functional sequence for single-pole signals with the example for logic signal S001.
3-258 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.40.1 Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control
SIG_1:
Gr.asg. debounc.S001
[ 226 003 ]
1: Group 1
2: Group 2
3: Group 3
4: Group 4
5: Group 5
6: Group 6
7: Group 7
8: Group 8
SIG_1:
Signal S001 EXT
[ 226 004 ]
DEV01:
Gr. assign. debounc.
[ 210 011 ]
8 MAIN:
Debounce time gr. 1
1: Group 1 [ 221 200 ]
2: Group 2 MAIN:
Chatt.mon. time gr.1
3: Group 3
[ 221 201 ]
4: Group 4
MAIN:
5: Group 5 Change of state gr.1
6: Group 6 [ 221 202 ]
7: Group 7
8: Group 8
Debouncing
&
COMM1:
DEV01: Chatter suppression Debounced signal
Closed signal EXT 304 400
[ 210 031 ] Group 1
DEV01:
Open signal EXT
[ 210 030 ]
19Z5067B
Fig. 3-203: Group assignment and setting of debouncing and chatter suppression, illustrated for group 1.
In the acquisition of signals for control purposes, the functions real time
acquisition (time tagging), debouncing and chatter suppression are included as
standard. Each of these signals can be assigned to one of eight groups and for
each of these groups the debouncing time and chatter suppression can be set.
Matching of these two parameters achieves the suppression of multiple spurious
pickups.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-259

P638 3 Operation
3.40.1.1 Debouncing and Chatter Suppression
3.40.1.1.1 Debouncing
Telegram with
time tag 1s 2e
Signal sequence
time tag
F0Z5011B
Fig. 3-204: Signal flow with debouncing when time tagging occurs with the 1st pulse edge (e.g. parameter
M A I N : T i m e t a g set to the value 1stEdge,OpMem unsort or 1stEdge,OpMem sorted.) Example: Set debouncing
time: 50 ms, s: start, e: end.
The first pulse edge of a signal starts a timer stage running for the duration of
the set debouncing time. Each pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers
the timer stage.
If the signal is stable until the set debouncing time elapses, a telegram
containing the time tag of the first pulse edge is generated. As an alternative the
time tag may be generated after debouncing by setting parameter MAIN: Time
ta g to the value After debounce time.
After the set debouncing time has elapsed, the state of the signal is checked. If it
is the same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge, no telegram is
generated.
Time-tagged entries of the first pulse edge are only generated after debounce
time has elapsed. If these entries are saved without delay (setting of
MAI N: Time tag to the value 1stEdge,OpMem unsort) they are not necessarily
saved in chronological order in the operating data memory. If above parameter
has been set to the value 1stEdge,OpMem sorted then all entries are always
saved in chronological order in the operating data memory.
Time Tag
The following overview illustrates how the (221 098) MAIN: Time tag setting is
operating.
3-260 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
Acquisition of binary signals for control

1) 1)
0 T1 T2
Voltage present at input terminals:

Filter function to suppress transient interferences (required number of steps with
active signal) [F]
3)
(226 004) SIG_1 : Si gn al S001 EXT
}
(no time tag, internal signal to start debouncing)2)
1stEdge,OpMem sorted:
(226 005) S IG_1 : L ogic signal S0 01
● on COMM1/IEC T L
(Signaling at T2 with time tag T1

T=L
● internal on operating memory
(Entry in operating memory at T2 with time tag T2
1stEdge,OpMem unsort:
(226 005) SIG_1: Logic signal S001
● on COMM1/IEC T L

T L
After debounce time:

(226 005) SIG_1: Logic signal S001
● on COMM1/IEC T=L
T=L
T = Time tag
L = Log of state
1) T2 = T1 (cycle time) + debounce time

2) SIG_1: Signal S00 1 EXT is not foreseen for any further transmission via communication
interface, neither for assigning to functions nor LOGIC.
3) Filter (e. g. 3 sampling steps)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-261

P638 3 Operation
3.40.1.1.2 Chatter Suppression
Telegram with
time tag 1s 2e 3s 4e
Signal sequence
20ms 200ms
20ms 200ms
20ms 200ms
200ms
time tag
Debouncing
F0Z5012A
Fig. 3-205: Signal flow for debouncing and chatter suppression. Set debouncing time: 20 ms, set chatter monitoring
time: 200 ms, number of admissible signal changes: 4, s: start, e: end.
Sending of the first telegram starts a timer stage running for the duration of the
set monitoring time. While the timer stage is elapsing, telegrams are generated
for the admissible signal changes. The number of admissible signal changes can
be set. After the first “inadmissible” signal change, no further telegrams are
generated and the timer stage is re-triggered. While the timer stage is elapsing,
it is re-triggered by each new signal change. Once the timer stage has elapsed,
each signal change triggers a telegram.
3-262 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3 Operation P638
3.41 Binary Counts (Function Group COUNT)

The P638 features four binary counters. Each of these can count the positive
pulse edges of a binary signal present at an appropriately configured binary
signal input. Such a binary signal can be provided with debouncing.
3.41.1 Enable/Disable the Counting Function

The counting function (COUNT) can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters.
3.41.2 Debouncing
Count
Signal sequence
50ms
19Z50APA
Fig. 3-206: Debouncing signal flow. Set debouncing time: 50 ms.
The first positive pulse edge of the binary input signal to be counted will trigger a
timer stage which will continue to run for the set debouncing time period. Each
positive pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers the timer stage. The
binary input signal will be counted if it is stable during the set debouncing time
period.
The debouncing time can be set separately for each of the four counters.
After the set debouncing time has elapsed, the state of the signal is checked. If it
is the same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge, it will not be
counted.
3.41.3 Counting Function

The debounced binary signal is counted by a 16 bit counter. The counters may
be set to a specific count value (preload function) by setting a parameter or via
the serial interfaces. The values of the counters can be shown on the LC-display
and read out via the PC interface or the communications interface.
For each of the four counters, there is a limit value that can be optionally set:
● COUN T: Lim it coun te r 1 (and the same way for counters 2 to 4),
● settable from 1 to 65000,
● setting “Blocked” disables the limit check. (This setting is the default
value.)
A warning signal (COU NT: Warn in g cou n t 1 and the same way for counters 2
to 4) is issued if the associated counter value exceeds the set limit.
3.41.4 Transmitting the Counter Values via Communications Interface

The counter values are transmitted via the communications interface when a
signal is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input, a trigger
signal is issued by a setting parameter or at cyclic intervals as set at the cycle
time stage C OUN T: Cycle t .count trans m. When the counter value is
transmitted at cyclic intervals, then transmission is time synchronized if the ratio
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3-263

P638 3 Operation
60/(set cycle time) comes to an integer. In all other cases the counter values are
transmitted at time intervals determined by a free running internal clock.
3.41.5 Counter Values Reset
COUNT:
General enable USER
[ 217 000 ]
0
COUNT:
1 Enabled
0: No [ 217 001 ]
MAIN: 1: Yes
Protection enabled COUNT:
[ 003 030 ] Count 1
1: Yes (= on) [ 217 100 ]
COUNT: COUNT:
Debounce t. count. 1 m CT=m Count 1
[ 217 160 ] [ 217 100 ]
+
COUNT: Debouncing
Set counter 1 EXT
R
[ 217 130 ]
COUNT:
Transmit counts USER
[ 217 008 ]
0
COUNT:
1 Transmit counts
[ 217 010 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
C
COUNT:
Transmit counts EXT
[ 217 009 ]
COUNT:
Cycle t.count transm
C
[ 217 007 ] COMM1:
Count 1
[ --- --- ]
G
COUNT:
Reset USER
[ 217 003 ]
= 0 min
0
COUNT:
1 Reset
[ 217 005 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
COUNT:
Reset EXT
[ 217 004 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ] 1
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
19Z82ANA
Fig. 3-207: Binary Count. (This diagram shows counter 1 as an example. The displayed logic is also valid for
counters 2 to 4, where C O U N T : S e t c o u n t e r 1 E X T and C O U N T : C o u n t 1 have to be replaced by the
respective parameters.
The counter values may be reset – all at once – by setting parameter

CO UN T: Reset USER or via an appropriately configured binary signal input as
well as by the general reset action.
3-264 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
4 Design
The P638 is available in different types of cases and with different combinations
of modules.
The P638 is equipped with a fixed local control panel. The local control panel is
covered with a tough film so that the specified degree of IP protection will be
maintained. In addition to the essential control and display elements, a parallel
display consisting of multi-colored LED indicators is also incorporated (see
Section 6.2, (p. 6-2)). The meaning of the various LED indications is shown in
plain text on a label strip.
The PC interface (9-pin D-Sub female connector) is located under the hinged
cover at the bottom of the local control panel.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 4-1

P638 4 Design
4.1 Designs
The P638 is available in a surface-mounted and a flush-mounted case. Depending
on the connection type – pin-terminal or ring-terminal connection – the case sizes
differ. The location diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-27)) show the available
combinations of case widths and connection types.
Electrical connections are made via plug-in threaded terminal blocks. The
threaded terminal blocks in the surface-mounted case are accessible from the
front of the device after unscrewing the torx head steal screws on the sides (see
Fig. 4-1, (p. 4-3), ➀) and removing the local control panel. The local control
panel can then be secured by inserting the tabs in the slots in the left side wall
(see Fig. 4-1, (p. 4-3), ➁). The flush-mounted case is connected at the back of
the case.
WARNING
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
⚫ The local control panel (or front element) is connected to processor
module P by a plug-in connecting cable. Make sure the connector position
is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable!
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage
or unintended equipment operation.
DANGER
⚫ Do not open the secondary circuit of live system current transformers! If
the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the
resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.
⚫ For pin-terminal connection devices, the terminal block for system current
transformer connection is not a shorting block! Therefore always short-
circuit the system current transformers before loosening the threaded
terminals.
injury.
4-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

4 Design P638
Fig. 4-1: Surface-mounted case, removal of local control panel . The illustration shows the 84TE case with fixed
local control panel.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 4-3

P638 4 Design
4.2 Dimensional Drawings
4.2.1 Dimensional Drawings for the 40 TE Case
147.5
177.5
184.5
213.4 257.1
242.6
260.2
Fig. 4-2: Surface-mounted 40 TE case. (Dimensions in mm.)

177.5
227.9
213.4 253.6
203.0
155.4
159.0
168.0
5.0
5.0
181.3
Fig. 4-3: Flush-mounted case 40 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets).
(Dimensions in mm.)
4-4 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

4 Design P638
101.6
177.5
213.4 227.9
242.6 253.6
260.2
6.4
186.5
101.6
224.5
242.6
Fig. 4-4: Flush-mounted case 40 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame).
(Dimensions in mm.)
The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with

angle brackets and frame) is used for the flush-mounted case.
4.2.2 Dimensional Drawings for the 84 TE Case

147.5
177.5
184.5
434.8 257.1
464.0
481.6
Fig. 4-5: Surface-mounted 84 TE case. (Dimensions in mm.)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 4-5

P638 4 Design
177.5
227.9
434.8 253.6
284.9
259.0
25.9
159.0
168.0
5.0
5.0
410.0
Fig. 4-6: Flush-mounted case 84 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets).
(Dimensions in mm.)
101.6
177.5
434.8 227.9
253.6
464.0
481.6
6.4
186.5
101.6
445.9
464.0
Fig. 4-7: Flush-mounted case 84 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame).
(Dimensions in mm.)
The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with

angle brackets and frame) is used for the flush-mounted case.
4-6 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

4 Design P638
4.3 Hardware Modules

The P638 is constructed from standard hardware modules. The following table
gives an overview of the modules relevant for the P638.
Key:
● ●: standard equipment,
● ○: optional,
● ☐: depending on order,
● *: Module is not depicted in the terminal connection diagrams (Section 5.7,
(p. 5-27)).
● →xx: Module has to be fitted into slot number xx.
● 1st→xx, 2nd→yy [etc.]: If several modules of the same type may be ordered,
these must be fitted into the appropriate slots in a particular order: If only
one has been ordered it must be fitted into slot xx (i. e. slot yy is not
permitted). If two modules have been ordered these must be fitted into
slots xx and yy, etc.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 4-7

P638 4 Design
Item Number Description Type Width P638 P638 P638

‑407 ‑408 ‑409
9650356 A ff Serial communication module A(CH1 CH2) 4TE ○ ○ ○

(for RS 485 wire connection) →02 →02 →02
9650355 A ff Serial communication module

(for plastic fiber)
9650354 A ff Serial communication module

(for glass fiber, ST connector)
9652162 A ff Single IP Ethernet module A(SEB LC) 4TE ○ ○ ○

(100 Mbit/s, glass fiber LC connector, →02 →02 →02
2nd wire RJ45)
9652161 A ff Single IP Ethernet module A(SEB RJ45)

(100 Mbit/s, wire RJ45)
9652160 A ff Redundant IP Ethernet module A(REB LC)

(100 Mbit/s, glass fiber LC connector,
PRP/HSR/RSTP switchable, 2nd wire
RJ45)
9652159 A ff Redundant IP Ethernet module A(REB RJ45)

(100 Mbit/s, wire RJ45, PRP/HSR/RSTP
switchable, 2nd wire RJ45)
0336187 D ff * Bus module (digital, for 40 TE device) B ●
0336188 C ff * Bus module (digital, for 84 TE device) B ● ●
0336421 B ff * Bus module (analog) B ● ● ●
9651473 Local control module (text HMI, L ☐ ☐ ☐

European font)
9650319 Local control module L ☐

(graphical HMI, 40 TE)
9650257 Local control module L ☐ ☐

(graphical HMI, 84 TE)
9652190 E ff * Processor Unit P 4TE ☐ ☐ ☐

(Railway comp. Ethernet Board 2) →01 →01 →01
(Pre-Assembled)
9652191 E ff * Processor Unit

(Railway without communication
module)

(Railway with serial communication
modules)
4-8 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

4 Design P638

‑407 ‑408 ‑409

(Railway with Ethernet board 2)
9650333 A ff Transformer module 5 × 1/5 A, T 8TE ☐ ☐ ☐

1 × 100 V, 4 × Freq →04 →04 →04
(Pin connection)
9650334 A ff Transformer module 5 × 1/5 A,

1 × 100 V, 4 × Freq
(Ring connection)
9651534 B ff Power supply module 24 – 60 V DC, V(4I 8O) 4TE ☐ ☐ ☐

standard variant →09 →20 →20
(switching threshold 18 V)
9651536 B ff Power supply module 24 – 60 V DC,

switching threshold 73 V



9651544 B ff Power supply module 60 – 250 V DC / V(4I 8O) 4TE ☐ ☐ ☐

100 – 230 V AC, Standard variant →09 →20 →20
with switching threshold at 65% of 24
VDC (VA,min)
9651546 B ff Power supply module 60 – 250 V DC /

100 – 230 V AC, Special variant with
switching threshold at 65% of 110
VDC (VA,nom)

VDC (VA,nom)

VDC (VA,nom)

VDC (VA,nom)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 4-9

P638 4 Design

‑407 ‑408 ‑409
0337612 A ff Binary I/O module X(24I) 4TE ○ ○ ○

(24 binary inputs), Standard variant 1st→0 1st→1 1st→
with switching threshold at 65% of 24 8 6 16
VDC (VA,min)
2nd→ 2nd→ 2nd→
03 03 03
9651304 A ff Binary I/O module
(24 binary inputs), Special variant
with switching threshold at 65% of
110 VDC (VA,nom)

127 VDC (VA,nom)

220 VDC (VA,nom)

250 VDC (VA,nom)
9651493 B ff Binary module (4 high-break X(4H) 4TE ○→1 ○→1 ○→1

contacts) 0 8 8
9651512 B ff Binary I/O module X(6I 3O) 4TE ○ ○ ○

(6 binary inputs, 3 output relays), →10 →18 →18
Standard variant with switching
threshold at 65% of 24 VDC (VA,min)
9651513 B ff Binary I/O module

(6 binary inputs, 3 output relays),
Special variant with switching
threshold at 65% of 110 VDC
(VA,nom)

(VA,nom)

(VA,nom)
4-10 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

4 Design P638

‑407 ‑408 ‑409

(VA,nom)
0337377 E ff Binary I/O module X(6I 6O) 4TE ○ ○ ○

(6 binary inputs, 6 output relays), 1st→0 1st→1 1st→
Standard variant with switching 6 2 12
07 14 14
(VA,nom)

(VA,nom)

(VA,nom)

(VA,nom)
000336971 D ff Binary I/O module X(6I 8O) 4TE ○ ○ ○

(6 binary inputs, 8 output relays), 1st→0 1st→1 1st→
Standard variant with switching 6 0 10
07 12 12
(6 binary inputs, 8 output relays), 3rd→ 3rd→
Special variant with switching 14 14
threshold at 65% of 110 VDC 4th→ 4th→
(VA,nom) 16 16

(VA,nom)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 4-11

P638 4 Design

‑407 ‑408 ‑409

(VA,nom)

(VA,nom)
0336973 B/D ff Binary module (6 output relays) X(6O) 4TE ○ ○ ○

→10 →18 →18
0337406 D ff Analog I/O module, standard variant Y(4I) 4TE ○ ○ ○

(switching threshold 18 V) →08 →08 →08
9651307 A ff Analog I/O module, switching

threshold 73 V

threshold 90 V

threshold 146 V

threshold 155 V
The space available for the modules measures 4 HE in height by 40 TE or 84 TE

in width (HE = 44.45 mm, TE = 5.08 mm).
The location of the individual modules and the position of the threaded terminal
blocks in the P638 are shown in the location figures and terminal connection
diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-27)).
4-12 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
5 Installation and Connection
DANGER
⚫ When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltage will be
present in certain parts of the equipment.
injury.
DANGER
area.
in operation.
must be employed.
injury.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 5-1

P638 5 Installation and Connection
WARNING
HAZARD OF UNSAFE OPERATION
⚫ The user should be familiar with the warnings in the Safety Guide
(SFTY/5LM/L11 or later version) before working on the equipment.
⚫ The user should be familiar with the safety messages in Chapter 5,
Chapter 10, Chapter 11 and Chapter 12 and with the content of Chapter 13
of this technical manual, before working on the equipment.
⚫ Any modifications to this device must be in accordance with the manual. If
any other modification is made without the express permission of
Schneider Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the
product unsafe.
The signals MAI N: Bl ocked/faulty and SFMON: War ning (LED) are
permanently assigned to the LEDs labeled OUT OF SERVICE and ALARM and can
be assigned to output relays to indicate the health of the device.
It is recommended that the signals MA IN: Blocke d/faulty and
SFMON : Wa rning ( LED) are communicated to the substation automation
system for alarm purposes, using hardwiring via output relays or the
WARNING
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE OR LIFETIME REDUCTION
⚫ The instructions given in the Section 5.5, (p. 5-14) (“Protective and
Operational Grounding”) should be noted. In particular, check that the
protective ground connection is secured with a tooth lock washer, as per
the diagram “Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal” (Fig.
5-8. (p. 5-15)).
⚫ If a cable screen is added to this connection or removed from it, then the
protective grounding should be checked again.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury
or equipment damage.
5-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

5 Installation and Connection P638
WARNING
⚫ Do not sustain exposure to high humidity during storage, the value shall
not exceed 75 % relative humidity.
⚫ Once the device has been unpacked, it is recommended to energize it
within the three following months.
⚫ The device has to be energized at least once in 4 years, if it is not in
permanent operation.
⚫ Where electrical equipment is being installed, sufficient time should be
allowed for acclimatization to the ambient temperature of the environment
before energization.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage,
unintended equipment operation or reduction of equipment lifetime.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 5-3

5.1 Unpacking and Packing

All P638 devices are packaged separately into dedicated cartons and shipped
with outer packaging. Our products leave our factory in closed, sealed original
packaging. If at receipt of the delivery the transport packaging is open or the
seal is broken, the confidentiality and authenticity of the information contained in
the products cannot be ensured.
Use special care when opening cartons and unpacking devices, and do not use
force. In addition, make sure to remove supporting documents and the type
identification label supplied with each individual device from the inside carton.
The design revision level of each module included in the device when shipped
can be determined from the list of components (assembly list). This list of
components should be filed carefully.
After unpacking, each device should be inspected visually to confirm it is in
proper mechanical condition.
If the P638 needs to be shipped, both inner and outer packaging must be used. If
the original packaging is no longer available, make sure that packaging conforms
to DIN ISO 2248 specifications for a drop height ≤ 0.8 m.
5-4 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

5.2 Checking Nominal Data and Design Type

The nominal data and design type of the P638 can be determined by checking
the type identification label (see below). One type identification label is located
under the upper hinged cover on the front panel and a second label can be found
on the inside of the device. Another copy of the type identification label is fixed
to the outside of the P638 packaging.
Px3x-xxxxxxxx-3xx-4xx-6xx-7xx- 48 - 250 V
9xx-8xx Vx-
100 - 230 V
SER No. 3xxxxxxx /xx/xx
In 1/5A 50 / 60Hz
E.Serial No. 3.xxxxxx.x
E.Reg No. STxxxxxxxxx Vn 50 - 130V
Fig. 5-1: Example of the type identification label of a device from the Easergy MiCOM 30 family.
The P638 design version can be determined from the order number. A
breakdown of the order number is given in Chapter “Order Information”
(Chapter 15, (p. 15-1)).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 5-5

5.3 Location Requirements

The P638 has been designed to conform to EN 60255-6. Therefore it is important
when choosing the installation location to make certain that it provides the
operating conditions as specified in above DIN norm sections 3.2 to 3.4. Several
of these important operating conditions are listed below.
5.3.1 Environmental Conditions
Ambient temperature: -5 °C to +55 °C [+23 °F to +131 °F]

Air pressure: 800 to 1100 hPa
Relative humidity: The relative humidity must not result in the formation of
either condensed water or ice in the P638.
Ambient air: The ambient air must not be significantly polluted by dust,
smoke, gases or vapors, or salt.
Solar Radiation: Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be
avoided to ensure that the LC-Display remains readable.
5.3.2 Mechanical Conditions
Vibration stress: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g

Earth quake resistance: 5 ... 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 ... 35 Hz, 5 m/s²,
3 x 1 cycle
5.3.3 Electrical Conditions for Auxiliary Voltage of the Power Supply
Operating range: 0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
5.3.4 Electromagnetic Conditions

Substation secondary system design must follow the best of modern practices,
especially with respect to grounding and EMC.
5-6 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

5.4 Installation
The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given
in Section 4.2, (p. 4-4). When the P638 is surface-mounted on a panel, the wiring
to the P638 is normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. If the
wiring is to be at the back, an opening can be provided above or below the
surface-mounted case. Fig. 5-2, (p. 5-7) shows such an opening.
D5Z50MBA
Fig. 5-2: Opening (cutout) for running the connecting leads to an 40 TE surface-mounted case.
The opening width for the 40 TE surface-mounted case: 213 mm (shown in this
figure), for the 84 TE surface-mounted case: 435 mm. The other dimensions are
the same for all cases.
Flush-mounted cases are designed for control panels. The dimensions and
mounting dimensions are given in Chapter “Design”. When the P638 is mounted
on a cabinet door, special sealing measures are necessary to provide the degree
of protection required for the cabinet (IP 51).
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See “Protective and Operational
Grounding” (Section 5.5, (p. 5-14))
Instructions for selecting the flush-mount method:

The P638 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case
or – for the flush-mounted case – flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and
frame) is used. In this case, test severity class 2 of the vibration test, test severity
class 2 of the shock response test on operability as well as test severity class 1 of
the shock response test on permanent shock are applied additionally.
Dimensions of the panel cutouts:

Dimensional drawings of the panel cutouts for all cases can be found in Section 4.2,
(p. 4-4).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 5-7

For flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame), the procedure is
as follows:
Before the P638 can be installed into a control panel, the local control panel must
be taken down. The local control panel is removed as described below:
1. Remove both top and bottom hinged flaps from the device. (Lift/lower
both hinged flaps 180° up/down. Hold them in the middle and bend them
slightly. The side mountings of both hinged flaps can then be disengaged.)
2. Remove the M3.5 screws (see Fig. 5-3, (p. 5-9)).
3. Then remove the local control panel.
WARNING
Then remove the lower M4 screws and only loosen the upper M4 screws (see
Fig. 5-3, (p. 5-9)). Now insert the P638 into the panel opening from the rear so
that the upper M4 screws fit into the corresponding holes. Then tighten all the
M4 screws. After this, replace the local control panel.
NOTICE
⚫ When replacing the local control panel, take care not to tighten the screws
with too much strength! (Fastening torque 1.5 to 1.8 Newton meters).
⚫ If the control panel thickness is ≥ 2 mm, the longer screws as enclosed
within the device packing must be used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
5-8 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Merely loosen the For panels with a

upper screws and thickness ≥ 2 mm,
hook device on side replace the M3 bolts
plates to mount with the enclosed
longer M3 bolts
< 3 mm
M4
M3.5
Remove the lower

screws completely
prior to mounting
12Y6181B
Fig. 5-3: Installation of a case into a control panel. Flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame ).
Example for a device with a 40 TE case.
NOTICE
⚫ The equipment provides increased mechanical robustness if either the
surface-mounted case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2
(with angle brackets and frame, see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-10)) is used.
DANGER
⚫ Secure connection of protective grounding conductor: See Section 5.5, (p.
5-14).
injury.
For flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame), the procedure is
as follows:
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 5-9

1. Remove the screws as shown in Fig. 5-4, (p. 5-10), ➀ and mount the
enclosed angle brackets using these same screws.
2. Then push the device into the control panel cutout from the front.
3. Secure the device to the control panel by using the enclosed M6 screws
(see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-10)).
4. Assemble the cover frame and snap-fasten onto the fixing screws.
45Z5058A
Fig. 5-4: Mounting the angle brackets.
Angle brackets
M6
B6
6.4
M6 x 15
Height: 204mm
for
Frame 280mm
Width:
E case
the 40T
12Y6183B
Fig. 5-5: Installation of a case into a control panel, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame). Example
for a device in a 40 TE case.
5-10 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

The cover frame width of the 40 TE surface-mounted case is: 280 mm, of the
84 TE case is: 486 mm. The cover frame height is for all cases: 204 mm.
NOTICE
⚫ The equipment provides increased mechanical robustness if either the
surface-mounted case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2
(with angle brackets and frame, see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-10)) is used.
DANGER
5-14).
injury.
A rack mounting kit can be used to combine a flush-mounted 40 TE case with a

second sub-rack to form a 19″ mounting rack (see Fig. 5-6, (p. 5-12)). The
second sub-rack can be another device, for example, or an empty sub-rack with a
blank front panel. Fit the 19″ mounting rack to a cabinet as shown in Fig. 5-7,
(p. 5-13).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 5-11

Connection flange
Tapped bush
Bolt
61Y5077A
Fig. 5-6: Combining 40 TE flush-mounted cases to form a 19″ mounting rack.
DANGER
5-14).
injury.
5-12 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Covering flange
Rack frame
61Y5078A
Fig. 5-7: Installing the P638 in a cabinet with a 19″ mounting rack.
DANGER
5-14).
injury.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 5-13

5.5 Protective and Operational Grounding
DANGER
⚫ The device must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment
grounding requirements.
⚫ The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut,
appropriately marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case
must be grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location
provided. The bracket is marked with the protective ground symbol: .
The cross-section of the ground conductor must conform to applicable
national standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm² (≤ AWG12) is
required.
⚫ In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the
power supply module (identified by the letters “PE” on the terminal
connection diagram) is also required for proper operation of the device.
The cross-section of this ground conductor must also conform to applicable
national standards. A minimum cross section of 1.5 mm² (US: AWG14 or
thicker) is required.
⚫ All grounding connections must be low-inductance, i.e. it must be kept as
short as possible.
⚫ The protective conductor (earth) must always be connected to the
protective grounding conductor terminal in order to guarantee the safety
given by this setup.
injury.
5-14 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

1
2 1
3
2
4
4
PE terminal PE terminal
surface-mount. case flush-mount. case
Pos. Description Pos. Description
1 Nut M4 1 Nut M4
2 Tooth lock wash.A4.3 2 Tooth lock wash.A4.3
3 Clamp bracket 3 Clamp bracket
4 Bolt M4 4 Bolt M4
19Y5220B
Fig. 5-8: Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 5-15

5.6 Connection
The P638 Transformer Differential Protection Device must be connected in
accordance with the terminal connection diagram as indicated on the type
identification label. The relevant terminal connection diagrams that apply to the
P638 are to be found either in the supporting documents supplied with the
device, or in Section 5.7, (p. 5-27).
In general copper conductors with a cross section of 2.5 mm² (US: AWG12) are
sufficient to connect a system current transformer to a current input on the P638.
To reduce CT knee-point voltage requirements, it may be necessary to install
shorter copper conductors with a greater cross section between the system
current transformers and the current inputs on the P638. Copper conductors
having a cross section of 1.5 mm² (US: AWG14) are adequate to connect binary
signal inputs, the output relays and the power supply input.
All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential.
Connections that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when
binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output
relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections
should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
DANGER
⚫ When increased-safety machinery is located in a hazardous area the
device must always be installed outside of this hazardous area to protect
this equipment.
injury.
5.6.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits
5.6.1.1 Power Supply

Before connecting the auxiliary voltage VA for the P638 power supply, it must be
ensured that the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage corresponds with
the nominal value of the auxiliary system voltage.
DANGER
⚫ The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply
module V is removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
injury.
5.6.1.2 Current-Measuring Inputs

When connecting the system transformers, it must be ensured that the
secondary nominal currents of the system and the device correspond.
5-16 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

DANGER
terminals.
injury.
5.6.1.3 Connecting the Measuring Circuits

The system transformers must be connected in accordance with the standard
schematic diagrams shown in Fig. 5-9, (p. 5-18).
It is essential that the grounding configuration shown in the diagram be followed.
If the CT or VT connection is reversed, this can be taken into account when
making settings (see Chapter “Settings”).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 5-17

C
IA,a
MAIN: MAIN:
Conn. meas. circ. a Inom device, end a
[ 010 140 ] [ 010 024 ]
I̲A,a
IC,a
I̲C,a
1: Standard
2: Opposite
MAIN:
IN,nom device
[ 010 017 ]
IN
a I̲N
b
MAIN: MAIN:
Conn. meas. circ. b Inom device, end b
[ 010 150 ] [ 010 025 ]
I̲A,b
I̲C,b
IA,b
1: Standard
2: Opposite
IC,b
MAIN: MAIN:
Conn. meas. circ. V Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 158 ] [ 010 009 ]
V
V̲
1: Standard
2: Opposite
P638
Busbar(operation)
Busbar(return)
68Z9314A
Fig. 5-9: Standard schematic connection diagram.
5-18 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

5.6.1.4 Connecting a Resistance Thermometer

A resistance thermometer can be connected if the device is fitted with analog
module Y. This analog I/O module input is designed to connect a PT 100
resistance thermometer. The PT 100 should be connected using the 3-wire
method (see Fig. 5-10, (p. 5-19)). No supply conductor compensation is
required in this case.
PT 100
P638
S8Z52H9A
Fig. 5-10: Connecting a PT 100 using the 3-wire method.
5.6.1.5 Connecting Binary Inputs and Output Relays

The binary inputs and output relays are freely configurable. When configuring
these components it is important to note that the contact rating of the binary I/O
modules (X) varies (see Section 2.5.7, (p. 2-12)).
Once the user has selected a bay type, the P638 can automatically configure the
binary inputs and output relays with function assignments for the control of
switchgear units. The standard configuration of binary inputs and output relays
for each bay type is given in the list of bay types to be found in the technical
manual "Bay Types").
The polarity for connected binary signal inputs is to be found in the terminal
connection diagrams (see supporting documents supplied with the device or in
Section 5.7, (p. 5-27)). This is to be understood as a recommendation only.
Connection to binary inputs can be made as desired.
5.6.1.6 Connecting Trip and Close Command Relays

Standard outputs of Px30 aren't supposed to open DC current flowing through
inductive CB coil. This task has to be addressed by properly applied CB auxiliary
contacts (52a/b).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 5-19

Kxx CB
MICOM P30 52a
49Z9005A
Fig. 5-11: Example of trip circuit wiring.
In order to ascertain that the inductive coil current is switched off from the CB
auxiliary contacts, the setting of minimum pulse duration for trip commands
(MAI N: Min.dur. M-t rip cmd1 etc.) and close command need to consider the
operating times of the circuit breaker and its auxiliary contacts. Sufficient margin
has to be applied for pulse duration. A common setting is to double operating
time of the circuit breaker, e.g. for a CB trip operation time top of 100 ms, the
minimum trip pulse time should be 0.2 s (see the following figure).
CB Closed (52a)
top
CB's operating time
tmop= 2*top
MAIN:
48Z93A6A
Fig. 5-12: Example of trip pulse timing.
This of course also applies to device open/close command outputs operated with
fix (short or long) command duration (e.g. DEVxx Oper. mode cmd. = Short
command).
If the Px30 output contact triggers an auxiliary relay which opens or closes the
CB consecutively, then it should be verified, that the make/continuous/break coil
currents of this auxiliary relay are within the limit values given in Section 2.5.7,
(p. 2-12).
Note: Upon testing such command outputs, the CB (or equivalent auxiliary
components) must not be mechanically locked, so that the auxiliary 52a/b
contact could operate and break the DC current. If the CB has to stay locked,
tripping or closing circuit has to be opened by terminal disconnection or test
switch.
5-20 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

5.6.1.7 Connection of Switchgear Units Having Direct Motor Control

In the case of bay types having direct motor control, one binary input is
configured for the status signal and one output relay is configured for triggering
and resetting the motor relay. A connection example for a direct motor control is
shown in the following diagram.
CIRCUIT BREAKER DRIVE Q1 DRIVE Q2 DRIVE Q8 TRIGGER. Shunt wd. MOTOR RELAY
OPEN CLOSE MONITORING

MOTOR RELAY
‑K200.1
‑X061 1 7 ‑X062 4 ‑X071 1 ‑X072 4
OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE

‑K601.1 ‑K602.1 ‑K603.1 ‑K604.1 ‑K605.1 ‑K606.1 ‑K701.1 ‑K702.1 ‑K705.1 ‑K706.1
P638
‑X061 3 5 9 ‑X062 2 6 8 ‑X071 3 5 ‑X072 6 8
for Q1 for Q2 for Q8

A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2
Q0 Q0
‑K200
OPEN CLOSE
‑K200.2
‑M1 ‑M2 ‑M3
‑X061 4 6 ‑X062 3 1 9 7 ‑X071 6 4
OPEN CLOSE CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN

‑K601.2 ‑K602.2 ‑K604.2 ‑K603.2 ‑K606.2 ‑K605.2 ‑K702.2 ‑K701.2
P638
‑X061 2 8 ‑X062 5 ‑X071 2
E1 E3 E1 E3 E1 E3 ‑X073 8
M1 M2 M3 X//Y
‑U706
P638
E4 E4 E4 ‑X073 9
‑K200.3
‑X072 7 9
‑K705.2 ‑K706.2
P638
‑X072 5
S8Z01G3A
Fig. 5-13: Connection example, motor with shunt winding for a direct motor control, bay type No. 89
(A23.105.M04), feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 5-21

5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG‑B Interface

An IRIG‑B interface for time synchronization is available with the Ethernet
module. It is connected by a BNC connector. Demodulated and modulated
signals can be used.
5.6.3 Connecting the Communication Interfaces
5.6.3.1 PC Interface
The PC interface is provided so that personnel can operate the device from a
personal computer (PC).
DANGER
⚫ The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection.
Consequently, the female connector does not have the extra insulation
from circuits connected to the system that is required per IEC/EN
60255-27. Therefore DO NOT leave any permanent cable connection on
the PC interface connector at the HMI front panel.
injury.
WARNING
UNEXPECTED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
⚫ Do not use a PC with active termination on any connection pin of the
RS232 interface. Wrong termination can drive the device to delay
operating actions from the HMI as long as this wrong termination is active
on the PC interface.
5.6.3.2 Communication Interfaces

The communication interfaces are provided as a permanent connection of the
device to a control system for substations or to a central substation unit.
Depending on the type, communication interface 1 on the device is connected
either by a special fiber-optic connector or an RS 485 interface with twisted pair
copper wires. Communication interface 2 is only available as an RS 485 interface.
The selection and assembly of a properly cut fiber-optic connecting cable
requires special knowledge and expertise and is therefore not covered in this
operating manual.
5-22 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

DANGER
⚫ Do not connect or disconnect the RS 485 or fiber-optic interface when the
supply voltage for the device is under power and in operation.
injury.
An RS 485 data transmission link between a master and several slave devices
can be established by using the optional communication interface. The
communication master could be, for instance, a central control station. Devices
linked to the communication master, e.g. P638, are set-up as slave devices.
The RS 485 interface available on the P638 was designed so that data transfer in
a full duplex transmission mode is possible using a 4-wire data link between
devices. Data transfer between devices using the RS 485 interface is set up only
for a half duplex transmission mode. To connect the RS 485 communication
interface the following must be observed:
● Only twisted pair shielded cables must be used, that are common in
telecommunication installations.
● At least one symmetrical twisted pair of wires is necessary.
● Conductor insulation and shielding must only be removed from the core in
the immediate vicinity of the terminal strips and connected according to
national standards.
● All shielding must be connected to an effective protective ground surface at
both ends.
● Unused conductors must all be grounded at one end.
A 4‑wire data link as an alternative to a 2-wire communications link is also
possible. A cable with two symmetrical twisted pair wires is required for a 4-wire
data link. A 2-wire data link is shown in Fig. 5-14, (p. 5-24), and a 4-wire data
link is shown in Fig. 5-15, (p. 5-25) as an example for channel 2 on the
communication module. The same is valid if channel 1 on the communication
module is available as a RS 485 interface.
2-wire data link:
The transmitter must be bridged with the receiver on all devices equipped
electrically with a full duplex communication interface, e.g. the P638. The two
devices situated at either far end must have a 200 to 220 Ω resistor installed to
terminate the data transmission conductor. In devices from the Easergy MiCOM
30 family, and also in the P638, a 220 Ω resistor is integrated into the RS 485
interface hardware and can be connected with a wire jumper. An external
resistor is therefore not necessary.
4-wire data link:
Transmitter and receiver must be bridged in the device situated on one far end
of the data transmission conductor. The receivers of slave devices, that have an
electrically full-duplex communication interface as part of their electrical system,
e.g. the P638, are connected to the transmitter of the communication master
device, and the transmitters of slave devices are connected to the receiver of the
master device. Devices equipped electrically with only a half duplex RS 485
communication interface are connected to the transmitter of the communication
master device. The last device in line (master or slave device) on the data
transmission conductor must have the transmitter and receiver terminated with
a 200 to 220 Ω resistor each. In devices from the Easergy MiCOM 30 family, and
also in the P638, a 220 Ω resistor is integrated into the RS 485 interface
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 5-23

hardware and can be connected with a wire jumper. An external resistor is

therefore not necessary. The second resistor must be connected externally to the
device (resistor order number see Chapter “Accessories and Spare Parts”).
-X9/-X10
200 ... 220 Ω
− 1 −
D1[T] + 2 + D2[R]
− 4 −
D2[R] + 5 + D1[T]
XXXX P638
First participant Last participant

connect. to the line connect. to the line
(e.g. the master)
-X9/-X10 1 2 3 4 5
− + − + − + − +
D2[R] D1[T] D2[R] D1[T]
P638 XXXX
Device with half-

duplex interface
19Z6480C
Fig. 5-14: 2-wire data link. (Note: the setting M A I N : C h a n n . a s s i g n . C O M M 1 / 2 decides about whether -X9
(=channel 1) or -X10 (=channel 2) is used.)
5-24 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

-X9/-X10
200 ... 220 Ω
D1[T] D2[R]
D2[R] D1[T]
XXXX P638
First participant Last participant
connect. to the line connect. to the line
(e.g. the master)
-X9/-X10
D2[R] D1[T] D2[R] D1[T]
P638 XXXX
Device with half-

duplex interface
19Z6481B
Fig. 5-15: 4-wire data link. (Note: the setting M A I N : C h a n n . a s s i g n . C O M M 1 / 2 decides about whether -X9
(=channel 1) or -X10 (=channel 2) is used.)
For CH1/CH2 connection diagram, please refer to Section 5.7, (p. 5-27)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 5-25

5.6.3.3 Ethernet Module Connection

The diagram and the related tables below show the Interface arrangement of
Ethernet module, as they are the fiber/copper connectors and IRIG‑B connector.
B A ETH
ACT
LNK
A ETH
ACT
LNK
ETH A
ETH A
ETH B
ETH A
ETH B
ETH C
ETH C
ETH C
ETH C
IRIG B
IRIG B
IRIG B
IRIG B
Fig. 5-16: SEB Fiber. Fig. 5-17: SEB Fig. 5-18: REB Fiber. Fig. 5-19: REB
Copper. Copper.
Connector Connections
ETH A Fiber/Copper
ETH B Fiber/Copper
ETH C Copper
IRIG-B Demodulated (DC IRIG-B)/ Modulated (AC IRIG-B)
Tab. 5-1: Connector functionality.
LED Function On Off Flashing
Green Link Link o.k. Link broken

Yellow Activity Packets received/ emitted
Tab. 5-2: LED functionality.
5-26 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

5.7 Location and Connection Diagrams
5.7.1 Location Diagrams P638‑407/408/409

Location diagram for P638 in 40 TE case
● Pin-terminal connection (P638 ‑407)
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
P A alt. T X X Y V X
CH1 Y 5J 6I 6I 4I 4I 6O
CH2 4I 1V 8O 8O 8O
alt.
alt. alt. alt. alt.
A
SEB X X X X
LC/ 6I 6I 24I 6I
RJ45 6O 6O 3O
alt. alt.
A
REB X
LC/ 4H
RJ45
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
Location diagram for P638 in 84 TE case

● Pin-terminal connection (P638 ‑408)
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
P A T Y X X X X X V
CH1 5J 4I 6I 6I 6I 6I 6O 4I
CH2 1V 8O 8O 8O 8O 8O
alt.
alt. alt. alt. alt.
A
SEB X X X X
LC/ 6I 6I 24I 6I
RJ45 6O 6O 3O
alt.
A alt.
REB
LC/ X
RJ45 4H
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
● Ring-terminal connection (P638 ‑409)
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
P A T Y X X X X X V
CH1 5J 4I 6I 6I 6I 6I 6O 4I
CH2 1V 8O 8O 8O 8O 8O
alt. alt. alt. alt. alt.
A X X X X
SEB 6I 6I 24I 6I
LC/ 6O 6O 3O
RJ45
alt. alt.
A X
REB 4H
LC/
RJ45
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Each of the numbered slots can be fitted with max. 1 module.

If a location diagram shows several modules for a particular slot, then these are
alternatives, depending on the ordering options.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 5-27

5.7.2 Terminal Connection Diagrams P638‑407/408/409
“_” is a placeholder for the slot.

See also Section 5.5, (p. 5-14), “Protection Conductor Terminal (PCT) / Case
Grounding / Protective Earth”
5-28 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Transformer Type T Power supply Type V Binary Type X Binary Type X

module 5J 1V module 4I 8O module 6I 8O module 6I 6O
Ring Pin Voltage measuring Ring Pin Ring Pin Ring Pin
inputs
X041 X041 X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1
Output relays Output relays Output relays
1 1 1 1 1 1
13 1 V
T5 2 2 K_01 2 2 K_01 2 2
16 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 K_01
4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 K_02
6 6 K_02 6 6 K_02 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8
Current measuring
inputs 9 9 K_03 9 9 K_03 9 9 K_03
X042
1 1 1IA X__2 X__2 X__2

► T11 10 1 10 1 10 1
2 2 11 2 11 2 11 2
K_04 K_04 K_04
3 3 1IC 12 3 K_05 12 3 K_05 12 3
► T13
13 4 K_06 13 4 K_06 13 4
4 4
14 5 K_07 14 5 K_07 14 5
15 6 15 6 15 6 K_05
5 5 IN
► T4 16 7 K_08 16 7 K_08 16 7
6 6 17 8 17 8 17 8 K_06
Signal inputs 18 9 18 9
Signal
18 9 inputs
Vin Signal inputs
U_01 X__3 X__3
Vin Vin
X042
X052 19 1 U_01 19 1 U_01
X__3
9 1 2IA 19 1 20 2 20 2
► T21
20 2 21 3
Vin
U_02 21 3
Vin
U_02
10 2 Vin
21 3 U_02 22 4
11 3 2IC Vin Vin
► T23 22 4
Vin
U_03
22
23
4
5
U_03
23 5
U_03
12 4
Vin Vin
23 5 24 6 U_04 24 6 U_04
Vin
24 6 U_04 25 7 25 7
Vin Vin
U_05 U_05
Power supply
25 7 26 8 26 8
+ V Vin Vin
26 8
aux
U100 27 9 U_06 27 9 U_06
−
27 9
Binary Type X Binary Type X Binary Type X Binary Type X

module 24I module 6O module 6I 3O module 4H
Ring Pin Signal inputs Ring Pin Ring Pin Ring Pin
X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1
Vin Output relays Output relays High-break
1 1 U_01 1 1 1 1
contacts
2 2 2 2 K_01 2 2 K_01
U_02
3 3 3 3 3 3
U_03
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
U_04 K_01
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 +
U_05
6 6 6 6 6 6
U_06
7 7 7 7 7 7
U_07
8 8 8 8 K_02 8 8 K_02
U_08
9 9 9 9 9 9
X__2
X__2
X__2 X__2
Vin 10 1
10 1 U_09 10 1
11 2
11 2 11 2 11 2
U_10 12 3 K_02
12 3 12 3 12 3 +
U_11 13 4
13 4 13 4
U_12 14 5 K_03
14 5 14 5 K_03
U_13 15 6
15 6 15 6
U_14 16 7
16 7 16 7
U_15 17 8 Signal X__3
17 8 17 8 inputs
U_16 18 9
18 9 18 9
Vin
U_01
X__3 X__3 X__3 19 1
Vin Vin K_03
19 1 U_17 19 1 19 1 U_02 20 2 +
20 2 20 2 K_04 20 2
U_18 Vin
21 3 21 3 21 3 U_03
U_19 22 4
22 4 22 4
U_20 Vin
23 5 23 5 K_05 23 5 U_04 26 8
U_21 24 6 K_04
24 6 24 6 27 9 +
U_22 Vin
25 7 25 7 25 7 U_05
U_23 26 8
26 8 26 8 K_06 Vin
U_24 27 9 U_06
27 9 27 9
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 5-29

Analog Type Y Communication Type A

module 4I module CH1 / CH2
Ring Pin
X__1 Measuring Per order

X__1
outputs
1 1 Serial [Channel 1]
2 2 K_01 optical fiber link
3 3 valid X7
1
4 4 X//Y U17
5 5 ► ⋂
6 6 ◄ X8
0…20 mA 1
7 7
U_08 X//Y U18
8 8 K_02
9 9 valid
or wire link
X9 X//Y
X__2 1
10 1 2 D2[R]
11 2 ► ⋂ 3
U19
12 3 ◄ 4
0…20 mA
U_09 5 D1[T]
Signal and
measuring inputs
13 4 RS 422 / 485
Vin
14 5 U_01 Serial [Channel 2]
15 6 wire link only
Vin
16 7 U_02
17 8
X10 X//Y
Vin 1
U_03 2 D2[R]
18 9
Vin 3
U_04 U20
4
5 D1[T]
X__3
19 1
20 2
► ⋂
U_05
RS 422 / 485
21 3 0…20 mA IRIG-B
22 4
◄
time synchronization
◄ ⋂
U_06
X11
23 5 PT100 1
24 6
► U21
Communication Type A Communication Type A Communication Type A Communication Type A

module SEB RJ45 module SEB LC module REB RJ45 module REB LC
Ethernet [IEC] Ethernet [IEC] Ethernet [IEC] Ethernet [IEC]
wire link optical glass fiber LC wire link optical glass fiber LC
Port C Port A Port A Port A
X13 X13
X15 X13
RX RX
1 1
> X//Y U31 U26 > X//Y U29 U26
TX X//Y TX X//Y
RJ45 RJ45
Port B
X14 Port B
1 X14
and Ethernet > X//Y U30 RX
IRIG-B service interface
time synchronization
Port C RJ45 X//Y U28
X15 TX
X11 1
1
(DC IRIG-B)
Demodulated > X//Y U31
2 Isolated GND U21 RJ45
3 and Ethernet and Ethernet
service interface service interface
Modulated Port C Port C
(AC IRIG-B)
X15 X15
1 1
IRIG-B
> X//Y U31 > X//Y U31
time synchronization RJ45 RJ45
X11
(DC IRIG-B)
1 Demodulated
IRIG-B IRIG-B
2 Isolated GND U21
time synchronization time synchronization
3
X11 X11
Modulated (DC IRIG-B) (DC IRIG-B)
(AC IRIG-B) 1 Demodulated 1 Demodulated
2 Isolated GND U21 2 Isolated GND U21
3 3
Modulated Modulated
(AC IRIG-B) (AC IRIG-B)
5-30 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
6 Local Control (HMI)
6.1 Local Control Panel (HMI)

Switchgear installed in the bay can be controlled from the local control panel
(HMI). All the data required for operation of the protection device is entered from
the local control panel, and the data important for system management is read
out there as well. The following tasks can be handled from the local control
panel:
● Controlling switchgear units
● Readout and modification of settings
● Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic status
signals
● Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs
● Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short
circuits in the power system
● Device resetting and triggering of additional control functions used in
testing and commissioning
Control is also possible through the PC interface. This requires a suitable PC and
a specific operating program.
6.1.1 Ordering options

For the local control panel (HMI), the following ordering options are available:
● HMI with text display
● HMI with graphic display
Where necessary, a distinction will be made between these ordering options
throughout this chapter.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-1

P638 6 Local Control (HMI)
6.2 Display and Keypad
6.2.1 Text Display

The local control panel as a text display includes an LC display containing 4 × 20
alphanumeric characters.
There are seven keys with permanently assigned functions situated below the
LCD and six additional freely configurable function keys on the right hand side of
the LCD.
Furthermore the local control panel (HMI) is provided with 23 LED indicators. 17
of these are on the left hand side of the LCD. The other six LED indicators are
situated to the right of the six freely configurable function keys. (See
Section 3.12, (p. 3-79) for the configuration of the LED indicators.)
TRIP
H18
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
H19
EDIT MODE
H20
H21
H22
H23
Fig. 6-1: View of the local control panel and layout of the LED indicators for the text display
6.2.2 Graphic Display

The local control panel is a graphic LC display with a resolution of 128 × 128
pixels (divided semi-graphically into 16 lines of 21 characters each).
Moreover, there are twelve keys and 17 LED indicators.
6-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6 Local Control (HMI) P638
H4 TRIP
H3 ALARM
H2 OUT OF SERVICE
H1 HEALTHY
H17 EDIT MODE
H5
H6
H7
H8
H9
H10
H11
H12
H13
H14
H15
H16
Fig. 6-2: View of the local control panel and layout of the LED indicators for the graphic display.
6.2.3 Display Illumination

If none of the control keys are pressed, the display illumination will switch off
once the set “return time illumination” (setting in menu tree: “Par/Conf/LOC”)
has elapsed. Pressing any of the control keys will turn the display illumination on
again. In this case the control action that is normally triggered by that key will
not be executed. Reactivation of the display illumination is also possible by using
a binary input.
If continuous display illumination is required, the function “return time
illumination” (LOC : Return time ill umi n.) is set to blocked.
6.2.4 Contrast of the Display

The contrast of the LC display can be adjusted by pressing 3 keys on the local
control panel at the same time, as follows:
Keep the Enter key ( ) and the Clear key ( ) pressed simultaneously, then you
can press “Up” or “Down” ( , ) to raise or lower the contrast, respectively.
6.2.5 Short Description of Keys
6.2.5.1 “Up” and “Down” Keys
Panel Level: The “up”/“down” keys switch between the pages of the Measured
Value Panel.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-3

Menu Tree Level: Press the “up” and “down” keys to navigate up and down
through the menu tree in a vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the
“up” and “down” keys have a different function.
Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled
by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. Press the “up” and “down” keys in this
mode to change the setting value.
● “Up” key: the next higher value is selected.
● “Down” key: the next lower value is selected.
With list settings, press the “up” and “down” key to change the logic operator of
the value element.
6.2.5.2 “Left” and “Right” Keys
Menu Tree Level: Press the “left” and “right” keys to navigate through the
menu tree in a horizontal direction. If the unit is in input mode, the “left” and
“right” keys have a different function.
Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled
by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the “left” and “right” keys are
pressed, the cursor positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled
value moves one digit to the right or left.
● “Left” key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the left.
● “Right” key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the right.
In the case of a list setting, press the “left” and “right” keys to navigate through
the list of items available for selection.
6.2.5.3 ENTER Key
Panel Level: Press the ENTER key at the Panel level to go to the menu tree.
Menu Tree Level: Press the ENTER key to enter the input mode. Press the
ENTER key a second time to accept the changes as entered and exit the input
mode. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is
active.
6.2.5.4 CLEAR Key
Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event
data. The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action.
Input mode: When the CLEAR key is pressed all changes entered are rejected
and the input mode is exited.
6-4 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.2.5.5 READ Key
Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel
level or from any other point in the menu tree.
6.2.5.6 „Local/Remote“ Key
The local/remote key is effective in the Bay Panel except where a binary signal
input has been configured for this function.
The local/remote key is the transfer switch between remote and local control
(setting R <-> L), or between remote&local and local control (setting R & L <->
L). If the “Local/Remote” key is set to switch from Remote control to Local
control, then this can only occur if the password has first been entered first.
Switching from Local to Remote control will occur without checking the password.
6.2.5.7 Page Key
Panel Level: Pressing the page key shows the next panel.
Menu Tree Level: When the page key is pressed the Menu Tree Level is exited
and the Bay Panel is accessed.
6.2.5.8 Selection Key
Bay Panel: The Selection key is effective only in the Bay Panel and only if local
control is activated.
If local control has been selected, pressing the selection key selects the
switchgear unit to be controlled. The selected external device will be marked by
an asterisk (*) – as long as no external device names are displayed. Otherwise
the external device name will flash and will be displayed in the status line.
Signal Panel: The Selection key is used to select a flashing signal (not yet
acknowledged) and will also automatically switch to pages that might be
available. When the last flashing signal has been reached pressing the Selection
key again will start with the first flashing signal.
6.2.5.9 OPEN Key
The OPEN key is effective in the Bay Panel only.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-5

Pressing the OPEN key controls the selected switchgear unit – taking into account
the interlock equation – to assume the “open” status.
6.2.5.10 CLOSE Key
The CLOSE key is effective in the Bay Panel only.

Pressing the CLOSE key controls the selected switchgear unit – taking into
account the interlock equation – to assume the “closed” status.
6-6 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.3 Display Levels

All data relevant for operation and all device settings are displayed on two levels.
At the Panel level, data such as measurements are displayed in Panels that
provide a quick overview of the current state of the bay. The “menu tree” level
below the panel level allows the user to select all data points (settings, signals,
measured variables, etc.) and to change them, if appropriate. To access a
selected event recording from either the panel level or from any other point in
the menu tree, press the “READ” key:
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-7

6.4 Availability of the Bay Panel

The Bay Panel is only available under these conditions:
1. On the hardware side the protection unit must be fitted with the binary
module X(6I 6O) to a slot supporting this module.
2. By selecting and sending a bay type (with parameter MAIN: Type of
ba y) a bay type has been generated.
To access a selected event recording from either the panel level or from any
other point in the menu tree, press the “READ” key .
From the control and display panels (e.g. measured value panels or the bay
panel) the user can access the menu tree level by pressing the “ENTER” key.
To return to the previously selected control and display panel from the menu tree
level the user must simultaneously press the keys “Cursor up” and “RESET”. (If
previously no panel was selected, i.e. after a system restart, then the bay panel,
if available, is accessed.)
After the set LOC : Au tom. re turn time has elapsed the protection unit will
also return automatically from the menu tree level to the control and display
panel last selected.
The user can move from a bay panel to a measured value panel by pressing the
key “Cursor left” and back again by pressing the key “Cursor right”.
6-8 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.5 Display Panels on the Text Display

The text display of the P638 can display Measured Value Panels which are called
up according to system conditions.
Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels. The
system condition determines which Panel is called up (examples are the
Operation Panel and the Fault Panel). Only the Measured Value Panels relevant
for the particular design version of the given device and its associated range of
functions are actually available.
The Operation Panel is always provided.
Measured Value
Bay Panel Panel(s) Record View
(state-dependent)
X0 :running Voltage VAB prim. Oper/Rec/OP_RC
>Q0 :running 20.7 kV Operat. data record
Q8 :running Voltage VBC prim.
Local Remote 20.6 kV
Control and Display Panels
+
Device type
Parameters Operation Events
Device ID Cyclic measurements Event counters

Configuration parameters Control and testing Measured fault data
Function parameters Operating data recordings Event recordings
Global Measured operating data

Main functions Physical state signals
Parameter subset 1
Logical state signals
Parameter subset ...
Control Menu tree
Fig. 6-3: Display panels and menu tree.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-9

6.6 Display Panels on the Graphic Display

The following display panels are available with the graphic display:
● Bay Panel
● Signal Panel
● Measured Value Panels, which are called up according to system conditions
● Event Panel
The Bay Panel displays the up-to-date switching status of the selected bay as a
one line diagram. If user-defined bay types are applied, resulting information
may be sub-divided into up to eight pages. A maximum of 28 physical and logic
binary status may be configured to one Signal Panel and, depending on the
operating mode, acknowledged. Selected measured values are displayed on the
Measured Value Panels. Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the
particular design version of the given device and its associated range of
functions are actually available.
The Event Panel displays the most recent events, each with a time tag, such as
the opening of a switchgear unit.
Bay Panel Signal Panel Measured Value Panel(s) Event Panel Record View
(state-dependent)
Control and Display Panels
Device type 
Parameters Operation Events
Device ID Cyclic measurements Event counters

Configuration parameters Control and testing Measured fault data
Function parameters Operating data recordings Event recordings
Global Measured operating data

Main functions Physical state signals
Parameter subset 1 Logical state signals
Parameter subset ...
Control Menu tree
Fig. 6-4: Display panels and menu tree.
6-10 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.7 Menu Tree and Data Points

All data points (setting values, signals, measured values, etc.) are selected using
a menu tree. When navigating through the menu tree, the first two lines of the
LC-Display always show the branch of the menu tree that is active, as selected
by the user. The data points are found at the lowest level of a menu tree branch
and they are displayed either with their plain text description or in numerically
encoded form, as selected by the user. The value associated with the selected
data point, its meaning, and its unit of measurement are displayed in the line
below.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-11

6.8 List Data Points

List data points are a special category. In contrast to other data points, list data
points generally have more than one associated value element. This category
includes tripping matrices, programmable logic functions, and event logs. When
a list data point is selected, the symbol ‘↓‘ is displayed in the bottom line of the
LCD, indicating that a sub-level is situated below this displayed level. The
individual value elements of a list data point are found at this sub-level. In the
case of a list parameter, the individual value elements are linked by operators
such as “OR”.
6-12 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.9 Configurable Function Keys
This section applies only to devices fitted with an HMI with text display (ordering
option).
6.9.1 Configuration of the Function Keys F1 to Fx

Function keys [F1] to [Fx] can be assigned a password (see Section 6.13.9, (p. 6-
54)). In such a case they are effective only after that password has been
entered. By default, no password is required to use the function key.
It is assumed for the following operating example that function key [F1] is
enabled only after the password (as assigned at F_K EY: Pass word funct. key
1) has been entered. After the password has been entered the function key will
remain active for the duration set at F _KE Y: R etu rn tim e fct.k ey s.
Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the password is entered again.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-13

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action
Step 0 Display example. Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 1 Press function key [F1].

Eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line as a prompt
to enter the password if it is required. ********
(By default, i.e. no password required, this step and the
next do not exist and the function key is effective
immediately as described in Step 3.)
Step 2a If a password is set, press the keys corresponding to

the set password, for example:
“Left” *
“Down”
“Right”
“Up”
The display will change as shown in the right hand side
column. *
Now press the ENTER key. If the correct password has Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
been entered, the active display will re-appear. Voltage B-C prim.
Function key [F1] is now effective for the set return 20.6 kV
time.
By default, no password is required and therefore
function key [F1] is always effective.
Each function key can be assigned its own password,
and the return time is running after correct password
entry for each individual function key!)
If an invalid password has been entered, the display
shown above in Step 1 will appear.
Step 2b This control step can be canceled at any time by Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
pressing the CLEAR key before the ENTER key is Voltage B-C prim.
pressed. 20.6 kV
6-14 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661


Action
Step 3 Press [F1] again. The function configured to this Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
function key is carried out. Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 4 When function keys are pressed during their associated Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
return time, then the set function is carried out directly, Yes
i.e. without checking for the password again.
(By default, i.e. no password required, this step does
not exist and the function key is permanently effective.)
6.9.2 Function Keys F1 to Fx as Control Keys

As described in Section 3.7, (p. 3-55) function keys [F1] to [Fx] may be
configured as control keys (for [F1] e.g. at F _KEY: Fct. assignm. F1).
In this case different rules apply to checking the password (see Section 6.9.1,
(p. 6-13)) and the configuration to “Key/Switch” is ignored.
In case the control functionality is desired then each of the following four control
commands, should be assigned to a function key. The particular selection of the
four function keys out of the available six, however, does not matter.
● MAI N: L ocal/ Remote key
The “Local/Remote” control command is effective only in the bay panel
except where a binary signal input has been configured for this function.
Depending on the configured functionality, the “Local/Remote” command
toggles either between “Remote” and “Local” control, or between “Local/
Remote” and “Local” control. (The parameter LOC: Fct. assign. L/R ke y
may be set either to R <-> L or to R & L <-> L and will then define which of
the two switching modes is active.) If the “Local/Remote” command is
configured such that it will switch from “Remote” control to “Local” control,
then this can only occur if the password has first been entered at
LOC: Password L /R. Switching from “Local” to “Remote” control will
occur without checking the password.
● MAIN : D evice se le ction ke y
This selection command is effective only in the bay panel and only if
“Local” control is activated.
If local control has been selected, pressing the selection key selects the
switchgear unit to be controlled. This selected external device is marked on
the text display HMI with the flashing symbol “>” in front of the external
devices’ designation text.
● MAIN : Devi ce O P EN ke y
The OPEN command is effective in the bay panel only. Pressing the key
assigned to this function controls the selected switchgear unit – taking into
account the interlock equation – to assume the “open” status.
● MAI N: D ev ice CLOSE ke y
The CLOSE command is effective in the bay panel only. Pressing the key
assigned to this function controls the selected switchgear unit – taking into
account the interlock equation – to assume the “closed” status.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-15

6.10 Changing between Display Levels
6.10.1 Note Concerning the Step-by-Step Descriptions

The following presentation of the individual control steps shows which displays
can be changed in each case by pressing keys. A small black square to the right
of the enter key indicates that the LED indicator labeled Edit Mode is illuminated.
The examples used here are not necessarily valid for the device type described
in this manual; they merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved.
6.10.2 Changing Between Display Levels (HMI with Text Display)
Jumping from Menu Tree Level to Panel Level
After start-up of the device, the menu tree level is displayed.

Action
Step 0 From the Menu Tree Level, the user can jump to the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device on-line
Panel Level from any position within the menu tree. No (=off)
Step 1 First press the “up” key and hold it down while pressing Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
the CLEAR key. Voltage B-C prim.
Note: It is important to press the “up” key first and 20.6 kV
+
release it last in order to avoid unintentional resetting of
stored data.
Jumping from Panel Level to Menu Tree Level

Action
Step 0 Example of a Measured Value Panel. Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 1 Press the Enter key to go from the Panel Level to the P638
Menu Tree Level.
After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: “Par/Conf/LOC”), the
display will automatically switch to the Panel level if a Measured Value Panel has
been configured.
6-16 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.10.3 Changing Between Display Levels (HMI with Graphic Display)
Jumping from Panel Level to Menu Tree Level
After start-up of the device, the display is at the Panel Level. The Bay Panel is
displayed.

Action
Step 0 Example of a display after start-up of the device.

P638 10:33:22
Note: When the device is delivered, it is set for a BB1
BB2
dummy bay without switchgear units. Therefore only the
Q1 Q2
name of the device appears on the Bay Panel. The
display shown in the example will not appear until a Q0
“real” bay type has been selected. Q9
Locked Q8
1: Remote
1088A ↑
Curr. IP,max prim. ↓
Step 1 Press the Enter key to go from the Panel Level to the P638
Parameters
Menu Tree Level.
Jumping from Menu Tree Level to Panel Level

Action
Step 0 From the Menu Tree Level, the user can jump to the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device on-line
Panel Level from any position within the menu tree. No (=off)
Step 1 Press the Page key.

P638 10:33:22
Alternatively first press the “up” key and hold it down BB1
BB2
while pressing the CLEAR key.
or Q1 Q2
Note: It is important to press the “up” key first and
Q0
release it last in order to avoid unintentional resetting of
Q9
stored data.
+ Locked
1: Remote
Q8
1088A ↑
After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: “Par/Conf/LOC”), the
display will switch automatically to the Bay Panel.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-17

6.11 How to use Cyber Security Features

These sections shows the most common tasks associated with Cyber Security
features.
For many of these tasks, the steps you take are the same as you have performed
previously and with the main changes being in the steps you use to login and/or
logout.
Schneider Electric points out that changing default users and default passwords
constitutes an important security measure for the product. Therefore Schneider
Electric recommends to change the default passwords after the first usage of the
device. Not changing the default passwords can lead to the risk of undesirable
changes by third parties.
6.11.1 Usage
6.11.1.1 How to Login
6.11.1.1.1 Local Default Access

If the Local Default Access is enabled, the user can login via the front panel
without password with associated roles.
6.11.1.1.2 Login with Prompt User List

This login process will happen if authorization is required for the current
operation.
In this case, the IED will prompt the user list, and the user needs to select proper
user name and enter the password to login.
6-18 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Login Step / Description Control Display

Action
Step 0 When operation needs authorization, the CS Cyber Security

insuff. rights
insufficient rights message is displayed for 2 seconds
Step 1 The user list is shown Select a user

DefaultOperator
Select proper user by pressing the 'up' or 'down' DefaultEngineer
DefaultViewer
Or
Step 2 Confirm the selection by 'Enter' key
Step 3 Password message is shown for user to enter User Password?

********
Step 4 If password is correct Cyber Security

login successful
Step 5 If password is incorrect, passord message shows again Cyber Security

login failed
(as in step 3)
Step 6 If decided not to login (by pressing the 'CLEAR' key), User not selected
Aborted with C key
the message is displayed for 2 seconds.
6.11.1.2 How to Logout
6.11.1.2.1 How to Logout at the IED

For security consideration, it would be better to logout the IED once the
configuration done.
The user can be logged out with 'HMI Logout' in the menu tree: 'Par/Conf/CS'.
6.11.1.2.2 How to Logout at Easergy Studio

● Right-click on the device name and select Log Off.
● In the Log Off confirmation dialog click Yes.
6.11.1.3 How to Disable a Physical Port

It is possible to disable unused physical ports for security reason.
The physical ports can be disabled by using Easergy Studio or the front panel.
This can’t be done by the CAE. An Engineer-role is needed to perform this action.
COMM1 section:
● Allows to disable commands.
It can be disabled with 'Command blocking' in the menu tree: 'Par/Func/Glob/
COMM1'.
COMM2 section:
● Allows to disable commands and measurements. If both are disabled, the
complete interface is disabled.
It can be disabled with 'Command blocking' or 'Sig./meas.val.block' in the menu
tree: 'Par/Func/Glob/COMM2'.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-19

IEC section:
● Allows to disable the physical interface A/B or A (if available).
● Allows to disable the physical interface C.
The physical ports can be disabled with 'Block Port A/B' or 'Block Port C' in the
menu tree: 'Par/Conf/IEC'.
PC section (IEC 103):
● Allows to disable commands and measurements. If both are disabled, the
complete interface is disabled.
It can be disabled with 'Command blocking' or 'Sig./meas.val.block' in the menu
tree: 'Par/Func/Glob/PC'.
6.11.1.4 How to Secure Function key

In cyber security implementation, this function has been linked to the front panel
authorization.
● When the function key pressed, if there is no user login in the front panel or
the logged- in user is not authorized, a prompt message will be raised in
the front panel to ask the user login.
Once the user logged-in, function key password is needed if function key
has a password. If the user already logged in with authorization and the
function key has no password, the command will be executed immediately.
● By default, the OPERATOR or ENGINEER Roles are able to operate the
function keys.
● If unauthorized users press Function Key during the setting change, they
need to commit the changes first then login with authorized user to operate
the function key.
6-20 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.12 Control at Panel Level
6.12.1 Control at Panel Level (HMI with Text Display)

The measured values that will be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can
first be selected in the menu tree under Par/Conf/LOC. The user can select
different sets of measured values for the Operation Panel (L OC : F ct .
Operat ion Panel), the Overload Panel (LOC: Fct . Overload Panel), and the
Fault Panel (LOC : F ct . Faul t P ane l).
Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design version of the
given device and its associated range of functions are actually available. The
selected set of values for the Operation Panel is always available. Please see
Section 6.13.5.1, (p. 6-45) for instructions regarding selection. If
“MAIN: Wit hout fun ction” has been selected for a given panel, then that
panel is disabled.
The Measured Value Panels are called up according to system conditions. If, for
example, the device detects an overload or a ground fault, then the
corresponding Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or
ground fault situation exists. Should the device detect a fault, then the Fault
Panel is displayed and remains active until the measured fault values are reset,
by pressing the CLEAR key, for example.

Action
Step 0 Two measured values can be displayed simultaneously Voltage VA prim.

20.7 kV
on the Panel. Voltage VB/Vref prim.
20.6 kV
Step 1 If more than two measured values have been selected, Voltage V prim.
20.8 kV
they can be viewed one page at a time by pressing the Current I prim.
“up” or “down” keys. 415 A
or
The device will also show the next page of the
Measured Value Panel after the set Hold-Time for
Panels (LOC : Hold -tim e for P ane l s, located at “Par/
Conf” in the menu tree) has elapsed.
6.12.1.1 Bay Panel
6.12.1.1.1 Information Displayed on the Bay Panel

If available the Bay Panel will display switching state signals from external
devices (closed, open, intermediate position) and the active control site (local or
remote). The text display HMI will show up to 3 external devices, one per line,
where the external device selected is marked with the flashing symbol “>” in
front of the external devices’ designation text.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-21

Fig. 6-5: Example of a bay panel.
The sequence for external devices is downwards in columns according to their

numbering (DEV01, DEV02, DEV03). To designate these external devices there
are up to four characters available, and next to these, separated by a colon, their
current state is displayed (“Interm. pos.”, “Open”, “Closed” or “Faulty pos.”).
The active control unit (“Remote” or “Local”) is displayed in the fourth line, as
well as its state: “Locked” or “Unlocked”.
6.12.1.1.2 Controlling Switchgear Units

Switchgear units can be controlled from the local control panel, provided that the
unit has been set for “local control”.
The following example assumes that the configurable function keys are set as
follows (see also Section 6.9.2, (p. 6-15)):
● [F1]: MAIN : Local/Re mote ke y – called “local/remote” key in the
following example
● [F2]: MAI N: D evi ce s el e ction key – called “select” key in the following
example
● [F3]: MAI N: D e vice CL OSE ke y – called “close” key in the following
example
● [F4]: MAIN : De vi ce OP EN ke y – called “open” key in the following
example
If the local/remote key is set to switch between remote and local control (R↔L),
then the switch from “remote” to “local” operation requires a password.
The following example is based on the (R↔L) setting for the local/remote key and
the factory-set L/R password. If the password has been changed by the user (see
Section 6.13.9.3, (p. 6-57)) the following description will apply accordingly.
6-22 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661


Action
Step 0 Select the Bay Panel. X0 :Closed

Q0 :Closed
Q8 :Closed
Remote Locked
Step 1 Press the “local/remote” key (L/R) to switch the device to P638 10:33:22
local operation. The Bay Panel is no longer displayed.
The device type appears in the first line and eight ********
asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line as a prompt to
enter the password.
Step 2a Press the following keys in sequence: P638 10:33:22
“Left”
*
“Down” P638 10:33:22
“Right” P638 10:33:22
“Up” P638 10:33:22
The display will change as shown in the column on the

right. *
Now press the Enter key. X0 :Closed

Q0 :Closed
If the correct password has been entered, the Bay Panel Q8 :Closed
will re-appear. The fourth line will display “Local”. Local Locked
Step 2b This control step can be canceled at any time by pressing X0 :Closed
Q0 :Closed
the Clear key before the enter key is pressed. Q8 :Closed
Remote Locked
Step 3a Press the Selection key to select a switchgear unit. Only X0 :Closed
>Q0 :Closed
switchgear units that are electrically controllable can be Q8 :Closed
selected. The external device designation for the Local Locked
selected switchgear unit –“Q0”, for example – is marked
by a flashing “>” character.
Step 3b To cancel the selection of a switchgear unit, press the X0 :Closed

Q0 :Closed
Clear key. Press the Selection key to select a new Q8 :Closed
switchgear unit. Local Locked
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-23


Action
Step 4 After selecting a switchgear unit, press the keys “Open”

or “Close” to control the switchgear unit. Before this
switching action is executed, compliance with bay
interlock conditions – if applicable – is checked. or
Step 4a If the check of bay interlock conditions determines that X0 :Closed

Q0 :Interm. pos
an operation can be carried out, then the switch Q8 :Closed
command is executed. The status “Interm[ediate] Local Locked
pos[ition]” is displayed while the switchgear unit is
operating.
Once the operating time of the switchgear unit has X0 :Closed

Q0 :Open
elapsed, the resulting switching status is displayed. Q8 :Closed
Local Locked
Step 4b If the check of interlock conditions determines that X0 :Closed

Q0 :Closed
switching is not allowed, then the selected switchgear Q8 :Closed
unit is no longer marked. Local Locked
If the LED indicators have been configured accordingly,
the LED indicator for the signal MA IN: In terl ock equ .
viol. will be illuminated.
Step 5 If no control action takes place within a set time period

after selection of a switchgear unit or if the return time
for illumination (L OC : Return t ime il lu min .) or the
return time for selection (LOC: Retu rn ti me se l ect.)
has elapsed, then the selection is canceled.
Step 6 Press the local/remote key (L/R) to switch to remote X0 :Closed

Q0 :Open
control; this is accomplished without a password prompt. Q8 :Closed
Remote Locked
6.12.2 Control at Panel Level (HMI with Graphic Display)

At Panel Level, the user can move from one Panel type to another by pressing
the Page key (in one direction only) or the “left”/”right” keys (in both directions).
6.12.2.1 Bay Panel (HMI with Graphic Display)
6.12.2.1.1 Information Displayed on the Bay Panel

Fig. 6-6, (p. 6-25) shows an example of a Bay Panel. The top line shows the
device type on the left and the current time of day on the right. Together with a
customized Bay Type with more than one Bay Panel page the top line will include
a page marker in the center. The page markers run from “PAGE A” (first page) to
“PAGE H” (eighth page).
6-24 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Fig. 6-6: Example of a Bay Panel.
The Bay Panel shown below in one-line diagram representation is a function of

the set bay type. The symbols shown in the following table are used to represent
the switchgear units and other external devices as well as the status of
switchgear units. The user can switch between character sets 1, 2, and 3.
Character set 3 is identical to character set 1 in as-delivered condition but can be
replaced by a user-defined character set – by using a special ancillary tool. The
symbols of character set 1 are used in the following description.
The fourth line from the bottom shows (in abbreviated form) whether a bay
interlock is active. The third line from the bottom indicates whether remote or
local control is permitted. In the example shown here, remote control is
activated. The two lines at the bottom contain measured value data. The arrows
to the right of the measured value data indicate that additional measured values
can be called up by pressing the “up” or ”down” keys.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-25

External device Position, e.g.: Setting

LOC:
DEV01: Character set
Control state 1: Character set 1 2: Character set 2
Circuit breaker 1: Open
2: Closed
3: Faulty position
Switch disconnector 1: Open
2: Closed
3: Faulty position
Disconnector 1: Open
2: Closed
3: Faulty position
Switch truck 1: Open
2: Closed
3: Faulty position
Fuse unit 1: Open
2: Closed
6-26 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.12.2.1.2 Measured Value Display in the Bay Panel

Action
Step 0 Measured values are shown one at a time.

A configuration step determines whether the measured P638
BB1
10:33:22
BB2
value will also be displayed in bar chart form.
Q1 Q2
A configuration step determines whether the measured
value will also be displayed in bar chart form. The Q0
position of the bar chart can also be set for horizontal or Q9
vertical display (the setting applies to all measured Locked Q8

values). The arrows under the bar chart indicate that 1: Remote
1088A ↑
additional measured values can also be displayed. Curr. IP,max prim. ↓
Step 1 By pressing the “up” or “down” key the next measured

value is displayed. In the example shown, no bar chart P638
BB1
10:33:25
BB2
display has been configured for the measured value.
or Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Locked Q8
1: Remote
1000A ↑
Current A prim. ↓
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-27

6.12.2.1.3 Controlling Switchgear Units

Switchgear units can be controlled from the local control panel, provided that the
unit has been set for “local control”. If the local/remote key is set to switch
between remote and local control (R↔L), then the switch from “remote” to
“local” operation requires a password. When more than one Bay Panel page is
used only joint “local/remote” switching is available.
The following example is based on the (R↔L) setting for the local/remote key and
the factory-set L/R password. If the password has been changed by the user (see
Section 6.13.9.3, (p. 6-57)) the following description will apply accordingly.
6-28 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661


Action
Step 0 Select the Bay Panel.

P638 10:33:22
BB1
BB2
Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Locked Q8
1: Remote
1088A ↑
Step 1 Press the “local/remote” key (L/R) to switch the device to P638 10:33:22
local operation. The Bay Panel is no longer displayed.
The device type appears in the first line and eight ********
asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line as a prompt to
enter the password.
Step 2a Press the following keys in sequence: P638 10:33:22
“Left”
*
“Down” P638 10:33:22
“Right” P638 10:33:22
“Up” P638 10:33:22
The display will change as shown in the column on the

right. *
Now press the enter key.

P638 10:33:22
If the correct password has been entered, the Bay Panel BB1
BB2
will re-appear. The third line from the bottom will display
Q1 Q2
“Local”.
Q0
Q9
Locked Q8
2: Local
1088A ↑
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-29


Action
Step 2b This control step can be canceled at any time by pressing

the CLEAR key before the enter key is pressed. P638
BB1
10:33:22
BB2
Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Locked Q8
1: Remote
1088A ↑
Step 3a Press the Selection key to select a switchgear unit. Only

switchgear units that are electrically controllable can be P638
BB1
10:33:22
BB2
selected. The external device designation for the
Q1 Q2
selected switchgear unit –“Q0”, for example – is
displayed in flashing characters (underlined in the Q0
example to the right) and also appears in the bottom line Q9
of the display. If the display of external device
Locked Q8
designations has been disabled, the selected switchgear 2: Local
1088A
unit will be marked by a flashing asterisk (*). The Q0
designation of the selected external device appears in
the bottom line of the display.
Step 3b To cancel the selection of a switchgear unit, press the

CLEAR key. Press the Selection key to select a new P638
BB1
10:33:22
BB2
switchgear unit.
Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Locked Q8
2: Local
1088A ↑
Step 4 After selecting a switchgear unit, press the keys “Open”

or “Close” to control the switchgear unit. Before this
switching action is executed, compliance with bay
interlock conditions – if applicable – is checked. or
Step 4a If the check of bay interlock conditions determines that

an operation can be carried out, then the switch P638
BB1
10:33:22
BB2
command is executed. The “off-end” (intermediate
Q1 Q2
position) symbol is displayed while the switchgear unit is
operating. Q0
Q9
Locked Q8
2: Local
1088A ↑
6-30 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661


Action
Once the operating time of the switchgear unit has

elapsed, the resulting switching status is displayed. P638
BB1
10:33:22
BB2
Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Locked Q8
2: Local
1088A ↑
Step 4b If the check of interlock conditions determines that

switching is not allowed, then the selected switchgear P638
BB1
10:33:22
BB2
unit is no longer highlighted.
Q1 Q2
If the LED indicators have been configured accordingly,
the LED indicator for MAI N: Interl ock e qu. vi ol. will Q0
be illuminated. Q9
Locked Q8
2: Local
1088A ↑
Step 5 If no control action takes place within a set time period

after selection of a switchgear unit or if the return time
for illumination (LO C : Re turn ti me il lu min .) or the
return time for selection (LOC: Return time se lect .)
has elapsed, then the selection is canceled.
Step 6 Press the local/remote key (L/R) to switch to remote

control; this is accomplished without a password prompt. P638
BB1
10:33:22
BB2
Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Locked Q8
1: Remote
1088A ↑
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-31

6.12.2.2 Signal Panel(s)
The Signal Panel is applicable to the local control panel with graphic display only.
The Signal Panel is used to display the up to 28 different physical and logical
binary states that the device has available. The top line in the display shows the
panel designation “Signals” and the current time of day. The following empty line
separates the heading from actual signals. This gives display capacity of up to
seven signals to one Signal Panel. Additional pages are created when more than
seven signals have been configured. As with all other panels, switching between
pages is carried out automatically, after the parameter panel hold-time
(LOC : Hold-t ime for P ane l s) has elapsed, or manually by pressing the “Up”/
“Down” keys.
Each signal consists of two lines. The first line shows a status marker (square).
□ clear Signal inactive / not powered.

▀ black Signal active / powered.
▣ flashing Signaling.
Moreover, the first line shows the associated function group. The second line
shows the full text for this signal.
6.12.2.2.1 Automatic Activation

When automatic activation of the Signal Panel is set
(LOC : Aut.act iv.Sign.Pan el) each status change of signals, configured to a
panel, is automatically switched from the Bay Panel page or the Operation Panel/
Event Panel (depending on the actual selection) to the Signal Panel. Depending
on the range of functions available in the device, the displays of Overload Panels,
Ground Fault Panels or Fault Panels have a higher priority and will be shown
when an event has occurred. Using the Page key will make the display jump to
the other panels at any time.
6.12.2.2.2 Status Display and Signaling

To differentiate between the states “signal active / powered” and “signal
inactive / not powered” shown on the Signal Panel the parameter
(L OC : Stat .ind.S ig n.P ane l) is used. This will distinguish between a clear/black
square alone and the simultaneous change over from normal display to
highlighting of text in both lines (the first line with the status marker will remain
unchanged).
By using the parameter (LOC : I ndi cat.Sign.P ane l) the signaling of status
changes of signals in the Signal Panel is controlled. There is a difference between
no signaling (acknowledgement is not necessary, but, if so configured, the Signal
Panel is switched on at any status change), signaling by the flashing status
marker “▣” alone or by flashing of the two lines (change over from normal
display to highlighting of text and the status marker). The flashing frequency is
fixed and may not be changed.
Each status change of signals, configured to a panel of the Bay Panel page can
be set to call for user attention either by having the status marker or both signal
lines flash when a new event has occurred. The switching control will then
automatically switch to the page, which includes the first signal that has
experienced a status change. After pressing the Selection key this flashing
signal is selected on the current page (signal preceded by a flashing cursor “>”).
The next flashing signal can be called up by pressing the Selection key again. At
6-32 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

this point it may occur that the display will automatically jump to the next page.
When the last flashing signal has been reached pressing the Selection key again
will start with the first flashing signal.
Depending on LOC: Sign.cau s.Sign.Pan elthe cause of a flashing signal may
be set. Either each status change of the binary information or only “incoming”
edges for transient signals will lead to a flashing signal. The status change is
generally shown as ’storing” i.e. the flashing signal will remain until it has been
acknowledged.
6.12.2.2.3 Acknowledging Flashing Signals

Acknowledging a flashing signal that has been selected will occur by pressing the
CLEAR key . This will not reset illuminated LED indicators but will only
acknowledge the display. The flashing will stop when the CLEAR key is pressed
and a static status display will appear. Then the display will automatically jump
to the next flashing signal. This will enable the user to acknowledge any flashing
signals by multiple pressing of the CLEAR key. As long as the Selection key is
pressed and no resetting has occurred the current page will be continuously
displayed (no automatic switching to the next page). The selection will remain
active until the time set for LOC: R etu rn ti me select . has elapsed. When the
time has elapsed the display will jump to the next page. During an active
selection the user may at any time jump to the next or the previous page by
pressing the “up” or “down” keys (similar to the Measured Value Panel and the
Event Panel).
6.12.2.2.4 Status Change Signaling

As long as at least one status change signal in the Signal Panel has not been
acknowledged, L OC: Chg.Si g. Pane l stat. will show the status change of the
Signal Panel as a static signal. This signal is made available in the selection
tables for the function groups LED, OUTP, LOGIC, PC, COMM1 and COMM2.
The second internal logic signal LOC : C hg.Si g. Pan el flas h.. shows the status
change of the Signal Panel as an alternating signal with a frequency of about
0.5 Hz. This signal is only made available in the selection tables for the function
groups LED, OUTP and LOGIC. It is generated independent of the operating mode
as set in LO C: Sign.caus .Si gn .P ane l; for example a LED configured to this
signal will also be triggered as flashing even if the operating mode is set to
Without signalling.
In order to be able to continue with the processing of flashing signals the device
has two internal logic signals available.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-33

Description Display
Step 1 Example of a Signal Panel with status display by status

markers (squares) Signals 23:56:10
■INP:
State U 1604
□MAIN:
M.c.b. trip Vref EXT
■FT_RC:
Fault mem. overflow
■LOC:
■OUTP:
Outp. relays blocked
□PSS:
Activate PS 3 EXT
■LOGIC:
Reset 3 EXT
Step 2 Example of a Signal Panel with status display by status

markers (squares) and highlighting of lines Signals 23:56:10
■ INP:
State U 1604
□ MAIN:
M.c.b. trip Vref EXT
■ FT_RC:
Fault mem. overflow
■ LOC:
■ OUTP:
Outp. relays blocked
□ PSS:
Activate PS 3 EXT
■ LOGIC:
Reset 3 EXT
Step 3a Example of the selection of a status display with status

markers. >SFMON:
Battery failure
Cursor “>” is flashing.

>SFMON:
Battery failure
Step 3b Example of the selection of a status display with status

markers and highlighting of text. >SFMON:
Battery failure
Cursor “>” and highlighted text are flashing.

>SFMON:
Battery failure
6-34 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.12.2.3 Measured Value Panels on the Graphic Display

The measured values that will be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can
first be selected in the menu tree under Par/Conf/LOC. The user can select
different sets of measured values for the Operation Panel, the Overload Panel,
the Ground Fault Panel, and the Fault Panel. Only the Measured Value Panels
relevant for the particular design version of the given device and its associated
range of functions are actually available. The selected set of values for the
Operation Panel is always available. Please see the section entitled “Setting a
List Parameter” (Section 6.13.5, (p. 6-45)) for instructions regarding selection.
The measured value display can be structured by inserting a dummy or
placeholder in the list of selected measured values. If the MA IN: Without
funct ion setting has been selected for a given panel, then that panel is
disabled.
The Measured Value Panels are called up according to system conditions. If, for
example, the device detects an overload or a ground fault, then the
corresponding Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or
ground fault situation exists. If the device detects a fault, then the Fault Panel is
displayed and remains active until the measured fault values are reset, by
pressing the CLEAR key , for example.

Action
Step 0 The uppermost line of the display shows the type of Meas.values 16:57:33
measured values being displayed. In this example, the Voltage A-B prim.
display shows measured operating values (abbreviated 20.7 kV
as “Meas. values”). The time of day is shown at the Voltage B-C prim.
upper right of the display. 20.6 kV
Voltage C-A prim.
Up to six selected measured values can be displayed
20.8 kV
on the Panel simultaneously. Current A prim.
415 A
Current B prim.
416 A
Current C prim.
417 A
↓↑
Step 1 If more than six measured values have been selected, Meas.values 16:57:35
they can be viewed one page at a time by pressing the Voltage A-B norm.
“up” or ”down” keys. The device will also show the 0.7 kV
next page of the Measured Value Panel after the set or Voltage B-C norm.
Hold-time for Panels (setting in menu tree: “Par/Conf/ 0.6 kV
LOC”) has elapsed. Voltage C-A norm.
0.8 kV
Current A norm.
1.5 A
Current B norm.
1.6 A
Current C norm.
1.7 A
↓↑
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-35

6.12.2.4 Event Panel on the Graphic Display

The Event Panel shows the signals relevant for operation, each with the complete
time tag (date and time of day). A maximum of three signals are displayed. The
Event Panel is based on entries in the operating data memory (menu tree:
“Oper/Rec/OP_RC”).

Action
Step 0 The uppermost line of the display shows the panel Events 16:57:33
designation and the current time of day. Below this 20.04.13
line, the signals are shown in chronological order. The 05:21:32.331 MAIN
arrows at the bottom of the display area indicate that Trip command
additional signals can also be displayed. Start
05:21:35.501 MAIN
Trip command
End
21.04.13
00:03:57.677 MAIN
Blocked/faulty
Start
↓↑
Step 1 Pressing the “up” or “down” keys will display the Events 16:57:35
signals one at a time.
05:21:35.501 MAIN
or Trip command
End
21.04.13
00:03:57.677 MAIN
Blocked/faulty
Start
08:10:59.688 GRUND
Blocked/faulty
End
↓↑
6-36 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.13 Control at the Menu Tree Level
6.13.1 Navigation in the Menu Tree
Folders and Function Groups

All data points are organized in different folders based on practical control
requirements.
At the root of the menu tree is the unit type; the tree branches into the three
main folders “Settings”, “Measurements & Tests” and “Fault & Event Records”,
which form the first folder level. Up to two further folder levels follow so that the
entire folder structure consists of three main branches and a maximum of three
folder levels.
At the end of each branch of folders are the various function groups in which the
individual data points (settings) are combined.
PX yyy
Unit
type
PX yyy PX yyy PX yyy

Folder Parameters Operation Events
plane 1
Oper/
Folder Cyclic measurements
plane 2
Oper/Cycl/
Folder Meas. operating data
plane 3
Oper/Cycl/Data/
Function MAIN
groups
Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN
Data Date
01.01.16 dd.mm.yy
points
Fig. 6-7: Basic menu tree structure.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-37

6.13.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode

The display on the local control panel can be switched between address mode
and plain text mode. In the address mode the display shows settings, signals,
and measured values in numerically coded form, that is, as addresses. In plain
text mode the settings, signals, and measured values are displayed in the form
of plain text descriptions. In either case, control is guided by the menu tree. The
active branch of the menu tree is displayed in plain text in both modes. In the
following examples, the display is shown in plain text mode only.

Action
Step 0 In this example, the user switches from plain text mode Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device online
to address mode. No (=off)
Step 1 To switch from address mode to plain text mode or vice Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
003.030
versa, press the CLEAR key and either the “left” key or 0
the “right” key simultaneously. This can be done at any
point in the menu tree. +
or
6-38 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.13.3 Change-Enabling Function

Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the
associated value by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the
input mode. This safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings.
There are two ways to enter the input mode.
● Global change-enabling function: To activate the global change-
enabling function, set the LOC: P aram. cha nge enabl. parameter to
Yes (menu tree: Oper/CtrlTest/LOC).
The change can only be made after the password has been entered.
Thereafter, all further changes – with the exception of specially protected
control actions (see Section 6.13.8, (p. 6-53)) – are enabled without
entering the password.
● Selective change-enabling function: Password input prior to any setting
change.
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when
the global change-enabling function has been activated. The following
example is based on the factory-set password. If the password has been
changed by the user (see Section 6.13.9, (p. 6-54)), the following
description will apply accordingly.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-39


Action
Step 0 In the menu tree Oper/CtrlTest/LOC, select the Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

LOC: Param. change enabl. parameter. No
Step 1 Login procedure Cyber Security

insuff. rights
Press the ENTER key. Insufficient rights message is
displayed for 2 seconds.
Select proper user by pressing 'up' and 'down'. Select a user

DefaultOperate
DefaultEngineer
DefaultViewer
or
Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the User Password?
********
display.
Enter the configured password of the selected user. Cyber Security

login successful
Please refer to Section 3.3.2, (p. 3-6) for detailed
information about the compatibility with or without
Cyber Security.
Step 2 The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
indicates that the setting can now be changed by No
pressing the “up” or “down” keys.
Step 3 Change the setting to Yes. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

Yes
Step 4 Press the enter key again. The LED indicator will go out. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
The unit is enabled for further setting changes. Yes
The same procedure applies to any setting change unless the global change-
enabling function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single
setting change only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global
change-enabling function is preferable. In the following examples, the global
change-enabling function has been activated.
6.13.3.1 Automatic Return

The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from
remaining activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set
return time (L O C: Aut om. re tur n time, menu tree “Par/Conf/LOC”) has
elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically deactivated, and the
display switches to a Measured Value Panel corresponding to the current system
condition. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is pressed.
6-40 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.13.3.2 Forced Return

The return described above can be forced from the local control panel by first
pressing the “up” key and then holding it down while pressing the CLEAR key.
It is important to press the “up” key first and release it last in order to avoid
unintentional deletion of stored data.
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all settings can be
changed. For some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function
(MAIN: Prot ect ion e nabled, menu tree: Par/Func/Glob/MAIN). Such settings
include the configuration settings, by means of which the device interfaces can
be adapted to the system. The following entries in the “Change” column of the
“Telegram Documentation” (part of the separately available
“DataModelExplorer”) indicate whether values can be changed or not:
● “on”: The value can be changed even when the protective function is
enabled.
● “off”: The value can only be changed when the protective function is
disabled.
● “–”: The value can be read out but cannot be changed.
The device is factory-set so that the protective function is disabled.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-41

6.13.4 Changing Parameters

If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied, the desired setting can be
entered.
6-42 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661


Action
Step 0 Example of a display. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

In this example, the change-enabling function is Yes
activated and the protective function is disabled, if
necessary.
Step 1 Select the desired setting by pressing the keys. Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
50000 s

insuff. rights

DefaultOperate
DefaultEngineer
DefaultViewer
********
display.

login successful
Cyber Security.
Step 3 he LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
last digit of the value is highlighted by a cursor 50000̲ s
(underlined).
Step 4 Press the “left” or “right” keys to move the cursor to Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
the left or right. 5000̲0 s
Step 5 Change the value highlighted by the cursor by pressing Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
the “up” and “down” keys. In the meantime the device 5001̲0 s
will continue to operate with the old value.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-43


Action
Step 6 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
MODE will go out and the device will now operate with 50010 s
the new value. Press the keys to select another setting
for a value change.
Step 7 If you wish to reject the new setting while you are still Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), 50000 s
press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator will go out and
the device will continue to operate with the old value.
A further setting can be selected for a value change by
pressing the keys.
6-44 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.13.5 List Parameters
6.13.5.1 Setting a List Parameter

Using list settings, the user is able to select several elements from a list in order
to perform tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measurements
that will be displayed on Measured Value Panels. As a rule, the selected elements
are linked by an “OR” operator. Other operators (NOT, OR, AND, NOT OR and
NOT AND) are available in the LOGIC function group for linking the selected list
items. In this way binary signals and binary input signals can be processed in a
Boolean equation tailored to meet user requirements. For the DNP 3.0
communication protocol, the user defines the class of a setting instead of
assigning operators. The definition of a trip command shall be used here as an
illustration.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-45


Action
Step 0 Select a list setting (in this example, the parameter Par/Conf/LOC
Fct.asg. num. displ.
LOC: Fct .a sg. num. di spl. at “Par/Conf/LOC” in the
menu tree). The down arrow (↓) indicates that a list ↓
setting has been selected.
Step 1 Press the “down” key. The first function and the first Par/Conf/LOC
selected signal will appear in the third and fourth lines, #01 MEASO
respectively. The symbol “#01” in the display indicates Current A-1
the first item of the selection. If MA IN: Withou t
funct ion appears for the first item, then this means
that no function assignment has yet been made.
Step 2 Scroll through the list of assigned functions by pressing Par/Conf/LOC

the “right” and “left” keys. OR #02 MAIN
Frequency f,1
Once the end of the list is reached, the display shown Par/Conf/LOC
on the right will appear. #05 MAIN
?????
Step 3 Press the ENTER key at any position in the list. The LED Par/Conf/LOC
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. #02 MAIN
Frequency f,1
Step 4 Scroll through the assignable functions by pressing the Par/Conf/LOC

“right” and “left” keys in the input mode. #02 MAIN
Angle phi N,1
Step 5 Select the operator or the class using the “up” and Par/Conf/LOC
“down“ keys. In this particular case, only the “OR” OR #02 MAIN
operator can be selected. There is no limitation on the Angle phi N,1
selection of classes.
Step 6 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator will go out. The Par/Conf/LOC
assignment has been made. The unit will now operate OR #02 MAIN
with the new settings. Angle phi N,1
If no operator has been selected, the “OR” operator is
always assigned automatically when the ENTER key is
pressed. There is no automatic assignment of classes.
Step 7 Press the “up” key to exit the list at any point in the Par/Conf/LOC
list.
↓
Step 8 If you wish to reject the new setting while you are still Par/Conf/LOC
entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), OR #02 MAIN
press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT Frequency f,1
MODE will be extinguished.
6-46 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.13.5.2 Deleting a List Parameter

If MAIN: With out fun cti on is assigned to a given item, then all the following
items are deleted. If this occurs for item #01, everything is deleted.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-47

6.13.6 Memory Readout

Memories can be read out after going to the corresponding entry point. This does
not necessitate activating the change-enabling function or even disabling the
protective functions. Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not
possible.
The following memories are available:
● In the menu tree “Oper/Rec/OP_RC”: Operating data memory
● In the menu tree “Oper/Rec/MT_RC”: Monitoring signal memory
● Event memories
o In the menu tree “Events/Rec/FT_RC”: Fault memories 1 to 8
o In the menu tree “Events/Rec/OL_RC”: Overload memories 1 to 8
Not all of these event memories are present in each unit.
6.13.6.1 Readout of the Operating Data Memory

The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during
operation, such as the enabling or disabling of a device function. A maximum of
100 entries is possible, after which the oldest entry is overwritten.

Action
Step 0 Select the entry point for the operating data memory. Oper/Rec/OP_RC
Step 1 Press the “down” key to enter the operating data Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 ARC
memory. The latest entry is displayed. Enabled USER
No
Step 2 Press the “left” key repeatedly to display the entries Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 PSIG
one after the other in chronological order. Once the Enabled USER
end of the operating data memory has been reached, Yes
pressing the “left” key again will have no effect.
Step 3 Press the “right” key to display the previous entry. Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 ARC
Enabled USER
No
Step 4 Press the “up” key at any point within the operating Oper/Rec/OP_RC
data memory to return to the entry point.
↓
6-48 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.13.6.2 Readout of the Monitoring Signal Memory

If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring
routines or if it detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning
of the unit, then an entry is made in the monitoring signal memory. A maximum
of 30 entries is possible. After that an “overflow” signal is issued.

Action
Step 0 Select the entry point for the monitoring signal Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
memory.
↓
Step 1 Press the “down” key to enter the monitoring signal Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 13:33 SFMON
memory. The oldest entry is displayed. Checksum error param
Step 2 Press the “right” key repeatedly to display the entries Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 10:01 SFMON
one after the other in chronological order. If more than Exception oper. syst.
30 monitoring signals have been entered since the last
reset, the “overflow” signal is displayed as the last
entry.
Step 3 Press the “left” key to display the previous entry. Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 13:33 SFMON
Checksum error param
Step 4 If the “down” key is held down while a monitoring Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 13:33 SFMON
signal is being displayed, the following additional Checksum error param
information will be displayed:
● First First: 13:33:59.744

Updated: Yes
Time when the signal first occurred
Acknowledged: No
● Updated Number: 5
The fault is still being detected (Yes) or is no
longer detected (No) by the self-monitoring
function.
● Acknowledged
The fault was no longer detected by the self-
monitoring function and has been reset (Yes).
● Number
The signal occurred x times.
Step 5 Press the “up” key at any point within the monitoring Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
signal memory to return to the entry point.
↓
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-49

6.13.6.3 Readout of the Event Memories (Records)

There are eight event memories for each type of event. The latest event is stored
in event memory 1, the previous one in event memory 2, and so forth.
Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example.

Action
Step 0 Select the entry point for the first fault memory, for Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
example. If the memory contains entries, the third line 01.01.13 10:00:33
of the display will show the date and time the fault ↓
began. If the third line is blank, then there are no entries
in the fault memory.
Step 1 Press the “down” key to enter the fault memory. First, Fault recording 1
FT_RC
the fault number is shown. In this example it is the 22nd Event
fault since the last reset. 22
Step 2 Press the “right” key repeatedly to see first the Fault recording 1
200 ms FT_DA
measured fault data and then the binary signals in Running time
chronological order. The time shown in the second line is 0.17 s
the time, measured from the onset of the fault, at which
the value was measured or the binary signal started or Fault recording 1
ended. 0 ms FT_RC
Record. in progress
Once the end of the fault has been reached (after the Start
“right” key has been pressed repeatedly), pressing the
“right” key again will have no effect.
Fault recording 1
241 ms FT_RC
Record. in progress
End
Step 3 Press the “left” key to see the previous measured value Fault recording 1
0 ms FT_RC
or the previous signal. Record. in progress
Start
Step 4 Press the “up” key at any point within the fault memory Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
to return to the entry point. 01.01.13 10:00:33
↓
6-50 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.13.7 Resetting
All information memories – including the event memories and the monitoring
signal memory – as well as the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition,
the LED indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new
fault – provided that the appropriate operating mode has been selected – so that
they always indicate the latest fault.
The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which
is always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED
indicator test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by
this action, so that inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset
signal pattern is reliably prevented.
Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight
consecutive events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should
not be necessary, in principle.
Deleting the event memories completely (e.g. after a function test), can be
accomplished by various resetting actions including the configuration of a group
resetting for several memories. An overview of all resetting actions can be found
in section “Resetting Actions” in Chapter “Operation”.
Resetting a single memory from the local control panel is described in the
following with the example of a fault memory. In this example the global change-
enabling function has already been activated.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-51


Action
Step 0 Select the reset setting. Line 3 of the display shows the Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
number of faults since the last reset, 10 in this 10
example.

insuff. rights

DefaultOperate
DefaultEngineer
DefaultViewer
********
display.

login successful
Cyber Security.
Step 2 The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
Don't execute
Step 3 Press the “Up” or “Down” keys to change the setting to Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
Execute. 10
Execute
Step 4 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
MODE will be extinguished. The value in line 3 is reset 0
to 0.
Step 5 To cancel the intended clearing of the fault recordings Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
after leaving the standard control mode (the LED 10
indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR
key. The LED indicator will be extinguished, and the
fault recordings remain stored unchanged in the
protection unit’s memory. Any setting can be selected
again for a value change by pressing the keys.
6-52 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.13.8 Password-Protected Control Actions

Certain actions from the local control panel such as a manual trip command for
testing purposes can only be carried out by entering a password so as to prevent
unwanted output even though the global change-enabling function has been
activated (see Section 6.13.3, (p. 6-39)).
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the
global change-enabling function has been activated. The password consists of a
pre-defined sequential key combination entered within a specific time interval. If
the password has been changed by the user (see Section 6.13.9, (p. 6-54)), the
following description will apply accordingly.

Action
Step 0 In the menu tree “Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN”, select the Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man.M-trip cmd USER
parameter MAI N: Man .M-trip cmd USER. Don't execute

insuff. rights

DefaultOperate
DefaultEngineer
DefaultViewer
or
********
display.

login successful
Cyber Security.
Step 2 The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man.M-trip cmd USER
indicates that the setting can now be changed by Don't execute
pressing the “up” or “down” keys.
Step 3 Change the setting to execute. Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man.M-trip cmd USER
Execute
Step 4 Press the enter key again. The LED indicator labeled Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man.M-trip cmd USER
EDIT MODE will go out. The unit will execute the Don't execute
command.
Step 5 As long as the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on, Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man.M-trip cmd USER
the control action can be terminated by pressing the Don't execute
CLEAR key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will
be extinguished.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-53

6.13.9 Changing the Password

The following presentation of changing the password, is related to the device
without Cyber Security.
For device with Cyber Security functionality, the CAE tool has to be used. Please
refer to Cyber Security Commission for detailed information (see Section 10.2.2,
(p. 10-7)).
6.13.9.1 Local Control Panel with Password Protection

The password consists of a combination of keys that must be entered
sequentially within a specific time interval. The “left”, “right”, “up” and “down”
keys may be used to define the password and represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 and
4, respectively:
1 2
6-54 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661


Action
Step 0 In the menu tree “Par/Conf/LOC”, select the Par/Conf/LOC

Password
LOC: Password setting. ********

insuff. rights

DefaultOperate
DefaultEngineer
DefaultViewer
or
********
display.

login successful
Cyber Security.
Step 2 The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The Par/Conf/LOC
Password
third line shows an underscore character ( _ ) as the _
prompt for entering a new password.
Step 3 Enter the new password, which in this example is done Par/Conf/LOC
Password
by pressing the “up” key followed by the “down” key. *
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
Step 4 Press the enter key again. Asterisks appear in the third Par/Conf/LOC
Password
line, and a cursor (underscore) in the fourth line **
prompts the user to enter the new password again. _
Step 5 Re-enter the password. Par/Conf/LOC

Password
**
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
**
Step 6a Press the ENTER key again. If the password has been Par/Conf/LOC
Password
re-entered correctly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT ********
MODE goes out and the display appears as shown on
the right. The new Password is now valid.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-55


Action
Step 6b If the password has been re-entered incorrectly, the Par/Conf/LOC

Password
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE remains on and the **
display shown on the right appears. The password has _
to be re-entered. It is also possible to cancel the
change of the Password by pressing the CLEAR key (see
Step 8).
Step 7 The change in password can be canceled at any time Par/Conf/LOC

Password
before Step 6 by pressing the CLEAR key. If this is ********
done, the original Password continues to be valid.
6.13.9.2 Local Control Panel without Password Protection

Operation from the local control panel without password protection is also
possible. To select this option, immediately press the ENTER key a second time in
steps 4 and 6 of Table, (p. 6-55), without entering anything else. This will
configure the local control panel without password protection, and no control
actions involving changes will be possible until the global change-enabling
function has been activated (see “Change-Enabling Function”, Section 6.13.3,
(p. 6-39)).
6-56 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.13.9.3 Changing and Displaying the L/R Password

In order to enable local control on devices fitted with the graphic display HMI
(ordering option) the L/R password has to be entered.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-57


Action
Step 0 In the menu tree “Par/Conf/LOC”, select the Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
LOC: Password L/R setting. ********

insuff. rights

DefaultOperate
DefaultEngineer
DefaultViewer
or
********
display.

login successful
Cyber Security.
Step 2 The red LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will be Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
illuminated. The current Password L/R will appear in the 1423
third line.
Step 3 Enter the new password, which in this example is done Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
by pressing the “up” key followed by the “down” key. *
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
**
Step 4 Press the enter key again. Asterisks appear in the third Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
line, and a cursor (underscore) in the fourth line **
prompts the user to enter the new Password L/R again. _
Step 5 Re-enter the new Password L/R. Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
**
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
**
**
6-58 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661


Action
Step 6a Press the ENTER key again. If the new Password L/R has Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
been re-entered correctly, the red LED indicator labeled ********
EDIT MODE will be extinguished and the display
appears as shown on the right. The new Password L/R is
now valid.
Step 6b If the new Password L/R has been re-entered Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
incorrectly, the red LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE
**
remains illuminated and the display shown on the right _
hand side appears. The new Password L/R needs to be
re-entered. It is also possible to cancel the change of
the Password L/R by pressing the CLEAR key (see Step
8).
Step 7 The change of the Password L/R can be canceled at any Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
time before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR key. If this is ********
done, the original Password L/R continues to be valid.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 6-59

6-60 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
7 Settings
7.1 Parameters
The P638 must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by
appropriate settings. This chapter gives instructions for determining the settings,
which are located in the folder titled “Parameters” in the menu tree. The
sequence in which the settings are listed and described in this chapter
corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree.
The P638 devices are supplied with a factory-set standard configuration of
settings that, in most cases, correspond to the default settings or become
apparent after a “cold restart”. The P638 is blocked in that case. All settings
must be re-entered after a cold restart.
Note
Detailed information about all parameters, including complete selection tables and
IEC 60870‑5‑103 protocol properties, are separately available as a set of interlinked
PDF files for user-friendly navigation, packed in one ZIP archive named
DataModelExplorer_P638_en_P01.zip.
In contrast to P638 versions before P638‑630, the implementation of the IEC 61850
protocol now features parameters that cannot be modified from the local control
panel (HMI) or with the operating program. Instead, these parameters are set with
a special IEC 61850 operating software, named “IED Configurator”.
Therefore these settings are not listed in this chapter or the following chapter.
These parameters are described in Chapter “IEC 61850 Settings via IED
Configurator”.
Cancelling a Protection or Control Function

The user can adapt the device to the requirements of a particular high-voltage
system by including the relevant protection or control functions in the device
configuration and cancelling all others (removing them from the device
configuration).
The following conditions must be met before cancelling a protection or control
function:
● The protection or control function in question must be disabled.
● None of the functions of the protection or control function to be cancelled
may be assigned to a binary input.
● None of the signals of the protection or control function may be assigned to
a binary output or an LED indicator.
● No functions of the device function being cancelled can be selected in a list
setting.
● None of the signals of the protection or control function may be linked to
other signals by way of an “m out of n” parameter.
The protection or control function to which a parameter, a signal, or a measured
value belongs is defined by the function group designation (example: “LIMIT:”).
General Notes on the Configuration of Function Group “Binary Input” (INP)

The P638 has optical coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the
system. The number and connection schemes for the available binary inputs are
shown in the terminal connection diagrams. The “DataModelExplorer” (available
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-1

P638 7 Settings
as a separate ZIP archive file) gives information about the configuration options
for all binary inputs.
The P638 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O
module is not installed or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum
number possible at this slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing
binary signal inputs are automatically hidden in the menu tree.
When configuring binary inputs, one should keep in mind that the same function
can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from
several control points having different signal voltages.
The configuration in slots A and B and the configuration for the binary inputs
U C01 to U C08 will be changed with the selection of a new bay type. (Whether
automatic configuration occurs, is defined in the setting MA IN: Auto-
assignme nt I /O.) Depending on the connection type chosen for the P638 – pin-
type or ring-type cable socket terminals – the symbolic slots A, B and C refer to
the following slots:
Symbolic slot Pin-type cable socket terminals Ring-type cable socket terminals
A 06 12
B 07 14
C 08 16
The configuration of binary inputs for each bay type – in the case of auto-
assignment – is given in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.
In the case of auto-assignment, the following notes apply:
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that the binary inputs at slots A and B
as well as the binary inputs U C01 to U C08 are configured for functions from the
DEVxx function groups only. Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new
bay type will not be activated.
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that all binary inputs specified in the
List of Bay types for the selected bay type are actually available in the device.
Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new bay type will not be
activated.
In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering
signals must persist for at least 30 ms. The operating mode for each binary
signal input can be defined.
The user can specify whether the presence (active ‘high’ mode) or absence
(active ‘low’ mode) of a voltage shall be interpreted as the logic “1” signal.
General Notes on the Configuration of Function Group “Binary Output” (OUTP)

The P638 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number and
connection schemes for the available binary output relays are shown in the
terminal connection diagrams. The “DataModelExplorer” (available as a separate
ZIP archive file) gives information about the configuration options for all binary
outputs.
The P638 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O
module is not installed or has fewer output relays than the maximum number
possible at this slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing output
relays are automatically hidden in the menu tree.
7-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as
command relays or as signal relays. It is important to note that the contact rating
of the binary I/O modules (X) varies (see Chapter “Technical Data”). One signal
can also be assigned simultaneously to several output relays for the purpose of
contact multiplication.
Selecting a new bay type can change the configuration for slots A and B.
(Whether automatic configuration occurs, is defined in the setting MA IN : Auto-
assignme nt I/O.) Depending on the connection type chosen for the P638 – pin-
type or ring-type cable socket terminals – the symbolic slots A and B correspond
to the following slots:
Symbolic slot Pin-type cable socket terminals Ring-type cable socket terminals
A 06 12
B 07 14
The configuration of output relays for each bay type – in the case of auto-
assignment – is given in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.
In the case of auto-assignment, the following notes apply:
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that the output relays at slots A and B
are configured for functions from the DEVxx function groups only. Otherwise there
will be an error message, and the new bay type will not be activated.
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that all output relays specified in the
List of Bay types for the selected bay type are actually available in the device.
Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new bay type will not be
activated.
An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. Depending on the
selected operating mode, the output relay will operate in either an energize-on-
signal (ES) mode or a normally-energized (NE) mode and in either a latching or
non-latching mode. For output relays operating in latching mode, the operating
mode setting also determines when latching will be cancelled.
General Notes on the Configuration of the LED Indicators

The P638 has LED indicators for parallel display of binary signals. LED indicator
H 1 is not configurable. It is labeled “HEALTHY” and signals the operational
readiness of the protection unit (supply voltage present). LED indicators H 2 and
H 3 are not configurable either. H 2 is labeled “OUT OF SERVICE” and signals a
blocking or malfunction; H 3 is labeled “ALARM” and signals a warning alarm.
LED indicator H 17 indicates that the user is in the “EDIT MODE”. Section
“Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators (Function Group LED)”
in Chapter “Operation” describes the layout of the LED indicators and the factory
setting for LED indicator H 4.
An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the set
operating mode, the LED indicator will operate in either energize-on-signal (ES)
mode (“open-circuit principle”) or normally-energized (NE) mode (“closed-circuit
principle”) and in either latching or non-latching mode. For LED indicators
operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines when
latching will be cancelled.
With the multi-color LED indicators the colors red and green can be
independently assigned with functions. The third color amber results as a
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-3

P638 7 Settings
mixture of red and green, i.e. when both functions assigned to the LED indicator
are simultaneously present.
7.1.1 Device Identification

The device identification settings are used to record the ordering information and
the design version of the P638. They have no effect on the device functions.
These settings should only be changed if the design version of the P638 is
modified.
7-4 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Default Min Max Unit Logic Diagram
Device DVICE: De vice t ype 000 000
638 0 1000
[spacer]
The device type is displayed. This display cannot be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: S oft ware ve rsi on 1X X 024 219
Not measured 0 65535
[spacer]
The setting defines the software version of the device. This display cannot be
altered.
[spacer] DVICE: S W date 002 122
1997-01-01 1997-01 2098-11 dd.mm.yy

-01 -08
[spacer]
Date the software was created. This display cannot be altered.
Note: The centuries are not displayed. The supported dates range from January
1st, 1997, until November 7th, 2098.
[spacer] DVICE: S W ve rsion communic. 002 103
Not measured 0.00 655.35
[spacer]
Software version for the device's communication software. This display cannot
be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: S W ve rs. Ethe rne t 025 185
[spacer]
Software version for the device's Ethernet software. This display cannot be
altered.
Note: "Not measured" means either no communication board available or the
firmware IEC 61850 is not started or an failure during startup.
[spacer] DVICE: DM I EC 618 50 ve rsion 002 059
[spacer]
Software version of the communication software based on the device's protocol
per IEC 61850. This display cannot be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: Text vers .dat a mode l 002 121
0 0 255
[spacer]
Using the ‘text replacement tool' provided by the operating program, the user
can change the parameter descriptors (plain text designations) and load them
into the device. These customized data models contain an identifier defined by
the user while preparing the data model. This identifier is displayed at this point
in the menu tree. Standard data models have the identifier ‘0' (factory-set
default).
[spacer] DVICE: Lang uage v ersion 002 123
800.0 0.0 899.9
[spacer]
Identification of the change level of the texts of the data model. This display
cannot be altered.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-5

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DVICE: F numb er 002 124
0 0 9999
[spacer]
The F number is the serial number of the device. The display cannot be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: AFS Order No. 001 000
0:
[spacer] DVICE: PCS Or de r No. 001 200
0:
[spacer]
Order numbers for the device. The user cannot alter this number.
[spacer] DVICE: Order ext . No. 1 000 003
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
7-6 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
[spacer]
Order extension numbers for the device.
[spacer] DVICE: M odule v ar. slot 1 086 050
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-7

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DVICE: M odule var. slot 6 086 055
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
[spacer] DVICE: M odule var. slot 1 0 086 059
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of the module inserted in the respective slot 1 to 21.
The display always shows the actual component configuration at any given time.
[spacer] DVICE: M odule vers . slot 1 086 193
27: Not fitted
[spacer] DVICE: M odule vers . slot 2 086 194
27: Not fitted
7-8 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 3 086 195
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
[spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 1 0 086 202
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-9

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DVICE: M odule vers . slot 2 1 086 213
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of the module fitted in the respective slot.
[spacer] DVICE: Variant of module A 086 047
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of module A in this design version.
[spacer] DVICE: Vers ion of module A 086 190
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of module A.
[spacer] DVICE: Variant of module L 086 048
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of module L in this design version.
[spacer] DVICE: Vers ion of module L 086 191
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of module L.
[spacer] DVICE: Variant of module B 086 049
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of module B in this design version.
[spacer] DVICE: Vers ion of module B 086 192
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.
[spacer] DVICE: Variant module B (a) 086 046
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of the analog bus module B in this design version.
[spacer] DVICE: Vers ion m odul e B (a) 086 189
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.
[spacer] DVICE: IP addres s 111 000
2:
[spacer] DVICE: S ubnet mas k 111 001
2:
7-10 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] DVICE: M AC address 111 003
2:
[spacer]
Display of the IP address (or subnet mask, MAC address, respectively) of the
Ethernet interface of the processor module. This can be useful for network
analysis, especially if these settings have been retrieved via DHCP.
[spacer] DVICE: Cust omer ID data 1 000 040
0.00 0.00 99.99
0.00 0.00 99.99
0.00 0.00 99.99
0.00 0.00 99.99
0.00 0.00 99.99
0.00 0.00 99.99
0.00 0.00 99.99
0.00 0.00 99.99
[spacer]
Set your numerically coded user data here for your records.
[spacer] DVICE: Location 001 201
0:
[spacer]
Reference input for the device's location as selected by user.
[spacer] DVICE: De vice ID 000 035
0 0 9999
[spacer]
ID code for use by the PC programs for operating and setting. Further
instructions on this setting are given in the description of the respective
operating program.
[spacer] DVICE: S ubst ation ID 000 036
0 0 9999
[spacer]
operating program.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-11

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DVICE: Fee de r ID 000 037
0 0 9999
[spacer]
operating program.
[spacer] DVICE: De vice p assword 1 000 048
0 0 9999
[spacer] DVICE: De vice p assword 2 000 049
0 0 9999
[spacer]
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See
description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting
instructions.
[spacer] DVICE: S W ve rsion DHMI 002 131
[spacer] DVICE: S W ve rsion DHMI DM 002 132
1.10 0.00 655.35
[spacer] DVICE: S W ve rs.Chin.DHMI DM 008 233
2.00 0.00 655.35
[spacer]
Internal software version numbers.
Parameter Address
Local control panel LOC: Local HM I ex is ts 221 099
1: Yes
[spacer]
When set to Yes it is apparent that the device is fitted with the local control
panel (HMI).
7-12 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
7.1.2 Configuration Parameters
Parameter Address
Cyber Security CS: Cyb erSe curi ty Ver s. 180 031
2 0 65535
[spacer]
Version of Cyber Security implementation within the device. Easergy MiCOM 30
is starting with value 2 to be compatible with other Schneider Electric devices.
[spacer] CS: Num ber of us e rs 180 002
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Actual number of users in RBAC configuration.
[spacer] CS: Comms log out 180 032
0: don't execute
[spacer]
If executed, the current logged in user at PC port or via Tunneling interface is
logged out (can be only executed by Comms).
[spacer] CS: HM I logout 180 033
0: don't execute
[spacer]
If executed, the current logged in user at HMI interface is logged out (can be
only executed by HMI).
[spacer] CS: Comms us ername 180 043
0:
[spacer]
Display of the name of the user which is logged in either at PC-port or via
Tunneling.
[spacer] CS: HM I us ername 180 034
0:
[spacer]
Display of the name of the user which is logged in at HMI.
[spacer] CS: Us e r acces s role 180 013
0:
[spacer]
Role(s) of user which is actually logged in. It will be set by the device after
successful login and will be cleared when user is logged off. Of the first 5 roles of
a user, the first 3 chars of the roles names will be displayed separated with one
blank between each.
[spacer] CS: Max log in at te mpts 180 011
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Number of possible login attempts or blocked (blocked means no limitation of
attempts).
[spacer] CS: Log in at te mpt s l eft 180 010
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Remaining login attempts.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-13

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] CS: Blocking time 180 015
0 0 1800 s
[spacer]
Time how long login shall be blocked after erroneous login attempts or blocked
(blocked means it will not getting active).
[spacer] CS: Block time left 180 012
0 0 1800 s
[spacer]
Remaining blocking login time after erroneous login attempts.
[spacer] CS: Res ult E PW s ett ing 180 041
0 -5 0
[spacer]
Display of a value to informe on the result of the password setting. (EPW =
Encrypted Password)
[spacer] CS: Change p inco de 180 003
0 0 0
[spacer]
Change the PIN code using the navigation keys of the HMI. It is not necessary at
[spacer] CS: Config dis abled 180 044
1: Yes
[spacer]
Configure disabled or not.
[spacer] CS: Recovery Pass wor d 180 014
0:
[spacer]
Display of the Token and allow entry for reset to factory password.
[spacer] CS: Res et RBAC 180 045
12 1 12
[spacer]
Only on HMI. Starting reset timer and display code.
7-14 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Configurable func‐ F_KEY: Fct. ass i gnm. F1 080 112
tion keys
061 000: MAIN: Without function
[spacer] F_KEY: Fct. ass i gnm. F2 080 113
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to the function keys. Either a single function or a menu
jump list may be selected. There are two menu jump lists, which are assembled
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp lis t 1 or LO C: F ct . me nu jmp list 2,
respectively.
[spacer] F_KEY: Oper ating mode F 1 080 132
1: Key
1: Key
1: Key
1: Key
1: Key
1: Key
[spacer]
Choice between operation of the function key as a key or switch.
[spacer] F_KEY: Re tur n time fct .k e ys 003 037
60 60 60000 s
[spacer]
Once the password has been entered, the function keys remain active for no
longer than this time. Thereafter, the function keys are disabled until the
password is entered again.
[spacer] F_KEY: Pas s wor d funct. key 1 003 036
0 0 4444
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-15

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] F_KEY: Pas s word funct. key 2 030 242
0 0 4444
0 0 4444
0 0 4444
0 0 4444
0 0 4444
[spacer]
Definition of the password for enabling the function keys.
7-16 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Local control panel LOC: Languag e (tongue ) 003 020
2: English
[spacer]
Language in which texts will be displayed on the user interface (HMI).
[spacer] LOC: De cim al de limit er 003 021
1: Dot
[spacer]
Character to be used as decimal delimiter on the local control panel.
[spacer] LOC: Dis pl. ex t.de v.de sig 221 032
1: With Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the external device designations shall be displayed
on the Bay Panel.
[spacer] LOC: Dis play L/ R 221 070
1: With Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-11)

Fig. 3-4, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the control site – “Local” or “Remote” – shall be
displayed on the bay panel.
[spacer] LOC: Dis pl. inte rl. stat . 221 071
1: With Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-11)

Fig. 3-4, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the “Locked” or “Unlocked” status shall be
displayed on the bay panel.
[spacer] LOC: Pas s word 003 035
1234 0 4444
[spacer]
The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel can
be defined here.
[spacer] LOC: Pas s word L / R 221 040
1423 0 4444
[spacer]
The password used to change the setting from “Remote” to “Local” control can
be defined here. (Switching from “Local” to “Remote” control occurs without
checking the password.)
[spacer] LOC: Bus bar1 Name by Use r 218 191
0:
[spacer] LOC: De signation busbar 1 221 033
1: BB1 Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-11)
0:
2: BB2 Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-11)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-17

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0:
3: BB3 Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
Setting for the busbar designations to be displayed on the Bay Panel. At
LOC: Bus bar1 Name by Use r any text (max. 3 characters) may be
entered which will then be used as the designation, if the associated parameter
LOC: De signat ion busbar 1 has been set to BB-User Name. When
instead one of the pre-defined designations is selected at L OC: Designat ion
busbar 1 it will be used and L OC : Busbar 1 Name by User will be
ignored. A designation with more than 3 characters is internally truncated. (The
same is true of BB2,...)
[spacer] LOC: BB S ect.1-Name Use r 218 195
0:
[spacer] LOC: De signat. bus se ct .1 221 035
1: BSa Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-11)
[spacer] LOC: BB S ect.2-Name Use r 218 196
0:
[spacer] LOC: De signat. bus se ct .2 221 036
2: BSb Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
Setting for the busbar section designations to be displayed on the Bay Panel. At
LOC: BB S ect.1-Name Use r any text (max 3 characters) may be entered
which will then be used as the designation, if the associated parameter
LOC: De signat. bus se ct .1 has been set to BB-Sect.User Name. When
one of the pre-defined designations is selected at LOC: De signat. bus
sect.1 it will be used and LOC : BB S ect .1 -Na meUse r will be ignored. A
designation with more than 3 characters is internally truncated. (The same is
true of busbar section 2.)
[spacer] LOC: Character se t 221 038
1: Character set 1 Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
The user can choose between several character sets to represent switchgear
and their switching states on the Bay Panel.
Note: Character set 3 is identical to character set 1 in the factory default
setting, but can be replaced by an user-defined character set, by applying an
accessory tool to the operating program.
[spacer] LOC: Fct. re set ke y 005 251
060 000: MAIN: Without function Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-113)
[spacer]
Selection of counters and memories that are reset by pressing the RESET key on
the local control panel. (Resetting LED indicators and measured event values is
permanently assigned internally, so that they are always reset when the RESET
key is pressed.)
7-18 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOC: Fct. re ad ke y 080 110
[spacer]
Selection of up to 16 functions to be triggered when pressing the read key.
Event counters and event recordings are offered for selection. If several
functions have been selected then they will be sequentially triggered by
repeated pressing of the read key.
[spacer] LOC: Oper ation mode 011 240
0: LOC Direct
[spacer]
This setting defines which of the three implemented operating modes the P638
shall use for the local control of switchgear units via LOC.
[spacer] LOC: SI reque st 221 118
1: Yes
[spacer]
This setting defines whether or not the check of the interlock equations, that is
carried out with the local control of switchgear units, also includes a check of
station interlocking.
[spacer] LOC: Fct. ass ign. L/R k e y 225 208
1: R <-> L Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the (electric) key-operated switch switches
between remote / local control (L↔R) or between remote+local control / local
control (R&L↔L).
[spacer] LOC: Fct. m enu jmp li st 1 030 238
[spacer] LOC: Fct. m enu jmp li st 2 030 239
[spacer]
Selection of specified functions which will be sequentially displayed by repeated
reading of the menu jump list 1 (or 2).
[spacer] LOC: Fct. Operat ion P anel 053 007
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel also
referred to as the Operation Panel.
[spacer] LOC: Fct. Ove r lo ad Pane l 053 005
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel.
[spacer] LOC: Fct. Sig nal P anel 221 072
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Signal Panel.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-19

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOC: Aut.activ.S ign.P ane l 221 073
0: Activation off Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-13)
[spacer]
Activation of the automatic switching to the Signal Panel at every change of
state of a configured signal.
[spacer] LOC: St at.ind.S ign.P anel 221 074
1: Filled box Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-13)
[spacer]
Definition of display type of active / inactive signals on the Signal Panel.
[spacer] LOC: Indicat.S ign .P anel 221 075
0: Without signalling Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-13)
[spacer]
Definition of signal type at change of state and response to an acknowledge
command.
[spacer] LOC: Sig n.caus .S ign.P anel 221 078
1: All status changes Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-13)
[spacer]
Definition of cause for signaling (every change of state / incoming signals only).
[spacer] LOC: Fct. Fault Panel 053 003
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel.
[spacer] LOC: Fct.as g. num. dis pl. 221 041
[spacer]
Definition of the measured values to be displayed on the Bay Panel in numerical
form.
[spacer] LOC: Fct. asg . b ar displ. 221 042
[spacer]
Definition of the measured values to be displayed on the Bay Panel in bar form.
Note: Measured values to be displayed in bar chart form must also be selected
for display as numerical measured values. However, not all measured values
that can be displayed in numerical form can also be displayed in bar chart form!
In such cases, a dummy or placeholder must be included in the selection list for
the bar chart display at the same point at which a measured value that cannot
be displayed in bar chart form appears in the selection list for numerical
measured values.
Example: Current IB is to be displayed. In this case, either the primary current
IB or the per-unit current IB shall be selected for the numerical display. The per-
unit current IB shall be entered at the same position in the selection list for the
bar chart display.
[spacer] LOC: Bar disp lay ty pe 221 039
0: No bar display Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
Disabling the bar chart display or definition of the orientation of the bar chart to
display measured values on the Bay Panel.
7-20 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOC: Scal. bar dis play I 221 044
1: 1.2 Inom Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
Scaling of measured current values to be displayed in bar chart form.
[spacer] LOC: Scal. bar dis play V 221 045
1: 1.2 Vnom Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
Scaling of measured voltage values to be displayed in bar chart form.
[spacer] LOC: Dis play b ar scale 221 046
1: Yes Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
Setting this window can disable the scalable bar chart.
[spacer] LOC: Hold- tim e for P anels 031 075
5 1 10 s Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-13)

Fig. 3-6, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
Setting for the time period during which a panel is displayed, before switching to
the next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are selected than can
be shown on the LC-Display.
[spacer] LOC: Hold- t. meas.v. dis pl 031 072
Blocked 1 60 s
[spacer]
Always when the time period set here has elapsed the next value will be shown
on the Bay Panel display. With a setting to Blocked this automatic switching
forward to the next measured value will be deactivated. Independent of this the
next or the previous configured measured value may be selected by pressing
the keys “cursor down” or “cursor up”.
[spacer] LOC: Autom . re t ur n t ime 003 014
60 60 60000 s Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-13)

Fig. 3-6, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set time
period, the change-enabling function is deactivated.
[spacer] LOC: Re t ur n time selec t. 221 030
60 60 60000 s Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-11)

Fig. 3-4, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
period, then the selection of a switchgear unit is cancelled.
[spacer] LOC: Re t ur n time illumi n. 003 023
60 60 60000 s Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-11)

Fig. 3-4, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
period, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-21

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
PC link PC: Bay addre ss 003 068
1 0 254 Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-19)
[spacer] PC: De vice addr ess 003 069
1 0 255 Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in communication via
the PC interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses.
[spacer] PC: Baud rate 003 081
115.2: 115.2 kBaud Baud Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Baud rate of the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: Parit y bit 003 181
1: Even Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the P638.
[spacer] PC: Spontan. sig. e nable 003 187
0: None Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: Select. s pontan. si g. 003 189
[spacer]
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: Trans m.enab.cyc l. dat 003 084
0: Without Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: Cycl. d ata ILS t e l. 003 185
[spacer]
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined
telegram via the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: De lta V 003 055
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Vnom Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the
set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta I 003 056
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Inom Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the
set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
7-22 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] PC: De lta P 003 059
15.0 0.0 15.0 %Snom Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
The active power value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set
delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta f 003 057
2.0 0.0 2.0 %fnom Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by
the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta T 003 156
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Tref
[spacer]
The measured temperature value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs
by more than the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta Z 003 157
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Zref
[spacer]
The measured operating impedance value is transmitted via the PC interface if it
differs by more than the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta phi 003 158
3.0 0.0 15.0 %phi,ref
[spacer]
The measured load angle value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by
more than the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta meas.v.ILS te l 003 155
3.0 0.0 15.0 Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity
from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta t 003 058
1 0 15 min Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
All measured values are transmitted again via the PC interface after this time
period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered by the
other delta conditions.
[spacer] PC: Time-out 003 188
1 1 60 min Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Setting for the time to elapse after the last telegram exchange via the PC
interface before activating the second communication channel of
communication module A.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-23

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 1: Function gr oup CO MM1 056 026
communication
interface 1
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
[spacer] COMM 1: General enabl e USE R 003 170
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling communication interface 1.
[spacer] COMM 1: Basic IEC87 0-5 e nabl 003 215
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx.
[spacer] COMM 1: Addit . - 10 1 e nable 003 216
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on
IEC 870-5-101.
[spacer] COMM 1: Addit . I LS e nable 003 217
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol.
[spacer] COMM 1: MODB US e nable 003 220
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol.
[spacer] COMM 1: DNP3 enable 003 231
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Enabling settings relevant for the DNP 3.0 protocol.
[spacer] COMM 1: COUR IER e nable 103 040
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Enabling settings relevant for the COURIER protocol.
[spacer] COMM 1: Com m unicat. prot ocol 003 167
[spacer]
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication
interface.
7-24 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: -103 pr ot. var iant 003 178
1: Private Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
The user may select between two variants of the 103 protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-xxx protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: MODB US prot . variant 003 214
1: Compatible Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-25)
[spacer]
The user may select between two variants of the MODBUS protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Line idle stat e 003 165
1: Light on / high Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-25)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-26)
Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-27)
[spacer]
Setting for the line idle state indication.
[spacer] COMM 1: Baud rat e 003 071
19.2: 19.2 kBaud Baud Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-25)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-26)
Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-27)
[spacer]
Baud rate of the communication interface.
[spacer] COMM 1: Parity bit 003 171
2: Even Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-25)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-26)
Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-27)
[spacer]
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system connected
to the P638.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-25

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Dead t ime moni toring 003 176
1: Yes Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-25)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-26)
Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-27)
[spacer]
The P638 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive pause
occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not
required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
[spacer] COMM 1: Mon. tim e pol ling 003 202
25 3 254 s Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-25)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-26)
Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-27)
[spacer]
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less
than the time set here.
[spacer] COMM 1: Octet comm. addre ss 003 072
1 0 254 Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-25)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-26)
Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-27)
[spacer]
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
“ASDU”: Application Service Data Unit
[spacer] COMM 1: Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP 3 003 240
0 0 255 Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-26)
[spacer]
In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16-bit address is used to identify devices.
The address that can be set here is the higher-order octet, whereas the address
set at COM M1: Octet comm. addr ess is the lower-order octet of the
DNP address.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
7-26 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Pos. acknowle dge me nt 103 060
1: Single character E5
[spacer]
The following transmission frame formats are available (according to the
standard):
● Short message FT 1.2: short message with a fixed block length of 5
characters
● Single character E5: single control character
[spacer] COMM 1: Address mode 003 168
1: Physical
[spacer]
Setting for the address mode.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tes t monit or on 003 166
0: No Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-25)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-26)
Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-27)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities.
[spacer] COMM 1: Name of manufac ture r 003 161
1: SE Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Setting for the name of the manufacturer.
Note:
● This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
● This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Octet address ASD U 003 073
1 0 255 Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
for both addresses.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-27

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Spontan. s ig. enabl e 003 177
65535: All Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
[spacer] COMM 1: Se le ct. s pont an.sig. 003 179

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via “logical” communication
interface 1.
[spacer] COMM 1: Transm .enab.c ycl.dat 003 074
0: Without Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Enabling of cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication
interface.
[spacer] COMM 1: Cycl. dat a ILS t e l. 003 175

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined
telegram via the communication interface.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta V 003 050
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Vnom Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta I 003 051
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Inom Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
7-28 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta P 003 054
15.0 0.0 15.0 %Snom Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta f 003 052
2.0 0.0 2.0 %fnom Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication interface if
it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta T 003 251
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Tref
[spacer]
The measured temperature is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by more than the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta Z 003 252
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Zref
[spacer]
The measured operating impedance is transmitted via the communication
interface if it differs by more than the set delta quantity from the last measured
value transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta phi 003 253
3.0 0.0 15.0 %phi,ref
[spacer]
The measured load angle is transmitted via the communication interface if it
transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta me as. v.ILS t el 003 150
3.0 0.0 15.0 Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-29

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta t 003 053
1 0 15 min Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface after
this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta t (e ne r gy) 003 151
Blocked 0 15 min Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
The measured values for active energy and reactive energy are transmitted via
the communication interface after this time has elapsed.
[spacer] COMM 1: Cont in. ge ner al scan 003 077
Blocked 10 9000 s Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
A continuous or background general scan means that the P638 transmits all
settings, signals, and monitoring signals through the communication interface
during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures that there will
be data consistency with a connected control system. The time to be set defines
the minimum time difference between two telegrams.
[spacer] COMM 1: Com m . addr ess le ngth 003 201
1 1 2 Byte Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
[spacer]
Setting for the communication address length.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
[spacer] COMM 1: Octet 2 comm. addr. 003 200
0 0 255 Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the higher-order communication address.
[spacer] COMM 1: Caus e transm. le ngth 003 192
1: W/o source address Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the cause of transmission.
7-30 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Address le ngt h AS DU 003 193
1 1 2 Byte Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the common address for identification of telegram
structures.
[spacer] COMM 1: Octet 2 addr. ASD U 003 194
0 0 255 Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification of
telegram structures.
[spacer] COMM 1: Addr.le ngth inf. obj. 003 196
2 2 3 Byte Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the address for information objects.
[spacer] COMM 1: Oct.3 addr. inf.obj. 003 197
0 0 255 Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the higher-order address for information objects.
[spacer] COMM 1: Inf .No.<- >funct.t ype 003 195
0: No Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be
reversed in the object address.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tim e tag length 003 198
3 3 7 Byte Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
[spacer]
Setting for the time tag length.
[spacer] COMM 1: AS DU1 / ASDU20 conv . 003 190
1: Single signal Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as a
single signal or double signal.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-31

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: AS DU2 co nver si on 003 191
1: Single signal Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 2 shall be converted as a single
signal or double signal.
[spacer] COMM 1: Init ializ. signal 003 199
1: Yes Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued.
[spacer] COMM 1: Balance d ope ration 003 226
0: No Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
[spacer]
Setting that determines whether communication takes place on a balanced basis
(full duplex operation).
[spacer] COMM 1: Direction bit 003 227
0 0 1 Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
[spacer]
Setting for the transmission direction. Normally this value will be set to '1' at
the control center and to '0' at the substation.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tim e- out int erv al 003 228
0.40 0.10 2.55 s Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum time that will elapse until the status signal for the
acknowledgment command is issued.
[spacer] COMM 1: Reg.asg. sel ec. cmds 003 210
[spacer]
MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the selected
commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the
first command is given the register no. 00301, the second the register no.
00302, etc.
[spacer] COMM 1: Reg.asg. sel ec. si g. 003 211
[spacer]
signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first
signal is given the register no. 10301, the second the register no. 10302, etc.
7-32 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Reg.asg. sel . m. val. 003 212
[spacer]
measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that
the first measured value is given the register no. 30301, the second the register
no. 30302, etc.
[spacer] COMM 1: Reg.asg. sel . par am. 003 213
[spacer]
parameters. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the
first parameter is given the register no. 40301, the second the register no.
40302, etc.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta t ( MO DBUS) 003 152
5 1 120 s Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-25)
[spacer]
All MODBUS registers are transmitted again through the communication
interface after this time has elapsed.
[spacer] COMM 1: Autom .eve nt c onfirm. 003 249
0: Without Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-25)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether an event must be confirmed by the master in order
for an event to be deleted from the 'event queue'.
[spacer] COMM 1: Phys . Char act . De lay 003 241
0 0 254 Bit Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-26)
[spacer]
Number of bits that must pass between the receipt of the 'request' and the start
of sending the 'response'.
[spacer] COMM 1: Phys . Char . Time out 003 242
40 0 254 Bit Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-26)
[spacer]
Number of bits that may be missing from the telegram before receipt is
terminated.
[spacer] COMM 1: Link Confirm. M ode 003 243
1: Multi-frame fragment Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-26)
[spacer]
Setting for the acknowledgment mode of the link layer.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-33

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Link Confirm.Timeout 003 244
0.10 0.05 2.54 s Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-26)
[spacer]
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
link layer.
[spacer] COMM 1: Link Max. Re tr ie s 003 245
2 1 10 Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-26)
[spacer]
Number of repetitions that are carried out on the link layer if errors have
occurred during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge).
[spacer] COMM 1: Appl.Con firm.T ime out 003 246
5.0 0.5 25.4 s Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-26)
[spacer]
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
application layer.
[spacer] COMM 1: Appl. Ne ed Time De l. 003 247
60 5 254 s Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-26)
[spacer]
Time interval within which the slave requests time synchronization cyclically
from the master.
[spacer] COMM 1: Ind ./cl. bin. input s 003 232
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 – binary inputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
[spacer] COMM 1: Ind ./cl. bin.output s 003 233
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 – binary outputs.
[spacer] COMM 1: Ind ./cl. bin. count . 003 234
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 20 – binary counters.
Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
7-34 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Ind ./cl. analog inp. 003 235
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 – analog inputs.
[spacer] COMM 1: Ind ./cl. analog outp 003 236
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 – analog outputs.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta me as. v. ( DNP 3 ) 003 250
16 0 255 Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-26)
[spacer]
Initialization value of threshold values for transmission of measured values in
object 30. The threshold values can be changed separately by the master for
each measured value by writing to object 34, 'analog input reporting deadband'.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta t ( DNP 3) 003 248
5 1 120 s Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-26)
[spacer]
Cycle time for updating DNP object 30 (analog inputs).
[spacer] COMM 1: Com m and sel ect ion 103 042
[spacer]
Selection of commands to be issued via the COURIER protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the COURIER protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Signal se lec tion 103 043
[spacer]
Selection of signals to be transmitted via the COURIER protocol.
[spacer] COMM 1: Meas . v al. sel ect ion 103 044
[spacer]
Selection of measured values to be transmitted via the Courier protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Param et er s ele ct ion 103 045
[spacer]
Selection of settings to be altered via the Courier protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-35

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta t (COURIE R) 103 046
5 1 120 s Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-27)
[spacer]
Cycle time at the conclusion of which the selected measured values are again
transmitted.
7-36 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 2: Functio n gr oup CO MM2 056 057
communication
interface 2
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group COMM2 or including it in the configuration. If the
[spacer] COMM 2: General enabl e USE R 103 170
0: No Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-30)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling communication interface 2.
[spacer] COMM 2: Line idle stat e 103 165
1: Light on / high Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-30)
[spacer]
Setting for the line idle state indication.
[spacer] COMM 2: Baud rat e 103 071
19.2: 19.2 kBaud Baud Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-30)
[spacer]
Baud rate of the communication interface.
[spacer] COMM 2: Parity bit 103 171
2: Even Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-30)
[spacer]
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system connected
to the P638.
[spacer] COMM 2: Dead t ime moni toring 103 176
1: Yes Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-30)
[spacer]
The P638 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive pause
occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not
required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
[spacer] COMM 2: Mon. time pol ling 103 202
25 3 254 s Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-30)
[spacer]
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less
than the time set here.
[spacer] COMM 2: Posit ive ackn. faul t 103 203
0: No
[spacer]
It is possible to set whether or not faults can be acknowledged positively after
transmission (and consequently deleted from the fault overview at the
COMM2/PC interface).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-37

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 2: Octet comm. addre ss 103 072
1 0 254 Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-30)
[spacer]
for both addresses.
[spacer] COMM 2: Name of manufac ture r 103 161
1: SE Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-30)
[spacer]
Setting for the name of the manufacturer.
Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
[spacer] COMM 2: Octet address ASD U 103 073
1 0 255 Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-30)
[spacer]
for both addresses.
[spacer] COMM 2: Spontan. s ig. enabl e 103 177
0: None Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-30)
[spacer]
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
[spacer] COMM 2: Se le ct. s pont an.sig. 103 179
[spacer]
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication interface 2.
[spacer] COMM 2: Transm .enab.c ycl.dat 103 074
0: Without Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-30)
[spacer]
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication
interface.
[spacer] COMM 2: Cycl. dat a ILS t e l. 103 175
[spacer]
Selection of the measured values transmitted in a user-defined telegram via the
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta V 103 050
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Vnom Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-30)
[spacer]
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
7-38 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta I 103 051
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Inom Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-30)
[spacer]
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta P 103 054
15.0 0.0 15.0 %Snom Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-30)
[spacer]
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta f 103 052
2.0 0.0 2.0 %fnom Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-30)
[spacer]
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication interface if
it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta T 103 251
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Tref
[spacer]
The measured temperature is transmitted via the communication interface if it
transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta Z 103 252
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Zref
[spacer]
The measured operating impedance is transmitted via the communication
interface if it differs by more than the set delta quantity from the last measured
value transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta phi 103 253
3.0 0.0 15.0 %phi,ref
[spacer]
The measured load angle is transmitted via the communication interface if it
transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta me as. v.ILS t el 103 150
3.0 0.0 15.0 Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-30)
[spacer]
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta t 103 053
1 0 15 min Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-30)
[spacer]
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface after
this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-39

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
IEC 61850 IEC: Function grou p IEC 056 059
Communication
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group IEC or including it in the configuration. If the function
group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and
signals are hidden.
[spacer] IEC: Ge neral enable US ER 104 000
0: No Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
Enabling and disabling function group IEC.
[spacer] IEC: IEC 61850 e nabl e 104 077
0: No Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling IEC 61850.
[spacer] IEC: ET H COM M Mode 104 080
1: PRP Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
Selection of the redundant Ethernet protocol between PRP, HSR and RSTP.
[spacer] IEC: IEC prot. vari ant 104 084
[spacer]
Selection of the enabled Ethernet protocol.
[spacer] IEC: Block Port A/ B 104 073
0: No Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
When Port A/B blocked is activated, Port A for SEB or Port A&B for REB will be
disabled.
[spacer] IEC: Block Port C 104 074
0: No Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
When Port C blocked is activated, Port C will be disabled.
[spacer] IEC: Switch Config. Bank 104 043
0: don't execute Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
This parameter can only be sent individually. Accepting the previously set
communication parameters as the active communication settings.
[spacer] IEC: Active Conf ig. Name 104 045
2:
[spacer]
Name of the configuration bank currently valid.
Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
7-40 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] IEC: Active Config. Ve r s. 104 046
2:
[spacer]
Version number of the configuration bank currently valid.
[spacer] IEC: Inact . C onfig. Name 104 047
2:
[spacer]
Name of the inactive configuration bank.
[spacer] IEC: Inact . C onfig. Ve r s . 104 048
2:
[spacer]
Version number of the inactive configuration bank.
[spacer] IEC: IED nam e 104 057
2:
[spacer]
Explicitly assigned unit name for the function in the system (IED); is part of the
Logical Device Name.
Important note: According to the IEC standard the name must consist of only
letters (A..Z, a..z), digits (0..9) and underscore characters (_), and the name
must start with a letter. Note that a non-standard name causes problems with
the IEC 61850 communication.
[spacer] IEC: IP address 104 001
2:
[spacer]
Assigned IP address of the device for the server function in the system.
Note: This is an information parameter ('read only') and its value is set from the
"IED Configurator" with Communications: IP Address.
[spacer] IEC: Subnet m ask 104 005
2:
[spacer]
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the sub-
network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: SubNet Mask.
[spacer] IEC: Gat eway addre s s 104 011
2:
[spacer]
This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway for
communication links to clients outside of the local network.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: Gateway Address.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-41

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] IEC: IP address 2 104 070
2:
[spacer]
Assigned IP address 2 of the device for the server function in the system.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: IP Address Interface 2 (If fitted).
[spacer] IEC: Subnet m ask 2 104 071
2:
[spacer]
The subnet mask 2 defines which part of the IP address 2 is addressed by the
sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: SubNet Mask Interface 2 (If fitted).
[spacer] IEC: Gat eway add re s s 2 104 072
2:
[spacer]
This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway 2 for
"IED Configurator" with Communications: Gateway Address Interface 2 (If fitted).
[spacer] IEC: IP address VLAN 1 104 091
2:
[spacer] IEC: IP address VLAN 2 104 095
2:
[spacer]
Assigned IP address of VLAN in the system.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: IP Address.
[spacer] IEC: Identifier VLAN 1 104 092
0 0 65535
[spacer] IEC: Identifier VLAN 2 104 096
0 0 65535
[spacer]
Assigned VLAN ID in the system.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: Vlan ID.
[spacer] IEC: Subnet m ask VL AN 1 104 093
2:
[spacer] IEC: Subnet m ask VL AN 2 104 097
2:
[spacer]
The subnet mask of VLAN defines which part of the IP address is addressed by
the sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: VLAN Subnet Mask.
7-42 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] IEC: Gat eway addre s s VL 1 104 094
2:
[spacer] IEC: Gat eway addre s s VL 2 104 098
2:
[spacer]
This parameter shows the network gateway of the VLAN for communication links
to clients outside of the local network.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: Gateway Address.
[spacer] IEC: SNTP s erve r 1 IP 104 202
2:
[spacer]
IP address of the preferred server used for clock synchronization.
"IED Configurator".
[spacer] IEC: SNTP s erve r 2 IP 104 210
2:
[spacer]
IP address of the backup server used for clock synchronization.
"IED Configurator".
[spacer] IEC: MAC ad dre ss 1 104 061
2:
[spacer]
Mac address for Interface 1.
"IED Configurator".
[spacer] IEC: SGCB Re svT ms 104 199
30 0 600
[spacer]
The configuration attribute ResvTms defines the time interval in seconds for
which the reservation of a SGCB is granted by a client. A reservation of a SGCB
starts after a successful selection of a Setting Group using the service
SelectEditSG. The client is granted to edit one or multiple parameters of this
SGCB if this time has not elapsed.
[spacer] IEC: MAC ad dre ss 2 104 217
2:
[spacer]
Mac address for Interface 2.
"IED Configurator".
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-43

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] IEC: MAC ad dres s 3 104 218
2:
[spacer]
Mac address for NIOS.
"IED Configurator".
[spacer] IEC: SigGGI O1 sel ect ion 104 064
[spacer]
Optional signal assignment for a transmission per communication protocol
IEC 61850 based on the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler
inputs).
[spacer] IEC: Diff . local time 104 206
0 -1440 1440 min Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
Time difference between UTC and local time at the devices' substation (IED).
[spacer] IEC: Diff . d ayl.s av. t ime 104 207
60 -1440 1440 min Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
Time difference of the daylight saving time to standard time.
[spacer] IEC: Switch.dayl.sav .ti me 104 219
1: Yes Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether an automatic switching to daylight saving time is
wanted. If it is wanted, the time switching is executed upon receiving a related
SNTP frame.
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e s tar t 104 220
5: Last Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e s t. d 104 221
7: Sunday Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e s t. m 104 222
3: March Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
These three parameters define the date (e.g. at what day of the year) for
switching from standard time over to daylight saving time. Available for
IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e s tar t are the values First, Second, Third, Fourth, and
Last. For IEC: Dayl.sav.ti me st . d the seven weekdays are available so
that for example a setting like “on the last Sunday in March” may be used.
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.t.st .0:00 + 104 223
120 0 1440 min Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
Time period in minutes after midnight when daylight saving time is switched to
standard time. If for example the clock is advanced one hour from 2:00 AM to
3:00 AM the parameter IE C: D ayl.sav .t .st .0:00 + is set to 120 (minutes).
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e e nd 104 225
5: Last Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
7-44 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.time e nd d 104 226
7: Sunday Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.time e nd m 104 227
10: October Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.t.e nd 0:00 + 104 228
180 0 1440 min Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
This parameter defines the date and time of day for the clock changeover from
daylight saving time to standard time. The setting is similar to that for the clock
changeover to daylight saving time.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-45

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Generic Object GOOSE: Function group GOOS E 056 068
Orientated
Substation Events
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Parameters included in this function group are only effective when function
group IEC is configured and enabled and when the parameters in this function
group have been activated by setting the parameter IEC: Switch Conf ig.
Bank.
[spacer] GOOSE: Gene ral e nable US ER 106 001
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE.
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig. 107 006
7-46 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-47

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-48 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-49

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-50 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 10 0 fct .as si g. 112 067
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-51

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 108 fct .as si g. 112 075
7-52 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE input to a binary logical state
signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the protection,
control or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will receive the
state of the data attribute, as configured above, and which was received with
the Dataset of GOOSE.
Parameter Address
IRIG‑B interface IRIGB: Function group IRIG B 056 072
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group IRIGB or including it in the configuration. If the
and signals are hidden.
[spacer] IRIGB: Gener al e nable US ER 023 200
0: No Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-54)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the IRIG-B interface.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-53

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Binary input INP: Filter 010 220
6 0 20 Fig. 3-32, (p. 3-58)
[spacer]
Input filter which is activated when either the mode Active "high", filt. or Active
"low", filt. has been selected for INP: Ope r. mode U xxx. In order to
suppress transient interference peaks at the logic signal inputs it is suggested to
set this parameter to 6 [steps].
[spacer] INP: Fct. as signm. U 301 152 217
7-54 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-55

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-56 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] INP: Fct. as signm. U 100 1 152 163
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-57

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-58 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-59

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to binary signal inputs.
[spacer] INP: Oper. m ode U 301 152 218
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
7-60 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-61

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
7-62 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-63

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
[spacer] INP: Oper. m ode U 100 1 152 164
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
7-64 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-65

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
Selection of operating mode for binary signal inputs.
7-66 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Measured data input MEASI: F unction group MEAS I

056 030
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration.
[spacer] MEASI: Ge ne ral enabl e US E R 011 100
0: No Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-59)

Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-68)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling analog measured data input.
[spacer] MEASI: E nable IDC p. u. 037 190
0.000 0.000 0.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-62)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must flow in order for the P638 to display a
measured value > 0 (zero suppression).
[spacer] MEASI: I DC < ope n circuit 037 191
3.0 0.0 10.0 mA Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-62)
[spacer]
If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P638 will issue an “open
circuit” signal.
[spacer] MEASI: I DC 1 037 150
0.000 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-62)
Blocked 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-62)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-67

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1.200 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-62)
[spacer]
Setting for the input current that will correspond to a linearized value that has
been set accordingly.
[spacer] MEASI: I DC ,lin 1 037 151
0.000 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-62)
7-68 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] MEASI: I DC ,lin 1 0 037 169
1.200 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-62)
[spacer]
Setting for the linearized current that will correspond to an input current that
has been set accordingly.
[spacer] MEASI: S caled val. IDC ,lin1 037 192
0 -32768 32767 Fig. 3-37, (p. 3-63)
[spacer]
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin1.
[spacer] MEASI: S caled val.IDC ,l in2 0 037 193
1200 -32768 32767 Fig. 3-37, (p. 3-63)
[spacer]
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin20.
[spacer] MEASI: T ype of Te mpSe ns or s 004 254
0: PT 100
[spacer]
Selection of the temperature sensor type (PT 100, NI 100 or NI 120).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-69

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Binary and analog OUTP: Fct. ass ignm. K 3 0 1 151 045
output
[spacer] OUTP: Fct. ass ignm. K 3 0 2 151 048
7-70 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] OUTP: Fct. ass i gnm. K 8 0 1 150 169
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-71

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-72 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-73

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to output relays.
[spacer] OUTP: Oper. mode K 3 01 151 046
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
7-74 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-75

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
7-76 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-77

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
[spacer]
Selection of operating mode for output relays.
7-78 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Measured data MEASO: Functio n group M EASO 056 020
output
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration.
settings and signals are hidden. If the function group is cancelled from the
configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
[spacer] MEASO: Ge ne ral e nable US ER 031 074
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the measured data output function.
[spacer] MEASO: Fct . as s ignm. BC D 053 002
[spacer]
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form.
[spacer] MEASO: Hold t ime output BC D 010 010
0.10 0.10 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the transmission time of the selected measured value in BCD form.
[spacer] MEASO: Scale B CD 016 082
1.00 0.01 100.00
[spacer]
Scaling factor setting for the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form.
The scaling factor is calculated according to the following formula:
M x,max
Scaling factor =
M x,scal
where:
Mx,scal: scaled measured value
Mx,max: maximum transmitted value for the selected measured value
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d min. val. B C D 037 140
0.000 0.000 1.000
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d max. v al. BC D 037 141
1.000 0.000 1.000
[spacer] MEASO: BC D-Out min. value 037 142
0 0 399
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-79

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] MEASO: BC D-Out max. value 037 143
399 0 399
[spacer]
The variable Mx is to be issued in BCD form.
For measured values in the range “measured values to be issued” the output
value should change linearly with the measured value.
● Range of measured values for the variable Mx: Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
● Range of associated scaled measured values: 0 ... 1
● Range of measured values to be issued: Mx,min ... Mx,max
● Range of scaled measured values to be issued: Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
● Designation of the set values in the data model: “Scaled min. val. BCD” ...
“Scaled max. val. BCD”
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
BCD display values for measured values in the range “measured values to be
issued”; range: “BCD-Out min. value” ... “BCD-Out max. value”
BBCD display values for measured values ≤ Mx,min; range: “BCD-Out min.
value”
BCD display values for measured values ≥ Mx,max; range: “BCD-Out max.
value”
[spacer] MEASO: Fct . as s ignm. A- 1 053 000
[spacer] MEASO: Fct . as s ignm. A- 2 053 001
[spacer]
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in analog form.
[spacer] MEASO: Hold t ime output A- 1 010 114
0.10 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-77)
[spacer] MEASO: Hold t ime output A- 2 010 115
0.10 0.10 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the time delay for output of the selected measured value.
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d m in. val. A-1 037 104
0.000 0.000 1.000 Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-77)
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d kne e v al. A- 1 037 105
Blocked 0.000 1.000 Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-77)
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d m ax. v al. A- 1 037 106
1.000 0.000 1.000 Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-77)
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d m in. val. A-2 037 110
0.000 0.000 1.000
7-80 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d kne e v al. A- 2 037 111
Blocked 0.000 1.000
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d max. v al. A- 2 037 112
1.000 0.000 1.000
[spacer]
After conversion via a characteristic the selected measured value Ax (x = 1, 2) is
to be issued as an output current. For this purpose a range “measured values to
be issued” is defined. In this range the characteristic has two linear sections,
which are separated by a knee point.
● Range of measured values for the variable Mx: Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
● Range of associated scaled measured values: 0 ... 1
● Range of measured values to be issued: Mx,min ... Mx,max
● Range of scaled measured values to be output: Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
● Designation of the set values in the data model: „Scaled min. val. Ax“ ...
„Scaled max. val. Ax“
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
● Designation of value for knee point: Mx,knee
● Designation of scaled knee point value: Mx,scaled,knee
● Designation of this set value in the data model: „Scaled knee val. Ax“
with:
Mx,scaled,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
[spacer] MEASO: AnOut min. v al. A- 1 037 107
0.00 0.00 20.00 mA Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-77)
[spacer] MEASO: AnOut kne e point A- 1 037 108
Blocked 0.00 20.00 mA Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-77)
[spacer] MEASO: AnOut max. v al. A- 1 037 109
20.00 0.00 20.00 mA Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-77)
[spacer] MEASO: AnOut min. v al. A- 2 037 113
0.00 0.00 20.00 mA
[spacer] MEASO: AnOut kne e point A- 2 037 114
Blocked 0.00 20.00 mA
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-81

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] MEASO: AnOut max. v al. A- 2 037 115
20.00 0.00 20.00 mA
[spacer]
Output current range for measured values in the range “measured values to be
issued”; designation in the data model: “An-Out min. val. Ax” ... “An-Out max.
val. Ax”
Output current to be set for measured values ≤ Mx,min; designation in the data
model: “An-Out min. val. Ax”
Output current to be set for measured values ≥ Mx,max; designation in the data
model: “An-Out max. val. Ax”
Output current to be set for measured values = Mx,knee; designation in the data
model: “AnOut knee point Ax”
with:
Mx,min ... Mx,max: measured values to be issued
[spacer] MEASO: Output value 1 037 120
0.00 0.00 100.00 %
0.00 0.00 100.00 %
0.00 0.00 100.00 %
[spacer]
Measured values of external devices, which must be scaled to 0 to 100%, can be
issued.
7-82 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
LED indicators LED: F ct.ass ig. H 1 gre e n 085 184
060 001: MAIN: Healthy
[spacer]
Display of the operational readiness of the protection device.
The function MAIN: He althy is permanently assigned.
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H 2 y ell. 085 001
004 065: MAIN: Blocked/faulty
[spacer]
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 2.
The function MAIN: Blocke d/ fault y is permanently assigned.
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H 3 y ell. 085 004
036 070: SFMON: Warning (LED)
[spacer]
The function SFM ON: Warning (LED ) is permanently assigned.
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H 4 red 085 007
036 251: MAIN: Gen. trip signal
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H 4 gre e n 085 057
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-83

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H10 red 085 025
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H10 gre e n 085 075
7-84 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H2 0 gre e n 085 167
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H2 1 red 085 140
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to LED indicators.
080 111: LOC: Edit mode
[spacer]
The function LOC: Edit mode is permanently assigned.
[spacer] LED: O pe rating mode H 1 085 182
1: ES updating
[spacer]
The operating mode ES updating is permanently assigned.
1: ES updating
[spacer]
1: ES updating
[spacer]
The ES updating operating mode is permanently assigned.
3: ES reset (fault)
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-85

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
[spacer]
Selection of operating mode for LED indicators.
1: ES updating
[spacer]
7-86 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: Chann.ass ign.C OMM 1/ 2 003 169
1: COMM1->chann.1,(2-2) Fig. 3-78, (p. 3-114)
[spacer]
Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication channels.
[spacer] MAIN: Cmd blocking USE R 103 213
1: Command blocking HMI
[spacer]
Blocking of the command from the user interface (HMI) or PC interface.
[spacer] MAIN: Auto- assignme nt I/ O 221 065
1: Yes
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling of automatic assignment of binary inputs and outputs to
the set bay type.
[spacer] MAIN: Type of bay 220 000
1 1 9999
[spacer]
Configuration of a bay type.
[spacer] MAIN: Prim .S ource TimeS ync 103 210
0: COMM1/IEC
[spacer]
Selection of the primary source for date and time synchronization. Available are
COMM1/IEC, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
[spacer] MAIN: Backup SourceT ime Sy nc 103 211
1: COMM2/PC
[spacer]
Selection of the backup source for date and time synchronization. Available are
COMM1/IEC, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses. The
backup source is used when there is no synchronization generated by the
primary source after MAIN: Time s ync. time-out has elapsed.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e s yn c. t ime -out 103 212
Blocked 1 60 min
[spacer]
Time-out setting for the time synchronization generated by the primary source.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-87

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Fault recording FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 1 035 160
65: Current IA,a
[spacer] FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 2 035 161
66: Current IC,a
69: Current IA,b
70: Current IC,b
233: Current IN
232: Voltage, 1-pole
[spacer]
The user specifies the channel on which each physical variable is recorded.
Parameter Address
Differential protec‐ DIFF: F unction group DIF F 056 027
tion
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group DIFF or including it in the configuration. If the function
signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
Transverse DIF_a: Function g roup D IF_a 056 035
differential protec‐
tionTransverse
tion
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group DIF_a or including it in the configuration. If the
7-88 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Transverse DIF_b: Function group DIF _b 056 036
tion
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group DIF_b or including it in the configuration. If the
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOC1: Function gr oup D TOC 1 056 031
current protection
0: Without
[spacer] DTOC2: Function gr oup D TOC 2 056 032
0: Without
[spacer]
Canceling function group DTOC1 / DTOC2 or including it in the configuration.
If a function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOCN: Functio n group D TOC N 056 034
current protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group DTOCN or including it in the configuration.
Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur‐ IDMT: F unction group IDMT

056 009
rent protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Canceling function group IDMT or including it in the configuration. If the function
signals are hidden.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-89

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Distance protection DIST: Function g roup DIST 056 014
0: Without
[spacer]
Canceling function group DIST or including it in the configuration. If the function
signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
Measuring-circuit MCM ON: Function group MC MON 056 015
monitoring
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group MCMON or including it in the configuration.
Parameter Address
Thermal overload THER M : Function group THER M 056 023
protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group THERM or including it in the configuration. If the
Parameter Address
Time-voltage protec‐ V<>: Funct ion group V<>

056 010
tion
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group V<> or including it in the configuration. If the
7-90 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Over-/ f<> : Function group f<> 056 033
underfrequency pro‐
tection
0: Without
[spacer]
Canceling function group f<> or including it in the configuration. If the function
signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF_1: Function gr oup CB F_1 056 040
failure protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group CBF_1 or including it in the configuration.
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF_2: Function gr oup CB F_2 056 041
failure protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group CBF_2 or including it in the configuration.
Parameter Address
[spacer] CBM_1: Function gr oup CB M 056 062
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group CBM or including it in the configuration. If the function
signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-91

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] CBM_2: Function gr oup CB M _2 056 070
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group CBM_2 or including it in the configuration. If the
Parameter Address
Limit value LIMIT : Function g roup LIMI T 056 025
monitoring
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group LIMIT or including it in the configuration. If the
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOGIC: Function group LOGIC

056 017
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group LOGIC or including it in the configuration.
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOG_2: Function gr oup L OG _2

056 089
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group LOG_2 (“Logic 2”) or including it in the configuration.
Parameter Address
Real Timer TIM ER : F unction group TIMER 056 093
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group TIMER or including it in the configuration. If the
and signals are hidden.
7-92 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
External device DEV01: Funct ion group DEV0 1 210 047
0: Without
[spacer] DEV02: Funct ion group DEV0 2 210 097
0: Without
0: Without
0: Without
0: Without
0: Without
0: Without
0: Without
0: Without
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function groups DEV01 to DEV03 or including them in the
configuration. If any function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all
associated settings and signals are hidden.
[spacer] DEV01: Funct . type, s ignal 210 034
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-93

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
[spacer]
Setting the function type of the signal.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low
address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C
protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.
[spacer] DEV01: Inform. No., signal 210 035
1 0 254
3 0 254
5 0 254
7 0 254
9 0 254
11 0 254
13 0 255
15 0 254
17 0 254
19 0 254
[spacer]
Setting the information number of the signal.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
[spacer] DEV01: Funct . type, c ommand 210 032
242 1 254
242 1 254
7-94 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
[spacer]
Setting for the function type of the command.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the “low
address” of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-
C protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.
[spacer] DEV01: Inform. No., command 210 033
65 0 254
67 0 254
69 0 254
71 0 254
73 0 254
75 0 254
77 0 254
79 0 254
81 0 254
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-95

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
83 0 254
[spacer]
Setting the information number of the command.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
Parameter Address
Interlocking logic ILOCK: Function group ILOCK 250 102
1: With
[spacer]
Cancelling function group ILOCK or including it in the configuration. If the
7-96 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Single-pole CMD_1: Function gro up C MD _1 249 252
commands
1: With
[spacer]
Cancelling function group CMD_1 or including it in the configuration.
[spacer] CMD_1: Com mand C 0 01 config. 200 004
0: No Fig. 3-201, (p. 3-256)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-97

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Cancelling the command or including it in the configuration. If the command is
cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the
exception of this setting.
7-98 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Single-pole signals SIG_1: Function gro up S IG_1 249 250
1: With
[spacer]
Cancelling function group SIG_1 or including it in the configuration.
[spacer] SIG_1: S ignal S 00 1 config. 226 007
0: No Fig. 3-202, (p. 3-258)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-99

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
7-100 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-101

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Cancelling the signal or including it in the configuration. If a signal is cancelled,
then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
Binary counts COUNT : Function gr oup CO UNT 217 047
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group COUNT or including it in the configuration. If the
7-102 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
7.1.3 Function Parameters
7.1.3.1 Global
Parameter Address
PC link PC: Command block ing 003 182
0: No Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at the PC
interface.
[spacer] PC: Sig./m eas .val.bl ock . 003 086
0: No Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or measured
data are transmitted through the PC interface.
Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 1: Com m and bloc k. US ER 003 172
communication
interface 1
1: Yes Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at communication
interface 1.
[spacer] COMM 1: Sig./ meas.block .US E R 003 076
0: No Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or
measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM1.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-103

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 2: Com m and bloc k. US ER 103 172
communication
interface 2
0: No Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-30)
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at communication
interface 2.
[spacer] COMM 2: Sig./ meas.block .US E R 103 076
0: No Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-30)
[spacer]
measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM2.
Parameter Address
IEC 61850 IEC: Com m and block. USE R 104 085
Communication
1: Yes
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at IEC
[spacer] IEC: Ctrl b lock ed use r 221 125
0: No Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
When control blocking is activated, controls are rejected at IEC communication,
i.e no output data (digital by relays) will be issued to the process.
[spacer] IEC: Sig./me as.block.US E R 104 088
0: No
[spacer]
measured data are transmitted through IEC communication interface.
Parameter Address
Binary and analog OUTP: Outp .rel.block USER 021 014
output
0: No Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-66)
[spacer]
When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked.
7-104 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: Protection e nabled 003 030
0: No (= off) Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-93)
[spacer]
Switching the device off-line or on-line. Some parameters can only be changed
when protection is disabled.
[spacer] MAIN: Tes t m ode USER 003 012
0: No Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-115)
[spacer]
When the test mode user is activated, signals or measured data for PC and
communication interfaces are labeled 'test mode'.
[spacer] MAIN: Nominal fr equ. fnom 010 030
50: 50 Hz Hz
[spacer]
Setting for the nominal frequency of the protected system.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e tag 221 098
1: 1stEdge,OpMem sorted
[spacer]
For bay control function signals detected via binary signal inputs and
conditioned with debouncing it is now possible to select whether the time tag for
the signal is to be issued after debouncing or when the first pulse edge is
detected. Furthermore it is defined whether entries in the operating data
memory are made in chronological order or not.
[spacer] MAIN: Inom C.T.prim., end a 019 020
1000 1 10000 A Fig. 3-50, (p. 3-87)

Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-209)
[spacer] MAIN: Inom C.T.prim., end b 019 021
1000 1 10000 A Fig. 3-50, (p. 3-87)

Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-209)
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer (phase
currents) of end a or b.
[spacer] MAIN: IN,nom C.T. prim. 010 016
1000 1 10000 A Fig. 3-51, (p. 3-88)
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer for
measurement of residual current.
[spacer] MAIN: Vnom V.T. prim. 010 002
100.0 0.1 1000.0 kV Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-88)
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
[spacer] MAIN: Inom de vice, e nd a 010 024
1.0: 1.0 A A Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-85)

Fig. 5-9, (p. 5-18)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-105

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Inom de vice, e nd b 010 025
1.0: 1.0 A A
[spacer]
Setting for the nominal current of the device for the measurement of the phase
currents of ends a or b. This also corresponds to the nominal device current.
[spacer] MAIN: IN,nom device 010 017
1.0: 1.0 A A Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-85)

Fig. 5-9, (p. 5-18)
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the main current transformer for
measurement of residual current.
[spacer] MAIN: Vnom V.T. sec. 010 009
100 50 130 V Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-85)

Fig. 5-9, (p. 5-18)
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
[spacer] MAIN: Conn. m eas . circ. a 010 140
1: Standard Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-85)

Fig. 5-9, (p. 5-18)
[spacer] MAIN: Conn. m eas . circ. b 010 150
1: Standard
[spacer]
The vector sum of the phase currents of ends a and b is governed by the
connection of the measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in Chapter
“Installation and Connection”, then the setting must be Standard. If the
connection direction is reversed then the setting must be Opposite.
[spacer] MAIN: Conn. m eas . circ. IN 010 036
1: Standard
[spacer]
If the connection is as shown in Chapter “Installation and Connection”, then the
setting must be Standard. If the connection direction is reversed then the
setting must be Opposite.
[spacer] MAIN: Conn. m eas . circ. V 010 158
1: Standard
[spacer]
Short-circuit direction determination depends on the connection of the
measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in Chapter “Installation and
Connection”, then the setting must be Standard. If the connection direction is
reversed then the setting must be Opposite.
[spacer] MAIN: Me as. value re l. I 011 030
0.000 0.000 0.200 Inom Fig. 3-50, (p. 3-87)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase currents and, if applicable, derived currents are
displayed.
7-106 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Me as. value re l. IN 011 031
0.000 0.000 0.200 IN,nom Fig. 3-51, (p. 3-88)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the residual current is displayed.
[spacer] MAIN: Me as. value re l. V 011 032
0.000 0.000 0.200 Vnom Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-88)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase-to-ground voltages, phase-to-phase voltages, and,
if applicable, derived voltages are displayed.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as sign. res et 1 005 248
[spacer]
Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if
MAIN: Group res e t 1 USER is enabled.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as sign. res et 2 005 249
[spacer]
Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if
MAIN: Group res e t 2 USER is enabled.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as sign. bloc k. 1 021 021
[spacer]
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking
input 1 (MAIN: B lock ing 1 EX T) is activated.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as sign. bloc k. 2 021 022
[spacer]
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking
input 2 (MAIN: B lock ing 2 EX T) is activated.
[spacer] MAIN: Trip cm d.block . USER 021 012
0: No Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-105)
[spacer]
Blocking the trip commands from the local control panel.
[spacer] MAIN: Block. M -t ri p USE R 022 090
0: No Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-102)

Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
Blocking of the main-trip commands from the user interface (HMI).
[spacer] MAIN: Block. R -t ri p USE R 022 091
0: No Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-103)
[spacer]
Blocking of the re-trip commands from the user interface (HMI).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-107

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Block. B-trip US ER 022 092
0: No
[spacer]
Blocking of the back-trip commands from the user interface (HMI).
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as g. M-t rip cmd1 021 007
[spacer]
Assignment of the signals leading to a main-trip command 1.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as g. M-t rip cmd2 021 008
[spacer]
Assignment of the signals leading to a main-trip command 2.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as g. R-t rip cmd1 021 025
[spacer]
Assignment of the signals leading to a Re-Trip command 1.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as g. R-t rip cmd2 021 026
[spacer]
Assignment of the signals leading to a Re-Trip command 2.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as g. B-t ri p cmd1 021 027
[spacer]
Assignment of the signals leading to a Trip command 1.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as g. B-t ri p cmd2 021 028
[spacer]
Assignment of the signals leading to a Trip command 2.
[spacer] MAIN: Min.dur . M- trip cmd1 021 034
0.25 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-102)

Fig. 5-12, (p. 5-20)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of the Main-Trip command 1.
[spacer] MAIN: Min.dur . M- trip cmd2 021 035
0.25 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-102)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of the Main-Trip command 2.
[spacer] MAIN: Min.dur . R- trip cmd1 021 036
0.25 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-103)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of the Re-Trip command 1.
[spacer] MAIN: Min.dur . R- trip cmd2 021 037
0.25 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-103)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of the Re-Trip command 2.
7-108 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Min.dur . B-t rip c md1 021 038
0.25 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of the Trip command 1.
[spacer] MAIN: Min.dur . B-t rip c md2 021 039
0.25 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of the Trip command 2.
[spacer] MAIN: Latching M - trip cmd1 021 040
0: No Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-102)
[spacer]
Specification as to whether the main-trip command 1 should latch.
[spacer] MAIN: Latching M - trip cmd2 021 041
0: No Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-102)
[spacer]
Specification as to whether the main-trip command 2 should latch.
[spacer] MAIN: Latching R- trip cmd1 021 042
0: No Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-103)
[spacer]
Specification as to whether the re-trip command 1 should latch.
[spacer] MAIN: Latching R- trip cmd2 021 043
0: No Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-103)
[spacer]
Specification as to whether the re-trip command 2 should latch.
[spacer] MAIN: Latching B -t rip cmd1 021 044
0: No Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
Specification as to whether the trip command 1 should latch.
[spacer] MAIN: Latching B -t rip cmd2 021 045
0: No Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
Specification as to whether the trip command 2 should latch.
[spacer] MAIN: Sig . as g. C B1 open 021 017
[spacer] MAIN: Sig . as g. C B2 open 021 061
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used by the P638 to evaluate the “CB open”
position signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Sig . as g. C B1 clos ed 021 020
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-109

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Sig . as g. CB2 clos ed 021 060
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used by the P638 to evaluate the “CB closed”
position signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Deb ounce time gr . 1 221 200
0.02 0.01 2.54 s Fig. 3-203, (p. 3-259)
0.02 0.01 2.54 s
0.02 0.01 2.54 s
0.02 0.01 2.54 s
0.02 0.01 2.54 s
0.02 0.01 2.54 s
0.02 0.01 2.54 s
0.02 0.01 2.54 s
[spacer]
Setting for the debouncing time.
[spacer] MAIN: Chatt.m on. time gr.1 221 201
0.0 0.0 25.4 s Fig. 3-203, (p. 3-259)
0.0 0.0 25.4 s
0.0 0.0 25.4 s
0.0 0.0 25.4 s
0.0 0.0 25.4 s
0.0 0.0 25.4 s
0.0 0.0 25.4 s
7-110 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
0.0 0.0 25.4 s
[spacer]
Setting for the chatter monitoring time.
[spacer] MAIN: Change of s tate gr.1 221 202
0 0 254 Fig. 3-203, (p. 3-259)
0 0 254
0 0 254
0 0 254
0 0 254
0 0 254
0 0 254
0 0 254
[spacer]
Setting the number of signal changes allowed during the chatter monitoring
time before chatter suppression operates.
[spacer] MAIN: Cmd . d ur.long cmd. 221 230
20 1 254 s
[spacer]
Setting for the command duration for a long command.
[spacer] MAIN: Cmd . d ur. short cmd. 221 231
1 1 254 s
[spacer]
Setting for the command duration for a short command.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim eT agAft erDe bounce 221 083
0: No
[spacer]
When this setting is activated, the time tag for the signal is issued after
debouncing.
[spacer] MAIN: Oper. mode CB Trip 221 080
1: With command Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-108)
[spacer]
Definition of the operating mode of the CB trip.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-111

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. ctr l.enabl. 221 057
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to issue a general command output enable.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg.int er l.deact 221 007
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to disable interlocking of control commands
for switchgear.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. L/R key s w. 221 008
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to switch from remote control to local
control.
[spacer] MAIN: Electrical c ontrol 221 061
1: Remote
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the binary inputs, that are configured to control
switchgear, will be active with remote control or local control.
[spacer] MAIN: Delay Man.Op.S upe r v. 221 079
3 0 255 s
[spacer]
After the delay time period, to be set in this window, has elapsed (with the
signal “Sw. dev. interm. pos.” already present and the status signal continuously
absent), the actual switchgear status signal, as obtained from the respective
binary inputs, will be issued. (See also “Processing status signals from manually
operated switchgear”.)
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.assig n. t ripping 221 010
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to signal the tripping of an external
protection device. This signal is used to form the CB trip signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Prot.t rip>CB tr ipped 221 012
0: Without function Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-108)
[spacer]
Selection of the protection function trip command that will be used to form the
CB trip signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp. as g. CB t ri p 221 013
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used by the P638 to signal the “CB open” position
signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg.CB tr.en. ext 221 050
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to enable the CB trip signal of an external
device.
7-112 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. C B t rip ex t 221 024
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to carry the CB trip signal of an external
device.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 1 221 051
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 2 221 052
[spacer]
Definition of the function that will be interpreted as a multiple signal (group
signal).
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. cnt.tr f.tr . 221 011
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signals used to trigger counters.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. re set count 221 009
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signals used to reset counters.
[spacer] MAIN: Cycle t.count t r ans f 221 021
3 1 10000 min
[spacer]
Cycle period for transmission of counter values.
[spacer] MAIN: Clos e cmd.puls e ti me 015 067
0.100 0.100 0.500 s Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-98)
[spacer]
Setting for the duration of the close command.
[spacer] MAIN: tCB, Close 000 032
Blocked 0.000 0.200 s Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-98)
[spacer]
The CB closing time is set here.
[spacer] MAIN: V>Block C B C lose 025 161
Blocked 0.20 1.50 Vnom
[spacer]
Voltage setting above which switching-on command is blocked/rejected.
[spacer] MAIN: Vmin ins t. CB C lose 025 162
[spacer]
Voltage setting below which switch-on command is executed directly without
delay (ignoring the set value of MAIN: t CB, Close).
[spacer] MAIN: ClCmd inhi b.by CB cl 015 042
0: No Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-98)
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the reclose command will be inhibited as soon
as the “Circuit breaker closed” signal starts.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-113

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Re l.t . e nab. man.c md 003 088
60 1 3600 s Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-98)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-107)
[spacer]
Setting for the release time of the enable for the manual trip or close command,
respectively.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct. as s ign. fault 021 031
[spacer]
Selection of the signals to be signaled as Blocked/Faulty in addition to the
messages that always result in the message Blocked/Faulty.
Parameter Address
Parameter subset PSS: Control via USE R 003 100
selection
0: No Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-117)
[spacer]
If parameter subset selection is to be handled from the integrated local control
panel rather than via binary signal inputs, choose the setting Yes.
[spacer] PSS: Param.sub s.se l. USE R 003 060
1: Parameter subset 1 Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-117)
[spacer]
Selection of the parameter subset from the local control panel.
[spacer] PSS: Ke ep tim e 003 063
Blocked 0.000 65.000 s Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-117)
[spacer]
The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if parameter subset selection is
carried out via the binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may occur
during selection is bridged. If, after this time period has elapsed, no binary
signal input has yet been set, then the parameter subset selected from the local
control panel shall apply.
7-114 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Self-monitoring SFMO N: F ct . as s ign. warni ng 021 030
[spacer]
Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in the signals “Warning
(LED)” and “Warning (relay)” and in the activation of the LED indicator labeled
“ALARM”. Signals caused by faulty hardware and leading to blocking of the
device are not configurable. They always result in the above signals and
indication.
[spacer] SFMO N: M on. s ig. r et e ntion 021 018
Blocked 0 240 h
[spacer]
This setting defines the duration (in hours) for which a device-internal fault is
stored, so that a decision may be taken between an automatic warm restart and
an automatic device blocking. (Setting to Blocked may be considered the same
as unlimited storage.)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-115

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Fault recording FT_RC: Fct. assig . t ri gge r 003 085
[spacer]
This setting defines the signals that will trigger fault recording.
[spacer] FT_RC: I>, end a 016 014
Blocked 0.10 10.00 Inom Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value of the phase current in end A of the
transformer that will trigger disturbance recording.
[spacer] FT_RC: I>, end b 016 015
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value of the phase current in end B of the
transformer that will trigger disturbance recording.
[spacer] FT_RC: Id > 016 018
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value of the differential current that will
trigger disturbance recording.
[spacer] FT_RC: IN> 016 017
Blocked 0.10 10.00 IN,nom Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value of the residual current that will trigger
disturbance recording.
[spacer] FT_RC: Pre- fault time 003 078
5 1 50 Periods Fig. 3-94, (p. 3-136)
[spacer]
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before the onset of a
fault (pre-fault recording time).
[spacer] FT_RC: Post -f ault ti me 003 079
2 1 50 Periods Fig. 3-94, (p. 3-136)
[spacer]
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a fault
(post-fault recording time).
[spacer] FT_RC: Max. re cording t ime 003 075
50 5 300 Periods Fig. 3-94, (p. 3-136)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault and
post-fault recording times.
7-116 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Differential protec‐ DIFF: M eas . value rel. Id 011 041
tion
0.000 0.000 0.200 Inom Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-144)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the
measured operating values of the differential currents to be displayed.
[spacer] DIFF: M eas . value rel. IR 011 042
0.000 0.000 0.200 Inom Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-144)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the
measured operating values of the restraining currents to be displayed.
7.1.3.2 General Functions
Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: Se le ct m e as . cur re nt 025 149
1: Current IA,a Fig. 3-53, (p. 3-89)

Fig. 3-54, (p. 3-90)
Fig. 3-130, (p. 3-175)
[spacer]
Selection of the measuring input – end a or end b.
[spacer] MAIN: Evaluat ion t ime 018 201
5 3 6 Periods Fig. 3-57, (p. 3-94)
[spacer]
Setting for the evaluation time. The operate conditions must be met for the
duration of the set evaluation time in order for a signal to be issued.
[spacer] MAIN: Undervolt . blo ck. V< 018 200
0.65 0.20 2.00 Vnom Fig. 3-57, (p. 3-94)
[spacer]
Setting for the threshold of undervoltage blocking. If the voltage falls below this
threshold, the over-/underfrequency protection function will be blocked.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-117

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Differential protec‐ DIFF: Gene ral e nabl e US E R 019 080
tion
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling and enabling the differential protection function.
[spacer] DIFF: Vnom prim ., end a 019 017
110.0 0.1 1500.0 kV Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-139)
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal voltage at end a of the transformer.
[spacer] DIFF: Vnom prim ., end b 019 018
110.0 0.1 1500.0 kV Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-139)
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal voltage at end b of the transformer.
[spacer] DIFF: R e ference powe r Sr ef 019 016
110.0 0.1 5000.0 MVA Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-139)
[spacer]
Setting for the reference power, usually the nominal transformer power.
[spacer] DIFF: R e f. cur r. Ire f,a 019 023
1000 1 10000 A Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-139)
[spacer]
Display of the reference current calculated by the P638 for end a.
[spacer] DIFF: R e f. cur r. Ire f,b 019 024
1000 1 10000 A Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-139)
[spacer]
Display of the reference current calculated by the P638 for end b.
[spacer] DIFF: M atching f act . kam,a 004 105
1.000 0.000 5.000 Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-139)
[spacer]
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P638 for end a.
[spacer] DIFF: M atching f act . kam,b 004 106
1.000 0.000 5.000 Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-139)
[spacer]
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P638 for end b.
7-118 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Transverse DIF_a: General e nable US ER 019 081
tionTransverse
tion
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling/enabling of the transverse differential protection end a.
Note: The screening out of zero current of the differential protection may not
be enabled if the P638 has to work in end a with transverse differential
protection.
Parameter Address
Transverse DIF_b: General enable USE R 019 082
tion
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling/enabling of the transverse differential protection end b.
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOC1: Gene ral e nabl e USE R 031 135
current protection
0: No Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-149)
[spacer] DTOC2: Gene ral e nabl e USE R 031 136
0: No Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-149)
[spacer]
Enabling/disabling the definite-time overcurrent protection function.
[spacer] DTOC1: S ele ct me as . input 031 130
1: End a Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-150)
[spacer]
Selection of the measuring input – end a or end b – the definite-time overcurrent
protection 1 is controlled by its current.
[spacer] DTOC1: Direction measurem. 031 131
0: Without
[spacer]
The user may select a definite-time overcurrent protection with or without
direction measurement.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-119

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOC2: S ele ct me as . input 031 140
current protection
1: End a Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-150)
[spacer]
protection 2 is controlled by its current.
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOCN: General enabl e USE R 031 138
current protection
0: No Fig. 3-112, (p. 3-158)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the definite-time overcurrent protection function for
residual current.
Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur‐ IDMT: Gene ral e nable US E R

017 096
rent protection
0: No Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-160)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
[spacer] IDMT: S elect meas. i nput 017 108
1: End a Fig. 3-119, (p. 3-165)
[spacer]
protection is controlled by its current.
[spacer] IDMT: D ire ct ion me as ur em. 017 109
0: Without
[spacer]
The user may select a definite-time overcurrent protection with or without
direction measurement.
Parameter Address
Distance protection DIST: Ge ne ral e nable U SE R 031 073
0: No Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-173)
[spacer]
Enable/disable the distance protection function.
7-120 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Measuring-circuit MCM ON: Gener al e nable USER 014 001
monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-136, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the measuring-circuit monitoring function.
Parameter Address
Thermal overload THER M : Gene r al e nabl e US E R 022 050
protection
0: No Fig. 3-140, (p. 3-184)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling thermal overload protection.
[spacer] THER M : S ele ct me as. i nput 022 055
1: End a
[spacer]
Selection of measuring input – end a or end b – the thermal overload protection
is controlled by its current.
[spacer] THER M : R e lat ive re pl ic a 022 064
1: Yes Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the Relative replica mode of operation.
Note that it is not permitted to enable both Absolute replica and Relative replica
modes.
[spacer] THER M : Absolut e r eplica 022 065
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the Absolute replica mode of operation.
Note that it is not permitted to enable both Absolute replica and Relative replica
modes.
[spacer] THER M : O/ T f . I ref per si st 004 138
Not measured -40 300 K
[spacer]
Display of over-temperature as a result of persisting Iref.
Note: This display is only visible in the Relative replica mode of operation.
Parameter Address
Time-voltage protec‐ V<>: General enable US ER

023 030
tion
0: No Fig. 3-145, (p. 3-191)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling time-voltage protection.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-121

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Over-/ f<> : Gene ral e nable USER 023 031
tection
0: No Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-194)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling over-/underfrequency protection.
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF_1: General enable USE R 022 100
failure protection
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the circuit breaker failure protection function, channel 1.
[spacer] CBF_1: Select m e as . input 022 102
1: End a Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-202)
[spacer]
Selection of measuring input – end a or end b – the circuit breaker failure
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF_2: General enable USE R 022 101
failure protection
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the circuit breaker failure protection function, channel 2.
[spacer] CBF_2: Select m e as . input 022 103
1: End a Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-202)
[spacer]
Selection of measuring input – end a or end b – the circuit breaker failure
7-122 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] CBM_1: Gene ral e nable US ER 022 010
0: No Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-203)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling circuit breaker monitoring.
[spacer] CBM_1: Blocking USER 022 150
0: No Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-212)
[spacer]
Setting for temporary blocking of circuit breaker monitoring during protection
injection testing.
[spacer] CBM_1: S ele ct me as . input 022 178
1: End a Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-206)
[spacer]
Selection of measuring input – end a or end b – the circuit breaker monitoring
function is controlled by its current.
[spacer] CBM_1: Operating mode 022 007
3: CB sig. EXT or trip Fig. 3-159, (p. 3-207)
[spacer]
This setting defines starting criteria for circuit breaker monitoring. To evaluate
all trip commands issued by the protection device With trip cmd. only must be
selected. For further evaluation of operational trip commands the additional CB
auxiliary contact CB sig. EXT or trip is used.
[spacer] CBM_1: Inom ,CB 022 012
2000 1 65000 A Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-209)
[spacer]
Setting for the CB nominal current.
[spacer] CBM_1: Perm . C B op. I nom,C B 022 013
30000 1 65000 Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-209)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations at nominal current.
[spacer] CBM_1: M ed . curr. Itr ip,C B 022 014
Blocked 1 65000 A Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-209)
[spacer]
Setting for the average CB disconnection current.
Note: In general valid only for pneumatically operated CBs.
[spacer] CBM_1: Perm . C B op. I me d,CB 022 015
Blocked 1 65000 Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-209)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations at average disconnection
(ruptured) current.
Note: In general valid only for pneumatically operated CBs.
[spacer] CBM_1: M ax. cur r. It rip,C B 022 016
63000 1 65000 A Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-209)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum CB disconnection (ruptured) current.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-123

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] CBM_1: Perm . C B op. I max,CB 022 017
20 1 65000 Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-209)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations permitted at maximum CB
disconnection (ruptured) current.
[spacer] CBM_1: No. CB ope rati ons > 022 019
10000 1 65000 Fig. 3-163, (p. 3-210)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of mechanical CB switching operations.
[spacer] CBM_1: R em ain No. C B op. < 022 020
1000 1 65000 Fig. 3-162, (p. 3-210)
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the number of remaining CB operations at CB
nominal current.
[spacer] CBM_1: ΣIt rip> 022 022
1000 1 65000 Inom,CB
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the accumulated CB disconnection (ruptured)
current values.
[spacer] CBM_1: ΣIt rip* *2> 022 081
1000 1 65000 Inom,CB**

2
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the accumulated CB disconnection (ruptured)
current values to the second power.
[spacer] CBM_1: ΣI* t> 022 096
1000.0 1.0 4000.0 kAs
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the sum of the current-time integrals of the
CB disconnection (ruptured) current values
[spacer] CBM_1: Corr. Acqu .t. t ri p 022 153
0.000 0.000 0.200 s Fig. 3-159, (p. 3-207)
[spacer]
Correction of the delay period between the forming of the device internal trip
command and the actual opening of the CB contacts.
[spacer] CBM_1: Corr. Acqu .t. CB s ig. 022 018
0.000 -0.200 0.200 s Fig. 3-159, (p. 3-207)
[spacer]
Correction of the time tolerances permissible for leading or lagging CB auxiliary
contacts.
7-124 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] CBM_2: Gene ral e nable US ER 007 170
0: No Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-203)
[spacer]
Enabling/disabling circuit breaker condition monitoring.
[spacer] CBM_2: Blocking USER 007 171
0: No Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-212)
[spacer]
Setting for temporary blocking of circuit breaker condition monitoring when
protection injection testing is being carried out.
[spacer] CBM_2: S ele ct me as . input 007 216
2: End b Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-206)
[spacer]
Selection of measuring input – end a or end b – the circuit breaker monitoring
function is controlled by its current.
[spacer] CBM_2: Operating mode 007 172
3: CB sig. EXT or trip
[spacer]
Setting for start criteria for circuit breaker condition monitoring. To evaluate all
trip commands issued by the protection device With trip cmd. only must be
selected. For further evaluation of operational trip commands the additional CB
auxiliary contact CB sig. EXT or trip is used.
[spacer] CBM_2: Inom ,CB 007 173
2000 1 65000 A
[spacer]
Setting for the circuit breakers nominal current.
[spacer] CBM_2: Perm . C B op. I nom,C B 007 174
30000 1 65000
[spacer]
Setting for the permitted number of CB operations at nominal current.
[spacer] CBM_2: M ed . curr. Itr ip,C B 007 175
Blocked 1 65000 A
[spacer]
Setting for the average ruptured current for the CB.
Note: Generally valid only for pneumatically operated circuit breakers.
[spacer] CBM_2: Perm . C B op. I me d,CB 007 176
Blocked 1 65000
[spacer]
Setting for the permitted number of CB operations at average ruptured current.
Note: Generally valid only for pneumatically operated circuit breakers.
[spacer] CBM_2: M ax. cur r. It rip,C B 007 177
63000 1 65000 A
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum ruptured current for the CB.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-125

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] CBM_2: Perm . C B op. I max,CB 007 178
20 1 65000
[spacer]
Setting for the permitted number of CB operations at maximum ruptured
current.
[spacer] CBM_2: No. CB ope rati ons > 007 179
10000 1 65000 Fig. 3-163, (p. 3-210)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum permitted number of mechanical switching operations
of the CB.
[spacer] CBM_2: R em ain No. C B op. < 007 180
1000 1 65000 Fig. 3-162, (p. 3-210)
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage threshold for the number of remaining CB
operations at CB nominal current.
[spacer] CBM_2: ΣIt rip> 007 181
1000 1 65000 Inom,CB
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage threshold for the accumulated ruptured current
values.
[spacer] CBM_2: ΣIt rip* *2> 007 182
1000 1 65000 Inom,CB**

2
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage threshold for the second power of the accumulated
ruptured current values.
[spacer] CBM_2: ΣI* t> 007 183
1000.0 0.1 4000.0 kAs
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage threshold for the sum of the current-time integral
of the ruptured currents.
[spacer] CBM_2: Corr. Acqu .t. t ri p 007 184
0.000 0.000 0.200 s
[spacer]
Correction of the delay period between the forming of the device internal trip
command and the actual opening of the CB contacts.
[spacer] CBM_2: Corr. Acqu .t. CB s ig. 007 185
0.000 -0.200 0.200 s
[spacer]
Correction of time tolerances by leading or lagging auxiliary contacts of the
circuit breaker.
7-126 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Limit value LIMIT : Ge neral e nable US ER 014 010
monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-165, (p. 3-213)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling limit value monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : IDC,lin> 014 110
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer] LIMIT : IDC,lin>> 014 111
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin>> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin> 014 112
Blocked 0.00 20.00 s Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-218)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin>> 014 113
Blocked 0.00 20.00 s Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-218)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : IDC,lin< 014 114
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer] LIMIT : IDC,lin<< 014 115
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin<< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin< 014 116
Blocked 0.00 20.00 s Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-218)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin<< 014 117
Blocked 0.00 20.00 s Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-218)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<<.
[spacer] LIMIT : T> 014 100
200 -20 200 °C Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-219)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-127

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LIMIT : T>> 014 101
200 -20 200 °C Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-219)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tT > 014 103
Blocked 0 1000 s Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-219)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tT >> 014 104
Blocked 0 1000 s Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-219)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : T< 014 105
-20 -20 200 °C Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-219)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<.
[spacer] LIMIT : T<< 014 106
-20 -20 200 °C Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-219)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tT < 014 107
Blocked 0 1000 s Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-219)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tT << 014 108
Blocked 0 1000 s Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-219)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<<.
7-128 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOGIC: General enable USE R

031 099
0: No Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-222)
[spacer]
Enable/disable the logic function.
[spacer] LOGIC: Se t 1 US ER 034 030
0: No Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-221)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function.
[spacer] LOGIC: Fct.as s ignm. outp. 1 030 000
060 000: MAIN: Without function s
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-129

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-130 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-131

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-132 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-133

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Fct.as s ignm.outp.1 00 045 140
7-134 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-135

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer]
These settings assign functions to the outputs.
[spacer] LOGIC: Op. m ode t output 1 030 001
0: Without timer stage Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-222)
[spacer] LOGIC: Op. m ode t output 1 0 030 037
7-136 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-137

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-138 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-139

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-140 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-141

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-142 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer]
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
[spacer] LOGIC: Tim e t1 output 1 030 002
0.00 0.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-222)
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-143

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7-144 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-145

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7-146 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-147

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7-148 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
Settings of timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.
0.00 0.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-222)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-149

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7-150 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-151

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7-152 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-153

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7-154 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-155

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
Settings for timer stage t2 for the respective outputs.
Note: This setting has no effect in the “minimum time” operating mode.
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig. out p. 1 044 000
7-156 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig. out p. 1 0 044 018
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-157

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-158 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-159

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-160 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig. out p.10 0 048 070
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-161

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-162 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer]
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the
logic equation.
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig.out p. 1 (t ) 044 001
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-163

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig.out p.10 (t ) 044 019
7-164 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-165

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-166 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-167

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig.out p1 00( t) 048 071
7-168 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-169

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer]
logic equation.
7-170 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOG_2: General e nabl e USE R

011 137
0: No Fig. 3-174, (p. 3-223)
[spacer]
Enable/disable the function group LOG_2 (Programmable Logic 2).
[spacer] LOG_2: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 050 000
060 000: MAIN: Without function s
[spacer]
These settings assign functions to the outputs.
[spacer] LOG_2: Op . m ode t output 1 050 001
0: Without timer stage Fig. 3-174, (p. 3-223)
[spacer]
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
[spacer] LOG_2: T im e t 1 output 1 050 002
0 0 60000 s Fig. 3-174, (p. 3-223)
0 0 60000 s
0 0 60000 s
0 0 60000 s
[spacer]
Settings of timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.
0 0 60000 s Fig. 3-174, (p. 3-223)
0 0 60000 s
0 0 60000 s
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-171

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0 0 60000 s
[spacer]
Settings for timer stage t2 for the respective outputs.
Note: This setting has no effect in the “minimum time” operating mode.
[spacer] LOG_2: S ig.as sig. o ut p. 1 064 000
[spacer]
logic equation.
[spacer] LOG_2: S ig.as sig.out p. 1 (t ) 064 001
[spacer]
logic equation.
7-172 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Real Timer TIM ER : Ge ne ral e nable US E R 014 199
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-228)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling TIMER protection.
[spacer] TIM ER : Calendar 1 014 178
[spacer]
The setting defines the calender day of week for the TIMER. One or more of the
seven weekdays can be selected.
[spacer] TIM ER : S tart hour 1 014 089
0 0 23 h Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-228)
0 0 23 h
0 0 23 h
0 0 23 h
[spacer]
The parameter defines the start hour of the TIMER.
[spacer] TIM ER : S tart m inute 1 014 102
0 0 59 min Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-228)
0 0 59 min
0 0 59 min
0 0 59 min
[spacer]
The parameter defines the start minute of the TIMER.
[spacer] TIM ER : E nd hour 1 014 109
0 0 23 h Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-228)
0 0 23 h
0 0 23 h
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-173

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0 0 23 h
[spacer]
The parameter defines the end hour of the TIMER.
[spacer] TIM ER : E nd m inute 1 014 118
0 0 59 min Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-228)
0 0 59 min
0 0 59 min
0 0 59 min
[spacer]
The parameter defines the end minute of the TIMER.
7-174 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Single-pole CMD_1: De sign. command C 001 200 000
commands
1: C001
[spacer] CMD_1: De sign. command C 002 200 005
2: C002
3: C003
4: C004
5: C005
6: C006
7: C007
8: C008
9: C009
10: C010
11: C011
12: C012
13: C013
14: C014
15: C015
16: C016
17: C017
18: C018
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-175

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
19: C019
20: C020
21: C021
22: C022
23: C023
24: C024
25: C025
26: C026
[spacer]
Selection of the command designation.
[spacer] CMD_1: Oper. m ode cmd. C 001 200 002
3: Persistent command Fig. 3-201, (p. 3-256)
7-176 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C 011 200 052
[spacer]
Selection of the command operating mode.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-177

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Single-pole signals SIG_1: Des ignat . si g. S 001 226 000
1: S001
[spacer] SIG_1: Des ignat . si g. S 002 226 008
2: S002
3: S003
4: S004
5: S005
6: S006
7: S007
8: S008
9: S009
10: S010
11: S011
12: S012
13: S013
14: S014
15: S015
16: S016
17: S017
18: S018
19: S019
7-178 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
20: S020
21: S021
22: S022
23: S023
24: S024
25: S025
26: S026
27: S027
28: S028
29: S029
30: S030
31: S031
32: S032
33: S033
34: S034
35: S035
36: S036
37: S037
38: S038
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-179

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
39: S039
40: S040
41: S041
42: S042
43: S043
44: S044
45: S045
46: S046
47: S047
48: S048
49: S049
50: S050
51: S051
52: S052
53: S053
54: S054
55: S055
56: S056
57: S057
7-180 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
58: S058
59: S059
60: S060
61: S061
62: S062
63: S063
64: S064
[spacer]
Selection of the signal designation.
[spacer] SIG_1: Op er. mode s ig. S 001 226 001
1: Start/end signal Fig. 3-202, (p. 3-258)
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-181

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] SIG_1: Op er. mod e s ig. S 012 226 089
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
7-182 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-183

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
[spacer]
Selection of the signal operating mode.
[spacer] SIG_1: Gr.as g. de bounc.S0 01 226 003
1: Group 1 Fig. 3-202, (p. 3-258)
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
7-184 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-185

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
7-186 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-187

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
[spacer]
Group assignment for the debouncing time and the chatter suppression.
[spacer] SIG_1: M in. sig. dur. S0 01 226 002
0 0 254 s Fig. 3-202, (p. 3-258)
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
7-188 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-189

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
7-190 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
[spacer]
The logic “1” signal must be available for this minimum time setting so that a
telegram can be sent in the Start/end signal mode.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-191

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Binary counts COUNT : General enable US ER 217 000
0: No Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-264)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling binary counts.
[spacer] COUNT : Deb ounce t. c ount. 1 217 160
3 0 1000 ms Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-264)
3 0 1000 ms
3 0 1000 ms
3 0 1000 ms
[spacer]
Setting for the debounce time of the binary signal to be counted.
[spacer] COUNT : Limit count e r 1 217 221
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
[spacer]
Setting a limit for the counter value. A warning signal is issued if the counter
value exceeds the set limit. Setting this parameter to Blocked disables the limit
check.
[spacer] COUNT : Cycle t.count t r ans m 217 007
0: No transmission Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-264)
[spacer]
Setting the cycle time for the periodic transmission of the counts.
[spacer] COUNT : IEC61850 pulsQty 221 096
1 0 1000
[spacer]
Setting the scaling factor to transmit the counter value via IEC 61850. According
to the standard the resulting value is calculated as:
Value transmitted = actual value · pulsQty
(see IEC 61850: Value = actVal · pulsQty).
7-192 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
7.1.3.3 Param eter S ubs e ts
Parameter Address
Differential protec‐ DIFF: E nable PSx 072 152 073 152 074 152 075 152
tion
0: No
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset (setting group) in which differential
protection is enabled.
[spacer] DIFF: Idiff> PS x 072 142 073 142 074 142 075 142
0.20 0.05 2.50 Iref Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-144)
[spacer]
Operate value of the differential protection function as referred to the reference
current of the relevant transformer end.
[spacer] DIFF: Idiff>> PSx 072 143 073 143 074 143 075 143
5.00 2.00 25.00 Iref Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-144)
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value of the differential current with which
inrush stabilization becomes ineffective.
Note: If the threshold exceeds its normal setting, the P638 may not start if
there are internal faults with transformer saturation.
[spacer] DIFF: Idiff>>> PS x 072 144 073 144 074 144 075 144
10.00 2.00 25.00 Iref Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-144)
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value of the differential current that will
trigger the differential protection regardless of hold time, inrush stabilization
and saturation detection.
Note: If the threshold is set too low, the P638 may start if there are external
faults with transformer saturation.
[spacer] DIFF: m1 PS x 072 145 073 145 074 145 075 145
0.50 0.20 1.50 Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-144)
[spacer]
Gradient of the differential protection tripping characteristic for the range
0.5·Idiff> < IR ≤ IR,m1.
[spacer] DIFF: m2 PS x 072 146 073 146 074 146 075 146
0.50 0.20 1.50 Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-144)
[spacer]
Gradient of the differential protection tripping characteristic for the
range IR > IR,m2.
[spacer] DIFF: IR,m 2 PSx 072 147 073 147 074 147 075 147
4.00 1.50 10.00 Iref Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-144)
[spacer]
Knee point where the tripping characteristic continues with the setting for
gradient m2.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-193

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DIFF: R us hI ( 2f0)/I (f0) P Sx 072 159 073 159 074 159 075 159
20 10 50 % Fig. 3-100, (p. 3-145)

Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-175)
[spacer]
Operate value of the inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint) of differential
protection as a ratio of the second harmonic with the fundamental component of
the differential current, in percent.
[spacer] DIFF: 0-s e q . f ilt.a e n.P Sx 072 155 073 155 074 155 075 155
0: No Fig. 3-97, (p. 3-141)
[spacer]
Disabling/enabling of the zero current filter of end a.
Note: The zero current filter may not be enabled if the P638 has to work in end
a with transverse differential protection.
[spacer] DIFF: 0-s e q . f ilt.b e n.P Sx 071 060 071 061 071 062 071 063
0: No Fig. 3-97, (p. 3-141)
[spacer]
Disabling/enabling of the zero current filter of end b.
Note: The zero current filter may not be enabled if the P638 has to work in end
b with transverse differential protection.
Parameter Address
Transverse DIF_a: Enable PS x 072 130 073 130 074 130 075 130
tionTransverse
tion
0: No
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which the transverse differential
[spacer] DIF_a: I trans> PSx 072 131 073 131 074 131 075 131
0.30 0.10 1.00 Inom
[spacer]
Threshold of the transverse differential protection referred to the nominal
current of the regarded end.
[spacer] DIF_a: m 1 PS x 072 132 073 132 074 132 075 132
0.50 0.20 1.50
[spacer]
Gradient of the tripping characteristic of the transverse differential protection in
the range
I q>
IR >
m1
7-194 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Transverse DIF_b: Enable PSx 072 134 073 134 074 134 075 134
tion
0: No
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which the transverse differential
[spacer] DIF_b: Itrans> PS x 072 135 073 135 074 135 075 135
0.30 0.10 1.00 Inom
[spacer]
Threshold of the transverse differential protection referred to the nominal
current of the regarded end.
[spacer] DIF_b: m 1 PSx 072 136 073 136 074 136 075 136
0.50 0.20 1.50
[spacer]
Gradient of the tripping characteristic of the transverse differential protection in
the range
I q>
IR >
m1
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-195

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOC1: Enable PSx 076 050 077 050 078 050 079 050
current protection
0: No Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-149)
[spacer] DTOC2: Enable PSx 076 070 077 070 078 070 079 070
0: No Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-149)
[spacer]
This setting specifies the parameter subset to be enabled for definite-time
overcurrent protection.
[spacer] DTOC1: I> PSx 076 051 077 051 078 051 079 051
1.00 0.10 10.00 Inom Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-153)
[spacer] DTOC2: I> PSx 076 071 077 071 078 071 079 071
1.00 0.10 10.00 Inom Fig. 3-111, (p. 3-157)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value I>.
[spacer] DTOC1: I>> PSx 076 052 077 052 078 052 079 052
1.00 0.10 10.00 Inom Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-153)
[spacer] DTOC2: I>> PSx 076 072 077 072 078 072 079 072
1.00 0.10 10.00 Inom Fig. 3-111, (p. 3-157)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value I>>.
[spacer] DTOC1: tI> PS x 076 057 077 057 078 057 079 057
1.00 0.00 60.00 s Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-153)
[spacer] DTOC2: tI> PS x 076 077 077 077 078 077 079 077
1.00 0.00 60.00 s Fig. 3-111, (p. 3-157)
[spacer]
Setting for operate delay I>.
[spacer] DTOC1: tI>> PS x 076 058 077 058 078 058 079 058
1.00 0.00 60.00 s Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-153)
[spacer] DTOC2: tI>> PS x 076 078 077 078 078 078 079 078
1.00 0.00 60.00 s Fig. 3-111, (p. 3-157)
[spacer]
Setting for operate delay I>>.
[spacer] DTOC1: Time r S tart tI> PSx 071 146 071 147 071 148 071 149
1: With starting Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-153)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether timer stage tI> is started with triggering of current
thresholds I> or, additionally, with a directional signal.
[spacer] DTOC1: Inrush s tab. en. P S x 076 063 077 063 078 063 079 063
0: No Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-151)
7-196 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] DTOC2: Inrush s t ab. en. P S x 076 083 077 083 078 083 079 083
0: No Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-151)
[spacer]
Setting as to whether the inrush stabilization function (harmonic restraint) of
differential protection shall be able to block the definite-time overcurrent
protection function.
[spacer] DTOC1: I>lift ru sh r e st rP Sx 076 064 077 064 078 064 079 064
1.00 0.10 20.00 Inom Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-151)
[spacer]
Setting for the current threshold to be exceeded for the inrush stabilization to
become ineffective.
[spacer] DTOC1: Beta (I >) PSx 076 068 077 068 078 068 079 068
135 50 220 ° Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-155)
[spacer]
Angles β and γ set the range in which the I> starting signal logic determines
that the direction is forward.
[spacer] DTOC1: Gam ma ( I>) PSx 076 073 077 073 078 073 079 073
-45 -130 40 ° Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-155)
[spacer]
Angles β and γ set the range in which the I> starting signal logic determines
[spacer] DTOC1: Direction (I>) P Sx 076 080 077 080 078 080 079 080
3: Non-directional Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
Setting for the measuring direction for which a tI> trip signal is sent: forward,
reverse or non-directional.
[spacer] DTOC1: V< ( I>) PSx 076 131 077 131 078 131 079 131
Blocked 0.50 0.90 Vnom Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
The tI> trip signal is enabled only if the voltage is lower than the set value.
Enabling is permanent if it is set to Blocked.
[spacer] DTOC1: Vmin (I>) P Sx 076 157 077 157 078 157 079 157
0.005 0.002 0.500 Vnom Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
A direction decision of the I> overcurrent stage is possible only if the short
circuit voltage is higher than this set value.
[spacer] DTOC1: M ode V<Vmin (I>) PS x 076 113 077 113 078 113 079 113
2: Blocked Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether, for a short circuit voltage which is lower than Vmin,
the I> overcurrent stage should operate non-directional or should be blocked.
[spacer] DTOC1: M ode w/ o V (I>) P Sx 076 128 077 128 078 128 079 128
2: Blocked Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether, for a voltage measuring circuit failure, the I>
overcurrent stage should operate non-directional or should be blocked.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-197

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DTOC1: Time r S tart tI>> PSx 072 245 073 044 074 044 075 044
[spacer]
This setting defines whether timer stage tI>> is started with the triggering of
current thresholds I>> or, additionally, with a directional signal.
[spacer] DTOC1: Beta (I >>) PS x 076 069 077 069 078 069 079 069
135 50 220 ° Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-155)
[spacer]
Angles β and γ set the range in which the I>> starting signal logic determines
[spacer] DTOC1: Gam ma ( I>>) PSx 076 074 077 074 078 074 079 074
-45 -130 40 ° Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-155)
[spacer]
Angles β and γ set the range in which the I>> starting signal logic determines
[spacer] DTOC1: Direction (I>>) P Sx 076 088 077 088 078 088 079 088
3: Non-directional
[spacer]
Setting for the measuring direction for which a tI>> trip signal is sent: forward,
[spacer] DTOC1: V< ( I>>) PSx 076 150 077 150 078 150 079 150
[spacer]
The tI>> trip signal is enabled only if the voltage is lower than the set value.
[spacer] DTOC1: Vmin (I>>) P Sx 076 158 077 158 078 158 079 158
0.005 0.002 0.500 Vnom
[spacer]
A direction decision of the I>> overcurrent stage is possible only if the short
circuit voltage is higher than this set value.
[spacer] DTOC1: M ode V<Vmin( I>>) PSx 076 127 077 127 078 127 079 127
2: Blocked
[spacer]
the I>> overcurrent stage should operate non-directional or should be blocked.
[spacer] DTOC1: M ode w/ o V (I>>) P Sx 076 129 077 129 078 129 079 129
2: Blocked
[spacer]
This setting defines whether, for a voltage measuring circuit failure, the I>>
overcurrent stage should operate non-directional or should be blocked.
7-198 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOC2: I>lift ru sh r e st rP Sx 076 084 077 084 078 084 079 084
current protection
1.00 0.10 20.00 Inom Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-151)
[spacer]
Setting for the current threshold to be exceeded for the inrush stabilization to
become ineffective.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-199

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOCN: Enab le PS x 076 110 077 110 078 110 079 110
current protection
0: No Fig. 3-112, (p. 3-158)
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which definite-time overcurrent
protection for residual current is enabled.
[spacer] DTOCN: IN>H PS x 076 111 077 111 078 111 079 111
1.00 0.10 10.00 IN,nom Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-159)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold IN>H.
[spacer] DTOCN: IN> PS x 017 003 073 015 074 015 075 015
1.00 0.10 10.00 IN,nom Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-159)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the first overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
Caution! The range of setting values includes operate values that are not
permitted as continuous current values (see “Technical Data”).
[spacer] DTOCN: IN>> PS x 017 009 073 016 074 016 075 016
1.00 0.10 10.00 IN,nom Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-159)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the second overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
Caution! The range of setting values includes operate values that are not
permitted as continuous current values (see “Technical Data”).
[spacer] DTOCN: tIN> PSx 017 008 073 027 074 027 075 027
1.000 0.000 60.000 s Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-159)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
[spacer] DTOCN: tIN>> PSx 017 010 073 028 074 028 075 028
1.000 0.000 60.000 s Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-159)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
[spacer] DTOCN: tIN>H PSx 076 114 077 114 078 114 079 114
1.000 0.000 30.000 s Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-159)
[spacer]
Setting for operate delay tIN>H.
7-200 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur‐ IDMT: E nable PSx

072 000 073 000 074 000 075 000
rent protection
0: No Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-160)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which inverse-time overcurrent
protection is enabled (phase current system).
[spacer] IDMT: I ref PSx 072 050 073 050 074 050 075 050
1.00 0.10 4.00 Inom Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-168)
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current of the curve.
[spacer] IDMT: C haracte ri stic P Sx 072 056 073 056 074 056 075 056
0: Definite Time Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-168)
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping characteristic.
[spacer] IDMT: C har. fact or kt P S x 072 053 073 053 074 053 075 053
1.00 0.01 10.00 Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-168)
[spacer]
Setting for the characteristic time multiplier
[spacer] IDMT: M in. trip t ime P Sx 072 077 073 077 074 077 075 077
1.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-168)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum trip time.
[spacer] IDMT: Hold t ime PSx 072 071 073 071 074 071 075 071
0.00 0.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-168)
[spacer]
Setting for the hold time or intermittent faults.
[spacer] IDMT: R e le as e PSx 072 059 073 059 074 059 075 059
1: Without delay Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-168)
[spacer]
Setting for the release or reset characteristic (phase current system).
[spacer] IDMT: T im e r s t. tIre f> P Sx 006 061 006 062 006 063 006 064
[spacer]
This setting defines whether timer stage tIref> is started with the triggering of
IDMT protection or, additionally, with a directional signal.
[spacer] IDMT: B e ta PS x 072 046 073 046 074 046 075 046
135 50 220 ° Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-170)
[spacer] IDMT: Gamm a PSx 072 047 073 047 074 047 075 047
-45 -130 40 ° Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-170)
[spacer]
Angles β and γ set the range in which the inverse-time overcurrent starting
signal logic determines that the direction is “forward”.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-201

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] IDMT: D ire ct ion (I>) PS x 072 048 073 048 074 048 075 048
3: Non-directional Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-171)
[spacer]
Setting for the measuring direction for which a tIref> trip signal is sent: forward,
[spacer] IDMT: V< PS x 072 081 073 081 074 081 075 081
Blocked 0.50 0.90 Vnom Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-171)
[spacer]
The tIref> trip signal is enabled only if the voltage is lower than the set value.
[spacer] IDMT: Vm in PSx 072 133 073 133 074 133 075 133
0.005 0.002 0.500 Vnom Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-171)
[spacer]
A direction decision of the definite-time overcurrent protection is possible only if
the short circuit voltage is higher than this set value.
[spacer] IDMT: O p. m ode V<Vmin P Sx 072 138 073 138 074 138 075 138
2: Blocked Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-171)
[spacer]
the definite-time overcurrent protection should operate non-directional or should
be blocked.
[spacer] IDMT: M ode w/o v olt age PSx 072 119 073 119 074 119 075 119
2: Blocked Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-171)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether, in case of voltage measuring circuit failure, the
definite-time overcurrent protection function should operate non-directionally or
should be blocked.
[spacer] IDMT: I nr us h s tab. e n. P Sx 072 129 073 129 074 129 075 129
0: No Fig. 3-120, (p. 3-165)
[spacer]
The setting defines whether the definite-time overcurrent protection can be
blocked by the inrush stabilisation of the differential current.
[spacer] IDMT: I >lift rus h rest rP Sx 072 101 072 102 072 103 072 104
1.00 0.10 20.00 Inom Fig. 3-120, (p. 3-165)
[spacer]
Setting for the current threshold for deactivation of inrush stabilization.
7-202 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Distance protection DIST: Enable PSx 072 200 073 200 074 200 075 200
0: No Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-173)
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which distance protection is enabled.
[spacer] DIST: I> PSx 072 195 073 195 074 195 075 195
0.50 0.10 2.00 Inom Fig. 3-130, (p. 3-175)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current sensitivity of the distance zones.
[spacer] DIST: X1, for ward PSx 021 239 021 245 021 246 021 247
10.00 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-179)
[spacer] DIST: X1, backwar d PS x 021 242 021 248 021 249 021 250
Blocked 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-179)
20.00 0.10 300.00 Ω
Blocked 0.10 300.00 Ω
30.0 0.1 750.0 Ω
Blocked 0.1 750.0 Ω
[spacer]
Setting for the reactance boundaries of zones 1 to 3, in forward and reverse
directions, in secondary values.
[spacer] DIST: R1, f or ward PS x 076 115 077 115 078 115 079 115
10.00 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-179)
[spacer] DIST: R1, b ackwar d PS x 076 121 077 121 078 121 079 121
10.00 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-179)
20.00 0.10 300.00 Ω
20.00 0.10 300.00 Ω
30.0 0.1 650.0 Ω
30.0 0.1 650.0 Ω
[spacer]
Setting for the resistance boundaries (arc reserve) of zones 1 to 3, in forward
and reverse directions, in secondary values.
[spacer] DIST: Rg1, forward P Sx 076 138 077 138 078 138 079 138
0.10 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-179)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-203

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DIST: Rg1, backwar d PS x 076 144 077 144 078 144 079 144
0.10 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-179)
0.10 0.10 300.00 Ω
0.10 0.10 300.00 Ω
0.1 0.1 650.0 Ω
0.1 0.1 650.0 Ω
[spacer]
Setting for the limit resistance for simultaneous load blinding of zones 1 to 3, in
forward and reverse directions, in secondary values.
Note: The maximum setting value Rg is set to the same value as that of
resistance boundary R of the respective zone. If Rg is higher, the signal “Wrong
Setting Distance Protection” is issued and the protection function is blocked.
[spacer] DIST: Alpha_L 1 PS x 012 013 012 063 013 013 013 063
45 40 90 ° Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-179)
45 40 90 °
45 40 90 °
[spacer]
Setting for the slope angle of the tripping characteristic of impedance zones 1 to
3 in R-direction (resistance line), usually identical to the line impedance angle.
[spacer] DIST: Be ta 1 PS x 072 208 073 208 074 208 075 208
135 90 135 ° Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-179)
135 90 135 °
135 90 135 °
[spacer]
Angle setting for load blinding (directional line) in quadrant 2 or 4 of impedance
zones 1 to 3.
[spacer] DIST: Alpha 1 PS x 076 090 077 090 078 090 079 090
0 0 40 ° Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-179)
0 0 40 °
7-204 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
0 0 40 °
[spacer]
Angle setting for load blinding (directional line) in the first or third quadrant of
impedance zones 1 to 3.
[spacer] DIST: Gamm a 1 PSx 076 247 077 247 078 247 079 247
-45 -45 0 ° Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-179)
-45 -45 0 °
-45 -45 0 °
[spacer]
Angle setting in quadrant 4 or 2 until the limit resistance is active with a
simultaneous load blinding, for the impedance zones 1 to 3.
[spacer] DIST: t1 PS x 012 028 012 078 013 028 013 078
0.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-180)
[spacer] DIST: t2 PS x 012 029 012 079 013 029 013 079
0.30 0.00 60.00 s Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-180)
[spacer] DIST: t3 PS x 012 030 012 080 013 030 013 080
0.60 0.00 60.00 s Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-180)
[spacer]
Setting for the timer stages of impedance zone 1, 2 or 3.
[spacer] DIST: Inrus h s tab. e n. P Sx 025 123 025 125 025 126 025 127
0: No Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-175)
[spacer]
The setting defines whether the distance protection can be blocked by the
inrush stabilisation of the differential current.
[spacer] DIST: I>lift rus h rest rP S x 025 128 025 129 025 130 025 148
1.00 0.10 20.00 Inom Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-175)
[spacer]
Setting for the current threshold for deactivation of inrush stabilization.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-205

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Measuring-circuit MCM ON: Enable PS x 014 200 014 201 014 202 014 203
monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-136, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which CT and VT Supervision is enabled.
[spacer] MCM ON: V<, V- mo nit . PSx 014 229 014 230 014 231 014 232
0.65 0.10 1.50 Vnom Fig. 3-137, (p. 3-182)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate threshold of undervoltage monitoring.
[spacer] MCM ON: t V<, V-monit . P Sx 014 233 014 234 014 235 014 236
5.00 0.10 60.00 s Fig. 3-137, (p. 3-182)
[spacer]
Setting for the time delay of undervoltage monitoring.
[spacer] MCM ON: I > e na.V- monit . PSx 014 188 014 237 014 238 014 239
0.10 0.00 1.00 Inom Fig. 3-137, (p. 3-182)
[spacer]
Enabling undervoltage and fuse failure monitoring.
7-206 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Thermal overload THER M : Enable P Sx 072 175 073 175 074 175 075 175
protection
0: No Fig. 3-140, (p. 3-184)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which thermal overload protection
is enabled.
[spacer] THER M : Ir ef PSx 072 179 073 179 074 179 075 179
1.00 0.10 4.00 Inom Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current.
[spacer] THER M : S tar t .f act.OL_RC PS x 072 180 073 180 074 180 075 180
1.15 1.05 1.50 Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Setting for the starting factor to trigger overload recording.
[spacer] THER M : Tim.const .1 ,>Ibl PSx 072 187 073 187 074 187 075 187
30.0 1.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current flow
(Ibl: base line current).
[spacer] THER M : Tim.const .2 ,<Ibl PSx 072 188 073 188 074 188 075 188
30.0 1.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current
flow (cooling time constant).
Note: This setting option is only relevant when machines are running. In all
other cases, time constant 2 must be set equal to time constant 1.
[spacer] THER M : O/ T f .Iref pe r s. PS x 072 167 073 167 074 167 075 167
80 0 300 K
[spacer]
Setting for the overtemperature resulting from persistent thermal limit current.
Note: This setting is only enabled in the Absolute replica mode of operation.
[spacer] THER M : R e l. O/ T warning P Sx 072 184 073 184 074 184 075 184
95 50 200 % Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate threshold of the warning stage.
Note: This setting is enabled only in the Relative replica operating mode.
[spacer] THER M : R e l. O/ T t rip P Sx 072 181 073 181 074 181 075 181
100 50 200 % Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate threshold of the trip stage.
Note: This setting is enabled only in the Relative replica operating mode.
[spacer] THER M : Abs. O/ T warning PS x 072 153 073 153 074 153 075 153
95 0 300 °C
[spacer]
Setting for the temperature (in °C) to trigger a warning alarm.
Note: This setting is only enabled in the Absolute replica mode of operation.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-207

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] THER M : M ax.pe rm.obj .t mp.PS x 072 182 073 182 074 182 075 182
120 0 300 °C Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum permissible temperature of the protected object.
[spacer] THER M : M ax.pe rm.cool.t mpPS x 072 185 073 185 074 185 075 185
40 0 300 °C Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum permissible coolant temperature.
Note: This setting is active only if the coolant temperature is measured via the
PT 100 or the 20 mA input.
[spacer] THER M : S ele ct CTA P Sx 072 177 073 177 074 177 075 177
0: Default temp. value Fig. 3-141, (p. 3-186)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether coolant temperature (ambient) shall be measured
and, if so, whether data acquisition shall take place via the PT 100 or the 20 mA
input.
[spacer] THER M : De fault CTA PS x 072 186 073 186 074 186 075 186
40 -40 300 °C Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Setting for the coolant temperature to be used for calculation of the trip time if
coolant temperature is not measured.
[spacer] THER M : Funct.f.CT A fai l. PSx 076 177 077 177 078 177 079 177
1: Default temp. value Fig. 3-141, (p. 3-186)
[spacer]
The setting defines how the thermal overload protection function will continue to
operate in the event of faulty coolant temperature acquisition. User can select
between Default temp. value, Last meas.temperat. and Blocking.
[spacer] THER M : M inimum te mper at.PS x 076 178 077 178 078 178 079 178
-40 -40 100 °C
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum coolant temperature to be used for trip time calculation
if a cable runs in an underground tunnel system.
[spacer] THER M : Hyste res is t ri p PSx 072 183 073 183 074 183 075 183
2 2 30 % Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Setting for the hysteresis of the trip stage.
[spacer] THER M : R e tain re pl ic a PS x 009 019 009 030 009 032 009 039
0: No
[spacer]
With this parameter it can be configured whether the thermal replica is retained
in the non-volatile section of the device's memory so that it will still be available
after an interruption of the supply voltage.
[spacer] THER M : Warning pre-t rip PS x 072 191 073 191 074 191 075 191
30.0 0.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
A warning will be given in advance of the trip. The time difference between the
warning time and the trip time is set here.
7-208 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Time-voltage protec‐ V<>: Enable PS x

076 000 077 000 078 000 079 000
tion
0: No Fig. 3-145, (p. 3-191)
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which V<> protection is enabled.
[spacer] V<>: V> PSx 076 003 077 003 078 003 079 003
1.10 0.20 3.00 Vnom Fig. 3-146, (p. 3-192)

Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V>.
[spacer] V<>: V> > PSx 076 004 077 004 078 004 079 004
1.20 0.20 3.00 Vnom Fig. 3-146, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V>>.
[spacer] V<>: tV> PS x 076 005 077 005 078 005 079 005
Blocked 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-146, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>.
[spacer] V<>: tV>> PS x 076 006 077 006 078 006 079 006
Blocked 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-146, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>.
[spacer] V<>: V< PSx 076 007 077 007 078 007 079 007
0.80 0.20 3.00 Vnom Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V<.
[spacer] V<>: V< < PSx 076 008 077 008 078 008 079 008
0.70 0.20 3.00 Vnom Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V<<.
[spacer] V<>: Vm in PS x 076 046 077 046 078 046 079 046
0.25 0.00 1.20 Vnom Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer]
Setting for the lower threshold of the window function.
[spacer] V<>: tV< PS x 076 009 077 009 078 009 079 009
Blocked 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<.
[spacer] V<>: tV<< PS x 076 010 077 010 078 010 079 010
Blocked 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<.
[spacer] V<>: tT rans ient P Sx 076 029 077 029 078 029 079 029
1.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer]
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by the undervoltage stages.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-209

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] V<>: Hyst . V<> meas. PSx 076 048 077 048 078 048 079 048
3 1 10 % Fig. 3-146, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring measured
voltages.
7-210 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Over-/ f<> : Enable PSx 018 196 018 197 018 198 018 199
tection
0: No Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-194)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which over-/underfrequency
[spacer] f<> : Oper. m ode f1 PS x 018 120 018 121 018 122 018 123
1: f Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-197)
1: f
1: f
1: f
1: f
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency
protection.
[spacer] f<> : f1 PS x 018 100 018 101 018 102 018 103
49.80 10.00 70.00 Hz Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-197)
[spacer] f<> : f2 PS x 018 124 018 125 018 126 018 127
49.80 10.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer] f<> : f3 PS x 018 148 018 149 018 150 018 151
49.80 10.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer] f<> : f4 PS x 018 172 018 173 018 174 018 175
49.80 10.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer] f<> : f5 PS x 019 151 019 152 019 153 019 154
49.80 10.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer]
Setting for the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection
function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies: The
threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency exceeds
this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal frequency and the
frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the chosen operating mode,
either a signal is issued without further monitoring, or further monitoring
mechanisms are started.
[spacer] f<> : tf1 PSx 018 104 018 105 018 106 018 107
0.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-197)
[spacer] f<> : tf2 PSx 018 128 018 129 018 130 018 131
0.00 0.00 10.00 s
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-211

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] f<> : tf3 PSx 018 152 018 153 018 154 018 155
0.00 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer] f<> : tf4 PSx 018 176 018 177 018 178 018 179
0.00 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer] f<> : tf5 PSx 019 155 019 156 019 157 019 158
0.00 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection.
[spacer] f<> : df1/dt PS x 018 108 018 109 018 110 018 111
2.0 0.1 10.0 Hz/s Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-197)
[spacer] f<> : df2/dt PS x 018 132 018 133 018 134 018 135
2.0 0.1 10.0 Hz/s
[spacer] f<> : df3/dt PS x 018 156 018 157 018 158 018 159
2.0 0.1 10.0 Hz/s
[spacer] f<> : df4/dt PS x 018 180 018 181 018 182 018 183
2.0 0.1 10.0 Hz/s
[spacer] f<> : df5/dt PS x 019 159 013 092 013 093 013 094
2.0 0.1 10.0 Hz/s
[spacer]
Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored.
Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode f with df/dt has been
selected.
[spacer] f<> : De lta f1 PS x 018 112 018 113 018 114 018 115
0.30 0.01 5.00 Hz Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-197)
0.30 0.01 5.00 Hz
0.30 0.01 5.00 Hz
0.30 0.01 5.00 Hz
0.30 0.01 5.00 Hz
[spacer]
Setting for Delta f.
Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode f w. Delta f/Delta t has
been selected.
[spacer] f<> : De lta t1 PS x 018 116 018 117 018 118 018 119
0.30 0.04 3.00 s Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-197)
[spacer] f<> : De lta t2 PS x 018 140 018 141 018 142 018 143
0.30 0.04 3.00 s
7-212 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] f<> : De lta t3 PSx 018 164 018 165 018 166 018 167
0.30 0.04 3.00 s
0.30 0.04 3.00 s
0.30 0.04 3.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for Delta t.
Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode f w. Delta f/Delta t has
been selected.
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF_1: Enable PSx 072 110 073 110 074 110 075 110
failure protection
0: No
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which breaker failure protection is
enabled.
[spacer] CBF_1: Im in< PSx 072 112 073 112 074 112 075 112
0.20 0.10 1.00 Inom Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-202)
[spacer]
Setting for the Imin< current threshold. Current falling below this threshold will
be interpreted as breaker opening, and reset the CBF timers.
[spacer] CBF_1: tI min< P Sx 072 113 073 113 074 113 075 113
0.10 0.00 50.00 s Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-200)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of CB auxiliary contact monitoring.
[spacer] CBF_1: Ope rative t ime P Sx 072 114 073 114 074 114 075 114
30.0 1.0 500.0 s Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-200)
[spacer]
Setting for the operative time of CB auxiliary contact monitoring.
[spacer] CBF_1: Mon. time M-t r ip PS x 072 115 073 115 074 115 075 115
0.15 0.00 2.00 s Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-200)
[spacer]
Setting for the monitoring time of the main-trip command before issuing a re-
trip.
[spacer] CBF_1: Mon. time R-t r ip PS x 072 116 073 116 074 116 075 116
0.30 0.00 2.00 s Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-200)
[spacer]
Setting for the monitoring time of the re-trip command before issuing a back-
trip.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-213

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF_2: Enable PSx 072 120 073 120 074 120 075 120
failure protection
0: No
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which breaker failure protection is
enabled.
[spacer] CBF_2: Im in< PSx 072 122 073 122 074 122 075 122
0.20 0.10 1.00 Inom Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-202)
[spacer]
Setting for the Imin< current threshold. Current falling below this threshold will
be interpreted as breaker opening, and reset the CBF timers.
[spacer] CBF_2: tI min< PS x 072 123 073 123 074 123 075 123
0.10 0.00 50.00 s Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-201)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of CB auxiliary contact monitoring.
[spacer] CBF_2: tOp PSx 072 124 073 124 074 124 075 124
30.0 1.0 500.0 s Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-201)
[spacer]
Setting for the operative time of CB auxiliary contact monitoring.
[spacer] CBF_2: Mon. tim e M-t r ip PS x 072 125 073 125 074 125 075 125
0.15 0.00 2.00 s Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-201)
[spacer]
Setting for the monitoring time of the main-trip command before issuing a re-
trip.
[spacer] CBF_2: Mon. tim e R-t r ip PS x 072 126 073 126 074 126 075 126
0.25 0.00 2.00 s Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-201)
[spacer]
Setting for the monitoring time of the re-trip command before issuing a back-
trip.
7-214 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Limit value LIMIT : Enable PS x 072 240 073 240 074 240 075 240
monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-165, (p. 3-213)
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which the limit value monitoring
function is enabled.
[spacer] LIMIT : Ia> PS x 072 221 073 221 074 221 075 221
1.10 0.10 5.00 Inom Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold Ia> for end a.
[spacer] LIMIT : Ib> PS x 072 229 073 229 074 229 075 229
1.10 0.10 5.00 Inom Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold Ib> for end b.
[spacer] LIMIT : Ia>> PS x 072 223 073 223 074 223 075 223
1.20 0.10 5.00 Inom Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold Ia>> for end a.
[spacer] LIMIT : Ib>> PS x 072 230 073 230 074 230 075 230
1.20 0.10 5.00 Inom Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold Ib>> for end b.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIa> PS x 072 224 073 224 074 224 075 224
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
Setting for operate delay tIa> for end a.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIb > PSx 072 231 073 231 074 231 075 231
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
Setting for operate delay tIb> for end b.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIa>> PS x 072 225 073 225 074 225 075 225
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
Setting for operate delay tIa>> for end a.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIb >> PS x 072 232 073 232 074 232 075 232
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
Setting for operate delay tIb>> for end b.
[spacer] LIMIT : IN> PS x 072 234 073 234 074 234 075 234
1.10 0.10 5.00 IN,nom Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-215)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold IN>.
[spacer] LIMIT : IN>> PS x 072 235 073 235 074 235 075 235
1.10 0.10 5.00 IN,nom Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-215)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold IN>>.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-215

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LIMIT : tIN> PSx 072 236 073 236 074 236 075 236
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-215)
[spacer]
Setting for operate delay tIN>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIN>> PS x 072 237 073 237 074 237 075 237
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-215)
[spacer]
Setting for operate delay tIN>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : V> PSx 072 247 073 247 074 247 075 247
1.10 0.10 1.50 Vnom Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-216)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold V>.
[spacer] LIMIT : V>> PS x 072 248 073 248 074 248 075 248
1.20 0.10 1.50 Vnom Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-216)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold V>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tV> PS x 072 249 073 249 074 249 075 249
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-216)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tV>> PS x 072 250 073 250 074 250 075 250
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-216)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : V< PSx 072 251 073 251 074 251 075 251
0.90 0.10 1.50 Vnom Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-216)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold V<.
[spacer] LIMIT : V<< PS x 072 252 073 252 074 252 075 252
0.80 0.10 1.50 Vnom Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-216)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold V<<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tV< PS x 072 253 073 253 074 253 075 253
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-216)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tV<< PS x 072 254 073 254 074 254 075 254
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-216)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<.
[spacer] LIMIT : f > PSx 072 211 073 211 074 211 075 211
105.00 80.00 120.00 %fnom Fig. 3-169, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold f>.
7-216 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] LIMIT : f >> PSx 072 212 073 212 074 212 075 212
110.00 80.00 120.00 %fnom Fig. 3-169, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold f>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : IA> PS x 076 200 077 200 078 200 079 200
1.10 0.10 5.00 Inom
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA> PS x 076 210 077 210 078 210 079 210
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold Ia> for end a.
[spacer] LIMIT : tf> PS x 072 213 073 213 074 213 075 213
1.0 1.0 1000.0 s Fig. 3-169, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of f>.
[spacer] LIMIT : IA>> PS x 076 201 077 201 078 201 079 201
1.10 0.10 5.00 Inom
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA>> PS x 076 211 077 211 078 211 079 211
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold Ia>> for end a.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIA> PSx 076 202 077 202 078 202 079 202
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer] LIMIT : VB> PSx 076 212 077 212 078 212 079 212
1.10 0.10 1.50 Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for operate delay tIa> for end a.
[spacer] LIMIT : tf>> PS x 072 214 073 214 074 214 075 214
1.0 1.0 1000.0 s Fig. 3-169, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of f>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIA>> PSx 076 203 077 203 078 203 079 203
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer] LIMIT : VB>> PSx 076 213 077 213 078 213 079 213
1.20 0.10 1.50 Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the Ineg> stage.
[spacer] LIMIT : IB> PS x 076 204 077 204 078 204 079 204
1.10 0.10 5.00 Inom
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB> PS x 076 214 077 214 078 214 079 214
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold Ib> for end b.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-217

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LIMIT : f < PSx 072 215 073 215 074 215 075 215
95.00 80.00 120.00 %fnom Fig. 3-169, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold f<.
[spacer] LIMIT : IB>> PS x 076 205 077 205 078 205 079 205
1.10 0.10 5.00 Inom
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB>> PS x 076 215 077 215 078 215 079 215
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold Ib>> for end b.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIB> PSx 076 206 077 206 078 206 079 206
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer]
Setting for operate delay tIb> for end b.
[spacer] LIMIT : f << PSx 072 216 073 216 074 216 075 216
90.00 80.00 120.00 %fnom Fig. 3-169, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold f<<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIB>> PSx 076 207 077 207 078 207 079 207
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg> stage.
[spacer] LIMIT : tf< PS x 072 217 073 217 074 217 075 217
1.0 1.0 1000.0 s Fig. 3-169, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of f<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tf<< PS x 072 218 073 218 074 218 075 218
1.0 1.0 1000.0 s Fig. 3-169, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of f<<.
[spacer] LIMIT : VA> PS x 076 208 077 208 078 208 079 208
1.20 0.10 1.50 Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>> stage.
[spacer] LIMIT : VA>> PS x 076 209 077 209 078 209 079 209
1.20 0.10 1.50 Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>>> stage.
[spacer] LIMIT : VA< PS x 076 216 077 216 078 216 079 216
0.90 0.10 1.50 Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate threshold of the first undervoltage stage of the catenary
voltage.
Note: Valid only with setting M AIN: F ee der mode = Autotransformer feed.
7-218 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] LIMIT : VA<< PS x 076 217 077 217 078 217 079 217
0.80 0.10 1.50 Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate threshold of the second undervoltage stage of the
catenary voltage.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA< PS x 076 218 077 218 078 218 079 218
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the first undervoltage stage of the catenary
voltage.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA<< PS x 076 219 077 219 078 219 079 219
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the second undervoltage stage of the catenary
voltage.
[spacer] LIMIT : VB< PSx 076 220 077 220 078 220 079 220
0.90 0.10 1.50 Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate threshold of the first undervoltage stage of the feeder
voltage.
[spacer] LIMIT : VB<< PSx 076 221 077 221 078 221 079 221
0.90 0.10 1.50 Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate threshold of the second undervoltage stage of the feeder
voltage.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB< PS x 076 222 077 222 078 222 079 222
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the first undervoltage stage of the feeder
voltage.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB<< PSx 076 223 077 223 078 223 079 223
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the second undervoltage stage of the feeder
voltage.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-219

P638 7 Settings
7.1.3.4 Control
Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: BI active USE R 221 003
1: Yes Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-231)
[spacer]
Enabling the bay interlocking function from the local control panel.
[spacer] MAIN: SI active USER 221 002
0: No Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-231)
[spacer]
Enabling the station interlocking function from the local control panel.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. fct .block. 1 221 014
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. fct .block. 2 221 022
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signals assigned to function block 1 and 2.
[spacer] MAIN: Op. delay fct . block 221 029
0 0 60 s Fig. 3-58, (p. 3-95)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the function blocks.
[spacer] MAIN: Pe rm.No.mot .dr iv e op 221 027
15 1 20 Fig. 3-195, (p. 3-248)
[spacer]
Setting for the permissible motor drive operations within the time interval
defined at M AIN: Mon.ti me mot .dr iv e s.
[spacer] MAIN: Mon.time mot. drive s 221 026
15 1 20 min Fig. 3-195, (p. 3-248)
[spacer]
Setting for the monitoring time to monitor the number of motor drives.
[spacer] MAIN: Cool.t ime mot.drive s 221 028
3 0 10 min Fig. 3-195, (p. 3-248)
[spacer]
Setting for the cooling time for motors in motor-operated switchgear.
[spacer] MAIN: Mon.time Dir.Cont r. 221 060
0.10 0.01 2.00 s Fig. 3-198, (p. 3-251)

Fig. 3-199, (p. 3-252)
[spacer]
Setting for the monitoring time for the motor relay.
[spacer] MAIN: CB1 max . ope r. c ap. 221 084
1 1 99
[spacer] MAIN: CB2 max . ope r. c ap. 221 088
1 1 99
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a
limited time period).
7-220 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: CB1 re ady fct. ass ign 221 085
[spacer]
Selecting the event which, when present, will initialize the counter at
MAIN: CB1 act. oper . cap. with the value at MAIN: CB1 max. ope r.
cap..
[spacer] MAIN: CB2 re ady fct. ass ign 221 089
[spacer]
Selecting the event which, when present, will initialize the counter at
MAIN: CB1 act. oper . cap. (or MAIN: CB2 act. oper. cap.) with the
value at MAI N: CB1 max. oper . cap. (or M AI N: CB 2 max. o per .
cap., respectively).
[spacer] MAIN: W. ex t. cmd. t ermin. 221 063
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines if bay types, defined for direct motor control, can be
used together with external termination contacts to directly influence the control
process of motor driven switchgear.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-221

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
External device DEV01: De signat. e xt. dev. 210 000
0: Not assigned
[spacer] DEV02: De signat. e xt. dev. 210 050
0: Not assigned
0: Not assigned
0: Not assigned
0: Not assigned
0: Not assigned
0: Not assigned
0: Not assigned
0: Not assigned
0: Not assigned
[spacer]
Setting for the designation of the respective external device. Either one of the
pre-defined designations or the term Device Name User may be selected. In the
latter case any text (max 4 characters) may be entered at DEV01: DEV-
Name Use r that will be used as the devices' designation. (The same holds for
DEV02 etc.)
[spacer] DEV01: DEV- Name Us er 218 101
0:
0:
0:
0:
0:
0:
7-222 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
0:
0:
0:
0:
[spacer]
Any text (max. 4 characters) may be entered as the devices’ name which will
then be used as the designation, if the associated parameter
DEV01: De signat. e xt. dev. has been set to Device Name User. When
instead one of the pre-defined designations is selected at DE V01: Des ig nat.
ext. de v. it will be used and DE V01: D EV- Name User is ignored. A
designation with more than 4 characters is internally truncated. (The same holds
for DEV02 etc.)
[spacer] DEV01: Oper. mode cmd. 210 024
3: Time control Fig. 3-190, (p. 3-241)
3: Time control
3: Time control
3: Time control
3: Time control
3: Time control
3: Time control
3: Time control
3: Time control
3: Time control
[spacer]
Selecting the operating mode of the command from long command, short
command or time control.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-223

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DEV01: Latching ti me 210 005
0.00 0.00 5.00 s Fig. 3-186, (p. 3-237)

Fig. 3-193, (p. 3-246)
Fig. 3-194, (p. 3-246)
Fig. 3-198, (p. 3-251)
Fig. 3-199, (p. 3-252)
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the time that a control command is sustained after a switchgear
position signal – “Open” or “Closed” – has been received.
[spacer] DEV01: Op.tim e swit ch. dev. 210 004
20 0 254 s Fig. 3-185, (p. 3-235)

Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-244)
Fig. 3-193, (p. 3-246)
Fig. 3-198, (p. 3-251)
20 0 254 s
20 0 254 s
20 0 254 s
20 0 254 s
7-224 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
20 0 254 s
20 0 254 s
20 0 254 s
20 0 254 s
20 0 254 s
[spacer]
Setting the operating time for switchgear (switching device).
[spacer] DEV01: Gr. as s ign. de bounc . 210 011
1: Group 1 Fig. 3-185, (p. 3-235)

Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-244)
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
[spacer]
Assigning the external device to one of eight groups for debouncing and chatter
suppression.
[spacer] DEV01: S tartCmdTi me superv . 210 007
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-244)
[spacer] DEV02: S tartCmdTi me superv . 210 057
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-225

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DEV03: S tartCm dTi me superv . 210 107
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
[spacer]
This parameter allows for defining a monitoring timer for the begin of a switch
command.
After sending an Open / Close command, the corresponding timer starts. If the
switchgear unit has not reached its intermediate position after this time has
elapsed then the command is deactivated and MAIN: S tar tcmdtime
exceed. is signaled.
In the default setting blocked this monitoring is switched off. This is
recommended for switchgear units for which it is impossible to detect the
intermediate position.
[spacer] DEV01: Interm . p os. s uppr . 210 012
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
7-226 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] DEV08: Interm . pos. s uppr . 211 112
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the “intermediate position” signal will be
suppressed or not, while the switchgear is operating.
[spacer] DEV01: S tat .ind.i nter m.pos. 210 027
0: No Fig. 3-185, (p. 3-235)

Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-244)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the actual status will be signaled with a 5 s
delay after the “Faulty position” signal is issued.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp.asg . s w.tr . pl ug 210 014

Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-244)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-227

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal that is used to signal the position (“plugged-in” /
“unplugged”) of the switch truck plug.
[spacer] DEV01: With ge n. trip cmd.1 210 021
0: No Fig. 3-189, (p. 3-240)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
7-228 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general trip
command 1” of the protection function.
Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are defined as
“circuit breakers”. This definition is included in the bay type definitions.
0: No Fig. 3-189, (p. 3-240)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general trip
command 2” of the protection function.
[spacer] DEV01: With close c md. /pr ot 210 023
0: No Fig. 3-189, (p. 3-240)
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-229

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be closed by the “close
command” of the protection function.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp.asg .el.ctrl.open 210 019
7-230 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] DEV10: Inp.asg .e l.ctrl.open 211 219
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal to
move the switchgear unit to the open position.
Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can be
selected.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp.asg .e l.ctr.clos e 210 020
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal to
move the switchgear unit to the “Closed” position.
Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can be
selected.
[spacer] DEV01: Block cmd ope n 218 120
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-231

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Select whether open commands for the switchgear unit shall be blocked.
[spacer] DEV01: Block cmd clos e 218 160
[spacer]
Select whether close commands for the switchgear unit shall be blocked.
[spacer] DEV01: Oper.count .l imit 218 211
Blocked 1 65000 Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-248)
7-232 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
[spacer]
Setting a limit value for the number of switching commands for the respective
switchgear unit.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp. as g. e nd Ope n 210 015
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-233

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the “Open”
command.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp. as g. e nd Close 210 016
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the “Close”
command.
[spacer] DEV01: Open w/o s tat. int e rl 210 025
0: No Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-239)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
7-234 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether switching to “Open” position is permitted without
a check by the station interlock function.
[spacer] DEV01: Clos e w/ o stat . int . 210 026
0: No Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-239)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether switching to “Closed” position is permitted
without a check by the station interlock function.
[spacer] DEV01: Fct.as sig.BI wS I open 210 039
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-235

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the “Open” enable to the interlocking
logic when there is “bay interlock with substation interlock”.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are
included in the bay type definitions (see “List of Bay Types” in the Appendix).
If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the
corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new
interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the
function assignment.
[spacer] DEV01: Fct.as sig.BI wS I clos 210 040
7-236 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the “Close” enable to the interlocking
logic when there is “bay interlock with substation interlock”.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are
[spacer] DEV01: Fct.as g.BI w/ o S I op 210 041
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the “Open” enable to the interlocking
logic when there is “bay interlock without substation interlock”.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-237

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DEV01: Fct.as g.BI w/ o S I c l 210 042
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the “Close” enable to the interlocking
logic when there is “bay interlock without substation interlock”.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are
Parameter Address
External device DEV02: S ec. tim er 2 210 059
0 0 65000 s
[spacer] DEV03: S ec. tim er 3 210 109
0 0 65000 s
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary timer.
7-238 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
Interlocking logic ILOCK: Cycle t int erl.che ck 221 104
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
[spacer]
The interlock conditions are also transmitted together with reporting in the
“phase 2” of the IEC 61850 communication protocol. Therefore it is a
requirement that these interlock conditions are cyclically checked and not, as
with software versions that still implement “phase 1”, only with the request for a
switching operation.
This parameter sets the cycle time, after which a check of the interlock
conditions is carried out.
As additional processor capacity must be provided for each of these checks it
must be ensured that a favorable compromise is found for the cycle time setting
value. On the one hand it is desirable to select a cycle time value which is as
short as possible so that changes in the interlock conditions are updated without
any notable delays, but on the other hand this cycle time value should not be so
short that the P638 will be under too much strain. As the CPU load of the P638 is
dependent on the total number of function groups having been configured it is
not possible to suggest a generally acceptable cycle time value.
[spacer] ILOCK: R se t ILOC K violati on 221 123
Blocked 1 10 s Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-232)
[spacer]
The interlock violation signal (221 018) M AIN: Interlock equ. viol . will be
automatically reset after the time period set here. (The default value Blocked
disables the automatic reset.)
[spacer] ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 250 000
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-239

P638 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] ILOCK: Fct.assig nm. outp.1 0 250 009
7-240 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

7 Settings P638
Parameter Address
[spacer] ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.2 9 250 028
[spacer]
Definition of the interlock conditions.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7-241

P638 7 Settings
7-242 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
8 Information and Control Functions
8.1 Operation
The P638 generates a large number of signals, processes binary input signals,
and acquires measured data during fault-free operation of the protected object
as well as fault-related data. A number of counters are available for statistical
purposes. This information can be read out from the integrated local control
panel or via the operating program.
All this information can be found in the “Operation” and “Events” folders in the
menu tree.
Note
Detailed information about all parameters, including complete selection tables and
IEC 60870‑5‑103 protocol properties, are separately available as a set of interlinked
PDF files for user-friendly navigation, packed in one ZIP archive named
DataModelExplorer_P638_en_P01.zip.
A list of the Logical Nodes that have been implemented for the IEC 61850 protocol
can be found in a separate document.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-1

P638 8 Information and Control Functions
8.1.1 Cyclic Values
8.1.1.1 Me as ur ed Op erating D at a
Parameter Address
Measured data input MEASI: Curr e nt IDC

004 134
Not measured 0.00 24.00 mA Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-62)
[spacer]
Display of the input current.
[spacer] MEASI: Curr e nt IDC p.u. 004 135
Not measured 0.00 1.20 IDC,nom Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-62)
[spacer]
Display of the input current referred to IDC,nom.
[spacer] MEASI: Curr . IDC,lin. p.u. 004 136
Not measured 0.00 1.20 IDC,nom Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-62)
[spacer]
Display of the linearized input current referred to IDC,nom.
[spacer] MEASI: S caled value IDC, lin 004 180
Not measured -32000 32000 Fig. 3-37, (p. 3-63)
[spacer]
Display of the scaled linearized value.
[spacer] MEASI: T emp eratur e T 004 133
Not measured -40.0 215.0 °C Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-64)
[spacer]
Display of the temperature measured at the “PT 100” temperature input on the
analog p/c board.
[spacer] MEASI: T emp eratur e Tmax 004 233
Not measured -40.0 215.0 °C Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-64)
[spacer]
Display of the maximum temperature measured at the “PT 100” temperature
input on the analog p/c board.
[spacer] MEASI: T emp eratur e p.u. T 004 221
Not measured -0.40 2.15 100°C Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-64)
[spacer]
Display of the temperature measured at the “PT 100” temperature input on the
analog p/c board referred to 100°C.
8-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

8 Information and Control Functions P638
Parameter Address
Measured data MEASO: Curr ent A- 1 005 100
output
0.00 0.00 20.00 mA Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-77)
[spacer] MEASO: Curr ent A- 2 005 099
0.00 0.00 20.00 mA
[spacer]
Display of the current on the analog measured data output (A1: channel 1; A2:
channel 2).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-3

Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: Date 003 090
1997-01-01 1997-01 2098-11 dd.mm.yy Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-109)

-01 -08
[spacer]
Date display. The date can also be set here. The centuries are not displayed.
The supported dates range from January 1st, 1997, until November 7th, 2098.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e of day 003 091
00:00:00 00:00:00 24:00:00 hh:mm:ss Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-109)
[spacer]
Display of the time of day. The time can also be set here.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e s witch ing 003 095
0: Standard time Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-109)
[spacer]
Setting for standard time or daylight saving time.
This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times
assigned to signals and event data that can be read out through the PC or
[spacer] MAIN: Fre que ncy f 004 040
Not measured 10.00 70.00 Hz Fig. 3-55, (p. 3-91)
[spacer]
Display of system frequency.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IA,a prim. 005 021
Not measured 0 25000 A Fig. 3-50, (p. 3-87)
[spacer]
Display of phase current A, end a, as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IC,a prim. 006 021
[spacer]
Display of phase current C, end a, as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IA,b pri m. 005 022
[spacer]
Display of phase current A, end b, as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IC,b pri m. 006 022
[spacer]
Display of phase current C, end b, as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: IN prim. 004 200
[spacer]
Display of defrost current as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Voltage V prim. 004 112
Not measured 0.00 250.00 kV Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-88)
[spacer]
Display of the updated voltage as a primary quantity.
8-4 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Load im pe d. Z prim. 005 005
Not measured 0.0 500.0 Ω Fig. 3-54, (p. 3-90)
[spacer]
Display of the updated load impedance value as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Load reac t. X prim. 005 196
Not measured -500.0 500.0 Ω Fig. 3-54, (p. 3-90)
[spacer]
Display of the updated load reactance value as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Load res is t . R pr im. 005 198
[spacer]
Display of the updated load resistance value as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Load angle phi 004 167
Not measured -180 180 ° Fig. 3-53, (p. 3-89)
[spacer]
Display of the load angle (power factor angle).
[spacer] MAIN: Load angle end a 005 014
[spacer]
Display of the load angle at end a.
[spacer] MAIN: Load angle end b 005 016
[spacer]
Display of the load angle at end b.
[spacer] MAIN: Fre que nc y f p.u. 004 070
Not measured 0.200 4.000 fnom Fig. 3-55, (p. 3-91)
[spacer]
Display of system frequency referred to fn.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IA,a p.u. 005 031
Not measured 0.000 25.000 Inom Fig. 3-50, (p. 3-87)
[spacer] MAIN: Current IA,b p.u. 005 032
[spacer]
Display of phase current A/B/C for the respective end, referred to In.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IC,a p.u. 006 031
[spacer]
Display of phase current C, end a, referred to In.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IC,b p.u. 006 032
[spacer]
Display of phase current C, end b, referred to In.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-5

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: IN p.u. 004 201
Not measured 0.000 25.000 Idfrst,nom Fig. 3-51, (p. 3-88)
[spacer]
Display of the defrost current referred to Idfrst,n.
[spacer] MAIN: Voltage V p.u. 004 113
Not measured 0.000 5.000 Vnom Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-88)
[spacer]
Display of the voltage referred to Vn.
[spacer] MAIN: Load angle p.u.e nd a 005 015
Not measured -1.80 1.80 phi,ref Fig. 3-53, (p. 3-89)
[spacer]
Display of load angle, end a referred to 100°.
[spacer] MAIN: Load angle p.u.e nd b 005 017
[spacer]
Display of load angle, end b, referred to 100°.
[spacer] MAIN: Load im pe dance Z p.u 005 004
Not measured 0.000 3.300 Znom Fig. 3-54, (p. 3-90)
[spacer]
Display of the updated operating impedance referred to Znom = 300 Ω.
[spacer] MAIN: Load angle phi p.u. 004 078
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for the load angle referred to φnom = 100°.
[spacer] MAIN: Load im pe dance Z s ec 005 000
Not measured 0.0 500.0 Ω Fig. 3-54, (p. 3-90)
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for the load impedance as secondary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Load reactance X se c 005 195
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for the load reactance as secondary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Load res is t . R se c 005 197
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for the load resistance as secondary quantity.
8-6 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Differential protec‐ DIFF: Dif f.current 1 (2fn) 025 186
tion
Not measured 0.000 25.000 Iref
[spacer] DIFF: Dif f.current 1 (fn) 025 192
[spacer] DIFF: Dif f. curre nt 1 005 080
Not measured 0.000 25.000 Iref Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-144)
[spacer]
Display of differential current, measuring system 1, referred to Iref.
[spacer] DIFF: R e strain. curr ent 1 005 081
[spacer]
Display of restraining current, measuring system 1, referred to Iref.
[spacer] DIFF: Dif f.current 2 (2fn) 025 187
[spacer] DIFF: Dif f.current 2 (fn) 025 193
[spacer] DIFF: Dif f. curre nt 2 006 080
[spacer]
[spacer] DIFF: R e strain. curr ent 2 006 081
[spacer]
Parameter Address
Transverse DIF_a: Diff. curre nt 025 188
tionTransverse
tion
Not measured 0.000 25.000 Inom
[spacer] DIF_a: R es train. curre nt 025 189
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-7

Parameter Address
Transverse DIF_b: Diff . curren t 025 190
tion
[spacer] DIF_b: Re s t rain. curr e nt 025 191
8-8 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Thermal overload THER M : S tatus the rm.re plica 004 016
protection
Not measured -250 250 % Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.
[spacer] THER M : Curre nt I,t he rm pr im 007 220
[spacer] THER M : Curre nt I,t he rm p. u 007 221
[spacer]
Display of the “thermal current” (as a primary quantity, or as a per unit quantity,
respectively).
These measured operating values are calculated as follows:
Statustherm. repl.
I therm,prim = I ref I nom,CT,prim
100
I therm,prim
I therm,p.u. =
I ref I nom,CT,prim
With:
● Itherm,prim = THER M: C urr e nt I,t he rm prim
● Itherm,p.u. = THE RM: C ur r ent I,t he rm p.u
● Statustherm. repl. = THE RM : Stat us ther m.re plica
● Iref = THER M: Iref PSx
● Inom,CT,prim = MAIN: Inom C .T . pr im.
In a measured values message the thermal current is processed as a per-unit
variable referred to Iref.
[spacer] THER M : Object te mpe r at ur e 004 137
Not measured -40 300 °C Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object.
[spacer] THER M : Coolant t empe ratur e 004 149
[spacer]
Display of coolant temperature, dependent on the setting for THE RM: Sel ect
CTA PSx.
When set to Default temp. value the set temperature value will be displayed.
When set to From PT100 the temperature measured by the resistance
thermometer will be displayed. When set to From 20 mA input the temperature
measured via an external 20 mA transducer will be displayed.
[spacer] THER M : Pre - trip t ime left 004 139
Not measured 0.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function
will reach the tripping threshold (“time-to-trip”).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-9

Parameter Address
[spacer] THER M : The rm . replica p.u. 004 017
Not measured -2.500 2.500 Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function
referred to a buffer content of 100%.
[spacer] THER M : Object te mp. p.u. 004 179
Not measured -0.400 3.000 Tref Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object referred to 100°C.
[spacer] THER M : Coolant t emp. p.u. 004 178
Not measured -0.400 2.000 Tref Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Display of the coolant temperature referred to 100°C.
[spacer] THER M : Te m p. offse t re pli ca 004 109
[spacer]
Display of the additional reserve if coolant temperature is taken into account
and if the measured coolant temperature is lower than the set maximum
permissible coolant temperature. (In this case, the thermal model has been
shifted downwards.)
If there is no coolant temperature acquisition and if the coolant temperature and
the maximum permissible coolant temperature have been set to the same
value, then the coolant temperature is not taken into account and the
characteristic is a function of the current only. The additional reserve amounts
to 0 in this case.
Parameter Address
Binary counts COUNT : Count 1 217 100
0 0 65535 Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-264)
[spacer] COUNT : Count 2 217 080
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
[spacer]
Display of the updated count.
Note: The count value can be set here (Preload-Function).
8-10 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

8.1.1.2 Physical St ate Sign als
Parameter Address
Configurable func‐ F_KEY: St ate F1 080 122
tion keys
0: "Off"
[spacer] F_KEY: St ate F2 080 123
0: "Off"
0: "Off"
0: "Off"
0: "Off"
0: "Off"
[spacer]
The state of the function keys is displayed as follows:
● Without function: No functions are assigned to the function key.
● "Off": The function key is in the “Off” position.
● "On": The function key is in the “On” position.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-11

Parameter Address
Generic Object GOOSE: Input 1 st ate 106 200
Orientated
Substation Events
0: 0
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 2 st ate 106 201
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 10 st at e 106 209
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
8-12 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-13

Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
8-14 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-15

Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
8-16 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 10 0 stat e 112 167
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-17

Parameter Address
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 114 stat e 112 181
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
[spacer]
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.
8-18 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Binary input INP: State U 301 152 216
0: "Low"
[spacer] INP: State U 302 152 219
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-19

Parameter Address
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
8-20 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-21

Parameter Address
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
8-22 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] INP: State U 120 3 152 204
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-23

Parameter Address
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
8-24 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
[spacer]
The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:
● Without function: No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
● "Low": Not energized.
● "High": Energized.
This display appears regardless of the setting for the binary signal input mode.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-25

Parameter Address
Binary and analog OUTP: St ate K 301 151 044
output
0: Inactive Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-66)
[spacer] OUTP: St ate K 302 151 047
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
8-26 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer] OUTP: St ate K 100 1 150 216
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-27

Parameter Address
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
8-28 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-29

Parameter Address
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer]
The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:
● Without function: No functions are assigned to the output relay.
● Inactive: The output relay is not energized.
● Active: The output relay is energized.
This display appears regardless of the operating mode set for the output relay.
8-30 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
LED indicators LED: S tat e H 1 green 085 180
1: Active
[spacer] LED: S tat e H 2 ye ll. 085 000
0: Inactive
[spacer] LED: S tat e H 3 ye ll. 085 003
0: Inactive
[spacer] LED: S tat e H 4 re d 085 006
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer] LED: S tat e H10 re d 085 024
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer] LED: S tat e H17 re d. 085 181
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-31

Parameter Address
[spacer] LED: S tat e H20 red 085 136
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer] LED: S tat e H 4 g reen 085 056
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer] LED: S tat e H10 gr e en 085 074
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
8-32 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer]
The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows:
● Inactive: The LED indicator is not energized.
● Active: The LED indicator is energized.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-33

8.1.1.3 Logic S tat e Sig nals
Parameter Address
Cyber Security CS: HM I pincode changed 180 100
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the PIN code of HMI is changed.
[spacer] CS: COMM pas s w. change 180 101
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the password of communication interface is changed.
[spacer] CS: HM I pincode invalid 180 102
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the PIN code via HMI is invalid.
[spacer] CS: COMM pas s w. inv alid 180 103
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the password via communication interface is invalid.
[spacer] CS: re set tok en ge ne rat e 180 104
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the reset token is generated.
[spacer] CS: RBAC re s et s uc ce ss 180 105
0: No
[spacer]
Display when the RBAC reset is successful.
[spacer] CS: RBAC re s et f ailed 180 106
0: No
[spacer]
Display when the RBAC reset is failed.
[spacer] CS: Us e r01 blocke d 180 107
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-34 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] CS: Us e r07 block e d 180 113
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the user is blocked.
[spacer] CS: HM I logged in 180 122
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the user is logged in via HMI.
[spacer] CS: COMMS logge d in 180 123
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the user is logged in via communication interface.
[spacer] CS: IEC C S br ick faul ty 180 124
1: Yes
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-35

Parameter Address
Local control panel LOC: Ed it mode 080 111
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that the protection unit is in edit mode. As a standard this signal is linked
to LED: Fct.as sig. H1 7 r ed.
[spacer] LOC: Tr ig. m enu jmp 1 E XT 030 230
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that menu jump list 1 is being triggered. (See the corresponding setting
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp lis t 1.)
[spacer] LOC: Tr ig. m enu jmp 2 E XT 030 231
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that menu jump list 2 is being triggered. (See the corresponding setting
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp lis t 2.)
[spacer] LOC: Illum ination on EX T 037 101
1: Yes
[spacer]
This signal shows that the backlighting for the front panel LCD is switched on.
[spacer] LOC: Loc.acc.block .act iv e 221 005
0: No Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-17)
[spacer] LOC: Re m.acc.block. act ive 221 004
0: No Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-17)
[spacer] LOC: Chg.Sig.Pane l s tat. 221 076
0: No Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-13)
[spacer] LOC: Chg.Sig.Pane l flash. 221 077
0: No Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-13)
8-36 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 1: Com m and bloc k. E X T 003 173
communication
interface 1
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: Sig./ meas. block EX T 037 074
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: Com m and bloc king 003 174
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-21)
[spacer] COMM 1: Sig./ meas.v al.block. 037 075
0: No Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
[spacer] COMM 1: IEC 60870- 5- 10 3 003 219
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: IEC 60870- 5- 10 1 003 218
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: IEC 60870- 5, ILS 003 221
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: MODB US 003 223
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: DNP3 003 230
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: COUR IER 103 041
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-37

Parameter Address
IEC 61850 IEC: Com m . link fault y 105 180
Communication
0: No Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
Display when an Ethernet module is not operational, i.e. if the MAC address is
missing or there is a non-plausible parameter setting.
[spacer] IEC: Com m and block. EX T 104 086
0: No
[spacer] IEC: Sig./me as. block E XT 104 089
0: No
[spacer] IEC: Multip le ctr l le ve l 221 124
0: No
[spacer]
Display when control from multiple levels is allowed, i.e. (225 208) L OC: Fc t.
ass ig n. L/R k e y is set to R & L <-> L, and relay is in 'R&L' mode.
[spacer] IEC: Com m and blocki ng 104 087
0: No
[spacer] IEC: Control res erv at io n 221 082
0: No
[spacer]
Display when a client has made a reservation to control an external device
(“select” for control by control mode “select before operate”).
[spacer] IEC: Sig./me as.val.block. 104 090
0: No
[spacer] IEC: Control b lock e d 221 126
0: No Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
Display when control via communication is blocked, i.e. (221 125) IEC: Ctrl
blocke d us er is set to Yes.
[spacer] IEC: Port A/ B blocke d 104 075
0: No
[spacer]
Display when Port A for SEB or Port A&B for REB is blocked.
[spacer] IEC: Port C blocked 104 076
0: No
[spacer]
Display when Port C is blocked.
[spacer] IEC: Port A fault y 104 197
0: No
[spacer] IEC: Port B f aulty 104 198
0: No
[spacer] IEC: IEC 61850 E D2 104 081
0: No
8-38 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] IEC: IEC 61850 E D1 104 082
0: No
[spacer] IEC: IEC 60870-5 -1 04 104 083
0: No
[spacer] IEC: VLAN e nable d 104 196
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-39

Parameter Address
Generic Object GOOSE: IE D link f ault y 107 250
Orientated
Substation Events
0: No
[spacer]
Display which appears as soon as receipt of at least one of the configured
GOOSEs is faulty or not available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device
will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out
independent of a change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time period at
which the next state signal must be received.
[spacer] GOOSE: IE D01-16 link ed 107 251
2:
2:
2:
2:
2:
2:
[spacer] GOOSE: IE D97-112 link e d 112 204
2:
[spacer] GOOSE: IE D113-12 8 link e d 112 205
2:
[spacer] GOOSE: Or dRun01-1 6 link ed 107 248
2:
[spacer] GOOSE: Or dRun17-3 2 link ed 107 249
2:
[spacer] GOOSE: Uniqueness 1- 16 007 217
[spacer] GOOSE: Uniqueness 17-3 2 007 218
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 01 faul ty 111 100
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-40 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-41

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-42 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-43

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-44 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-45

Parameter Address
0: No
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 100 fault y 111 199
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-46 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 11 8 fault y 111 217
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v01 posit ion 109 000
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-47

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
8-48 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-49

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
8-50 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-51

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v100 positi on 114 012
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
8-52 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-53

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
State of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external
device.
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v01 ope n 109 001
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-54 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-55

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-56 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-57

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-58 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v100 open 114 013
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-59

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-60 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Binary open state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of
an external device.
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v01 close d 109 002
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-61

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-62 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-63

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-64 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-65

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v100 cl ose d 114 014
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-66 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Binary closed state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state
of an external device.
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v01 int erm.pos 109 003
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-67

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-68 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-69

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-70 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-71

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-72 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v100 int e rm.po 114 015
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-73

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Binary intermediate position state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input,
representing the state of an external device.
Parameter Address
IRIG‑B interface IRIGB: EB R S ynchr on. r e ady 023 203
0: No Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-54)
[spacer] IRIGB: Enabled 023 201
0: No Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-54)
[spacer] IRIGB: S ynchron. re ady 023 202
0: No Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-54)
8-74 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Measured data input MEASI: Re set Tmax E X T

006 076
0: No
[spacer] MEASI: E nable d 035 008
0: No Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-59)

Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-68)
[spacer] MEASI: O pe n circ. P T10 0 040 190
0: No Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-64)
[spacer] MEASI: O ve rload 2 0 mA input 040 191
0: No Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-62)
[spacer] MEASI: O pe n circ. 2 0 mA inp. 040 192
0: No Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-62)
Parameter Address
Binary and analog OUTP: Block outp.r el. EXT 040 014
output
0: No
[spacer] OUTP: Re s e t latch. E XT 040 015
0: No
[spacer] OUTP: Outp . relay s blocke d 021 015
1: Yes Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-66)
[spacer] OUTP: Latching res et 040 088
0: No Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-66)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-75

Parameter Address
Measured data MEASO: Output e nabl ed E XT 036 085
output
1: Yes
[spacer] MEASO: Rese t output EX T 036 087
0: No
[spacer] MEASO: Enab led 037 102
0: No
[spacer] MEASO: Output r ese t 037 117
0: No Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-69)
[spacer] MEASO: Valid BC D value 037 050
0: No
[spacer] MEASO: 1-digit b it 0 (B C D) 037 051
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] MEASO: 10-digit bit 0 (BC D) 037 055
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] MEASO: 100-dig. bit 0 (BC D) 037 059
0: No
[spacer] MEASO: 100-dig. bit 1 (BC D) 037 060
0: No
[spacer] MEASO: Value A-1 valid 069 014
0: No Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-77)
[spacer] MEASO: Value A-1 out put 037 118
0: No Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-77)
[spacer] MEASO: Value A-2 valid 069 015
0: No
8-76 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] MEASO: Value A- 2 out put 037 119
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-77

Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: Dis able prot ect . E XT 003 026
2: Not configured
[spacer] MAIN: Enable prot ect . E XT 003 027
2: Not configured
[spacer] MAIN: General re s et E XT 005 255
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Group res et 1 E XT 005 209
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Group res et 2 E XT 005 252
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t indicat. EX T 065 001
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t latch.tr ip E X T 040 138
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t c. cl/ t r. c E XT 005 210
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: CB open 1 EXT 044 131
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: CB close d 1 EX T 036 051
0: No Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-97)
[spacer] MAIN: CB open 2 EXT 044 208
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: CB close d 2 EX T 031 030
0: No Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-97)
[spacer] MAIN: CB faulty 1 E XT 221 086
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: CB faulty 2 E XT 221 090
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Blocking 1 E X T 040 060
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Blocking 2 E X T 040 061
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: M.c.b. trip V EXT 004 061
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Paralle l tr ip 2 EXT 037 022
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Block. trip cmd. E X T 036 045
0: No
8-78 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Block. M -t ri p EXT 038 050
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Block. R -t ri p EXT 038 051
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Block. B-tr ip E X T 038 052
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Block.rush re s tr .E X T 039 169
0: No
[spacer]
Inrush stabilization may be blocked using this setting.
[spacer] MAIN: CB failure 036 017
0: No Fig. 3-155, (p. 3-202)
[spacer] MAIN: Man. M-trip cmd1 E XT 039 054
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Man. R-trip cmd1 E XT 039 055
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Man. B-t ri p cmd1 E X T 039 107
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Man. M-trip cmd2 E XT 039 056
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Man. R-trip cmd2 E XT 039 057
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Man. B-t ri p cmd2 E X T 039 108
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: En.m an.trip cmd. EXT 039 053
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Paralle l tr ip 1 EXT 037 019
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Man. clos e cmd. E X T 041 022
0: No Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-98)
[spacer] MAIN: Man.cl.cmd.e nabl. EXT 041 023
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Tes t m ode EXT 037 070
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e s witc hing E X T 003 096
0: Standard time
[spacer] MAIN: Min-puls e c lock EXT 060 060
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-79

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Healthy 060 001
1: Yes
[spacer]
Signal that the protection unit is operational. By default this signal is linked to
LED: F ct.ass ig. H 1 gre e n.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e s ynchr oniz ed 009 109
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Blocked/fault y 004 065
1: Yes Fig. 3-60, (p. 3-96)
[spacer] MAIN: Protect. not r e ady 004 060
1: Yes Fig. 3-60, (p. 3-96)
[spacer] MAIN: Tes t m ode 037 071
0: No Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-115)
[spacer] MAIN: Prot. ex t. e nable d 003 028
0: No Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-93)
[spacer] MAIN: Prot. ex t. dis able d 038 046
1: Yes Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-93)
[spacer] MAIN: Trip cm d. block ed 021 013
1: Yes Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-105)
[spacer] MAIN: M-trip b locked 039 050
0: No Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-102)
[spacer] MAIN: R-trip b lock e d 039 051
0: No Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-103)
[spacer] MAIN: B-t r ip blocke d 039 052
0: No Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-104)
[spacer] MAIN: General star ting 036 000
0: No Fig. 3-65, (p. 3-101)
[spacer] MAIN: Latch. trip c. res et 040 139
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Gen. t rip command 035 071
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: M-trip com mand 1 039 011
0: No Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-102)
[spacer] MAIN: R-trip com mand 1 039 012
0: No Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-103)
[spacer] MAIN: B-t r ip command 1 039 013
0: No Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-104)
[spacer] MAIN: M-trip com mand 2 039 058
0: No Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-102)
8-80 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: R-trip command 2 039 059
0: No Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-103)
[spacer] MAIN: B-t r ip command 2 039 060
0: No Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-104)
[spacer] MAIN: Gen. t rip signal 036 251
0: No Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-105)
[spacer] MAIN: M-trip s ignal 1 039 101
0: No Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-102)
[spacer] MAIN: R-trip s ignal 1 039 103
0: No Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-103)
[spacer] MAIN: B-t r ip signal 1 039 105
0: No Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-104)
[spacer] MAIN: M-trip s ignal 2 039 102
0: No Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-102)
[spacer] MAIN: R-trip s ignal 2 039 104
0: No Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-103)
[spacer] MAIN: B-t r ip signal 2 039 106
0: No Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-104)
[spacer] MAIN: Man. trip cmd e nabl. 039 080
0: No Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-107)
[spacer] MAIN: Man. M-trip si gnal 1 039 081
0: No Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-107)
[spacer] MAIN: Man. R-trip si gnal 1 039 082
0: No Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-107)
[spacer] MAIN: Man. B-t ri p signal 1 039 083
0: No Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-107)
[spacer] MAIN: Man. M-trip si gnal 2 039 084
0: No Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-107)
[spacer] MAIN: Man. R-trip si gnal 2 039 085
0: No Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-107)
[spacer] MAIN: Man. B-t ri p signal 2 039 098
0: No Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-107)
[spacer] MAIN: Man. cl. cmd.enabl. 039 113
0: No Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-98)
[spacer] MAIN: Man. clos e command 037 068
0: No Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-98)
[spacer] MAIN: Clos e command 037 009
0: No Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-98)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-81

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Fault forward 036 018
0: No Fig. 3-64, (p. 3-100)
[spacer] MAIN: Fault backward 036 019
0: No Fig. 3-64, (p. 3-100)
[spacer] MAIN: Load flow for ward 039 076
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Load flow back wards 039 077
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: CB Clos e V> bl ock e d 025 163
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Direct C B Close Vmin 025 164
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Enable cont rol 221 058
1: Yes Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-231)
[spacer] MAIN: Sub st. interl. act . 221 000
0: No Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-231)
[spacer] MAIN: Bay interlock. act. 221 001
0: No Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-231)
[spacer] MAIN: Fct. b lock . 1 act iv e 221 015
0: No Fig. 3-58, (p. 3-95)
[spacer] MAIN: Fct. b lock . 2 act iv e 221 023
0: No Fig. 3-58, (p. 3-95)
[spacer] MAIN: Mon. mot. driv es t r . 221 056
0: No Fig. 3-195, (p. 3-248)
[spacer] MAIN: Interlock e qu. viol. 221 018
0: No Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-232)
[spacer] MAIN: CB tr ip inte rnal 221 006
0: No Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-108)

Fig. 3-89, (p. 3-130)
Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-131)
Fig. 3-91, (p. 3-132)
[spacer] MAIN: CB tr ipped 221 016
0: No Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-108)
[spacer] MAIN: DEV op.time ex ce e de d 221 110
0: No
[spacer]
In the case of direct motor control by motor relay K200 this fault signal is issued
(as a group signal) when no positive position signal (status signal) has been
received from the external device after it has been issued a close command and
the set running time-delay has elapsed.
8-82 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Chatt.s uppr . st arte d 221 121
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that the chatter suppression has started.
[spacer] MAIN: St artcm dt ime e xce e d. 221 112
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-244)
[spacer]
If the monitoring, set by D EV01 : St artC mdTime superv. (or
DEV02: S tartCmdTi me superv . etc.), is active then an exceeded timer is
flagged by this logic state signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Shunt t rip ove rr un 221 114
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that any of the operated switchgear units happens to end up in a faulty
position after termination of the switching command.
[spacer] MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 act iv e 221 017
0: No Fig. 3-63, (p. 3-99)
[spacer] MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 s tore d 221 054
0: No Fig. 3-63, (p. 3-99)
[spacer] MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 act iv e 221 053
0: No Fig. 3-63, (p. 3-99)
[spacer] MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 s tore d 221 055
0: No Fig. 3-63, (p. 3-99)
[spacer] MAIN: Comm unication e rr or 221 019
1: Yes Fig. 3-74, (p. 3-109)
[spacer] MAIN: SI com m u. dist urbe d 221 031
1: Yes
[spacer] MAIN: Cmd . f r. comm.inte r f 221 101
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Cmd . f r. e le ctr .c trl 221 103
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Comm and from HM I 221 102
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Device se le ction key 006 001
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Device OPEN k e y 006 002
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Device CLOS E k e y 006 003
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Local/Re mote ke y 006 004
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-83

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Dumm y entry 004 129
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Without func tion 060 000
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Without func tion 061 000
0: No
8-84 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Parameter subset PSS: Control via user EX T 036 101
selection
0: No
[spacer] PSS: Activate PS 1 EX T 065 002
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
[spacer] PSS: Control via user 036 102
0: No Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-117)
[spacer] PSS: Ex t.s el.param.s ubse t 003 061
0: No param. subset sel Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-117)
[spacer] PSS: PS 1 activat ed ext . 036 094
0: No Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-117)
0: No Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-117)
0: No Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-117)
0: No Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-117)
[spacer] PSS: Actual p ar am. s ubs e t 003 062
1: Parameter subset 1 Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-117)
[spacer] PSS: PS 1 active 036 090
1: Yes Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-117)
0: No Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-117)
0: No Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-117)
0: No Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-117)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-85

Parameter Address
Self-monitoring SFMO N: C B faulty E X T 098 072
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: W arning (LE D) 036 070
0: No Fig. 3-81, (p. 3-118)
[spacer] SFMO N: W arning (re lay ) 036 100
0: No Fig. 3-81, (p. 3-118)
[spacer] SFMO N: W arm restart e x ec. 041 202
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re star t exe c. 041 201
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re star t 093 024
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re st./ SW update 093 025
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: B locking /HW fail ure 090 019
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: R elay Kxx faulty 041 200
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: Hardware clock fai l. 093 040
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: B at te ry failure 090 010
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW d.loade d 096 121
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: +15V s upply faulty 093 081
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: - 15V s upply faulty 093 080
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong m odule s lot 1 096 100
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-86 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong module s lot 5 096 104
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong module D ig.Bus 096 123
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong module HM I 096 124
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-87

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong m odule C omm 096 125
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong m odule Ana. Bus 096 126
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: D e fe ct.module slot 1 097 000
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: D e fe ct.module slot10 097 009
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule A DP R fault y 093 070
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule A RAM fault y 093 071
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule Y DP R fault y 093 110
0: No
8-88 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule Y RAM fault y 093 111
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I RIGB faulty 093 117
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: E rror K 3 01 097 046
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-89

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-90 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-91

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-92 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: U nd ef . ope r at. code 093 010
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: Abnormal t erminat ion 093 030
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: B ad arg. s ys t em call 093 031
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M ute x de adloc k 093 032
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid memory ref. 093 033
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: U ne xpe ct e d e xc ept ion 093 034
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid ar ithm. op. 093 011
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: U nd ef ined i nter rupt 093 012
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: E x ce pt ion oper .s ys t . 093 013
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: Pr ote ction f ailure 090 021
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C he ck s um error param 090 003
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C lock sync. e rror 093 041
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nt e rm.volt. fail.RAM 093 026
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: O ve rflow MT_RC 090 012
0: No Fig. 3-83, (p. 3-122)
[spacer] SFMO N: C he ck s um DM OD 093 023
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: S em aph. M T_RC block . 093 015
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid ty pe of bay 096 122
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nval. SW ve r s .C OMM1 093 075
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nval. C onfig. I EC 093 079
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-93

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW ver s. Y 093 113
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nom not adjust able 093 118
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: T im e -out module Y 093 112
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M .c.b. trip V 098 000
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong s et. DIST Rg1 098 046
0: No Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-179)
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: U nd er volt age 098 009
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M atching fail. e nd a 098 031
0: No Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-139)
[spacer] SFMO N: M atching fail. e nd b 098 032
0: No Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-139)
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW ver s DHMI 093 145
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C T A error 098 034
0: No Fig. 3-141, (p. 3-186)
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror THE RM 098 035
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror CB M 098 020
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror CB M _2 098 078
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C B No. C B op. > 098 066
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C B 2 No. CB op. > 098 079
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C B rem . No. C B op. < 098 067
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C B 2 rem. No. C B op.< 098 085
0: No
8-94 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: C B ΣI trip > 098 068
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C B 2 ΣI trip > 098 086
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C B ΣI trip**2 > 098 069
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C B 2 ΣI trip**2 > 098 087
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng BCD 093 124
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C B tm ax> A 098 070
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C B tm ax> B 098 071
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C B 1 t max > C 098 077
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C B 2 t max > A 098 088
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng A-1 093 114
0: No Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-77)
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng IDC 093 116
0: No Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-62)
[spacer] SFMO N: PT 100 open c ir cuit 098 024
0: No Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-64)
[spacer] SFMO N: O ve rload 20 mA input 098 025
0: No Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-62)
[spacer] SFMO N: O pe n circ. 20 mA inp. 098 026
0: No Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-62)
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror f<> 098 028
0: No Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-197)
[spacer] SFMO N: I nv.inp.f.cloc k sy nc 093 120
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: O utput 30 098 053
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-95

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: O utput 30 ( t) 098 054
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
Operating data OP_R C: Res e t record. EX T 005 213
recording
0: No Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-113)
Parameter Address
Monitoring signal MT _RC: Res et record. E XT 005 240
recording
0: No
Parameter Address
Overload recording OL_RC: R e s et reco rd. EXT 005 241
0: No
[spacer] OL_RC: R e cord. in progr es s 035 003
0: No Fig. 3-86, (p. 3-125)
[spacer] OL_RC: Over l. me m. ove rfl ow 035 007
0: No Fig. 3-87, (p. 3-126)
8-96 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Fault data FT_DA: Block fault l oc. EX T 011 225
acquisition
0: No
[spacer]
Calculation of the fault location is blocked.
Parameter Address
Fault recording FT_RC: Trigg er E X T 036 089
0: No
[spacer] FT_RC: Res et record. E XT 005 243
0: No
[spacer] FT_RC: Trigg er 037 076
0: No Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-134)
[spacer] FT_RC: I> triggere d, e nd a 035 014
0: No Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-134)
[spacer] FT_RC: I> triggere d, e nd b 035 015
0: No Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-134)
[spacer] FT_RC: Id > trigge re d 035 018
0: No Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-134)
[spacer] FT_RC: IN> trigge red 035 017
0: No Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-134)
[spacer] FT_RC: Record. i n progre ss 035 000
0: No Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-134)
[spacer] FT_RC: Syst e m dis t urb. runn 035 004
0: No Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-134)
[spacer] FT_RC: Fault m e m. ov e rf low 035 001
0: No Fig. 3-93, (p. 3-135)
[spacer] FT_RC: Faulty time t ag 035 002
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-97

Parameter Address
Differential protec‐ DIFF: E nable d 041 210
tion
0: No Fig. 3-95, (p. 3-137)
[spacer] DIFF: R e ad y 041 216
0: No Fig. 3-95, (p. 3-137)
[spacer] DIFF: Not ready 041 217
1: Yes Fig. 3-95, (p. 3-137)
[spacer] DIFF: Harm .blocking trigg. 041 127
0: No
[spacer] DIFF: Harm .block. 1 tr igg. 041 118
0: No Fig. 3-100, (p. 3-145)
[spacer] DIFF: Harm .block. 2 tr igg. 041 119
0: No Fig. 3-100, (p. 3-145)
[spacer] DIFF: S at.dis cr. tri gge red 041 012
0: No
[spacer] DIFF: S at.dis cr. 1 t rigg. 041 115
0: No
[spacer] DIFF: S at.dis cr. 2 t rigg. 041 116
0: No
[spacer] DIFF: T rip s ignal 041 075
0: No Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-144)
[spacer] DIFF: T rip s ignal 1 041 002
0: No Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-144)
[spacer] DIFF: T rip s ignal 2 041 003
0: No Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-144)
[spacer] DIFF: M atching f ail. e nd a 041 213
0: No Fig. 3-95, (p. 3-137)

Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-139)
[spacer] DIFF: M atching f ail. e nd b 041 214
0: No Fig. 3-95, (p. 3-137)

Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-139)
8-98 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Transverse DIF_a: Enabled 041 130
tionTransverse
tion
0: No
[spacer] DIF_a: T rip s ignal 041 211
0: No
Parameter Address
Transverse DIF_b: Enabled 041 131
tion
0: No
[spacer] DIF_b: Trip s ignal 041 212
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-99

Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOC1: Blocking t I> E X T 035 120
current protection
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: Blocking t I>> E X T 035 121
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: Enable d 035 102
0: No Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-149)
[spacer] DTOC1: S tarting I> 035 108
0: No Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-153)
[spacer] DTOC1: S tarting I>> 035 109
0: No Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-153)
[spacer] DTOC1: Phase A tr igge re d 035 104
0: No Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-153)
[spacer] DTOC1: Phase C trigge re d 035 105
0: No Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-153)
[spacer] DTOC1: tI> e laps ed 035 098
0: No Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-153)
[spacer] DTOC1: tI>> e lapse d 035 099
0: No Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-153)
[spacer] DTOC1: Trip signal tI> 035 114
0: No Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-153)
[spacer] DTOC1: Trip signal tI>> 035 115
0: No Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-153)
[spacer] DTOC1: Inrush s tabil.tr igg. 035 127
0: No Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-151)
[spacer] DTOC1: Dir.meas. I> bloc ked 035 080
0: No Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-156)
[spacer] DTOC1: M eas . I> non-dire ct . 035 077
0: No Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-156)
[spacer] DTOC1: Fault I> f orward 035 137
0: No Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-155)
[spacer] DTOC1: Power flow I> for. 035 223
0: No Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-155)
[spacer] DTOC1: Fault I> back ward 035 140
0: No Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-155)
[spacer] DTOC1: Power flow I> back. 035 224
0: No Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-155)
8-100 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] DTOC1: Dir.meas. I> > bloc k. 035 133
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: M eas . I>> non-dire ct 035 078
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: Fault I>> for ward 035 147
0: No Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-155)
[spacer] DTOC1: Power flow I>> for. 035 227
0: No Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-155)
[spacer] DTOC1: Fault I>> back ward 035 148
0: No Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-155)
[spacer] DTOC1: Power flow I>> back. 035 228
0: No Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-155)
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOC2: Blocking t I> E X T 035 150
current protection
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Blocking t I>> E X T 035 151
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Enable d 035 132
0: No Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-149)
[spacer] DTOC2: S tarting I> 035 138
0: No Fig. 3-111, (p. 3-157)
[spacer] DTOC2: S tarting I>> 035 139
0: No Fig. 3-111, (p. 3-157)
[spacer] DTOC2: Phase A tr igge re d 035 134
0: No Fig. 3-111, (p. 3-157)
[spacer] DTOC2: Phase C trigge re d 035 135
0: No Fig. 3-111, (p. 3-157)
[spacer] DTOC2: Trip signal tI> 035 144
0: No Fig. 3-111, (p. 3-157)
[spacer] DTOC2: Trip signal tI>> 035 145
0: No Fig. 3-111, (p. 3-157)
[spacer] DTOC2: Inrush s t abil.tr igg. 035 157
0: No Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-151)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-101

Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOCN: Block. tIN>H E XT 035 201
current protection
0: No
[spacer] DTOCN: Blocking t IN> E X T 041 063
0: No
[spacer] DTOCN: Blocking t IN>> E X T 041 064
0: No
[spacer] DTOCN: Enab led 035 192
0: No Fig. 3-112, (p. 3-158)
[spacer] DTOCN: St arting IN>H 035 195
0: No Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOCN: St arting IN> 040 077
0: No Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOCN: St arting IN>> 040 041
0: No Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOCN: Trip s ignal t IN>H 035 198
0: No Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOCN: Trip s ignal t IN> 041 021
0: No Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOCN: Trip s ignal t IN>> 040 028
0: No Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-159)
8-102 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur‐ IDMT: B lock. tIr e f> EX T

040 101
rent protection
0: No
[spacer] IDMT: E nabled 040 100
0: No Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-160)
[spacer] IDMT: S tar t ing Ir e f> 040 080
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-168)
[spacer] IDMT: Phas e A trigge re d 038 117
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-168)
[spacer] IDMT: Phas e C trigge re d 038 118
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-168)
[spacer] IDMT: t I re f> elapse d 040 082
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-168)
[spacer] IDMT: T rip s ignal tIre f> 040 084
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-168)
[spacer] IDMT: Hold t ime running 040 053
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-168)
[spacer] IDMT: I nr us h s tabil. trigg. 040 118
0: No Fig. 3-120, (p. 3-165)
[spacer] IDMT: M em ory c le ar 040 110
1: Yes Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-168)
[spacer] IDMT: D ir. m e as. bloc ked 041 006
0: No Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-171)

Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer] IDMT: M eas.non- dire ct ional 041 007
0: No Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-171)
[spacer] IDMT: F ault forward 041 008
0: No Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-170)
[spacer] IDMT: Powe r flow forwar d 041 017
0: No Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-170)
[spacer] IDMT: F ault back ward 041 009
0: No Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-170)

Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer] IDMT: Powe r flow back ward 041 018
0: No Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-170)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-103

Parameter Address
Distance protection DIST: Blocking t1 E XT 039 163
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Blocking t2 E XT 039 164
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Blocking t3 E XT 039 166
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Inrus h s tab il.t ri gg. 025 160
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Enabled 036 104
0: No Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-173)
[spacer] DIST: Not ready 041 086
0: No Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-174)
[spacer] DIST: Zone 1 not r eady 038 034
1: Yes Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-174)
1: Yes
1: Yes
[spacer] DIST: Wrong se tt ing DIST 041 085
0: No Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-179)
[spacer] DIST: Trip s ignal 036 009
0: No Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-180)
[spacer] DIST: Trip s ignal Z1/ t1 039 016
0: No Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-180)
0: No Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-180)
0: No Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-180)
[spacer] DIST: Dis t De lta 019 074
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Dis t Test 019 075
0: No
[spacer] DIST: I> s tarting 039 001
0: No Fig. 3-130, (p. 3-175)
[spacer] DIST: Starting 036 135
0: No Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-179)

Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-180)
8-104 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] DIST: Z1 starting 039 003
0: No Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-179)
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Forwar d fault 036 138
0: No Fig. 3-132, (p. 3-176)
[spacer] DIST: Backwards fault 036 139
0: No Fig. 3-132, (p. 3-176)
Parameter Address
Measuring-circuit MCM ON: Blockin g V< EX T 038 033
monitoring
0: No
[spacer] MCM ON: Enable d 040 094
0: No Fig. 3-136, (p. 3-181)
[spacer] MCM ON: M e as . volt age o.k . 038 048
0: No Fig. 3-138, (p. 3-183)
[spacer] MCM ON: M e as . circ . V faulty 038 023
0: No Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-183)
[spacer] MCM ON: Und ervolt age 038 038
0: No Fig. 3-137, (p. 3-182)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-105

Parameter Address
Thermal overload THER M : B lock R e pli ca E XT 041 074
protection
0: No
[spacer] THER M : R e s et re pli ca E XT 038 061
0: No
[spacer] THER M : CTA e rror EX T 038 062
0: No
[spacer] THER M : Enable d 040 068
0: No Fig. 3-140, (p. 3-184)
[spacer] THER M : Not r eady 040 035
1: Yes
[spacer] THER M : R e s et re pli ca 039 061
0: No Fig. 3-144, (p. 3-190)
[spacer] THER M : S tar t ing k*Ire f> 041 108
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer] THER M : Warning 039 025
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer] THER M : Within p re-t rip t ime 041 109
1: Yes Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer] THER M : Tr ip s ignal 039 020
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer] THER M : R e clos ure block e d 039 024
0: No
[spacer] THER M : B uf fer empty 039 112
1: Yes Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer] THER M : CTA e rror 039 111
0: No Fig. 3-141, (p. 3-186)
[spacer] THER M : S et ting e rror,bl ock . 039 110
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
8-106 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Time-voltage protec‐ V<>: Blocking tV> E XT

041 068
tion
0: No
[spacer] V<>: Blocking tV>> E XT 041 069
0: No
[spacer] V<>: Blocking tV< E XT 041 070
0: No
[spacer] V<>: Blocking tV<< E XT 041 071
0: No
[spacer] V<>: Enable d 040 066
0: No Fig. 3-145, (p. 3-191)
[spacer] V<>: Ready 042 003
0: No Fig. 3-145, (p. 3-191)
[spacer] V<>: Not ready 042 004
0: No Fig. 3-145, (p. 3-191)
[spacer] V<>: General star ting 041 135
0: No
[spacer] V<>: Starting V> 041 030
0: No Fig. 3-146, (p. 3-192)
[spacer] V<>: Starting V>> 041 096
0: No Fig. 3-146, (p. 3-192)
[spacer] V<>: tV> elaps e d 041 034
0: No Fig. 3-146, (p. 3-192)
[spacer] V<>: tV>> elapse d 041 035
0: No Fig. 3-146, (p. 3-192)
[spacer] V<>: Starting V< 041 037
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer] V<>: Starting V<< 041 099
0: No
[spacer] V<>: tV< elaps e d 041 041
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer] V<>: tV<< elapse d 041 042
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer] V<>: tV< elaps e d & Vmi n 041 026
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer] V<>: tV<< elapse d & Vmi n 041 066
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-107

Parameter Address
[spacer] V<>: tV< elaps . transient 042 023
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer] V<>: tV<< elap se d t rans . 042 025
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer] V<>: tV</ << elaps . t rans . 042 007
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer] V<>: Fault V< 041 110
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer] V<>: Fault V<< 041 112
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
8-108 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Over-/ f<> : R es e t me as.val. EXT 006 075
tection
0: No
[spacer] f<> : Blocking f1 E XT 042 103
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] f<> : Enable d 042 100
0: No Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-194)
[spacer] f<> : R ead y 042 101
0: No Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-194)
[spacer] f<> : Not ready 042 140
0: No Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-194)
[spacer] f<> : Blocked b y V< 042 102
0: No Fig. 3-57, (p. 3-94)

Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-194)
[spacer] f<> : S tarting f1 042 107
0: No Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-197)
[spacer] f<> : S tarting f1 /df1 042 108
0: No Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-197)
[spacer] f<> : De lta f1 t ri gge red 042 109
0: No Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-197)
[spacer] f<> : De lta t1 e laps ed 042 110
0: No Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-197)
[spacer] f<> : Trip signal f1 042 111
0: No Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-197)
0: No
[spacer] f<> : S tarting f2 /df2 042 116
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-109

Parameter Address
[spacer] f<> : De lta f2 t rigge red 042 117
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] f<> : S tarting f3/df3 042 124
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-110 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF_1: Blocking E XT 038 058
failure protection
0: No
[spacer] CBF_1: Enable EXT 038 041
2: Not configured
[spacer] CBF_1: Disable EX T 038 042
2: Not configured
[spacer] CBF_1: Enable d 040 055
0: No
[spacer] CBF_1: Not re ady 040 025
1: Yes
[spacer] CBF_1: Ext ./use r enabl ed 038 040
1: Yes
[spacer] CBF_1: Mon. t. M-t r ip runn. 036 066
0: No Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-200)
[spacer] CBF_1: Mon. t. R-t ri p runn. 036 110
0: No Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-200)
[spacer] CBF_1: CB Sup er v. Signal 039 000
0: No Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-200)
[spacer] CBF_1: R-trip signal 039 022
0: No Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-200)
[spacer] CBF_1: B-trip signal 039 023
0: No Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-200)
[spacer] CBF_1: CB failure 006 051
0: No Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-200)

Fig. 3-155, (p. 3-202)
[spacer] CBF_1: Failur e M- trip 039 021
0: No Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-200)
[spacer] CBF_1: Failur e R- trip 036 056
0: No Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-200)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-111

Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF_2: Blocking E XT 024 228
failure protection
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: Enable EXT 024 234
2: Not configured
[spacer] CBF_2: Disable EXT 024 235
2: Not configured
[spacer] CBF_2: Enable d 040 048
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: Not re ady 024 229
1: Yes
[spacer] CBF_2: Ext ./use r enabl ed 024 233
1: Yes
[spacer] CBF_2: CB sup er v. signal 039 039
0: No Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-201)
[spacer] CBF_2: Failur e M- trip 036 059
0: No Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-201)
[spacer] CBF_2: Failur e R- trip 036 106
0: No Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-201)
[spacer] CBF_2: R-trip sign al 040 089
0: No Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-201)
[spacer] CBF_2: B-trip signal 040 104
0: No Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-201)
[spacer] CBF_2: Mon. t. M -t r ip runn. 036 111
0: No Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-201)
[spacer] CBF_2: Mon. t. R -t ri p runn. 036 112
0: No Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-201)
[spacer] CBF_2: CB failure 006 052
0: No Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-201)

Fig. 3-155, (p. 3-202)
8-112 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] CBM_1: Blocking EXT 044 128
0: No
[spacer] CBM_1: R es et me as.val. E XT 005 247
0: No
[spacer] CBM_1: Enable d 044 130
0: No Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-203)
[spacer] CBM_1: Blocked 044 199
0: No Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-212)
[spacer] CBM_1: Cycle running A 044 205
0: No
[spacer] CBM_1: Cycle running C 044 207
0: No
[spacer] CBM_1: S ig. No. C B op. > 044 135
0: No Fig. 3-163, (p. 3-210)
[spacer] CBM_1: S ig. Rem. No. CB op.< 044 136
0: No Fig. 3-162, (p. 3-210)
[spacer] CBM_1: S ignal ΣItrip> 044 137
0: No
[spacer] CBM_1: S ignal ΣItrip**2 > 044 138
0: No
[spacer] CBM_1: S ignal ΣI*t > 044 139
0: No
[spacer] CBM_1: tm ax> A 044 177
0: No
[spacer] CBM_1: tm ax> C 044 179
0: No
[spacer] CBM_1: Curr. flow e nded A 044 201
0: No
[spacer] CBM_1: Curr. flow e nded C 044 203
0: No
[spacer] CBM_1: S et ting e r ror CBM 044 204
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-113

Parameter Address
[spacer] CBM_2: R es et me as.val. E XT 007 111
0: No
[spacer] CBM_2: Blocking EXT 007 112
0: No
[spacer] CBM_2: Enable d 007 113
0: No Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-203)
[spacer] CBM_2: Blocked 007 116
0: No Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-212)
[spacer] CBM_2: S et ting er ror CBM_2 007 126
0: No
[spacer] CBM_2: Cycle running A 007 114
0: No
[spacer] CBM_2: Cycle running C 007 115
0: No
[spacer] CBM_2: S ig. No. C B op. > 007 117
0: No Fig. 3-163, (p. 3-210)
[spacer] CBM_2: S ig. Rem. No. CB op.< 007 118
0: No Fig. 3-162, (p. 3-210)
[spacer] CBM_2: S ignal ΣI trip> 007 119
0: No
[spacer] CBM_2: S ignal ΣI trip**2 > 007 120
0: No
[spacer] CBM_2: S ignal ΣI *t > 007 127
0: No
[spacer] CBM_2: tm ax> A 007 122
0: No
[spacer] CBM_2: tm ax> C 007 123
0: No
[spacer] CBM_2: Curr. flow e nded A 007 124
0: No
[spacer] CBM_2: Curr. flow e nded C 007 125
0: No
8-114 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Limit value LIMIT : Enabled 040 074
monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-165, (p. 3-213)
[spacer] LIMIT : tI> elaps e d 004 062
0: No
[spacer] LIMIT : tIb > elaps e d 040 122
0: No Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-214)
[spacer] LIMIT : tV> e lapse d 040 140
0: No Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-216)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIa> elapse d 040 147
0: No Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-214)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIN> elaps e d 040 153
0: No Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-215)
[spacer] LIMIT : tV>> e lapse d 040 141
0: No Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-216)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIa>> e lapse d 040 148
0: No Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-214)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIb >> e laps e d 040 151
0: No Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-214)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIN>> elapse d 040 154
0: No Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-215)
[spacer] LIMIT : tI>> elapse d 040 157
0: No
[spacer] LIMIT : tV< e lapse d 040 142
0: No Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-216)
[spacer] LIMIT : tV<< e lapse d 040 143
0: No Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-216)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIA> elaps e d 040 232
0: No
[spacer] LIMIT : tV> & tV< elaps e d 040 144
0: No Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-216)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIA>> elapse d 040 233
0: No
[spacer] LIMIT : tV>> & tV<< elapse d 040 145
0: No Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-216)
[spacer] LIMIT : tf> elaps e d 040 196
0: No Fig. 3-169, (p. 3-217)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-115

Parameter Address
[spacer] LIMIT : tIB> elap se d 040 234
0: No
[spacer] LIMIT : tf>> elap se d 040 197
0: No Fig. 3-169, (p. 3-217)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIB>> elaps e d 040 235
0: No
[spacer] LIMIT : tf< elaps e d 040 198
0: No Fig. 3-169, (p. 3-217)
[spacer] LIMIT : tf<< elap se d 040 199
0: No Fig. 3-169, (p. 3-217)
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA> elap se d 040 240
0: No
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA>> e lapse d 040 241
0: No
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA< elap se d 040 242
0: No
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA<< e lapse d 040 243
0: No
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA>& tVA< e lapse d 040 244
0: No
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA>>& tVA< < e lapsed 040 245
0: No
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB> e laps ed 040 246
0: No
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB>> e laps ed 040 247
0: No
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB< e laps ed 040 248
0: No
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB<< e laps ed 040 249
0: No
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB>& tVB< el apse d 040 250
0: No
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB>>& tVB<< elapse d 040 251
0: No
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting I D,Cl in> 040 180
0: No Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-218)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting I DC ,lin>> 040 181
0: No Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-218)
8-116 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin> elaps ed 040 182
0: No Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-218)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin>> elaps ed 040 183
0: No Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-218)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting IDC ,lin< 040 184
0: No Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-218)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting IDC ,lin<< 040 185
0: No Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-218)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin< elaps ed 040 186
0: No Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-218)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin<< elaps ed 040 187
0: No Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-218)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting T > 040 170
0: No Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting T >> 040 171
0: No Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIMIT : tT > elaps ed 040 172
0: No Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIMIT : tT >> elaps ed 040 173
0: No Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting T < 040 174
0: No Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting T << 040 175
0: No Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIMIT : tT < elaps ed 040 176
0: No Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIMIT : tT << elaps ed 040 177
0: No Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIPxx trigge re d 221 232
0: Not triggered
[spacer] LIMIT : tVPGxx t rigger e d 221 233
0: Not triggered
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-117

Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOGIC: Input 01 EXT

034 000
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Input 02 EXT 034 001
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-118 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-119

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Se t 1 EXT 034 051
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
[spacer] LOGIC: Re s e t 1 EXT 034 059
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
[spacer] LOGIC: 1 has been s et 034 067
0: No Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-221)
8-120 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: 1 se t e xte rnally 034 075
0: No Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-221)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Enabled 034 046
0: No Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-222)
[spacer] LOGIC: Output 0 1 042 032
0: No Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-222)
[spacer] LOGIC: Output 0 1 (t) 042 033
0: No Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-222)
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-121

Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Output 02 (t) 042 035
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Output 03 042 036
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-122 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-123

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-124 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-125

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-126 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-127

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-128 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-129

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-130 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-131

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Output100 047 070
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Output100 ( t ) 047 071
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-132 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Output10 7 047 084
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Output10 7 ( t ) 047 085
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-133

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-134 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOG_2: Enable d

011 138
0: No Fig. 3-174, (p. 3-223)
[spacer] LOG_2: Out put 1 052 032
0: No Fig. 3-174, (p. 3-223)
[spacer] LOG_2: Out put 1 (t ) 052 033
0: No Fig. 3-174, (p. 3-223)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-135

Parameter Address
Real Timer TIM ER : M onday 014 139
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-228)
[spacer] TIM ER : T ue sday 014 148
0: No
[spacer] TIM ER : W edne sd ay 014 149
0: No
[spacer] TIM ER : T hur s day 014 158
0: No
[spacer] TIM ER : F riday 014 159
0: No
[spacer] TIM ER : S atur day 014 168
0: No
[spacer] TIM ER : S unday 014 169
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-228)
[spacer] TIM ER : T im e r s tage 1 015 006
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-228)
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-136 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
External device DEV01: Open s ignal E X T 210 030
0: No
[spacer] DEV01: Clos e d signal EXT 210 031
0: No
[spacer] DEV01: Control st at e 210 018
0: Intermediate pos. Fig. 3-185, (p. 3-235)

Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-244)
[spacer] DEV01: S witch. devi ce ope n 210 036
0: No Fig. 3-185, (p. 3-235)

Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-244)
[spacer] DEV01: S witch.dev ice c los ed 210 037
0: No Fig. 3-185, (p. 3-235)

Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-244)
[spacer] DEV01: De v. inte rm./flt .pos 210 038
0: No Fig. 3-185, (p. 3-235)

Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-244)
[spacer] DEV01: Open command 210 028
0: No Fig. 3-190, (p. 3-241)
[spacer] DEV01: Clos e command 210 029
0: No Fig. 3-190, (p. 3-241)
[spacer] DEV01: Open cmd. rece iv e d 218 000
0: No
[spacer] DEV01: Clos e cmd. re ce ive d 218 001
0: No
[spacer] DEV01: Warning op. count . 219 081
0: No Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-248)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-137

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Warning that the number of switching commands has exceeded the set limit
value.
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DEV02: M el se c. t ime r 2 210 067
0: No
[spacer] DEV02: Control s tat e 210 068
[spacer] DEV02: S witch. d evi ce ope n 210 086
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DEV02: De v. interm./flt .pos 210 088
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DEV02: Open cm d. rece iv e d 218 002
0: No
0: No
8-138 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DEV03: M el se c. t ime r 3 210 117
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-139

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-140 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-141

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-142 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-143

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-144 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-145

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-146 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Interlocking logic ILOCK: Output 01 250 032
0: No Fig. 3-200, (p. 3-254)
[spacer] ILOCK: Output 02 250 033
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-147

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Output of the respective equation of the interlocking logic.
These logic state signals are transmitted with the request for a switching
operation, and cyclically (according to the setting ILO CK: Cycle t
inte rl.che ck).
8-148 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Single-pole CMD_1: Com mand C 0 01 200 001
commands
0: No Fig. 3-201, (p. 3-256)
[spacer] CMD_1: Com mand C 0 02 200 006
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No Fig. 3-197, (p. 3-250)
0: No Fig. 3-197, (p. 3-250)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-149

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-150 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Single-pole signals SIG_1: S ignal S 00 1 EX T 226 004
0: No
[spacer] SIG_1: Logic s ignal S0 0 1 226 005
0: No Fig. 3-202, (p. 3-258)
[spacer] SIG_1: S ignal S 00 2 EX T 226 012
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-151

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No Fig. 3-197, (p. 3-250)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-152 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-153

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-154 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-155

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-156 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-157

Parameter Address
Binary counts COUNT : Se t counte r 1 E X T 217 130
0: No
[spacer] COUNT : Se t counte r 2 E X T 217 085
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] COUNT : Transm it count s E XT 217 009
0: No
[spacer] COUNT : Re s e t EXT 217 004
0: No
[spacer] COUNT : Enab led 217 001
0: No Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-264)
[spacer] COUNT : Transm it count s 217 010
0: No Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-264)
[spacer] COUNT : Re s e t 217 005
0: No Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-264)
[spacer] COUNT : Warning count 1 217 191
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Warning that the counter value has exceeded the set limit value.
8.1.2 Control and Testing
Parameter Address
Device DVICE: S e rvice info 03 1 08 0 031 080
0: No
8-158 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Local control panel LOC: Param . change enabl. 003 010
0: No
[spacer]
Setting the enable for changing values from the local control panel.
Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 1: Se l.s pont an.s ig.te st 003 180
communication
interface 1
[spacer]
Signal selection for testing purposes.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tes t s pont .s ig.s t ar t 003 184
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as “starting”.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tes t s pont .s ig. end 003 186
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as “ending”.
[spacer] COMM 1: Se l. po s. dev. tes t 221 105
0: Not assigned
[spacer]
Select a device DEVxx for testing the transmission of switchgear device position
in monitoring direction.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tes t p osition de v. 221 106
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Carry out a test to check the transmission of switchgear device position in
monitoring direction for the device selected at C OMM1: S el. pos .
dev.test.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-159

Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 2: Se l.s pont an.s ig.te st 103 180
communication
interface 2
[spacer]
Signal selection for testing purposes.
[spacer] COMM 2: Tes t s pont .s ig.s t ar t 103 184
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "starting".
[spacer] COMM 2: Tes t s pont .s ig. end 103 186
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "ending".
Parameter Address
IEC 61850 IEC: Se l.s pontan.si g.t est 104 245
Communication
[spacer] IEC: Tes t sp ont.sig.s tar t 104 246
[spacer] IEC: Tes t sp ont.sig. end 104 247
[spacer] IEC: Se l. pos . d ev .t es t 104 248
0: Not assigned
[spacer] IEC: Tes t pos ition DEV 104 249
0: don't execute
Parameter Address
Measured data input MEASI: Re set Tm ax US ER

003 045
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting measured maximum temperatures Tmax and Tmax Tx (x=1...9) to
updated measured values.
8-160 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Binary and analog OUTP: Re s e t latch. US ER 021 009
output
[spacer]
Reset of latched output relays from the user interface.
[spacer] OUTP: Re lay assign. f.t e st 003 042
[spacer]
Selection of the relay to be tested.
[spacer] OUTP: Re lay te st 003 043
[spacer]
The relay selected for testing is triggered for the duration set at OUTP: H ol d -
time f or tes t.
[spacer] OUTP: Hold- tim e for t e st 003 044
1 1 10 s Fig. 3-40, (p. 3-67)
[spacer]
Setting for the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered for
functional testing.
Parameter Address
Measured data MEASO: Rese t output USE R 037 116
output
[spacer]
Resetting the measured data output function.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-161

Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: General re s et USER 003 002
[spacer]
Reset of the following memories:
● All counters
● LED indicators
● Operating data memory
● All event memories
● Event counters
● Fault data
● Measured overload data
● Recorded fault values
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t indicat. USE R 021 010
[spacer]
Reset of the following displays:
● LED indicators
● Fault data
[spacer] MAIN: Rs e t .lat ch.t rip US ER 021 005
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Reset of latched trip commands from the local control panel.
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t m eas .v. en.USE R 003 032
0: don't execute
[spacer]
The display of active and reactive energy output and input is reset.
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t c. cl/ t r. cUS ER 003 007

Fig. 3-71, (p. 3-106)
[spacer]
The counters for counting the close and trip commands are reset.
[spacer] MAIN: Group res et 1 USER 005 253
[spacer] MAIN: Group res et 2 USER 005 254
[spacer]
Group of resetting commands.
[spacer] MAIN: En.m an.trip cmd.USER 003 064
0: No Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-107)
[spacer]
Enabling of manual trip commands from the local control panel.
8-162 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Man.M- trip cmd US ER 003 065
[spacer]
A trip command is issued from the front panel HMI for the 100 ms.
[spacer] MAIN: Man.M- trip cmd2 US ER 003 082
[spacer]
[spacer] MAIN: Man.R- trip cmd US ER 003 066
[spacer]
Note: This command is not executed unless the manual trip has been
configured as re-trip command.
[spacer] MAIN: Man.R- trip cmd2 US ER 003 083
[spacer]
configured as a re-trip command 2.
[spacer] MAIN: Man.B-trip cmd USE R 003 067
[spacer]
configured as a back-trip command.
[spacer] MAIN: Man.B-trip cmd2 U SE R 003 087
[spacer]
configured as a back-trip command 2.
[spacer] MAIN: En.m an.clos .cmd.USE R 003 105
0: No Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-98)
[spacer]
Setting the enable for the issue of a close command from the local control panel
(enables manual breaker close operations).
[spacer] MAIN: Man. clos e cmd. US ER 018 033
[spacer]
A close command is issued from the local control panel for the set reclose
command time.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-163

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Sof t War m re st art 003 039
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the power
supply is turned on.
[spacer] MAIN: Warm re star t 010 166
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the power
supply is turned on.
[spacer] MAIN: Sof t Cold re star t 000 085
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A cold restart is carried out. A cold restart means that all settings and recordings
are cleared. Parameter values used by the P638 after a cold restart have been
selected in such a manner that the P638 is blocked after a cold restart.
[spacer] MAIN: Cold rest art 009 254
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A cold restart is carried out. A cold restart means that all settings and recordings
are cleared. Parameter values used by the P638 after a cold restart have been
selected in such a manner that the P638 is blocked after a cold restart.
Parameter Address
Operating data OP_R C: Res e t record. USE R 100 001
recording
[spacer]
The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset.
Parameter Address
Monitoring signal MT _RC: Res et record. USE R 003 008
recording
[spacer]
Reset of the monitoring signal memory.
8-164 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Overload recording OL_RC: R e s et rec ord. US E R 100 003
[spacer]
Reset of the overload memory.
Parameter Address
Fault recording FT_RC: Trigg er US E R 003 041
[spacer]
Fault recording is enabled from the local control panel for 500 ms.
[spacer] FT_RC: Res et record. USE R 003 006
[spacer]
Reset of the following memories:
● LED indicators
● Fault memory
● Fault counter
● Fault data
● Recorded fault values
Parameter Address
Thermal overload THER M : R e s et re pli ca USER 022 061
protection
[spacer]
Resetting the thermal replica of the thermal overload protection function.
Parameter Address
Over-/ f<> : R es e t me as.val. US E R 003 080
tection
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting the measured event values f<>: M ax. frequ. for
f> and f<>: Min. fre qu. for f<.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-165

Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF_1: Enable USER 003 016
failure protection
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Circuit breaker failure protection is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer] CBF_1: Disable USE R 003 015
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Circuit breaker failure protection is disabled from the local control panel.
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF_2: Enable USER 024 232
failure protection
0: don't execute
[spacer] CBF_2: Disable USE R 024 231
0: don't execute
8-166 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] CBM_1: Initialize value s 003 011
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Setting default values.
[spacer] CBM_1: R es et me as.val. U SER 003 013
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting the measured value memories.
[spacer] CBM_1: S et No. C B ope r. A 022 131
Blocked 0 65000
[spacer] CBM_1: S et No. C B ope r. C 022 133
Blocked 0 65000
[spacer]
Set the number of CB operations.
[spacer] CBM_1: S et remain. CB op. A 022 134
Blocked 0 65000
[spacer] CBM_1: S et remain. CB op. C 022 136
Blocked 0 65000
[spacer]
Set the remaining CB operations.
[spacer] CBM_1: S et ΣI trip A 022 137
Blocked 0 65000 Inom,CB
[spacer] CBM_1: S et ΣI trip C 022 139
[spacer] CBM_1: S et ΣI trip**2 A 022 140
Blocked 0 65000 Inom,CB**

2
[spacer] CBM_1: S et ΣI trip**2 C 022 142

2
[spacer] CBM_1: S et ΣI *t A 022 143
Blocked 0.0 4000.0 kAs
[spacer] CBM_1: S et ΣI *t C 022 145
[spacer]
Set the limit values for the ruptured currents and their squares. (An alarm is
displayed if these limit values are exceeded.)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-167

Parameter Address
[spacer] CBM_2: Initialize value s 007 128
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Setting default values.
[spacer] CBM_2: R es et me as.val. U SER 007 129
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting the measured value memories.
[spacer] CBM_2: S et No. C B ope r. A 007 130
Blocked 0 65000
[spacer] CBM_2: S et No. C B ope r. C 007 131
Blocked 0 65000
[spacer]
[spacer] CBM_2: S et rem ain. CB op. A 007 132
Blocked 0 65000
[spacer] CBM_2: S et rem ain. CB op. C 007 133
Blocked 0 65000
[spacer]
[spacer] CBM_2: S et ΣI trip A 007 134
[spacer] CBM_2: S et ΣI trip C 007 135
[spacer] CBM_2: S et ΣI trip**2 A 007 136

2
[spacer] CBM_2: S et ΣI trip**2 C 007 137

2
[spacer] CBM_2: S et ΣI *t A 007 138
[spacer] CBM_2: S et ΣI *t C 007 139
[spacer]
Set the limit values for the ruptured currents and their squares. (An alarm is
displayed if these limit values are exceeded.)
8-168 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOGIC: Trigger 1

034 038
[spacer] LOGIC: Trigger 2 034 039
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point by a 100 ms pulse.
Parameter Address
Binary counts COUNT : Transmit count s USE R 217 008
[spacer]
Count transmission.
[spacer] COUNT : Re s e t USE R 217 003
[spacer]
Count reset.
8.1.3 Operating Data Recording
Parameter Address
Operating data OP_R C: Ope rat. data re cor d. 003 024
recording
0 0 1000 Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-121)
[spacer]
Point of entry into the operating data log.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-169

Parameter Address
Monitoring signal MT _RC: Mon. s ignal rec ord. 003 001
recording
0 0 30 Fig. 3-83, (p. 3-122)
[spacer]
Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.
8-170 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

8.2 Events
8.2.1 Event Counters
Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: No. g ene ral s tart . 004 000
[spacer]
Number of general starting signals.
[spacer] MAIN: CB1 act. oper . cap. 221 087
1 1 99
[spacer] MAIN: CB2 act. oper . cap. 221 091
1 1 99
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a
limited time period).
[spacer] MAIN: No. M -tri p cmds. 1 009 005
[spacer]
Number of main-trip commands.
[spacer] MAIN: No. M -tri p cmds. 2 009 027
[spacer]
Number of main-trip 2 commands.
[spacer] MAIN: No. R -trip cmds. 1 009 006
[spacer]
Number of re-trip commands.
[spacer] MAIN: No. R -trip cmds. 2 009 028
[spacer]
Number of re-trip 2 commands.
[spacer] MAIN: No. B- trip cmds. 1 009 007
[spacer]
Number of back-trip commands.
[spacer] MAIN: No. B- trip cmds. 2 009 029
[spacer]
Number of back-trip 2 commands.
[spacer] MAIN: No. close c ommands 009 055
[spacer]
Number of close commands.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-171

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: No.overfl.act.e n. out 009 090
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy
output was exceeded.
Note: The maximum value of this counter is 10000.
[spacer] MAIN: No.overfl.act.e n. inp 009 091
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy input
was exceeded.
[spacer] MAIN: No.ov/f l.reac.e n.out 009 092
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
output was exceeded.
[spacer] MAIN: No.ov/f l.reac.e n.inp 009 093
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
input was exceeded.
[spacer] MAIN: No. m otor dri ve op. 221 025
[spacer]
Number of times external devices with direct motor control are activated during
the monitoring time.
[spacer] MAIN: Count, binary 221 020
0: don't execute
Parameter Address
Operating data OP_R C: No. oper. data sig. 100 002
recording
0 0 1000 Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-121)
[spacer]
Number of signals stored in the operating data memory.
8-172 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
Monitoring signal MT _RC: No. m onit. signals 004 019
recording
0 0 30 Fig. 3-83, (p. 3-122)
[spacer]
Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory.
Parameter Address
Overload recording OL_RC: No. overload 004 101
0 0 9999 Fig. 3-86, (p. 3-125)
[spacer]
Number of overload events.
Parameter Address
Fault recording FT_RC: No. of f aults 004 020
0 0 9999 Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
Number of faults.
[spacer] FT_RC: No. sys te m dis t urb. 004 010
0 0 9999 Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
Number of system disturbances.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-173

Parameter Address
[spacer] CBM_1: No. of CB ope r . A 008 011
0 0 65000
[spacer] CBM_1: No. of CB ope r . B 008 012
0 0 65000
[spacer] CBM_1: No. of CB ope r . C 008 013
0 0 65000
[spacer]
Number of mechanical switching operations made.
[spacer] CBM_1: R em ain. No. CB op. A 008 014
30000 0 65000
[spacer] CBM_1: R em ain. No. CB op. B 008 015
30000 0 65000
[spacer] CBM_1: R em ain. No. CB op. C 008 016
30000 0 65000
[spacer]
Number of remaining switching operations (as shown by evaluating wear with
reference to the CB wear characteristic).
Parameter Address
[spacer] CBM_2: No. of CB ope r . A 007 142
0 0 65000
[spacer] CBM_2: No. of CB ope r . C 007 143
0 0 65000
[spacer]
Number of mechanical switching operations made.
[spacer] CBM_2: R em ain. No. CB op. A 007 144
30000 0 65000
[spacer] CBM_2: R em ain. No. CB op. C 007 145
30000 0 65000
[spacer]
Number of remaining switching operations (as shown by evaluating wear with
reference to the CB wear characteristic).
8-174 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
External device DEV01: Operation counte r 210 043
0 0 65535 Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-248)
[spacer] DEV02: Operation counte r 210 093
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
[spacer]
Number of switching operations made. It is also possible to manually set this
counter to any value from 0 to 65535.
[spacer] DEV01: De v. op. c apabi li ty 210 003
1 1 99
1 1 99
1 1 99
1 1 99
1 1 99
1 1 99
1 1 99
1 1 99
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-175

Parameter Address
1 1 99
1 1 99
[spacer]
Number of remaining switching operations. It is also possible to manually set
this counter to any value from 1 to 99.
8-176 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

8.2.2 Measured Event Data
Parameter Address
Overload data OL_DA: Ove rload dur ation 004 102
acquisition
Not measured 0.0 6500.0 s Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-123)
[spacer]
Duration of the overload event.
[spacer] OL_DA: S tatus THERM r e pl ic a 004 147
Not measured 0 250 % Fig. 3-85, (p. 3-124)
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.
[spacer] OL_DA: L oad curre nt T HERM 004 058
[spacer]
Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function to
calculate the tripping time.
[spacer] OL_DA: Ob ject t emp. THE RM 004 035
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object.
[spacer] OL_DA: C oolant te mp. T HERM 004 036
[spacer]
Display of coolant temperature, dependent on the setting for THE RM: Sel ect
CTA PSx.
When set to Default temp. value the set temperature value will be displayed.
When set to From PT100 the temperature measured by the resistance
thermometer will be displayed. When set to From 20 mA input the temperature
measured via an external 20 mA transducer will be displayed.
[spacer] OL_DA: Pre - trip t .le ft THE RM 004 148
Not measured 0.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-85, (p. 3-124)
[spacer]
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function
will reach the tripping threshold (“time-to-trip”).
[spacer] OL_DA: Of fs et THERM r epl ic a 004 154
[spacer]
Display of the additional reserve if coolant temperature is taken into account
and if the measured coolant temperature is lower than the set maximum
permissible coolant temperature. (In this case, the thermal model has been
shifted downwards.)
If there is no coolant temperature acquisition and if the coolant temperature and
the maximum permissible coolant temperature have been set to the same
value, then the coolant temperature is not taken into account and the
characteristic is a function of the current only. The additional reserve amounts
to 0 in this case.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-177

Parameter Address
Fault data FT_DA: Fault d uration 008 010
acquisition
[spacer]
Display of the fault duration.
[spacer] FT_DA: Running t ime 004 021
[spacer]
Display of the running time.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault d et er m. 004 198
0: No fault Fig. 3-89, (p. 3-130)
[spacer]
This display indicates when the fault data were stored.
[spacer] FT_DA: Run tim e t o meas . 004 199
[spacer]
Display of the fault data acquisition time from the onset of the fault.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curr.IA,a p.u. 004 116
[spacer]
Display of the fault current in phase A, end a, referred to In.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curr.IC, a p.u. 004 117
[spacer]
Display of the fault current in phase C, end a, referred to In.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curr.IA,b p.u 004 118
[spacer]
Display of the fault current in phase A, end b, referred to In.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curr.IC, b p.u. 004 119
[spacer]
Display of the fault current in phase C, end b, referred to In.
[spacer] FT_DA: IN. p.u. 004 177
Not measured 0.000 25.000 IN,nom Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-131)
[spacer]
Display of the defrost current referred to In.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault voltage p.u. 004 026
Not measured 0.000 3.000 Vnom Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-131)
[spacer]
Display of the fault voltage referred to Vnom.
[spacer] FT_DA: Diff. curre nt 1 005 082
[spacer]
8-178 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] FT_DA: Diff. curre nt 1(2f0 ) 005 084
[spacer]
Display of the differential current, measuring system 2, referred to Iref.
[spacer] FT_DA: Re strain. cur re nt 1 005 083
[spacer]
[spacer] FT_DA: Diff. curre nt 2 006 082
[spacer]
[spacer] FT_DA: Diff. curre nt 2(2f0 ) 006 084
[spacer]
Display of second harmonic in differential current, measuring system 2, referred
to Iref.
[spacer] FT_DA: Re strain. cur re nt 2 006 083
[spacer]
Parameter Address
Over-/ f<> : M ax. frequ. for f> 005 002
tection
Not measured 12.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer]
Maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition.
[spacer] f<> : M in. frequ. for f< 005 001
Not measured 12.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer]
Minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-179

Parameter Address
[spacer] CBM_1: Itrip,prim A 009 212
Not measured 0 65000 A
[spacer] CBM_1: Itrip,prim C 009 214
[spacer] CBM_1: Itrip A 009 047
Not measured 0.00 100.00 Inom,CB
[spacer] CBM_1: Itrip C 009 049
[spacer] CBM_1: Itrip* *2 A 009 051
Not measured 0.0 6000.0 Inom,CB**

2
[spacer] CBM_1: Itrip* *2 C 009 053

2
[spacer]
Ruptured currents and their squared values.
[spacer] CBM_1: I* t A 009 061
Not measured 0 60000 As
[spacer] CBM_1: I* t C 009 063
[spacer]
Current-time integral of the per-unit ruptured current for each circuit breaker
contact.
[spacer] CBM_1: ΣIt rip A 009 071
0 0 65000 Inom,CB
[spacer] CBM_1: ΣIt rip C 009 076
0 0 65000 Inom,CB
[spacer]
Sum of the per-unit ruptured currents for each circuit breaker contact.
[spacer] CBM_1: ΣIt rip* *2 A 009 077
0 0 65000 Inom,CB**
2
[spacer] CBM_1: ΣIt rip* *2 C 009 079
0 0 65000 Inom,CB**
2
[spacer]
Sum of the squared per-unit ruptured currents for each circuit breaker contact.
[spacer] CBM_1: ΣI* t A 009 087
0.0 0.0 4000.0 kAs
[spacer]
Sum of the current-time integrals of the per-unit ruptured currents for each
circuit breaker contact.
8-180 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] CBM_1: ΣI* t C 009 089
0.0 0.0 4000.0 kAs
[spacer]
Sum of the ruptured currents and of their squared values.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-181

Parameter Address
[spacer] CBM_2: Itrip,prim A 007 148
[spacer] CBM_2: Itrip,prim C 007 149
[spacer] CBM_2: Itrip A 007 150
[spacer] CBM_2: Itrip C 007 151
[spacer] CBM_2: Itrip* *2 A 007 152

2
[spacer] CBM_2: Itrip* *2 C 007 153

2
[spacer]
Ruptured currents and their squared values.
[spacer] CBM_2: ΣIt rip A 007 154
0 0 65000 Inom,CB
[spacer] CBM_2: I* t A 007 158
[spacer] CBM_2: I* t C 007 159
[spacer] CBM_2: ΣIt rip C 007 155
0 0 65000 Inom,CB
[spacer] CBM_2: ΣIt rip* *2 A 007 156
0 0 65000 Inom,CB**
2
[spacer] CBM_2: ΣIt rip* *2 C 007 157
0 0 65000 Inom,CB**
2
[spacer] CBM_2: ΣI* t A 007 166
0.0 0.0 4000.0 kAs
[spacer] CBM_2: ΣI* t C 007 167
0.0 0.0 4000.0 kAs
[spacer]
Sum of the ruptured currents and of their squared values.
8-182 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

8.2.3 Event Recording
Parameter Address
Overload recording OL_RC: Over load re cor ding 1 033 020
0 0 9999 Fig. 3-87, (p. 3-126)
[spacer] OL_RC: Over load re cor ding 2 033 021
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Point of entry into the overload log.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 8-183

Parameter Address
Fault recording FT_RC: Fault recor ding 1 003 000
0 0 9999
[spacer] FT_RC: Fault recor ding 2 033 001
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Point of entry into the fault log.
8-184 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
9 IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator

This chapter lists all IEC 61850-specific settings, that are carried out with the
configuration tool “IED Configurator”.
The sequence in which the settings are listed and described in this chapter
corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree of the “IED Configurator”.
However, only those setting parameters are described that are mandatory for
establishing the IEC 61850 communication.
Further setting parameters are listed in the “Settings” chapter under the function
groups IEC and GOOSE. A list of all available Logical Nodes can be found in a
separate document.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 9-1

P638 9 IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator
9.1 Manage IED

The menu item “Manage IED” allows for establishing a connection between the
“IED Configurator” and the device.
The P638 features two memory “banks” one of which includes the active setting
parameters. The other memory bank is used with the configuration procedure for
parameters via “IED Configurator” or operating program.
Toggling between active and inactive memory bank is carried out either by
executing the parameter IEC: Switch Config. Bank or via “IED Configurator”
(after the connection has been established) by pressing the “Switch Banks”
button.
Parameter
Active Bank SCL File ID
Name of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out with the
IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established (via
menu item “Manage IED”).
SCL File Version
Version number of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out
with the IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been
established (via menu item “Manage IED”).
Parameter
Inactive Bank SCL File ID
Name of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with the IED
Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established (via menu
item “Manage IED”).
SCL File Version
Version number of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with
the IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established
(via menu item “Manage IED”).
9-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

9 IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator P638
9.2 IED Details

The category “IED Details” contains several settings that characterize the device
as well as the SCL file, which identifies the IEC 61850 configuration.
Parameter Default Value
SCL Details SCL File ID PX 438
Identification of the .MCL configuration file. If required, this preset value may be
modified by, for example, entering a bay name.
SCL File Version 251.2.01
Specific value to identify the IEC 61850 data model and configuration.
If required, this preset value may be modified by, for example, identifying the
revision states during engineering.
Parameter Address
IED Details Name 104 057
Explicitly assigned device name for the function in the system (IED); is part of
the Logical Device Name.
Important note: According to the IEC standard the name must consist of only
letters (A..Z, a..z), digits (0..9) and underscore characters (_), and the name
must start with a letter. Note that a non-standard name causes problems with
the IEC 61850 communication.
Parameter
Template Details ICD Template
SCL Schema Version
Description
Type
Configuration Revision
Supported Models
The values listed in the column “Template Details” only provide information.
They are preset and cannot be modified.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 9-3

9.3 Communications
The category “Communications” contains the general network-related settings.
Connected Sub- Interface 1 Connected Sub-Network NONE

Network
Interface 2 Connected Sub-Network NONE2
Optional name available to identify the Ethernet network.
Access Point AP1
Part of the communications control; preset, cannot be modified.
Parameter Default Value Address
Address Enable VLANs false

Configuration
Checkbox to enable/disable VLANs. When the checkbox is checked, all

configurations for physical Interfaces that have defined any VLANs will be
replaced by the configuration of these VLANs (grouped by physical interfaces).
Enable Port Assignment false
Checkbox to enable/disable Port Assignment. When the checkbox is checked,

Port Assignments configuration will appear for all physical interfaces supported
by the device.

Interface 1
IP Address 0.0.0.0 104 001
Assigned IP address of the Interface1 of P437 for the server function in the
system.
SubNet Mask 0.0.0.0 104 005
Gateway Address 0.0.0.0 104 011
9-4 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661


Interface 2 (if fitted)
IP Address 0.0.0.0 104 070
Assigned IP address of the Interface2 of P437 for the server function in the
system.
SubNet Mask 0.0.0.0 104 071

Interface 1 VLAN1/VLAN2
VLAN Id (hex) 1 104 092
2 104 096
Assigned VLAN ID of Interface 1. (These parameters appear when checkbox of

Enable VLANs is switched on.)
IP Address 192.168.10.4 104 091
192.168.11.4 104 094
Assigned IP address of VLAN in the system.
SubNet Mask 255.255.255.0 104 093
255.255.255.0 104 097
The subnet mask of VLAN defines which part of the IP address is addressed by
the sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
0.0.0.0 104 098
This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway of the VLAN for
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 9-5

IEC 61850 (MMS)
Checkbox to enable/disable MMS of IEC 61850. (These parameters can be

configured for Interface1, Interface2, VLAN1 and VLAN2 separately when
checkbox of Enable Port Assignment is switched on.)
Network Time Protocol (NTP)
Checkbox to enable/disable Network Time Protocol.
IED Configuration (TLS)
Checkbox to enable/disable Transport Layer Security of IED configuration.
Basic Administration (SSH/SFTP)
Checkbox to enable/disable basic administration SSH/SFTP.
User management (RBAC) (Webservice)
Checkbox to enable/disable user management of RBAC (Role Based Access

Control).
General TCP Keepalive 5 seconds

Configuration
Communication monitoring at TCP level.
Database Lock Timeout 2 minutes
Return time period for setting procedures that have commenced. (The default
value above is in seconds. The IED Configurator, however, displays converts this
to minutes.)
9-6 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

9.4 SNTP
The category “SNTP” contains the clock synchronization settings.
9.4.1 General Config
Client Operation Poll Rate (seconds) 64
Polling interval for clock synchronization.
Accepted Stratum Level All levels (0 - 15)
Quality criterion to accept an SNTP server for clock synchronization; preset,

cannot be modified.
9.4.2 External Server 1

Settings for the primary clock synchronization server.
Note that all values except IP Address and the “Use Anycast” button are usually
disabled and may be accepted only when imported from an XML configuration
file.
External Server IP Address 0.0.0.0 104 202

Parameters
IP address of the preferred server used for clock synchronization.

Clicking the “Use Anycast” button in the IED Configurator changes the value
such that any server in the local network is appointed to provide clock
synchronization.
9.4.3 External Server 2

Settings for the backup clock synchronization server.
Note that all values except IP Address and the “Use Anycast” button are usually
disabled and may be accepted only when imported from an XML configuration
file.
External Server IP Address 0.0.0.0 104 210

Parameters
IP address of the backup server used for clock synchronization.

Clicking the “Use Anycast” button in the IED Configurator changes the value
such that any server in the local network is appointed to provide clock
synchronization.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 9-7

9.5 Dataset Definitions
Parameter
Dataset Definitions Name
Explicitly (and uniquely) assigned name for the dataset.
Location
Saving datasets at System/LLN0 is compulsory.
Contents
Content (data objects, data attributes) of a dataset.

The “GOOSE Capacity” display allows for checking the length of a dataset for
less than 1500 bytes to permit transmission in GOOSE messages.
Note: It is not possible to read the IEC configuration back from the P437 if the
“Dataset” sizes exceed the GOOSE size limit significantly. Too large a dataset
can spoil IEC61850 communication. Hence, the dataset size limit of 100% of the
9-8 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

9.6 GOOSE Publishing
9.6.1 System/LLN0
Network Parameters Multicast MAC Address 01-0C-CD-01-00-00
Virtual MAC address that the sending device provides as the destination; preset.
Application ID (hex) 0000
Explicitly (and uniquely) assigned ID-number of the GOOSE.
VLAN Identifier (hex) 0
ID-number of the virtual LAN with which the GOOSE is sent; preset.
VLAN Priority 4
Priority with which the GOOSE is sent in the virtual LAN; preset.
Repeat Message Minimum Cycle Time 10 ms

Transmission
Parameters
First send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period; preset.
Maximum Cycle Time 1s
Continuous send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period;
preset.
Increment 900
Specification factor for the transition of time intervals for GOOSE send
repetitions from the first to the continuous repetition.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 9-9

Message Data GOOSE Identifier TEMPLATESystem/

Parameters LLN0$GO$gcb01
GOOSE ID consisting of the Device Name and the GOOSE Control Block.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE.
Configuration Revision 1
Revision status of the configuration.
9-10 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

9.7 GOOSE Subscribing
9.7.1 Mapped Inputs
Source Network Multicast MAC Address 01-0C-CD-01-00-00

Parameters
Virtual MAC address used as a receive filter; preset.
ID-number of the GOOSE.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 9-11

GOOSE Source Source Path

Parameters
Information data attribute in the transmitting device.
GOOSE Identifier
ID of the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Configuration revision status of the transmitting device.
Data Obj Index 1
Position index of the data object within the GOOSE.
Data Obj Type Unknown
Structure of the data object; possible settings:

● Unknown
● Boolean (logical value)
● Int8 (Integer, with 8 digits)
● UInt8 (Positive integer, with 8 digits)
● Float (Floating-point number)
● BStr2 (Binary state, with 2 digits)
● SPS (Single-pole signal)
● DPS (Two-pole signal)
Quality Obj Index 1
Distance of the quality descriptor to the data object if not preset. The quality of
the received information is to be tested if such has been configured.
9-12 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Destination Evaluation Expression Equal to

Parameters
Criteria to check the received information content by comparing it with a set

integer value; the parameter is not supported in the device.
● Equal to (Compared to: equal)
● Not equal to (Compared to: unequal)
● Greater than (Compared to: greater)
● Less than (Compared to: less)
● Pass through (Do not compare)
Default Input Value False
Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed.
● False – not set
● True – set
● Last Known Value – retain last value received
● Double Point: intermediate (00) – switching device in intermediate position
● Double Point: Off (01) – switching device open
● Double Point: On (10) – switching device closed
● Double Point: Bad state (11) – switching device in intermediate position
Invalidity Quality bits
Quality criterion, which is to be tested.

● Invalid / Questionable: Invalid / questionable
● Source: Information source is faulty
● Relay test: Sending device is set to test mode
● OperatorBlocked: Blocked by operator
and
● Overflow: Measured value has exceeded its capacity
● OutofRange: Measured value has exceeded its range
● BadReference: Referenced value is faulty
● Oscillatory: Value is volatile
● Failure: Faulty
● OldData: Information is out-of-date
● Inconsistent: Information is unreliable
● Inaccurate: Information is inaccurate
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 9-13

9.8 Report Control Blocks
9.8.1 System/LLN0
Report Parameters Report Type
Report type:
● Unbuffered (updating)
● Buffered (saving)
Report ID TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$RP
$urcbA, ...,
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$RP
$urcbP, ...,
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$BR
$brcbA, ...,
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$BR$brcbH
Report ID consisting of the Device Name and the Report Control Block.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the report.
Revision status of the configuration.
9-14 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

9.9 Controls
9.9.1 Control Objects
Parameter
Control Object ctlModel

Parameters
To control external devices the following operating modes can be set:

● Status only (manually operated switching device)
● Direct control with enhanced security (direct command issue with
extended monitoring of command effecting)
● SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security (switching device
selection procedure with extended monitoring of command effecting)
sboTimeout
Return time period after selection without issuing a command.
9.9.2 Uniqueness of Control
Source Network Multicast MAC Address 01-0C-CD-01-00-00

Parameters
Virtual MAC address used as a receive filter; preset.
ID-number of the GOOSE.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 9-15

GOOSE Source Source Path

Parameters
Information data attribute in the transmitting device.
GOOSE Identifier
ID of the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Configuration revision status of the transmitting device.
Data Obj Index 1
Position index of the data object within the GOOSE.
Default Input Value True
Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed:
● False – not set
● True – set
● Last Known Value – retain last value received
● Double Point: intermediate (00) – switching device in intermediate position
● Double Point: Off (01) – switching device open
● Double Point: On (10) – switching device closed
● Double Point: Bad state (11) – switching device in intermediate position
9-16 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

9.10 Measurements
Parameter
Scaling Unit Multiplier
Multiplication factor; not supported.
Parameter
Range configuration Scaled Measurement Range: Min
Scaled Measurement Range: Max
Lower / Upper measuring range limit value; not supported.
Deadband Deadband 10000

Configuration
Multiplier for the smallest display value of the measured value. In order to have
the current measured value sent when it has changed from the value last sent
the result of the set dead band value multiplied by the smallest display value
must exceed the smallest display value.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 9-17

9.11 Configurable Data Attributes
9.11.1 System/LLN0
Parameter
Mod.measCyc Value
Transmission of measured values: Time interval in seconds between two dead

band evaluations.
Parameter
Mod.enCyc Value
Cyclic transmission of measured values without dead band check: Time interval
in seconds between transmissions of two energy count values.
Parameter
Mod.comtrade Value
Transmission of COMTRADE fault files formatted either as ASCII or binary files.
Parameter
Mod.distExtr Value
Cancelling fault transmission or including it in the configuration.
9-18 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
10 Commissioning
10.1 Safety Instructions
DANGER
⚫ When installing and connecting the device the warning notices at the
beginning of Chapter “Installation and Connection” (Chapter 5) must be
observed.
injury.
DANGER
area.
in operation.
must be employed.
injury.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 10-1

P638 10 Commissioning
DANGER
⚫ The device must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment
grounding requirements.
⚫ The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut,
appropriately marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case
must be grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location
provided. The bracket is marked with the protective ground symbol: .
The cross-section of the ground conductor must conform to applicable
national standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm² (≤ AWG12) is
required.
⚫ In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the
power supply module (identified by the letters “PE” on the terminal
connection diagram) is also required for proper operation of the device.
The cross-section of this ground conductor must also conform to applicable
national standards. A minimum cross section of 1.5 mm² (US: AWG14 or
thicker) is required.
⚫ All grounding connections must be low-inductance, i.e. it must be kept as
short as possible.
⚫ The protective conductor (earth) must always be connected to the
protective grounding conductor terminal in order to guarantee the safety
given by this setup.
injury.
DANGER
⚫ Application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must be in
compliance with the maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs
(see “Technical Data”, Chapter 2).
terminals.
injury.
10-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

10 Commissioning P638
DANGER
injury.
DANGER
⚫ When increased-safety machinery is located in a hazardous area the
device must always be installed outside of this hazardous area to protect
this equipment.
injury.
DANGER
⚫ The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection.
Consequently, the female connector does not have the extra insulation
from circuits connected to the system that is required per IEC/EN
60255-27. Therefore DO NOT leave any permanent cable connection on
the PC interface connector at the HMI front panel.
injury.
DANGER
⚫ Do not connect or disconnect the RS 485 or fiber-optic interface when the
supply voltage for the device is under power and in operation.
injury.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 10-3

WARNING
HAZARD OF UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
⚫ When using the programmable logic (function group LOGIC), the user must
carry out a functional type test to conform to the requirements of the
relevant protection/control application.
⚫ In particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the
implementation of logic linking (by setting) as well as the time
performance during device startup, during operation and when there is a
fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
10-4 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

10.2 Commissioning Tests
10.2.1 Preparation
After the P638 has been installed and connected as described in Chapter 5, (p. 5-
1), the commissioning procedure can begin.
Before turning on the power supply voltage, the following items must be checked
again:
● Is the device connected to the protective ground at the specified location?
● Does the nominal voltage of the battery agree with the nominal auxiliary
voltage of the device?
● Are the current and voltage transformer connections, grounding, and phase
sequences correct?
After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly
isolated. The conditions given in IEC/EN 60255-27 must be satisfied.
Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on.
After voltage has been applied, the device starts up. During startup, various
startup tests are carried out (see Section 3.15, (p. 3-118)). The LED indicators for
HEALTHY (H1) and OUT OF SERVICE (H2) will light up. After approximately 15 s,
the P638 is ready for operation. By default (factory setting) or after a cold restart,
the device type “P638” and the time are displayed on the first line of the LCD
after the device has started up. If a bay type has already been selected this bay
will then be shown as a single-pole display.
Once the change enabling command has been issued (see Section 6.13.3, (p. 6-
39)), all settings can be entered. The procedure for entering settings from the
integrated local control panel is described in Section 6.13.4, (p. 6-42).
First the type of bay wanted is to be set at M A I N : T y p e o f b a y, Par/Conf menu

branch. When the automatic assignment has been enabled at M A I N : A u t o -
a s s i g n m e n t I / O then selecting the type of bay will automatically configure binary
signal inputs and output relays according to the definitions corresponding to the
bay type.
After pressing the ENTER key to confirm the setting parameter M A I N : T y p e o f
b a y the signal Bay initialization is displayed on the LCD for a time duration of 20 s.
The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. A control action is not possible
during this time period.
If either the PC interface or the communication interface will be used for setting
the P638 and reading out event records, then the following settings must first be
made from the integrated local control panel.
Par/DvID menu branch:

● D VIC E: De vice pas sword 1
● DV IC E: Devi ce pass word 2
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 10-5

Par/Conf menu branch:

● PC : Bay add ress
● PC : De vice addr e ss
● PC : Bau d rat e
● PC : Pari ty b it
● COMM1: Fu nct ion grou p COMM1
● C O MM 1: General e nable USER
● COMM1: Name of man uf actu rer
● CO MM1: Line idle s tat e
● CO MM1: Baud r ate
● COMM1: Pari ty bit
● C OM M1: Commun icat. protocol
● C OM M1: Octe t comm. addres s
● CO MM1: Oct et addres s A SDU
● C OMM2: Fun ction group COMM2
● COMM2: Ge ne ral e nabl e U SER
● C OMM2: Nam e of m anu factur e r
● COMM2: Line idl e s tate
● COMM2: Baud rate
● COMM2: Parity bit
● COMM2: Octet comm. addres s
● COMM2: Oct et addre ss ASDU
Par/Func/Glob menu branch:

● PC: C omm and blockin g
● PC : Sig./me as.val .block.
● C OM M1: Command block. USER
● CO MM1: Sig./me as .block.USE R
● COMM2: Command bl ock. USER
● COMM2: Sig./me as.block. USER
Instructions on these settings are given in Chapters “Settings” and “Information
and Control Functions”.
The settings given above apply to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol. If
another protocol is being used for the communication interface, additional settings
may be necessary. See Chapter “Settings” for further details.
After the settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out
again before the blocking is cancelled:
10-6 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

● Is the correct bay type configured?

● Does the function assignment of the binary signal inputs agree with the
terminal connection diagram?
● Has the correct operating mode been selected for the binary signal inputs?
● Does the function assignment of the output relays agree with the terminal
connection diagram?
● Has the correct operating mode been selected for the output relays?
● Are the interlocking conditions and the external interlock inputs correctly
configured?
● Have all settings been made correctly?
Now blocking can be cleared as follows (Par/Func/Glob menu branch):
● OUTP: Ou tp.rel .block USER = Yes
● MA IN : P r ot ection e nable d = Yes (= on)
10.2.2 Cyber Security Commission

For Easergy MiCOM 30 without Cyber Security, password is managed and
modified through HMI and Easergy Studio only, as previous password
management (see Section 6.13.9, (p. 6-54)).
For device with Cyber Security, access to some parts of the menu is only possible
with an user authentification after "Log in" with an user name and password. The
user should "Log out" after operation (see Section 3.3.1, (p. 3-5)).
The EcoStruxureTM Cybersecurity Admin Expert (CAE) is used to access to
security functions rights with the security administration role (by default). It
provides:
● User accounts setting.
● Rights and roles management.
● Rights and roles administration.
User accounts setting button gives access to user informations and

authentification tools: you can manage login (user name and password and
arrow password), login attempts, inactivity time etc.).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 10-7

You can associate (add or remove) role(s) to an user account:
You can edit rights (associated Element To Secure (ETS)) for each role:
You can edit Elements To Secure (ETS) by editing permissions, objects and
rights:
10-8 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Set “Network Device List…” to select file to send to the device.
Please, refer to the “Security Administration Tool ” for complete information about
security administration tool.
10.2.3 Testing
When testing trip or close commands configured to standard outputs, the CB must
not be mechanically locked, so that its auxiliary 52a/b contact could operate and
break the DC current. If the CB has to stay locked, tripping or closing circuit has to
be opened by terminal disconnection or test switch. Otherwise there is a high risk
of damaging the P638 output contact.
By using the signals and displays generated by the P638, it is possible to

determine whether the P638 is correctly set and properly interconnected with the
station. Signals are signaled by output relays and LED indicators and entered into
the event memory. In addition, the signals can be checked by selecting the
appropriate signal in the menu tree.
If the user does not wish the circuit breaker to operate during protection testing,
the trip commands can be blocked through MAI N: Trip cmd. block. USER
(Par/Func/Glob menu branch) or an appropriately configured binary signal input.
Furthermore, it is possible to block each trip command separately for testing
purposes. This is implemented using the parameters MAI N: Block . M-trip
USE R, M AI N: Block. R-tri p USER or MA IN: Bl ock. B-t r ip U SER (Par/Func/
Glob menu branch) or through the appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
Selection of the trip command from the integrated local control panel is
password-protected (see Section 6.13.8, (p. 6-53)).
The manual trip command is not executed unless the manual trip is included in the
selection of possible functions to effect a trip (in the configuration of trip
commands).
If the P638 is connected at substation control level, the user is advised to

activate the test mode via MA IN : Tes t mode USE R (Par/Func/Glob menu
branch) or an appropriately configured binary signal input. The telegrams are
then identified accordingly (reason for transmission: test mode).
10.2.4 Checking the Binary Signal Inputs

By selecting the corresponding state signal (Oper/Cycl/Phys menu branch), it is
possible to determine whether the input signal that is present is recognized
correctly by the device. The values displayed have the following meanings:
● "Low": Not energized.
● "High": Energized.
● Without function: No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode selected.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 10-9

10.2.5 Checking the Output Relays

It is possible to trigger the output relays for a settable time period for test
purposes (time setting at OU TP : H ol d-tim e for test in Oper/CtrlTest menu
branch). First select the output relay to be tested (OUTP: Relay assign.
f.t est, Oper/CtrlTest menu branch).
Test triggering then occurs via OUTP: Re l ay tes t (Oper/CtrlTest menu branch).
It is password-protected (see Section 6.13.8, (p. 6-53)).
DANGER
⚫ Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so
that no inadvertent switching operations will take place.
injury.
10.2.6 Checking the Communications Interfaces Signals

When using the IEC 60870‑5‑103, IEC 870‑5‑101 or ILS‑C interface protocols,
each signal generated in the P638 can be transmitted to the connected control
station for test purposes. First select the signal to be tested
(C OM M1: Sel.spontan .s ig.tes t, CO MM2: Sel .spontan.sig.te st, menu
branch Oper/CtrlTest).
The respective signal is transmitted according to CO MM1: Test
spont .sig .st art or C OMM1 : Te st s pont.s ig. en d (or COMM2: Test
spont.sig.st art, COMM2 : Te st s pont.s ig. en d, all in menu branch Oper/
CtrlTest).
Signal generation is password-protected (see Section 6.13.8, (p. 6-53)).
10.2.7 Checking the Transformer Connections

The user can check to make sure connection to the system's current and voltage
transformers involves the correct phase by consulting the operating data
displays for load angle or for active/reactive power in the Oper/Cycl/Data menu
branch. The load angle is only determined if at least 10% of the nominal device
current is flowing.
10.2.8 Checking the Protection Function

Four parameter subsets are stored in the P638, one of which is activated. Before
checking the protective function, the user should determine which parameter
subset is activated. The active parameter subset is displayed at PSS: Act ual
param. subse t (Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
10.2.8.1 Checking Differential Protection

For single-side feed, the fault current characteristic crosses the first knee of the
tripping characteristic of the P638 so that the basic threshold value is always
checked.
10-10 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

DANGER
⚫ Application of analog test values to the measuring inputs must be in
(see Chapter “Technical Data”, Chapter 2).
injury.
The current I to which the P638 responds for single-side feed is calculated as
follows:
I diff > ⋅ I nom,z
I =
kam,z
● z: transformer end a or b
● Idiff>: set operate value
● Inom,z: nominal current of the P638 for transformer end a or b
● kam,z: amplitude-matching factor of transformer end a or b
The differential and restraining currents formed by the P638 are displayed as
measured operating data. They aid in assessing whether the connection of the
P638 to the system current transformers and the setting of the vector group ID
are correct. The tables below give the factors ks which serve to calculate the
differential current for single-side feed. The display of differential and restraining
currents is prevented, however, if they fall below minimum thresholds that can
be set by the user.
Connect the test equipment to the relay via the test block(s) taking care not to
opencircuit any CT secondary. If MMLG type test blocks are used, the live side of
the test plug must be provided with shorting links before it is inserted into the
test block.
Apply a current slightly less than the Idiff> setting to the HV side CT input only
(this CT is usually the input designated as 'end a'). Observe that no trip should
occur, and the red Trip LED remains extinguished.
Ramp up the current until a trip occurs and the Trip LED illuminates.
Record the current at which the relay tripped. The measured current should be
within +/- 10% of the Idiff> setting (relay accuracy 5%, plus test set accuracy
5%).
In evaluating the test results, one should be aware that the P638 will trip as
follows, if a value of Idiff>> or Idiff>>> is exceeded.
● Idiff>> exceeded: Trip regardless of the inrush and overfluxing restraint;
● Idiff>>> exceeded: Trip regardless of the restraining current and regardless
of all other restraints.
10.2.8.2 Checking Transverse Differential Protection

These tests are performed on a per winding basis, depending on whether the
DIF_a, or DIF_b elements are enabled. The tripping sensitivity for the transverse
differential protection of either winding with a single end infeed is given by:
I = I trans> ⋅ I nom,z
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 10-11

● z: transformer end a or b
● Itrans>: set operate value
● Inom,z: nominal current of the P638 for transformer end a or b
First start with winding end a if enabled. Apply a current slightly less than the
Itrans> setting to one phase CT input only. Observe that no trip should occur,
and the red Trip LED remains extinguished.
Ramp up the current until a trip occurs and the Trip LED illuminates.
Record the current at which the relay tripped. The measured current should be
within +/- 10% of the Itrans> setting (relay accuracy 5%, plus test set accuracy
5%).
DANGER
injury.
10.2.8.3 Checking Distance Protection

Before checking the distance protection function, set an adequate pre-fault time
(> 11 periods at nominal voltage) in order to ensure exact synchronization of the
voltage memory.
In order to check the distance protection function the value at DIST: I> PSx
must be exceeded. Commonly, double the operate threshold is used. At the same
time, one needs to take into account that, at low voltages, the load blinding by
the angles DI ST: Bet a 1 PSx and DI ST: Gam ma 1 PSx is reduced.
Furthermore, the signal at the binary signal input configured for MAIN: M. c. b.
trip V EX T must have a logic value of 0 before checking all the distance zones.
DANGER
injury.
10.2.8.3.1 Characteristics
With the P638, a polygonal tripping characteristic is used. Functional testing at
significant fault angles (for example, 0°, line impedance angle, 90°), in each case
at the zone boundary (tripping impedances +5% or -5%), is recommended.
10.2.8.4 Checking Measuring-Circuit Monitoring

The voltage-measuring circuit are monitored. Operation of the monitoring
functions can be observed by selecting the logic state signals MCMON: Meas.
circ. V fault y (Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch). The monitoring signals can also be
10-12 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

entered into the monitoring signal memory and identified by reading out the
monitoring signal memory.
Undervoltage monitoring operates if there is no general starting (the distance
protection starting or the overcurrent protection starting can be avoided by a
zero current supply) and the voltage falls below the operate value.
A trip signal is issued once the set operate delay has elapsed.
10.2.8.5 Checking Definite-time Overcurrent Protection

In order to check definite-time overcurrent protection, appropriate test currents
are applied. If the current exceeds the threshold operate value set at
DT OC1: I > PS x , then the timer stage is started. Once the set delay
DT OC1: tI > PSx has elasped, the P638 issues a trip. The second DTOC stage is
equivalent.
In order to check the instantaneous high-current stage D TOCN: I N>H PSx, an
adequately high current should be added at maximum amplitude after an
appropriate preceding event. Accelerated tripping can only result if the
associated time delay DTOC N: t IN >H P Sx has been set to zero delay.
DTOC1, DTOC2 and DTOCN functions operate in the same manner (DTOC1 and
DTOC2 no instantaneous high-current). By injecting appropriate analog test
values at the current measuring inputs it is possible to check the overcurrent
stages and their associated timer stages.
DANGER
injury.
10.2.8.6 Checking the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection Function

By injecting appropriate analog test values at the current measuring inputs it is
possible to check the overcurrent stages and their associated timer stages (IDMT
function).
DANGER
injury.
Tripping times issued by the inverse-time maximum current protection, and

dependent on the tripping characteristic selected, are given in the table in
section “Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection” (Section 3.26.2, (p. 3-161)).
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 10-13

10.2.8.7 Checking the Thermal Overload Protection Function

By injecting appropriate analog test values it is possible to check the reference
current setting and the associated time delay.
DANGER
injury.
Before the thermal overload protection can be tested the thermal replica must
always be cleared. Clearing the thermal replica is done by short term disabling of
the protection by setting M AIN: P rotecti on e nabled to No (= off) (Par/Func/
Glob menu branch). The actual status of the thermal replica may be read out
from the operating data display at TH ER M: Stat us therm .r eplica (Oper/Cycl/
Data menu branch). The tripping time may be checked:
With the thermal replica cleared an applied test current is abruptly changed from
0 to the value ≥ 0.1·Iref
I
(I )2 - Δϑ0
ref
t = τ · ln Θa - Θa,max
I
(I )2 - Δϑtrip · (1 - Θ )
ref max - Θa,max
10.2.8.8 Checking the Time-Voltage Protection Function

In order to check the voltage-time protection function, appropriate test voltages
are applied. If the voltage exceeds the set operate value V<>: V> PSx or falls
below the set operate value V <>: V< PSx then the associated timer stage is
started. Once the set time delay V<>: tV > P Sx or V<>: tV < PSx has
elapsed, the P638 issues a trip. The second stage of the V<> function operates
in the same manner. If using the window function for the undervoltage is used,
the voltage must not fall below the set minimum value V<>: Vmin PSx .
DANGER
injury.
10.2.9 Checking Control Functions

The selected bay type is displayed on the Bay Panel. The selection of the Bay
Panel is described in the Chapter 6. The current switching state of the switchgear
units is displayed on the Bay Panel if state signals from such switching devices
are connected properly to binary signal inputs on the P638. Should the switching
state not be displayed correctly then it can be determined by checking the
10-14 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

physical state of binary signal inputs whether the state signals are presented
correctly to the P638 (check at parameter INP: State U xxx, Oper/Cycl/Phys
menu branch).
10.2.9.1 Local/Remote Selection

Controlling switchgear units may be carried out from keys on the local control
panel, remotely via the communication interface or through appropriately
configured binary signal inputs. The control site – Local or Remote – is selected
by the L/R key on the local control panel or by an appropriately configured binary
signal input. The L/R key has no effect when a binary signal input has been
configured. Using the L/R key on the local control panel to switch from “Remote”
to “Local” is only possible after the “Password L/R” was entered (see
Chapter “Local Control Panel” for further information). The Bay Panel display will
show which control site has been selected.
10.2.9.2 Local Control

The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected by pressing the selection key on
the local control panel, and pressing the “Open” or “Close” key will generate a
switching request. When control is carried out with binary signal inputs the
respective binary signal input is to be triggered.
10.2.9.3 Remote Control

Remote control of switchgear units may be carried out via the communication
interface or with appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
10.2.9.4 Switchgear Unit Cannot Be Controlled

Should a switchgear unit refuse to be controlled, then this may be due to the
following reasons:
● General enable for switch commands has not been set.
(Configuration at MA IN: In p.as g. ct rl.e nabl., Par/Func/Glob menu
branch)
● Interlocking has operated.
(Check at MAI N: I nterlock e qu . viol ., Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
● Only with bays for direct motor control:
The motor protection has operated.
(Check at parameter MA IN: Mon. mot. dri ve s t r., Oper/Cycl/Log menu
branch)
Which interlock(s) is(are) activated may be checked at:
● Bay interlock (BI): MA IN: Bay i nte rlock. act ., Oper/Cycl/Log menu
branch
● Substation interlock (SI): MAI N: Subs t. i nte rl. act., Oper/Cycl/Log menu
branch
● With control set to “Local”:
It is possible to deactivate the interlock through an appropriately
(Configuration at MAI N: Inp.asg.i nterl. de act, Par/Func/Glob menu
branch)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 10-15

A substation interlock is only effective when a communication link exists from the
communication interface to the substation control level. If the communication link
is disrupted then the device switches automatically to bay interlock (BI) without
substation interlock (SI). Whether or not a communication error is present can be
checked at M A I N : C o m m u n i c a t i o n e r r o r (Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
The substation interlock (SI) can be deactivated selectively for any switchgear unit
and in any control direction – “Open” or “Close”. (Check – e.g. for DEV01 – at
D E V 0 1 : O p e n w / o s t a t . i n t e r l or D E V 0 1 : C l o s e w / o s t a t . i n t . (Par/Func/
Cont menu branch).
10.2.10 Completing Commissioning

Before the P638 is released for operation, the user should make sure that the
following steps have been taken:
● (Reset at MAI N: Ge ne ral r e se t U SER (password-protected) and
MT_RC : Rese t record. USE R, both in Oper/CtrlTest menu branch.)
● Blocking of output relays has been cancelled.
(OUTP: Out p.rel .block USER, Par/Func/Glob menu branch, setting No.)
● Blocking of the trip command has been cancelled.
(M AI N: Trip cmd.bl ock. USER, Par/Func/Glob menu branch, setting No.)
● The device is on-line.
(MA IN : Pr ote ct ion en abl e d, Par/Func/Glob menu branch, setting Yes (=
on).)
● Measuring-circuit monitoring is enabled – if it was previously cancelled for
testing purposes.
(M CMON: Ge ne ral en able USER, Par/Func/Gen menu branch, setting
Yes)
● The correct control point – Local or Remote – has been activated.
● The required interlock equations have been activated.
After completion of commissioning, only the green LED indicator signaling
“HEALTHY” (H1) should be on.
10-16 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
11 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes problems that might be encountered, their causes, and
possible methods for eliminating them. It is intended as a general orientation
only, and in cases of doubt it is better to return the P638 to the manufacturer.
Please follow the packaging instructions in Section 5.1, (p. 5-4) when returning
equipment to the manufacturer.
DANGER
⚫ Before checking further, disconnect the P638 from the power supply.
⚫ Switch off all the power supplies in connection to the equipment to isolate
the device.
injury.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
WARNING
Problem
● Lines of text are not displayed on the local control panel.
o Check to see whether there is supply voltage at the device connection
points.
o Check to see whether the magnitude of the auxiliary voltage is correct.
The P638 is protected against damage resulting from polarity reversal.
● The P638 issues an “Alarm” signal on LED H 3.
o Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal
memory (see Section 6.13.6.2, (p. 6-49)). The table below lists possible
monitoring or warning indication (provided that a configuration setting
has been entered at SFMON: Fct. ass ign. warning), the faulty area,
the P638's response, and the mode of the output relay configured for
“Warning” and “Blocked/faulty”.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 11-1

P638 11 Troubleshooting
Key
● –: No reaction and/or no output relay triggered.
● Yes: The corresponding output relay is triggered.
● Updating: The output relay configured for 'Warning' starts only if the
monitoring signal is still present.
Parameter Address
Self-monitoring SFMO N: F ct . as s ign. war ning 021 030
[spacer] SFMO N: M on. s ig. r et e ntion 021 018
11-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

11 Troubleshooting P638
Parameter Address
Self-monitoring SFMO N: C B faulty E X T 098 072
[spacer]
The external input MAIN: C B faulty 1 E XT or M AI N: CB faulty 2 EXT
has become active.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: W arning (LE D) 036 070
[spacer]
Warning configured for LED H3.
[spacer] SFMO N: W arning (re lay ) 036 100
[spacer]
Warning configured for an output relay.
[spacer] SFMO N: W arm re start e x ec. 041 202
[spacer]
A warm restart has been carried out.
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re star t exe c. 041 201
[spacer]
A cold restart has been carried out.
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re star t 093 024
[spacer]
A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the
memory (NOVRAM).
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re st./ SW update 093 025
[spacer]
A cold restart has been carried out following a software update.
[spacer] SFMO N: B lockin g /HW fail ure 090 019
[spacer]
Supplementary warning that this device is blocked.
“Warning” output relay: Updating
[spacer] SFMO N: R elay Kxx faulty 041 200
[spacer]
Multiple signal: output relay defective.
'Warning' output relay: Updating
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 11-3

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: Hardware clock fail. 093 040
[spacer]
The hardware clock has failed.
[spacer] SFMO N: B at te ry failure 090 010
[spacer]
Battery voltage too low. Replace battery.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW d.loade d 096 121
[spacer]
Wrong or invalid software has been downloaded.
[spacer]
The +15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
[spacer]
The +24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
[spacer] SFMO N: - 15V s upply faulty 093 080
[spacer]
The −15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
11-4 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer]
Module in wrong slot.
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong module D ig.Bus 096 123
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong digital bus. Since this is checked using
the module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade
to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong module HM I 096 124
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong HMI. Since this is checked using the
module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade to a
version that is not compatible with the hardware.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 11-5

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong m odul e Comm 096 125
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong communication module. Since this is
checked using the module variant number this signal can also occur after a
firmware upgrade to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong m odule Ana. Bus 096 126
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong analog bus. Since this is checked using
the module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade
to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
[spacer]
Defective module in slot x.
11-6 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule A DP R fault y 093 070
[spacer]
Dual-Port-RAM fault on communication module A. This fault is only detected
during device startup.
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule A RAM fault y 093 071
[spacer]
RAM fault on communication module A.
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule Y DP R fault y 093 110
[spacer]
The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the data
transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule Y RAM fault y 093 111
[spacer]
Fault in the program or data memory of the analog I/O module.
[spacer] SFMO N: I RIGB faulty 093 117
[spacer]
The IRIGB interface is enabled but there is no plausible input signal.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 11-7

Parameter Address
11-8 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer]
Output relay K xxx defective.
[spacer] SFMO N: U nd ef . ope r at. code 093 010
[spacer]
Undefined operation code.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 11-9

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: Abnormal te rmi nation 093 030
[spacer]
The application has been terminated in an unexpected way. If this error occurs
during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is
blocked.
[spacer] SFMO N: B ad arg. s ys t em call 093 031
[spacer]
Invalid parameter when calling a function of the operating system. If this error
occurs during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the
device is blocked.
[spacer] SFMO N: M ute x de adloc k 093 032
[spacer]
Software threads are locked from each other by mutex. If this error occurs
during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is
blocked.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid memory ref. 093 033
[spacer]
Attempt to access an invalid memory segment. If this error occurs during a
(re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is blocked.
[spacer] SFMO N: U ne xpe ct e d e xc ept ion 093 034
[spacer]
Miscellaneous error message from the processor or operating system. If this
error occurs during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and
the device is blocked.
11-10 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid ar ithm. op. 093 011
[spacer]
Invalid arithmetic operation.
[spacer] SFMO N: U nd ef ined i nter rupt 093 012
[spacer]
Undefined interrupt.
[spacer] SFMO N: E x ce pt ion oper .s ys t . 093 013
[spacer]
Interrupt of the operating system.
[spacer] SFMO N: Pr ote ction f ailure 090 021
[spacer]
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routines. It has detected
an error.
[spacer] SFMO N: C he ck s um error param 090 003
[spacer]
A checksum error involving the parameters in the memory (NOVRAM) has been
detected.
[spacer] SFMO N: C lock sync. e rror 093 041
[spacer]
In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between the
time of day given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is greater than
10 ms.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 11-11

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: I nt e rm.volt .fail.RAM 093 026
[spacer]
Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the processor
module or the power supply module is removed from the bus module (digital).
This fault is only detected during device startup. After the fault is detected, the
software initializes the RAM. This means that all records are deleted.
[spacer] SFMO N: O ve rflow MT_RC 090 012
[spacer]
Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow.
[spacer] SFMO N: C he ck s um DM OD 093 023
[spacer]
A checksum that was calculated from the data model in the memory of the
device yielded a wrong result. If this error occurs during a (re-)start of the device
then this message is displayed and the device is blocked.
[spacer] SFMO N: S em aph. M T_RC block . 093 015
[spacer]
Software overloaded.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid type of bay 096 122
[spacer]
If the user has selected a bay type that requires a P638 hardware configuration
that is not actually fitted, then this signal is generated.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nval. S W ve r s .C OMM1 093 075
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid communication software has been downloaded.
11-12 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: I nval. C onfig. I EC 093 079
[spacer]
Invalid parameters in the IEC configuration.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW ver s. Y 093 113
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid software for analog I/O module Y has been downloaded.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nom not adjust able 093 118
[spacer]
Transformer module T is not suitable for setting Inom.
[spacer] SFMO N: T im e -out module Y 093 112
[spacer]
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic status signal of the analog I/O module Y. It
has detected an error.
[spacer] SFMO N: M .c.b. trip V 098 000
[spacer]
The line-side voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped.
Device reaction: Blocking of the short-circuit direction determination.
[spacer]
The set value Rg is too high and no closed tripping characteristic can be
determined.
[spacer] SFMO N: U nd er volt age 098 009
[spacer]
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected an undervoltage.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 11-13

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: M atching fail. end a 098 031
[spacer]
The matching factor is not in the range 0.5 ≤ kam,a ≤ 16.0.
[spacer] SFMO N: M atching fail. e nd b 098 032
[spacer]
The matching factor is not in the range 0.5 ≤ kam,b ≤ 16.0.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW ver s DHMI 093 145
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid software was loaded to operate the detachable display
(DHMI).
[spacer] SFMO N: C T A error 098 034
[spacer]
Measurement of the coolant temperature via the analog module is faulty.
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror THE RM 098 035
[spacer]
Invalid parameters in the setting for the thermal replica.
Device reaction: Blocking of thermal overload protection.
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror CB M 098 020
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror CB M _2 098 078
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for circuit breaker monitoring.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault.
[spacer] SFMO N: C B No. C B op. > 098 066
[spacer] SFMO N: C B 2 No. CB op. > 098 079
[spacer]
The maximum number of CB operations performed has been exceeded.
[spacer] SFMO N: C B rem . No. C B op. < 098 067
11-14 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: C B 2 rem. No. C B op.< 098 085
[spacer]
The minimum number of CB operations performed at nominal current has fallen
below the threshold.
[spacer] SFMO N: C B ΣI trip > 098 068
[spacer] SFMO N: C B 2 ΣI trip > 098 086
[spacer]
The maximum sum of disconnection current values has been exceeded.
[spacer] SFMO N: C B ΣI trip**2 > 098 069
[spacer] SFMO N: C B 2 ΣI trip**2 > 098 087
[spacer]
The maximum sum of the disconnection current values to the second power has
been exceeded.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng BCD 093 124
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for the BCD output channel of analog I/O
module Y.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault detected.
[spacer] SFMO N: C B tm ax> A 098 070
[spacer] SFMO N: C B tm ax> B 098 071
[spacer] SFMO N: C B 2 t max > A 098 088
[spacer]
The maximum duration for the opening of a CB pole has been exceeded.
Disconnection is not determined for this CB pole.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 11-15

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scaling A- 2 093 115
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels of
analog I/O module Y.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng IDC 093 116
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for the analog input channel of analog I/O
module Y.
[spacer] SFMO N: PT 100 open c ir cuit 098 024
[spacer]
The P638 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance
thermometer “PT100” to the analog I/O module Y.
[spacer] SFMO N: O ve rload 20 mA input 098 025
[spacer]
The 20 mA input of analog I/O module Y is overloaded.
[spacer] SFMO N: O pe n circ. 20 mA inp. 098 026
[spacer]
The P638 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input.
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror f<> 098 028
[spacer]
The over-/underfrequency protection function has been set for “overfrequency”
monitoring (based on the settings for operate value and nominal frequency).
This setting is not valid in the f w. Delta f/Delta t operating mode.
Device reaction: Blocking of the over-/under frequency protection function
11-16 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: I nv.inp.f.cloc k sy nc 093 120
[spacer]
The function was configured to a binary signal input on the analog I/O module Y.
Such a configuration is not permitted for this function.
[spacer]
These LOGIC outputs can be included in the list of warning signals by selection
at S FMON: Fct. ass ign. warning. The warning signals are also recorded
in the monitoring signal memory.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 11-17

11-18 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
12 Maintenance
DANGER
or later version) and appropriate Chapter5, Chapter 10, Chapter 11,
injury.
The P638 is a low-maintenance device. The components used in the units are
selected to meet exacting requirements. Recalibration is not necessary.
WARNING
⚫ Before cleaning the equipment ensure that all ac and dc supplies, current
transformer and voltage transformer connections are isolated to prevent
any chance of an electric shock whilst cleaning.
⚫ The equipment may be cleaned using a lint-free cloth moistened with
clean water. The use of detergents, solvents or abrasive cleaners is not
recommended as they may damage the relay’s surface and leave a
conductive residue.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 12-1

P638 12 Maintenance
12.1 Maintenance Procedures in the Power Supply Area

Replacement of the power supply module must be carried out by trained
personnel, and the power supply voltage must be turned off while the work is
being performed.
DANGER
⚫ Always disconnect the device from the auxiliary power supply, before
removing any hardware module.
⚫ Switch off all the power supplies in connection to the equipment to isolate
the device, before removing any hardware module.
injury.
DANGER
injury.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
WARNING
In general, the electronic components used for the device family Easergy MiCOM
30 are designed for a long service life.
For the power supply, however, dimensioning requirements dictate the use of
electrolytic capacitors that are subject to increased wear and tear. The useful life
of these capacitors depends on their temperature and thus on the components
fitted in the device, the load conditions, device location and environmental
conditions.
The internal voltage levels are cyclically checked by the P30 self-monitoring
functions. In case the voltage levels deviate from their specified values a warning
message will be issued or, for persistent problems, the device will be set to a
safe condition (blocking).
12-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

12 Maintenance P638
Moreover, the power supply module of the P638 is equipped with a lithium
battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for keeping the internal clock
running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply. The useful life of the
lithium battery depends on the auxiliary power supply of the device.
● If the P638 is continuously connected to the auxiliary power supply, then
there is no discharging of the battery, and the battery will thus not be
depleted during its service life.
● Should the P638 be disconnected from the auxiliary power supply for
several years, then the battery capacity would decrease.
During normal operation, the battery voltage is monitored. If the voltage falls
below a pre-defined threshold, a warning message will be issued and the battery
has to be replaced.
After the maintenance procedures described above have been completed, new
commissioning tests as described in Section 10.2, (p. 10-5) must be carried out.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 12-3

P638 12 Maintenance
12.2 Routine Functional Testing

The P638 is used as a safety device and must therefore be routinely injection
tested for proper operation. Functional tests should be carried out according to
the Operator instruction and maintenance plan. We recommend to perform the
functional tests at intervals of 2 to 4 years. This interval can be extended to 6
years if a functional check is performed at least 3 years after the last functional
test.
The P638 incorporates in its system a very extensive self-monitoring function for
hardware and software. The internal structure guarantees, for example, that
communication within the processor system will be checked on a continuing
basis.
Nonetheless, there are a number of subfunctions that cannot be checked by the
self-monitoring feature without injection testing from the device terminals. The
respective device-specific properties and settings must be observed in such
cases.
In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits that are run to the device
from the outside are checked by the self-monitoring function.
12-4 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

12 Maintenance P638
12.3 Analog Input Circuits

The analog inputs are fed through an analog preprocessing feature (anti-aliasing
filtering) to a common analog-to-digital converter. In conjunction with the self-
monitoring function, the CT/VT supervision function that is available for the
device’s general functions can detect deviations in many cases. However, it is
still necessary to test from the device terminals in order to make sure that the
analog measuring circuits are functioning correctly.
The best way to carry out a static test of the analog input circuits is to check the
primary measured operating data using the operating data measurement
function or to use a suitable testing instrument. A “small” measured value (such
as the nominal current in the current path) and a “large” measured value (such
as the nominal voltage in the voltage path) should be used to check the
measuring range of the A/D converter. This makes it possible to check the entire
dynamic range.
The accuracy of operating data measurement is <1%. An important factor in
evaluating device performance is long-term performance based on comparison
with previous measurements.
In addition, a dynamic test can be used to check transmission performance and
the phase relation of the current transformers and the anti-aliasing filter. This
can best be done by measuring the trigger point of the first zone when there is a
two-phase ungrounded fault. For this test, the value of the short-circuit current
should be such that a loop voltage of approximately 2 V is obtained at the
device's terminals with the set impedance. Furthermore, a suitable testing
instrument that correctly replicates the two-phase ungrounded fault should be
used for this purpose.
Additional analog testing of such factors as the impedance characteristic or the
starting characteristic is not necessary, in our opinion, since information
processing is completely digital and is based on the measured analog current
and voltage values. Proper operation was checked in conjunction with type
testing.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 12-5

P638 12 Maintenance
12.4 Binary Opto Inputs

The binary inputs are not checked by the self-monitoring function. However, a
testing function is integrated into the software so that the trigger state of each
input can be read out (Oper/Cycl/Phys menu branch). This check should be
performed for each input being used and can be done, if necessary, without
disconnecting any device wiring.
12-6 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

12 Maintenance P638
12.5 Binary Outputs

With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes
even two-phase triggering of the relay coils of all the relays. There is no
monitoring function for the external contact circuit. In this case, the all-or-nothing
relays must be triggered by way of device functions or integrated test functions.
For these testing purposes, triggering of the output circuits is integrated into the
software through a special control function (Oper/CtrlTest menu branch).
DANGER
⚫ Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so
that no inadvertent switching operations will take place.
injury.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 12-7

P638 12 Maintenance
12.6 Communication Interfaces

The integrated self-monitoring function for the PC or communication interface
also includes the communication module. The complete communication system,
including connecting link and fiber-optic module (if applicable), is always totally
monitored as long as a link is established through the control program or the
communication protocol.
12-8 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
13 Storage
Devices must be stored in a dry and clean environment. A temperature range of
-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F) must be maintained during storage (see
chapter entitled “Technical Data”). The relative humidity must be controlled so
that neither condensation nor ice formation will result.
If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the
electrolytic capacitors in the power supply area need to be recharged every
4 years. Recharge the capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P638 for
approximately 10 minutes.
If the units are stored during a longer time, the battery of the power supply
module is used for the continuous buffering of the event data in the working
memory of the processor module. Therefore the battery is permanently required
and discharges over time. In order to avoid this continuous discharge, it is
recommended to remove the power supply module from the mounting rack
during long storage periods. The contents of the event memory should be
previously read out and stored separately!
WARNING
⚫ Do not sustain exposure to high humidity during storage, the value shall
not exceed 75% relative humidity.
⚫ Once the device has been unpacked, it is recommended to energize it
within the three following months.
⚫ The device has to be energized at least once in 4 years, if it is not in
permanent operation.
⚫ Where electrical equipment is being installed, sufficient time should be
allowed for acclimatization to the ambient temperature of the environment
before energization.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 13-1

P638 13 Storage
13-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
14 Accessories and Spare Parts

The P638 is supplied with standard labeling for the LED indicators. LED indicators
that are not already configured and labeled can be labeled using the label strips
supplied. Affix the label strips to the front of the unit at the appropriate location.
The label strips can be filled in using a “Stabilo” brand pen containing water-
resistant ink (Type OH Pen 196 PS).
Description Order No.
Cable bushings 88512‑4‑0337414‑301
Resistor 200 Ω 255.002.696
84 TE frame 88512‑4‑9650723‑301
Operating program for Windows On request (Easergy Studio) or can be

downloaded from SE website
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 14-1

P638 14 Accessories and Spare Parts
14-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
15 Order Information
Basic Configuration Variants
Order options MiCOM P638

Transformer Differential Protection Device
P638- 9 0 1 -304 -4xx -661 -46x -9x x -8xx
for Railway Applications
Basic device:
Basic device 40TE, pin-terminal connection, 3 -407
Basic device 84TE, pin-terminal connection, 7 -408
Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, 8 -409
basic complement with 4 binary inputs, 8 output relays
and 6 function keys
Mounting option and display:

Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display 3
Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display 4
13)
Surface-mounted, local control panel with graphic display 5
13)
Flush-mounted, local control panel with graphic display 6
Current transformer:
2)
Inom = 1 A/ 5 A (T11;T13 / T21;23 / T4) 9
Voltage transformer:
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (1-pole) 1
26)
Additional binary I/O options:
14)
Without 0
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays) 1
With 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 16 output relays) 2
5)
5) 29)
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 6 output relays (2-pole)) 5
for the control of up to 3 additional switchgear units
15)
for the control of up to 6 additional switchgear units
for the control of up to 3 switchgear units
and 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays)
5) 15)
With 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 12 output relays (2-pole)) 9
and 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays)
5) 15) 29)
With 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 12 output relays (2-pole)) A
and 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 16 output relays)
5)
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 6 output relays (2-pole)) B
5) 15) 29)
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 6 output relays (2-pole)) C
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 15-1

P638 15 Order Information
Further Options

P638- 9 0 1 -304 -4xx -661 -46x -9x x -8xx
Power supply and additional binary I/O options:
VA , nom = 24 … 60 VDC E
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC F
VA,nom = 24 ... 60 VDC and 6 output relays G
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays H
VA , nom = 24 … 60 VDC and 6 binary inputs and 3 output relays J
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC K
and 6 binary inputs and 3 output relays
VA , nom = 24 … 60 VDC and 4 high break contacts L
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 4 high break contacts M
Further add. options:

Without 0
With analog module 2
With binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) 4
3) 24) A
With analog and binary module (add. 24 binary inputs)
Switching threshold on binary inputs:

8)
Standard variant with switching threshold at 65% of 24 VDC (VA,min) Without order extension No.
8)
Special variant with switching threshold at 65% of 127 VDC (VA,nom) -461
8)
8)
8)
15-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

15 Order Information P638
Communication Options

P638- 9 0 1 -304 -4xx -661 -46x -9x x -8xx
With communication / information interface:
Without Without order extension No.
Protocol can be switched between: -92
IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
For connection to wire, RS485, isolated 1
For connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector 2
For connection to glass fiber, ST connector 4
Ethernet Board 2, Protocol IEC 61850 Ed. 1 or 2 (switchable)

without Cyber Security compatibility -97
(28)
with Cyber Security compatibility -99
Single connection, wire RJ45 1

Single connection, glass fiber LC 2
and 2nd 100 Mbit/s Ethernet service interface, wire RJ45
Redundant connection, wire RJ45, RSTP/ HSR/ PRP (switchable) 3

Redundant connection, glass fiber LC, RSTP/ HSR/ PRP (switchable) 4
Language:
4)
English (German) Without order extension No.
4)
German (English) -801
4)
French (English) Not yet available - on request -802
4)
Spanish (English) Not yet available - on request -803
Key
2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined!
4) Second included language in brackets.
5) For 84TE version only.
8) Standard variant recommended if higher pickup threshold not explicitly required
by the application.
13) Graphic display with minimum of one binary module (6 binary inputs and 6
output relays) only.
15) Option with graphic display only.
24) Analog module on Slot 3/8 and add. 24 binary module on Slot 8/16 (40/84TE).
26) Maximum 2 binary input/ output boards for 40TE version and max 4 for 84TE
version in total.
27) BI6 BO6 for 84TE version on slot 12+14.
28) According BDEW / NERC / IEEE 1686.
29) This option is excluded when BI24 is ordered.
Information about Ordering Options

Binary Inputs' Switching Threshold
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 15-3

P638 15 Order Information
The standard version of binary signal inputs (opto-couplers) is recommended in

most applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 18 V. Special
versions with higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds (see also “Technical Data”,
Chapter 2, (p. 2-1)) are provided for applications where a higher switching
threshold is expressly required.
15-4 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
A1 Function Groups
CBF_1 Circuit breaker failure protection
CBF_2 Circuit breaker failure protection
CBM_1
CBM_2
CMD_1 Single-pole commands
COMM1 “Logical” communication interface 1
COMM2 “Logical” communication interface 2
COUNT Binary counts
CS Cyber Security
DEV01 External device
DIF_a Transverse differential protectionTransverse differential protec‐

tion
DIF_b Transverse differential protection
DIFF Differential protection
DIST Distance protection
DTOC1 Definite-time overcurrent protection
DTOC2 Definite-time overcurrent protection
DTOCN Definite-time overcurrent protection
DVICE Device
F_KEY Configurable function keys
f<> Over-/underfrequency protection
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A1-1

P638 A1 Function Groups
FT_DA Fault data acquisition
FT_RC Fault recording
GOOSE Generic Object Orientated Substation Events
IDMT Inverse-time overcurrent protection
IEC IEC 61850 Communication
ILOCK Interlocking logic
INP Binary input
IRIGB IRIG‑B interface
LED LED indicators
LIMIT Limit value monitoring
LOC Local control panel
LOG_2 Programmable Logic
LOGIC Programmable Logic
MAIN Main function
MCMON Measuring-circuit monitoring
MEASI Measured data input
MEASO Measured data output
MT_RC Monitoring signal recording
OL_DA Overload data acquisition
OL_RC Overload recording
OP_RC Operating data recording
OUTP Binary and analog output
PC PC link
PSS Parameter subset selection
SFMON Self-monitoring
SIG_1 Single-pole signals
THERM Thermal overload protection
TIMER Real Timer
V<> Time-voltage protection
A1-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
A2 Internal Signals
COMM1: Close request DEV01 Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-239)
COMM1: Communication error Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-22)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-24)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-25)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-26)
Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-27)
COMM1: Count 1 Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-264)
COMM1: Debounced signal Fig. 3-203, (p. 3-259)
COMM1: Motor rel. mon. trg. Fig. 3-197, (p. 3-250)
COMM1: Open request DEV01 Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-239)
COMM1: Selected protocol Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-21)
COMM1: Signal S001,log Fig. 3-202, (p. 3-258)
DEV01: Close cmd blocked Fig. 3-191, (p. 3-242)
DEV01: Close request Fig. 3-186, (p. 3-237)
DEV01: Enable SI Close Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-239)
DEV01: Enable SI Open Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-239)
DEV01: End close command Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-244)
DEV01: End open command Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-244)
DEV01: Latching time elaps. Fig. 3-186, (p. 3-237)
DEV01: Latching time runn. Fig. 3-186, (p. 3-237)
DEV01: Open cmd blocked Fig. 3-191, (p. 3-242)
DEV01: Open request Fig. 3-186, (p. 3-237)
DEV01: Protect. close cmd. Fig. 3-189, (p. 3-240)
DEV01: Protection trip cmd. Fig. 3-189, (p. 3-240)
DEV01: Start runn.time mon. Fig. 3-197, (p. 3-250)
DEV01: Switch. device runn. Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-244)
DIFF: I(2⋅f0),1 Fig. 3-100, (p. 3-145)
DIFF: I(2⋅f0),2 Fig. 3-100, (p. 3-145)
DIFF: Int. rush stab. trig Fig. 3-100, (p. 3-145)
DIST: Blocking Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A2-1

P638 A2 Internal Signals
f<>: fMeas Fig. 3-57, (p. 3-94)
f<>: No. periods reached Fig. 3-57, (p. 3-94)
f<>: V̲Meas Fig. 3-57, (p. 3-94)
FT_RC: Fault recording n Fig. 3-93, (p. 3-135)
I̲am,A,a Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-139)
I̲am,A,b Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-139)
I̲am,C,a Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-139)
I̲am,C,b Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-139)
INP: Fct. assignm. U xxx Fig. 3-32, (p. 3-58)

Fig. 3-42, (p. 3-68)
Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-93)
Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-117)
Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-221)
Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-227)
INP: Oper. mode U xxx Fig. 3-32, (p. 3-58)
INP: State U xxx Fig. 3-32, (p. 3-58)
I̲s,1,a Fig. 3-97, (p. 3-141)
I̲s,1,b Fig. 3-97, (p. 3-141)
I̲s,2,a Fig. 3-97, (p. 3-141)
I̲s,2,b Fig. 3-97, (p. 3-141)
LED: Fct.assig. Hxx red Fig. 3-48, (p. 3-83)
LED: Oper. mode H xx Fig. 3-48, (p. 3-83)
LED: State Hxx red Fig. 3-48, (p. 3-83)
LOC: Remote&local control Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-17)
LOC: Return t.select. trg Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-11)

Fig. 3-4, (p. 3-11)
MAIN: Blck.1 sel.functions Fig. 3-59, (p. 3-96)
MAIN: Blck.2 sel.functions Fig. 3-59, (p. 3-96)
MAIN: End command Fig. 3-197, (p. 3-250)
MAIN: Protection active Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-93)
MAIN: Reset LED Fig. 3-76, (p. 3-113)
MAIN: Time tag Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-109)
MCMON: V< triggered Fig. 3-137, (p. 3-182)
A2-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

A2 Internal Signals P638
MEASO: Enable Fig. 3-42, (p. 3-68)
MEASO: Output value x Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-77)
MEASO: Reset meas.val.outp. Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-69)
OUTP: Fct.assignment K xxx Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-66)

Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-77)
Fig. 3-201, (p. 3-256)
OUTP: Oper. mode K xxx Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-66)
Signal 1 EXT Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-227)
Signal 2 EXT Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-227)
THERM: Block. by CTA error Fig. 3-141, (p. 3-186)
THERM: With CTA Fig. 3-141, (p. 3-186)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A2-3

P638 A2 Internal Signals
A2-4 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
A3 Glossary
Modules
A: Communication module
B: Digital bus module
L: MMI module
P: Processor module
T: Transformer module
V: Power supply module
X: Binary I/O module
Y: Analog I/O module
Symbols
Graphic symbols for block diagrams

Binary elements in compliance with DIN 40900 part 12, September 1992,
IEC 617-12: modified 1991
Analog information processing in compliance with DIN 40900 part 13, January
1981. To document the linking of analog and binary signals, additional symbols
have been used, taken from several DIN documents.
As a rule, direction of the signal flow is from left to right and from top to bottom.
Other flow directions are marked by an arrow. Input signals are listed on the left
side of the signal flow, output signals on the right side.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A3-1

P638 A3 Glossary
Symbol Description
To obtain more space for representing a group of related

elements, contours of the elements may be joined or cascaded if
the following rules are met:
There is no functional linkage between elements whose common
= contour line is oriented in the signal flow direction.
Note:
This rule does not necessarily apply to configurations with two or
more signal flow directions, such as for symbols with a control
D5Z08X1B block and an output block.
There exists at least one logical link between elements whose
common contour line runs perpendicularly to the signal flow
direction.
Components of a symbol
A symbol consists of a contour or contour combination and one or
more qualifiers.
Description of the example symbol in the left column

● Blue line: Contur
● Dark red lines: Inputs
● Green lines: Outputs
D5Z08X2B ● Green hash characters: Preferred location for the general
function qualifying symbol
● Dark blue asterisk characters: Alternative location for the
general function qualifying symbol
Control block
A control block contains an input function common to several
symbols. It is used for the collective setting of several trigger
elements, for example.
D5Z08X3B
Output block
An output block contains an output function common to several
symbols.
D5Z08X4B
A3-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

A3 Glossary P638
Settable control block
MAIN:
The 6 digits in square brackets represent the address under
Test mode USER
[ 003 012 ] which the function shown in the text is implemented.
D5Z08X5B
Settable control block with function blocks

MAIN:
Test mode USER
The digits in the function block show the settings that are
[ 003 012 ]
possible for this function.
0
1
The text below the symbol assigns the corresponding unit or
0: No meaning to each setting.
1: Yes
D5Z08X6B
Static input
Only the state of the binary input variable is effective.
D5Z08XBB
Dynamic input
Only the transition from value 0 to value 1 is effective.
D5Z08XAB
Negation of an output
The value up to the border line is negated at the output.
D5Z08X8B
Negation of an input
The input value is negated before the border line.
D5Z08X7B
Dynamic input with negation

Only the transition from value 1 to value 0 is effective.
D5Z08X9B
AND element
& The output variable will be 1 only if all input variables are 1.
D5Z08XCB
OR element
The output variable will be 1 only if at least one input variable is
D5Z08XDB 1.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A3-3

P638 A3 Glossary
Threshold element
The output variable will be 1 only if at least two input variables
D5Z08XEB are 1. The number in the symbol may be replaced by any other
number.
(m out of n) element
The output variable will be 1 only if just one input variable is 1.
D5Z08XFB
The number in the symbol may be replaced by any other number
if the number of inputs is increased or decreased accordingly.
Delay element
t1 t2
The transition from value 0 to 1 at the output occurs after a time
D5Z08XGB delay of t1 relative to the corresponding transition at the input.
The transition from value 1 to 0 at the output occurs after a time
delay of t2 relative to the corresponding transition at the input.
t1 and t2 may be replaced by the actual delay values (in seconds
or strobe ticks).
Monostable flip-flop
1 The output variable will be 1 only if the input variable changes to
100ms
D5Z08XHB 1. The output variable will remain 1 for 100 ms, regardless of the
duration of the input value 1 (non-retriggerable).
Without a 1 in the function block, the monostable flip-flop is
retriggerable.
The time is 100 ms in this example, but it may be changed to any
other duration.
Analog-digital converter
An analog input signal is converted to a binary signal.
D5Z08XJB
Subtractor
The output variable is the difference between the two input
D5Z08XKB variables.
A summing element is obtained by changing the minus sign to
a plus sign at the symbol input.
Schmitt Trigger with binary output signal

The binary output variable will be 1 if the input signal exceeds a
D5Z08XLB specific threshold. The output variable remains 1 until the input
signal drops below the threshold again.
Memory, general
Storage of a binary or analog signal.
D5Z08XMB
A3-4 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

A3 Glossary P638
Non-stable flip-flop
When the input variable changes to 1, a pulse sequence is
D5Z08XNB generated at the output.
The ! to the left of the G indicates that the pulse sequence starts
with the input variable transition (synchronized start).
If there is a ! to the right of the G, the pulse sequence ends with
the ending of the 1 signal at the input (synchronized stop).
Amplifier
The output variable is 1 only if the input variable is also 1.
D5Z08XOB
Band pass filter

50Hz
The output only transmits the 50 Hz component of the input
D5Z08XPB signals. All other frequencies (above and below 50 Hz) are
attenuated.
Counter
+
At the + input the input variable transitions from 0 to 1 are
R
D5Z08YFB counted and stored in the function block.
At the R(eset) input a transition of the input variable from 0 to 1
resets the counter to 0.
Electromechanical drive in general, here a relay, for example.
D5Z08YGB
Signal level converter

L+
V1 with electrical isolation between input and output.

L-
D5Z08XQB
L+ = pos. voltage input
L− = neg. voltage input
U1 = device identifier
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A3-5

P638 A3 Glossary
Input transformer with phase and item identifiers (according to

A.1 DIN EN 60445)
A.2 IA T1
D5Z08XRB
Phase identifiers for current inputs:
● for A: A1 and A2
● for B: B1 and B2
● for C: C1 and C2
● for N: N1 and N2
Phase identifiers for voltage inputs

● via transformer 1:
o for A: 1U
o for B: 1V
o for C: 1W
o for N: 1N
● via transformer 2:
o for A: 2U
o for B: 2V
Item identifiers
● for current transformers:
o for A: T1
o for B: T2
o for C: T3
o for N: T4
● for voltage transformer 1:
o for A: T5
o for B: T6
o for C: T7
o for N: T8
● for VG-N transformer: T90
● for voltage transformer 2:
o for A: T15
Change-over contact
with item identifier
D5Z08XSB
Special symbol
Output relay in normally-energized arrangement (“closed-circuit
D5Z08XTB operation”).
A3-6 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

A3 Glossary P638
PC interface
−12V
with pin connections
9
+12V 1
0V 5
RXD 3
V24
TXD 2
D5Z08XVB
Multiplier
The output variable is the result of the multiplication of the two
D5Z08XWB input variables.
Divider
The output variable is the result of the division of the two input
D5Z08XXB variables.
Comparator
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) are
equal to the function in the function block.
D5Z08XYB
Formula block
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) satisfy
2.5
the equation in the function block
D5Z08XZB
Examples of Signal Names

All settings and signals relevant for protection are shown in the block diagrams of
Chapter “Operation” as follows:
Signal Name Description

♦ FT_RC: Fault recording n Internal signal names are not coded by a data model address.
305 100
In the block diagrams they are marked with a diamond. The
small figure underneath the signal name represents a code that
is irrelevant to the user.
The internal signal names used and their origins are listed in
Appendix.
DIST: VNG>> triggered Signal names coded by a data model address are represented
[ 036 015 ]
by their address (shown in square brackets). Their origin is
given in Chapters “Setting” and “Information and Control
Functions”.
MAIN: General reset USER A specific setting to be used later on is shown with its signal
[ 003 002 ]
↗1: Execute
name, address, and the setting preceded by the setting arrow.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A3-7

P638 A3 Glossary
Symbols Used
Symbol Meaning
t Time duration
V Voltage, potential difference
V̲ Complex voltage
I Electrical current
I̲ Complex current
Z̲ Complex impedance
|Z̲| Modulus of complex impedance
f Frequency
δ Temperature in °C
Σ Sum, result
Ω Unit of electrical resistance
α Angle
φ, ϕ Phase angle. With subscripts: specific angle between a defined current

and a defined voltage.
τ Time constant
ΔT Temperature difference in K
A3-8 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
A4.1 Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101

(Companion Standard)
This section incorporates Section 8 of EN 60870-5-101 (1996), which includes a
general definition of the telecontrol interface for substation control systems.
A4.1.1 Interoperability
This application-based standard (companion standard) specifies parameter sets
and other options from which subsets are to be selected in order to implement
specific telecontrol systems. Certain parameters such as the number of bytes
(octets) in the COMMON ADDRESS of the ASDU are mutually exclusive. This
means that only one value of the defined parameter is allowed per system. Other
parameters, such as the listed set of different process information in the
command and monitor direction, permit definition of the total number or of
subsets that are suitable for the given application. This section combines the
parameters given in the previous sections in order to facilitate an appropriate
selection for a specific application. If a system is made up of several system
components supplied by different manufacturers, then it is necessary for all
partners to agree on the selected parameters.
The boxes for the selected parameters should be checked [see National Preface
of EN 60870-5-101].
The overall definition of a system may also require individual selection of certain
parameters for specific parts of a system such as individual selection of scaling
factors for individually addressable measured values.
A4.1.1.1 Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters)
[✓] Point-to-point configuration [✓] Multipoint-party line configuration
[✓] Multiple point-to-point configuration [ ] Multipoint-star configuration
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A4-1

P638 A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
A4.1.1.2 Physical Layer (Network-Specific Parameters)

(See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101.)
Transmission Rate (Control Direction)
(The transmission rates for control direction and monitor direction must be
identical.)
Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28, Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28, Balanced interface X.24/X.27

Standardized Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s
[ ] 100 bit/s [✓] 2400 bit/s [ ] 2400 bit/s
[ ] 200 bit/s [✓] 4800 bit/s [ ] 4800 bit/s
[ ] 300 bit/s [✓] 9600 bit/s [ ] 9600 bit/s
[✓] 600 bit/s [ ] 19200 bit/s
[✓] 1200 bit/s [ ] 38400 bit/s
[ ] 56000 bit/s
[ ] 64000 bit/s
Transmission Rate (Monitor Direction)

(The transmission rates for control direction and monitor direction must be
identical.)
Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28, Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28, Balanced interface X.24/X.27

Standardized Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s
[ ] 100 bit/s [✓] 2400 bit/s [ ] 2400 bit/s
[ ] 200 bit/s [✓] 4800 bit/s [ ] 4800 bit/s
[ ] 300 bit/s [✓] 9600 bit/s [ ] 9600 bit/s
[✓] 600 bit/s [ ] 19200 bit/s
[✓] 1200 bit/s [ ] 38400 bit/s
[ ] 56000 bit/s
[ ] 64000 bit/s
A4-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

A4 Telecontrol Interfaces P638
A4.1.1.3 Link Layer (Network-Specific Parameters)

Frame format FT 1.2, single character 1, and the fixed time-out interval are used
exclusively in this companion standard.
Link Transmission Procedure
[✓] Balanced transmission
[✓] Unbalanced transmission
Address Field of the Link
[✓] Not present (balanced transmission only)
[✓] One octet
[✓] Two octets (balanced transmission only)
[✓] Structured
[✓] Unstructured
Frame Length
[240] Maximum length L (number of octets)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A4-3

A4.1.1.4 Application Layer

Transmission mode for application data
Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 870-5-4, is
used exclusively in this companion standard.
Common Address of ASDU (System-Specific Parameter)
[✓] One octet [✓] Two octets
Information Object Address (System-Specific Parameter)
[✓] One octet [✓] Structured
[✓] Two octets [✓] Unstructured
[✓] Three octets
Cause of Transmission (System-Specific Parameter)
[✓] One octet [✓] Two octets (with originator address)
Selection of Standard ASDUs

Process Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
A4-4 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

[✓] <1> = Single-point information M_SP_NA_1
[✓] <2> = Single-point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1
[✓] <3> = Double-point information M_DP_NA_1
[✓] <4> = Double-point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1
[✓] <5> = Step position information M_ST_NA_1
[✓] <6> = Step position information with time tag M_ST_TA_1
[✓] <7> = Bit string of 32 bit M_BO_NA_1
[✓] <8> = Bit string of 32 bit with time tag M_BO_TA_1
[✓] <9> = Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1
[✓] <10> = Measured value, normalized value with time tag M_ME_TA_1
[✓] <11> = Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1
[✓] <12> = Measured value, scaled value with time tag M_ME_TB_1
[ ] <13> = Measured value, short floating point value M_ME_NC_1
[ ] <14> = Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_ME_TC_1
[✓] <15> = Integrated totals M_IT_NA_1
[✓] <16> = Integrated totals with time tag M_IT_TA_1
[✓] <17> = Event of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TA_1
[✓] <18> = Packed start events of protection equipment with time ME_EP_TB_1
tag
[✓] <19> = Packed output circuit information of protection M_EP_TC_1

equipment with time tag
[ ] <20> = Packed single-point information with status change M_PS_NA_1

detection
[ ] <21> = Measured value, normalized value without quality M_ME_ND_1

descriptor
Process Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)

(Incorrectly identified with control direction in IEC 870-5-101.)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A4-5

[✓] <45> = Single command C_SC_NA_1
[✓] <46> = Double command C_DC_NA_1
[✓] <47> = Regulating step command C_IT_NA_1
[ ] <48> = Set point command, normalized value C_RC_NA_1
[ ] <49> = Set point command, scaled value C_SE_NB_1
[ ] <50> = Set point command, short floating point value C_SE_NC_1
[ ] <51> = Bit string of 32 bit C_BO_NA_1
System Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
[✓] <70> = End of initialization ME_EI_NA_1
System Information in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
[✓] <100> = Interrogation command C_IC_NA_1
[✓] <101> = Counter interrogation command C_CI_NA_1
[✓] <102> = Read command C_RD_NA_1
[✓] <103> = Clock synchronization command C_CS_NA_1
[✓] <104> = Test command C_TS_NB_1
[ ] <105> = Reset process command C_RP_NC_1
[ ] <106> = Delay acquisition command C_CD_NA_1

Parameter in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
[✓] <110> = Parameter of measured value, normalized value P_ME_NA_1
[✓] <111> = Parameter of measured value, scaled value P_ME_NB_1
[ ] <112> = Parameter of measured value, short floating point value P_ME_NC_1
[ ] <113> = Parameter activation P_AC_NA_1
File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter)
A4-6 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

[ ] <120> = File ready F_FR_NA_1
[ ] <121> = Section ready F_SR_NA_1
[ ] <122> = Call directory, select file, call file, call section F_SC_NA_1
[ ] <123> = Last section, last segment F_LS_NA_1
[ ] <124> = Ack file, ack section F_AF_NA_1
[ ] <125> = Segment F_SG_NA_1
[ ] <126> = Directory F_DR_TA_1
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A4-7

A4.1.1.5 Basic Application Functions

Station Initialization (Station-Specific Parameter)
[✓] Remote initialization
General Interrogation (System- or Station-Specific Parameter)
[✓] Global
[✓] Group 1 [✓] Group 7 [✓] Group 13
[✓] Group 5 [✓] Group 11
[✓] Group 6 [✓] Group 12
Addresses per group have to be defined.

Clock Synchronization (Station-Specific Parameter)
[✓] Clock synchronization
Command Transmission (Object-Specific Parameter)
[✓] Direct command transmission [ ] Select and execute command
[ ] Direct set point command [ ] Select and execute set point
transmission command
[ ] C_SE ACTTERM used
[✓] No additional definition
[ ] Short pulse duration (Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the
outstation)
[ ] Long pulse duration (Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the
outstation)
[ ] Persistent output
Transmission of Integrated Totals (Station- or Object-Specific

Parameter)
A4-8 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

[ ] Counter request [✓] General request counter
[✓] Counter freeze without reset [✓] Request counter group 1
[ ] Counter freeze with reset [✓] Request counter group 2
[ ] Counter reset [✓] Request counter group 3
[✓] Request counter group 4
Addresses per group have to be specified

Parameter Loading (Object-Specific Parameter)
[✓] Threshold value
[ ] Smoothing value
[ ] Low limit for transmission of measured value
[ ] High limit for transmission of measured value
Parameter Activation (Object-Specific Parameter)
[ ] Act/deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter)
[ ] File transfer in monitor direction F_FR_NA_1
[ ] File transfer in control direction F_FR_NA_1
A4.2 Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103

This section incorporates Section 8 of IEC 60870-5-103, including definitions
applicable to the P638.
A4.2.1 Interoperability
A4.2.1.1 Physical Layer
A4.2.1.1.1 Electrical Interface
[✓] EIA RS 485
[✓] No. of loads: 32 for one device
Note: EIA RS 485 defines the loads in such a way that 32 of such loads can be
operated on one line. For detailed information see EIA RS 485, Section 3.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A4-9

A4.2.1.1.2 Optical Interface
[✓] Glass fiber
[✓] Plastic fiber
[✓] F-SMA connector
[ ] BFOC/2.5 connector
A4.2.1.1.3 Transmission Rate
[✓] 9600 bit/s
[✓] 19200 bit/s
A4.2.1.2 Link Layer

There are no selection options for the link layer.
A4.2.1.3 Application Layer
A4.2.1.3.1 Transmission Mode for Application Data

Mode 1 (least significant octet first) as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 60870‑5‑4 is
used exclusively in this companion standard.
A4.2.1.3.2 Common Address of ASDU
[✓] One COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU (identical to the station address)
[ ] More than one COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
A4.2.1.3.3 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
System Functions in Monitor Direction
INF Description
[✓] <0> End of general interrogation
[✓] <0> Time synchronization
[✓] <2> Reset FCB
[✓] <3> Reset CU
[✓] <4> Start / restart
[ ] <5> Power on
A4-10 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Status Indications in Monitor Direction
INF Description P638 Designations

(Address) Description
[ ] <16> Auto-recloser active
[ ] <17> Teleprotection active
[✓] <18> Protection active (003 030) MA IN: Protecti on en abl ed
[✓] <19> LED reset (021 010) MA IN: Res et in dicat. USER
[✓] <20> Blocking of monitor direction (037 075) C OMM1 : Si g./meas .val. blo ck.
[✓] <21> Test mode (037 071) MA IN: Te st mode
[ ] <22> Local parameter setting
[✓] <23> Characteristic 1 (036 090) P SS: PS 1 active
[✓] <27> Auxiliary input 1 (034 000) L OGIC : I npu t 01 EXT
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A4-11

Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor Direction

[ ] <32> Measurand supervision I
[ ] <33> Measurand supervision V
[ ] <35> Phase sequence supervision
[✓] <36> Trip circuit supervision (041 200) SFMON: Rel ay K xx faulty
(The message content is
formed from the OR operation
of the individual signals.)
[ ] <37> I>> back-up operation
[✓] <38> VT fuse failure (004 061) MA IN: M.c. b. trip V EXT
[ ] <39> Teleprotection disturbed
[✓] <46> Group warning (036 100) SFMON: Warnin g ( re lay)
[✓] <47> Group alarm (004 065) MA IN: Blocke d/f aul ty
Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction

[] <48> Earth fault A
[] <49> Earth fault B
[] <50> Earth fault C
[] <51> Earth fault forward, i.e. line
[] <52> Earth fault reverse, i.e. busbar
A4-12 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Fault Indications in Monitor Direction

[ ] <64> Start / pick-up A
[ ] <65> Start / pick-up B
[ ] <66> Start / pick-up C
[ ] <67> Start / pick-up N
[ ] <68> General trip
[ ] <69> Trip A
[ ] <70> Trip B
[ ] <71> Trip C
[ ] <72> Trip I>> (back-up operation)
[ ] <73> Fault location X in ohms
[✓] <74> Fault forward/line (036 018) MA IN: Faul t for ward
[✓] <75> Fault reverse/busbar (036 019) MA IN: Faul t backward
[ ] <76> Teleprotection signal

transmitted
[ ] <77> Teleprotection signal received
[ ] <78> Zone 1
[ ] <79> Zone 2
[ ] <80> Zone 3
[ ] <81> Zone 4
[ ] <82> Zone 5
[ ] <83> Zone 6
[✓] <84> General starting (036 000) MA IN: Gen eral startin g
[✓] <85> Breaker failure (036 017) MA IN: CB fai l ur e
[✓] <86> Trip measuring system A (041 002) D IF F: Tri p s ignal 1
[✓] <87> Trip measuring system B (041 003) D IF F: Tri p s ignal 2
[ ] <88> Trip measuring system C
[ ] <89> Trip measuring system N
[ ] <90> Trip I>
[ ] <91> Trip I>>
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A4-13


[ ] <92> Trip IN>
[ ] <93> Trip IN>>
Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction

[ ] <128> CB ‘on’ by AR
[ ] <129> CB ‘on’ by long-time AR
[ ] <130> AR blocked
Measurands in Monitor Direction

[] <144> Measurand I
[] <145> Measurands I, V
[] <146> Measurands I, V, P, Q
[] <147> Measurands IN, VEN
[] <148> Measurands IA,B,C, VA,B,C, P, Q, f
Generic Functions in Monitor Direction
INF Description
[ ] <240> Read headings of all defined groups
[ ] <241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
[ ] <243> Read directory of a single entry
[ ] <244> Read value or attribute of a single entry
[ ] <245> General interrogation of generic data
[ ] <249> Write entry with confirmation
[ ] <250> Write entry with execution
[ ] <251> Write entry abort
A4-14 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

A4.2.1.3.4 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control Direction
System Functions in Control Direction
INF Description
[✓] <0> Initiation of general interrogation
[✓] <0> Time synchronization
General Commands in Control Direction

[ ] <16> Auto-recloser on/off
[ ] <17> Teleprotection on/off
[✓] <18> Protection on/off (003 030) MA IN: Protecti on en abl ed
[✓] <19> LED reset (021 010) MA IN: Res et in dicat. U SER
[✓] <23> Activate characteristic 1 (003 060) P SS: Param .s u bs. se l. USER
(Switches
PSS: Pa ram.su bs. se l .
USE R to Parameter subset
1.)
(Switches
2.)
(Switches
3.)
(Switches
4.)
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A4-15

Generic Functions in Control Direction
INF Description
[ ] <240> Read headings of all defined groups
[ ] <241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
[ ] <243> Read directory of a single entry
[ ] <244> Read value or attribute of a single entry
[ ] <245> General interrogation of generic data
[ ] <248> Write entry
[ ] <249> Write entry with confirmation
[ ] <250> Write entry with execution
[ ] <251> Write entry abort
A4-16 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

A4.2.1.3.5 Basic Application Functions
[✓] Test mode
[✓] Blocking of monitor direction
[✓] Disturbance data
[ ] Generic services
[✓] Private data
A4.2.1.3.6 Miscellaneous
Measured values are transmitted both with ASDU 3 and ASDU 9. As defined in
Sec. 7.2.6.8, the maximum MVAL can be either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value.
In ASDU 3 and ASDU 9, different ratings may not be used; in other words, there is
only one choice for each measurand.
Measured value Max. MVAL = nom. value multiplied by
1.2 or 2.4
Current A [ ] [ ]
Current B [ ] [ ]
Current C [ ] [ ]
Voltage A-G [ ] [ ]
Voltage B-G [ ] [ ]
Voltage C-G [ ] [ ]
Enabled power P [ ] [ ]
Reactive power Q [ ] [ ]
Frequency f [ ] [ ]
Voltage A-B [ ] [ ]
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A4-17

A4-18 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

P638
A5 Version History
A5.1 Version History – MiCOM P30
A5.1.1 P638 ‑301 ‑40x ‑601 … ‑303 ‑40x ‑612
A5.1.1.1 P638 ‑301 ‑401/402 ‑601

Release: 2002‒09‒24
Initial product release
A5.1.1.2 P638 ‑301 ‑401/402 ‑602

Release: 2003‒01‒20
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
DEVICE Bug fixing:

The device was blocked following a start-up if either one of the protections V<>
or f<> were enabled, due to erroneous hardware selfidentification.
PC The configuration option for cyclic telegrams with measured operating values
was modified in such a way that non-supported ASDUs per IEC where removed
from the selection table.
COMM1 The selection table position (003 177) Spont an eous signal enable was
COMM2 expanded by the setting options “VDEW Only“ and “VDEW + Selected Sig.”.
These configuration settings used to generate cyclic telegrams are not
supported and were therefore removed from the data model:
● (003 055) C OMM1 : De lta V
● (003 056) C OMM1: D elta I
● (003 057) COMM1 : Del ta f
● (003 059) CO MM1: De lta P
CBF1 The setting "Select meas. input" was removed from the setting groups and
CBF2 included in "Main Function" (similar to DTOC, IDMT, THERM).
A5.1.1.3 P638 ‑301 ‑401/402 ‑602‑701

Release: 2003‒09‒26
Hardware
No changes.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A5-1

P638 A5 Version History
Diagram
No changes.
Software
THERM Bug fixing:

● A setting error (if present) is now only signaled when the respective
function is enabled (e.g. (040 068) THERM: Enabled = Ye s).
● The status signal (040 068) TH ERM: Enable d is now independent from
the simultaneous (prohibited) enabling of the relative and absolute
replicas
(022 064) THE RM: R elati ve Re pl i ca = Yes
(022 065) THER M: A bsol ute Re pli ca = Yes
● The coordination of the operate delay for the monitoring signal for the
measured data input (040 190) R TDm A: PT 1 00 Fau lt y = Yes and the
plausibility check of the coolant temperature acquisition, integrated in the
thermal overload protection, have now been improved. This measure
prevents the danger of incorrect tripping when an open wire is present.
A5.1.1.4 P638 ‑301 ‑401/402 ‑603

Release: 2003‒12‒10
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
THERM Bug fixing:

● In case the overload protection is blocked (setting (072 178) THE RM: Blk
for C T A Fai l SG1 = Ye s) because of a faulty coolant temperature
acquisition then the trip signal is not reset if this fault occurred
simultaneously to the trip signal.
● In case of a fault in the coolant temperature acquisition the thermal
modeling will then be continued on the basis of the measured current
alone. All THERM signals will be reset (except CTA fault signals) and all
THERM measured values (except the status of the thermal replica) will be
set to 'Not Measured'.
IDMT Bug fixing:

● The minimum voltage for the directional operation (072 133) ID MT : Vm
in SG1 can now no longer be set to 'Blocked'.
OP_RC The list of possible entries has been modified such that all LIMIT stages do no
longer enter starting signals, but only the signal 'timer stage elapsed'.
A5-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

A5 Version History P638
A5.1.1.5 P638 ‑302 ‑403/404 ‑610

Release: 2008‒08‒15
Hardware
Now the new text display panel is available featuring 6 function keys that offer
user-definable functional assignment and a total of 23 multi-colored LED
indicators. 18 of these red and green LED indicators offer userdefinable
functional assignment (amber/yellow is present when both red and green colors
are illuminated simultaneously).
Furthermore there is an optional binary I/O module X (4H), with 4 highbreak
contacts available.
As ordering options for input switching thresholds, further input switching
thresholds (e.g. 18V, 73V, 90V, 146V, 155V) are now available in addition to the
24V standard variant.
A further new option is an Ethernet communication board providing the
communications protocol per IEC 61850.
Diagram
The updated terminal connection diagrams now include the connections of the
new binary output module fitted with 4 high-break contacts.
Software
DVICE The previous menu point (000 001) DV IC E: Order N o. is replaced by

● (001 000) D V IC E : A F S Order N o.
● (001 200) DVICE : P CS O rde r No.
The following device menu points have been added:
● (001 201) DV IC E: Locati on
● (002 059) DV IC E: DM IEC 618 50 V ers ion
● (002 131) DV IC E: SW Ve rsi on D HMI
● (002 132) DVICE : SW Ve rsi on DH MI DM
LED The new detachable, serially-connected, HMI provides the following extended
display functions:
● The operating mode for the LED indicators has been extended by the
operating mode LED flashing.
● Two differing signals may now be assigned to the freely configurable LED
indicators (H 4 to H 16 and H 18 to H 23) to emit either red or green light.
If both assigned signals are active the resulting LED color will be 'amber'
(yellow).
Configuration, operating mode and physical state of the permanently configured
LED indicators H 1 and H 17 are now displayed via configuration parameters and
physical state signals.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A5-3

PC The values AREVA and AREVA D can now be selected as the manufacturer. This
COMM1 is relevant for the following menu points:
COMM2 ● (003 183) P C: Manuf acture r
● (003 161) C O MM1: Manuf acture r
● (103 161) C OMM2: Manuf acture r
(Remark: With the P638, as with all MiCOM P railway protection relays, the
manufacturer’s name is only visible in COMM1 when the setting (003 215)
COMM1: I EC 870 -5 Enable d is set to 'Yes'.)
IEC The communications protocol per IEC 61850 has been implemented.
GOOSE An active monitoring of the communications links to logged-on clients has been
GSSE implemented with setting (104 062) TCP Ke e p-Al ive Timer
(This active monitoring replaces the passive monitoring at setting (104 050)
I EC: Inact ivit y t ime r.)
Implementation of an automatic switchover to daylight saving time, activated by
setting (104 219) I EC: Swi tch.dayl. sav.ti me. Switchover times for the
automatic switch to daylight saving time are governed by the following settings:
● (104 220) I EC: D ayl. Sav.Ti me Start
● (104 221) IEC : Dayl .Sav.Ti me St. d
● (104 222) IE C: D ayl. Sav.Ti me St. m
● (104 223) I EC : Dayl. Sav.t.St.0:00 +
● (104 225) IE C: Dayl.Sav. Time En d
● (104 226) IEC : Dayl.Sav.Time En d d
● (104 227) I EC: Dayl .Sav.Time En d m
● (104 228) I EC : Dayl.Sav.t. End 0:00 +
Instead of setting a router address and target network so as to establish a
communications link to a client situated exterior to the local network, now only
the setting of the gateway address is required via (104 011) IEC : Gat e way
Ad dress.
F_KEY This new function group is now available and can be used to configure function
keys situated on the front panel user interface (HMI).
LED Configuration capabilities for the LED indicators (e.g. multi-colored and
increased numbers) have been adapted to the hardware.
INP In order to comply with standard IEC 60255-22-7, class A the setting (010 220)
I NP: Filter is now available.
A5-4 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

CHECK A number of device bugs previously led to a blocking with the second entry to
the monitoring signal memory (i.e. if the recurring fault was already stored in
the monitoring signal memory – see Chapter 10 in the Technical Manual). This
reaction was changed in such a manner that device blocking will only occur if a
renewed appearance of the same device fault lies within a set "memory
retention time" (021 018) C H EC K: Mon .Sig. Re tention. This makes it
possible to tolerate sporadic faults, resulting from control actions, without
having to clear the monitoring signal memory in the interim.
The significance of the time stamp was modified to accommodate this new
feature. The time stamp now represents the last appearance of the fault.
In the course of platform harmonization, the configuration table of the user-
defined alarm condition has been supplemented by the instantaneous outputs
30 to 32 and the timed outputs 30 to 32 (t) of the programmable logic:
● (098 053) C HEC K: Ou tput 30 <--> (042 090) LOGIC: Output 3 0
● (098 054) CHECK: O utpu t 30 ( t ) <--> (042 091) LO GIC : Out put 30
(t )
● (098 055) CHECK: Ou tput 3 1 <--> (042 092) L OGIC: Out put 31
● (098 056) C HEC K: Output 31 ( t) <--> (042 093) LOGIC: Output 31
(t )
● (098 057) C HECK: O utput 32 <--> (042 094) LOGIC: Output 32
● (098 058) C HECK: Output 3 2 ( t) <--> (042 095) LOGIC: Output 3 2
(t )
These LOGIC outputs can be included in the list of alarm signals by selection at
CHECK: Fct Assign. Alarm and they are also recorded in the monitoring signal
memory.
These signals can be used to create an alarm signal under complex application
conditions. This signaling has no influence on the device's operation (i.e. no
warm restart or blocking).
The following new menu points / self-checking points have been added:
● (098 020), (098 078)CH ECK: Set ting Error CBM_x x=1, 2
● (098 066), (098 079)C HEC K: C Bx No. CB Op. > x=1, 2
● (098 067), (098 085)CH ECK: C Bx R em . No. CB op. < x=1, 2
● (098 068), (098 086)CH ECK: CBx Σ Itri p > x=1, 2
● (098 069), (098 087)CHECK : CBx ΣItr ip**2 > x=1, 2
● (098 070), (098 088)CHE CK: C Bx t m ax> A x=1, 2
● (098 077), (098 090)CHECK : CBx tm ax> C x=1, 2
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A5-5

MAIN The primary source for date and time synchronization may now be selected.
A menu jump function is now available for the READ Key.
The reset functions have been extended:
● Now there are two group reset settings available, each of which will
"simultaneously" reset several memories. The assignment of eligible
memories to the two group reset settings is configurable. The group reset
is now issued by a manual reset from the front panel user interface (HMI),
and may also be created by linking it to a binary signal input or a function
key.
● In similar fashion a selection of memories to be reset may be assigned to
the CLEAR key situated on the front panel user interface (HMI). Now each
time the CLEAR key is pressed, not only the LED indicators and the display
are reset but the selected memory is also reset immediately.
These new signals have been added:
● (044 131) MA IN : CB1 T ri p EXT
● (044 208) MA IN : CB2 T ri p EXT
The following menu point has been renamed:
● (003 064) MAI N: En .Man .T rip Cm d. USER
FT_DA The following English menu point has been renamed (without changing the
German menu point text):
● (006 083) F T _DA: Res tr ai n Curre nt 2 (was previously: Restrain
Current 1)
THERM The further operation may now be selected when there is a CTA failure.
● (076 177) THERM: Fu nct.f .CTA Fail.SGx
A minimum coolant temperature may be set for the power feed of catenary
sections situated in long tunnels:
● (076 177) THE R M: Mi ni m um T em pe r at.SGx
The following setting has been deleted:
● (072 178) THERM: Blk for C T A Fail SGx
A5-6 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

DTOC_1 The menu points can be used to define whether the respective stage timer is
IDMT started when the protection is triggered or, additionally, with direction signaling.
● (071 146) DTOC 1: Time r St art t I> SGx
● (072 245) DTOC 1: Time r St art t I>> SGx
● (006 061) I DMT: Time r St. tI ref> SGx
The load flow direction can now be determined when the short-circuit direction
The following menu points have been renamed:
● (035 104) D TOC1: Ph ase A Tr igge re d
(previously: DTOC1: Starting Phase A)
● (035 105) DTOC1: Ph as e C Tri gge re d
(previously: DTOC1: Starting Phase C)
● (038 117) I D MT: P hase A Triggere d
(previously: IDMT: Starting Iref>,A )
● (038 118) I DMT: P has e C Triggered
(previously: IDMT: Starting Iref>,C )
DTOCN The text in all menu points has been changed (if present) from "IN>" and "tIN>"
to "IN>H" and "tIN>H" where the letter "H" stands for "high current".
For example:
● (076 111) D TOCN : IN>H SG1 (previously: DTOCN: IN> SG1)
CBF_1 The following signals are now available:

CBF_2 ● (006 051) CBF_1: CB Fai l ure and
● (006 052) C BF_2: CB Failu re
The previous signals CBF_x: CB Failure have all been renamed.
The new text is:
● (039 000) C BF_1: Super v. Si gnal
● (039 039) C BF _2: Superv. Sign al
CBM_1 Circuit breaker monitoring (triggering circuits 1 and 2) is now available with two
CBM_2 new function groups.
LIMIT The previous function groups LIM_a, LIM_b, LIM_c and LIM_V have been united in
one single function group "LIMIT". Except for the renaming of menu points, for
example
● (072 221) L IM_a: I> SG1 --> (072 221) LI MIT: Ia> SG1
● (006 052) CBF_2: CB Fai l ure
this does not mean that associated functionalities have been changed.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A5-7

A5.1.1.6 P638 ‑302 ‑403/404 ‑611

Release: 2011‒02‒23
Hardware
New Schneider-Electric design for the local control panel (HMI).
Diagram
No changes.
Software
PC The following menu point has been removed:

● (003 183) PC: Name of manufacturer
Note: Compatibility even with older versions of the operating program continues
to be guaranteed.
COMM1 The data point (003 214) COMM1: MODBUS prot. v ar iant may now be used
to select between the MODBUS protocol variants Private and Compatible.
The protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the MODBUS implementation in
the MiCOM Px20 and Px40 protection devices. The protocol variant Private
corresponds to the first implementation of the MODBUS protocol.
Note: As before this setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1 The menu points (003 161) C OMM1: Name of man ufact urer and (103 161)
COMM2 C O MM2: N ame of manuf acture r can no longer be set by using a selection
list but, for reasons of compatibility, they may now be defined as free text. The
default is SE but, in individual cases, it may become necessary to enter texts
differing from the default.
Notes: These parameters can only be set using the operating program and it is
not possible to set them locally using the integrated local control panel (HMI).
The maximum text length is 8 characters and designations exceeding this will
be truncated. The parameter CO MM1: Name of man uf act urer is hidden
unless an IEC 60870-5 protocol is enabled.
A5-8 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

A5.1.1.7 P638 ‑303 ‑405/406 ‑612

Release: 2012‒12‒01
Hardware
The P638 is now fitted with an improved power supply module.
Note that the voltage range has changed for DC input:
● For the DC / AC variant, the range is now 60 … 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC
(previously 48 … 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC)
● For the DC-only variant, the range is now 24 … 60 VDC
(previously 24 VDC)
A new communication module (“REB” = “Redundant Ethernet Board”) is now
available as an ordering option. This module can be used for redundant
communication via IEC 61850 and may be fitted to slot 2, as an alternative to the
other communication modules. The following communication protocols are
supported:
● SHP (Self-Healing Protocol)
● RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)
● DHP (Dual-Homing Protocol)
A detailed description of the module and the appropriate network connections is
available as a separate document (“Redundant Ethernet Board, Application
Guide”).
The binary module X(6I 3O) with 6 binary signal inputs and 3 output relays is now
optionally available and may be fitted to slot 18.
Diagram
The diagrams have been adapted to the new selection of modules:
● P638 -405 (for 84TE pin-terminal connection)
● P638 -406 (for 84TE ring-terminal connection)
Software
Note: Software version -612 is compatible with all previous hardware releases.
IEC Bug fixing:

● In a few cases a data change report was not transferred when a cyclic
report was generated at the same time.
● Operate signals OpIn are available now in the Logical Nodes RBRF1 and
RBRF2.
DIFF The restrictions for setting the amplitude matching factors have been relaxed as
follows:
● 0.5 ≤ kam,x ≤ 16 (instead of: kam,x ≤ 5)
● The restrictions kam,a / kam,b ≤ 3 and kam,b / kam,a ≤ 3 have been
removed.
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A5-9

A5.2 Version History – Easergy MiCOM 30
A5.2.1 P638 ‑304 ‑4xx ‑661 ff
A5.2.1.1 P638 ‑304 ‑407/408/409 ‑661

Release: 2019‒07‒04
Hardware
A new Ethernet module (SEB LC/RJ45 or REB LC/RJ45) is now available as order
option. This module is used for IEC 61850 Edition 1 and Edition 2 protocol and is
fitted to slot 2, as an alternative to other communication modules.
PRP/HSR/RSTP redundancy communication protocols are supported.
40 TE case variant is added.
The P638 is now available with text display or graphic display as an order option.
Diagram
The updated connection diagrams now include the Ethernet module
communication interface with SEB and REB.
● P638 -407 (for 40 TE case, with pin-terminal connection)
● P638 -408 (for 84 TE case, with pin-terminal connection)
● P638 -409 (for 84 TE case, with ring-terminal connection)
Software
CS Implementation of a dedicated function group that provides Cyber Security

protection to mitigate the security risks.
The Security Administration Tool is required for RBAC configuration and setting
changes.
IEC The protocol of the redundant connection is configurable with I EC: ETH C OMM
Mode.
When Ethernet module (REB or SEB) is used, second Ethernet information is
provided.
GSSE Function group GSSE has been removed. It has been replaced by the extended
GOOSE input option.
GOOSE The number of GOOSE inputs has been extended to 128.
MAIN MAIN with CB close 'point-on-wave' is added.

To protect the transformer against inrush currents it must be switched on at the
voltage maximum. The switch-on function measures the voltage and switches-
on the transformer after an adjustable delay (depending on the circuit breaker
operation time).
DIFF Parameter range of Idiff> extended from 0.10-2.50 Iref to 0.05-2.50 Iref.
A5-10 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

DIST Minimum impedance protection has been implemented.

The function provides only polygon characteristic with following features:
● Three independent distance zones
● Each one can be enabled independently in forward and backward direction
● Polygon characteristic with load blinding and X/R setting
● Angle parameters alpha L1, alpha, beta, gamma
MCMON MCMON function has been implemented to check if the voltage is healthy to be
usable to activate the DIST function.
DTOCN IN> and IN>> stages are added to DTOCN.
LOGIC The number of logic outputs (equations) has been extended to 128.
LOG_2 There is a new function group LOG_2 (Programmable Logic 2).

It is identical to the previously available function group LOGIC, but it offers only
four logical equations. These, however, have long-term timers, settable from 0
to 60000 s (= 16 hours, 40 minutes).
TIMER New function is added, four groups of timer are available.
DEV01 to DEV01 to DEV10 are added for control and monitoring of switchgear units.
DEV10
ILOCK Interlocking logic function is available to provide bay and system interlocking for
the control functions.
CMD_1 24 commands and 64 signals are added.

SIG_1
COUNT Function group COUNT has become available. Four binary counters can be used
to count the positive pulse edges of a binary signal present at an appropriately
P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 A5-11

A5-12 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

© 2020 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com
Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P638/EN M/R-b5-C 02/2020

Easergy Micom P638: Transformer Differential Protection Device For Ac Railway Applications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Easergy Micom P638: Transformer Differential Protection Device For Ac Railway Applications

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Easergy Micom P638: Transformer Differential Protection Device For Ac Railway Applications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Easergy MiCOM P638

Transformer Differential Protection Device for AC Railway

Version P638 -304 -407/408/409 -661

When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltage will be present in

1 Application and Scope ........................................................................................ 1-1

2 Technical Data .................................................................................................... 2-1

P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 1

2.10.3 Voltage ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-25

2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3.13.6 Multiple Blocking ......................................................................................................................................... 3-96

P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 3

3.24.1 Enabling or Disabling DTOC Protection ......................................................................................................3-149

4 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

3.32.2 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection ..............................................................................................................3-199

P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 5

5 Installation and Connection ................................................................................ 5-1

6 Local Control (HMI) ............................................................................................. 6-1

6 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

6.13.5 List Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 6-45

8 Information and Control Functions ......................................................................8-1

9 IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator .............................................................9-1

10 Commissioning ................................................................................................. 10-1

P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 7

10.2.6 Checking the Communications Interfaces Signals ..................................................................................... 10-10

11 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 11-1

12 Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 12-1

13 Storage ............................................................................................................. 13-1

14 Accessories and Spare Parts ............................................................................. 14-1

15 Order Information ............................................................................................. 15-1

A1 Function Groups ............................................................................................... A1-1

A2 Internal Signals .................................................................................................A2-1

A4 Telecontrol Interfaces ....................................................................................... A4-1

A5 Version History ................................................................................................. A5-1

8 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

1 Application and Scope

Fig. 1-1: P638 in a 40 TE sized case with text display.

Fig. 1-2: P638 in a 40 TE sized case with graphic display.

P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 1-1

Fig. 1-3: P638 in a 84 TE sized case with text display.

Fig. 1-4: P638 in a 84 TE sized case with graphic display.

1-2 P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661

Protection functions P638

ANSI IEC 61850 Function

87T PhsPDIFx DIFF Transformer differential protection ✓

21 DisPDISx DIST Minimum impedance protection ✓

30 / 74 CALHx/ MCMON Measuring circuit supervision of voltage ✓

50 / 51 Dt1PhsPTOCx DTOC1 Definite-time overcurrent protection, with two stages ✓

50 / 51 Dt2PhsPTOCx DTOC2 Definite-time overcurrent protection, with two stages ✓

50 / 51 DtpEftPTOCx DTOCN Dead tank protection, definite-time ground overcurrent ✓

51 ItpPhsPTOC1 IDMT Inverse-time overcurrent protection, phase selective, with ✓

49 ThmPTTR1 THERM Thermal overload protection ✓

27 / 59 VtpPhsPTOVx/ V<> Over- /Undervoltage Protection ✓

81 FrqPTOFx/ f<> Over- /Underfrequency protection ✓

50BF RBRFx CBF_1 Circuit breaker failure protection, two independent ✓

XCBRx CBM_1 Circuit breaker supervision, two independent functions for ✓

LIMIT Limit value monitoring ✓

P638/EN M/R-b5-C // P638‑304‑661 1-3

Protection functions P638